October 17, 2016

Revision 6

imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C9280 PRO/C9270 PRO/C7270/C7260 Series
Service Manual
Product Overview
Technology
Periodic service
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation Appendix
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the inconsistent with local law.
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality. Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections of the individual companies.
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
edition of this manual. consent of Canon Inc.

Copyright CANON INC. 2015

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name
Check. Remove the claw.
accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric
signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Check visually. Insert the claw. front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.

2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
Check the noise. Use the bundled part.
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
Disconnect the connector. Push the part. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked
in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
Connect the connector. Plug the power cable.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product

Remove the cable/wire

improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
from the cable guide or wire Turn on the power. Service Information bulletins.
saddle. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
Set the cable/wire to the in the machine.
cable guide or wire saddle.

Remove the screw.

Tighten the screw.

 Contents
0 Safety Precautions Productivity (print speed)--------------------------------------------------------1-12
Paper type---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-2 Pickup-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-2
Name of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-17
Turn power switch ON--------------------------------------------------------0-3 External View-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-17
Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-3 Outer Covers---------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-17
About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-3 Switches, I/F, others-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-19
Toner on Clothing or Skin--------------------------------------------------------- 0-3 Sectional View----------------------------------------------------------------------1-19
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery---------------------------------0-4 Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------1-20
Notes Before it Works Serving----------------------------------------------0-4 Power Supply Switches-------------------------------------------------------------------1-20
Points to Note at Cleaning---------------------------------------------------0-4 Control Panel--------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-21

1 Product Overview 2 Technology

Product lineups-----------------------------------------------------------------1-2 Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
Main unit------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-2 Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2
Pickup/delivery options------------------------------------------------------------ 1-2 Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
Applicable options for each model------------------------------------------------------ 1-2 Basic sequence at power ON------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3
Compulsory options and conditions----------------------------------------------------- 1-3 Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1
Scanning options-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 sheet)>----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4
Compulsory options and conditions----------------------------------------------------- 1-4 Basic sequence at power ON <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided
Expanded-feature options-------------------------------------------------------- 1-5 (1 sheet)>-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
Compulsory options and conditions----------------------------------------------------- 1-5 Controller System--------------------------------------------------------------2-6
Features--------------------------------------------------------------------------1-7 Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-6
Product features--------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
Features on service work--------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 Specifications/configuration--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
New Service Mode-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 HDD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-10
Improvement on operability for version upgrading---------------------------------- 1-7 Boot sequence------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-10
Display specifications of Jam/Error codes-------------------------------------------- 1-8 Shutdown sequence----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
Improvement of serviceability------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Specifications----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Specifications of main unit-------------------------------------------------------1-10 Image Processing Control----------------------------------------------------------------2-12
Power supply specifications----------------------------------------------------- 1-11 Backup Battery------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-13
Weight - size------------------------------------------------------------------------1-12 Power-saving function---------------------------------------------------------------------2-14
 Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)--------2-14 Drive Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-79
High capacity HDD (Option)-------------------------------------------------------------2-23 Printing Process-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-82
HDD mirroring feature (option)----------------------------------------------------------2-24 Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-83
Removable HDD (option)-----------------------------------------------------------------2-28 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-83
Service Operations----------------------------------------------------------------2-29 Process Unit (Bk)---------------------------------------------------------------------------2-85
HDD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-29 Process Unit (CL)---------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94
Main Controller PCB 1--------------------------------------------------------------------2-31 Transfer Assembly--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-98
Main Controller PCB 2--------------------------------------------------------------------2-32 Toner Supply Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-106
DCM----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-34 Waste Toner Feed Assembly---------------------------------------------------------- 2-109
DCM-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-34 Image Stabilization Control------------------------------------------------------------ 2-110
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-34 Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-134
Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM-------------------2-39 Periodically Replaced Parts------------------------------------------------------------ 2-134
Import/export by service mode (external)--------------------------------------------2-49 Consumable Parts------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-134
Import/export by service mode (internal)---------------------------------------------2-55 Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-135
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-60 When Replacing Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-136
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Major Adjustments------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-136
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-137
Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-62 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-137
Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-62 Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-137
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Specifications------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-137
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Parts Configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-138
Laser ON Timing Control-----------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Drive Configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-139
Laser Beam Intensity Control------------------------------------------------------------2-66 Controls---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-141
Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction-----------------------------------2-67 Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-141
Duplex print magnification correction--------------------------------------------------2-68 Heat Control-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-142
Laser Scanner Motor Control------------------------------------------------------------2-69 Temperature Control--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-142
Laser Shutter Control----------------------------------------------------------------------2-70 Temperature control flying start------------------------------------------------------- 2-144
Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-71 Paper interval control-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-145
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-71 Fixing Film engagement/disengagement control--------------------------------- 2-145
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-71 Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control----------------------------------------- 2-145
Periodical Servicing List------------------------------------------------------------------2-71 Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement and web feed controls-2-147
When Replacing Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------2-71 Reciprocation control-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-148
Major Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-71 Extra-large paper productivity up sequence--------------------------------------- 2-148
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-72 Fixing cleaning control------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-148
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-72 Paper dust removal control------------------------------------------------------------ 2-149
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-72 Mixed media/width control-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-149
Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-72 Down sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-151
Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-77 Fixing Internal Fan control-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-153
 Fixing control when feeding envelope----------------------------------------------- 2-156 Registration Noise Reduction Control----------------------------------------------- 2-186
Paper Wrapping Prevention Control------------------------------------------------- 2-156 Transparency detection----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-187
Heat Film Unit pressure/semi-pressure/disengagement control-------------- 2-157 Delivery Unit----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-188
Protection function----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-158 Basic movement-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-188
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-160 Delivery Speed Reduction Control--------------------------------------------------- 2-188
Periodically Replaced Parts------------------------------------------------------------ 2-160 Reverse Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-189
Consumable Parts------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-160 Basic Movement-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-189
Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-160 Reverse Flapper Movement----------------------------------------------------------- 2-190
When Replacing Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-160 Reverse Detachment Control---------------------------------------------------------- 2-190
Major Adjustments------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-161 Duplex Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-191
Service Note------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-161 Basic Movement-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-191
Pickup / Feed System----------------------------------------------------- 2-162 Duplex Flapper Movement------------------------------------------------------------- 2-192
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-162 Duplex Reverse Control---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-193
Specifications------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-163 Circulation quantity and limit----------------------------------------------------------- 2-194
Parts configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-164 Jam Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-196
Drive Configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-167 Jam Code List----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-196
Paper path---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-168 Forced Paper Feed Control------------------------------------------------------------ 2-198
Interval speed------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-169 Service Work---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-199
Various types of control----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-173 Measurement during Parts Replacement------------------------------------------ 2-199
Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit---------------------------------------------------- 2-174 Periodic Service--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-199
Basic Movement-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-174 External and Controls----------------------------------------------------- 2-200
Pickup Preceding Control (Left Deck, Cassette 3/4, Controls---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-200
Multi-drawer Paper Deck)-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-175 Counter Control--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-200
Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck, Fan------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-204
POD Deck Lite)---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-175 Power Control Function----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-207
Deck/Cassette detection---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-176 Protective Function----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-208
Paper Size Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-177 Service Works (External Auxiliary System)-------------------------------- 2-209
Paper Level Detection------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-179 Periodically replaced parts------------------------------------------------------------- 2-209
Paper Detection--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-181 Durable parts------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-209
Lifter Control------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182 Periodical services----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-209
Pickup Retry Control--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-183 When replacing parts-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-209
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit----------------------------------------------- 2-184 MEAP------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-210
Basic Movement-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-184
Changes---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-210
Paper Size Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-184
LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)--------------------------- 2-210
Paper Detection--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-185
Integrated Authentication Disabling Setting Screen----------------------------- 2-211
Last Paper Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-185
Preparation for Using SSO-H------------------------------------------------- 2-211
Registration Unit----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-186
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-211
Registration Control---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-186
Server authentication management-------------------------------------------------- 2-211
 PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users------------------ 2-212 Checking the System Information---------------------------------------------------- 2-256
Preparation for Using SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-213 Display of System Information Details---------------------------------------------- 2-257
Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS---------------------------------------------- 2-213 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application------------------------ 2-257
Settings on the Device Side----------------------------------------------------------- 2-214 Content of MEAP system information----------------------------------------------- 2-258
How to Check the Serial Number----------------------------------------------------- 2-221 MEAP Application Information------------------------------------------------ 2-258
Login to SMS---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-221 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-258
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-221 Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information----------------------------- 2-258
Installing an MEAP Application----------------------------------------------- 2-223 Check License-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-259
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-223 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-259
Procedure to install applications------------------------------------------------------ 2-224 Procedure to Check the License File------------------------------------------------ 2-259
Resource Information-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-226 Changing SMS Login Password--------------------------------------------- 2-260
MEAP Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 2-227 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-260
What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?-------------------------- 2-227 Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password--------------------------------- 2-260
MEAP Application Management--------------------------------------------- 2-229 MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-229 Management---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-260
Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application---------------------- 2-229 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-260
Managing the License File------------------------------------------------------------- 2-231 Advantages Obtained When Using the Services--------------------------------- 2-261
Other License File Management Functions---------------------------------------- 2-236 MEAP Application Setting Information Management---------------------------- 2-261
Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-238 MEAP Application Log Management------------------------------------------------ 2-262
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-238 Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-263
About Login Service--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-238 Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using
Default Authentication overview------------------------------------------------------ 2-238 SST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-263
SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview------------------------------------------------ 2-238 Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST------------ 2-264
Local device authentication------------------------------------------------------------ 2-243 Procedures to Restore Backup Data------------------------------------------------ 2-266
Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)------------------------- 2-244 Formatting and Replacing the HDD----------------------------------------- 2-267
Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)------------------------------------- 2-246 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-267
Server authentication and local device authentication-------------------------- 2-247 MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)------------------------------------------------------------- 2-269
Steps to Change Login Services----------------------------------------------------- 2-247 Collection of MEAP Console Logs--------------------------------------------------- 2-271
Login Service Installation Procedure------------------------------------------------ 2-248 Using USB Devices---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-276
Login Service Uninstallation Procedure--------------------------------------------- 2-249 Integrated Authentication Function--------------------------------------------------- 2-281
System Application Management-------------------------------------------- 2-250 Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power]
Password authentication---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-250 Setting--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-283
RLS Authentication----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-251 Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be
Setting the method to login to SMS----------------------------------------- 2-253 Logged in----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-284
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-253 Reference material-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-287
Initial Display Languages of SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-256 Glossary------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-287
MEAP Application System Information------------------------------------- 2-256 Option for exclusive individual measure----------------------------------- 2-289
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-256 Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)------------------------------------------------ 2-289
 Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)-- System Management Operations-------------------------------------------- 2-327
2-290 Various Setting---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-327
Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-292 Displaying Logs--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-329
Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-292 Communication Test--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-332
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-292 Maintenance----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-334
Features and benefits------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-292 Upgrading Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-334
Major Functions--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-292 Formatting Hard Disk-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-334
Limitations------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-293 How to Replace Controller Boards--------------------------------------------------- 2-334
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function--------------------------------------- 2-293 How to Replace Devices---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-334
Service cautions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-294 FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-335
E-RDS Setup---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-295 FAQ on Installing Firmware------------------------------------------------------------ 2-335
Confirmation and preparation in advance------------------------------------------ 2-295 FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment---------------------------------- 2-336
Steps to E-RDS settings---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-296 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option---------------------------- 2-337
Steps to Service Call button settings------------------------------------------------ 2-298 FAQ on General Matters of Updater------------------------------------------------- 2-337
Steps to Service Browser settings--------------------------------------------------- 2-302
Initializing E-RDS settings-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-303 3 Periodic service
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-303 Replacement of consumables----------------------------------------------3-2
Troubleshooting------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-305 IR-ADV C9280 PRO / C7280i / C9270 PRO(200V) / C7270(200V) /
Error code and strings---------------------------------------------------------- 2-309 C7270i Series------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-312 IR-ADV C9270 PRO(100V) / C7270(100V,120V) / C7260 / C7260i
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-312 Series---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-2
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-312 Periodically replaced parts---------------------------------------------------3-2
Installing MEAP Application/System Option------------------------------- 2-314 Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-2
System Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-315 Consumable parts-------------------------------------------------------------3-3
List of Functions--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-315 Host machine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-3
Distribution Flow-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-316
Options-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
Limitations and Cautions------------------------------------------------------- 2-317 Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1--------------------------------------------------- 3-4
Limitations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-317 Paper Deck Unit-C1------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
Cautions------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-317 POD Deck Lite-A1--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-319 Multi Deck-A1--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
Overview of Preparation---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-319 Staple Finisher-L1--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-4
Setting Sales Company’s HQ---------------------------------------------------------- 2-319
Periodical maintenance-------------------------------------------------------3-5
Network Settings-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-320
Printer engine------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3-5
Enabling UGW Link---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-323
Reader--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode------------------------------- 2-324
ADF------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3-5
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode------------------- 2-324
Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)---------------- 2-325
Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode----------------------------- 2-325
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning
List of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-2 Removing the DC Controller PCB------------------------------------------- 4-109
List of External / Internal Cover------------------------------------------------- 4-2 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-109
List of Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-109
List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning--- Removing the Laser Interface PCB----------------------------------------- 4-110
4-12 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-110
List of Clutch / Solenoid----------------------------------------------------------4-24 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-110
List of Motor-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-26 Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB---------------------------------------- 4-112
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-112
List of Fan----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-112
List of Sensor-----------------------------------------------------------------------4-39
Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit---------------------- 4-113
Lamp / Heater, others-------------------------------------------------------------4-48
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-113
List of Switch------------------------------------------------------------------------4-52
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-113
List of PCB---------------------------------------------------------------------------4-55
Removing the Main Power Supply Box------------------------------------ 4-114
List of Connectors-----------------------------------------------------------------4-66
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-114
Main Controller System----------------------------------------------------- 4-95 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-114
Removing the Flat Control Panel----------------------------------------------4-95 Removing the AC Driver Box------------------------------------------------- 4-115
Preparation (Copier Model)--------------------------------------------------------------4-95 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-115
Procedure (Copier Model)----------------------------------------------------------------4-95 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-115
Preparation (Printer Model)--------------------------------------------------------------4-97 Installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-116
Procedure (Printer Model)----------------------------------------------------------------4-97
Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box--------------------------------- 4-118
Removing the Upright Control Panel---------------------------------------- 4-100 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-118
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-100 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-118
Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit--------------------------- 4-102 Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box-------------- 4-118
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-102 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-118
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-102 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-118
Removing the HDD-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-103 Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit-------- 4-120
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-103 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-120
Removing the Main Controller PCB 1-------------------------------------- 4-104 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-120
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-104 Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit------------------------------ 4-121
Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-104 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-121
Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-106 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-121
Removing the Main Controller PCB 2-------------------------------------- 4-107 Removing the Environment Sensor----------------------------------------- 4-121
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-107 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-121
Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-107 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-121
Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-107
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB----------------- 4-122
Open the Controller Box------------------------------------------------------- 4-108 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-122
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-108 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-122
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-108
Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage
 PCB--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-123 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-137
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-123 Storing the ITB Unit------------------------------------------------------------- 4-139
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-123 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-139
Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB------------------------------------- 4-124 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit------------------------------------ 4-140
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-124 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-140
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-124 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-140
Removing the Primary Transfer PCB--------------------------------------- 4-125 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade------------------------------------------ 4-142
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-125 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-142
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-125 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-142
Laser Exposure System-------------------------------------------------- 4-126 After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit----------------------------- 4-144
Cleaning the Dustproof Glass------------------------------------------------ 4-126 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-144
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-126 Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-145
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-126 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-145
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit------------------------------------------- 4-127 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-145
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-127 Removing the ITB---------------------------------------------------------------- 4-147
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-128 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-147
When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit---------------------------------- 4-130 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-147
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-130 Installing the ITB----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-152
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-130 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-152
Image Formation System------------------------------------------------ 4-131 Cleaning when replacing the ITB-------------------------------------------- 4-156
Open the Process Unit Inner Cover.---------------------------------------- 4-131 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-156
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-131 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-156
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-131 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller------------------------------------- 4-157
Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover-------------------------------------- 4-132 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-157
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-132 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-157
Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit--------------------- 4-133 When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller----------------------------- 4-159
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-133 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-159
Pulling out the ITB Unit--------------------------------------------------------- 4-134 Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller-------------------------- 4-159
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-134 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-159
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-134 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-159
Removing the ITB Unit--------------------------------------------------------- 4-136 Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder----------------------------------- 4-161
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-136 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-161
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-136 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-161
Removing the ITB Frame------------------------------------------------------ 4-137 Cleaning the ITB Inner Scraper---------------------------------------------- 4-162
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-137 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-162
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-137 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-162
Installing the ITB Unit----------------------------------------------------------- 4-137 Removing the Drum Heater Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-162
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-162
 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-162 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-177
Removing the ITB Motor------------------------------------------------------- 4-163 Removing the Drum Thermistor---------------------------------------------- 4-181
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-163 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-181
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-163 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-181
Removing the Patch Sensor Unit-------------------------------------------- 4-164 Removing the Developing Assembly
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-164 Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk)--------------- 4-182
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-164 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-182
When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit------------------------------------ 4-166 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-182
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-166 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly------------------------------- 4-184
Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-167 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-184
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-167 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-184
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-167 When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly----------------------- 4-185
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit--------------------------- 4-168 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-185
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-168 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit-------------- 4-187
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-168 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-187
Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator------------------- 4-169 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-187
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-169 Removing the Grid Plate------------------------------------------------------- 4-189
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-169 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-189
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller------------------------- 4-170 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-189
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-170 When Replacing the Grid Plate---------------------------------------------- 4-192
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-170 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-192
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Unit--------------- 4-172 Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad-------------------------------------------- 4-192
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-172 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-192
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-172 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-192
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit----------------------------- 4-172 Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder--------- 4-194
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-172 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-194
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-172 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-194
Removing the Primary Charging Rail--------------------------------------- 4-173 Removing the Primary Charging Wire
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-173 Cleaning Pad Slider------------------------------------------------------------- 4-195
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-173 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-195
Removing the Drum Thermopile--------------------------------------------- 4-175 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-195
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-175 Replacing the Primary Charging Wire-------------------------------------- 4-196
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-175 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-196
Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-196
(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB)--------------- 4-176 Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-197
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-176 Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly--------------------------------- 4-199
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-176 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-199
When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB-- 4-177 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-199
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire----------------------------- 4-200 the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear)--------------------------------------------------- 4-219
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-200 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-219
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit-------------------------------- 4-200 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-219
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-200 Removing the Drum (Bk)------------------------------------------------------- 4-221
Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-200 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-221
Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-202 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-221
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit----------------------- 4-203 Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk)----------------------------------------- 4-224
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-203 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-224
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly-------------------------- 4-203 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-224
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-203 When Replacing the Drum (Bk)---------------------------------------------- 4-225
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-203 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-225
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly----------------- 4-204 Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk)------------------- 4-225
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-204 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-225
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-225
Shutter Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-205 Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-205 the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk)------------------------------------------------------- 4-227
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-205 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-227
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-227
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider------------------------ 4-207 Removing the Drum Fur Brush----------------------------------------------- 4-229
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-207 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-229
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-207 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-229
Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire--------------------------------- 4-210 Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk)--------------------------------- 4-232
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-210 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-232
Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-210 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-232
Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-210 Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk)----------------------------------- 4-234
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly--------------------------- 4-212 Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)------------------------------------- 4-234
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-212 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-236
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-212 When Replacement the Developing Assembly--------------------------- 4-237
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire------------------------ 4-213 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-237
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-213 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/
Removing the Drum Unit (Bk)------------------------------------------------ 4-214 Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk)----------------------- 4-238
Preparation: Removing the Toner Container Manually-------------------------- 4-214 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-238
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-214 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-238
Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit------------------------------------------ 4-218 Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------------ 4-239
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-218 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-239
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-218 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-239
Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)----------------------------------------------- 4-242 Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-271
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-242 Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk)--------------------------------- 4-275
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-242 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-275
Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-275
and Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-244 Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------ 4-276
Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------ 4-247 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-276
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-247 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-277
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-247 Removing the Waste Toner Container-------------------------------------- 4-277
When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------- 4-248 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-277
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-248 Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Cleaning the Developing Assembly Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed)--------------------------- 4-278
Toner Blocking Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)-------------------------------------------- 4-249 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-278
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-249 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-279
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-249 Fixing System--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-285
Removing the Toner Container Manually---------------------------------- 4-249 Removing the Fixing Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-285
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-249 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-285
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-249 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-285
Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk)--------------------------------------------- 4-252 Removing the Fixing Web Unit----------------------------------------------- 4-287
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-252 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-287
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-252 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-287
Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------------- 4-253 Replacing the Fixing Web----------------------------------------------------- 4-288
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-253 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-288
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-253 Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-288
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk)----------------------------------------- 4-254 Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-290
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-254 Removing the Fixing Web Roller--------------------------------------------- 4-292
Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-255 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-292
Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-255 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-292
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)-------------------------------- 4-257 Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit----------------------------------- 4-293
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-257 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-293
Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-257 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-293
Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-260 Removing the Fixing IH Unit-------------------------------------------------- 4-296
Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk)---------------------------------------------- 4-261 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-296
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-261 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-296
Disassembling Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-262 Removing the Fixing Film Unit------------------------------------------------ 4-300
Assembling Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-265 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-300
Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)------------------------------------- 4-267 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-300
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-267 Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit--------------------------------- 4-301
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-267 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-301
 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-301 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-318
Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing--------------------- 4-302 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-318
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-302 Removing the Cassette 3------------------------------------------------------ 4-319
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-302 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-319
Removing the Fixing Thermistor--------------------------------------------- 4-303 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-319
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-303 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller--------- 4-320
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-303 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-320
Removing the Fixing Motor---------------------------------------------------- 4-305 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-320
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-305 Removing the Cassette 4------------------------------------------------------ 4-322
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-305 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-322
Cleaning the Fixing Unit-------------------------------------------------------- 4-306 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-322
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-306 Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller--------- 4-323
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-306 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-323
Pickup Feed System------------------------------------------------------ 4-309 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-323
Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.------------------------------------------------- 4-309 Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit--------------------------- 4-325
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-309 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-325
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-309 Removing the Vertical Path Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-326
Removing the Fixing Feed Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-310 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-326
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-310 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-326
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-310 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4 Pickup Unit, and
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller----------------------------------- 4-312 Right Deck Pickup Unit--------------------------------------------------------- 4-326
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-312 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-326
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller------------------- 4-313 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-326
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-313 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni---------------------------------------- 4-327
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-313 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-327
Removing the Right Deck------------------------------------------------------ 4-314 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-327
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-314 Removing the Cassette Heater Unit---------------------------------------- 4-329
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-314 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-329
Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/Right Deck Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-329
Separation Roller---------------------------------------------------------------- 4-315 Removing the Delivery Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-330
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-315 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-330
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-315 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-330
Removing the Left Deck-------------------------------------------------------- 4-317 Removing the Reverse Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-331
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-317 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-331
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-317 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-331
Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/Left Deck Separation Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit------------------------------------ 4-332
Roller-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-318 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-332
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-332
 Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor and the Pre-fixing Feed Removing the Box Left Cover------------------------------------------------ 4-343
Belt---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-333 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-343
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-333 Removing the Box Upper Cover--------------------------------------------- 4-343
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-333 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-343
Removing the Registration Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-334 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-343
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-334 Removing the Upper Left Cover--------------------------------------------- 4-344
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-334 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-344
Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/ Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-344
Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor - ----------------------------- 4-335 Removing the Left Middle Cover--------------------------------------------- 4-345
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-335 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-345
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-335 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-345
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit------------------------------ 4-336 Removing the Lower Left Cover 3------------------------------------------- 4-345
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-336 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-345
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-336 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-345
Removing the Cassette 3 and 4 Paper Level Detection Units------- 4-337 Removing the Lower Rear Cover-------------------------------------------- 4-346
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-337 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-346
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-337 Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone Filter----------- 4-347
Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit----------------- 4-337 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-347
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-337 Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter----------------------- 4-349
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-337 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-349
Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit------------------- 4-338 Options----------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-350
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-338 Removing the DADF Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-350
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-338 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-350
External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 4-339 Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit---------------------------------- 4-352
Removing the Upper Front Cover------------------------------------------- 4-339 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-352
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-339 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-352
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-339 Removing the the Printer Cover---------------------------------------------- 4-359
Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover------ 4-339 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-359
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-339 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-359
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-339 Removing the Buffer Path Unit----------------------------------------------- 4-361
Removing the Upper Right Cover 1----------------------------------------- 4-341 Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-361
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-341 Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-361
Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover--------------------------------------- 4-341
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-341 5 Adjustment
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-341 Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2
Removing the Box Right Cover---------------------------------------------- 4-342 When replacing parts---------------------------------------------------------5-2
Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-342 Main Controller---------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2
 Main controller PCB 1---------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-4 MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)----------------------------------------------------- 6-5
Main controller PCB 2---------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-4 64-Gradation (TYPE=12)------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-6
DC controller PCB--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)----------------------------------------------------- 6-6
TPM PCB-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Image Faults--------------------------------------------------------------------6-7
Laser Exposure System----------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Developing Sleeve Ghost -------------------------------------------------------- 6-7
Laser Scanner Unit-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5 Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due to the soiled Charging
Image Formation System--------------------------------------------------------- 5-6 Roller----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-8
Primary Charging Wire--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6 Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly------------------------------------- 6-9
Grid Plate-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6 Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side of coated paper-6-10
Primary Charging Assembly-------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Calibration for color difference on front and back sides------------------ 6-11
Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Wire--------------------------------------------------- 5-7
Vertical Lines------------------------------------------------------------------------6-13
Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Assembly--------------------------------------------- 5-7
Drum Unit-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-7
Error Code--------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-14
E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw of color
Developing Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-8
Potential Sensor----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-8 Developing Assembly and coupling of main body-------------------------6-14
ITB Cleaning Blade Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-11 Alarm Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-15
ITB----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-13 How to clear 04-3042, 04-3142 and 04-3242:------------------------------6-15
Primary Transfer Roller-------------------------------------------------------------------5-13 How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:------------------------------6-15
Patch Sensor Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------5-13 Startup System Failure Diagnosis--------------------------------------- 6-16
Fixing System-----------------------------------------------------------------------5-14 The viewpoint of this Startup System Failure Diagnosis-----------------6-16
Fixing assembly-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5-14 Useful Operations--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-16
Fixing Film Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-14 Startup Failure Analysis Policy-------------------------------------------------6-17
Fixing Pressure Roller Unit---------------------------------------------------------------5-14 Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure---------------6-18
Fixing Heat Soaking Roller---------------------------------------------------------------5-14 Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-18
Fixing Web Unit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------5-14 Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow--------------------------------------6-20
When clearing RAM--------------------------------------------------------- 5-15 Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow---------------------------------------6-22
DC controller PCB-----------------------------------------------------------------5-15 Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-22
Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow---------------------6-24
6 Troubleshooting Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-24
Making Initial Checks---------------------------------------------------------6-2 Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow------------------------------------6-27
List of Initial Check Items--------------------------------------------------------- 6-2 Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-27
Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-3 Flow for narrowing down troubles------------------------------------------------------6-27
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-3 Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow--------------------------------------6-30
Selecting Test Print TYPE-------------------------------------------------------- 6-3 Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-30
How to check test print------------------------------------------------------------ 6-4 Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight------6-31
16-Gradation (TYPE=4)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4 Flow F: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis----------6-32
Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)------------------------------------------------------------ 6-4 Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-32
Grid (TYPE=6)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-5 Check item-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-32
 Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis--- Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-54
6-33 Overflow---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-54
Controller Self Diagnosis--------------------------------------------------- 6-34 USB Network Packet File Collection------------------------------------------6-55
Introduction--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-34 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-55
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool-----------------------------------------------6-34 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-55
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-34 Overall flow-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-55
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool-----------------------------------------------6-34 Version upgrade-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-57
Layout Drawing------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-35 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-57
Basic Flowchart--------------------------------------------------------------------6-36 Overview of Version Upgrade-----------------------------------------------------------6-57
Basic Check Items--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-36 Writing System Software------------------------------------------------------------------6-58
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-36 Download Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-59
Controller System Error Diagnosis-----------------------------------------------------6-36 System Software Components----------------------------------------------------------6-60
Note on Download Process--------------------------------------------------------------6-62
Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs------------------------ 6-41
Version Upgrade via SST--------------------------------------------------------6-63
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-41
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-63
Location of LEDs---------------------------------------------------------------------------6-41
Copying System Software----------------------------------------------------------------6-64
Preconditions--------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-41
Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-65
Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2 -------------6-41
Downloading System Software (Assist mode)--------------------------------------6-67
Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1------------------6-42
Downloading System Software (Single mode)--------------------------------------6-68
Debug log---------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-43
Formatting HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-71
Scope of Application--------------------------------------------------------------6-43
Backup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-75
Purpose --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-43
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device-------------------6-79
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-43
Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device--6-79
Function Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------6-43
Copying System Software----------------------------------------------------------------6-80
Description of Log to be Collected ----------------------------------------------------6-44
Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-83
Collecting System Information--------------------------------------------------6-44
Upgrading System Software-------------------------------------------------------------6-84
Collection Destination --------------------------------------------------------------------6-44
Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)-------------------------------6-86
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)---------------------------------------6-44
Downloading System Software (Confirmation)--------------------------------------6-87
Uploading Data by SST-------------------------------------------------------------------6-45
Downloading System Software (Overwriting)---------------------------------------6-89
Preconditions: - -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-45
Formatting HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-90
When to Obtain Logs-------------------------------------------------------------6-48 Backup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-92
Network Packet Capture--------------------------------------------------- 6-49 Clearing Download File-------------------------------------------------------------------6-92
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-49 Download Menu 2--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-92
Overall flow-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-49 Other Menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-93
Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection------------------------------------6-49 Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------6-93
Other functions------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-52 Error Code: E753-0001-------------------------------------------------------------------6-93
SST Network Packet File Collection------------------------------------------6-54 Version Upgrade via CDS-------------------------------------------------------6-94
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-54 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-94
 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-95 E602----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-102
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)------------------ 6-100 E604 to E753------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-119
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)----------------------- 6-100 E804 to E991------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-126
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)---- 6-103 Jam Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-130
Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule------------------------------------------- 6-109 Jam Type--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-130
Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)-------------------------- 6-110 Jam screen display specification--------------------------------------------- 7-130
Deleting Downloaded Firmware------------------------------------------------------ 6-111 Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-131
Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation------------------------------------------ 6-112
Duplex Color Image Reader-F1---------------------------------------------- 7-134
Information required for Reports------------------------------------------------------ 6-113
Paper Deck Unit – C1----------------------------------------------------------- 7-135
Debug Logs-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-114
POD Deck Light – A1----------------------------------------------------------- 7-135
Error Messages--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-115
Multi-drawer Paper Deck – A1------------------------------------------------ 7-136
Error Code---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-121
How to read an error code------------------------------------------------------------- 6-121 Buffer Path Unit - J1------------------------------------------------------------- 7-137
List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed----------------------------------------- 6-122 Insertion Unit -H1---------------------------------------------------------------- 7-138
Error Code---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-126 Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1----
Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function----------------------------- 6-138 7-139
Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them--- 6-139 Insertion Unit -J1----------------------------------------------------------------- 7-140
Paper Folding Unit - G1-------------------------------------------------------- 7-141
7 Error Code Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1-------------------------------------------- 7-142
Over View------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2 External Hole Puncher - A1--------------------------------------------------- 7-143
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2 Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1------------------------------------ 7-144
Outline------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2 Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1------------------------------------- 7-145
Location Code-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2 Alarm Code------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-146
Pickup position code------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2 Alarm Code Details-------------------------------------------------------------- 7-146
Pickup size------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON----------------------------------------------- 7-3 8 Service Mode
Points to Note When Clearing HDD---------------------------------------------------- 7-3
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Measures for E747-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3
Entering Service Mode------------------------------------------------------------ 8-2
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
Points to note when using Service Mode------------------------------------- 8-2
Error Code Details------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-4
Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------- 8-2
E000 to E015--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-4
Service mode item explanations------------------------------------------------ 8-3
E020-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-19
E021 to E077--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-35 I/O information enhancement---------------------------------------------------- 8-3
E100 to E197--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-55 Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description------------------------------ 8-4
E202 to E280--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-62 COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation-------------------------- 8-4
E301 to E490--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-66 Security features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5
E500 to E551--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-70 Related service modes--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5
E562 to E5F9--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-82 Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)--------------------------------------------- 8-6
 Language switch-------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-6 DENS---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-129
Back-up of service mode---------------------------------------------------------- 8-7 BLANK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-136
COPIER--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-8 V-CONT------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-137
DISPLAY------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-8 PASCAL------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-142
VERSION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-8 COLOR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-143
USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31 HV-PRI-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-149
ACC-STS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31 HV-TR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-152
ANALOG--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33 FEED-ADJ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-172
CST-STS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-34 CST-ADJ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-179
HV-STS----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-35 MISC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-182
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-38 EXP-LED------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-184
DPOT------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-41 FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-186
DENS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-44 INSTALL------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-186
FIXING----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-49 CCD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-191
SENSOR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-54 LASER--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-193
MISC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-54 DPC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-193
HT-C-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55 CST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-196
I/O (I/O display mode)------------------------------------------------------------8-69 CLEANING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-197
Host Machine_DC Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P030/P051 to P056)------8-69 FIXING-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-198
Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)-----------------------8-82 PANEL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-199
Reader / ADF (R-CON>P001 to P006)------------------------------------------------8-83 PART-CHK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-199
ADF(FEEDER>P001 to P010)----------------------------------------------------------8-84 CLEAR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-201
Paper Deck Unit (DC-CON>P048 to P050)------------------------------------------8-85 MISC-R-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-204
POD Deck Lite (DC-CON>P054 to P057)--------------------------------------------8-86 MISC-P-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-207
Multi Deck Unit (DC-CON>P042 to P053)-------------------------------------------8-88 SYSTEM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-210
Buffer Path Unit (DC-CON>P026 to P029)------------------------------------------8-91 OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-212
Booklet Finisher K1/Staple Finisher K1 (SORTER>P001 to P024)------------8-93 FNC-SW------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-212
Trimmer A1 (SORTER>P024 to P028)------------------------------------------------8-99 DSPLY-SW--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-225
Paper Folding Unit G1 (SORTER>P028 to P037)------------------------------- 8-100 IMG-FIX------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-229
Inserter H1 (SORTER>P038 to P047)---------------------------------------------- 8-103 IMG-TR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-247
Puncher Unit BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1 (SORTER>P058 to P059)----------------- 8-105 IMG-DEV------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-249
Booklet Finisher L1/Staple Finisher L1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)---------- 8-106 IMG-LSR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-253
External Punch A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)---------------------- 8-112 IMG-RDR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-254
Inserter J1 / Paper Folding Inserter Unit G1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)---- 8-113 IMG-MCON--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-255
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-115 IMG-SPD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-260
ADJ-XY-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-115 CLEANING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-261
CCD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-116 ENV-SET------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-262
IMG-REG----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-126 FEED-SW----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-263
 NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-268 9 Installation
CUSTOM----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-275
USER---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-279 How to look at this Installation Procedure-------------------------------9-2
CST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-295 Description on the parts included in the package-------------------------- 9-2
ACC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-300 In the case of using the components------------------------------------------ 9-2
INT-FACE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-303 Symbol marks in the illustration------------------------------------------------- 9-2
LCNS-TR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-304 Checking Before Installation------------------------------------------------9-2
TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-314 Checking Power Supply----------------------------------------------------------- 9-2
PG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-314 Checking the Installation Environment---------------------------------------- 9-2
NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-316 Checking Installation Space------------------------------------------------------ 9-3
NET-CAP----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-317 Points to Note at Installation Work--------------------------------------------- 9-4
COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-318 Table of options combination----------------------------------------------------- 9-5
TOTAL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-318 Order to Install the Host Machine and the Options------------------------- 9-5
PICK-UP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-319
Types of the Accessory Box------------------------------------------------------ 9-6
FEEDER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-319
Checking the Contents-------------------------------------------------------9-7
JAM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-320
MISC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-321
Unpacking---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-12
Unpacking---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-12
JOB------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-322
PRDC-1------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-323 Installing the Upright Arm--------------------------------------------------------9-14
DRBL-1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-325 Installation--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-16
DRBL-2-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-331 Installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover-----------------------9-16
T-CNTR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-352 Installation of the Upright Control Panel-------------------------------------9-16
V-CNTR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-352 Installation of the Buffer Path Unit---------------------------------------------9-19
SORTER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-353 Unpacking------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-19
V2-CNTR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-358 Installation Procedure---------------------------------------------------------------------9-20
FIXING-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-359 Installation of the Pickup Assembly-------------------------------------------9-24
LF--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-360 Installation of the Process Unit-------------------------------------------------9-27
FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-361 Installation of the Black Developing Assembly-----------------------------9-33
DISPLAY--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-361 Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-362 Europe)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-39
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-364 Installation of the Noise Reduction Cover-----------------------------------9-41
SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-366 Securing the Host Machine------------------------------------------------------9-43
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-366 Other Installation Work-----------------------------------------------------------9-43
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-379 Preparation for the Main Power Connection--------------------------------9-44
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-381 Turning ON the Main Power----------------------------------------------------9-44
BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-385 Installation of the Toner Container---------------------------------------------9-44
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-385 Settings at Installation------------------------------------------------------------9-45
 Setting the Deck--------------------------------------------------------------------9-45 Installation procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-70
Setting the Paper Cassette------------------------------------------------------9-46 Utility Tray-A2----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-73
Auto Gradation Adjustment------------------------------------------------------9-47 Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-73
In the Case of the Machine with the Reader-----------------------------------------9-47 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-73
In the Case of the Machine without the Reader------------------------------------9-47 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-73
Image Position Adjustment------------------------------------------------------9-48 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-73
Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)-----------------------------------------------9-48 When installing the USB Keyboard--------------------------------------------9-75
Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray-------------------------------------9-52
Key Switch Unit-B1---------------------------------------------------------- 9-76
Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)----------------------------------------------9-53
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-76
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)-----------------------------------------9-53
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-76
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)----------------------------------------9-54
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-76
Checking the Network Connection--------------------------------------------9-54
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-76
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-54
Checking After Installation-------------------------------------------------------9-78
Checking the Network Connection-----------------------------------------------------9-54
Operation Procedure Using Ping-------------------------------------------------------9-55 Copy Card Reader-F1------------------------------------------------------ 9-79
Checking by the Remote Host Address-----------------------------------------------9-55 Points to Note Before Installation----------------------------------------------9-79
Network Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------9-55 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-79
Checking Connection of the Network Cable-----------------------------------------9-55 Copy Card Reader-F1---------------------------------------------------------------------9-79
Operation Procedure Using Ping-------------------------------------------------------9-55 Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2-----------------------------------------------------9-79
Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine-------------------------------9-55 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-80
Checking Network Function on the Main Controller-------------------------------9-56 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-80
Settings to enable "Access Management System" (North/Middle/South Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-80
America and Europe only)-------------------------------------------------------9-56 Setting After Installation----------------------------------------------------------9-88
When moving the host machine to another place after installation, Voice Opearion Kit-C2------------------------------------------------------ 9-89
execute the operation shown below.------------------------------------ 9-57 Points to Note Before Installation----------------------------------------------9-89
When moving the machine to another floor---------------------------------9-57 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-89
When moving the machine by truck-------------------------------------------9-59 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-90
Printer Cover-B1------------------------------------------------------------- 9-63 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-90
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-63 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-90
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-63 Checking After Installation-------------------------------------------------------9-96
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-63 Operation Check-------------------------------------------------------------------9-96
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-64 Voice Guidance Kit-F2------------------------------------------------------ 9-97
Operation Check-------------------------------------------------------------------9-69 Points to Note Before Installation----------------------------------------------9-97
Copy Tray-P1----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-70 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-97
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-70 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-97
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-70 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-98
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-70 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-98
 Checking After Installation ---------------------------------------------------- 9-104 Checking the Parts to be Installed------------------------------------------- 9-137
Operation Check----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-104 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-137
Additional Memory Type D (512MB)---------------------------------- 9-105 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-137
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-105 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-137
Points to Note Before Installation-------------------------------------------- 9-105 Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-138
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-105 Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-140
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-105 Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2,
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-105 Copy Control Interface Kit-A1------------------------------------------- 9-141
Checking After Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-107 Checking the Parts to be Installed------------------------------------------- 9-141
Reader Heater Unit-------------------------------------------------------- 9-108 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-141
Checking the Contents (Asia only)------------------------------------------ 9-108 Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2--------------------------------------------------------------- 9-141
Reader Heater Unit-G1----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-108 Copy Control Interface Kit-A1--------------------------------------------------------- 9-141
Checking the Parts to be Installed (Except for Asia)-------------------- 9-108 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-141
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-108 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-142
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-108 Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-142
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-108 Removing the Main Controller PCB 1----------------------------------------------- 9-142
Cassette Heater Unit-------------------------------------------------------9-113 Installing the Serial Interface Kit------------------------------------------------------ 9-143
Checking the Contents (EUR only)------------------------------------------ 9-113 Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-------------------------------------------- 9-145
Cassette Heater Unit-38---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-113 Installing the Main Controller PCB 1------------------------------------------------- 9-146
Checking the Parts to be Installed (AUS only)--------------------------- 9-113 USB Device Port-A2/A3,
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-113 Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3--------------------------------------- 9-147
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-113 Points to Note at Installation------------------------------------------------- 9-147
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-113 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-147
USB Device Port-A2/A3----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-147
Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1----------------------------------------------9-117
Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3----------------------------------------------------- 9-148
Checking Bundled Components--------------------------------------------- 9-117
Check Items when Turning OFF the Power------------------------------- 9-148
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-117
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-148
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-118
Installing the USB Device Port----------------------------------------------- 9-149
Paper Deck Heater Unit-------------------------------------------------- 9-125
Removing the Covers------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-149
Checking the Parts to be Installed------------------------------------------- 9-125
In case of Upright Control Panel model--------------------------------------------- 9-150
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-125
In case of Flat Control Panel model------------------------------------------------- 9-153
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-125 Installing the Covers--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-156
Paper Deck Warm Breeze Heater Unit------------------------------- 9-131 Installing the Card Reader----------------------------------------------------- 9-157
Checking the Parts to be Installed------------------------------------------- 9-131 Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer------------------------------------ 9-159
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-131 Operation Check (USB Device Port/Multimedia Reader/Writer)----- 9-162
Installing the Warm Breeze Heater Unit------------------------------------ 9-132 Combination of HDD Options------------------------------------------- 9-166
Document Scan Lock Kit-B1-------------------------------------------- 9-137 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export--------------------- 9-167
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)--------------------- 9-168 Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-202
Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings---------------------- 9-168 [TYPE-4]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-203
Backup of MEAP Application-------------------------------------------------- 9-168 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit----
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License 9-203
Files and Uninstallation--------------------------------------------------------- 9-168 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-203
User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON Option HDD (160GB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-203
H)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-169 HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-204
Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data------------ 9-169 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption &
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------- 9-170 Mirroring Kit only)---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-205
[TYPE-1]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-171 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-205
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-171 Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-205
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-171 Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-205
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-171 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD---------------------------------------- 9-208
Assembling the Option HDD----------------------------------------------------------- 9-171 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board------------------------------- 9-210
Procedure to Replace with the HDD------------------------------------------------- 9-172 Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-212
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-174 After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-214
Installing the System Software Using the SST------------------------------------ 9-214
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-174
Checking the Security Version-------------------------------------------------------- 9-215
[TYPE-2]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-175
Checking the Security Mark------------------------------------------------------------ 9-215
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-175
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-215
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-175
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-216
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-176
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work--------------- 9-216
Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-176
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment------------------------------------------- 9-216
Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit--------------------------------------- 9-179
Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine--
[TYPE-5]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-217
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit----
9-183
Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-185 9-217
[TYPE-3]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-188 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-217
2 Option HDDs (1TB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-217
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-188
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-218
Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-188
Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-188 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption &
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-189 Mirroring Kit only)---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-219
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-189 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-219
Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-189 Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-219
Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit--------------------------------------- 9-192 Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-219
Assembling the Option HDD----------------------------------------------------------- 9-196 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD---------------------------------------- 9-222
Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-199 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board------------------------------- 9-224
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-201 Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-226
 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-228 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-254
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-229 Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-255
Checking the Security Version-------------------------------------------------------- 9-229 Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-255
Checking the Security Mark------------------------------------------------------------ 9-229 Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-255
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-229 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-256
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (only Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-256
when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been installed)----- 9-230 [TYPE-8]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-257
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-230 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit----
[TYPE-6]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-231 9-257
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit---- Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-257
9-231 Option HDD (160GB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-257
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-231 Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-258
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-232 HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-259
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-232 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption &
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-233 Mirroring Kit only)---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-260
Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-233 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-260
Installing the Encryption Board-------------------------------------------------------- 9-236 Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-260
Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-238 Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-260
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-240 Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit--------------------------------------- 9-263
Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-241 Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine
Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-241 (the First HDD)---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-267
Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-241 Assembling the Option HDD (the Second HDD)--------------------------------- 9-270
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-242 Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board------------------------------- 9-272
Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-275
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-242
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-278
[TYPE-7]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-243
Installing the System Software Using the SST------------------------------------ 9-278
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit----
Checking the Security Version-------------------------------------------------------- 9-278
9-243
Checking the Security Mark------------------------------------------------------------ 9-278
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-243
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-279
Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-243
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-279
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-244
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work--------------- 9-279
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-245
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment------------------------------------------- 9-279
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-245
[TYPE-9]---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-280
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-245
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit----
Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-245
9-280
Assembling and Installing the Option HDD---------------------------------------- 9-248
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-280
Installing the Encryption Board-------------------------------------------------------- 9-250
2 Option HDDs (1TB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-280
Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-252
 Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-281 Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-319
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-282 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-319
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power (HDD Data Encryption & Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-319
Mirroring Kit only)---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-283 [TYPE-11]-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-320
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-283 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit----
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-283 9-320
Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-283 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-320
Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit--------------------------------------- 9-286 Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-320
Assembling the Option HDD----------------------------------------------------------- 9-290 Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-321
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board------------------------------- 9-292 HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-322
Installing the Removable HDD Unit-------------------------------------------------- 9-295 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-323
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-298 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-323
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-298 Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-323
Checking the Security Version-------------------------------------------------------- 9-298 Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-323
Checking the Security Mark------------------------------------------------------------ 9-298 Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit--------------------------------------- 9-326
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-299 Assembling the Option HDD----------------------------------------------------------- 9-330
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (only Installing the Encryption Board-------------------------------------------------------- 9-333
when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been installed)----- 9-299 Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-335
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-299 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-338
[TYPE-10]-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-300 Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-339
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit---- Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-339
9-300 Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-339
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-300 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-340
Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-300 Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-340
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-301
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-302 Appendix
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-302
Service Tools------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-2
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-303 Special Tools------------------------------------------------------------------------10-2
Removing the HDD Unit---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-303
Solvents and Oils------------------------------------------------------------------10-4
Changing Configuration inside of HDD Unit--------------------------------------- 9-306
General Timing Chart------------------------------------------------------- 10-5
Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine--
Basic sequence at power ON---------------------------------------------------10-5
9-310
Installing the Encryption Board-------------------------------------------------------- 9-312
Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided
Installing the HDD Unit------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-315 (1 sheet)>----------------------------------------------------------------------------10-6
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-318 Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4
Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-318 1-sided (1 sheet)>-----------------------------------------------------------------10-7
Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-318 General Circuit Diagram---------------------------------------------------- 10-8
 General Circuit Diagram (1/31)-------------------------------------------------10-8 Removal---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-51
General Circuit Diagram (2/31)-------------------------------------------------10-9 Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-51
General Circuit Diagram (3/31)----------------------------------------------- 10-10 Work Procedure--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-51
General Circuit Diagram (4/31)----------------------------------------------- 10-11
General Circuit Diagram (5/31)----------------------------------------------- 10-12
General Circuit Diagram (6/31)----------------------------------------------- 10-13
General Circuit Diagram (7/31)----------------------------------------------- 10-14
General Circuit Diagram (8/31)----------------------------------------------- 10-15
General Circuit Diagram (9/31)----------------------------------------------- 10-16
General Circuit Diagram (10/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-17
General Circuit Diagram (11/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-18
General Circuit Diagram (12/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-19
General Circuit Diagram (13/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-20
General Circuit Diagram (14/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-21
General Circuit Diagram (15/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-22
General Circuit Diagram (16/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-23
General Circuit Diagram (17/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-24
General Circuit Diagram (18/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-25
General Circuit Diagram (19/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-26
General Circuit Diagram (20/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-27
General Circuit Diagram (21/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-28
General Circuit Diagram (22/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-29
General Circuit Diagram (23/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-30
General Circuit Diagram (24/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-31
General Circuit Diagram (25/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-32
General Circuit Diagram (26/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-33
General Circuit Diagram (27/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-34
General Circuit Diagram (28/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-35
General Circuit Diagram (29/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-36
General Circuit Diagram (30/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-37
General Circuit Diagram (31/31)--------------------------------------------- 10-38
Backup Data----------------------------------------------------------------- 10-39
Detail of HDD partition---------------------------------------------------- 10-45
Soft Counter List----------------------------------------------------------- 10-46
Soft counter specifications----------------------------------------------------- 10-46
Removal---------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-51
Safety Precautions
■
■Laser Safety
■
■Handling of Laser System
■
■Turn power switch ON
■
■Safety of Toner
■
■Notes When Handling a
Lithium Battery
■
■Notes Before it Works
Serving
■
■Points to Note at Cleaning imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C9075 PRO/9070 PRO/9065
PRO/9060 PRO/C7065/7055
Series
 0-2

Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings
and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of
user operation.
Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser products that are regarded as safe during
normal use according to International Standard IEC60825-1.

Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified in Class 1 laser products.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and is hazardous when entered
into an eye.
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings: F-0-1
- Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
- Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam,
possibly hitting an eye.)
The machine's covers that confine laser beam radiation are identified by means of warning
labels (Figure). If you must open the cover, be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye
during the work.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist
gefährlich, wenn dieser Strahl in die Augen gerät.
Bei Servicearbeiten am oder in der Nähe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgerät abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen,
auf jeden Fall die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
- Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den
Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
- Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen. (Reflektierende
Laserstrahlen könnten sonst in die Augen geraten.)
Die Geräte-Abdeckungen, die Laserstrahlen reflektieren können, werden durch besondere
Warnaufkleber gekennzeichnet (siehe Bild).
Muss die Abdeckung geöffnet werden, besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der
Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.

0-2
 0-3

Turn power switch ON Safety of Toner

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power
switch. About Toner
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
mode, sleep mode).
CAUTION:
CAUTION: Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which
access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
Toner on Clothing or Skin
• If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it
off with water.
• Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the
fibers of the cloth.
• Tonner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.

F-0-2

0-3
 0-4

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Notes Before it Works Serving

CAUTION: CAUTION:

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. disconnect the power plug.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).

Achtung:
Points to Note at Cleaning
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.
CAUTION:

When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.

F-0-3

0-4
 1 Product Overview
■
■Product
■
■Features
lineups

■
■Specifications
■
■Name of Parts

1
Product Overview
 1 Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Applicable options for each model
1-2

Product lineups Pickup/delivery options

■■Applicable options for each model
Main unit
Connectable pickup/delivery options differ according to the model
●● Connecting configuration
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
POD Deck Lite-A1
Document Insertion
Paper Folding Unit-G1 Unit-H1

or
Paper Deck
Unit-C1
or

Booklet Finisher-K1/ Professional Puncher-C1 Buffer Pass Unit-J1

Staple Finisher-K1 + Professional Puncher
Integration Unit-B1

Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1

F-1-1 F-1-2
F-1-3
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO / 9270 PRO / 7270 / 7260 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270 /7260
Underlined (2-digit) numeric figures indicate print speed (ppm: print per minute)
Document Insertion Unit-J1
imageRUNNER imageRUNNER
imageRUNNER imageRUNNER
ADVANCE C9280 ADVANCE C9270 POD Deck Lite-A1
ADVANCE C7270 ADVANCE C7260
PRO PRO External
Print speed 80ppm 70ppm 70ppm 60ppm Puncher-A1
Positioning Light-Production machine Office machine
Target machine: iR5075 Target machine: iRC6880, iRC5880
Control Panel Upright Control Panel Flat Control Panel
* Option: Upright Control Panel
or or
HDD JPN: 1TB 160GB
Other: 160GB
Communication Serial
method with
pickup/delivery Buffer Pass Unit-J1
options
Pickup/delivery • Some equipments are connected to iR ADV C9280 PRO / C9270 PRO only. Booklet Finisher-L1 Paper Deck Unit-C1
Staple Finisher-L1
options • Some equipments are connected to iR ADV C7270 / C7260 only.
T-1-1 Document Insertion
/ Folding Unit-G1
F-1-4

1-2
1
Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Applicable options for each model
 1 Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Compulsory options and conditions
1-3
■■Compulsory options and conditions ●● Delivery options
Product name Compulsory options and conditions
●● Pickup options
Document Insertion Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
Product name Compulsory options and conditions Unit-H1 Pickup capacity: max. 400 sheets (200-sheet each for the upper deck and
POD Deck Lite-A1 Pickup method: air separation method the lower deck)
Pickup capacity: 3500 sheets (80g/m2) Paper type: plain paper/recycled paper/color paper/thick paper/coated paper
Paper type: thick paper/thin paper/coated paper Paper size: B5 to 13”X19.2”
Paper size: B5 to 13”X19” Paper basis weight: : 52 to 300g/m2
Paper basis weight: : 52 to 300g/m2 Document Insertion Option for iR ADVANCE C7270/7260
Double-feed detection: not available Unit-J1 Connection is available with either this Insertion Unit - J1 or Paper Folding
Multi-drawer Paper Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO Insertion Unit - G1
Deck-A1 Pickup method: air separation method Pickup capacity: max. 400 sheets (200-sheet each for the upper deck and
Pickup capacity: 6000 sheets (80g/m2) the lower deck)
Paper type: thick paper/thin paper/Coated paper Paper type: plain paper/recycled paper/color paper/thick paper/coated paper
Paper size: A5 to 13”X19.2” Paper size: B5 to 13”X19.2”
Paper basis weight: : 52 to 300g/m2 Paper basis weight: : 52 to 300g/m2
Double-feed detection: option Document Insertion / Connection is available with either this Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 or
Paper Deck Unit-C1 Pickup method: retard method Folding Unit-G1 Insertion Unit - J1 as an option for iR ADVANCE C7270/7260.
Pickup capacity: 3500 sheets (80g/m2) Pickup capacity: max. 400 sheets (200-sheet each for the upper deck and
Paper type: thick paper/thin paper the lower deck)
Paper size: A4, B5, LTR Paper type: plain paper/recycled paper/color paper/thick paper/coated paper
Paper basis weight: : 52 to 220g/m2 Paper size: B5 to 13”X19.2”
Double-feed detection: not available Paper basis weight: : 52 to 300g/m2
Cassette Heater Unit Option for cassette in main unit Professional Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
38 JPN, ASIA, CN, KR, TW : Standard Puncher-C1 Professional Puncher Integration Unit-B1 is required
EUR : Option Professional Puncher Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
120V-area: not available Integration Unit-B1 To be used with Professional Puncher-C1
Paper Deck Heater Option for Paper Deck Unit - C1 Paper Folding Unit-G1 Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
Unit-A1 Available for JPN, ASIA, CN, KR, TW only Staple Finisher/Saddle Finisher is required at downstream configuration
Other-area: assigned as a service part Folding type: Z-fold, C-fold, Half fold, Accordion Z-fold, Double parallel fold
Paper Deck Warm Option for Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 (upper/middle/lower cassette) Paper size: A4R to 11”X17” for folding, B5 to 13”X19.2” for through-pass
Breeze Unit-A1 Available for Japanese models only Paper basis weight: 52 to 105g/m2 (Double parallel fold: 52 to 90g/m2)
Other-area: assigned as a service part Staple Finisher-K1 Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
T-1-2 Buffer Path Unit - J1 is required at upstream configuration
Paper basis weight: 52 to 300g/m2
Booklet Finisher-K1 Option for iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
Buffer Path Unit - J1 is required at upstream configuration
Saddle: irregular saddle stitch with A4 - 13”x19.2”, 20-sheet saddle stitching,
3-sheet for no-staple V-fold
Staple Finisher-L1 Option for iR ADVANCE C7270/7260
Buffer Path Unit - J1 is required at upstream configuration
No compulsory options and particular conditions
Paper basis weight: 52 to 300g/m2
Booklet Finisher-L1 Option for iR ADVANCE C7270/7260
Buffer Path Unit - J1 is required at upstream configuration
Saddle: 16-sheet saddle stitching
Buffer Pass Unit-J1 Necessary when a finisher is connected

1-3
1
Product Overview > Product lineups > Pickup/delivery options > Compulsory options and conditions
 1 Product Overview > Product lineups > Scanning options > Compulsory options and conditions
1-4
Product name Compulsory options and conditions Scanning options
Inner Booklet Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Booklet Finisher-K1
Trimmer-A1
■■Compulsory options and conditions
Puncher Unit-BE1 Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Booklet Finisher-K1.
For Japanese models only.
AB, 2-hole Duplex Color Image
Puncher Unit-BF1/ Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Booklet Finisher-K1. Reader Unit-F1
BG1/BH1 BF1: Inch, 2/3-hole
BG1: FRN, 2/4-hole BH1: SWE, 4-hole
External 2 Hole Option for Staple Finisher - L1/Booklet Finisher - L1. Reader Heater Unit-G1 ADF Access Handle-A1
Puncher-A1 AB, 2-hole
External 2/3 Hole Option for Staple Finisher - L1/Booklet Finisher - L1.
Puncher-A1 Inch, 2/3-hole
External 2/4 Hole Option for Staple Finisher - L1/Booklet Finisher - L1.
Puncher - A1 FRN, 2/4-hole
External 4 Hole Option for Staple Finisher - L1/Booklet Finisher - L1.
Puncher-A1 SWE, 4-hole
Staple Cartridge-D2 Saddle staple CRG. Option for Saddle Finisher - L1 Printer Cover-B1
Staple Cartridge-D3 Saddle staple CRG. Option for Saddle Finisher - L1
Staple-P1 Saddle staple CRG. Option for Saddle Finisher - K1
Staple-J1 Plain staple CRG. Option for Staple Finisher - L1/Saddle Finisher - L1.
Staple-G1 Plain staple CRG. Option for Staple Finisher - K1/Saddle Finisher - K1.
T-1-3

F-1-5

Product name Compulsory options and conditions

Duplex Color Image Simultaneous 2-sided scanning
Reader - F1 B/W (1-SIDED/2-SIDED): :600dpi=120/120ipm, 300dpi: 120/200ipm
Color (1-sided/2-sided): :600dpi=70/70ipm, 300dpi: 120/140ipm
Paper basis weight:
<1-sided> AB-configuration: 38 to 220 g/m2 Inch-configuration:50 to 220 g/
m2
<2-sided> 50 to 220 g/m2
In case of the color original or the B/W original under mixed configuration of
color and B/W originals, paper basis weight is 64 to 220 g/m2
Stacking capacity: max. 300 sheets
Reader Heater Kit - G1 For JPN, ASIA, CN, KR, TW only
Other-area: assigned as a service part
ADF Access It is the cover to be installed at the top of the host machine when using this
Handle-A1 equipment as a printer model.
Printer Cover-B1 It is the handle to support opening and closing the Feeder.
T-1-4

1-4
1
Product Overview > Product lineups > Scanning options > Compulsory options and conditions
 1 Product Overview > Product lineups > Expanded-feature options > Compulsory options and conditions
1-5
Expanded-feature options ●● Hardware products
Product name Compulsory options and conditions
■■Compulsory options and conditions Upright Control Panel - B1 Option for iR ADVANCE C7270/7260
Equipped as standard with iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO
Utility Tray-A2
Utillity Tray-A2 No particular options and conditions are required.
Key Swecth Unit-B1
Copy Card Reader-F1
Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2 Copy Card Reader – F1 Copy Card Reader Installation Kit-A2 is required.
Upright Control Panel-B1
Using with Serial Interface Kit-K1 and Control Interface Kit-A1 is not
Voice Operation Kit-C2
Multimedia Reader available.
Voice Guidance
Kit-F2
/ Writer-A2 Copy Card Reader Attachment Required when Card Reader-F1 is installed.
Voice Kit – A2
Voice
Operation Super G3 FAX Board - AD2 No compulsory options and particular conditions
Unit Key Switch Unit-B1
Guidance Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board No compulsory options and particular conditions
Unit
- AD1
2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1 Super G3 3rd/4th LineFAX No compulsory options and particular conditions
USB
2.5inch/1TB HDD-L1
Device Port-A2
Board - AE1
RemovableHDD Voice Guidance Kit - F2 Consists of the voice guidance PCB and the voice guidance
Kit-AH1
Voice assembly.
Guidance
PCB HDD Mirroring Voice Operation Kit - C2 Consists of the voice operation PCB and the voice operation panel.
Kit-D2 HDD Data Encryption & No compulsory options and particular conditions
Voice
Operation Mirroring Kit-C7
PCB
HDD Data Encryption USB Device Port - A2 Consists of USB 2-port HUB PCB only.
& Mirroring Kit-C7 Additional Memory Type D Necessary when PS, PDF Direct, PDF/XPS Direct, Trust Stamp,
Serial Interface Kit-K1
(512MB) ImagePASS-A2, or ColorPASS-GX400 is installed.
Copy Control
2.5inch/160GB HDD - G1 This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Data
Additional Memory
Interface Kit-A1 Type D(512MB) Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C7.
ColorPASS-GX400
No particular options and conditions are required.
2.5inch/1TB HDD - L1 This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Data
License Option
Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C7.
Document Scan No particular options and conditions are required.
Lock Kit-B1
Removable HDD Kit - AH1 No compulsory options and particular conditions
Super G3 FAX Board-AD2
HDD Mirroring Kit - D2 No compulsory options and particular conditions
imagePASS･A2 Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board-AD1 Multimedia Reader/Writer - A2 USB device port - A2 is required.
Super G3 3rd/4th Line FAX Board-AE1 Supporting CF, SD memory and memory stick.
imagePASS - A2 Additional memory Type D (512MB) is required.
ColorPASS - GX400 Additional memory Type D (512MB) is required.
F-1-6
eM Controller-C1
Serial Interface Kit-K1 Required when the coin manager is connected.
Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 and Control Interface Kit-A2 is not
available.
Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Required when the coin manager is connected.
Using with Copy Card Reader-F1 and Serial Interface Kit-K1 is not
available. .
T-1-5

1-5
1
Product Overview > Product lineups > Expanded-feature options > Compulsory options and conditions
 1 Product Overview > Product lineups > Expanded-feature options > Compulsory options and conditions
1-6
●● License products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate
included in the package, and enter the license number on the control panel of the main unit.
This operation activates the applicable features.
No physical installation work is required at the time of installation.
Product name Compulsory options and conditions
PCL Printer Kit - AS1 No particular options and conditions are required.
PCL International Font Set-A1 No particular options and conditions are required.
PS Printer Kit - AS1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Direct print Kit (for PDF/XPS) - No particular options and conditions are required.
H1
Direct print Kit (for PDF) - H1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Direct print Kit (for XPS) - H1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Remote Operation Software Kit No particular options and conditions are required.
- B1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Encryption Secure Print No particular options and conditions are required.
Software Kit - D1
Secure Watermark - B1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Document Scan Lock Kit - B1 No particular options and conditions are required.
ACCESS MANAGEMENT No particular options and conditions are required.
SYSTEM Kit - B1
Web Access Software – H1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Universal Send Advanced No particular options and conditions are required.
Feature Set - D1
Universal Send Security No particular options and conditions are required.
Feature Set - D1
Universal Send Digital User No particular options and conditions are required.
Signature Kit - C1
Remote FAX Kit - A1 No particular options and conditions are required.
iR-ADV Security Kit-A1 for No particular options and conditions are required.
IEEE 2600.1 Common Criteria
Certification
T-1-6

1-6
1
Product Overview > Product lineups > Expanded-feature options > Compulsory options and conditions
1 Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement on operability for version upgrading
1-7

Features Features on service work

■■New Service Mode
Product features
Descriptions of Service Mode items are also displayed

High productivity
High image quality High image quality
84mm(O/D)E-drum/ECOtoner
8-beam laser High capacity set-on CRG

High image quality High image quality

30mm(O/D)E-drum/ECO toner Drum rotation
High capacity set-on CRG speed control

High productivity High image quality

IH-ODF fixing ITB speed control

F-1-8
High productivity ●● Features
High image quality High productivity
• Natural language description
Pickup supporting
Next generation controller
13 X 19.2 220gsm paper • Items in ‘COPIER > OPTION > BODY’ are newly classified.
• Enhanced I/O information
• Descriptions of Error Codes/Alarm Codes are displayed
• Simplified screen switching between Level 1 and Level 2
F-1-7
■■Improvement on operability for version upgrading
Version upgrading for most options (*) is available through the main unit.
As usual, SST (Service Support Tool) is used for version upgrading.

* Professional Puncher is excluded.

Version upgrading for Professional Puncher is performed by connecting with a PC that has
the firmware (built-in downloader) installed.

1-7
1
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement on operability for version upgrading
 1 Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Display specifications of Jam/Error codes
1-8
■■Display specifications of Jam/Error codes ●● Error code
Jam code:
“Jam code” and “Occurrence location code” are displayed on the screen (*) when a jam
occurs.
Error code:
In addition to “Error code”, “Occurrence location code” is displayed on the screen when an
Exxxxxx-yyyy-aa
error occurs. xxxxxx : error code
●● Jam code yyyy : sub-code
aa : location

aabbbb
aa : location
bbbb : jam code

F-1-10

●● Advantage on service activity

On receipt of a user call regarding a Jam or Error :
• The malfunctioning location (device) can be identified before a technician dispatch.
• The cause and remedy can be assumed before a technician dispatch.
• Remote service by a phone or e-mail can recover their malfunction depending on the
reported cause of jam such as improper user operation. (A technician dispatch is not
F-1-9
required)

1-8
1
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Display specifications of Jam/Error codes
 1 Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement of serviceability
1-9
■■Improvement of serviceability 3) Turn the Stand Control Panel.

Upright Control Panel can be rotated, so that service mode, etc. can be
performed even at the operation on the rear side of the machine.

<Procedure>
1) Remove the Shaft Support Cover left.
• 4 claws
• 1 screw
Stand Control Panel
• 1 rubber cap

F-1-13

Rubber cap Claw

x4

Claw Shaft Support

F-1-11
2) Remove the screw of the arm
• 1 screw

Screw

F-1-12

1-9
1
Product Overview > Features > Features on service work > Improvement of serviceability
 1 Product Overview > Specifications > Specifications of main unit
1-10

Specifications Maximum printable 1-sided

area 2-sided
323 x 476.6mm
313 x 476.6mm
Paper size A5R to 13”X 19.2” (330.2 X 487.7 mm)
Specifications of main unit Pickup capacity: Right/Left deck 1100 sheets (80g/m2)
1250 sheets (64 g/m2)
Upper/Lower 550 sheets (80g/m2)
Installation method of main unit Console type
cassette 680 sheets (64 g/m2)
Photoreceptor Black 84mm (O/D) OPC drum
Manual feed tray 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Color 30.6mm (O/D) OPC drum
Duplexing method Through pass
Exposure method Laser exposure method
Memory capacity For Main Controller 1:
Charging method Black Corona + grid charging method
Max. 1GB
Color AC roller charging method For Main Controller 2:
Developing method Dry, 2-component method Max. 1.5GB (standard: 1GB Option: 512MB)
Transfer method Intermediate belt transfer method (primary transfer, HDD capacity iR ADVANCE C9280 PRP/9270 PRO (JPN): 1TB
secondary transfer: transfer roller method) Others: 160GB
Separation method Curvature separation method + static eliminator Temperature range in use environment See Chapter 9, "Checking the Installation Environment."
Pickup method: Right/Left deck Separation retard method Humidity range in use environment See Chapter 9, "Checking the Installation Environment."
Upper/Lower Separation retard method Atmospheric pressure range in use 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 of atmospheric pressure)
cassette environment
Manual feed tray Simplified retard method Operational noise 58 db or less
Drum cleaning Black Cleaning blade + brush roller Rated power supply See "Power supply specifications."
method Color Cleaning blade Maximum energy consumption imageRUNNER ADV-C9280 PRO: 2.5kW or less
ITB cleaning method Cleaning blade imageRUNNER ADV-C9270 PRO/7270/7260: 2kW or less
Fixing method twin belt fixing Dimension See Chapter 9, "Checking Installation Space."
Toner type Non-magnetic negative toner Mass Approx. 231.5 kg
Toner supplying method Set-on T-1-7
Toner level detecting function Available
Lead-edge image margin 4.0 mm +1.5/-1.0 mm
Left/Right image margin 2.5 mm +1.5 mm
Warm-up time Quick To copy iR ADV-C9280 PRO/9270 PRO: 10 sec or less
staring icon iR ADV-C7270/7260: 7 sec or less
ON indication
To copy 30 sec or less
possibility

Quick To copy 31 sec or less

staring possibility
OFF
At the time of sleep 30 sec or less
return
First copy time Black imageRUNNER ADV-C9280 PRO/9270 PRO: 4.4 sec
imageRUNNER ADV-C7270/7260: 4.9 sec
Color imageRUNNER ADV-C9280 PRO/9270 PRO: 6.0 sec
imageRUNNER ADV-C7270/7260: 6.6 sec
Image gradation 256 gradation
Print resolution Max. 1200 dpi X 1200 dpi
Maximum image guarantee area 313 X 466.6mm

1-10
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Specifications of main unit
 1 Product Overview > Specifications > Power supply specifications
1-11
Power supply specifications
Power supply source Japan North America EUR Asia Aus
Product name
(number of cables) V (V) I (A) V (V) I (A) V (V) I (A) V (V) I (A) V (V) I (A)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C9270 PRO C9280 Power outlet (1or 2 pc.) 200 15 208 15 220-240 15 220-240 15 220-240 15
1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
100 15 - - - -
2 pc. - - - -
C9270 Power outlet (1or 2 pc.) 100 15 208 15 220-240 15 220-240 15 220-240 15
2 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
C7280 Power supply outlet (1) - - 220-240 15 - -
- - 1 pc. - -
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270/C7260 C7270 Power outlet (1or 2 pc.) 100 15 120 20 220-240 15 220-240 15 220-240 15
2 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
C7260 Power outlet (1or 2 pc.) 100 15 120 20 220-240 10 220-240 10 220-240 10
2 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
Paper Deck Unit -C1 Main unit - - - - - - - - - -
POD Deck Light-A1 Power supply outlet (1) 100 2.4 120 2.4 230 1.2 230 1.2 230 1.2
Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 Power supply outlet (1) 100 4.0 120 4.0 230 2.0 230 2.0 230 2.0
Insertion Unit - H1 Power supply outlet (1) 100 1.0 120 1.0 230 1.0 230 1.0 230 1.0
Document Insertion Unit - J1 Power supply outlet (1) - - 120 2.8 230 2.8 230 2.8 230 2.8
Staple Finisher - K1 Power supply outlet (1) 100 2.8 120 2.8 230 2.8 230 2.8 230 2.8
Staple Finisher - L1 Main unit - - - - - - - - - -
Saddle Finisher - K1 Power supply outlet (1) 100 2.8 120 2.8 230 2.8 230 2.8 230 2.8
Saddle Finisher - L1 Main unit - - - - - - - - - -
Puncher Unit - BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1 Finisher - - - - - - - - - -
External 2-hole Puncher - A1 Finisher - - - - - - - - - -
Professional Puncher - C1 Integration Unit - B1 - - - - - - - - - -
Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1 Power supply outlet (1) - - 120 5.5 230 3.1 230 3.1 230 3.1
Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 Power supply outlet (1) 100 1.0 120 1.0 230 1.0 230 1.0 230 1.0
Paper Folding Unit - G1 Finisher - - - - - - - - - -
Inner Trimmer - A1 Finisher - - - - - - - - - -
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit - F1 Main unit - - - - - - - - - -
T-1-8

1-11
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Power supply specifications
 1 Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (print speed)
1-12
Weight - size Productivity (print speed)
Weight ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Paper basis
Approx. (Kg) C9280 PRO C9270 PRO
Size Mode Paper type weight
iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO/ 689 932 1040 231.5 Cassette Manual feed Cassette Manual feed
C9060 PRO (g/m2)
Color BW Color BW Color BW Color BW
iR ADVANCE C7270/7260 689 932 1040 231.5 A4 / 1-sided Plain paper 52-105 70.0 80.0 40.2 65.0 70.0 36.6
Duplex Color Image Reader - F1 633 603 179 27.4 LTR Thick paper 106-220 35.0 40.0 20.1 32.5 35.0 18.3
POD Deck Light - A1 601 621 570 50 221-300 23.3 26.7 13.4 21.7 23.3 12.2
Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 950 797 1040 150 2-sided Plain paper 52-105 70.0 80.0 35.9 65.0 70.0 31.5
Paper Deck Unit - C1 323 583 570 29.4 Thick paper 106-220 35.0 40.0 17.9 32.5 35.0 15.7
Insertion Unit - H1 662 679 1242 40 221-300 - - - - - -
Insertion Unit - J1 746 793 1407 61 A3 / 1-sided Plain paper 52-105 35.0 40.0 20.7(A3) 32.5 35.0 18.8(A3) /
Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 662 679 1242 76 LDR /20.1(LDR) 18.3(LDR)
Paper Folding Unit - G1 336 793 1190 71 Thick paper 106-220 17.5 20.0 10.3(A3) 16.2 17.5 9.4(A3) /
Professional Puncher - C1 305 792 1040 80 /10.0(LDR) 9.1(LDR)
Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1 250 792 1040 40 221-300 11.6 13.3 6.9(A3) 10.8 11.7 6.2(A3) /
Staple Finisher - K1 654 765 1040 61 /6.7(LDR) 6.1(LDR)
Saddle Finisher - K1 767 765 1040 108 2-sided Plain paper 52-105 35.0 40.0 18.4(A3) 32.5 35.0 16.2(A3) /
Staple Finisher - L1 649 656 1121 48 /17.9(LDR) 15.7(LDR)
Saddle Finisher - L1 649 656 1121 72 Thick paper 106-220 17.5 20.0 9.2(A3) 16.2 17.5 8.1(A3) /
Buffer Path Unit - J1 182.7 663.3 962.8 18.75 /8.9(LDR) 7.8(LDR)
External 2-hole Puncher - A1 107 615 825 7.7 221-300 - - - - - -
External 2/3 Hole Puncher - A1 107 615 825 7.7 T-1-10

External 2/4 Hole Puncher - A1 107 615 825 7.7

External 4 Hole Puncher - A1 107 615 825 7.7
T-1-9

1-12
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (print speed)
 1 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type
1-13

Paper basis
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE Paper type
C7270 C7260
Size Mode Paper type weight Usable paper types are shown on the next page and later.
Cassette Manual feed Cassette Manual feed
(g/m2) For irregular-sized paper, refer to the table below.
Color BW Color BW Color BW Color BW
A4 / 1-sided Plain paper 52-90 60.0 70.0 36.6 Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)
55.0 60.0 36.6
LTR 90-105 55.0 65.0 36.6 Irregular size 1-1 182.0 to 209.9 139.7 to 181.9
Thick paper 106-220 30.0 35.0 18.3 27.5 30.0 18.3 Irregular size 1-2 210.0 to 279.2
221-300 20.0 22.3 12.2 18.3 20.0 12.2 Irregular size 1-3 279.3 to 432.0
2-sided Plain paper 52-90 60.0 70.0 31.5 Irregular size 1-4 432.1 to 487.7
55.0 60.0 31.5
90-105 55.0 65.0 31.5 Irregular size 2-1 182.0 to 209.9 182.0 to 210.0
Thick paper 106-220 30.0 35.0 15.7 27.5 30.0 15.7 Irregular size 2-2 210.0 to 279.2
221-300 - - - - - - Irregular size 2-3 279.3 to 432.0
A3 / 1-sided Plain paper 52-90 30.0 35.0 18.8(A3)/ Irregular size 2-4 432.1 to 487.7
LDR 18.3(LDR) 18.8(A3) /
27.5 30.0 Irregular size 3-1 182.0 to 209.9 210.1 to 297.0
90-105 27.5 32.5 18.8(A3)/ 18.3(LDR)
Irregular size 3-2 210.0 to 279.2
18.3(LDR)
Irregular size 3-3 279.3 to 432.0
Thick paper 106-220 15.0 17.5 9.4(A3) / 13.7 15.0 9.4(A3) /
Irregular size 3-4 432.1 to 487.7
9.1(LDR) 9.1(LDR)
Irregular size 4-1 182.0 to 209.9 297.1 to 330.2
221-300 10.0 11.7 6.2(A3) / 9.1 10.0 6.2(A3) /
Irregular size 4-2 210.0 to 279.2
6.1(LDR) 6.1(LDR)
Irregular size 4-3 279.3 to 432.0
2-sided Plain paper 52-90 30.0 35.0 16.2(A3)/
15.7(LDR) 16.2(A3) / Irregular size 4-4 432.1 to 487.7
27.5 30.0 Irregular size 5 487.8 to 630.0 139.7 to 330.2
90-105 27.5 32.5 16.2(A3)/ 15.7(LDR)
15.7(LDR) T-1-12

Thick paper 106-220 15.0 17.5 8.1(A3) / 13.7 15.0 8.1(A3) /

7.8(LDR) 7.8(LDR)
221-300 - - - - - -
T-1-11

1-13
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type
 1 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
1-14
■■Pickup

Multi-purpose Tray

Right deck of main unit

Left deck of main unit

Cassette 3 of main unit

Cassette 4 of main unit

POD Deck Light

Paper Deck

Multi Deck

Insertion Unit

Independent Insertion Unit

Multi-purpose Tray

Right deck of main unit

Left deck of main unit

Cassette 3 of main unit

Cassette 4 of main unit

POD Deck Light

Paper Deck

Multi Deck

Insertion Unit

Independent Insertion Unit

Paper type
Size
(g/m2)
Paper type
Size
(g/m2)

Embossed paper (106 A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5,

to 150, 151 to 220) 11x17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Thin paper (52 to 63) A4, B5, LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Thick paper (221 to SRA3, 12x18, 13x19
Plain paper (64 to 90, A3, B4, A4R, 11x17, LGL, 256) B5R EXEC Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes
91 to 105) LTRR, SRA3, 12x18, Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Embossed paper (221 "A5R, STMTR, OFFICIO,
Recycled paper (64 to 13x19 to 256) E-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO,
90, 91 to 105) B5R, EXEC Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes (106 to 150, 151 to 220, M-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO,
Color paper (64 to 90) "A5R, STMTR, OFFICIO, 221 to 256) A-LTR
Thick paper (106 to E-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, 2-side coated paper A-LTRR, GLTR-R, GLTR, Yes No No No No No No Yes No No
150, 151 to 220) M-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO, (106 to 150, 151 to 220, GLGL, AFLS, FLS,
A-LTR 221 to 256) Irregular size1-1, Irregular
A-LTRR, GLTR-R, GLTR, Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No size1-2, Irregular size1-3,
GLGL, AFLS, FLS Irregular size1-4"
Irregular size1-1, Irregular K8 K16 Yes No No No No No No No No Yes
size1-2, Irregular size1-3, F4A, Irregular size0-1,
Irregular size1-4" Irregular size0-2, Irregular Yes No No No No No No No No No
K8, K16 Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No Yes size5
K16R No No No Yes Yes No No No No No Irregular size2-1, Irregular
F4A Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No No size2-2, Irregular size2-3,
Irregular size0-1, Irregular Irregular size2-4, Irregular
Yes No No No No No No No No No
size0-2, Irregular size5 size3-1, Irregular size3-2,
Yes No No No No No No Yes No Yes
Irregular size2-1, Irregular Irregular size3-3, Irregular
size2-2, Irregular size2-3, size3-4, Irregular size4-1,
Irregular size2-4, Irregular Irregular size4-2, Irregular
size3-1, Irregular size3-2, size4-3, Irregular size4-4
Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes
Irregular size3-3, Irregular EXEC-R K16R No No No No No No No No No No
size3-4, Irregular size4-1,
Irregular size4-2, Irregular
size4-3, Irregular size4-4
EXEC-R No No No No No No No No No No

1-14
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
 1 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
1-15

Multi-purpose Tray

Right deck of main unit

Left deck of main unit

Cassette 3 of main unit

Cassette 4 of main unit

POD Deck Light

Paper Deck

Multi Deck

Insertion Unit

Independent Insertion Unit

Multi-purpose Tray

Right deck of main unit

Left deck of main unit

Cassette 3 of main unit

Cassette 4 of main unit

POD Deck Light

Paper Deck

Multi Deck

Insertion Unit

Independent Insertion Unit

Paper type Paper type
Size Size
(g/m2) (g/m2)

Thick paper (257 to A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5, Label paper (151 to A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5,
300) 11x17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, Yes No No No No Yes No Yes No Yes 180) 11x17, LGL, LTR, LTRR, Yes No No No No Yes No Yes No No
Embossed paper (257 SRA3, 12x18, 13x19 SRA3, 12x18, 13x19
to 300) B5R, EXEC, Irregular "B5R, A5R, STMTR,
1-side coated paper size2-1, Irregular size2-2, EXEC, OFFICIO,
(257 to 300) Irregular size2-3, Irregular E-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO,
2-side coated paper size2-4, Irregular size3-1, M-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO,
(257 to 300) Irregular size3-2, Irregular Yes No No No No No No Yes No Yes A-LTR, A-LTRR, GLTR-R,
size3-3, Irregular size3-4, GLTR
Irregular size4-1, Irregular GLGL, AFLS, FLS,
size4-2, Irregular size4-3, Irregular size1-1, Irregular
Irregular size4-4 size1-2, Irregular size1-3,
Yes No No No No No No Yes No No
A5R, STMTR, OFFICIO, Irregular size1-4, Irregular
E-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, size2-1, Irregular size2-2,
M-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO, Irregular size2-3, Irregular
A-LTR, A-LTRR, GLTR-R, size2-4, Irregular size3-1,
Yes No No No No No No Yes No No
GLTR, GLGL, AFLS, FLS, Irregular size3-2, Irregular
Irregular size1-1, Irregular size3-3, Irregular size3-4,
size1-2, Irregular size1-3, Irregular size4-1, Irregular
Irregular size1-4 size4-2, Irregular size4-3,
K8 K16 Yes No No No No No No No No Yes Irregular size4-4"
F4A, Irregular size0-1, K8, K16, F4A, Irregular
Irregular size0-2, Irregular Yes No No No No No No No No No size0-1, Irregular size0-2, Yes No No No No No No No No No
size5 Irregular size5
EXEC-R K16R No No No No No No No No No No EXEC-R, K16R No No No No No No No No No No
Transparency A4 LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No
A4R LTRR Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No

1-15
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
 1 Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
1-16

Multi-purpose Tray

Right deck of main unit

Left deck of main unit

Cassette 3 of main unit

Cassette 4 of main unit

POD Deck Light

Paper Deck

Multi Deck

Insertion Unit

Independent Insertion Unit

Paper type
Size
(g/m2)

Bond paper (64 to 90, A4, B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
91 to 105) A3, B4, A4R, SRA3, 12x18,
Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes
13x19
11x17, LGL, LTRR Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
"A5R, STMTR, OFFICIO,
E-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO,
M-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO,
A-LTR, A-LTRR, GLTR-R,
GLTR, GLGL, AFLS, FLS, Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No
Irregular size1-1, Irregular
size1-2, Irregular size1-3,
Irregular size1-4
"
B5R, Irregular size2-1,
Irregular size2-2, Irregular
size2-3, Irregular size2-4,
Irregular size3-1, Irregular
size3-2, Irregular size3-3, Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes
Irregular size3-4, Irregular
size4-1, Irregular size4-2,
Irregular size4-3, Irregular
size4-4
LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes
EXEC Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
K8, K16 Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No Yes
F4A Yes No No Yes Yes No No No No No
Irregular size0-1, Irregular
Yes No No No No No No No No No
size0-2, Irregular size5
K16R No No No Yes Yes No No No No No
EXEC-R No No No No No No No No No No
Tab paper (151 to 220) A4,LTR No No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes
Punch paper (64 to 90) A4 LTR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Postcard Postcard, double (2-pane)
Yes No No No No No No No No No
postcard, 4-pane postcard
Envelope COM10, Monarch, ISO-C5,
ISO-B5, DL, K2 , N3, Y0, Yes No No No No No No No No No
Irregular size 1-1 to 4-4
T-1-13

1-16
1
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper type > Pickup
 1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Outer Covers
1-17

Name of Parts [1] Left Middle Cover [2] Left Upper Cover
[3] Box Upper Cover [4] Upper Cover
[5] Upper Middle Cover [6] Upper Right Cover
External View [7] Front Upper Cover [8] Front Cover
[9] Deck Right Cover [10] Cassette Front Cover
■■Outer Covers [11] Upper Left Cover [12] Deck Left Cover
[13] Left Lower Cover 2 [14] Handle Cover
[5] [15] Left Lower Cover 1 [16] Reverse Door Cover
[4]
[17] Reverse Door Face Cover [18] Left Lower Cover 3
[3] [19] Box Left Cover [20] Box Left Connector Cover

[2]

[1]

[6]
[20]

[19]

[7]

[14]

[8]

[18] [9]

[17]

[16]
[10]
[15]
[14] [11]

[13]
[12]
F-1-14

1-17
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Outer Covers
 1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Outer Covers
1-18
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1] [5]
[2]

[1] [4] [5]

[17]
[6]

[6]

[16]

[14]
[7]

[12]
[13]

[15]
[7]
[12]
[14] [8] [8]
[9]
[13]
[9] [10]
[12] [11]
[10]
[11] F-1-16

[1] Toner Container Replacement Cover (Y) [2] Toner Container Replacement Cover (M)
F-1-15
[3] Toner Container Replacement Cover (C) [4] Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner
[1] Right Upper Cover 1 [2] Right Middle Cover Cover
[3] Right Upper Cover 2 [4] Box Right Cover [5] Toner Container Replacement Cover (Bk) [6] Front Inner Handle Right Cover
[5] Box Right Connector Cover [6] Rear Upper Cover [7] ITB Inner Right Cover [8] Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover
[7] Noise Reduction Cover [8] Rear Lower Cover [9] Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover [10] Process Unit Inner Cover
[9] HDD Cover [10] Waste Toner Container Cover [11] ITB Inner Middle Cover [12] Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover
[11] Right Lower Cover 3 [12] Handle Cover [13] ITB Inner Left Cover [14] Front Inner Handle Left Cover
[13] Vertical Path Cover [14] Right Lower Cover 1
[15] Right Lower Cover 2 [16] Multi-purpose Tray
[17] Multi-purpose Tray Cover

1-18
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > External View > Outer Covers
 1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Sectional View
1-19
■■Switches, I/F, others Sectional View
Environment Heater Switch Hopper Unit (C) Laser Scanner
Laser Scanner Unit (Bk)
Laser Scanner
Unit (M) ADF Unit (C) Reader Unit
Hopper Unit (M)
Developing
Assembly (Bk)
Leakage Breaker
Laser Scanner
Leakage Breaker Main Switch Unit (Y)
Hopper Unit (Bk)
Cassette Heater Switch

F-1-17 Hopper Unit (Y)

Drum Unit (Bk)
This machine is equipped with the Main Power Switch, Control Panel Power Switch and
Environment Heater Switch.
[1] Main Power Switch
Process Unit (Y) Multi-purpose
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of host machine. Pickup Unit
[2] Control Panel Power Switch
This switch is to shift the machine to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.
Process Unit (M)
[3] Environment Heater Switch Process Unit (C)
Environment Heater Switch is to supply and shut the power to Cassette Heater and Reader
Reverse Delivery
Heater. Unit
ITB Unit

Fixing Assembly

Secondary Transfer
Duplex Feed Unit Registration Unit

Left Deck
Pickup Unit

Fixing Feed Unit Cassette 4 Cassette 3 Right Deck

F-1-18

1-19
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Sectional View
 1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Power Supply Switches
1-20
Operation
■■Power Supply Switches
●● Types of power supply switche
The machine has three types of power switches, the main power switch, control panel power
switch and drum heater power switch.
During normal operation (excluding sleep mode), power is supplied by turning the power
switch ON.
Environment heater switch is to supply and stop the power to the drum heater, cassette
heater and reader heater.

●● How to power ON/ OFF, and precautions to be observed (main unit/

optional devices)
• While progress bar is kept displayed at power-on, HDD access is processing; thus, never
turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
• To turn off the power, turn off the Main Power Switch. (Conventional shutdown sequence
operation is not required.)
• After power-OFF (after the Main Power Switch is turned OFF), do not reactivate the Main
Power Switch until a screen disappears.
Do not turn OFF the power while download is processing.

1-20
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Power Supply Switches
 1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Control Panel
1-21
■■Control Panel imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7200 Series
[8] [7]
●● Control Panel
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9200 Series
[9] [7]
[1]

[2]
[9]
[10] [10]
[1]

[2] [11]
[3]
[8]

[14]
[13] [4] [5] [6] [12] [14] [13] [15]
[3] [11] F-1-20

[1] Main Menu Key [9] Settings/Registration Key

[12] [2] Custom Menu Key [10] Counter Check Key
[3] Status Check/Stop Key [11] Stop Key
[4] FAX Volume Adjustment Key [12] ID (authentication) Key
[5] Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial [13] Clear Key
[4] [5] [6] [15] [16]
[6] Touch Panel Display [14]] Reset Key
F-1-19
[7] Energy Saver Key [15] Start Key
[1] Main Menu Key [9] Settings/Registration Key [8] Keypad
[2] Custom Menu Key [10] Counter Check Key
[3] Status Check/Stop Key [11] Stop Key
[4] FAX Volume Adjustment Key [12] Operation Pen
[5] Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial [13] ID (authentication) Key
[6] Touch Panel Display [14] Clear Key
[7] Energy Saver Key [15] Reset Key
[8] Keypad [16] Start Key

1-21
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Control Panel
 1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Control Panel
1-22
●● Main Menu ●● Difference of Main menu
iRC 5180/5185 Series iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270
PRO/7270/7260 Series
Copy Copy
Send Scan and Send
Mail BOX Scan and Store (New)
Access Stored Files (New)
1 2 3 4 Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Menu change key -----
Print Job Secured Print
Scan Scanner
Scan and Send
----- Set/Regi. Short Cut (New)
5 6 7 8 (Help) Tutorial
T-1-14

Fax / I-Fax
Inbox
9

F-1-21

[1] Copy
[2] Scan and Send
[3] Scan and Store
[4] Access Stored Files
[5] Fax/I-Fax Inbox
[6] Secured Print
[7] Scanner
[8] Set/Regi. Short Cut
[9] Tutorial

1-22
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Control Panel
 1 Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Control Panel
1-23
●● Settings/Registration Menu

Settings/Registration
Select an item to set

TOP Preferences 1

Adjustment/Maintenance
2

Function Settings
3

Set Destination 1/1

4

Management Settings
5

Log in OK

F-1-22

[1] Preferences
[2] Adjustment/Maintenance
[3] Function Settings
[4] Set Destination
[5] Management Settings

●● Difference of Settings/Registration menu

iRC 5180/5185 Series iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270
PRO/7270/7260 Series
Common Settings
Preferences
Timer Settings
Adjustment/ Cleaning Adjustment/Maintenance
System Settings Set Destination
Report Settings
Copy Settings
Communication Settings Function Settings
Mail Box Settings
Printer Settings
Address Book Settings Management Settings
T-1-15

1-23
1
Product Overview > Name of Parts > Operation > Control Panel
2 Technology
■
■Basic
■
Configuration
■Controller System
■
■DCM
■
■Laser Exposure System
■
■Image Formation System
■
■Fixing System
■
■Pickup / Feed System
■
■External and Controls
■
■MEAP
■
■Embedded RDS
■
■Updater

2
Technology
 2 Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration
2-2

Basic Configuration

Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document
exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image
formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.

Document exposure system

Reader
controller CCD Exposure lamp

Controller system Laser exposure system

Laser Laser Laser Laser
scanner scanner scanner scanner
HDD Main unit(Y) unit(M) unit(C) unit
controller (Bk)
Option 1/2
board
DC
controller Drum unit
Drum unit Drum unit Drum unit
(Bk)
(Y) (M) (C)

ITB
Image
formation
Fixing system system
Delivery Fixing Transfer

Duplexing feed
Pickup

Pickup/ Left deck Right deck

feed
system

Cassette3

Flow of paper

Flow of signal Cassette4

Laser beam

F-2-1

2-2
2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration
 2 Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
2-3
Basic Sequence
■■Basic sequence at power ON
Main power ON

Purint Unit WMUP(approx. 30 sec) WMUPR *Estimated time differs depending on models STBY

Laser
Laser scanner motor(M80～83)
system

Drum motor(M19/M21/M23/M25)

ITB drive motor(M3)

Cleaning
Pre-exposure LED(LED1～4)

Primary charging AC bias(Color)

Primary charging DC bias(Color)

Primary charging DC bias

(Constant current)(Bk)

Grid DC bias(Bk)
Image
formation
system Developing AC bias(Color)

Developing DC bias(Color)

Developing stirring motor(M26～M29)

Developing sleeve drive motor

(M18/M20/M22/M24)
Pre-primary transfer charging
AC bias(Bk)
Pre-primary transfer charging
DC bias(Bk)

Primary transfer bias

Fixing motor(M48)
Fixing
system
IH heater/Halogen heater(H5)

Pickup/ Pre-registration multi-purpose

feed system tray drive motor

:Standby speed

F-2-2

2-3
2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
 2 Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
2-4
■■Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Start key ON Flying start

Printer unit PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR *1 PSTBY

Laser scanner motor
(M80～83)

Laser exposure system

PTOP signal

Laser Y ON

Laser M ON

Laser C ON

Laser Bk ON
Secondary transfer roller Detachment Engagement Detachment
detachment motor(M31)
Drum motor
(M19/M21/M23/M25)
ITB drive motor(M3)
Cleaning pre-exposure
LED(Y)(LED2)
Cleaning pre-exposure
LED(M)(LED3)
Cleaning pre-exposure
LED(C)(LED4)
Cleaning pre-exposure
LED(Bk)(LED1)
Primary charging AC bias(Y)

Primary charging AC bias(M)

Primary charging AC bias(C)

Primary charging DC bias(Y)

Primary charging DC bias(M)

Primary charging DC bias(C)

Primary charging DC bias
(Constant current)(Bk)
Grid DC bias(Bk)

Developing AC bias(Y)

Developing AC bias(M)

Developing AC bias(C)
Image formation system

Developing AC bias(Bk)

Developing DC bias(Y)

Developing DC bias(M)

Developing DC bias(C)

Developing DC bias(Bk)
Developing stirring
motor(Y)(M26)
Developing stirring
motor(M)(M28)
Developing stirring
motor(C)(M27)
Developing stirring
motor(Bk)(M29)
Developing sleeve drive
motor(Y)(M20)
Developing sleeve drive
motor(M)(M22)
Developing sleeve drive
motor(C)(M24)
Developing sleeve drive
motor(Bk)(M18)
Pre-primary transfer
charging DC bias(Bk)
Pre-primary transfer
charging AC bias(Bk)
Primary transfer bias(Y)

Primary transfer bias(M)

Primary transfer bias(C)

Primary transfer bias(Bk)

Secondary transfer bias

Secondary transfer bias
ATVC
Secondary transfer Positive bias Negative bias Positive bias Negative bias Positive bias Negative bias
cleaning bias
Static eliminator bias

Fixing motor(M48)
system
Fixing

IH heater
/Halogen heater(H5)
Cassette 3 pickup motor
(M44)
Right deck vertical path motor
(M40)
Cassette vertical path motor
(M39)
Pickup/feed system

Pre-registration multi-purpose
tray drive motor(M36)
Registration motor(M34)

Pre-fixing feed motor(M35)

Reverse motor(M38)
Reverse upper wheel
detachment solenoid(SL3)
Delivery motor(M37)

*1:Auto adjustment may be executed depending on the conditions :Standby speed

F-2-3

2-4
2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition:Full color, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
 2 Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
2-5
■■Basic sequence at power ON <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
Start key ON Flying start

Printer unit PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR *1 PSTBY

Laser scanner motor
Laser exposure

(M80～83)
PTOP signal
system

Laser Bk ON
Secondary transfer roller Detachment Engagement Detachment
detachment motor(M31)
Drum motor(M19)

ITB drive motor(M3)

Cleaning pre-exposure
LED(Bk)(LED1)
Primary charging DC bias
(Constant current)(Bk)
Grid DC bias(Bk)
Image formation system

Developing AC bias(Bk)

Developing DC bias(Bk)
Developing stirring
motor(M29)
Developing sleeve drive
motor(M18)
Pre-primary transfer
charging AC bias(Bk)
Pre-primary transfer
charging DC bias(Bk)
Primary transfer bias(Bk)

Secondary transfer bias

Secondary transfer bias
ATVC
Secondary transfer Negative bias Positive bias Negative bias Positive bias Negative bias
cleaning bias
Static eliminator bias

Fixing motor(M48)
system
Fixing

IH heater
/Halogen heater(H5)
Cassette 3 pickup motor
(M44)
Right deck vertical path motor
(M40)
Cassette vertical path motor
Pickup/feed system

(M39)
Pre-registration multi-purpose
tray drive motor(M36)
Registration motor(M34)

Pre-fixing feed motor(M35)

Reverse motor(M38)
Reverse upper wheel
detachment solenoid(SL3)
*1:Auto adjustment may be executed depending on the conditions :Standby speed

F-2-4

2-5
2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON <Condition:Monochrome, Cassette 3, A4 1-sided (1 sheet)>
 2 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
2-6

Controller System ■■Specifications/configuration

●● PCBs
Overview
■■Features
Main Controller
Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high PCB 1
Flash PCB
functionality. Riser PCB
TPM PCB
Main Controller PCB 1 Riser PCB Main Controller PCB 2 Bypass PCB

HDD(Standard) Image Processing

Sub PCB
HDD(Option)

Main Controller
PCB 2

F-2-7

Parts name Function, specifications, features

Main controller CPU: 1.66 GHz, Control of the entire system
PCB 1 Various controls (memory, control panel, electric power, voice), I/Fs (PCI, USB
(host), RTC
Flash PCB Boot program
F-2-5
TPM PCB To generate and save encryption key
Available only when TPM settings is ON: Management Settings > Data
Main controller PCB 1 controls the entire system. Main controller PCB 2 mainly controls
Management > TPM Settings (default: OFF)
image processing. Not available with China models
Main controller CPU: 400 MHz, Image control
Main controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the riser PCB. PCB 2 Various image processing (color space conversion, enlarge, reduction,
This configuration improves installability / removability of the main controller PCBs. rotation, composition, compression, rasterizing, resolution conversion, image
(Slot-in / out) binarization), delay memory control between drums, HDD control, I/Fs (reader,
FAX, USB (device))
Image Processing Image processing
Sub PCB
Bypass PCB Internal bus connection
Remove this PCB when using imagePASS-A2 (to be attached to the main unit)
and install the open I/F PCB.
Riser PCB I/F (main controller 1 - 2, main controller - HDD, main controller - DC controller)
HDD 2.5 inch SATA I/F Standard: 160 GB (80G usable area)
Up to 2 HDDs can be mounted in the case of mirroring configuration.
BOX data, Address book, security information (password, certificate)
Op.: 2.5 inch / 160 GB HDD-G1, 2.5 inch / 1 TB HDD-H1
F-2-6 T-2-1

2-6
2
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
 2 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
2-7
●● Memory Main controller PCB 2
Main controller PCB 1

SDRAM
DDR2-SDRAM(M0)
BAT

J13 DDR2-SDRAM(M1)

DDR2-SDRAM(P)

BAT

F-2-9

Parts name Function, specifications, features

DDR2-SDRAM (M1) 1 GB (standard) / clock frequency: 200 MHz
F-2-8 Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
DDR2-SDRAM (M0) 512 MB (standard / Op.*) / clock frequency: 200 Hz
Parts name Function, specifications, features
Product name: Additional Memory Type D (512 MB)
SDRAM 2 slot/1 GB (standard)
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
J2031: 512 MB
To be used when using the following options:
J2032: 512 MB
PS Printer Kit-AR1, Direct Print Kit (for PDF / XPS)-H1, imagePASS-A2,
Clock frequency: 333 MHz
ColorPASS-GX400
Used for saving image, program data
DDR2-SDRAM (P) 512 MB (standard) / clock frequency: 200MHz
Lithium battery (BAT1)) For RTC
Print image processing, delay processing between drums
Life: approx. 10 years
SRAM 16 Mbit
T-2-2
To save data in Settings / Registration Mode / Service Mode and image
data management information in HDD
Lithium battery (BAT1) For SRAM backup, Life: approx. 10 years
T-2-3

* The capacity differs according to the location or model

2-7
2
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
 2 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
2-8
●● I/F, connector Main controller PCB 2
Main controller PCB 1 Bypass I/F
/ open I/F J1010 Image processing sub PCB
Voice
J1020 External I/F
J13
External I/F Internal I/F
Mini-USB J6 J3003 Reader
UI J4 Internal I/F

J1000 Image analysis I/F

J15 USB (D)
Fan J15
LAN J7 Flash
J11 J17 Riser J17 FAX (1 line)
TPM Riser J14
USB(H) J5 J8
J16 FAX (2-4 line)

J1025 PCI F-2-11

J21 J20
CC-VI Coin Jack No. Function, specifications
J14 Riser PCB I/F
F-2-10
J16 Mini-USB I/F for 2 to 4-lines FAX
No. Function, specifications No. Function, specifications J17 FAX-USB I/F for 1-line FAX
J13 Voice I/F (Op.) J11 Flash PCB I/F Product name: Advanced G3 FAX Board-AE1
J4 Control panel I/F J5 USB I/F (Host) *1 J1000 Image analysis PCB I/F
For MEAP, For USB keyboard (Op.) Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
J6 Mini-USB I/F (Op.) J8 TPM PCB I/F J1010 Bypass PCB I/F
Connect USB Device Port-B1 Mount the open I/F PCB when using ColorPASS-GX300 / imagePASS-B1
J15 Fan I/F J1025 PCI expansion PCB I/F (Op.) J3003 Reader I/F
J7 LAN I/F J21 I/F for control interface kit (Op.) J1020 Image processing sub PCB
1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T T-2-5
Also to be used as I/F for imagePASS-B1 J20 I/F for card reader, I/F for serial interface
/ ColorPASS-GX400 (Op.) kit, I/F for coin manager (all Op.)
J17 Riser PCB I/F
T-2-4

*1: There is 1 port on the control panel as well

2-8
2
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
 2 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
2-9
●● Function expansion options Main controller PCB 2
Main controller PCB1 Open I/F PCB
Voice Operation/
Voice Guidance PCB

Image Analysis PCB

Open I/F PCB Image Analysis PCB

Voice Operation/
Voice Guidance PCB

Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2

F-2-13
F-2-12

Name Function, specifications, features Name Function, specifications, features

Open I/F PCB imagePASS-B1 / ColorPASS-GX300
Voice Recognition PCB Voice Operation Kit, Voice Guidance Kit (for non-Japanese models only)
F link PCB (main)
Voice Guidance PCB
F link PCB (sub)
IPSec PCB Excluded from the option configuration because it has been installed on the
Image analysis PCB Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
Main Controller PCB as standard.
Scan protection for output original (Copy / SEND / BOX)
T-2-6
T-2-7

2-9
2
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Specifications/configuration
 2 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Boot sequence
2-10
■■HDD ■■Boot sequence
The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added.
Main power switch ON [ ]: program storage location
Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.

- Hardware initialization processing

FSTDEV Image data (Box, etc.)
TMP_GEN Universal data (temporary file)
TMP_PSS For PDL spooling
TMP_FAX FAX data
APL_SEND Address book, filter
APL_MEAP MEAP application
APL_GEN Universal data
APL_KEEP MEAP saving data
- Initialization process of hardware
APL_LOG System log
IMG_MNG Text management table - Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
PDLDEV PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
FSTCDEV Job archiving (chasing) - Starting IPL, OS
THUMDEV Thumbnail [Flash PCB]
BOOTDEV System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
CRBDEV For Advanced Box
APL_CDS For distribution server

F-2-14
- Starting system software for main/sub CPU
[HDD -> DDR2-SDRAM]
[Main controller PCB 2]

- Starting application

Standby screen display

F-2-15

NOTE :
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.

2-10
2
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Boot sequence
 2 Technology > Controller System > Overview > Shutdown sequence
2-11
Related Error Codes (major error codes): ■■Shutdown sequence
Error
Error description Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion
Code
processing (to prevent damage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed
E602 Error in HDD
0001 Failure in recognizing HDD toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical
Boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup. reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is
0002 There is no system software for the main CPU. called “shutdown sequence” and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding
0006 There is no system software for the sub CPU.
down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration).
E604 Failure in memory (main controller PCB 1)
1024 Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (1GB required)
E613 Failure in memory (main controller PCB 2) When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects
1024 Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1GB required) this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts / executes automatically.
1536 Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1.5GB required)
E748 Error in board (Flash PCB)
In addition, hardware shutdown sequence exists. If shutdown sequence is not executed
2010 IPL (Initial Program Loader) is not found.
2011 OS is not found.
normally due to occurrence of software trouble, the machine is shut down in 110 seconds at a
T-2-8 maximum by the timer in the AC Driver PCB. If it is not shut down within 110 seconds, failure
of the AC Driver PCB is suspected.

2-11
2
Technology > Controller System > Overview > Shutdown sequence
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Image Processing Control
2-12
Controls ■■Image Processing Control
■■Overview ●● Copy
Item Control Detail Reference
To DC Controller
Image processing control Convert the image data input from the external p. 2-12 HDD Reader
device or reader unit into the video data and send it
to DC controller.
Backup battery Data backup battery in case of power failure or p. 2-13
HDD
disconnection of power plug. I/F
writing/reading
Power save function Reduce the power consumption at standby mode. p. 2-14
Image processing
Security function Encryption key, certificate, protection of password p. 2-8
R　esolution conversion,
Large capacity HDD (option) Reinforcement of advanced box use area p. 2-12 I　
mage rotation,
Print type image 　
JPEG compression/extension
HDD mirroring function (option) Mirroring processing of HDD data p. 2-13 processing
Removable HDD (option) HDD is installable/removable by user. p. 2-28 Extension processing
Tile raster conversion
T-2-9
Image data buffer
(memory)

Main Controller Riser PCB Main Controller

PCB 1 PCB 2

F-2-16

●● Print
Network To DC Controller

HDD

I/F Rendering

HDD
writing/reading

Image data buffer

(memory)

LAN
Controller

Main Controller Riser PCB Main Controller

PCB 1 PCB 2

F-2-17

2-12
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Image Processing Control
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Backup Battery
2-13
●● SEND ■■Backup Battery
Main controller PCB of the host machine has one lithium battery as a data backup battery in
Network
HDD case of power failure or disconnection of the power plug.
Reader
DC controller PCB is not equipped with the battery.

HDD
writing/reading
Image processing ●● Main Controller PCB1
Resolution
　 conversion,
Image
　 rotation, Type of battery Lithium battery (3V, 620 mAh)
　
JPEG compression/extension
Data conversion
Life of battery Approx 10 years (when the power plug is disconnected)
　Tile raster conversion Replacement of battery Battery cannot be replaced independently on service site.
　JPEG encode
Image data buffer T-2-10
LAN
Controller (memory)
●● Main Controller PCB2
Type of battery Lithium battery (3V, 620 mAh)
Life of battery Approx 10 years (when the power plug is disconnected)
Main Controller Riser PCB Main Controller Replacement of battery Battery cannot be replaced independently on service site.
PCB 1 PCB 2
T-2-11

F-2-18 ●● DC Controller PCB

●● FAX Type of battery Lithium battery (3V, 600 mAh)
Life of battery Approx 10 years (when the power plug is disconnected)
Replacement of battery Battery cannot be replaced independently on service site.
To DC Controller
HDD T-2-12
FAX

Caution:
I/F
Be sure to replace the battery correctly; otherwise, it may explode.
HDD Image data buffer Do not use the other battery than the one specified by the manufacture (same type
writing/reading (memory)
name or equivalent).
Follow the instruction of manufacture to dispose of the replaced battery.

Print type image Image processing

processing
Color space conversion,
Extension
　 processing Image 2 level cell,
Tile
　 raster conversion Image multi level cell,
Image composition,
Resolution conversion,
Main Controller Riser PCB Main Controller Image rotation,
PCB 1 PCB 2 Pixel skipping with 7x7 filter

F-2-19

2-13
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Backup Battery
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-14
■■Power-saving function ■■Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password
Standby Protection)
SW turned OFF
or SW turned ON ●● Overview
time is elapsed
Sleep The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named “TPM PCB”. “TPM”
Sleep Standby stands for “Trusted Platform Module”, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating
Job
finished
and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption.
*1
Job
Job
Sleep 1 finished Job
*2

*2
TPM PCB

Deep Sleep

F-2-20
Sleep standby
Control panel is turned OFF.
Power supply other than the control panel is the same with Standby mode.

Power-saving
Control panel is turned OFF. F-2-21

Power supply other than the control panel is the same with Standby mode. The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys)
stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored
Deep Sleep data other than security information.
3V for all-night power PCB is only supplied. If a next job is submitted, the machine moves to
Standby mode.
• Print job
• Control panel power switch is pressed.

2-14
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-15
The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information. ●● Configuration of Security Information
The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.
TPM Key This machine provides the two types of TPM settings. See the figure below for the security
TPM PCB
information flow in each setting.

- When the TPM setting is ON

HDD / SRAM TPM Key

TPM PCB
(Temporarily stored in HDD)

Public Key
Password use SSL for communication Users USB flash drive
Backup Key
encrypting key public key certificate for TPM failure

F-2-22
Common Backup
The TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security
Key
information of the host machine is securely protected even in the following conditions. Backup for
• When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and Common Key

installed in the MFP with the different serial number (the model information held in the TPM Password Password

PCB is specific to the machine originally enabled the TPM setting)

• When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network SRAM HDD
F-2-23
Enable this function in Setting / Registration mode. When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three
Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting -> ON (OFF by default) keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected.
The security information in this setting can be accessed by the three keys and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the figure above).
Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security information is
activated only when data in all the layers are linked.
For the backup purpose, the backup key is temporarily stored also in the HDD to be prepared
for a TPM failure (only for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON).
This key can be backed up using the USB flash drive. Once backed up, the backup key is
deleted from the HDD.
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key
stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after
MN-CON clear. However, the common key stored in the HDD automatically restores that in
the SRAM so that the security information is decodable even after servicing. Note that the
security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because

2-15
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-16
the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute “Initialize All ●● Preparation before Installing TPM
Data / Settings” in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF. This will maintain the password Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.
information in the SRAM even after the password information is initialized. Follow the steps below to back up data.
- When the TPM setting is OFF:
1) From Remote UI, execute Setting / Registration > Management Setting > Data
Management > Import / Export. The following data types should be backed up.
Backup
Common • Address book (see *1)
Key
• Device settings (transfer settings, address book, frequently-used Send functions) (see *2)
Backup of
Common Key • Setting / Registration
Password Password • Printer settings can be exported
• Favorites stored in the web browser (only when the web browser is enabled) (see *3)
SRAM HDD
F-2-24 *1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device
When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is settings, this step can be disregarded.
protected only by the common key. *2 Among settings in the main menu, only “Frequently-used Setting” under “Scan and
Under this setting, the security information held in this machine is protected at the level Send” can be backed up.
equivalent to the conventional machines. *3 These are available only in the specific models or configurations.
The security functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD. 2) Select “Export” from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up “Custom Menu Setting
When the TPM setting is set to OFF, the security information is protected by the common key Information”.
and multiple passwords stored in SRAM and HDD.
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common 3) Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote
key stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or UI. Then, execute “Export” to back up “User Information of Advanced Box”.
after MN-CON clear. Since the common key stored in the HDD will automatically restore
the common key in the SRAM, the security information is decodable correctly even after
servicing. Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON, the password information stored
in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted. However, the password
information is maintained in the SRAM.

TPM Setting for Security Information

The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM
settings in Setting / Registration mode.
• When the TPM setting is ON
The security functionality is enabled in 4 levels (TPM key, public key, common key and
password).
• When the TPM setting is OFF
The security functionality is enabled in 2 levels (common key and password).

2-16
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-17
●● Works before / after introduction 1. Enable Functionality
Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (“TPM setting” is OFF by default).
MEMO: Setup of “System Management PIN”
1. Enable the feature
It is recommended for users (administrators) to set the system management PIN
2. Backup the TPM key before installing TPM. The TPM key is backed up after the TPM setting is set to “ON”.
3. Restore the TPM key However, the key backup is permitted only once. Unless the key is properly backed up,
4. Disable the feature users other than administrators may illegally obtain the backup file. To avoid such risks
effectively, the system management PIN should be set.

The works above are basically done by users.

1)Set Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting to “ON”.
CAUTION: Setting / Registration
When the TPM setting is set to “ON”, advice users on the following:
Back up the TPM key swiftly after the setting is ON
Keep the password used at backup securely
Never lose the USB flash drive with the backup TPM key file saved
The TPM key should be restored after the TPM PCB is replaced due to failures or the
like.
(TPM key restoration is enabled only at TPM PCB replacement.)
Unless the key is restored, the security information (passwords, encryption key, and
certificates) cannot be used.
When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others, “Initialize All F-2-25

Data / Settings” should be executed to reactivate TPM functionality. The security may 2) Click “Yes”, and restart the machine.
be undermined if the old Setting / Registration data are maintained as it is.

F-2-26
This setting is enabled after the machine is restarted.

2-17
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-18
2.TPM Key Backup 3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for
The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system: confirmation.
FAT32).
Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.

F-2-27
1) Insert the USB flash drive to the machine.
The USB I/F (host) is found at the side of the control panel as well as the main
controller PCB.

CAUTION:
Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive.
If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected, the message is
shown to notify that the backup is failed.

F-2-29
MEMO:
The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup 4) Click [OK] to initiate TPM key backup.
files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive.

2)Click [Back up TPM Key] in Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting.

F-2-28

F-2-30
5) Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB flash drive.

2-18
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-19
3. Restore of TPM key
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup.
Procedure is about the same as the backup work.
If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message Difference between restore work and backup work:
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure to Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore
recover this.
work.
• The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
• 2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine 1) Connect the USB memory that saves TPM key.
• The USB flash drive has insufficient free memory space 2) Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and
• The USB flash drive is write-protected click [Restore TPM key].

• No key is found

CAUTION: The USB flash drive should be securely stored.

Give advice users on the following points.
• The USB flash drive should be securely stored
• Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB flash drive, never save the
backup file on a server or the like accessible to unanimous users.

MEMO: Name of TPM key backup file F-2-31

The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name. 3) Enter the password set in the backup process.
4) Click [OK] on Start Restoration Screen. The restoration process is started.
5) Click [OK] on Restoration Completion Screen. Remove the USB flash drive and turn
OFF/ ON the main power switch.

2-19
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-20
4. Disable the feature
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration.
To set “OFF” for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings].
If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for
recovery.
• The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
• 2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
• The USB flash drive is security-protected
• No TPM key is saved in the USB flash drive
• The TPM key saved in the USB flash drive is not for the machine
• The wrong password is entered
• After the TPM key was backed up, [Initialize All Systems/ Settings] was executed
• SRAM (the main controller PCB 1) or HDD is crashed
F-2-32

CAUTION: Points to note when disabling functionality

To disable the use of TPM, all data and settings should be initialized. If this is executed,
user information saved in the HDD/ SRAM is totally cleared. Ensure to back up the data
before disabling TPM settings.

List of data to be cleared

• Data saved in BOX/ Advanced Box
• Data saved in Inbox (Fax Box/ System Box)
• Destination data registered in Address Book
• Read mode registered using Send function
• Mode memory registered using Copy/ Box function
• MEAP applications and their license files
• Data saved using MEAP applications
• Password for MEAP SMS (Service Management Service)
(The password is returned to default if any change is made.)
• User authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H)
• Unsent documents (documents for scheduled transmission and reserved transmission)
• Job logs
• Contents set in Setting / Registration
• Image-composite registration form
• Registered transfer settings

2-20
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-21
• Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) > ●● Overview of Actions taken against Troubles
[Device Management] > [Certificate Settings]
Location
• Audit log TPM Setting = ON TPM Setting = OFF Relevant Error Code
with failure
Steps of data restoration after recovery TPM PCB 1. Check the TPM PCB connection N/A (TPM PCB is Initially E746-0031 is
2. Replace the TPM PCBs not in use when the shown on the screen.
To restore data, select the following on UI: Settings/Registration > Management Settings > 3. Turn OFF/ ON the power TPM setting is set to When the power is turned
Data Management > Import > Import of Settings/Registration. 4. See the section of “Restoring TPM OFF.) OFF/ON after the TPM
The data listed below cannot be restored, thus should be set again. Key” to restore the TPM key. PCB is replaced, E746-
5. Turn OFF/ ON the main power for 0032 is shown (only when
Environment Settings recovery the TPM setting is set to
ON).
• Paper settings
HDD 1.Replace the HDDs. 1. Replace the Initially E602-xxxx is shown
• Display settings in the destination to save 2.Format the HDD. HDDs. (the different extension is
• Time fine-adjustment for timer/ power settings 3.Download the system software. 2. Format the HDD. shown depends on cases).
• Date/ time settings (excluding time zone and daylight-saving settings) 4.See the section of “Disabling 3. Download the After the system software
Functionality” to execute “Initialize system software. is reinstalled, E746-0033 is
• User settings for SNMPv3 All Data/ Settings”. 4. Restore the shown.
• Context settings 5.Turn OFF/ON the power. The TPM password
• Firewall settings (excluding MAC address filter) setting is automatically set to OFF. information stored
6.Set the TPM setting to ON (the in the HDD.
Function Settings public key and the common key
• Image-composite form for the common print operation are automatically set).
Main 1. Replace the main controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the main E747-xxxx (the different
• Printer settings Controller 2. The common key backed up in the controller PCB 2. extension is shown
• Transfer settings for the common receipt/ transfer settings PCB 2 HDD will be automatically restored 2. The common depends on cases).
• Inbox settings (SRAM) in the SRAM. key backed up
3. The TPM setting on the control in the HDD will
• Frequently-used Copy settings
panel is reset to OFF. Manually be automatically
• Registered short-cuts in “Other Functions” set the TPM setting to ON (the restored in the
• Frequently-used Send settings machine is operated in the TPM SRAM.
• Frequently-used settings for saving/ using files setting ON). 3. Restore the
4. Restore the password information password
Address Settings stored in the SRAM (see *1). information stored
in the SRAM (see
• Address Book *1).
T-2-13
Management Settings
• Sheet counts in Department ID Management *1 If “No” is indicated in the field of Backup Column in the table of “Security Information
• Settings for device information distribution Storage Location”, the relevant information should be set manually again.
• Certificate settings
• License registration
• Remote operation settings
• Box backup/ restoration
• TPM Settings
• Setting of audit log collection

2-21
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
2-22
●● Related Error Code ●● Security Information Storage Location
Error Storage Backup
Error description, Assumed cause, remedy Data Type Function Name of Data
Code Location Availability
E746 Error in encryption HDD Password/ BOX BOX Password Yes
    0031 Error in hardware PIN
Assumed cause The TPM PCB is not mounted; the TPM PCB for the other machine is HDD Password/ BOX Password for Fax BOX Yes
mounted; the TPM chip is crashed. PIN
Remedy Mount the TPM PCB for the machine; replace with the new TPM PCB HDD Password/ SEND Password for a file destination of Address Book Yes
0032 Error occurred but the system is recoverable PIN
Assumed cause Keys are unmatched HDD Password/ MEAP Authentication information registered by local device Yes
Remedy Restore the TPM key PIN authentication via SSO-H
0033 Error occurred and the system is unrecoverable HDD Certificate/ SSL,AMS Device key pair (SSL, AMS) No
Assumed cause Security information cannot be found in the HDD/ SRAM Secret Key
Remedy Execute “Initialize All Data/ Settings” HDD Certificate/
Signature User key pair No
Secret KeySEND
0035 TPM version error Install the supported TPM.
HDD Others User Key information linked to user (password) No
T-2-14
setting
information
SRAM Password/ BOX Password for encryption at BOX backup No
PIN
SRAM Password/ BOX Password for SMS server at BOX backup No
PIN
SRAM Password/ Advanced Password for Advanced BOX backup No
PIN BOX
SRAM Password/ Advanced Password for SMS server at Advanced BOX backup No
PIN BOX
SRAM Password/ SEND Password for LDAP server Yes
PIN
SRAM Password/ SEND Password for POP3 server Yes
PIN
SRAM Password/ SEND Password for time-stamped PDF Yes
PIN
SRAM Password/ SEND Password for Adobe ES Rights Management Server Yes
PIN
SRAM Password/ SEND PIN for destination list (in destination setting) Yes
PIN
SRAM Password/ UI Password for service mode No
PIN
SRAM Password/ Network Password for IPP authentication Yes
PIN
SRAM Password/ Network Password for FTP authentication Yes
PIN
SRAM Password/ Network User name and password for client in Proxy Yes
PIN authentication
SRAM Password/ Network Login password for Netware print server Yes
PIN

2-22
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option)
2-23
Storage
Data Type Function Name of Data
Backup ■■High capacity HDD (Option)
Location Availability
SRAM Password/ Network Policy common key for IPSec Yes The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 inch / 1TB
PIN HDD-H1 (option) makes 1TB in HDD capacity. High capacity is required in the case of saving
SRAM Password/ Network User name and password for PEAP/TTLS Yes large amounts of data with “Advanced Box.”
PIN authentication
SRAM Password/ Others Password for FAX receipt Yes
PIN Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box.
SRAM Password/ Others Department management data (including System Yes 15GB: in the case of 160GB HDD capacity
PIN Manager password) 629GB: in the case of 1TB HDD capacity
SRAM Encryption MIB Authentication and encryption keys for SNMPv3 No
key
SRAM Password/ MEAP SMS login password Yes
PIN FSTDEV Image data (User Box)

T-2-15 TMP_GEN Universal data (temporary file)

TMP_PSS For PDL spooling
TMP_FAX FAX data
●● Security Information Storage Location (data managed under the APL_SEND Address book, filter
APL_MEAP MEAP application
mechanism other than TPM management)
APL_GEN Universal data
Storage Backup APL_KEEP MEAP saving data
Data Type Function Name of Data
Location Availability APL_LOG System log
HDD Password/ Advanced User information in Advanced BOX Yes IMG_MNG Text management table
PIN BOX PDLDEV PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
T-2-16 FSTCDEV Job archiving (chasing)
THUMDEV Thumbnail
BOOTDEV System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
CRBDEV For Advanced Box
APL_CDS For distribution server

F-2-33
Although simple calculation says: 1TB - 160GB = 840GB, it requires 20% of snapshot area
and the data area to be used for internal processing in the system. Therefore, 629GB can be
actually used for text storage area.

2-23
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > High capacity HDD (Option)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-24
■■HDD mirroring feature (option) ●● Works before using this functionality (installation)
●● Overview Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the
for HDD1 mirroring PCB
This option enables HDD data mirroring (RAID1).
When one HDD is crashed, the other HDD backs up the operation. This minimizes the Slot.2 (HDD2)
downtime due to crash, thus enhancing the reliability as the document server.
Slot.1 (HDD1)

Mirroring is performed in the following 2 ways depending on HDD capacities (160GB or 1TB).
CH B
The mirroring PCB controls the reading / writing timing of HDD data.
CH A
The LED PCB indicates HDD operation statuses by LED.

Master (HDD1)
Turn ON the main power
HDD Mirroring Kit
160 GB
Standard Mirroring PCB (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
LED PCB Turn ON the mirroring feature > W/RAID ---> “1”
Ch A This Service Mode needs to be specified
Backup (HDD2) before installing the 2nd HDD.
Ch B
Turn OFF the main power
160 GB
Option
2.5inch/160 GB HDD -G1 HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the
Install HDD2 mirroring PCB.

Master (HDD1) Slot.2 (HDD2)

2.5inch/ 1 T B HDD - H1
Slot.1 (HDD1)
HDD Mirroring Kit
1 TB
Option Mirroring PCB
LED PCB CH B
Ch A CH A
Backup (HDD2)
Ch B

1 TB Turn ON the main power

Option

2.5inch/ 1 T B HDD - H1 The storage data of the 1st HDD is

Start “Rebuild” automatically copied to the 2nd HDD (this
F-2-34 operation is called “Rebuild”.

Time needed:
Complete “Rebuild” 80 GB HDD --- Approx. 20 minutes
1TB HDD ---Approx. 240 minutes
F-2-35
Rebuild progress is shown as messages on the status line of the control panel.
“Copying data to HDD. xx%”

2-24
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-25
●● List of operation status (LED)
MEMO:
• This machine can be used even during “rebuild” process (operation is performed with HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB.
HDD1) The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress, while the red LED indicates
• The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during “rebuild” process. any failures.
“Rebuild” is resumed once the power is turned ON the next time. This does not apply in
the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during “rebuild” process

●● HDD reading / writing operation

At reading: At writing: .

Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD) The same data is written to each HDD at
Ch B Ch A
only the same timing
(HDD2) (HDD1)
F-2-37
Main controller PCB 2 Main controller PCB 2
The table below lists HDD statuses indicated by each LED.
For example, when HDD1 is in access, the green LED on the side of HDD1 (ChA) blinks in a
Mirroring PCB Mirroring PCB high speed.
HDD 1 (Ch A) HDD 2 (Ch B) Name of
Status
Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED Mode
Normal (standby) --- --- --- --- Mirror mode
Accessing to HDD1 A (*1) --- --- ---
Accessing to HDD2 --- --- A (*1) ---
HDD1 failed --- A --- --- Degrade
HDD HDD HDD HDD mode
1 2 1 2 HDD2 is faulty --- --- --- A Degrade
mode
F-2-36 Copying data to HDD1 (Rebuild) --- / A B --- / A --- Rebuild
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up / blinking if reading / writing to each HDD mode
Copying data to HDD2 (Rebuild) --- / A --- --- / A B Halt mode
is performed properly.
Both HDDs failed or Master HDD --- (*2) A --- (*2) A Halt mode
In the case of failure: failed
• The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If only one HDD is faulty, the operation is T-2-17

continued by the other HDD. --- : Not lit A : Lit B : Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds
• If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation.
*1: The LED is blinking in a high speed
*2: The green LED may be lit

2-25
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-26
●● Description of Modes Mode Flow at Start-up
The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes.
Turn ON Main Power Switch
The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses.
The status flows among the modes below during operation. Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion
The table below lists descriptions of modes and operational overview.
Name of Halt Mode Mirror Mode Degrade Mode Rebuild Mode
Description Master HDD Status Backup HDD Status
Mode
Mirror Mode Both HDDs are normally In normal operation In normal operation Trouble See Overview of Trouble
operated Trouble Recovery

Degrade Mode Any trouble occurred in the In normal operation With troubles (HDD not Backup HDD
Both HDDs Either HDD
backup HDD suspends mirroring installed/ HDD in trouble) In which HDD? In which HDD?
operation. The machine can
be used under this condition, Degrade Mode Degrade Mode
Master HDD
however, the backup HDD
should be replaced at the See Overview of See Overview of
earliest convenience. Trouble Recovery Trouble Recovery
Rebuild mode The data of the master HDD is In normal operation In recovery from the
copied (rebuilt) to the backup trouble (Copying data of Unable to detect Unable to detect
HDD. The machine can be used Master HDD) Master HDD at Start-up Master HDD at Start-up
under this condition. Halt Mode

Halt mode Both HDDs are in trouble (see In trouble (HDD not With troubles (HDD not Halt Mode Halt Mode Halt Mode
*1) installed/ HDD installed installed/ HDD installed
not registered/ HDD not registered/ HDD
See Overview of Trouble Recovery
disconnected while the disconnected while the
mirroring board is in mirroring board is in
operation) operation) Mirror Mode
T-2-18
F-2-38
*1: Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.

2-26
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-27
Mode Flow during Operation ●● Overview of Trouble Recovery
When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to
Mirror Mode
each mode.
Trouble
The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the
Either HDD green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
In which HDD?
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is
Both HDDs Degrade Mode accessed firstly.
See Overview of
The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
Trouble Recovery
HDD1 HDD2
Halt Mode Name of (ChA) (ChB)
Master HDD Status Action for Recovery
In which HDD? Mode Red Red
LED LED
Backup HDD
Halt Mode Mirror Mode Normal (at standby) Under normal operation --- ---
Degrade HDD1 in trouble 1. Check the connection between HDD1 and A ---
Rebuild Mode Mode (see*1) Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
2. When the trouble is not recovered,
Trouble
replace the HDD1.
HDD2 in trouble 1. Check the connection between HDD2 and --- A
Unable to detect Unable to detect
Master HDD Backup HDD Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
HDD Status? 2. When the trouble is not recovered,
When successfully Degrade Mode replace HDD2.
Rebuilt
Rebuild mode Copying data to HDD1 Copying (under Rebuild) B ---
Halt Mode
Unable to detect Master HDD
(Rebuild)
Copying Data to HDD2 Copying (under Rebuild) --- B
(Rebuild)
Halt Mode Halt mode Both HDDs in trouble 1. Check Master HDD and Backup HDD (see A A
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery *2)
2. When the trouble is not recovered,
replace the two HDDs (format the
Mirror Mode
replaced HDD and download the system
software).
F-2-39
T-2-19

---: Not lit A: Lit B: Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds

*1: This mode shows the message, “Need to replace hard disks (contact your service
engineer)”, on the control panel. In addition, “310006” is indicated in CODE field of Alarm Log
in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2).
*2: Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to
the firstly-installed machine, thus this machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to
reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.

2-27
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Controls > Removable HDD (option)
2-28
●● Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality ■■Removable HDD (option)
1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.
With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).
The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended
not to turn off the power and wait until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD
This option is assumed to be used for: enhancing information security at government/public
removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.
offices or private companies.
• Remove the HDD after the close of work to be kept in a safe.
2. The mirroring board controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed
• Install the HDD at the start of work. Make the HDD locked during operation.
based on the HDD serial number and the model serial number instead of slot locations.
If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and
Backup HDDs may be switched.
Ex) When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring board automatically recognizes
the backup HDD as the master. Thus, the master and backup HDDs are switched
even without changing the slot locations.
If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel
the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly-blinked LED (ChA or ChB) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after
power-on.

3. For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct
them not to change the removable HDD location in advance.
Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.
Otherwise, HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed.

4. The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.

• Removable HDD is extended
• Either HDD is in trouble Removable HDD

CAUTION:
F-2-40
Be sure to use a new HDD when replacing the HDD.

NOTE:
• To use this option, no setting is required with the software.
• The user needs to prepare a key because there is no key with this kit.
5. Upgrading should be done only in Mirror Mode while mirroring in ongoing. Upgrading in
Degrade or Rebuild mode is basically prohibited. Always prioritize Mirror Mode when you
take any actions.

2-28
2
Technology > Controller System > Controls > Removable HDD (option)
 2 Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > HDD
2-29
Service Operations Back Up Restore/
Resetting
Object Item Remarlks

Backup of SST SST MEAP application(SMS) Meapback.bin can be restored

■■HDD MEAP (Meapback) (Meapback) User authentication after replacement or initialization
information registered of the HDD.
<Procedure of parts replacement> in the Local Device [CAUTION]
Refer to Removing HDD Authentication user When the following service
<Procedure of adjustment> authentication system of mode is executed, Meapback.bin
SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) cannot be restored.
1. Before Replacing
COPIER > FUNCTION >
Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. SYSTEM > CHK-TYPE > 7
Refer to "Back Up" row for data back up. COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR
Back Up Restore/ Object Item Remarlks
Resetting
Backup of Remote UI Remote UI Mail Box Cannot back up Advanced Box TPM Non After restarting TPM setup Backup data of the TPM key can
data Settings/ Settings/ Memory RX Inbox data to the SMB server when an the device, be used only when replacing the
Registration > Registration > Confidential Fax Inbox optional HDD (except 160 GB) is execute TPM PCB. When replacing the
Management Management Advanced Box installed. "Initialize All HDD, perform backup with TPM
Settings Settings > Form for Composition Data/Settings", [ON] again.
> Data Data and perform
Management Management backup with
> Back Up > TPM [ON].
Restore Service Non COPIER> The set value of the DC Since the backup data cannot
Export of Remote UI Remote UI Settings/Registration Basic When exporting "Service Mode mode FUNCTION> controller be saved to a location outside of
settings Settings/ Settings/ Information Settings", select Copier > Option setting SYSTEM> the device, it is recommended
Registration > Registration > Paper Type Management > USER > SMD-EXPT > 1. values DSRAMBUP to perform backup again after
Management Management Settings SMD-EXPT cannot be exported, (DC-CON) replacing the HDD.
Settings Settings > Forwarding Settings therefore the settings need to When the DC Controller PCB
> Data Data Box Settings be made every time the HDD is needs to be replaced, in order
Management Management Department ID replaced. to update the data to the latest
> Export > Management Settings one, perform backup again
Import Main Menu Settings immediately before replacing the
Web Access Settings PCB.
Favorite Settings
Address Book Service Non COPIER> The set value of the Since the backup data cannot
User Access Control for mode FUNCTION> Reader controller be saved to a location outside of
Advanced Box setting SYSTEM> the device, it is recommended
Quick Menu Settings values RSRAMBUP to perform backup again after
MEAP Application Setting (R-CON) replacing the HDD.
Information When the Reader Controller
User Setting Information PCB needs to be replaced, in
iW Function Flow Settings order to update the data to the
Service Mode Settings latest one, perform backup again
immediately before replacing the
PCB.

T-2-20

2-29
2
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > HDD
 2 Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > HDD
2-30
2. After Replacing
When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager
1) HDD format
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA
ON the main powerswitch.) collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced,
reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following
1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.
procedures.
2) Downloading system software
2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others).
3) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate 1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press “OK” button.(e.g.: If
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter “1” of the leading card.)
5) Restoring the backup data 2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations
Refer to "Restore/Resetting" row for data restore by a list of "<Procedure of from Settings/Registration mode.
adjustment>" In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page
Totals, be sure that “ID00000001” to “ID00001000” are created.
6) Resetting/registering the data
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement,
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
reset/register the data.
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA ertificate, Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then,
request the user to generate them again. turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
8) Executing “Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)” If “System Manager ID” and “System PIN” are not registered, “card registration
Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto to device” cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
Adjust Gradation operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management >
Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card
ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure
that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting
Manager is collected.

CAUTION:Points to Caution when Using the System Software-installed HDD

When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other achine
(different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is
not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.

2-30
2
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > HDD
 2 Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1
2-31
■■ Main Controller PCB 1
Service part:
• Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 1 + Controller Box Frame + Cooling Fan
• Parts number differs on a model basis (speed basis).

Cooling Fan
Flash PCB

TPM PCB
F-2-42

Controller Box Main Controller PCB 1

Frame NOTE:
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.
F-2-41
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.

1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB

• DDR2-SDRAM (2 pc.)
• Flash PCB
• TPM PCB

2-31
2
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1
 2 Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
2-32
■■Main Controller PCB 2 When Replacing
1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
Service part:
• Option DDR2-SDRAM (1 pc.)
• Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 2 + Controller Box Frame
• Bypass PCB
Main Controller PCB 2 • Memory PCB

Bypass PCB

Image Processing
Sub PCB

Controller Box
Frame

F-2-43
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.
DDR2-SDRAM

Backup the Settings/Registration data F-2-44

Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory device or
an HDD from download mode. Prohibited Operation:
* However, if the HDD Encryption Board is installed, backup to an HDD is not possible. It is Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory device. number).
Operation method: If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD fail the restoration.
then, • Main Controller PCB 1
Download Menu > Backup > SRAM(HDD/USB) • Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)
• Memory PCB

Note:
Download Menu is not intended for the "Settings/Registration > Paper Type Management
Settings".
You need back up from:
Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Export

2-32
2
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
 2 Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
2-33
<Actions after Parts Replacement> ●● DC Controller PCB
1. Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2. Before replacing/clearing RAM
1) While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch. COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
2) The restore of backup data: After replacing/clearing RAM:
When Download Menu is displayed, connect USB memory to the main body. COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES
Download Menu 2 > Restore
3) Specify and register the data again.
Import from:
Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import
4) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added by the user,
ask the user to execute reinstallation.

●● TPM PCB
When TPM setting is “OFF”
Any operation is not necessary at replacement.

When TPM setting is “ON”

It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to
“ON”.

1) Removing the network cable

Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access
via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately.
2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch
3) Restoring the TPM key
Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch

●● Flash PCB
Any operation is not necessary at replacement.

●● Riser PCB
Any operation is not necessary at replacement.
Setting unit as a service part:
Riser PCB + Frame

2-33
2
Technology > Controller System > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
2-34

DCM 1) Perform the import of the DCM data of the service mode earlier.
2) Reboot the Host machine.
3) Import the DCM data of the user mode.
DCM • As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export
and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it
■■Overview ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.
DCM (Device Configuration Management) is a function to migrate the setting values (of user • Data to which no password is set when exporting service mode cannot be loaded
mode and service mode). In terms of the description in the User’s Guide, it is synonymous from collective import from RUI. When assuming to perform collective import from RUI,
with "Import/Export All". Service mode setting values can be backed up/restored from the top password must be set to data to be exported.
screen of service mode. • Following limitations are applied to password for DCM data:
By the conventional method for backing up SRAM of the Main Controller 2, data could be • Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
backed up/restored only for the same machine. DCM supports the following 3 patterns. • No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
set is allowed only for service mode.)
• The same machine (backup for the purpose of providing against emergency) • No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
• A different machine of the same model (setting values are migrated collectively to multiple • Password is case sensitive.
machines when replacing a host machine) • At the time of following setting, Host matchine does not recognize USB memory.The DCM
• A different model (e.g.: the setting values are copied from an old model to a new model) function is not usable, too.
●● Where data is stored • Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP
Store the backup data in the following location. Driver for External USB Device = On
• User > PC (RUI)
• Service > USB memory device/HDD of the machine (top screen of service mode) ●● Restrictions about import/export
●● Setting values that can be backed up • An import/export process ends with error while the following specific job is executed;
The values changed by the user under [Settings/Registration] and those specified in service • Send job,
mode can be backed up. • Forwarding job,
• FAX reception job,
Only setting values are backed up. Image data such as scanned image cannot be backed up.
• IFAX reception job
• Setting values under [Settings/Registration] • If this function is executed with a print job simultaneously, it affects the operation such as;
• Service mode setting values UI is locked, or a print job is cleared by reboot after import. So it requires careful operation.
●● General limitations on DCM • A device rejects an import/ export request during shut-down.
• Service mode for FAX cannot be migrated. • If this function is executed with device information distribution or RUI import/ export
• With DCM, stored data, MEAP application, and system option license cannot be migrated. (conventional function) simultaneously, the first coming job takes priority and they are
• A .dcm file exported to the internal HDD is not deleted even when the machine is restarted. controlled exclusively.
Only 2 files at a maximum are stored in HDD. When there are more than 2 files, the old • If this function is executed with a firmware update by a CDS Updater simultaneously, a
.dcm files are deleted from the oldest. firmware update process takes priority, and this function is stopped temporarily by reboot.
• Continuous import is not guaranteed. After importing a file, the machine must be restarted. • When error code is issued, this function ends with error.
If executing import without restart, NG is displayed and a file is not imported. • If the display language differs between export and import, a setting value of a text corrupts
• When importing DCM file in service mode and user mode separately, perform it in the in some cases. The character corruption can be solved by changing the display language
following procedures. to the appropriate one.

2-34
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
2-35
●● Import/Export All from remote UI
Note:
The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the
• Settings/Registration Basic Information setting in the following service mode.
• Box Settings Service mode L1 > Copier > Option > USER > SMD-EXPT
[0]: Hide the service mode settings. (Def.)
• Department ID Management Settings [1]: Display the service mode settings.
• Main Menu Settings
• Favorite Settings
• Address Book
• Forwarding Settings
• Quick Menu Settings
• MEAP Application Setting Information
Collective Import Using Data Collectively Exported from RUI
• Paper Type Management Settings
For the reason of security, it is not appropriate that the user mode can be exported from
• User Access Control for Advanced Space
service mode without user's permission. Because of that, it cannot be exported due to the
• Web Access Settings
specification However, it is possible to import the setting values of user mode exported from
• Service Mode Settings(Display/hide of the service mode settings on the export screen)
RUI.

Preparation
PC and web browser
USB memory device to store the data of reference machine

Overall flow
1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine.
2. Export the data of reference machine including service mode from RUI.
3. Copy the data to the root of the USB memory device using a PC.
4. Connect the USB memory device to the copy destination machine.
5. Execute import by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode.

The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.

Compatibility level (Lv) Description

0 Not supported.
F-2-45
1 Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only.
Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.
2 Can import to a device of a same model.
3 Can import to a device of a different model also.
T-2-21

2-35
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
2-36
Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3
Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings Yes Yes No IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 Yes Yes Yes
Register Custom Size Yes Yes No IP Address Settings
Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/Restoration Yes Yes Yes IP Address Yes No No
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel) Yes Yes Yes Subnet Mask Yes Yes Yes
Copy Screen Display Settings Yes Yes Yes Gateway Address Yes Yes Yes
Display Fax Function Yes Yes Yes DHCP Yes Yes Yes
Store Location Display Settings Yes Yes Yes RARP Yes Yes Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off Yes Yes Yes BOOTP Yes Yes Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch Yes Yes Yes DHCP Option Settings Yes Yes Yes
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature Yes Yes Yes IPv6 Settings Use IPv6 Yes Yes Yes
Display Remaining Paper Message Yes Yes Yes Stateless Address Yes Yes Yes
Settings
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status Yes Yes Yes Manual Address Settings Yes No No
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area Yes Yes Yes Use DHCPv6 Yes Yes Yes
Select Paper Screen Priority Yes Yes Yes DNS Settings DNS Server Address Yes Yes Yes
mm/Inch Entry Switch Yes Yes Yes Settings
ID/User Name Display On/Off Yes Yes Yes DNS Host/Domain Name Yes No No
Settings
Display Remaining Toner Error Message Yes Yes Yes DNS Dynamic Update Yes Yes Yes
Timer/Energy Time Format Yes Yes Yes Settings
Settings WINS Settings Yes Yes Yes
Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Yes Yes Yes
LPD Print Settings Yes Yes Yes
Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
RAW Print Settings Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
SNTP Settings Yes Yes Yes
Function After Auto Reset Yes Yes Yes
FTP Print Settings Yes Yes Yes
Auto Shutdown Time Yes Yes Yes
WSD Settings Yes Yes Yes
Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer Yes Yes Yes
Use FTP PASV Mode Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Time Yes Yes Yes
Multicast Discovery Settings Yes Yes Yes
Sleep Mode Energy Use Yes Yes Yes
Use HTTP Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer Yes Yes Yes
Use WebDAV Server Yes Yes Yes
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings Yes Yes Yes
Proxy Settings Yes Yes Yes
Network Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes Yes Yes Yes
NetWare Settings Yes Yes Yes
TCP/IP Settings
AppleTalk Settings Yes No No
SMB Server Settings Yes No No
SNMP Settings Yes Yes Yes
Dedicated Port Settings Yes Yes Yes
Use Spool Function Yes Yes Yes
Startup Settings Yes Yes Yes
Ethernet Driver Settings Yes Yes Yes

2-36
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
2-37
Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3
Firewall Settings Yes Yes Yes Copy Auto Collate Yes Yes Yes
External Interface USB Settings Yes Yes Yes Auto Orientation Yes Yes Yes
Accessibility Key Repetition Settings Yes Yes Yes Select Color Settings for Copy Yes Yes Yes
Reversed Display (Color) Yes Yes Yes Send Common Settings Yes Yes Yes
Adjustment/Maintenance E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
Adjust Image Correct Density Yes Yes Yes Register Unit Name Yes Yes Yes
Quality Full Color Printing Vividness Settings Yes No No Communication SMTP RX Yes Yes Yes
Fine Adjust Zoom Yes No No Settings POP Yes Yes Yes
Function Common Paper Feed Settings Yes Yes No SMTP Server Yes Yes Yes
Settings Print Settings E-Mail Address Yes No No
Text/Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to Yes Yes No POP Server Yes Yes Yes
Black POP Login Name Yes No No
Output Report Default Settings Yes Yes Yes
POP Password Yes No No
Superimpose Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes
POP Interval Yes Yes Yes
Register Characters for Page No./ Yes Yes Yes
Watermark Authent./Encryption Yes Yes Yes
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock Yes Yes Yes Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX Yes Yes Yes
Scan Settings Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX Yes Yes Yes
Streak Prevention Yes Yes No Maximum Data Size for Sending Yes Yes Yes
Feeder Black Scan Speed/Image Qlty. Yes Yes No Default Subject Yes Yes Yes
Priority Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply Yes Yes Yes
LTRR/STMT Original Selection Yes Yes No
Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender Yes Yes Yes
Remote Scan Gamma Value Yes Yes No
Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail Yes Yes Yes
Auto Online Yes Yes Yes
Full Mode TX Timeout Yes Yes Yes
Auto Offline Yes Yes Yes
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt Yes Yes Yes
Generate File
Use Send via Server Yes Yes Yes
High Compression Image Quality Level Yes Yes Yes
Allow MDN Not via Server Yes Yes Yes
Compact PDF Settings for Text Original Yes Yes Yes
Restrict TX Destination Domain Yes Yes Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings Yes Yes Yes
Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail Yes Yes Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings Yes Yes Yes
Addresses
OOXML Settings Yes Yes Yes Fax Settings
Include Background Images in Word File Yes Yes Yes Default Screen Yes Yes Yes
Specify Minimum PDF Version Yes Yes Yes Change Default Settings Yes Yes Yes
Format PDF to PDF/A Yes Yes Yes Register Options Shortcuts Yes Yes Yes
Optimize PDF for Web Yes Yes Yes Register Sender Name (TTI) Yes Yes Yes
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Yes Yes Yes Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name Yes Yes Yes
Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Yes Yes Yes ECM TX Yes Yes Yes
Set Authentication Method Yes Yes Yes Set Pause Time Yes Yes Yes
Auto Redial Yes Yes Yes

2-37
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
2-38
Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3
Check Dial Tone Before Sending Yes Yes Yes Device Information Delivery Settings
Fax TX Report Yes Yes Yes Register Destinations Yes Yes No
Fax Activity Report Yes Yes Yes Set Auto Delivery Yes Yes No
Set Line Line 1 to Line 2 Yes Yes Yes Restrict Receiving Device Information Yes Yes Yes
Register Unit Telephone Yes No No Restrict Receiving for Each Function Yes Yes Yes
Number Report Settings Yes Yes Yes
Register Unit Name Yes No No
Display Job Status Before Authentication Yes Yes Yes
Select Line Type Yes Yes Yes
Display Log Yes Yes Yes
Select TX Line Yes Yes Yes
Audit Log Retrieval Yes Yes Yes
TX Start Speed Yes Yes Yes
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2 Yes Yes Yes
R-Key Setting Yes Yes Yes
License/Other Message Board/Support Link Yes Yes Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Number Yes Yes Yes
Remote Operation Settings Yes Yes Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX Yes Yes Yes
Data Back Up/Restore Settings Yes Yes Yes
Remote Fax TX Settings Yes Yes Yes
Management HDD Data Complete Deletion Yes Yes Yes
Remote Fax Settings Yes Yes Yes
Box Settings Function Settings Receive/ForwardCommon Settings Yes Yes Yes
Receive/Forward Common Settings Yes Yes Yes
Fax Settings Yes Yes Yes
Store/Access Mail Box Settings Yes Yes Yes
Store/Access Mail Box Settings Yes Yes Yes Files
Files Advanced Space Settings Yes Yes Yes Access Stored Mail Box (Print) Color Balance (Options) Yes Yes No
Network Settings Yes Yes Yes Files
Scan and Store Advanced Space Custom (Scan Size) Yes Yes No
Memory Media Settings Yes Yes Yes (Scan)
Secure Print Simple Authentication Settings Yes Yes Yes Department ID Management User System Manager Yes Yes Yes
Management Settings Management Information Settings
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs Yes Yes Yes
Settings
Set Change Default Display of Address Book Yes Yes Yes Department ID Management
Destination Address Book PIN Yes Yes Yes Register PIN Yes Yes Yes
Manage Address Book Access Numbers Yes Yes Yes Main Menu Main Menu Setting File Yes Yes Yes
Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book Yes Yes Yes Settings Settings
Register LDAP Server Yes Yes No
Favorite Copy Register/Edit Favorite Settings Yes Yes No
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server Yes Yes Yes Settings
Change Default LDAP Search Conditions Yes Yes Yes
Change Default Settings Yes Yes No
Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions Yes Yes No
Register Options Shortcuts (Regular Copy) Yes Yes No
Acquire Remote Acquire Address Book Yes Yes Yes
Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy) Yes Yes No
Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address Yes Yes Yes Send Common Settings Yes Yes Yes
Communication Timeout Yes Yes Yes Fax Settings Yes Yes Yes
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment Yes Yes Yes Store/Access Common Settings Yes Yes No
Make Remote Make Address Book Open Yes Yes Yes Files
Copy Basic Color Balance (Options) Yes Yes No
Add. Book Open
Management Device Device Information Settings Yes No No Features Screen
Settings Management

2-38
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-39
Setting Information Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 ■■Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
Address Book Set Destination Register Destinations Yes Yes Yes
The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.
Rename Address List Yes Yes Yes
Register One-Touch Yes Yes Yes Compatibility level (Lv) Description
Forwarding Function Settings Receive/ForwardCommon Settings Yes Yes Yes 0 Not supported.
Settings 1 Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only.
Quick Menu Quick Menu Button File Yes Yes No Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.
Settings Settings 2 Can import to a device of a same model.
3 Can import to a device of a different model also.
MEAP iW Function Flow Flow Data File Yes Yes Yes
Application T-2-23
Setting
Information
Operation Setting File Yes Yes Yes DCM list for Service Mode
MEAP User Data Yes Yes Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small
Setting Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
Information COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X Yes
MEAP Application Data Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y Yes
Setting
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Yes
Information COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY STRD-POS Yes
Paper Type Preferences Paper Settings Paper Type Management Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X-MG Yes
Management Settings
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJY-DF2 Yes
Settings
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-MG Yes
User Access User Access User List Yes Yes Yes COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-T Yes
Control for Control for COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-L Yes
Advanced Advanced Space COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-R Yes
Space COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B Yes
Integrated Authentication Settings Yes Yes Yes COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-T2 Yes
Authentication/Operation Log Management Yes Yes Yes COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-X Yes
Web Access Web Access Favorites Yes Yes Yes
Settings Settings COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Y Yes
Settings Yes Yes Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Z Yes
T-2-22 COPIER ADJUST CCD SH-TRGT Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-RG Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-GB Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-R Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-G Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-B Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M3 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M4 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M5 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M6 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M7 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M8 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M9 Yes

2-39
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-40
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S1 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S12 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S2 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M10 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S3 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M11 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S4 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M12 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S5 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S10 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S6 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S11 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S7 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S12 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S8 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S9 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K10 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2GB Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2RG Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K10 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R2 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-BW Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R10 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-G Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B2 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-B Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B10 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-R Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G2 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD CCD-CHG2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G10 Yes COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-BW Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD CCD-CHNG Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M1 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M2 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M3 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M4 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M5 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M6 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M7 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M8 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M9 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S1 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S2 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S3 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S4 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S5 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S6 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S7 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S8 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S9 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R2 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R10 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B2 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B10 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G2 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G10 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M10 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M11 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M12 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S10 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S11 Yes COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-M Yes

2-40
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-41
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-C Yes COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-K Yes COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A4R Yes COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A6R Yes COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A4 Yes COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK1-A4 Yes COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK1-A5R Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REGIST Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK2-A4 Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK2-A5R Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK3-A4 Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C3 Yes
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK3-A5R Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C4 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-Y Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MF Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-M Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-DK Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-C Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-Y Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-THCK Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-M Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-C Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUP2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-K Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-FEED1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTY Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-MULT1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTM Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-DUP1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTC Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ PFIX-FAN Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTY Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTM Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTC Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK3 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-Y Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-H2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-M Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-S Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMAX-C Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MF Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-Y Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MFH1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-M Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MFH2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-C Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MFS Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-K Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ PFIX-SPD Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS ALF-C Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ EXT-SPD Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-K-Y Yes COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUPS Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-K-M Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGY Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-K-C Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGM Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-K-K Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGC Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTK Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGY2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTK Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGM2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-K Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGC2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-HY Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTAC-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-HM Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTAC-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-HC Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTAC-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-LY Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACY2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-LM Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACM2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-LC Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACC2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-Y Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACY3 Yes
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-M Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACM3 Yes

2-41
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-42
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACC3 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP5 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI PRI-FREQ Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP6 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DHT-ON Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP7 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT1 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP8 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT2 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT3 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT4 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT5 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT6 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK4 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT7 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2EL Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT8 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR POSTSW-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR1 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2ELSW Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR2 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR3 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR4 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR5 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TK12 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR6 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY3 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR7 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM3 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR8 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC3 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR1 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TK13 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR2 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TK42 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR3 Yes COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TK43 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR4 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR5 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR6 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR7 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR8 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV1 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV2 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV3 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV4 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV5 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV6 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-HS-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV7 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAG-V Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV8 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-H-1 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR1 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-H-2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR2 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-Y Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR3 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-M Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR4 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-C Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR5 Yes COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG LSR-V-K Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR6 Yes COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR7 Yes COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR8 Yes COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP1 Yes COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP2 Yes COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP3 Yes COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN2 Yes
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP4 Yes COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT2 Yes

2-42
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-43
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER ADJUST MISC WT-ER-LV Yes COPIER OPTION ACC CARD-SW Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC REOS-PG Yes COPIER OPTION ACC STPL-LMT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ3 Yes COPIER OPTION ACC SC-TYPE Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ3 Yes COPIER OPTION ACC CC-SPSW Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ3 Yes COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT-PRC Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN3 Yes COPIER OPTION ACC DA-PUCT Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT3 Yes COPIER OPTION ACC MIN-PRC Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC SH-ADJ Yes COPIER OPTION ACC MAX-PRC Yes
COPIER ADJUST MISC SH-ADJ2 Yes COPIER OPTION ACC MIC-TUN Yes
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-Y Yes COPIER OPTION ACC SRL-SPSW Yes
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-M Yes COPIER OPTION ACC PDL-THR Yes
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-C Yes COPIER OPTION ACC CR-TYPE Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-K Yes COPIER OPTION BODY MODEL-SZ Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-K Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SCANSLCT Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-Y Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PASCAL Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-M Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DH-SW Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-C Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SENS-CNF Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-K Yes COPIER OPTION BODY CONFIG Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-Y Yes COPIER OPTION BODY RAW-DATA Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-M Yes COPIER OPTION BODY IFAX-LIM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-C Yes COPIER OPTION BODY W/SCNR Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-K Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SMTPTXPN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VDGAIN-Y Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SMTPRXPN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VDGAIN-M Yes COPIER OPTION BODY POP3PN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VDGAIN-C Yes COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-LGL Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPGAIN-Y Yes COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-LTR Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPGAIN-M Yes COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-B5 Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPGAIN-C Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-COPY Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-Y Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-BOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-M Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-SEND Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-C Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-FAX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-K Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SCR-SLCT Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-Y Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMC-SLCT Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-M Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DEVL-VTH Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-C Yes COPIER OPTION BODY FTPTXPN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-K Yes COPIER OPTION BODY INTPPR-1 Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL KEY Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PRN-FLG Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E-RDS Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SCN-FLG Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-PORT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY INTROT-1 Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-ADR Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY INTROT-2 Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS-CTL Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY INTROT-T Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL BIT-SVC Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY NWERR-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION MISC-R 1PCLBUDR Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DEVL-PTH Yes
COPIER FUNCTION MISC-R 1PCLBOVR Yes COPIER OPTION BODY AUTO-DH Yes
COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DEBUG-1 Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY STS-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Yes COPIER OPTION BODY CMD-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION ACC DK-P Yes COPIER OPTION BODY MODELSZ2 Yes

2-43
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-44
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER OPTION BODY OHP-PTH Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-EPRNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UISW-DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-WEB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST-L1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-HOLD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST-L2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY WEBV-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-CMD5 Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PASCL-TY Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-GSAPI Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY CARD-RNG Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-NTLM Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY WUEN-LIV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-PLNWS Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY COMP-PRT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-PLN Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY ARCDT-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-LGN Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY ADJ-VPP Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY T-CRG-SW Yes COPIER OPTION BODY AST-SEL Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MEAP-PN Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY REGM-SEL Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TNR-DWN Yes COPIER OPTION BODY 2TR-RVON Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMIC-BK Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SJOB-CL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SVMD-ENT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DHCP-12 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DH-MODE Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DHCP-81 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ENVP-INT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY IFX-CHIG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PCHINT-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY USB-RCNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PCHINT-V Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UNLMTBND Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FXWRNLVL Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SCANTYPE Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FXMSG-SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DNSTRANS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CHNG-STS Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CHNG-CMD Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DRY-CISU Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ANIM-SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY RMT-CNSL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MEAP-SSL Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY MEAP-PRI Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SC-L-CNT Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY EVLP-SPD Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DH-TMG Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PROXYRES Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MIX-FLG Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY WOLTRANS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY REPORT-Z Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DF2DSTL1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IFXEML-Z Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DF2DSTL2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY BMLNKS-Z Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY 802XTOUT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY KSIZE-SW Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY IKERETRY Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY LPD-PORT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SPDALDEL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-A4R Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY NCONF-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PDF-RDCT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY ABK-TOOL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY REDU-CNT Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-Y Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY REBOOTSW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-M Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY VP-ART Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-C Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY VP-TXT Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-K Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-PRINT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY IKEINTVL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY IPSDEBLV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-INT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SP-LINK Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-POT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY W/RAID Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-RTR Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PSWD-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SJB-UNW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SM-PSWD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IMGC-ADJ Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-RSCAN Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP2 Yes

2-44
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-45
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER OPTION BODY RPT2SIDE Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-R2-2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY AFS-JOB Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY FCOT-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY AFC-EVNT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY MC-FANSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-SBOX Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PFWFTPRT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-MEM Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY BXNUPLOG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ILOGMODE Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TFL-RTC Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ILOGKEEP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UI-CUSTM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PSCL-MS Yes COPIER OPTION BODY BUSI-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-DISP Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SDLMTWRN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-NAVI Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY JLK-PWSC Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ERS-SEL Yes COPIER OPTION BODY CNTCNFSW Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY STND-PNL Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY USZ-FEED Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY INVALPDL Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY IPMTU Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IMGCNTPR Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DDNSINTV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-FIRM Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY ITB-TYPE Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-MEAP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY FAX-INT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-UGW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PDL-Z-LG Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY LOCLFIRM Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-LVUP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY RSHDW-SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY AMSOFFSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-WUT Yes COPIER OPTION BODY USEUPTNR Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-P1-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY UA-OFFSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-P1-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY MIB-NVTA Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-P2-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY MIB-EXT Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-P2-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SCT-BTN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H1-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY DFEJCLED Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H1-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SVC-RUI Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H2-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY PSCL-TBL Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H2-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY BGE-OFS Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H3-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY USER-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H3-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H4-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY STNDBY-A Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H4-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY SDTM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-THIN Yes COPIER OPTION BODY BXSHIFT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DWN-TMP Yes COPIER OPTION BODY HOME-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ARC-INT1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY NO-LGOUT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ARC-INT2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY T-DLV-BK Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SCR-SW Yes COPIER OPTION BODY JM-ERR-D Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP3 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY JM-ERR-R Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP4 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY LOW-SEQ Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP5 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY FX-WAIT Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP6 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC1A-2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP7 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC1B-2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP8 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC1C-2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IPTBROAD Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-C2-1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-R1-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-C2-2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-R2-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-C3-1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-R1-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-C3-2 Yes

2-45
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-46
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-C4-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MIX5 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-C4-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MIX6 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC5A-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MIX7 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC5A-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TR-BND3 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC5B-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TR-BND4 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC5B-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TRCLN3-P Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC5C-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TRCLN4-P Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC5C-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY KIN-SW1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPOHT-1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY KIN-SW2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMPOHT-2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY KIN-SW3 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-CU-P1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC1A-1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-CU-P2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC1B-1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-CU-R1 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMPC1C-1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-CU-R2 Yes COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-THN2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-CU-TN Yes COPIER OPTION CST U1-NAME Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-CU-OT Yes COPIER OPTION CST U2-NAME Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WEB-PRS Yes COPIER OPTION CST U3-NAME Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WEB-TMP Yes COPIER OPTION CST U4-NAME Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY EF-TMP11 Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST3-P1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY EF-TMP21 Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST3-P2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY EF-TMP22 Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST4-P1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY EF-TMP23 Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST4-P2 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DWN-TMP2 Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST3-U1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IHOFFTMP Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST3-U3 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-L-CHG Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST4-U1 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WEB-FEED Yes COPIER OPTION CST CST4-U3 Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CORE-CLN Yes COPIER OPTION INT-FACE IMG-CONT Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY COL-SHRT Yes COPIER OPTION INT-FACE AP-OPT Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY COL-LONG Yes COPIER OPTION INT-FACE AP-ACCNT Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MIX1 Yes COPIER OPTION INT-FACE AP-CODE Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MIX2 Yes COPIER OPTION INT-FACE NWCT-TM Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MIX3 Yes COPIER OPTION USER COPY-LIM Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WEB-CLN Yes COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP11 Yes COPIER OPTION USER SIZE-DET Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP12 Yes COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER1 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP13 Yes COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER2 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP14 Yes COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER3 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP21 Yes COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER4 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP23 Yes COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER5 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP24 Yes COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER6 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP25 Yes COPIER OPTION USER DATE-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP26 Yes COPIER OPTION USER MB-CCV Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CF-TMP27 Yes COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-CU-13 Yes COPIER OPTION USER B4-L-CNT Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FIX-MODE Yes COPIER OPTION USER TRY-STP Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FIX-RCPR Yes COPIER OPTION USER MF-LG-ST Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MIX4 Yes COPIER OPTION USER CNT-DISP Yes Yes Yes

2-46
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-47
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
COPIER OPTION USER COPY-JOB Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER CLR-TIM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER OP-SZ-DT Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER HDCR-DSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER NW-SCAN Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER SNMP-COA Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER INS-C-S Yes COPIER OPTION USER SNMP-COU Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER HDCR-DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER BWCL-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JOB-INVL Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER SCALL-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER LGSW-DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER SCALLCMP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER TAB-ROT Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER USBH-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PR-PSESW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER USBM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IDPRN-SW Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER USBI-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CPRT-DSP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PCL-COPY Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER USBB-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER USBR-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER TAB-ACC Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER POL-SCAN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER BCNT-AST Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-SBOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PRJOB-CP Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-DFAX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DFLT-CPY Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-REP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DFLT-BOX Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-FREP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DOC-REM Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-BOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DPT-ID-7 Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-FORM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER RUI-RJT Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-PREV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SND-RATE Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-PULL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CTM-S06 Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-PDLB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FREG-SW Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-JOBK Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-SZL Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-JDF Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-PGD Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-RUI Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER MEAPSAFE Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER JA-WEB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER TRAY-FLL Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER CS-ACC Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PRNT-POS Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER EXP-CRYP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER AFN-PSWD Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP1SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PTJAM-RC Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER CNCL-ATH Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PDL-NCSW Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER EZY-SCRP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SLP-SLCT Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER DMN-MTCH Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PS-MODE Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER SNDSTREN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CNCT-RLZ Yes Yes Yes COPIER OPTION USER FAXSTREN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER7 Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST DOCST Yes
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER8 Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST LA-SPEED Yes
COPIER OPTION USER 2C-CT-SW Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST DOCST2 Yes
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-SW Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST LA-SPD2 Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FROM-OF Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN1 Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DOM-ADD Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN2 Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FILE-OF Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST ADJSSCN1 Yes
COPIER OPTION USER MAIL-OF Yes Yes Yes FEEDER ADJUST ADJSSCN2 Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-OF Yes Yes Yes SORTER ADJUST PNCH-HLE Yes
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-DEF Yes Yes Yes SORTER ADJUST PNCH-Y Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FREE-DSP Yes SORTER ADJUST PF-A3Z1 Yes
COPIER OPTION USER TNRB-SW Yes Yes Yes SORTER ADJUST PF-A3Z2 Yes

2-47
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
2-48
Initial screen Large Middle Small Initial screen Large Middle Small
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3 Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
SORTER ADJUST PF-B4Z1 Yes SORTER ADJUST RTR-DWB5 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-B4Z2 Yes SORTER ADJUST RTR-DWLT Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RZ1 Yes SORTER ADJUST BF-SB-A4 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RZ2 Yes SORTER ADJUST BF-SB-B5 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-LDRZ1 Yes SORTER ADJUST BF-SB-LT Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-LDRZ2 Yes SORTER ADJUST RTR-UPA4 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGLZ1 Yes SORTER ADJUST RTR-UPB5 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGLZ2 Yes SORTER ADJUST RTR-UPLT Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRZ1 Yes SORTER ADJUST PUNCH-SB Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRZ2 Yes SORTER ADJUST ST-ALG1 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RC1 Yes SORTER ADJUST ST-ALG2 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RC2 Yes SORTER ADJUST STP-F3 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRC1 Yes SORTER ADJUST STP-F4 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRC2 Yes SORTER ADJUST STP-R3 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4R31 Yes SORTER ADJUST STP-R4 Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4R32 Yes SORTER ADJUST SW-UP-RL Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRR31 Yes SORTER ADJUST PRCS-RET Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRR32 Yes SORTER ADJUST UP-CL Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4R41 Yes SORTER ADJUST DW-CL Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4R42 Yes SORTER ADJUST THC-CL Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRR41 Yes SORTER ADJUST THC-PUSH Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRR42 Yes SORTER ADJUST OFST-STC Yes
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4R21 Yes SORTER ADJUST THN-STC Yes
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRR21 Yes SORTER ADJUST STP-P-CH Yes
SORTER ADJUST PRCS-ALG Yes SORTER ADJUST TRY-NIS Yes
SORTER ADJUST STP-F1 Yes SORTER ADJUST TRY-SU Yes
SORTER ADJUST STP-F2 Yes SORTER ADJUST FIN-NIS Yes
SORTER ADJUST STP-R1 Yes SORTER ADJUST 1SHT-SHF Yes
SORTER ADJUST STP-R2 Yes SORTER ADJUST SDL-SWCH Yes
SORTER ADJUST STP-2P Yes SORTER ADJUST SDL-ALM Yes
SORTER ADJUST BFF-SFT Yes SORTER ADJUST Z-FL-CH Yes
SORTER ADJUST PNCH-X Yes SORTER ADJUST THN-STCL Yes
SORTER ADJUST TRM-RG1 Yes SORTER ADJUST SW-ADJ Yes
SORTER ADJUST TRM-RG2 Yes SORTER ADJUST GRP-ALG Yes
SORTER ADJUST TRM-CUT1 Yes SORTER ADJUST PRTN-ALG Yes
SORTER ADJUST TRM-CUT2 Yes SORTER ADJUST BFF-SFT3 Yes
SORTER ADJUST BFF-SFT2 Yes SORTER ADJUST BFF-SFT4 Yes
SORTER ADJUST SDL-STP Yes SORTER OPTION BLNK-SW Yes
SORTER ADJUST SDL-FLD Yes SORTER OPTION MD-SPRTN Yes
SORTER ADJUST SDL-ALG Yes SORTER OPTION BUFF-SW Yes
SORTER ADJUST SDL-RLPT Yes SORTER OPTION TRY-OVER Yes Yes
SORTER ADJUST SDL-RLFD Yes SORTER OPTION PUCH-SW Yes Yes
SORTER ADJUST SDL-RLHD Yes SORTER OPTION ALG-IMPR Yes Yes
SORTER ADJUST BFR-UPA4 Yes SORTER OPTION BUFF-SW2 Yes Yes
SORTER ADJUST BFR-UPB5 Yes SORTER OPTION 1SHT-SRT Yes Yes
SORTER ADJUST BFR-UPLT Yes SORTER OPTION SD-LMTLS Yes Yes
SORTER ADJUST RTR-DWA4 Yes SORTER OPTION SD-STCNB Yes Yes

2-48
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-49
Initial screen Large Middle Small ■■Import/export by service mode (external)
Import Lev1 Lev2 Lev3
SORTER OPTION BUFF-THK Yes Yes The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting
SORTER OPTION PRCS-SP1 Yes values in service mode. With export by which data is collected from the machine, service
SORTER OPTION PRCS-SP2 Yes Yes
mode setting values can be backed up. With import, data backed up from service mode and
SORTER OPTION BUFF-MX1 Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION BUFF-MX2 Yes Yes that backed up from remote UI can be restored.
SORTER OPTION PRCS-MX1 Yes Yes The save destination of backup data can be selected from either a USB memory device or
SORTER OPTION PRCS-MX2 Yes Yes
HDD of the machine.
SORTER OPTION BUF-THK1 Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION PRD-PRTY Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION STCR-DWN Yes ●● Export
SORTER OPTION PRCS-SP3 Yes
SORTER OPTION NSRT-STC Yes Preparation
SORTER OPTION THN-TRSW Yes • USB memory device
SORTER OPTION THN-SW Yes * Required when exporting to an external USB memory device.
SORTER OPTION SWGUP-SW Yes
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
SORTER OPTION CALG-SW Yes
necessary.
T-2-24
Overall flow
Select the save destination between the internal HDD or external USB memory device
depending on the use case.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2. Register password
3. Export to external USB memory device
4. Remove USB memory device
Exporting data to an external USB memory device
1. Connect the USB memory device and check that it has been mounted. (When using the
external USB memory device)

F-2-46

2-49
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-50
2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP.

F-2-47
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.
F-2-49
5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed.

F-2-48
4. When saving to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
F-2-50
6. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

F-2-51

2-50
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-51

Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password
• Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
• No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
set is allowed only for service mode.)
• No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
• Password is case sensitive.

7. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export. F-2-54
Reference:

iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model S/N Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS

Main controller DCM File format

firm ware version

DCM Job
management number
F-2-52
F-2-55
8. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
Press <-. ●● Import
Preparation
• USB memory device
* Required when importing from an external USB memory device.
• It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
necessary.
• When necessary, copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance.
• Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB memory device.
• Do not change the extension from .dcm. (only .dcm files can be recognized.)
• It is desirable to connect the USB memory device before entering service mode.
Overall flow
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
F-2-53
9. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK. 2. Names of saved DCM data files are displayed
Unmount the USB memory device. 3. Register password
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu. 4. Import from external USB memory device

2-51
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-52
5. Remove USB memory device 4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
6. Specification of export file name

Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device. (When using the external USB memory device)
2. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.

F-2-58
5. The names of .dcm files referred to in the external USB memory device are displayed.

F-2-56
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.

F-2-59

F-2-57

2-52
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-53
6. Select SELECT. 8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.

F-2-60 F-2-62
7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press
OK. Note:
Specification of file selection display
• "*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
• USB memory device: Up to 8 files are displayed in a screen.

9. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

F-2-61

F-2-63

2-53
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
2-54
11. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
Press <-.

F-2-64

Note:
F-2-66
Specification of file selection display
12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
• "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed. Unmount the USB memory device.
• "***" is displayed after the password is entered. It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.

10. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.

F-2-67

F-2-65

2-54
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-55
■■Import/export by service mode (internal) 2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.

When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen
of service mode, service mode settings can be saved. Setting values of Main Controller
2, Reader Controller, DC Controller, etc. can be collectively saved. It can be used when
recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for
troubleshooting, etc.

Note:
DCM must not be used when replacing a PCB.
Be sure to use a method such as backup of SRAM of the Main Controller 2/service
mode backup of DCON/RCON.
DCM enables to back up only service mode setting values. There is still necessary
information other than setting values when replacing a PCB.
SRAM backup or service mode backup enables to save data other than setting values. F-2-69
3. When saving to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.

●● Export
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for exporting data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
2. Register password
3. Import from the internal HDD
Procedure for backing up data to the HDD of the machine
1. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.
4. The names of .dcm files saved in the internal HDD are displayed. F-2-70

F-2-68

2-55
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-56
6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.

F-2-73
7. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
F-2-71 Press <-.
5. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

F-2-72

Note:
F-2-74
Limitations regarding the DCM data password
• Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters Reference:
• No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set
is allowed only for service mode.) iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
• No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
• Password is case sensitive. Export
Model S/N
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS

Main controller DCM File format

firm ware version

DCM Job
management number
F-2-75

2-56
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-57
●● Import 3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.

Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
2. Register password
3. Import from the internal HDD
Import from the internal HDD
1. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.

F-2-78
4. The names of .dcm files referred to in the internal HDD are displayed.

F-2-76
2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.

F-2-79

F-2-77

2-57
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-58
5. Select PASSWD. 7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.

F-2-80
6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected.
F-2-82

Note:
Specification of file selection display
• " *" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
• HDD : Up to 2 files are displayed in a screen.

8. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

F-2-81

F-2-83

2-58
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
 2 Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-59
10. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
Press <-.

OK

F-2-84

Note:
F-2-86
Specification of file selection display
• "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
• "***" is displayed after the password is entered.

9. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.

F-2-85

2-59
2
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
2-60

Laser Exposure System <Bk>

Main Controller PCB 2 DC Controller PCB

Overview
Video signal Control signal

■■Overview
Laser Interface PCB
This machine has four laser scanner units at the upper side of each color station.
To realize high productivity, eight laser beams are provided by the unit, and simultaneously

Scanner Motor Drive Signal

Laser Drive Signal

BD Signal
exposed in eight lines in one scanning operation. Laser A
Laser B
In this machine, it is unnecessary to input correction values for laser magnification and laser
phase among laser scanner units, which needed to be adjusted at the time of replacement of Laser G
the laser scanner units in the conventional method. Laser H
Laser Driver
PCB

Cylindrical Lens

Imaging Lens

Reflection Mirror

BD Reflection Mirror
Reflection Mirror
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging Lens

Polygon Mirror
Laser Scanner Motor

BD PCB
La
se
rH
La
se
La r B
se
rA

Photosensitive Drum

F-2-87

2-60
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
2-61
<CL> On this machine, the laser is emitted to the image part on the Drum that is negatively charged.

Main Controller PCB 2 DC Controller PCB Image area

Non-image area Non-image area
Video signal Control signal

Laser Interface PCB

Laser ON
Scanner Motor Drive Signal

aser Drive Signal

BD Signal
Laser A
Laser B
Enlarged view
Laser G F-2-89
Laser H
Laser Driver
PCB

Cylindrical Lens
Imaging Lens

Reflection Mirror

BD Reflection Mirror
Polygon
Mirror

Tilt Correction
Lens

Laser Scanner Motor

BD PCB

La
se
rH
La
se
La r B
se
rA

Photosensitive Drum
F-2-88

2-61
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-62
■■Specifications ■■Parts Configuration
Item Description ●● Overall Configuration
Wave length 670nm
Laser type Red color laser
<Bk>
Laser team
Laser output 7mW
Laser Driver PCB
Number of laser beams 8 beams Cylindrical Lens
Resolution 1200dpi
Type Brushless motor
Scanner motor Imaging Lens
iR-ADV C9xxx Series: Approx. 22700rpm
Number of rotations
iR-ADV C7xxx Series: Approx. 19800rpm
Number of scanner mirror (polygon) 5 Reflection Mirror
surfaces BD Reflection Mirror
Laser ON/OFF control
Laser ON timing
Main scanning synchronization control
control
Sub scanning synchronization control
Laser beam intensity APC control
control PWM control
Correction of write start position in horizontal scanning
direction (To be explained in Image Formation.)
Correction of write start position in vertical scanning Polygon Mirror
Controls direction (To be explained in Image Formation.)
Image position Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction Laser Scanner Motor
correction control Correction of magnification in horizontal scanning direction
(To be explained in Image Formation.)
Correction of magnification in vertical scanning direction (To BD PCB
be explained in Image Formation.) F-2-90
Duplex print magnification correction
Laser scanner motor control
Others
Laser shutter control
T-2-25

Reflection Mirror

Imaging Lens

Reflection Mirror

F-2-91

2-62
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-63
<CL>

Laser Driver PCB

Cylindrical Lens

Imaging Lens

Reflection Mirror
BD Reflection Mirror

Polygon Mirror

Laser Scanner Motor

Tilt Correction Lens
Tilt Correction Motor
BD PCB
F-2-92

Name Role
Laser driver Output a laser beam.
Polygonal mirror Perform scanning with a laser beam in the main scanning direction.
Reflection mirror Reflect a laser team to the drum.
Correction lens Correct a main-scanning tilt of the laser beam coming from the folding mirror.
Tilt correction motor Correct a main-scanning tilt by moving the correction lens.
BD PCB Detect a laser beam as a BD signal.
BD reflection mirror Reflect a laser beam in the direction of the BD detection PCB.
T-2-26

2-63
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-64
Controls ■■Laser ON Timing Control
■■Overview ●● Laser ON/OFF Control
This control is performed to turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser
control signals.
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Scanner Unit
Control signal Laser Mirror
Laser ON/OFF Control
Laser Driver PCB Laser Laser
Interface Driver
Horizontal scanning synchronous
PCB PCB
Control Video signal Laser Beam

Vertical Scanning synchronous

Control

APC Control
Main Controller <Timing of Execution> F-2-94
PCB 2 After the power is turned ON
PWM Control
Scanner Motor Unit
<Details of the Control>
Skew correction control in horizontal
scanning direction The DC controller switches the mode among four modes (Forcible OFF mode, APC mode,
Print mode, Standby mode) according to the laser control signal.
Duplex print magnification
correction Control Mode Laser status Remarks
Forcible OFF OFF Clear the laser beam intensity setting determined by APC.
Laser Scanner Motor Control APC ON Adjust the laser beam intensity.
Print mode OFF/ON Irradiate a laser beam according to the video signal.
Standby mode OFF The main unit is placed in the standby status.
Laser Shutter Control
T-2-28

Print Image formation

F-2-93
instruction ready timing
tem Purpose/Description
Turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
Laser ON/OFF control
laser control signals.
Laser ON BD
Main scanning Performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning
timing
synchronization control direction. A Laser
control
Sub scanning Performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning
synchronization control direction. B Laser
Laser APC control Performed to keep a specified level of laser beam for each line. C Laser
beam
Determine the laser ON time and the image density according
intensity PWM control
to the image data.
control
Skew correction control in horizontal Based on the skew level, lens is shifted and laser light path is H Laser
scanning direction corrected.
Duplex print magnification correction By adding image data, magnification of 1st and 2nd sides is Forcible
Mode name Standby APC Standby
control corrected. APC mode/PRINT mode OFF
mode mode mode
mode
Laser scanner motor control Performed to rotate the scanner mirror at a specified speed.
Laser shutter control Prevent irradiation of a laser beam in the machine. F-2-95

T-2-27

2-64
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-65
●● Main Scanning Synchronization Control Standard BD
This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction.

Timing of Execution Laser A T

For every eight lines

Details of the Control

Laser B T
1) The laser phase coefficient in the ROM on the laser driver is sent to the video PCB.
2) The video PCB forcibly irradiates the laser diode of Laser H in the laser driver PCB by
setting the Laser H laser control signal to APC mode. Laser C T
3) The Laser H laser beam irradiates into the BD PCB, which is mounted in the scanning light ・
・
path. ・
・
・
4) The BD PCB detects the Laser H laser beam, creates a standard BD signal, and sends it to ・

the video PCB. Laser H T

5) The video PCB creates a main scanning synchronization signal for every eight lines based
F-2-97
on the laser phase coefficient and the standard BD signal.
6) The video signal sent from the main controller is output to the laser driver PCB according to
the main scanning synchronization signal.

PBD signal BD signal

ASIC BD PCB
Horizontal Laser
scanning phase
synchronous coefficient Laser H
signal E2PROM
generation Laser G
assembly
Main
Controller
PCB 2 Laser Scanner Mirror
Video signal Video signal
Horizontal Driver
scanning PCB
synchronous
signal
(T) Laser B

Laser Interface Laser A

PCB

F-2-96

2-65
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
2-66
●● Sub Scanning Synchronization Control ■■Laser Beam Intensity Control
This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning direction.
●● APC (Auto Power Control) Control
<Timing of Execution> This control is performed to keep laser beam intensity at every 8 beams (every 1BD) at a
For every printing operation specified level.
<Details of the Control> <Timing of Execution>
• Synchronization control in the sub scanning direction is performed based on the PTOP Every 8 beams (every 1BD)
signal (image formation start signal).
<Details of the Control>
• When the machine is ready to form an image, a PTOP signal (image formation start signal)
1) The video PCB outputs a laser control signal to the laser driver IC in the laser driver PCB.
is created. Based on this signal, each color laser beam is turned on at the delayed timing of
2) The APC mode is set for the laser driver IC, and laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) are emitted
drum interval.
forcibly and sequentially. The laser driver IC also monitors the laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) by
Print request signal Image formation the photo diode (PD) at the same time, and adjusts the output of the laser diodes until they
(Start Key ON) ready timing
reach a specified level of intensity.

Laser Driver PCB

PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY

Interval to stabilize
Laser Scanner the rotation*1
Motor (Y,M,C,Bk)
LD1
PTOP signal LD2
LD3
Y-TOP signal LD4 Laser Control
PD Laser Driver IC Signal
Laser Y is ON Laser Interface PCB

M-TOP signal LD5

LD6
Laser M is ON LD7
LD8
C-TOP signal
Laser C is ON

Bk-TOP signal
F-2-99

Laser Bk is ON
F-2-98

2-66
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction
2-67
●● PWM Control ■■Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction
This control is performed to determine the laser ON time and the image density according to
Based on Bk laser, skew of color laser irradiation is prevented.
the image data.
<Execution timing >
<Details of the Control>
• At the time of recovery from a jam (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C
The laser ON time is selected by the video PCB. One pattern is selected from 16-level
• Paper interval / last rotation (at the time of automatic adjustment when the accumulated
patterns for each pixel.
sheet count reached 1000 or more since the last image position adjustment)
100%
<Description of control >
1) DC Controller Interface PCB forms the patch pattern on ITB.
High 2) DC Controller Interface PCB reads this patch pattern using Patch Sensor and detects the
Image Density

degree of skew based on Bk.

3) Based on the foregoing detection result, Skew Correction Motor is driven and Skew
Correction Lens is shifted, so that irradiation angle is corrected.
Low

Laser Lighting Time (t)

Short Long
F-2-100

NOTE: Relationship between the laser ON time and the density

In this machine, a laser beam irradiates to an image section (dark section), but does not Tilt Correction
irradiate to a non-image section (bright section). Motor
When the image density is increased, the laser ON time is increased. On the other
hand, when the image density is decreased, the laser ON time is shortened.

Tilt Correction
Lens

Cam
F-2-101
Related service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>LD-ADJ-Y/M/C: Adjusting initial position of Skew Correction
Motor

Related alarm code

34-0004: When the correction count value of Skew Correction Motor exceeds specific

2-67
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Skew correction in horizontal scanning direction
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Duplex print magnification correction
2-68
■■Duplex print magnification correction Vertical scanning direction:
Rotation speed of Scanner Motor is accelerated to shrink the image.
Magnification difference between 1st and 2nd sides due to the different amount of paper
Since magnification in horizontal scanning direction is changed to be increased,
shrinkage between 1st and 2nd sides is corrected.
accommodate magnification by shrinking the image with image data skipping in horizontal
As for the duplex print, when the paper passes through the fixing assembly after the image
scanning direction.
formation on the 1st side, it is shrunk temporarily. After the image is formed on the 2nd side
and the paper is ejected from the main body, the 2nd side image is enlarged when the paper <Laser Lighting>
size is returned. That is, the image size of the 2nd side becomes larger than the 1st side, so
the magnification mismatch occurs. Horizontal scanning

Without Correction
Execution timing
When forming the image on the 2nd side at duplex print

Description of control With Correction

Considering the paper shrinkage level, conduct the following control for the 2nd side image
formation.
Vertical scanning
Horizontal scanning direction:
By skipping the image data pixel, image in horizontal scanning direction is shrunk.
When enlarging the image, enlarge it in horizontal scanning direction by adding image data.

<Laser Lighting>

Horizontal scanning
<Scanner Motor Swing Speed>
Without Correction

<Constant Speed> <Speed Up>

With Correction L L’

’
Vertical scanning

L > L’ :Exposure
> ’

F-2-103

F-2-102

2-68
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Duplex print magnification correction
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Scanner Motor Control
2-69
When magnification is corrected, changing the Scanner Motor speed between sheets might ■■Laser Scanner Motor Control
be slower depending on the speed, so productivity might be reduced.
This control is performed to rotate the scanner mirror at a specified speed.

<Timing of Execution>
Variable Reproduction = Polygon Speed Reshuffling At the time of power-on/start-up
Communi Variable Speed Speed convergence <Details of the Control>
Paper Paper
-cation Time Time
1) The motor speed control unit in the DC controller PCB forcibly rotates the motor.
2) When a speed detection signal (FG, BD) is detected, the unit compares it with the standard
Paper Interval Time signal created by the standard signal creation unit, and controls the acceleration signal
(ACC) and deceleration signal (DEC) to keep a specified speed.
F-2-104

PPM
Variable speed Wide
75ppm 70ppm 65ppm 55ppm
-0.3% 88% 94% 91% 100%
-0.6% 88% 94% 91% 100%
-1.0% 85% 91% 89% 100%
* In the actual use, it is assumed that changing speed over 0.6% is rarely seen. T-2-29

Related service mode

COPIER>OPTION>DSPLY-SW>IMGC-ADJ: Image adjustment-related items in “Settings/
Registration” are displayed/not displayed.

Related “Settings/Registration” mode

Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings
>Details/Edit > Adjust Image position > Fine Adjust Zoom Laser Scanner Motor

ACC
DEC
FG
BD PCB

BD
Laser Interface PCB

F-2-106
Related Error Code
E100: Failure to detect PLOCK signal during BD rotation
E110: Failure to detect VLOCK signal during FG rotation

F-2-105

2-69
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Scanner Motor Control
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control
2-70
■■Laser Shutter Control
This control is performed to prevent irradiation of a laser beam in the machine.

<Timing of Execution>
At the time of power-on/startup

<Details of the Control>

When the front cover is opened, the DC controller stops power supply and an output signal
from the laser driver. This prevents irradiation of a laser beam.

Laser Driver PCB

Laser Interface DC Power Supply

DC5V

PCB PCB (12V)

DC/DC
SW1
Front Door Switch 1

SW2
Front Door Switch 2
DC12V
DC Power
Supply Unit

F-2-107

2-70
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control
 2 Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-71
Servicing ■■When Replacing Parts
■■Periodically Replaced Parts ●● Actions Bfor Parts Replacement
No. Parts name When replacing parts
None
1) Execute initial position adjustment of Skew Correction Motor.
1 Laser Scanner Unit
(COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER>LD-ADJ-Y/M/C)
■■Consumable Parts T-2-31

None ●● Actions after Parts Replacement

No. Parts name When replacing parts
1) Execute color displacement correction (Settings/Registration >
■■Periodical Servicing List 1 Laser Scanner Unit Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct
Parts name Qty Cleaning interval Remarks Color Mismatch).
<YMK> Use the cleaning tool for Dust-proof Glass T-2-32
equipped inside the machine.
Dust-proof glass 4 150K <Bk> Use lint-free paper to clean. ■■Major Adjustments
Be sure to replace the Dustproof Glass Cleaning
N/A
Pad (FL2-4425) when itis soiled.
T-2-30
<Bk> <CL>

Cleaning hole

Dust-Prevention Glass

Dust -Prevention Glass Cleaning Tool

F-2-108

2-71
2
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-72

Image Formation System ■■Specifications

●● Specifications
Overview Basic Specification
Item Function/Method
■■Overview Process unit Configuration Drum unit (drum, charging assembly, cleaner) +
For the image formation system, this machine uses "four OPC drums (four FLAT4 engines), (Bk) Developing assembly
Photosensitive Material OPC
fully utilizing conventional color MFP technologies" and "intermediate transfer method". drum Drum diameter φ84
The machine performs the primary transfer attachment and detachment method, in which Cleaning Drum Cleaning Blade
YMC primary transfer rollers are disengaged at Bk single-color mode to prolong the life of the Process speed Refer to page 2-73
image formation unit, detects the drum rotation speed, and executes automatic cleaning of Developing Developing method Dry, 2-component toner projection
assembly Toner Nonmagnetic negative toner
the primary grid plate (Bk) for image stabilization.
Developing cylinder φ20
For the color process unit, separated process units (the developing assembly and the drum diameter
unit) are introduced to realize high-level durability suitable for a light production machine. Toner density Provided (Magnetic sensor)
detection
Primary Charging method Indirect corona charging (1 wire + grid plate)
Process Unit (Bk)
charging Cleaning Provided (Cleaning pad)
Laser
Process Unit (Y) Process Unit (M) Process Unit (C) Cleaning is performed to both of the wire and the
Developing Assembly
grid plate.
Drum Unit process Configuration P-CRG as a unit (The developing assembly and
Laser Laser Laser
Patch Sensor unit(CL) the drum unit can be separated.)
Unit
Options Drum heater (Service Parts)
Photosensitive Material OPC
drum Drum diameter φ30.6
Cleaning Cleaning blade
Process speed Refer to page 2-73
Developing Developing method Dry, 2-component toner projection
assembly Toner Nonmagnetic negative toner
ITB Cleaning Unit Cylinder diameter φ20
ITB Unit
Toner density Provided (Magnetic sensor)
ITB
detection
Primary Transfer Roller
Primary Charging method Direct roller charging (φ14)
Paper
charging Cleaning Provided (Brush roller)

F-2-109

2-72
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-73
Item Function/Method Process Speed
ITB unit Transfer method Intermediate transfer (ITB) Model A Model B Model C Model D
ITB Material PI (polyimide), Seamless JP iR-ADV C9280 PRO - iR-ADV C9270 PRO/ iR-ADV C7260
Circumferential 1148.3 mm / 360 mm C7270
length/width USA iR-ADV C9280 PRO iR-ADV C9270 PRO iR-ADV C7270 iR-ADV C7260
Cleaning Cleaning blade EU iR-ADV C9280 PRO/ iR-ADV C7270i - iR-ADV C7260i
Belt displacement Provided (Light reception sensor) C2180i
correction CA iR-ADV C9280PRO iR-ADV C9270 PRO/ - iR-ADV C7260
Primary Transfer method Transfer roller (Sponge roller/φ16) C7270
transfer Disengagement Provided (Color only) ASIA iR-ADV C9280 PRO iR-ADV C7270 - iR-ADV C7260
mechanism CCN/TW iR-ADV C9280 PRO iR-ADV C9270 PRO - -
Patch sensor Provided KR iR-ADV C9280 PRO iR-ADV C7270 - iR-ADV C7260
Secondary Transfer method Roller (Sponge roller/φ24.3) T-2-34
transfer Cleaning Static electricity cleaning method
assembly Disengagement Provided
mechanism
Separation method "Curvature separation + Static eliminator" method
Others Process unit presence detection Not provided
Process unit old/new detection Not provided
Process unit life detection Not provided (Life (total charging time) can be
checked in Service Mode)
Toner Container presence Not provided
container detection
Old/new detection Not provided
Toner level Not provided
detection
Waste toner Capacity Equivalent to 50,000 images in A4/4-color/5%
container image printing
Full level detection Provided
T-2-33

2-73
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-74

Speed Paper type Model A Model B/C/D ●● Charging Specifications

2
Thin paper (52 to 63g/m ) Process Unit (Bk)
Plain paper 1(64 to 90g/m2)
Plain paper 2(91 to 105g/m2) Developing Assembly Inner
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) Temperature Detection PCB
Recycled paper 1(64 to 90g/m2) Relative Humidity / Absolute Moisture Amount (C/Bk) (UN15)
Drum Total Charging Time
1/1 speed Recycled paper 2(91 to 105g/m2) 321mm/sec 280mm/sec Process Speed
Color paper (64 to 90g/m2) Paper Type Environment Sensor (ENV1)
Tracing paper
bond paper
Pre-punched paper
Pre-primary Transfer Developing Primary Charging
Heavy paper 1(106 to 150g/m2) Charging High Voltage High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN39) High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN37)
Heavy paper 2(151 to 220g/m2) PCB (Bk) (UN50)
Texture paper 1(106 to 150g/m2)

AC+DC Minus
Primary

DC Minus

DC Minus
Texture paper 2(151 to 220g/m2) Charging Wire
Developing Toner
Transparency Collection
1/2 speed Labels 160mm/sec 140mm/sec High Voltage PCB
(Bk) (UN51)
Tab paper 1
Tab paper 2
Postcard
Letter head
Envelope
Heavy paper 3(221 to 256g/m2) Primary
Grid Wire
Heavy paper 4(257 to 300g/m2)
107mm/sec
Texture paper 3(221 to 256g/m2)
Texture paper 4(257 to 300g/m2) DC Minus
1-sided coated paper 1(106 to 180g/m2)*
Developing Cylinder
2-sided coated paper 1(106 to 180g/m2)*
1/3 speed 93mm/sec
1-sided coated paper 2(181 to 220g/m2) AC+DC Minus
93mm/sec
2-sided coated paper 2(181 to 220g/m2)
(1/3 speed Toner Collection Roller
1-sided coated paper 3(221 to 256g/m2)
slow)
2-sided coated paper 3(221 to 256g/m2)
Pre-Primary Trans Charge Wire
1-sided coated paper 4(257 to 300g/m2)
2-sided coated paper 4(257 to 300g/m2) F-2-110

T-2-35

* In Settings/Registration (Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Coated
Productivity/Image Quality Priority), the speed can be changed to 1/2 speed. (It is required
to set the following: COPIER > OPTION > FUC-SW > CKT-LANG: "1".)

2-74
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-75
Color Process Unit
Item Specifications
Charging method Indirect corona charging Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (Color) (UN38)
Primary DC component rated voltage use range -600 to -1000 μA
AC+DC Minus
charging bias Absolute water volume (ENV1), Total drum
DC component voltage correction factor
charging time, Process speed
DC component rated voltage use range -500 to -1000 V (Potential control (Bk))
Grid bias Absolute water volume (ENV1), Process
DC component voltage correction factor
speed
1600 Vpp (Model A) , 1400 Vpp (Model
AC component standard value
B,C.D) Charging Roller
Developing Charging Roller Charging Roller
DC component rated voltage use range -200 to -800 V
bias
Relative humidity (UN15), Total drum
DC component voltage correction factor
charging time, Charging DC bias
Toner -1300 V (Fixed)
DC component rated voltage use range DC Minus DC Minus DC Minus
collection roller

AC+DC Minus

AC+DC Minus

AC+DC Minus
Charging method Corona discharge Developing Toner Developing Toner Developing Toner
Collection Collection Collection
Primary pre- AC component standard value 5500 Vpp (fixed) High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB
transfer DC component rated voltage use range 0 to -600 μA (Constant current) (Y) (UN52) (M) (UN53) (C) (UN54)
charging bias Absolute water volume (ENV1), Relative
DC component voltage correction factor
humidity (UN15), Paper type Developing High Voltage PCB (CL) (UN40)
T-2-36

DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) Environment Sensor

Relative Humidity / Absolute Moisture Amount (ENV1)
Drum Total Charging Time Developing Assembly
Process Speed Inner Temperature
Detection PCB (Y/M)
(C/Bk) (UN14/UN15)
F-2-111

Item Specifications
Charging bias Charging method Direct roller charging
AC component standard value 1300 to 2500 Vpp (Discharged current
control)
AC component voltage correction factor Absolute water volume (ENV1), Total drum
charging time, Process speed, Machine
Inner Temperature
DC component rated voltage use range 0 to -1000 V
DC component voltage correction factor Absolute water volume (ENV1), Process
speed, Machine Inner Temperature
Developing AC component standard value 1600 Vpp (Model A) , 1400 Vpp (Model
bias B,C,D)
DC component rated voltage use range -200 to -800V
DC component voltage correction factor Relative humidity (UN14/UN15), Total
drum charging time, Charging DC bias
Toner DC component rated voltage use range -1300V (Fixed)
collection
sheet bias
T-2-37

2-75
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-76
Transfer Assembly
Item Specifications
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Transfer method Roller transfer
Relative Humidity / Absolute Moisture Amount Detection PCB (Y/M) (C/Bk) (UN14/UN15) Target of transfer Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
Process Speed
Potential of Drum Edge Primary DC component rated voltage use range 0 to 5000 V (YMC), -1000 to 5000 V (Bk)
Paper Type Environment Sensor (ENV1) transfer bias Absolute water volume (ENV1), Relative
DC component voltage correction factor humidity (UN14/UN15), Process speed,
Drum dark section potential (Vd)
Secondary DC component rated voltage use range -40 to 0 μA (Constant current)
Primary Transfer PCB (UN43)
transfer Absolute water volume (ENV1), Process
DC Plus DC Plus DC Plus DC Minus/DC Plus external roller DC component voltage correction factor speed
cleaning bias
Transfer method Roller transfer
Target of transfer Paper (Transfer material)
Secondary
DC component rated voltage use range 0 to 7000 V
transfer bias
Absolute water volume (ENV1), Process
DC component voltage correction factor
speed, Paper type
ITB Unit Secondary DC component rated voltage use range 0 to -4000 V
post-transfer Absolute water volume (ENV1), Paper
static DC component voltage correction factor type
eliminator bias
T-2-38

DC Minus DCMinus/DC Plus

Post-secondary Transfer Static Secondary Transfer

Elimination High Voltage PCB (UN49) High Voltage PCB (UN48)

Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5)

F-2-112

2-76
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-77
■■Parts Configuration ●● Process Unit (Bk)
Primary
●● Overall Configuration Potential
Sensor Encoder Charging Assembly
Developing Blade Primary
Toner Container (M) Toner Container (C) Charging Wire Grid Plate
Process Unit (M) Toner Supply Unit (C) Laser Drum Cleaning Unit
Toner Supply Unit (M) Toner Collection Roller
Toner Container (Bk)
Process Unit (C) Developing Assembly
Drum Cleaning Blade
Toner Container (Y)
Toner Stirring Screw
Toner Supply Unit (Bk)

Drum Cleaning Brush

Toner Density Sensor Photosensitive Roller
Toner Supply Unit (Y) Process Unit (Bk) Drum

Process Unit (Y) Toner Stirring Screw

Cleaning Pre-Exposure
LED
Collection Toner Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Feed Assembly Pre-Primary Trans Charge Wire
Patch Sensor Unit

Primary Charging
Secondary Transfer Shutter Unit
External Roller
ITB Unit

Pre-transfer Charging
Shutter Unit

Waste Toner Container Potential

Drum Thermistor Sensor Encoder Drum Thermopile
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk)1
Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk)2

F-2-113

Encoder
F-2-114

2-77
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-78
●● Process Unit (CL ●● Toner Supply Assembly
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y/M) / (C/Bk)
Drum Unit Cleaning Roller
Toner Cap Open Hopper Unit Toner Container
/ Close Assembly
Developing Blade Developing Cylinder
Developing Assembly Laser
Charging Roller
Toner
Feed Screw

Drum Cleaning Unit

Toner Stirring
Screw
Drum Cleaning Blade Hopper

Toner Density Photosensitive

Sensor Drum Cleaning
Pre-Exposure LED

Toner Supply Toner Toner Toner Supply

Light Guide Hopper Pipe Unit
Pipe Unit Feed Screw Supply Screw
Toner Stirring Screw Toner Collection Sheet
F-2-117
Scoop-Up Sheet Waste Toner Feed Screw

Drum Heater(Y) / (M)

●● Transfer Assembly F-2-115

Primary Transfer Auxiliary Left Roller

Primary Transfer Auxiliary Right Roller
Primary Transfer Roller (Y)
Primary Transfer Roller (C) Primary Transfer Roller (Bk)
ITB Cleaning Blade Primary Transfer Roller (M)
Patch Sensor Unit

Patch Sensor
Opposing Roller
ITB Unit

Steering Roller
Toner Feed Screw
ITB Drive Roller
ITB
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Pre-Secondary Transfer Idler Roller
Secondary Transfer External Roller
F-2-116

2-78
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-79
●● Waste Toner Feed Assembly ■■Drive Configuration
Front view Side view
Process ●● Process Unit (Bk)
Unit (Bk) Drum Cleaning Unit
Process Process Process M29 M18 M1 M30
ITB Cleaning Unit Unit (Y) Unit (M) Unit (C)

Toner Stirring Wire TS1

Waste Toner Feed Screw Waste Toner
Feed Screw
ITB Unit

M2 UN18 M19 UN19

Waste Toner Waste F-2-119
Toner
Code Name Role
F-2-118 M1 Drive the primary charging wire/grid plate
Primary charging wire cleaning motor
cleaning pad.
M2 Primary pre-transfer charging wire cleaning Drive the primary pre-transfer charging wire
motor cleaning pad.
M18 Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) Drive the developing sleeve.
M19 Drum motor (Bk) Drive the drum.
M29 Developing stirring motor (Bk) Drive the toner stirring screw.
M30 Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the
Drum cleaning/water toner feed drive motor
waste toner screw.
UN18 Drum speed detection PCB (Bk) 1 Detect the drum rotation speed.
UN19 Drum speed detection PCB (Bk) 2 Detect the drum rotation speed.
T-2-39

<Related Error Codes>

E012: error in drum/ITB drive motor
E021: error in developing sleeve drive motor
E022: error in drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor
E023: error in developing stirring motor

2-79
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-80
●● Process Unit (CL) ●● Transfer Assembly
M24 M5

M22

M20
UN17

UN21 / UN23 / UN25 UN16 SL1

PS3 PS2
H2 H3 PS4

PS5 M4
M3

PS21
TS2 / TS3 / TS4 M31

F-2-121

Code Parts name Role

M26 M21 M3 ITB drive motor Drive the ITB drive roller.
UN20 / UN22 / UN24 M4 Steering drive motor Move the steering roller.
M27 M23
M5 Engage/disengage the primary transfer roller
Primary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor
M28 M25 (Y/M/C).
M31 Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment Engage/disengage the secondary transfer
F-2-120
Motor external roller.
Code Parts name Role PS2 ITB displacement sensor Detect the position of the ITB belt.
M20/M22/M24 Developing sleeve drive motor (Y)/(M)/(C) Drive the developing sleeve. PS3 Stirring drive HP sensor Detect the position of the steering roller.
M21/M23/M25 Drum motor (Y)/(M)/(C) Drive the drum. PS4 Primary transfer roller attachment/ Detect the home position of the primary
M26/M27M28 Developing stirring motor (Y)/(M)/(C) Drive the toner stirring screw. detachment HP sensor transfer roller.
Developing assembly inner temperature Detect the temperature in the PS5 ITB HP sensor HP sensor of the ITB
UN14/UN15
detection PCB (Y/M)/(C/Bk) developing assembly. SL1 Patch shutter open/close solenoid Open/close the patch shutter.
UN20/UN22/UN24 Drum speed detection PCB (Y)/(M)/(C) 1 Detect the drum rotation speed. UN16 ITB drive roller speed detection A Detect the rotation speed of the ITB
UN21/UN23/UN25 Drum speed detection PCB (Y)/(M)/(C) 2 Detect the drum rotation speed. UN17 ITB drive roller speed detection B Detect the rotation speed of the ITB
T-2-40 H2 Drum heater (Y/M) Heat the drum (Y) and the drum (M).
<Related Error Codes> H3 Drum heater (M/C) Heat the drum (M) and the drum (C).
T-2-41
E012: error in drum/ITB drive motor
E021: error in developing sleeve drive motor <Related Error Codes>
E023: error in developing stirring motor E012: error in drum/ITB drive motor
E074: Primary transfer roller detachment/attachment error
E075: error in ITB displacement control
E077: Secondary transfer external roller detachment/attachment error

2-80
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-81
●● Toner Supply Assembly ●● Waste Toner Feed Assembly

PS81/PS82 Process
/PS83/PS84 Unit (Bk) Drum Cleaning Unit
Process Process Process
ITB Cleaning Unit Unit (Y) Unit (M) Unit (C)

M7

M10 M6

M13 M9
Toner Stirring Wire
M16 M12 Waste Toner Feed Screw
Waste Toner Feed Screw
M15 M30 ITB Unit

PS8/PS11 PS9/PS12 TS5/TS6

/PS14/PS17 /PS15/PS18 /TS7/TS8
F-2-122 TS9
Code Parts name Role
Hopper/stirring supply motor (Y)/(M)/
M6/M9/M12/M15 Drive the toner stirring screw.
(C)/(Bk)
Toner container drive motor (Y)/(M)/ Waste Toner Waste
M7/M10/M13/M16 Drive the toner supply drive unit. Toner
(C)/(Bk)
M8/M11/M14/M17 Wiper rotation motor (Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk) Drive the wiper.
Hopper toner level sensor (Y)/(M)/ F-2-123
TS6/TS7/TS8/TS9 Detect the toner level in the hopper.
(C)/(Bk)
Code Parts name Role
Release holder shift cam HP sensor Detect the home position of the
PS8/PS11/PS14/PS17 Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the
(Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk) release holder shift cam. M30 Drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive motor
waste toner feed screw.
Screw rotation sensor (Y)/(M)/(C)/
PS9/PS12/PS15/PS18 Drive the toner feed screw. TS9 Waste toner full level sensor Detect the waste toner container full level.
(Bk)
T-2-43
Release holder shift cam phase Detect the release holder shift cam
PS81/PS82/PS83/PS84
sensor (Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk) phase. <Related Error Codes>
T-2-42 E013-0001: error in waste toner full level
<Related Error Codes>
E025-0x00: Toner container drive motor lock error
E025-0x02: Block supply timeout error
E025-0x10: Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout error
E025-0x20: Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase error

2-81
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Printing Process
2-82
■■Printing Process
1. Electrostatic latent image 6. Photosensitive drum
formation Block cleaning Block

1. Primary Charging 1. Primary Charging

Static electricity Charge the photosensitive drum surface with a uniform
2. Laser exposure
formation block negative potential. The process unit (Y/M/C) uses 2. Laser exposure
11. Drum cleaning
the direct charging roller method, in which charges 2.Development Block 11. Drum cleaning 3. Development
Primary
1 are directly applied from the charging roller to the 3. Development
4. Primary Transfer Pre-Charging
charging 10. Drum cleaning Pre-exposure 10. Drum cleaning Pre-exposure
photosensitive drum. The process unit (Bk) uses the Y M C Bk
primary charging method, in which charges are indirectly Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum Photosensitive drum
5. ITB Cleaning Block
applied from the charging wire. 5. Primary Transfer 5. Primary Transfer 5. Primary Transfer 5. Primary Transfer

Form a latent image on the photosensitive drum

9. ITB Cleaning
surface by irradiating a laser beam. When a laser beam
2 Laser exposure irradiates to the negatively charged photosensitive drum
surface, the negative potential in the irradiated area is
ITB
neutralized.
Developing block Attach negatively charged toner to the static latent image
on the photosensitive drum surface from the developing
3 Development
cylinder by dry 2-component toner projection so that it
becomes visualized.
6. Secondary
Transfer block Primary pre- Charge the toner on the photosensitive drum with a 3. Delivery Block
4. Fixing Block
transfer
4 transfer charging uniform potential. Delivery 8. Fixing 7. Separation Registration Pickup

(Bk) Rotation of Photosensitive drum/ITB

Apply a positive potential to the primary transfer roller, Flow of paper
5 Primary transfer and transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum to the F-2-124
ITB.
Apply a positive charge to the secondary transfer
Secondary
6 external roller, and transfer the toner on the ITB to the
transfer
paper.
Separate the paper from the ITB by curvature separation.
Application of a negative charge to the static eliminator
7 Separation
according to the paper type makes it easier to separate
paper from the ITB.
Fixing block Melt and adhere the toner on paper to the paper by heat
8 Fixing
and pressure.
ITB cleaning block Remove the residual toner on the ITB by the cleaning
9 ITB cleaning
blade.
Drum cleaning block Remove the drum charging memory on the
Drum cleaning photosensitive drum surface by irradiating light from the
10
pre-exposure drum cleaning pre-exposure LED to prevent dirt on the
photosensitive drum.
Remove the residual toner on the photosensitive drum
11 Drum cleaning
by the cleaning blade
T-2-44

2-82
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Printing Process
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Overview
2-83
Controls Control Name Bk CL Description
Primary charging
■■Overview       Primary Charging Wire ○ Controls to apply the negative charge to Primary Charging
bias control (Bk) Wire and Grid Plate.
Developing bias control Primary Charging Wire ○ Controls to apply the negative charge to Primary Charging
ACR control
Toner Collection Roller bias control bias control (CL) Roller.
Toner Collection Roller drive control Primary Charging Wire bias control (Bk)
Primary Charging Wire cleaning control Primary Charging Wire ○ Controls to clean Primary Charging Wire and Grid Plate.
Toner Container open/close control cleaning control
Toner supply control/toner level detection
Primary Charging Wire bias control (CL) Toner Container open/close control Primary Charging Wire ○ Controls to clean Primary Charging Wire Roller.
Toner supply control/toner level detection
Primary Charging Wire Roller cleaning control Roller cleaning control
Drum cleaning pre-exposure
Drum cleaning pre-exposure
Drum cleaning control Drum cleaning control Developing
Developing bias control Drum rotation speed control Developing bias control Common Controls to apply the negative charge to Developing Cylinder
ACR control Drum Heater control
Toner Collection Sheet bias control
in order to deposit toner on the Developing Cylinder to the
Pre-primary Transfer Charging
Drum rotation speed control bias control surface of Photosensitive Drum.
Pre-primary Transfer Charging
Drum Heater control*
Wire cleaning control Toner Collection Roller ○ Controls to apply the negative charge to Toner Collection
Waste toner delivery control bias control Roller.
Primary transfer bias control Waste Toner Container full detection
Primary Transfer Roller detachment control Toner Collection Sheet ○ Controls to apply the negative charge to Toner Collection
Automatic control
Secondary transfer bias control
D-max Pascal control bias control Sheet.
Post-secondary transfer static Elimination bias control
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller detachment control Potential control (Bk) ACR control Common Controls to maintain the ratio (T/D ratio) of toner and carrier
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller cleaning control D-max control
ITB cleaning control D-half control in Developing Assembly.
ITB displacement correction control ARCDAT control
ITB speed control Pascal control Pre-primary transfer charging
Separation Discharge current control
ATR control (supply control) Pre-primary Transfer ○ Controls to charge the toner to negative evenly in order to
Image position correction Charging bias control improve the stability of transfer.
Primary transfer ATVC
Secondary transfer ATVC Pre-primary Transfer ○ Controls to clean Pre-primary Transfer Charging Wire.
Patch Sensor adjustment
Drum idle rotation Charging Wire cleaning
Black band sequence control
Black band sequence when using
Transparency
Toner ejection sequence at low duty
Drum cleaning
Primary Charging Wire cleaning Drum cleaning pre- ○ ○ Controls to emit Pre-exposure LED in order to remove the
* The Drum Heater is located in the ITB Unit. F-2-125 exposure drum memory on the surface of Photosensitive Drum.
Drum cleaning control ○ ○ Controls to remove the residual toner on Photosensitive
Drum.
Others
Drum rotation speed Common Controls to maintain the constant rotation speed in order to
control set the same drum rotation speed for each color.
Drum Heater control ○ ○ Controls to activate Drum Heater (ON/OFF) according to the
environment.

2-83
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Overview
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Overview
2-84
Control Name Bk CL Description Control Name Bk CL Description
Transfer Automatic control
Primary transfer bias control Controls to apply the positive charge to Primary Transfer       D-max Pascal control Forms the maximum density patch on the paper, reads this
Roller in order to transfer the toner on Photosensitive Drum to patch from Reader and corrects the target density of D-max
ITB. control.
Primary Transfer Roller Controls to disengage Primary Transfer Roller. Potential control (Bk) Optimizes the values of grid voltage, developing DC bias and
disengagement control laser power in order to set Vbak and Vcont of Process Unit
Primary transfer bias control Controls to apply the positive charge to Secondary Transfer (Bk) to the target values.
Outer Roller in order to transfer the toner on ITB to the paper. D-max control (Y/M/C) Form a solid patch on the ITB and scan it with the Patch
Post-secondary transfer static Controls to apply the negative charge to Static Eliminator in Sensor to determine the charging bias (Vd), developing bias
Elimination bias control order to easily separate the paper from ITB. (Vdc), and laser power to achieve the target density.
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Controls to engage/disengage Secondary Transfer Outer D-half control Form a halftone patch on the ITB and scan it with the Patch
disengagement control Roller to/from ITB. Sensor to correct the halftone.
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Controls to remove the residual toner on Secondary Transfer ARCDAT control Corrects a whole halftone by referring to the density of 1
cleaning control Outer Roller in order to prevent any failure due to toner stain halftone patch.
from Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. Pascal control Reads the gradation pattern from Reader to make correction.
ITB cleaning control Controls to remove the toner on ITB. Discharge current control Optimizes the charging AC current value in order to reach the
ITB displacement correction control Controls to correct the ITB displacement. target discharge current value from the Charging Roller of
ITB speed control Controls to maintain the constant ITB rotation speed. Process Unit (color) to Drum.
Separation Controls to separate the paper from ITB. ATR control (supply control) Corrects the target T/D ratio in Developing Assembly in order
Toner supply to achieve the target image density.
Toner Container open/close control Controls to open/close the cap of Toner Container. Image position correction Reads the registration patch from Patch Sensor, detects
Toner supply control/toner level Detects the toner level of Toner Container and Hopper the image displacement from Bk and corrects the write start
detection Assembly, and controls to supply the toner to Hopper position in horizontal/vertical scanning direction and image
Assembly and Developing Assembly. skew magnification.
Primary transfer ATVC Optimizes the primary transfer DC bias value in order to
Waste toner delivery
reach the target primary transfer current.
Waste toner delivery control Controls to deliver the toner collected at Drum cleaning and
Secondary transfer ATVC Optimizes the secondary transfer DC bias value in order to
ITB cleaning to Waste Toner Container.
reach the target secondary transfer current.
Waste Toner Container full Controls to detect whether Waste Toner Container is full.
Patch Sensor adjustment Adjusts the light intensity to achieve the target reading
detection
performance of Patch Sensor and performs sampling of ITB
background.
Drum idle rotation Controls to rotate Drum without applying high voltage in order
to remove the discharge generated on the drum surface.
Black band sequence A control for preventing bend/peel of the ITB cleaning blade
to create solid image on the ITB to be removed by the ITB
cleaning blade.
Black band sequence when using Controls to form the solid image on ITB to remove the surface
Transparency active agent, etc. on ITB when feeding Transparency and
remove using ITB Cleaning Blade.
Toner ejection sequence at low Controls to form the solid image on ITB and consume (eject)
duty the toner forcibly when low duty image is continuously
printed.
T-2-45

2-84
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Overview
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-85
■■Process Unit (Bk) <Related Service Modes>
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > DPOT-K: display of Bk drum surface potential
●● Primary Charging COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > PRI-GRID: display of the primary charging current
Primary Charging Wire Bias Control COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > PR-GRI-K: display of the primary charging assembly grid
The primary charging bias charges the photosensitive drum surface with a uniform negative voltage
potential.
The primary charging bias (DC negative) created by the primary charging high voltage PCB
(Bk) (UN37) is applied to the primary charging wire and the grid plate.
Primary charging DC bias: Applied to the primary charging wire (Constant current)
Grid DC bias: Applied to the grid plate

The value of the primary charging DC bias is determined based on the absolute water volume
and process speed.
The value of the grid DC bias is determined by potential control (Bk) based on the fogging
removal potential (Vback) and the contrast potential (Vcont), which are determined based on
the absolute water volume and process speed. (See "Potential Control (Bk)" for the details.)

DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2)

Absolute Moisture Amount Environment Sensor (ENV1)
Drum Total Charging Time
Process Speed

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (UN37)

DC Minus

DC Minus

Primary Charging Wire

Primary Grid Wire

F-2-126

2-85
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-86
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Control <Related Service Mode>
This control is performed to prevent a charging failure caused by dirt on the primary charging COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN or WIRE-EX: cleaning of all charging
wire and the grid plate. wires (1 round-trip)
<Timing of Execution> COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-P: setting for cleaning interval of the post-
• At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (Every printing of 4000 images on an rotation charging wire (2000)
accumulation basis) COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > INTPPR-1: setting for cleaning interval of paper interval
• At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every printing of 2000 images on an charging wire (4000)
accumulation basi COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-PH: ON/OFF for auto-cleaning of the Charging
• At the time of multiple initial rotations(Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C/Total Wire
2000-sheet from previous D-half control)
• When "Wire Cleaning" is executed via the user mode <Related error code>
E060-0011: Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 1 when cleaning the Primary Charging Wire
<Details of the Control> E060-0012: Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 2 when cleaning the Primary Charging Wire
When the cleaner screw rotates normally/in reverse driven by the primary charging cleaning Primary Charging Shutter Control
motor (M1), the primary charging cleaning pad and the grid plate cleaning pad move back To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products
and forth, and clean the primary charging wire and the grid plate. (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Primary Charging Assembly.

NOTE: NOTE:
This machine does not have a HP sensor for the cleaning pad. The position of the In an environment where moisture content is low, the Drum Heater is turned OFF in
cleaning pad is detected based on the drive time of the primary charging wire cleaning
motor (M1). sleep mode after a specified period of time has passed to meet energy saving mode.
Discharge product (nitrogen oxide) which is generated at the Charging Assembly when
image is formed is deposited on the drum when the time has passed. When the Drum
Heater is OFF, the discharge product (nitrogen compound) on the drum surface has
Screw a chemical reaction with the moisture in the air and the resistance value on the drum
surface is decreased, causing the image failure.
Primary Charging Wire

<Conditions for execution>

Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1) • Drum Heater is OFF.
• During sleep mode
Grid Plate

<Control description>
The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire.
Grid Plate Cleaning Pad
The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1) moves the Cleaning Pad to the
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the shutter closed.
Because the shutter comes between the Grid Plate and the Photosensitive Drum, discharge
F-2-127
products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the Photosensitive Drum.
The Primary Charging Shutter Position Sensor (PS92) detects open/close of the shutter.

2-86
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-87
<Related error code> ●● Development
E060-0001: Primary Charging Assembly Shutter home position open error (The shutter was Developing Bias Control
not closed.) This control is performed to apply a developing bias (AC component, DC negative
E060-0002: Primary Charging Assembly Shutter home position close error (The shutter was component) to the developing cylinder and attach the toner on the developing cylinder to the
not opened.) photosensitive drum (bright section) to form a toner image.
• Developing DC bias
This bias generates a potential difference against the photosensitive drum.
The bias value is determined by the relative humidity and process speed based on the
charging DC bias (Vd) determined by potential control (Bk).
• Developing AC bias
This bias improves an image quality.
The developing AC bias of 1600Vpp, which is a fixed value, is applied.

<Related Service Mode>

COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > DEV-DC-K: display of developing DC bias (Bk)

2-87
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-88
Collection Roller Bias Control ACR Control
This control is performed to return the toner floating on the photosensitive drum during The purpose of ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) control is to keep long life of the developer, and
development to the developing assembly cylinder by the collection roller bias. developer is supplied from the toner container while gradually discharging developer in the
developing assembly.
The collection roller bias (DC negative) created by the developing toner collection high
voltage PCB (Bk) (UN51) is applied to the collection roller. The exit slot is located at the downstream side of the developer. The developer is discharged
The collection roller bias of -1300V, which is a fixed value, is applied. when the volume of the developer increases.

DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2)

The same control is performed in the developing assembly of the Process Unit (CL).
Relative Humidity Developing Assembly Inner Temperature
Detection PCB (C / Bk) (UN15) From Hopper Unit
Process Speed

Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN39)

AC+DC Minus

Toner Stirring Screw

To Waste Toner Container
Developing Toner Collection
High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN51)
DC Minus

Developing Cylinder

Toner Stirring Screw

F-2-129

F-2-128

2-88
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-89
●● Pre-transfer Charging Primary Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Control
Primary Pre-transfer Charging bias control This control is performed to prevent a charging failure caused by dirt on the primary pre-
This control is performed to increase transfer efficiency by securing a proper toner charging transfer charging wire.
volume on the photosensitive drum.
<Timing of Execution>
The pre-primary transfer charging AC bias (5500Vpp) and the pre-primary transfer DC bias (0 • At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (Every printing of 4000 images on an
to -600muA), which are generated on the pre-primary transfer charging high voltage PCB (Bk), accumulation basis)
are applied to the pre-primary transfer charging wire. • At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every printing of 2000 images on an
The primary pre-transfer charging bias value is determined based on the absolute water accumulation basi
volume, relative humidity, and paper type. • At the time of multiple initial rotations(Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C/Total
2000-sheet from previous D-half control)
Developing Assembly Inner Temperature
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) Detection PCB (C / Bk) (UN15) • When "Wire Cleaning" is executed via the user mode
Relative Humidity
Paper Type
Environment Sensor (ENV1) <Details of the Control>
When the screw rotates normally/in reverse driven by the primary pre-transfer charging wire
cleaning motor (M2), the primary pre-transfer charging wire cleaning pad moves back and
forth and cleans the primary pre-transfer charging wire.
Pre-primary Transfer Charging
High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN50)
<Related Service Mode>
AC+DC Minus

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN: cleaning of all charging wires (1 round-
trip)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX: cleaning of all charging wires (5 round-trip)
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-T: setting for cleaning interval of the post-rotation
charging wire (2000)
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > INTPPR-1: setting for cleaning interval of paper interval
charging wire (4000)
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-PH: ON/OFF for automatic cleaning of the
charging wire
To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products
(nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.

<Execution timing>
To be executed together with the Pre-transfer Charging Wire cleaning control at the same
Pre-Primary Trans Charge Wire
time.
F-2-130
<Related Service Mode>
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > PRE-TR: display of the pre-primary transfer charging DC
current

2-89
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-90
<Control description> ●● Cleaning
The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging Overview
Wire. This control is performed to remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum.
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
The drive of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M2) moves the Cleaning Pad M30
Drum Cleaning Unit
to the rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the shutter Drum Cleaning Fur Brush
closed.
Drum Cleaning Blade
Because the shutter comes between the Pre-transfer Charging Wire and the Photosensitive
Drum, discharge products from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire do not reach the
Photosensitive Drum. Waste Toner Feed Screw

The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS93) detects open/close of the shutter.

<Related error code>

E066-0001: Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter home position open error (The shutter was
not closed.)
E066-0002: Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter home position close error (The shutter was
not opened.)

Scoop-Up Sheet

Patch Sensor Unit

Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED
F-2-131

Parts name Role

Drum cleaning unit Scrape and collect the residual toner on the drum.
Polish surface of the photosensitive drum to form a thin toner
Drum cleaning fur brush
coated layer.
Drum cleaning blade Scrape the toner adhered to the drum surface.
Feed the waste toner on the drum cleaning unit.
Waste toner feed screw

Scoop up the waste toner which dropped from the drum cleaning
Scoop-up sheet
unit.
T-2-46

Parts name Role

Drum cleaning/waste Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the waste toner feed screw.
M30
toner feed drive motor
Drum cleaning pre- Remove the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface.
LED1
exposure LED
T-2-47

2-90
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-91
Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Drum Cleaning Control
This control is performed to emit light from the pre-exposure LED to remove the drum This control is performed to remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum by the blade
memory on the photosensitive drum surface. engaged with the drum.

<Details of the Control> <Details of the Control>

Light is emitted from the drum cleaning pre-exposure LED on the patch sensor unit to remove 1) The drum cleaning fur brush rotates, driven by the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface so that dirt on the surface is prevented. motor (M30).
2) The drum cleaning fur brush polishes the surface of the photosensitive drum to form a thin
NOTE: toner coated layer.
A potential difference at the edges of the toner layer transferred onto the ITB at primary
3) The drum cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner on the drum surface.
transfer forms a minute gap between the photosensitive drum and the ITB, making a
discharge symptom occur. This causes drum memory to occur on the photosensitive 4) The scraped waste toner is fed to the waste toner container by the waste toner feed screw.
drum. The residual toner adhered to the cleaning blade is attracted to the drum memory,
causing dirt on the photosensitive drum. NOTE:
Two sheets of Scoop-up Sheet are used to prevent the toner scraped by the drum
Drum Cleaning Blade cleaning blade from spilling into the unit.

Drum Cleaning Brush Roller <Related Service Mode>

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > BK-BNDEX: supply of the photosensitive drum toner

Waste Toner
Feed Screw

Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED

Drum Memory

< Without Pre-Exposure > < With Pre-Exposure >

F-2-132

2-91
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-92
●● Drum Rotation Speed Control ●● Drum Heater Control
This control is performed to keep a uniform drum rotation speed in order to increase accuracy This control is performed to keep the temperature of the photosensitive drum at a specified
of the image position (color displacement). level and stabilize potential characteristics of charging and exposure, etc.

<Details of the Control> <Details of the Control>

1) The drum rotates, driven by the drum motors (Y: M19 / M: M20 / C: M21 / Bk: M22). The temperature of the photosensitive drum is controlled by the drum heater mounted inside
2) There is an encoder on the drum shaft, of which rotation is monitored by the two drum of the photosensitive drum and by the drum thermo pile and the drum thermistor mounted on
speed detection PCBs (Bk: UN18/19, Y: UN20/21, M: UN22/23, C: UN24/25). the photosensitive drum surface.
3) The drum speed detection PCB counts the drum count based on a pulse, and feeds back
the drum rotation speed to the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) to perform speed control. Operation Condition
UN18(UN20/UN22/UN24) • COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DHT-ON : OFF
Flywheel Encoder • COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > BKDH : 0 or 2
UN19(UN21/UN23/UN25)
Main power SW : ON ( copy, Standby,warm-up,Sleep 1)
Gear Environment heater SW ON Follow the Environment Control.
OFF Follow the Environment Control.
T-2-48
Main power SW : ON ( Sleep 2)
Environment heater SW ON Follow the Environment Control.
OFF OFF
T-2-49
Main power SW : OFF
Drum Environment heater SW ON Follow the Environment Control.
OFF OFF
T-2-50

• COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DHT-ON : ON

M19
Detection Signal 1

Detection Signal 2
Drum Drive Signal

(M21/M23/M25) • COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > BKDH : 1

Drum Speed

Drum Speed

Main power SW : ON ( copy)

Environment heater SW ON OFF
OFF OFF
T-2-51
Main power SW : ON ( Standby,warm-up)
Environment heater SW ON ON
Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6) OFF ON
T-2-52
F-2-133 Main power SW : OFF
Environment heater SW ON ON
OFF OFF
T-2-53

Environment Control
• When absolute moist volume is 18g or more (high temperature/high humidity environment),
this control is ON at anytime other than when formulating image.
• When absolute moist volume is 5.8g or more and less than 18g (normal temperature/
normal humidity environment), the control is ON for 2 minutes and 30 seconds in the case

2-92
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
2-93
of pre-rotation by turning ON the main power. <Details of the Control>
• When absolute moist volume is less than 5.8g (normal temperature/low humidity 1) The temperature on the drum surface is detected by the thermo pile.
environment), this control is OFF. 2) The drum heater ON/OFF operation is repeated based on the detected temperature on the
drum surface so that the temperature is kept at a specified level (42.5 degree C).
<Related Service Mode> 3) When the upper limit temperature (50 degree C) is detected by the drum thermistor, the
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DHT-ON: Drum Heater (Bk) is ON forcibly. drum heater is turned OFF.

NOTE:
A thermo pile is an infrared sensor, which generates thermo electromotive force
according to the amount of energy when receiving an infrared ray irradiated from an
individual substance on a noncontact basis. The thermo pile enables accurate detection
of the temperature on the drum surface.

Drum

Drum Heater

Environment Heater Switch

Environment Sensor
F-2-134

2-93
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (Bk)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
2-94
■■Process Unit (CL) <Related Service Mode>
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > PRIACV-Y/M/C: display of discharge current control setting
●● Charging AC voltage
Primary Charging Roller Bias Control
The primary charging bias (CL) charges the photosensitive drum surface with a uniform
negative potential.
The primary charging bias (AC component, DC negative) created by the primary charging
high voltage PCB (CL) (UN38) is applied to the primary charging roller.
Primary charging DC bias (CL): DC bias applied to the primary charging roller
Primary charging AC bias (CL): AC bias applied to the primary charging roller

The primary charging DC bias is determined based on the absolute water volume (ENV1),
total drum charging time, and process speed. The primary charging AC bias is dependent
on the absolute water volume (ENV1), total drum charging time, and process speed, and the
bias value is determined by discharged current control. (See "Discharged Current Control (CL)"
for the details.)

DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) Environment Sensor (ENV1)

Absolute Moisture Amount
Drum Total Charging Time
Process Speed Developing Assembly Inner
Temperature Detection PCB
(Y/M) (UN14)

Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) (UN38)

AC+DC Minus

Charging Roller

F-2-135

2-94
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
2-95
●● Development <Related Service Mode>
Developing Bias Control (CL) COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > DEV-DC-Y/M/C: display of developing DC voltage
This control is performed to apply the developing bias (AC component, DC negative) to the
developing cylinder and to adhere the toner on the developing cylinder to the photosensitive
drum (bright section) to form a toner image.
• Developing DC Bias
The developing DC bias generates a potential difference against the photosensitive drum.
The developing DC bias is determined based on the relative humidity (UN14/UN15), total
drum charging time, and charging DC bias.
• Developing AC Bias
The developing AC bias improves the image quality.
The developing AC bias of 1600Vpp, which is a fixed value, is applied.

DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) Environment Sensor (ENV1)

Relative Humidity/Absolute Moisture Amount
Drum Total Charging Time
Process Speed Developing Assembly Inner
Temperature Detection PCB
(UN14/UN15)

Developing High Voltage PCB (UN40)

AC+DC Minus

F-2-136

2-95
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
2-96
Toner Collection Sheet Bias Control ●● Cleaning
This control is performed to put back the toner floating on the photosensitive drum during Overview
development to the developing cylinder by the toner collection sheet bias.
Drum Cleaning Blade

<Details of the Control>

The toner collection sheet bias (DC negative) created by the developing toner collection high Scoop-Up Sheet
voltage PCB (Y) / (M) / (C) is applied to the toner collection sheet.
The collection sheet bias of -1300V, which is a fixed value, is applied. Drum Cleaning Unit
The toner dropped from the toner collection sheet is accumulated in the toner catch sheet
located under the developing assembly. Waste Toner Feed Screw

DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2)

Developing Toner Collection Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED

High Voltage PCB (UN52 / UN53 / UN54) (LED2 / LED3 / LED4)

Light Guide
DC Minus

M21 Drum Motor (Y)

M23 Drum Motor (M)

M25 Drum Motor (C)

F-2-138

Parts name Role

Toner Collection Sheet Drum cleaning assembly Scrape and collect the residual toner adhered to the drum.
     Drum cleaning blade Scrape the toner adhered to the drum surface.
Waste toner feed screw Feed the waste toner in the drum cleaning unit.
Scoop-up sheet Scoop up the waste toner dropped from the drum cleaning unit.
Light guide Carry the light irradiated by the LED to the drum surface.
T-2-54

Parts name Role

M30 Drum cleaning/waste Drive the drum cleaning fur brush and the waste toner feed screw.
toner feed drive motor
LED1 Drum cleaning pre- Remove the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface.
exposure LED
Toner Catch Sheet T-2-55

F-2-137

2-96
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
2-97
Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure (CL) ●● Process Unit Presence Detection
This control is performed to prevent reverse transfer of toner on the cleaning blade caused by This machine does not perform process unit presence detection.
drum memory.

●● Drum Unit Old/New Detection

<Details of the Control>
This machine does not have a mechanism to detect whether the drum unit is old or new.
Light is emitted from the drum cleaning pre-exposure LEDs (LED 2 to 4) in the ITB cleaning
unit to remove the drum memory on the photosensitive drum surface and prevent dirt on the
NOTE:
surface. The drum unit potential characteristics (durability) change according to the total drum
The light emitted from the drum cleaning pre-exposure LEDs (LED 2 to 4) is exposed to the charging time.
Therefore, the total charging time is internally maintained and used for bias control, etc.
drum surface via the light guide.
The charging time can be checked via the following service mode. When replacing the
drum unit, the total charging time needs to be cleared via the service mode.
NOTE:
A potential difference at the edges of toner layer transferred onto the ITB at primary <Related Service Mode>
transfer forms a minute gap between the photosensitive drum and the ITB, making a
discharge symptom occur. This causes drum memory to occur on the photosensitive COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETY/M/C/K: Forcible execution of the drum
drum. When the residual toner adhered to the cleaning blade is attracted to the drum replacement mode. Clear the total drum charging time.
memory, causing dirt on the photosensitive drum. COPIER > DISPLAY > DPC > D-CONT-Y/M/C/K: Display the total drum charging time.

●● Drum Heater Control

The drum heater is installed in the ITB unit to realize stable charging and exposure to deal
with environmental changes in the machine.

Operation Condition
• COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DHT-ON : OFF
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > BKDH : 0 or 2
Main power SW : ON ( copy, Standby,warm-up,Sleep 1)
Environment heater SW ON OFF
OFF OFF
Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED T-2-56
(LED2 / LED3 / LED4) Main power SW : ON ( Sleep 2)
Drum Memory Environment heater SW ON ON
OFF OFF
< Without Pre-Exposure > < With Pre-Exposure >
T-2-57
F-2-139
Main power SW : OFF
Environment heater SW ON ON
OFF OFF
T-2-58

2-97
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Process Unit (CL)
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-98
• COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DHT-ON : ON ■■Transfer Assembly
• COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > BKDH : 1
●● Overview
Main power SW : ON ( copy,Standby,warm-up)
Environment heater SW ON OFF Toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the paper.
OFF OFF Primary Transfer Auxiliary Right Roller
T-2-59 Photosensitive Drum (Bk)
Main power SW : OFF Photosensitive Drum (Y) Photosensitive Drum(M) Photosensitive Drum(C)
Primary Transfer
Environment heater SW ON ON Auxiliary Left Roller Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer
Roller (Y) Roller (M) Roller (C) Roller (Bk)
OFF OFF ITB Cleaning Unit

T-2-60 ITB Cleaning Blade Patch Sensor

Unit
<Details of the Control> Patch Sensor
Opposing Roller
The drum heater is a self-temperature-control-type heater, of which temperature is controlled
at 70 degree C. The peripheral temperature is controlled at 40 degree C. ITB Unit

Toner Feed Screw Steering Roller

<Related Service Mode> ITB Drive Roller

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI > DHT-ON: Drum Heater (Bk) is ON forcibly. ITB

Secondary Transfer Inner Roller

Pre-Secondary Transfer Idler Roller
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

F-2-140

Parts name Role

ITB unit Transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum to the paper.
      ITB (Intermediate Transfer Transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum.
Belt)
Primary transfer roller Attract the toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB.
ITB drive roller Rotate the ITB.
Primary transfer auxiliary roller Form the ITB surface against the drum.
(left)
Primary transfer auxiliary roller Form the ITB surface against the drum (when the primary transfer
(right) roller is disengaged).
Steering roller Correct the ITB displacement.
ITB cleaning blade Scrape the toner on the ITB.
ITB cleaning screw Feed the waste toner in the ITB cleaning unit.
Secondary pre-transfer slave Stabilize the belt operation by belt displacement control.
roller
Detect the image density and registration patch for the patch
Patch sensor unit
image on the ITB.
Secondary transfer unit Transfer the toner on the ITB to the paper.
Secondary transfer external Feed the paper transferred. The roller is disengaged from the ITB
roller when scanning a patch image.
Secondary transfer static Remove a potential on the paper after secondary transfer is
eliminator performed.
T-2-61

2-98
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-99
●● Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Control
Primary Transfer Bias Control To prolong the life of image formation parts (photosensitive drum, ITB), the primary transfer
This control is performed to transfer the toner on the photosensitive drum to the ITB. roller for color is disengaged at Bk single-color mode.
The primary transfer bias (DC positive, DC negative (Bk)) created by the primary transfer high
voltage PCB (UN43 to UN46) is applied to the primary transfer roller. Engagement/Disengagement Condition
The primary transfer bias is dependent on the absolute water volume (ENV1), relative Engagement: When a color mode is specified
humidity (UN14/UN15), process speed, and drum dark section potential (Vd), and the bias Disengagement: At the timing other than that mentioned above. However, disengagement
value is determined by primary transfer ATVC control. operation is not performed when the machine starts up with 4-color mode and the mode is
switched to Bk single-color mode. (High voltage is turned off.)
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2)
Environment Sensor (ENV1)
Relative Humidity/Absolute Moisture Amount Mode Bk YMC
Process Speed
Potential of Drum Edge Developing Assembly Roller High voltage Roller High voltage
Inner Temperature Bk single-color mode Engagement ON Disengagement OFF
Detection PCB
(C / Bk) (UN15) Color mode Engagement ON Engagement ON
Bk single-color mode Engagement ON->ON Disengagement OFF->ON
(disengagement) ->Engagement -> Engagement
Primary Transfer PCB (UN43) -> Color mode
Color mode -> Bk mode Engagement ON->ON Engagement ON->OFF
DC

DC

DC

DC
Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer ->Engagement ->Engagement
Roller(Y) Roller(M) Roller(C) Roller(Bk) Bk single-color mode Engagement ON->ON Engagement OFF->ON
(engagement) ->Engagement ->Engagement
-> Color mode
T-2-62

* When the mode is switched from Bk mode (disengagement) to 4-color mode, the drive of
the Bk drum and ITB is stopped and then engagement operation is performed.
Primary Transfer
Auxiliary Left Roller Primary Transfer Roller

F-2-141
<Related Service Mode>
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > 1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K: display of the primary transfer voltage
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX: execution of the primary transfer ATVC

: Attachment Primary Transfer

Auxiliary Right Roller
: Detachment
F-2-142

2-99
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-100
<Details of the Control> ●● Secondary Transfer
1) The cam rotates, driven by the primary transfer roller disengagement motor (M5). Secondary Transfer Bias Control
2) The link lever slides, driven by the rotation force of the cam. This control is performed to transfer the toner on the ITB to the paper.
3) The pressure release lever rotates when the link lever slides, and the primary transfer roller The secondary transfer bias (DC positive) created by the secondary transfer high voltage
for color is disengaged from the ITB. PCB (UN48) is applied to the secondary transfer external roller.
4) At the same time, the pressure release cam also rotates. The primary transfer auxiliary The secondary transfer bias is dependent on the absolute water volume (ENV1), process
roller (right) moves up and the primary transfer auxiliary roller (left) moves down. speed, and paper type, and determined by secondary transfer ATVC control.
5) The position of the primary transfer roller is detected by the primary transfer roller
attachment/detachment HP sensor (PS5). <Related Service Mode>
Primary Transfer Auxiliary Left Roller
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > 2TR-PPR: display of the secondary transfer ATVC paper
Cam
shared voltage
Link Lever COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > 2TR-BASE: display of the secondary transfer ATVC base
voltage
Pressure Release Lever

Secondary Post-transfer Static Eliminator Bias Control

Pressure This control is performed to make it easier to separate the paper from the ITB.
Release
Cam The secondary transfer static eliminator bias (DC negative) created by the secondary post-
transfer static eliminator high voltage PCB (UN49) is applied to the secondary post-transfer
static eliminator.
The secondary transfer static eliminator bias (DC negative) is determined based on the
Pressure Release Lever absolute water volume (ENV1) and paper type.
Only the second side of thin paper (52g to 63g) is applied -3000V under all environments.
Cam Primary Transfer Auxiliary Right Roller
M5
<Related Service Mode>
Primary Transfer Roller Primary Transfer Roller
Attachment and Detachment Motor Detachment HP Sensor (PS4) COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > 2EL: display of the secondary transfer static eliminator
Link Lever
voltage
Pressure Release Cam
F-2-143
<Related Error Codes>
E074: Primary transfer roller detachment/attachment error

<Related Service Mode>

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T1HP-POS: determine the primary transfer roller
engagement/disengagement HP

<Related User Mode>

Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Action > First Print Time > B/W
Priority

2-100
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-101
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2)
<Details of the Control>
Environment Sensor (ENV1)
Relative Humidity/Absolute Moisture Amount 1) The detachment cam rotates, driven by the secondary transfer external roller detachment
Process Speed
Paper Type Developing Assembly Inner Temperature motor (M31).
Detection PCB (UN14/UN15)
2) When the detachment cam rotates, the secondary transfer external roller is engaged with
and disengaged from the ITB.
Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5) 3) The position of the secondary transfer external roller is detected by the secondary transfer
external roller detachment HP sensor (PS22).
Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination Secondary Transfer
High Voltage PCB (UN49) High Voltage PCB (UN48)
DC Plus DC Plus/Minus

Secondary Transfer Roller

Attachment and Detachment
HP Sensor (PS22)
Secondary Transfer Roller
Detachment Motor(M31)

Detached Cam
Secondary Transfer
External Roller
Attachment

Detachment

Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Secondary Transfer External Roller ITB

F-2-144 <Detached status> <Attached status>

Secondary Transfer External Roller Disengagement Control Sensor Flag Secondary Transfer Roller
Sensor Flag
Attachment and Detachment Secondary Transfer Roller
This control is performed to prevent dirt on the secondary transfer external roller. HP Sensor (PS22) Attachment and Detachment
HP Sensor (PS22)

<Timing of Execution> ITB ITB

Engagement: At the time of printing, cleaning of the secondary transfer roller
Disengagement: At the timing other than that mentioned above Detached
Cam
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Internal Roller Detached
Transfer Cam
Internal Roller
Detachment Attachment

F-2-145
<Related Error Codes>
E077: Secondary transfer external roller detachment/attachment error

2-101
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-102
Secondary Transfer External Roller Cleaning Control ●● Cleaning
This control is performed to prevent dirt on the backside of paper caused by dirt on the ITB Cleaning Control
secondary transfer external roller. This control is performed to remove the residual toner on the ITB.

<Timing of Execution> <Details of the Control>

• At the time of initial rotation 1) The toner on the ITB is scraped by the ITB cleaning blade.
• At the time of last rotation 2) The scraped toner is fed into the waste toner container.
• During printing
ITB Cleaning Blade ITB Drive Roller

<Details of the Control>

1) The secondary transfer cleaning bias (DC positive, DC negative) created by the secondary
transfer high voltage PCB (UN48) is alternately applied to the secondary transfer external
roller.
2) The toner on the secondary transfer external roller adheres to the ITB, and is collected by
the ITB cleaning unit.
ITB Cleaning Blade

Secondary Transfer Internal Roller Waste Toner Feed Screw

M3
ITB Drive Motor
ITB Cleaning Unit
Cleaning Bias F-2-147
(DC Minus- DC Plus) <Related Service Mode>
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TBLT-CLN: cleaning the ITB
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TB-INSD: cleaning inside the ITB
Secondary Transfer External Roller
F-2-146
<Related Service Mode>
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > 2TR-CLN: Clean of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

2-102
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-103
●● Separation <Related Service Mode>
Overview COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > 2EL: display of the secondary transfer static eliminator
Paper is separated from the ITB. voltage

Separation is performed with the curvature separation mechanism (mechanical) and static
eliminator (electrostatic).
A DC bias is applied to the static eliminator so that an extra potential on paper is absorbed
and paper is easily separated. The DC bias for the static eliminator changes according to the
absolute water volume (ENV1), paper type, and process speed.
A bias is only applied to the static eliminator only when thin paper (weight of 52 to 110g) is
printed.
The static eliminator bias (-3000V) is applied only for the 2nd side of thin paper (52g to 63g)
at all environments.
An absorption sheet metal is connected to ground so that paper is attracted to the sheet
metal side.

Roller

Flag
Secondary Transfer
External Roller

Static
Charge
Eliminator

Secondary Transfer Internal Roller

ITB
Roller

Attraction Plate
Paper

Feed Guide
Secondary Transfer
External Roller
Static Charge
Feed Guide Eliminator
Flag Attraction Plate
F-2-148

2-103
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-104
●● ITB Displacement Correction Control <Detection of ITB position>
This control is performed to prevent damage to the ITB caused by ITB displacement. ITB Displacement Sensor (PS2) consists of LED and 2 Photo Diodes (PD). Due to the
position of ITB Displacement Sensor Flag, photo intensity of 2 PDs in ITB Displacement
<Timing of Execution> Sensor (PS2) varies. By detecting this photo intensity, the belt position is grasped.
During ITB rotation PD1
LED

<Details of the Control>

1) When the ITB is displaced to the front side or rear side, the edge of the ITB activates the
ITB displacement sensor flag.
2) The position of the ITB Displacement sensor flag is detected by the ITB displacement
sensor (PS2) (Refer to <Detection of ITB position>). The ITB steering motor (M4) is driven
according to the position of the ITB. PD2
3) When M4 is driven, the steering cam rotates and the support arm moves up and down. This
Displacement Sensor Flag
operation tilts the steering roller.
F-2-150
4) When the steering roller tilts, a difference of tension is generated on the ITB, and the ITB <Profile of ITB edge shape>
moves to the front side or rear side. ITB edge is shaped in the wavy line, not in the straight line. Therefore, if the ITB position is
5) The operation from Step 1 to 4 is repeatedly performed to correct ITB displacement. detected without considering this ITB edge shape, the correct position cannot be detected.
6) The position of the steering roller is detected by the steering roller HP sensor (PS3). This edge shape varies in each ITB.
7) The HP mark (white) on inside of the ITB is used when correcting unevenness on the edge At ITB replacement, the profile of ITB edge shape is created using the service mode and
of the ITB that is detected by PS3 (Refer to <Profile of ITB edge shape>). recorded. By referring to this profile and measurement result by ITB Displacement Sensor,
ITB the correct ITB position is detected.
ITB Steering ITB HP Sensor (PS5) detects the HP mark (white) on inside of the ITB, creates the profile and
Drive Motor(M4) recognizes the standard position at ITB displacement correction.
ITB HP Sensor (PS5)

NOTE:
When replacing the belt, be sure that the HP mark (white) is located on the rear side.

Steering Drive
HP Sensor (PS3)
Steering Roller
Steering Cam

Support Arm ITB Displacement

Sensor (PS2)
ITB Displacement
Sensor Flag
F-2-149

2-104
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
2-105
<Neutral position of Steering Roller> ●● ITB Speed Control
This control shifts ITB by tilting Steering Roller. Neutral position of Steering Roller is This control is performed to keep a constant ITB speed to increase accuracy of the image
memorized and ITB displacement is corrected by tilting Steering Roller. This neutral position position.
is detected and recorded by executing the service mode. To keep a constant ITB speed, the encoder connected to the ITB drive roller is monitored.
The rotation of the encoder is counted by the ITB drive roller speed detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/
NOTE:
UN17) on a pulse basis so that the rotation volume of the ITB drive roller is fed back to the
• Because the ITB edge shape differs depending on the ITB, a profile for the edge shape
needs to be created via the service mode when replacing the ITB. The ITB HP sensor (PS5) DC controller interface PCB (UN2) for speed control.
detects the standard position for profile creation and ITB displacement correction.
ITB displacement is corrected by matching the profile with the result of measurement by
the ITB displacement sensor.
• In this control, ITB movement is determined by the tilt of the steering roller. The neutral
position of the steering roller is memorized, and the steering roller is slanted to correct ITB
displacement.
ITB Drive Roller Speed
Detection PCB 2(UN17)

<Related Error Codes>

E075: error in ITB displacement correction control
ITB Drive Roller

<Related Service Mode>

Acquisition of the profile for the ITB edge shape / Acquisition of the neutral position of the
Encoder
steering roller
:COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB

ITB Drive Motor(M3)

ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1(UN16)

ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2(UN17)

Encoder

ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1(UN16)

F-2-151

2-105
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly
2-106
■■Toner Supply Assembly Parts name Role
Toner supply drive unit Supply the toner in the toner container to the hopper unit.
●● Overview     Cap drive link Connect to the toner cap to open/close the toner cap.
Toner in the toner container is supplied to the developing assembly. Cap release holder Release the connection between the toner cap and the cap drive link.
Open/close operation of Toner Container is executed automatically. Therefore, Toner Send the motor rotation drive to the cap drive link as back-and-forth
Release holder shift cam
movement.
Container cannot be normally installed/removed before the toner in the Toner Container runs
Hopper unit Supply the toner in the hopper unit to the developing assembly.
out.     Toner feed screw Feed the toner in the hopper unit.
Cap Release Holder Cap Drive Link Cap Cap Lock Shaft Stirring plate Stir the toner in the hopper unit.
Toner supply screw Supply toner to the developing assembly.
Supply the toner in the toner container to the hopper unit, driven by
Toner container
the toner supply drive unit.
    Cap lock shaft Lock the toner cap.
Toner supply plate Pump the toner in the toner container.
T-2-63

●● Toner Container Presence Detection

Release Holder This machine does not perform toner container presence detection.
Shift Cam
Toner Supply Plate
●● Toner Cap Automatic Open/Close Control
This control is performed to automatically open and close the toner container cap.
Hopper Unit
<Timing of Execution>
Toner Stirring Plate At the time of replacement of the toner container
Developing Assembly Toner Supply Screw
Toner <Details of the Control>

<Opening Operation>
Toner Feed Screw
Toner Stirring Plate 1) The toner cap HP sensors (PS8/PS11/PS14/PS17) detect the toner cap position, and the
toner cap rotation phase sensors (PS81 to PS84) detect the phase of the toner cap and the
cap release holder against the toner container.
2) When the toner container drive motors (M7/M10/M13/M16) are driven re-clockwise, the cap
Toner drive link and the cap release holder move to the right side (to the toner container side).
Feed Screw 3) The toner cap is fixed with the cap drive link. At the same time, the cap lock shaft is
Toner Stirring Plate
pressed to the right side, and the cap is unlocked.
4) The toner container drive motors (M7/M10/M13/M16) are further driven, and the cap
release holder and the cap drive link move to the left side in this order.
Toner Stirring Plate
Toner Feed Screw
F-2-152

2-106
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly
2-107
<Closing Operation> ●● Toner Level Detection / Toner Supply Control
1) When the toner container drive motors (M7/M10/M13/M16) are driven re-clockwise, the cap Toner supply control
drive link and the cap release holder move to the right side (to the toner container side). This control is performed to supply the toner in the toner container to the developing
2) The toner cap is closed to the toner container. At the same time, the cap release holder assembly.
bends the cap release claw, and the cap fixed to the cap drive link is released.
Hopper Toner Level Sensor
3) The motor is driven, and the cap drive link and the release holder move to the left so that M7 M10 M13 M16 (TS5/TS6/TS7/TS8)
the toner container can be removed.
Cap Release Holder Cap
Cap Drive Link Cap Lock Shaft

Release Holder
Shift Cam

M7

M10
Toner
M13 Developing Assembly Feed Screw
Cap Drive Link Rotation Sensor
M16 Cap (PS9/PS12
/PS15/PS18)
M7 M10 M13 M16 Toner Feed Screw

Toner Container
Reciprocation HP Sensor
(PS8/PS11/PS14/PS17) (When Fixing) Toner Feed Screw

Toner Stirring
Plate

(When Releasing)

F-2-153 DC Controller
Interface PCB
Release holder shift cam HP Toner cap rotation phase (UN2) Toner Stirring Toner Feed Screw
sensor sensor Plate
Supply Count
Closed Light shielding Light shielding
Moving (Closed =>Opened) Transmission Transmission ATR Control
Opened Light shielding Transmission
F-2-154
Moving (Opened =>Closed) Transmission Light shielding
T-2-64
<Related Error Codes>
E025-0x00: Toner container drive motor lock error
E025-0x10: Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP sensor timeout error
E025-0x20: Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase error

2-107
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly
2-108
XXXX = Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, or Black
Title Explanation Supply timing Main unit operation
Supply to the Supply the developer in When the detection result The toner container drive *1: The detection timing can be changed in the following service modes (setting of the Toner
hopper the toner container to the by the hopper toner level motors (M7/M10/M13/ Container prior delivery alarm notification timing threshold value). (0 to 40%: The default
hopper unit. sensors (TS5 to 8) is M16) are driven for two value varies depending on the country.)
changed from H to L seconds. *1
- COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-BK (Bk) (Lv.2)
Supply to the Supply the developer in When it is judged that The hopper/stirring supply
developing the hopper unit to the the developer needs to motors (M6/M9/M12/M15) - COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> T-DLV-CL (CL) (Lv.2)
assembly developing assembly. be supplied based on the are driven for a specified *2: The alarm is generated by UGW and displayed on the UGW portal screen. It is not
ATR control result period.
displayed on the host machine.
T-2-65
*3: The number of printed sheets differs according to the usage environment/usage
Toner Level Detection
conditions.
Status name Low Toner Level Toner Empty Output Stop Toner Just *4: It is possible to replace forcibly by executing the following Settings/Registration.
Replaced - Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Replace Specified Toner
Toner Status
Whether to display or hide the "Replace Specified Toner" screen can be changed in the
following service mode.
- COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> T-CRG-SW (Lv.2)
*5. It is judged that replacement of toner is completed when the following conditions are met.
Toner Container: Low level Toner Container: Toner Container: Toner Container:
1) An empty toner warning has been generated.
Hopper: 100 % 0% 0% 100 %
Hopper: 100 % Hopper: 0 % Hopper: 100 % 2) Open/close of the Toner Cover has been detected.
Alarm Codes Toner UGW- None None Toner Bottle 3) The Hopper Toner Level Sensor has detected presence of toner.
Container generated replacement
prior delivery alarm *2 notification alarm
alarm
10-0017 to 10-0001 to 10-0100 <Related Service Mode>
10-0020 10-0004 (00000071 to 74) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-DLV-BK/CL : Set BK/CL pre-toner low alarm notice
timing
Message None None Replace the Replace toner. None
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > T-CRG-SW : ON/OFF of Toner Cntner rplce scrn
(machine toner cartridge. (XXXX)
(XXXX) dspl
operation)
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > WT-WARN : Dspl/hide of Wst Tonr Cntner prep
Detection Depends on Remaining When the sensor When the total When
timing the service toner 10 % output result is number of replacement of mssg
mode setting (Cannot be changed from H printed sheets the Toner Bottle COPIER > OPTION > USER > TNRB-SW : ON/OFF of Toner Container counter dspl
*1 changed) to L has reached is completed
approximately
800 since "Bottle
Empty" was
detected. *3
Detected to Toner supply Toner supply Hopper Toner Toner supply *5
(location) count count Level Sensor count
(TS5 to 8)
Whether Not possible Not possible Possible Possible Not possible *4
the Toner *4 *4
Container can
be removed

2-108
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feed Assembly
2-109
■■Waste Toner Feed Assembly ●● Waste Toner Full Level Detection
The following two types of detection are performed to detect the volume of the waste toner
●● Overview
collected into the waste toner bottle.
The waste toner in the drum cleaning unit and the ITB cleaning unit is fed to the waste toner
• Detection by the waste toner counter (Count-up Sheets)
container.
• Detection by the waste toner full level sensor (TS9)

Process Waste
Unit (Bk) Drum Cleaning Unit Message type Machine operation Detection condition
toner level
Process Process Process Advanced notice "Waste toner is near full. 80% -In case of reaching stated sheets*1 of
ITB Cleaning Unit Unit (Y) Unit (M) Unit (C)
for full level Replacement not yet waste toner counter [count-up sheets]
waste toner needed." is displayed on the or
Control Panel
-In case of detection of the toner by
waste toner full sensor [TS9]
[5% manuscript notes of average
image duty are equivalent to 50,000
Toner Stirring Wire Waste Toner sheets.]
Feed Unit Full level waste "Waste toner reached the full 100% When 1000 sheets are printed after
Waste Toner Feed Screw
ITB Unit toner level is displayed, and the the advanced notice for full level waste
Drum Cleaning M30
and Waste Toner machine operation stops. toner was displayed. Near full counter
Feed Drive Motor Waste Toner (internal counter)
Feed Screw
T-2-67
Waste Toner
Battele Set Sensor The DC controller checks TS9 and the Near full counter (internal counter) every time when
(PS112)
the power is turned on and the front door is opened/closed, and it sends the two types of
messages (Advanced notice for full level waste toner, Full level waste toner) to the main
Waste Toner controller.
Full Sensor
(TS9) When the Waste Toner Bottle is replaced with a new one after it was detected full, the waste
Waste Toner Waste
Toner toner counter (COPIER / COUNTER / DRBL-1 / WST-TNR) and near full counter (internal
counter) are automatically cleared.
F-2-157

Parts name Role <Related Error Codes>

Waste toner feed unit Feed the waste toner to the waste toner container. E013-0001: error in the waste toner feed screw lock detection
Toner stirring wire Loosen the toner fed from the cleaning unit.
Waste toner feed screw Feed the toner in the waste toner feed unit.
Waste toner container Store the waste toner.
T-2-66

2-109
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feed Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feed Assembly
2-110
●● Waste Toner Container Presence Detection ■■Image Stabilization Control
This machine performs waste toner container presence detection.
●● Overview
This control is performed to prevent an image failure caused by environmental changes
Detection method
and deterioration of the photosensitive drum, etc. so that stable printing operation can be
performed.
<Bk >
Lp Laser Scanner Unit
Vd
Potential Sensor
Vdc
Patch Sensor

Waste Toner Battele

Set Sensor Density Sensor
(PS112)

Battele Detection Lever

DC Controller
Potential Control ATR Control Image Position Correct

Vcont
Waste Toner Battele OFF Waste Toner Battele ON
Reader D-MaxPASCAL Control
F-2-158 D-half Control ARCDAT Control
When printing is performed without a Waste Toner Bottle installed, an alarm (00-0B00) PASCAL Control
occurs. D-half D-half ARCDA ARCDA
target Measured Ttarget Measured
Also, "Insert the waste toner container." is displayed on the screen. Value Value
gamma-LUT
Printer+Reder
●● Changing the specification to that for user replacement of Waste
Toner Container PASCAL
Control
By setting COPIER > OPTION > USER > W-TN-DSP to 1 in service mode, the specification
gamma-LUT
of the machine is switched to that for user replacement, and the procedure for replacing the
Waste Toner Container is displayed in the animation.
Main Controller

F-2-159

2-110
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feed Assembly
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-111
<CL> < Transfer >
Lp
Laser Scanner Unit

Vdc Vd Patch Sensor

Density
Sensor

DC Controller
D-max Control ATR Control Image Position Correct
Vpp
Discharge Current
Control
Target Density
D-MaxPASCAL
Reader Control
D-half Control ARCDAT Control
Primary Secondary
PASCAL Control
Transfer ATVC TransferATVC
D-half D-half ARCDA ARCDA
target Measured Ttarget Measured
Value Value Primary Secondary
gamma-LUT Transfer Full Transfer Full
Printer+Reder
Primary Secondary
Transfer Transfer
PASCAL Sheet Interval Sheet Interval
Control
DC Controller
gamma-LUT
F-2-161

Main Controller

F-2-160

2-111
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-112
●● Timing of Control
Model A : iR-ADV C9075 / iR-ADV C9070 , Model B : Models other than Model A
A: Execute, B: Not execute the operation if it is already executed with the paper interval adjustment count. C: Normally not execute due to no synchronous. .

Drum/Developing Ass’y idle rotation

Cleaning of Primary Charging Wire

Image position correction*6
Time required

Low Duty toner ejection*8

Patch Sensor adjustment
Discharge current control

ATR(patch formation)*4
(second)*3

Primary transfer ATVC

Related service mode

Black band sequence

ACR toner ejection

Drum idle rotation
ARCDAT control
Potential control

D-max control
D-half control
Condition*7
Adjustment name
(In case of plain paper)

Model B
Model A
Auto adjustment of paper interval (during job execution) Accumulation of 112*1 4 5 A *10
Accumulation of 200*1 7 8 C A A A *11
Accumulation of 1000*1 14 16 C A B B A
Accumulation of 4000*1 46 48 C B A B B A *12
Depending on average image Duty*5 3 4 A
Auto adjustment of last rotation (after job completion) Accumulation of 28*2 4 5 A *13
Accumulation of 50*2 5 6 A A *14
Accumulation of 70*2 6 7 A A A *15
Accumulation of 400*2 13 14 A B A B B *16
Accumulation of 1000*2 35 40 A A B A B B B
Accumulation of 2000*2 67 72 A A B A B A B B
Accumulation of 6000*2 73 79 A A B A B A B B B *17
Accumulation of 15000*2 93 101 A A A A B A B A B B B
Depending on average image Duty*5 3 4 A
Full correction (Settings/Registration) Full correction - - Foregoing controls are not performed.
Quick correciton (Settings/Registration) Quick correction - - A A
Warm-up rotation auto adjustment (Power ON) Fixing temperature is less than 100 deg. C. 61 65 A A A A A A A A A
Total 2000-sheet from previous D-half control 77 84 A A A A A A A A A A
Fixing temperature is 100 deg. C or higher. - - Foregoing controls are not performed.
T-2-68

*1 Unit: Image
*2 Unit: Image Execute at the last rotation when exceeding the accumulation of image.
*3 Time indicated above does not include the transition time before starting the adjustment (delivery time of preceding paper, last rotation cleaning).
*4 Execute only when the conditions are fulfilled. As for the conditions, refer to the ATR Control. When the average image Duty is high, frequency increases.
*5 Operation may be executed when it is over 120 images(paper INterval) / 100 image (last latation).
*6 To be executed together with other adjustments. (At 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed, the control is executed when the number of papers fed reaches 1/2 or 1/3 of the stack capacity respectively.)
*7 When the length in feeding direction is longer than 215.9mm (LTR), count as 2 images. The same is true on the paper which size is larger than LDR (extra length paper size).

2-112
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-113
*8 Execute when the average image Duty is 1% and less (5% at high temperature).
*9 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > ARC-INT1 :
Set of ARCDAT interruption interval <set range 0-1000(Def 100)>
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TRCLN2-P :
Set of ITB toner supply intvl: ppr intvl <set range 1-1000(Def 100)>
*10 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > PCHINT-2 :
To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by ATR control. (2nd limit)<set range 100-500(Def 200)>
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > INTROT-1 :
To set the paper interval to execute process auto adjustment (analog patch sequence, etc.) at initial/last rotation. <set range 50-1000(Def 200)>
*11 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > INTPPR-1 :
To set the paper interval for automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire and Pre-transfer Charging Wire.<set range 0-9999(Def 4000)>
*12 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVL-VTH :
To set the threshold value of the image duty, which is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence. <set range 1-5(Def 1)>
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVL-PTH :
To set the threshold value of the total duty, which is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence.<set range 50-250(Def 100)>
*13 COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > ARC-INT2 : T
o set the number of sheets which ARCDAT control is not executed, from the start of a job.<set range 0-1000(Def 25)>
*14 COPIER > OPTION/IMG-FIX > PCHINT-1 :
To adjust the paper interval which patch detection is performed by ATR control. (1st limit)<set range 25-200(Def 50)>
*15 COPIER > OPTION/IMG-FIX > TRCLN1-P :
At last rotation, the toner band formed on the ITB is removed by the ITB Cleaning Blade to decrease the friction between them. <set range 1-1000(Def 70)>
*16 COPIER > OPTION/IMG-LSR > CHG-INT :
To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which discharge current control for Y, M, and C is executed at last rotation. <set range 0-10000(Def 400)>
*17 COPIER > OPTION/CLEANING > W-CLN-P :
To set ON/OFF of automatic cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire and Pre-transfer Charging Wire.<set range 50-10000(Def 2000)>

2-113
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-114
●● D-maxPASCAL Control
This control is performed to correct the target density for D-max control.

<Timing of Execution>
At the time of PASCAL control (1st page in test print)

For Bk
Main Controller DC Controller Drum

PG
Potential Sensor
Encoder

Vcont
Reader

PG

Paper

Density data

F-2-162

2-114
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-115
<Details of the Control> 2. Measuring the patch density
1. Measuring the bright section potential A halftone image (test print) created by the main controller is printed.
A halftone image (test print) created by the DC controller is formed on the photosensitive While changing the laser emission time by 16 levels, a halftone image is formed.
drum. The halftone image is read by the reader and reported to the DC controller.
While changing the laser emission time (PWM control) by 16 levels (halftone), the potential The DC controller calculates the laser emission time and the characteristics of the density.
sensor measures the bright section potential. Density
The DC controller calculates the laser emission time and the bright section potential (VL) 1.8
according to the measurement result. 1.6
Potential (V) 1.4
1.2
(Vd=)V0
1.0
V1
0.8
V2
0.6
V3
0.4
V4
0.2
V5
0.0
V6
V7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Light emitting time
V8 F-2-164

V9
VA
VB
VC
VD
VE
VF

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Light emitting time

F-2-163

2-115
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-116
3. Determining the target density "Vcont" for D-max control The target density "Vcont" for D-max control is calculated based on VL_target.
The bright section potential "VL_target" needed to obtain the target density (1.45) is Vcont=Vd-VL_target-Vback
calculated based on the two characteristics calculated in the above-mentioned procedure. Vd: Bright section potential
Potential (V) Vback: Voltage to remove fogging in copy operation
Vd Potential changes depending
on laser emission

Vg
Vg : Grid potential
Vd : Dark area potential
Vd VL : Light area potential
Vdc : Developing DC potential
Vback Vcont : Contrast potential
Vback : Fogging removal potential
Vdc
VL_target Vcont

VL
F-2-166
<Related Service Mode>
0.0 Light emitting time
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > VCONT-K: display setting value of Bk contrast potential
0.2
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > VRATE-K: display Vd gain value in Bk specified by
0.4
0.6 D-maxPASCAL
0.8 COPIER > OPTION > FUN-SW > DMX-DISP: ON/OFF of D-max PASCAL control at the time
1.0 of auto gradation correction
1.2 COPIER > OPTION > FUN-SW > DMX-DISP: ON/OFF of D-max PASCAL control at the time
1.4 of auto gradation correction
1.45
1.6
1.8
Density
F-2-165

2-116
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-117
For Color 3. The DC controller PCB memorizes the read density as the target density.
Main Controller DC Controller
Laser power

Lp
Vd
ITB

PG Patch
Sensor
Reader

Target Density

PG

Charging DC bias
Paper
F-2-167
<Details of the Control>
1. Measuring the patch density
A solid image (test print) created by the main controller is printed.
The solid image is read by the reader and reported to the DC controller.
The DC controller determines the laser power and the charging DC bias so that the density
of 1.45 can be obtained.

2. A patch is formed on the ITB based on the determined laser power and charging DC bias,
and read by the patch sensor.

F-2-168
Test Print
For automatic gradation correction, test print is performed to 4 sheets. Dmax-Pascal control
is performed, using 1 out of these 4 sheets.

<Related Service Mode>

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > VRATE-Y/M/C: display Vd gain value specified by D-max
COPIER > OPTION > FUN-SW > DMX-DISP: ON/OFF of D-max PASCAL control at the time
of auto gradation correction

2-117
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-118
●● Potential Control (Bk) V
A potential on the photosensitive drum surface changes due to factors of static latent images Vg_target
such as deterioration in sensitivity of the photosensitive drum and environmental changes, Vd_target
etc., even when the same voltage is applied.
Changes due to factors of static latent images are corrected by potential control so that stable
printing operation is performed.
Vcont＋Vback
In potential control, a laser power where the target contrast potential (Vcont) is obtained
is determined by measuring a potential while changing laser power (Lp) after charging the
photosensitive drum surface with a uniform potential.

<Execution timing>
• At the time of post-rotation automatic adjustment (on accumulated 1000-image basis)
• At the time of warm-up rotation automatic adjustment (fixing temperature is less than100
deg C/Total 2000-sheet from previous D-half control)
Lp
H40 H50 H60 H70 H80 H90 HA0 HB0
<Details of the Control> F-2-169
1. Determining the grid bias (Vg_target)
Vg_target is the grid bias required to set the target potential on the drum surface (approx. NOTE:
-650V) to Vd_target. Vd_target varies depending on the environment and process speed. When the laser power (Lp) where the target contrast potential (Vcont) can be obtained
is not available, set the laser power (Lp) by increasing Vd_target and performing Steps
Vd_rgh is the result of measurement by the potential sensor when Vg_rgh = Vg_target -
1 and 2 again.
100 (V) is applied to the primary grid plate.
The grid bias Vg_target is determined based on the ratio of this measurement result and
the target potential. <Related Error Codes>
Vg: Vd = Vg_target: Vd_target = Vg_rgh: Vd_rgh E061: error in potential control
Vg_target = Vd_target* Vg_rgh / Vd_rgh
<Related Service Mode>
2. Determining the laser power (Lp) and the developing DC bias (Vdc) COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > PR-GRI-K: display the primary charging assembly grid
Exposure is performed while changing the laser power (Lp) by 8 levels (H40 to HB0), and a voltage
potential in the bright section (VL) is measured by the potential sensor. COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > LPWR-K: display laser power (Bk)
The laser power (Lp) where the target contrast potential (Vcont) can be obtained is COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > DEV-DC-K: display developing DC voltage (Bk)
determined. COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC: execute potential control
VL = Vd_target + (Vcont* + Vback*) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PO-CNT: ON/OFF of potential control function
*Determined by D-maxPascal control and the environmental table

2-118
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-119
●● D-max Control (Only for Y/M/C)
Startup
This control is performed to determine the charging DC bias (Vd), the developing DC bias
(Vdc), and the laser power (Lp) so that the target density determined by D-maxPascal control
can be obtained. DC Controller PCB (UN1)

Patch pattern formation

<Timing of Execution>
• At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (For every 15000 images on an
accumulation basis) Patch Sensor (PS21)
• At the time of PASCAL control (User mode > Automatic gradation correction > Quick
Patch reading
correction)
• At the time of recovery from a jam (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C)

Density
Patch Sensor Y10 DC Controller PCB (UN1)
(PS21)
Target
Y3 D-max correction table
Y2 creation (Y,M,C)
ITB Y1

DC Controller PCB (UN1)

Vdc
Decide Vd, Vdc, Lp

F-2-171
<Related Service Mode>
CMY CMY CMY
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > LPWR-Y/M/C: display laser power
To Primary Charging Assembly / To Developing To Laser COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > DEV-DC-Y/M/C: display developing DC voltage
Charging Roller Cylinder Scanner Unit
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > INTROT-2: setting for execution timing of post-rotation auto
Vd Vdc Lp 7 2 1
gradation correction
Primary Charging Developing
High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB Laser Interface PCB
(UN37 / UN38) (UN40) (UN100)

Patch image data

D-max Control DC Controller Interface PCB(UN2)

F-2-170

2-119
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-120
●● D-half Control
This control is performed to determine appropriate image gradation. Startup

<Timing of Execution> Main Controller PCB 2

• At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (For every 15000 images on an
Output of patch pattern data
accumulation basis)
• At the time of PASCAL control (User mode > Automatic gradation correction > Quick DC Controller
correction) Interface PCB (UN2)

• At the time of recovery from a jam (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C) (Y)D-half correction table Patch pattern is created
Photosensitive Drum Actual gradation
Patch characteristics
Y10
Patch Sensor (PS21)
Y9
100
Patch reading
Patch Sensor
(PS21)
DC Controller

Density data (D-CON)

ITB Interface PCB (UN2)

Output of density data

Y2 Ideal gradation
characteristics
Y1
0 100 Main Controller PCB 2
Data output (MNCON) D-max correction
table is created(Y,M,C,Bk)

10 Blocks DC Controller
Laser 100
Ideal gradation Interface PCB (UN2)
characteristics
Laser Scanner Unit Output the patch

Density data (D-CON)

pattern for ARCDAT
Video data
Patch Sensor(PS21)
Laser Interface PCB(UN100) Bk C M Y
Screen 3 Screen 2 Screen 1 Gradation correction Patch reading
characteristics

Video data 0 100

Data output (MNCON)
D-half Control Main Controller PCB 2

ARCDAT target density value

Density data

Patch image data

DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) F-2-173
<Related Service Mode>
F-2-172 COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DH-SW: ON/OFF of automatic D-half control
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DH-TMG: setting for execution interval of D-half control
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > INTROT-2: setting for execution timing of post-rotation auto
gradation correction

2-120
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-121
●● ARCDAT Control Startup
This control is performed to realize ideal gradation characteristics while attempting to
decrease downtime. DC Controller PCB

Patch pattern formation

<Timing of Execution>
Patch Sensor (PS21)
• At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (For every 112 images)
Patch pattern scanning
• At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every 28 images)
• At the time of recovery from a jam (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C) DC Controller PCB
Photosensitive Drum
Measurement data (A’) transmission

Main Controller
Patch Sensor
(PS21) Comparison of measurement data (A’)
and reference data (A)

Density data(D-CON)
ITB
25 A’
α
10 A
Main Controller 100
Gradation correction
10 40 100 Offset value (alpha) determination characteristics
Data output(D-CON) (i.e., difference between A’ and A)

Data output(MNCON)
50

Main Controller 25 α
10 Current gradation
Reflected to
gradation characteristic 0 25 characteristics
Laser table step by step Data input(MNCON)
Bk C M Y
Laser Scanner Unit Screen3 Screen2 Screen1 F-2-175
<Related Service Mode>
Video data
COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C > TGT-A/B/C-Y/M/C/K: display of target value for each color of
Laser Interface PCB(UN100) ARCDAT screen A/B/C
COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C > SUM- A/B/C-Y/M/C/K: display control difference for each color
Video data of ARCDAT screen A/B/C
ARCDAT Control Main Controller PCB 2
COPIER > DISPLAY > HT-C > SGNL- A/B/C-Y/M/C/K: display patch current value for each
color of ARCDAT screen A/B/C
Density data COPIER > OPTIN > FNC-SW > ARC-INT1: setting for the number of sheets to be interrupted
Patch image data in ARCDAT (100)
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2)
COPIER > OPTIN > FNC-SW > ARC-INT2: setting for the number of sheets to execute at the
F-2-174 time of ARCDAT post-rotation (28)

2-121
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-122
●● PASCAL Control <Automatic Gradation Correction >
This control is performed to stabilize characteristics of image gradation density. Main Controller PCB DC Controller Drum
PASCAL
When "Automatic gradation correction = > Full correction" is selected in the user mode, this PG
1st Sheet
control is executed. The patch pattern printed by test print is read by the reader, and an (D-maxPASCAL)
UN
image density correction table is created. Potential Sensor
This enables to correct characteristics of image gradation density caused by environmental BK
Vcont
Reader
changes and deterioration of the photosensitive drum.
PG

Paper
<Timing of Execution>
ITB
During execution of "Automatic gradation correction = > Full correction" in the user mode
PG
NOTE: PS
Test Print Target Patch Sensor
CL Density
1st page: D-maxPASCAL test pattern (Y/M/C: 32-patch, Bk: 64-patch) Vd
Lp Reader
2nd page: Test pattern for copy operation (64-patch for each color)
3rd page: Test pattern for photo (64-patch for each color) PG
4th page: Test pattern for text (64-patch for each color) Paper

Reader
LUT
<Related Service Mode>
2nd 4th Sheet
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DMX-DISP: ON/OFF of D-max PASCAL control at the time (Gradation PG
PASCAL)
of auto gradation correction Paper
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PASCAL: setting to use/not to use the auto gradation Standard data
PG
for D-half - 10 blocks
correction data - 3 screen x 4 color
PS
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSCL-MS: selecting the target process speed executing Target Patch Sensor
the auto gradation correction Density Value
Standard data
for ARCDAT PG
- 1 block
- 3 screen x 4 color
PS
Target Patch Sensor
Density Value

F-2-176

2-122
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-123
●● Discharged Current Control (CL) <Details of the Control>
This control is performed to obtain an appropriate discharged current according to 1) 3 AC biases (Vpps) are output in the non-discharge field, and 3 AC biases (Vpps) in are
temperature/humidity changes. output in the discharge field, which totals 6 Vpps. Then, the current value (I) is detected by
When the charging AC bias (Vpp) is increased, the field is changed from a non-discharge the developing high voltage PCBs (UN39 to UN42).
field to a discharge field. When an AC bias in the discharge field is applied in addition to the 2) The graph of the "VPP" and "I" values is created in each of the non-discharge field and the
DC bias, the charging condition becomes stable, but, unless the discharged current volume discharge field.
reaches the specified level, it causes an image failure. To prevent it, this control is performed A difference in these two lines is a discharged current volume.
to determine a charging AC current value so that a constant discharged current volume is 3) The AC bias (Vpp_target) where the discharged current volume reaches the specified
secured. level* is found, and the current value "I_target" against the Vpp_target is determined.
*Determined according to the environment.
<Timing of Execution> 4) The primary charging bias is corrected so that the current, which runs to the charging roller,
• At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every time when 400 images are becomes the current value I_target determined by discharge current control.
printed on an accumulation basis). Current
• At the time of warm-up rotation automatic adjustment .

I_target
Discharge current

Non-discharge area Discharge area

Vpp Vpp
F-2-177

2-123
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-124
DC Controller Interface PCB (UN2) ●● ATR Control
This control is performed to supply developer so that an ideal ratio of the toner and carrier (T/
D ratio) can be obtained in the developing assembly.
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) (UN38)
Timing of Activation
Primary charging AC bias

Primary charging AC bias

Primary charging AC bias

Current monitor signal

Current monitor signal

Current monitor signal

a. Control of the supply volume by video count: Executed for each print during printing
b. Correction by the toner density sensor for the developing assembly: Executed for each
print during printing
c. Correction by the patch sensor
• At the time of power-on (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C)
• Last rotation auto adjustment (equivalent to 50 images on an accumulation basis or more
than 3-sheet of A4 size solid images with the accumulation video count)
• Paper interval (equivalent to 200 images on an accumulation basis or more than 10-sheet
of A4 size solid images with the accumulation video count)

<Details of the Control>

Developer is supplied to the developing assembly so that an ideal T/D ratio can be obtained.
The DC controller interface PCB (UN2) judges the toner supply volume based on the
following three types of data.
• Video count
• Density sensor
F-2-178 • Patch sensor
<Related Service Mode>
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > PRIACV-Y/M/C: display discharge current control setting When the DC controller interface PCB (UN2) judges that toner needs to be supplied, it drives
voltage the hopper stirring/supply motors (M6/M9/M12/M15) and rotates the toner supply screw to
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > PRISMP-Y/M/C: display sampling point of discharge current supply toner into the developing assembly. When the number of rotations of the screw is
control detected by the toner feed screw rotation sensors (PS9/PS12/PS15/PS18), the toner supply
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DISCHG: execute discharge current control volume can be detected.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CHG-INT: setting for the number of sheets to execute at
the time of discharge current control post-rotation

2-124
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-125
<Related Service Mode> ●● Image Position (Color Displacement) Correction
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-S-Y/M/C/K: display patch density created by ATR This control is performed to correct color displacement caused by uneven irradiation by the
control laser scanner unit or uneven rotation of the drum and ITB.
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > ATR-EX: forced execution of ATR
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PCHINT-1: adjustment of ATR patch interval (the 1st limit) <Timing of Execution>
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PCHINT-2: adjustment of ATR patch interval (the 2nd limit) • At warm-up rotation
Toner Feed Screw 1) At execution of control for the first time in the day
Rotation Sensor
(PS9 / PS12 / PS15 / PS18) 2) When temperature of the Laser Scanner Unit has decreased by 10 deg C since the last
Toner Supply
Screw execution of control
Hopper and Stirring Developing Cylinder
Supply Motor • At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation(at the time of automatic adjustment
M6 M9 M12 M15 when the accumulated sheet count reached 1000 or more since the last image position
adjustment)

<Description of control>
Toner Stirring Screw Developing Assembly Base is the Bk pattern. Displacement level of patch pattern (each color) is detected and
Toner Density Sensor
image position is corrected.
(TS1 / TS2 / TS3 / TS4)
DC Controller
Interface PCB
(UN2) ITB
Video Count
Density Sensor Result Patch Sensor (PS21)
Patch Sensor Result

F-2-179
<ATR Patch Image>
＜Color＞ ＜Monochrome＞ Shutter

Registration
Patch Sensor (Rear)
(PS20)
Patch Sensor
(PS21)
Registration Patch Shutter Solenoid
(SL1)

Image Y M C Bk Image Bk Registration Patch Sensor (Front)

(PS19)
Patch Sensor Steering Roller
Opposing Roller
F-2-181

F-2-180

2-125
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-126
<Patch> < Tilt > < Horizontal Scanning >
Pattern B Pattern A

Bk C M Y Bk C M Y Bk C M Y

Feed Direction Feed Direction

Displacement amount
6 set 6 set

Feed Direction
Bk C M Y Bk C M Y
F-2-182
Patch pattern to be used
Type of the control <Details of the Control > Patch pattern to
Y
be used Bk
Correction of the writing position in Change the timing of laser writing.
B Rear/Front Displacement amount : Bk Y
the main scanning direction
Correction of the writing position in Change the timing of writing in the sub F-2-183
A Rear/Front
the sub scanning direction scanning direction (TOP signal).
Change the rotation volume of the tilt
Correction of image tilt A Rear/Front
correction motor.
Correction of the magnification in Increase/decrease the number of pixels in
B Rear/Front
the main scanning direction the main scanning direction overall.
Correction of the single Partially increase/decrease the number of
Rear/Front/
magnification in the main scanning pixels in the main scanning direction. B
Center
direction
T-2-69

2-126
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-127
< Vertical Scanning > < Magnification > < Half magnification ratio >

Image Clock

Adequacy

Distortion

Feed Direction
Feed Direction Feed Direction
Displacement amount
Y M C Bk

Bk C M Y Bk C M Y

Y’ Y
Y Bk
Displacement amount : Bk Y
F-2-184
Y
Bk
F-2-185
<Related Alarm Codes>
34-0001: when the patch sensor’s detection data exceeds the limit
34-0002: when the patch pattern failed to be detected
34-0003: when the detected number of the patches is insufficient
34-0004: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the skew correction motor
34-0005: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the write-start position in sub
(vertical) scanning direction
34-0006: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the magnification ratio in main
(horizontal) scanning direction
34-0007: when exceeding the correction range (limiter) of the write-start position in main
(horizontal) scanning direction

2-127
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-128
●● Primary Transfer ATVC Control <Details of the Control>
This control is performed to determine an appropriate transfer bias to prevent a transfer 1. Determining the target current
failure caused by environmental changes and durability variation of the primary transfer roller. The target current "Itarget" is determined based on the temperature/humidity information
Two types of primary transfer ATVC are performed. One is the primary transfer full ATVC, obtained from the absolute water volume (ENV1) and relative humidity (UN14/UN15).
which is performed at the time of last rotation or initial rotation, and the other is the primary
transfer paper interval ATVC, which is performed in paper interval. 2. Obtaining the approximate voltage value
The current value "la", which is obtained when the voltage "Va" considered close to the
Primary transfer FullATVC: to determine the primary transfer bias to run the target current target voltage "Vtarget" is applied, is measured.
Primary transfer paper interval ATVC: transfer bias calculated by the primary transfer If "la" is larger than the target current "Itarget", "Vb = Va - ΔVr (offset value)" is applied,
FullATVC is corrected at paper interval to run the target primary transfer current and, if it is smaller than "Itarget", "Vb = Va + ΔVr" is applied, and then the current "lb" at that
point is measured.
Primary Transfer Full ATVC When connecting the two points between "Va" and "la", "Vb" and "lb" with straight lines, a
<Timing of Execution> line-shape graph of the first-order approximation is obtained.
• At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Every time 400 images are printed on The voltage value "Vrough" which corresponds to "ltarget" is obtained based on this graph.
an accumulation basis) Current(A)
• At the time of multiple initial rotations (Fixing temperature at lower than 100 degree C)
Ia

Itarget

Ib

Vb Vrough Va
Voltage(V)
F-2-186

2-128
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-129
3. Obtaining the target voltage value Primary Transfer ATVC Control
The current value, which is obtained when "Irough" when "Vrough" is applied, is measured. <Timing of Execution>
If "Irough" is larger than "Itarget", "Vc = Vrough - ΔVe (offset value)" is applied, and if it is In printing
smaller than "Itarget", "Vc = Vrough + ΔVe" is applied, and then the current "Ic" at that point
is measured. <Details of the Control>
When connecting the two points between "Vrough and lrough", "Vc and lc" with straight At the time of printing operation, sampling of a transfer current is performed between each
lines, a line-shape graph of the first-order approximation is obtained. image. When the transfer current obtained in sampling is displaced from the target transfer
The voltage value "Vtr" which corresponds to "ltarget" is obtained based on this graph. current, correction of the transfer current is performed.
Please note that this control is performed for each of the 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, and 1/3 speed
Current(A)
and that a transfer voltage suitable for the process speed is determined.
Ia
<Related Service Mode>
Ic COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > 1ATVC-Y/M/C/K, 1ATVC-K1: display the primary transfer
Itarget
Irough paper interval current
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > 1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K: display the primary transfer voltage
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX: execute the primary transfer ATVC control
Ib
●● Secondary Transfer ATVC Control
This control is performed to determine an appropriate transfer bias to prevent a transfer
Vb Vrough Vc Va Voltage(V) failure caused by environmental changes and durability variation of the secondary transfer
Vtr
roller.
F-2-187
Please note that this control is only performed at 1/1 speed. At 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed, Please note that the primary transfer DC bias is determined based on the sum of the base
calculation is performed by multiplying the transfer voltage by the rate at the time of voltage "Vb", which is determined by this control, and the paper shared voltage "Vp", which
deceleration. differs depending on the paper type.

<Related Service Mode> Two types of secondary transfer ATVC are performed. One is the primary transfer full ATVC,
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > 1TR-DC-Y/M/C/K: display the primary transfer voltage which is performed at the time of last rotation and initial rotation, and the other is the primary
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX: execute the primary transfer ATVC control transfer paper interval ATVC, which is performed at paper interval.

Secondary transfer FullATVC: to determine the secondary transfer bias to run the target
current
Secondary transfer paper interval ATVC: transfer bias calculated by the secondary transfer
FullATVC is corrected at paper interval to run the target secondary transfer current

2-129
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-130
Secondary Transfer Full ATVC Control ●● Patch Sensor Adjustment
<Timing of Execution> Correction of the light intensity in the patch sensor and sampling of the ITB base are
At the time of initial rotation performed so that desired patch reading performance can be obtained.

<Details of the Control> <Execution timing>

The same control as that for the primary transfer full ATVC is performed. • At the time of multiple initial rotations (Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C)
Please note that this control is performed for each of the 1/1 speed, 1/2 speed, and 1/3 speed • At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation.
and that a transfer voltage suitable for the process speed is determined. Configuration of the Patch Sensor
Light emitted from the LED is reflected in the patch image and detected by a light reception
Secondary Transfer Paper Interval ATVC element.
<Timing of Execution> The light is filtered into P-wave and S-wave by the polarizing filter so that light intensity is
At paper interval detected by the light-received elements.
The base voltage "Vb" is applied for every 1 out of 5 printed sheets, and sampling of a
Patch Sensor
transfer current is performed. When the transfer current obtained in sampling is displaced
from the target transfer current, correction of the transfer current is performed.
Light receive Light receive Light emitting
Secondary Transfer element element element
High Voltage Sequence

1st Sheet 2nd Sheet 3rd Sheet 4th Sheet 5th Sheet 6th Sheet

Polarizing Filter Polarizing Filter

Secondary transfer sheet

interval ATVC
Sheet interval
opposite bias
P wave：
F-2-188
S wave：
<Related Service Mode>
F-2-189
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > 2ATVC-F1/2/3: display the secondary transfer ATVC target
Adjustment of the light intensity
current (full color)
Light intensity is sequentially switched, using the ITBHP sensor (PS5) as a trigger, so that the
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > 2ATVC-M1/2/3: display the secondary transfer ATVC target
P-wave output becomes 3.5V.
current (monochrome)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > 2TR-PPR: display the secondary transfer ATVC paper shared
voltage
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > 2TR-BASE: display the secondary transfer ATVC base
voltage

2-130
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-131
Sampling of the ITB Base ●● Black band sequence
To prevent uneven reflection in the circumference of the ITB, sampling of the ITB base in one When printing continuously under the condition which toner is not delivered to ITB Cleaning
circumference is performed by the patch sensor in the condition where no patch is formed. Blade, ITB Cleaning Blade might be flipped over, so the toner is transferred on the ITB (width
When an image is read by the patch, correction is performed based on the result of sampling = whole ITB width; length = 10mm solid black band; 2 ITB cycles with 100mm interval) and
of the ITB base. supplied to the ITB Cleaning Blade.

<Related Service Mode> <Execution timing>

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > PT-LPADJ > execute patch light intensity correction and • At the time of automatic adjustment of paper interval (For every 200 images)
base correction • At the time of automatic adjustment of last rotation (Fixing temperature is less than100 deg
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-LED-DA: display patch sensor LED light intensity C/Total 2000-sheet from previous D-half control)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-SENS-P: display base light intensity (P-wave) at the time of
ATR control
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-SENS-S: display base light intensity (S-wave) at the time of
ATR control

●● Drum Idling
Drum idling is performed to remove discharge products generated on the drum surface.
10mm
100mm
<Timing of Execution>
10mm
At the time of multiple initial rotations (Fixing temperature is less than100 deg C/Total 100mm
2000-sheet from previous D-half control) 10mm
100mm
<Details of the Control> 10mm

The machine rotates the drum without applying high voltage to the drum. Discharge products
on the drum are scraped by the drum cleaning blade.
F-2-190

<Related Service Mode> <Related Service Mode>

COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > MAIN-DRV: user mode “Drum Cleaning”, adjusting the COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TBLT-CLN: ITB cleaning
cleaning time

2-131
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-132
●● OHP Black Band Sequence ●● Low Duty Discharge Sequence
When the surface acting agent applied to the OHP surface is attached to the ITB during OHP This is performed to prevent a decrease of density caused by an increase in the toner
printing, the transfer efficiency in the attached area decreases. To prevent this problem, toner potential volume when low duty images are continuously printed.
(Width: Entire ITB length, Length: 80mm in 4C mode, 120mm in Bk mode) is supplied to the
ITB cleaning blade, and the acting agent and the toner are scraped by the ITB cleaning blade. <Timing of Execution>
• At last rotation or paper interval after printing specified numbers* of jobs which average
<Timing of Execution> image Duty is lower than the specified value (default: 1%).
• Last rotation after more than 15 OHPs are printed on an accumulation basis (Counting of the number of prints starts at the point when the conditions are satisfied.
• Paper interval when 15 sheets are printed continuously after the previous execution When the number of prints reached the specified prints (20 prints), the job is
discontinued and the discharge sequence is executed.): A
<4C Mode> <BK Mode>
* It differs depending on the average image duty.

Bk
C <Examples>
M Bk
When the average image Duty is 0.01%, execute toner ejection sequence at
Y
100-sheet.
When the average image Duty is 0.5%, execute toner ejection sequence at 200-sheet.
When the average image Duty is 1.0% and higher, operation is not executed.

• If the condition to execute discharging of a color is almost satisfied when the discharge
80mm 100mm
sequence is executed for another color, the sequence is executed for the two colors at the
same time. : B
F-2-191
<Related Service Mode> <Details of the Control>
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > OHP-PTH > setting the threshold (the number of When the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, toner in a corresponding color is
transparency (OHT) sheets) for ITB cleaning transferred to the ITB.
• In the case of A, an A4-size patch is transferred (With: 297mm, Length: 210mm).
• In the case of B, an A4 half-size patch is transferred (Width: 297mm, Length: 205mm).
<In case of A> <In case of B>
In case Y/M is A In case Y is A and M is B

M M
Y Y

F-2-192

2-132
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-133
<Related Service Mode>
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DEVL-VTH: setting of threshold for toner discharge video
count
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DEVL-PTH: setting of threshold (the number of sheets) for
toner discharge

2-133
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Consumable Parts
2-134
Servicing ■■Consumable Parts
Parts Name Parts Number Piece Expected life Parts Counter
■■Periodically Replaced Parts Developing Assembly(Y) FM0-2706 1 500,000 sheets DV-UNT-Y
Parts Name Parts Number Piece Expected life Parts Counter Developing Assembly(M) FM0-2707 1 500,000 sheets DV-UNT-M
Primary Charging Wire FL2-8915 1 150,000 sheets PRM-WIRE Developing Assembly(C) FM0-2708 1 500,000 sheets DV-UNT-C
Primary Charging Wire Cleaniner 1 FL2-7750 1 150,000 sheets PRM-CLN Developing Assembly(Bk) FM2-2709 1 500,000 sheets DV-UNT-B
Primary Charging Wire Cleaniner 2 FL3-7560 1 150,000 sheets PRM-CLN2 A 530,000 sheets
Pre-transfer Charging Wire FL2-8807 1 150,000 sheets PO-WIRE Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) FC8-2281 1 B 550,000 sheets CLN-BLD
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaniner 1 FL2-7750 1 150,000 sheets PO-CLN C 500,000 sheets
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaniner 2 FL3-7560 1 150,000 sheets PO-CLN2 A 530,000 sheets
Grid Plate FC8-2295 1 150,000 sheets PRM-GRID Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) FL2-8652 1 B 550,000 sheets SU-SHT-K
Grid cleaning pad FL3-4090 1 150,000 sheets GRID-PAD C 500,000 sheets
Primary Charging Assembly FM0-0892 1 1,400,000 sheets PRM-UNIT A 530,000 sheets
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly FM0-0862 1 1,400,000 sheets PO-UNIT Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) FL2-8653 1 B 550,000 sheets EDGE-F-K
T-2-70 C 500,000 sheets
A 530,000 sheets
Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) FL2-8654 1 B 550,000 sheets
C 500,000 sheets
ITB FM4-6624 1 550,000 sheets TR-BLT
ITB Cleaning Blade FL3-4920 1 200,000 sheets ITB-BLD1
Primary Transfer Roller FC0-2331 4 550,000 sheets 1TR-RL-Y/M/
C/K
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller FC7-9325 1 550,000 sheets 2TR-INRL
ITB Internal Scraper Holder FL3-9149 1 550,000 sheets ITB-SCRP
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller FL3-8693 1 550,000 sheets 2TR-ROLL
Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator FM3-9841 1 550,000 sheets TR-STC-H
Waste Toner Container FM0-4545 1 50,000*1 WST-TNR
*1 Replace it when the waste toner full alarm is displayed. T-2-71

A : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C7280i

B : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7270i
C : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7250i

2-134
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Consumable Parts
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
2-135
■■Periodical Servicing List Operation Interval

150,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
CL: Cleaning, LU: Lubrication, AD: Adjustment, CH: Check

Installation

As needed
Piece

Others
Operation Interval No. Parts/Area Name Remarks

150,000 sheets
500,000 sheets
Installation

As needed
Piece

Others
No. Parts/Area Name Remarks
When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum
13 Catch Sheet 1 CL CRG (Color)
Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Unit
Developing Drum Heater Sliding
Each 14 1 CL (Bk)
1 Assembly Cover CL Clean it with lint-free paper. Portion
1 Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
(Color)
T-2-72
Developing
2 Assembly Cover 1 CL Clean it with lint-free paper.
(Bk)
When Replacing the Secondary Transfer
3 Pre-fixing Feed Belt 1 CL Outer Roller
Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
When Replacing the Secondary Transfer
Post-secondary
4 1 CL Outer Roller
Transfer Sensor
Clean it with blower brush.
When Replacing the Secondary Transfer
5 Registration Sensor 1 CL Outer Roller
Clean it with blower brush.
When Replacing the Secondary Transfer
Paper Width
6 1 CL Outer Roller
Detection Sensor
Clean it with blower brush.
When Replacing the ITB/Secondary Transfer
7 ITB Drive Roller 1 CL Inner Roller
Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
When Replacing the ITB/Secondary Transfer
8 ITB Steering Roller 1 CL Inner Roller
Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging
9 Post Upper Duct 1 CL Wire
Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
Shield Plate
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
10 (Primary Charging 1 CL
Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
Assembly)
Shield Plate (Pre- When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging
11 transfer Charging 1 CL Wire
Assembly) Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.
Developing When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Unit
12 Assembly Under The 1 CL (Bk)
Toner Rest Base Clean it with alcohol and lint-free paper.

2-135
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
 2 Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-136
■■When Replacing Parts No. Parts Name Processing at Parts Replacement
1)Execution of Potential Sensor offset adjustment using the dedicated
No. Parts Name Processing at Parts Replacement When replacing the
tool (COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST)
1) Execution of Charging Wire cleaning 8 Potential Sensor and
2)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX) Potential Control PCB
ITB)
1 Primary Charging Wire 2) Execution of potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC) 1) Execution of ITB edge profile/Steering Roller neutral position
3)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT- 9 ITB
measurement mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-ITB)
ITB) Execute the primary transfer ATVC (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-
1) Execution of Charging Wire cleaning 10 Primary Transfer Roller
P>1ATVC-EX)
(COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX) 1) Enter patch sensor alpha value.(COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON>P-
2 Grid Plate 2) Execution of potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC) ALPHA)
3)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT- 11 Patch Sensor
2) Adjustment of Patch Sensor light intensity (COPIER > FUNCTION
ITB) >MISC-P > PT-LPADJ)
1) Test print for checking the grid height is output to check the density 12 Waste Toner Container 1) Install a new Waste Toner Container.
difference between front and back sides.
13 Waste Toner Sensor 1) Install the Waste Toner Container.
2) In case of uneven density: Adjust with Adjustment Screw.
T-2-73
In case of even density: Go to Procedure 3).
Primary Charging
3
Assembly
3) Execution of Charging Wire cleaning (FUNCTION > CLEANING >
WIRE-EX)
■■Major Adjustments
4) Execution of potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC) Nothing particularly
5)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-
ITB)
1) Execution of Charging Wire cleaning
Pre-transfer Charging (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX)
4
Assembly 2)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-
ITB)
1) Execution of Charging Wire cleaning
Pre-transfer Charging (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX)
5
Wire 2)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-
ITB)
1) Disable (OFF) the warm-up rotation.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF)
2) Turn OFF the main power switch. (Replace the Drum.)
3) Turn ON the main power switch.
4) Forcible execution of Drum replacement mode
6 Drum Unit
(COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DRMRSETY/M/C/K)
5) Enable (ON) the warm-up rotation.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF)
6)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-
ITB)
1) Disable (OFF) the warm-up rotation.
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF)
2) Execution of initial installation mode for Developing Assembly
7 Developing Assembly
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET-Y/M/C/K
3)Creation of ITB edge profile (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-
ITB)

2-136
2
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications
2-137

Fixing System ■■Specifications

Item Function/method
Fixing method IH-ODF fixing
Overview Fixing speed iR-ADV C9280 PRO / 7280i
• 321 mm/sec (1/1 speed)
■■Overview • 160 mm/sec (1/2 speed)
• 107 mm/sec (1/3 speed)
By employing the first-in-class IH-ODF (Induction Heating On Demand Fixing Unit), the • 93.3 mm/sec (1/3 slow speed)
fastest-in-class warm-up time and the top runner of TEC value been achieved. iR-ADV C7270 PRO / C7270 / C7270i / C7260 / C7260i
IHODF • 280 mm/sec (1/1 speed)
• 140 mm/sec (1/2 speed)
Heating the Fixing Film of low heat capacity with the IH (induction heating) method has
• 93.3mm/sec (1/3 speed)
enabled the machine to shorten the warm-up time and achieve the TEC value top runner. • 32mm/sec (Standby)
IH Unit IH Coil Fixing heater Fixing Film IH Heater
Control Fixing Film Fixing temperature (Plain paper 1, environment temperature at
temperature 23 deg C)
Shift Copper Plate - 174 deg C
Electrical power Fixing Film 1135W to 1500W
for heating (It differs according to the region. See the following for region.)
Thermistor Fixing Film Main Thermistor (contact)
Fixing Film Unit
Sub Thermistor 1 (contact)
PS75 Sub Thermistor 2 (contact)
Fixing
Inner Delivery Edge Thermistor 1 (contact)
Sensor Edge Thermistor 2 (contact)
Thermoswitch Pressure 1 pc (non-contact)
Roller
Separation Fixing Film Separation plate (non-contact)
mechanism
Disengage mechanism Yes
Cleaning mechanism Yes
PS70 Paper Wrapping Prevention Yes
Fixing Inlet
Sensor Control
Fixing/pressure roller Yes
Fixing Web Unit Fixing Uunifiform Roller Fixing Pressure Roller displacement control
F-2-193 Edge heat rising prevention Yes
control
Down sequence control Yes
Fixing loop control Yes
Protective Function Yes(Detection by the Thermistor and the Thermo Switch)
T-2-74

2-137
2
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-138
Electric power for heating during printing differs according to the model. ■■Parts Configuration
Time Model Country
1365 W (100 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO JP ●● Cross View
machine)
[8]
1500 W (200 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO US, CA, LTN, EU, AU, SG, CIPL, HK, [6] [2]
machine) CN, TW, KR
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7280i EU [7]
[1]
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO US, CA, LTN, AU, SG, CIPL, HK, CN,
TW,
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270 US, CA, LTN, EU, AU, SG, CIPL, HK,
[5]
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270i EU
[4]
1135 W (100 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO JP
machine) imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270 JP
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7260 JP
1248 W (120 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7270 US, CA, LTN, EU, AU, SG, CIPL, HK,
machine) imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7260 US, CA, LTN, AU, SG, CIPL, HK, KR [3]
1336 W (200 V imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7260 US, CA, LTN, AU, SG, CIPL, HK, KR
machine) imageRUNNER ADVANCE C7260i EU
T-2-75

[11] [10] [9]

F-2-194
Parts name Function/method
Fixing Film Unit
1 Fixing Film 30 mm dia. (Ni + silicon rubber + PFA tube)
2 Inner Core To increase the heating efficiency of the Fixing Film
3 Nip Pad To form nip surface
4 Nip Pad Holder To form nip surface
5 T Stay To form nip surface
IH Unit
6 IH Coil To heat the Fixing Film
7 Outer Core To increase the heating efficiency of the Fixing Film
8 Shift Copper Plate To reduce temperature rise at non paper-feed area
IH Unit
9 Pressure Roller dia. 30 mm (countercrown level: 200 micro meter)
10 Heat Soaking Roller dia. 22 mm (AL + PFA coated) To reduce temperature rise
at non paper-feed area
11 Web Unit Cleaning the Heat Soaking Roller
T-2-76

2-138
2
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Parts Configuration
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-139
●● Thermistor, Thermoswitch ■■Drive Configuration
THM15
M48 M56
THM14
THM13
THM11 PS73

TP2
PS110

THM12
PS100
Fixing Film Unit
PS75

PS70

Fixing Inlet Guide Unit

PS99
THM16 PS102
F-2-195
Symbol Parts name Function/method
Fixing Film Unit
THM11 Fixing Main Thermistor Contact type (temperature control, overheating detection)
THM12 Fixing Edge Front Contact type (overheating detection)
Thermistor
THM13 Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Contact type (overheating detection) M55 M57
THM14 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Contact type (overheating detection)
F-2-196
THM15 Fixing Edge Rear Contact type (overheating detection)
Thermistor
TP2 Fixing Thermoswitch Non-contact type (253 deg C)
Pressure Roller
THM16 Pressure Roller Thermistor Non-contact type (temperature control)
T-2-77

2-139
2
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Drive Configuration
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-140

M57 PS99

PS75
PS100
PS70

PS98
PS102
PS73

PS110

M55
M56

M48
F-2-197
Symbol Parts name Function/method
M48 Fixing Motor To control the drive of Fixing/Pressure Roller
M55 Heat Soaking Roller To control the drive of Heat Soaking Roller/Web
disengagement or engagement /
Web Motor
M56 Outer Core Shift/Shift Copper Plate To control the drive of Outer Core Shift/Shift Copper
Motor Plate
M57 Reciprocation Motor To control the drive of Fixing Recipro.
PS70 Fixing Inlet Sensor To detect fixing inlet jam
PS73 Fixing Pressure Engagement/ To detect Engagement/Disengagement position of
Disengagement Sensor Fixing Film
PS75 Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor To detect fixing outlet jam
PS98 Outer Core Shift HP Sensor To detect Outer Core position
PS99 Heat Soaking Roller HP Sensor To detect Heat Soaking Roller Engagement/
Disengagement position
PS100 Reciprocation HP Sensor To detect Fixing Unit Reciprocation position
PS102 Web leve sensor To detect Web leve
PS110 Semi-pressure Sensor To detect Fixing Film semi-engaged.position
T-2-78

2-140
2
Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Drive Configuration
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Overview
2-141
Controls No. Controls/Function Overview
11 Paper dust removal When continuously feeding paper while the Heat Soaking
■■Overview control Roller is engaged, it causes paper dust accumulated at the

No. Controls/Function Overview front side of the Heat Soaking Roller and the web. Therefore,
1 Heat control IH (Induction Heating) method is used. this control feeds the web longer to remove paper dust.
2 Temperature Control Temperature is controlled on the basis of a target temperature 12 Mixed media/width The control for mixed media or media with different paper
calculation for each environment temperature according to the control widths
target control temperature table as a standard. 13 Down sequence There are the overheating down sequence, the down sequence
3 Temperature control This control starts initial rotation of the image formation to prevent temperature rise of the Core Shift Motor, and the low
flying start system when temperature reaches the flying-start temperature temperature down sequence.
(which is slightly lower than the target temperature). This is 14 Fixing Internal Fan It executes ON/OFF control of the Center Fan and the Edge

to minimize FPOT in consideration of the time that the paper control Fan depending on the condition.
15 Fixing control when feeding Although envelops are normally fed at the same control
reaches the Fixing Unit after the initial rotation of the image envelope temperature and feeding speed as those of heavy paper 1 and 2,
formation system starts. envelops with 110 mm or smaller width are fed at the same feeding
4 Paper interval control In case a paper interval is longer than the specified time, the speed as that of plain paper 1 and 2 under lowered pressure.
paper interval temperature control and the paper interval stop 16 Paper Wrapping This control prevents failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by
Prevention Control paper wrapping around the Fixing Film and the Pressure Roller.
control are executed according to the paper interval time.
17 Heat Film Unit To increase jam removability and improve feeding performance of
5 Fixing Film engagement/ To improve jam removability and prevent deformation of the engagement/semi- envelopes, the Heat Film and the Pressure Roller are engaged/
disengagement control Pressure Roller, the Fixing Film is put in a disengaged state, or engagement/ semi-engaged/disengaged as needed
in a semi-engaged state in the case of envelops with 110 mm disengagement control
18 Protection function Function to prevent damages to the machine
or smaller width.
T-2-79
6 Outer Core and Copper To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the position of
Plate shift control Copper Plate and the number of Outer Cores to be raised are
controlled at job start-up and during paper feeding according to
the paper width and the converted number of sheets.
7 Heat Soaking To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the Heat
Roller engagement/ Soaking Roller is engaged with the Pressure Roller during
disengagement and web paper feeding at continuous jobs with a specific number of
feeding control prints or more.
8 Reciprocation control As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of Fixing
Film, the whole Fixing Unit is reciprocated during paper
feeding.
9 Extra-large paper When feeding extra large size plain paper and recycled paper
productivity up sequence with certain models, the productivity is increased in stages
according to the elapsed time since starting paper-feeding.
10 Fixing cleaning control As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of the
Fixing Film, cleaning is performed by feeding the web with the
Heat Soaking Roller engaged when a certain number of sheets
were fed while the Heat Soaking Roller was disengaged.

2-141
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Overview
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Temperature Control
2-142
■■Heat Control ■■Temperature Control
●● Overview ●● Overview
This machine uses the following heating method to enable high-speed full color print despite Temperature is controlled on the basis of a target temperature calculation for each
the size of an office machine. environment temperature according to the target control temperature table as a standard
• Fixing Film: IH (Induction Heating) method • Temperature control level
• Environment temperature
●● IH (Induction Heating) method • Process speed
This is a method to self-heat the metal by electromagnetic induction. • Region
Applying high-frequency AC power to the coil generates magnetic flux around it. Eddy current
flows in the metal as the magnetic flux passes through the metal, and the current flow in the
metal generates heat (Joule heat) in the metal part. This is called induction heating.
The Fixing Film of this machine has its metal part coated with silicone rubber so that the
Fixing Film is self-heated using this induction heating.

Flux
Core
High-frequency Magnetic material
Current (Ferrite Core) Coil

Coil

Exothermic Metal
Heat

Eddy
Current

Core
F-2-198

2-142
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Temperature Control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Temperature Control
2-143
●● Control description ●● Control description
Standby Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Paper This control changes control temperature according to the paper position and the converted
temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature Weight number of sheets to keep a constant amount of heat applied to the paper.
control control control control (g) Temperature control level
Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film Fixing Film From the start of temperature control to the paper type Standby temperature Control
temperature temperature temperature temperature temperature determination
Thin paper 179 169 184 177 177 52 to 63 From the paper type determination to one second before Level 0 control temperature
Plain paper 1 170 194 187 187 64 to 81.9 the top paper reaches the fixing nip
Plain paper 2 185 199 192 192 82 to 105 From one second before the top paper reaches the fixing Level 1 control temperature
Recycled paper 174 189 182 182 64 to 81.9 nip until the converted number of sheets is 999
1 Converted number of sheets: From 1000 to 1499 Level 2 control temperature
Recycled paper 180 194 187 187 82 to 105 Converted number of sheets: 1500 or more Level 3 control temperature
2 T-2-81
Heavy paper 1 175 185 185 185 106 to
150
Heavy paper 2 175 185 185 185 151 to ●● Environment temperature
220 The reference temperature (temperature control table of 15 deg C environment, PS280, JPN)
Heavy paper 3 170 180 180 180 221 to
is offset according to the environment temperature.
256
Heavy paper 4 170 180 180 180 257 to Other than plain paper 1
300 • When the environment temperature is lower than 7.5 deg C
Coated paper 166 186 186 186 126 to The control temperature in the 7.5 deg C environment is used.
1A 128
• When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and 30.0 deg C or lower
Coated paper 166 186 186 186 129 to
1B 150 The target temperature is calculated by the formula below.
Coated paper 166 186 186 186 151 to
1C 180 [The control temperature for environment temperature x] =
Coated paper 2 166 186 186 186 181 to
[Reference temperature] - ([Environment temperature x] - 15) x [Temperature coefficient by
220
Coated paper 3 166 186 186 186 221 to paper type] ... (Formula (1))
256
Coated paper 4 166 186 186 186 257 to
300
Coated paper 166 186 186 186 105 to
5A 128
Coated paper 179 166 186 186 186 129 to
5B 150
Coated paper 166 186 186 186 151 to
5C 180
Transparency 176 186 186 186 -

T-2-80

Reference target temperature table (15 deg C environment, PS280, JPN)

2-143
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Temperature Control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Temperature control flying start
2-144
Temperature coefficient by paper type ●● Region
Thin, Plain, Recycled Heavy, Coated, Transparency To support paper with poor fixing performance used outside Japan, the target temperature of
1.00 1.33 plain paper 2 for the USA and EUR is set 8 deg C higher.
T-2-82

• When the environment temperature exceeds 30.0 deg C

●● Temperature control sequence startup operation
The control temperature in the 30.0 deg C environment is used.
The following shows the temperature control sequence at startup.
Level 0 and 1 temperature controls for plain paper 1
• When the environment temperature is lower than 7.5 deg C
Core shift initial control
The control temperature in the 7.5 deg C environment is used. Heat Soaking Roller initial control
• When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and lower than 17.5 deg C Film Unit engagement and disengagement initial control
Standby
The control temperature with linear interpolation performed between the control temperature
Level 0
temperature control Last
control
temperature in the 7.5 deg C environment in Formula (1) and the control temperature in the rotation
Startup temperature control Print temperature control control
17.5 deg C environment in Formula (2) (which is described later) is used.
• When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and 24.0 deg C or lower The

Main Thermistor detection temperature

target temperature is calculated by the formula below.

[The control temperature for environment temperature x] =

[Reference temperature] - ([Environment temperature x] - 15) x [Temperature coefficient by
paper type] ... (Formula (2))

Low temperature offset

The A4 width or smaller Larger than the A4 width Starts at a timing of whichever is earlier
16 8 Fixing initial rotation time when Environment Sensor is higher than 17.5 deg C

T-2-83

• When the environment temperature exceeds 24.0 deg C

The control temperature in the 24.0 deg C environment is used. 30 sec after Main Switch ON Print start Print completion
*For Level 0 temperature control with the A4 width or smaller only, 5 deg C is added to the Last rotation control in case of no print signal after Main Switch ON
Main Switch ON
target temperature calculated above. or
Print signal reception start
* In any environment, the target temperature calculated in Formula (1) is used when the
F-2-199
target temperature calculated in Formula (1) is lower.
■■Temperature control flying start
●● Process speed (PS) This control starts initial rotation of the image formation system when temperature reaches
For the PS321mm/s model (image RUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C7280i), the target the flying-start temperature (which is slightly lower than the target temperature). This is to
temperature is set 4 deg C higher than that of the PS280mm/s model (iR-ADV C7270 PRO/ minimize FPOT in consideration of the time that the paper reaches the Fixing Unit after the
C7270/C7270i/C7260/C7260i). initial rotation of the image formation system starts.
Note that the control temperature of coated paper 1 to 4 (93.3 mm/s) with the same PS uses The flying-start temperature is calculated as follows according to the environment
the same control temperature of the PS280mm/s model. temperature.

2-144
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Temperature control flying start
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control
2-145
• When the environment temperature is lower than 7.5 deg C temperature is changed to the Level 0 control temperature, which is specified based on the
The flying-start temperature in the 7.5 deg C environment is used. paper type. The temperature is recovered to the normal target temperature 1 second before
• When the environment temperature is 7.5 deg C or higher and 30.0 deg C or lower the succeeding sheet comes into the fixing nip.
The flying-start temperature is calculated by the formula below.
●● Paper interval stop control
[Flying-start temperature] = When paper interval time is 10 sec or more, the temperature control according to the paper
[Flying-start temperature in the 15 deg C environment] - ([Environment temperature] - 15) x interval time.
[Environment temperature coefficient] according to the paper interval time. When the temperature control is stopped, the machine
is at standby state while the Fixing Motor is stopped and the Film is engaged. The target
The flying-start temperature in the 15 deg C environment temperature is specified according to the succeeding sheet upon passage of time during
iR-ADV C9280 PRO/C7280i iR-ADV C7270 PRO/C7270/ which temperature control is stopped, and then temperature control is resumed.
C7270i/C7260/C7260i
164 deg C 167 deg C
T-2-84
■■Fixing Film engagement/disengagement control
Environment temperature coefficient
To improve jam removability and prevent deformation of the Pressure Roller, the Fixing Film
iR-ADV C9280 PRO/C7280i iR-ADV C7270 PRO/C7270/
is put in a disengaged state, or in a semi-engaged state in the case of envelops with 110 mm
C7270i/C7260/C7260i
1.29 1.20 or smaller width.
• When the environment temperature exceeds 30.0 deg CT-2-85
The flying-start temperature in the 30.0 deg C environment is used. ●● Timing to shift to the engaged state
• At Power-on
■■Paper interval control • At recovery from sleep state
• At recovery from an error or jam
In case a paper interval is longer than the specified time, the paper interval temperature
control and the paper interval stop control are executed according to the paper-interval time.
●● Timing to shift to the disengaged state
• When an error or jam occurs
Paper interval time Paper interval control
• When shifting to sleep state
0 sec or more to less than 2 sec None
• At power-off
2 sec or more to less than 10 sec Control temperature is reduced.
10 sec or more to less than 16 sec Temperature control is stopped for 1.9 sec. • At front Cover open
16 sec or more to less than 22 sec Temperature control is stopped for 5.7 sec.
22 sec or more to less than 32 sec Temperature control is stopped for 9.8 sec.
32 sec or more to less than 46 sec Temperature control is stopped for 17.3 sec.
■■Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control
46 sec or more to less than 60 sec Temperature control is stopped for 28.9 sec. To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the position of Copper Plate and the number
60 sec or more Temperature control is stopped for 41.2 sec. of Outer Cores to be raised are controlled at job start-up and during paper feeding according
T-2-86
to the paper width and the converted number of sheets.
●● Paper interval temperature control The position of Copper Plate is determined according to the following table on the basis of the
When paper interval time is 2 sec or more and less than 10 sec, the target control power voltage, paper type, paper width and the converted number of sheets.
temperature is reduced at paper interval. * It is configured such that moving the Copper Plate raises an appropriate number of Outer
To be specific, when the preceding sheet passes through the Fixing Unit, the target Cores according to the position of the Copper Plate

2-145
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control
2-146
●● 200V ●● 100V
Plain paper 2 Plain paper 2
Distance from paper edge Paper width (mm) Distance from paper edge Paper width (mm)
to Copper Plate 330 to 320 to 265 to 210 to 155 to 100 to Copper Plate 330 to 320 to 265 to 210 to 155 to 100
b(mm) b(mm)
0 to 15 15 15 15 15 0 to 15 15 15 15 15
The The
10 to 15 12 12 12 12 10 to 15 12 14 14 14
converted converted
50 to 12 9 9 9 9 50 to 12 11 11 11 11
number of number of
sheets 150 to 12 6 5 5 5 sheets 150 to 12 9 7 7 7
500 to 12 3 5 3 3 500 to 12 6 7 5 5
T-2-87 T-2-90

Level 1 low temperature mode Level 1 low temperature mode

Distance from paper edge Paper width (mm) Distance from paper edge Paper width (mm)
to Copper Plate 330 to 320 to 265 to 210 to 155 to 100 to Copper Plate 330 to 320 to 265 to 210 to 155 to 100
b(mm) b(mm)
0 to 15 15 15 15 15 0 to 15 15 15 15 15
The 10 to 15 14 14 14 14 The 10 to 15 15 15 15 15
converted 50 to 12 11 11 11 11 converted 50 to 12 13 13 13 13
number of 150 to 12 9 9 9 9 number of 150 to 12 9 9 9 9
sheets 500 to 12 9 9 9 6 sheets 500 to 12 9 9 9 9
1000 to 12 3 7 5 5 1000 to 12 3 7 5 5
T-2-88 T-2-91

Other paper types Other paper types

Distance from paper edge Paper width (mm) Distance from paper edge Paper width (mm)
to Copper Plate 330 to 320 to 265 to 210 to 155 to 100 to Copper Plate 330 to 320 to 265 to 210 to 155 to 100
b(mm) b(mm)
0 to 15 15 15 15 15 0 to 15 15 15 15 15
The The
10 to 15 14 14 14 14 10 to 15 15 15 15 15
converted converted
50 to 12 11 11 11 11 50 to 12 13 13 13 13
number of number of
sheets 150 to 12 3 7 7 7 sheets 150 to 12 3 9 9 9
500 to 12 3 7 5 5 500 to 12 3 9 7 7
T-2-89 * The control temperature in low temperature mode becomes the control temperature in high
T-2-92

temperature mode from the level 2 temperature control or later; therefore the Cu shift table
becomes uniformly the same as that of the high temperature mode.

2-146
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Outer Core and Copper Plate shift control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement and web feed controls
2-147
Heat Soaking
■■Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement and web feed
Roller
controls engagement
Paper Weight
timing
To prevent overheating at non paper-feed area, the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged with the (g)
(the converted
Pressure Roller during paper feeding at continuous jobs with a specific number of prints or number of
more. sheets)
In addition, when the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, the web feed control is executed to
clean the Heat Soaking Roller. Coated paper 27 106 to 128
5A
Coated paper 27 129 to 150
●● Heat Soaking Roller engagement timing 5B
The Heat Soaking Roller is engaged at the point when the converted number of sheets Coated paper 27 151 to 180
5C
exceeds the specified value.
Transparency 27 -
The converted number of sheets to make the Heat Soaking Roller engaged is determined
T-2-93
according to the following table.
To prevent overheating, when the temperature of any of the thermistors exceeds 220 deg
Heat Soaking C for 0.5 sec or more, the Heat Soaking Roller is made to be engaged regardless of the
Roller
converted number of sheets.
engagement
Paper Weight
timing
(g) ●● Heat Soaking Roller disengagement timing
(the converted
number of When the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, the engaged state remains until the job is
sheets) completed. After the job completion, the roller shifts to be disengaged at the timing when the
converted number of sheets becomes 0.
Thin paper 27 52 to 63
Plain paper 1 27 64 to 90
Plain paper 2 27 91 to 105 ●● Web feed control
Recycled paper 27 64 to 90 To clean the Heat Soaking Roller, this control counts the number of sheets fed while the Heat
1 Soaking Roller is engaged, and feeds the web every time the counter is advanced by 2. The
Recycled paper 27 91 to 105
web length to be fed is 0.008 mm when feeding paper at normal speed while 0.016 mm when
2
Heavy paper 1 27 106 to 150 feeding paper at at 1/2 speed. The web is not fed when feeding paper at 1/3 speed because
Heavy paper 2 27 151 to 220 the Heat Soaking Roller is not engaged. Note that the count of sheets is executed based on
Heavy paper 3 Not engaged 221 to 256 the table below.
Heavy paper 4 Not engaged 257 to 300
Coated paper Not engaged 106 to 128
1A Length in vertical scanning Number
Coated paper Not engaged 129 to 150 direction of sheets
1B 215.9 mm (LTR) or shorter 1
Coated paper Not engaged 151 to 180 Longer than 215.9 mm (LTR) 2
1C T-2-94
Coated paper 2 Not engaged 181 to 220
Coated paper 3 Not engaged 221 to 256
Coated paper 4 Not engaged 257 to 300

2-147
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement and web feed controls
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing cleaning control
2-148
■■Reciprocation control Black & White productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270 (100V machine)
0 sec (paper 120 sec 300 sec
As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of Fixing Film, the whole Fixing Unit is
feeding starts)
reciprocated during paper feeding.
12inch
To be specific, reciprocation is executed by 0.15 mm whenever the paper's trailing edge 304.8×457.2 21.1 24.9 33.1
passes through the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller. SRA3
When feeding 13-inch paper, however, the Fixing Unit is returned to the HP position and there 320×450 19.9 24.1 33.6
13inch
will be no reciprocation.
330.2×482.6 17.9 21.8 31.3
T-2-96
M57
Reciprocation Color productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i
Motor
0 sec (paper 120 sec 300 sec
feeding starts)
12inch
304.8×457.2 21.1 24.9 33.1
SRA3
320×450 19.9 24.1 33.6
13inch
330.2×482.6 17.9 21.8 31.3
T-2-97

Reciprocation PS100 Black & White productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i
Shaft Reciprocation HP
Sensor 0 sec (paper 120 sec 300 sec
F-2-200 feeding starts)
■■Extra-large paper productivity up sequence 12inch
304.8×457.2 21.1 24.9 33.1
Limited to plain paper and recycled paper of image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270 SRA3
(100V machine) and image RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i and when feeding 320×450 19.9 24.1 33.6
13inch
extra-large paper (12 inch, SRA3, 13 inch), the productivity is increased in stages according 330.2×482.6 17.9 21.8 31.3
to the elapsed time since starting paper-feeding. T-2-98
• Target models: image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270 (100V machine), image
RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 PRO/C7260i
■■Fixing cleaning control
• Target paper types: Plain paper 1, Plain paper 2, Recycled paper 1, Recycled paper 2 As a countermeasure against scratches on the edge of the Fixing Film, cleaning is performed
by feeding the web with the Heat Soaking Roller engaged when a certain number of sheets
Color productivity: image RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270 (100V machine) were fed while the Heat Soaking Roller was disengaged..

0 sec (paper 120 sec 300 sec

feeding starts) ●● Condition to start cleaning
12inch Cleaning is executed when the counter shows 100 or more by counting the number of sheets
304.8×457.2 19.4 22.9 28.3
fed while the Heat Soaking Roller is disengaged. The count of sheets is executed based on
SRA3
320×450 18.2 22.1 28.8 the table below. When the paper is fed while the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, the counter
13inch value is reduced based on the table below.
330.2×482.6 16.4 20.0 26.8
T-2-95

2-148
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing cleaning control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Mixed media/width control
2-149
Length in vertical scanning Number ■■Mixed media/width control
direction of sheets
215.9 mm (LTR) or shorter 1 ●● Mixed media
Longer than 215.9 mm (LTR) 2 In the case of a job with mixed media (e.g.: Thin paper => Plain paper 1) fed at normal speed,
T-2-99
the following control is executed when the media is switched according to the difference in
●● Cleaning operation the media's control temperature.
When feeding paper at normal speed and at 1/2 speed
Cleaning operation is executed when the last rotation is started with the counter value When the control temperature is higher after media is switched
exceeding 100. The control temperature is switched t sec before the paper, which is used after media
The web is fed after the Fixing Motor is driven at normal speed and the Heat Soaking Roller switching, reaches the fixing nip. The timing to switch control temperature is determined
is engaged. The web is fed for 0.016 mm at intervals of 1.5 sec repeatedly for 5 times. The based on the following table.
counter value is reduced by 100 when the web feeding is completed. Difference t (sec)
When a job is introduced during cleaning operation, the cleaning is stopped to immediately in control
start the job. The machine memorizes how many times the web-feeding was executed at that temperature
time, and then executes the remaining web-feeding operation at the next last rotation. +25 to 6
+15 to +19 4
+10 to +14 3
When feeding paper at 1/3 speed
+5 to +9 2
When the counter value exceeds 100, the Heat Soaking Roller shifts to be engaged while 0 to +4 0
paper is fed, and then the web-feeding is executed. The web is fed at the point when paper T-2-100

passes through the fixing nip, with the web length to be fed being 0.032 mm, and the number When the control temperature is lower after media switching
of web-feeding being 5 times. By increasing paper intervals, it controls to make the paper, which is used after media
When the job is completed during cleaning, the remaining web-feeding operation is executed switching, reach the fixing nip t sec after the paper, which was used before media switching,
at the last rotation. The operation at that time is the same as that when feeding paper at passes through the fixing nip. The control temperature is switched at the point when the
normal speed and at 1/2 speed. paper before media switching passes through the fixing nip. Paper interval time is determined
based on the following table.
■■Paper dust removal control Difference t (sec)
When continuously feeding paper while the Heat Soaking Roller is engaged, it can cause in control
temperature
paper dust accumulated at the front side of the Heat Soaking Roller and the web. Therefore,
0 to -4 0
this control feeds the web longer to remove paper dust.
-5 to -9 0
To be specific, the number of sheets continuously fed while the Heat Soaking Roller is -10 to -14 0
engaged is counted, and the web is fed for the length equivalent to 800 sheets of LTR (approx. -15 to -19 2
3.2 mm) when the number of sheets fed reaches 2,000. The counting method for the number -20 to 2
of sheets fed is the same as that of the normal web feed control. Note that there is no normal T-2-101

web feed control during web-feeding operations by the paper dust removal control.

2-149
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Mixed media/width control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Mixed media/width control
2-150
During printing
●● Media with different paper widths
Width of large size > ymm Width of large size - Width of small size >/= zmm
↓Large size ↓Large size
Has information
Whenever paper passes through the fixing nip, the Outer Cores and Copper Plate are moved
Paper Type y productivity Paper Type z productivity
of "X+n"th sheet come?
Thin paper
Recycled paper 1
100
215.9
Thin paper
Recycled paper 1
45
50
No according to the paper with maximum paper width among the 4 sheets of succeeding paper.
Recycled paper 2 215.9 Recycled paper 2 50
Yes
Plain paper 1 215.9 Plain paper 1 50 When the paper data of succeeding 4 sheets has not been notified, the paper interval is
Plain paper 2 215.9 Plain paper 2 50 Heat generation width according
Heavy paper 1
Heavy paper 2
215.9
215.9
Heavy paper 1
Heavy paper 2
50
50
to paper size of top (Xth) sheet
controlled to make the succeeding sheet reach the fixing nip 6 seconds after the preceding
one by moving the Outer Cores and Copper Plate according to the paper with the maximum
Heavy paper 3 215.9 Heavy paper 3 50
Heavy paper 4 215.9 Heavy paper 4 50
Coated paper 1 215.9 Coated paper 1 50
Coated paper 2
Coated paper 3
215.9
215.9
Coated paper 2
Coated paper 3
50
50
Is paper size of top (Xth) sheet
bigger than previous sheet?
No
paper width among the sheets whose data has been notified.
Coated paper 4 215.9 Coated paper 4 50
Yes When the paper width is switched from small to large, pickup is stopped until the temperature
Edge Thermistor - Center Thermistor >/= W deg C
↓Small size at the edge of the Fixing Film reaches below the specified temperature based on the flow
Paper Type z productivity Width of large size > ymm
Thin paper -20 No chart below.
Recycled paper 1 -5
Yes
Recycled paper 2 15
Plain paper 1 10
Plain paper 2 15

●● Large size job after a small size job

Heavy paper 1 20
Width of large size
- Width of small size >/= zmm
Heavy paper 2 30 No
Heavy paper 3 30
Heavy paper 4
Coated paper 1
30
30
Yes In the case of executing a job with large-width paper after executing a job with small-width
Coated paper 2
Coated paper 3
30
30 Edge TH paper, pickup operation is kept waiting until the temperature at the edge of the Film reaches
Coated paper 4 30 - Center TH >/= W deg C
No
Yes
above the specified temperature according to the flow chart below.
Edge Thermistor >/= WW deg C
Last rotation mode Image priority mode
Paper Type WW productivity No
Thin paper 155 Yes
Recycled paper 1 175 Job start
Recycled paper 2 210
Plain paper 1 195
Fixing with 0s wait time
Plain paper 2 210 Waiting in last rotation mode
Heavy paper 1 200 in NN ・Film engagement rotation
Heavy paper 2 200 in NN ・Heat Soaking engagement
Heavy paper 3 200 in NN ・Edge Fan ON
Heavy paper 4 200 in NN
Coated paper 1 190 in NN
Coated paper 2 200 in NN
Coated paper 3 200 in NN
Coated paper 4 200 in NN
Edge TH < WW deg C Size of last paper for previous job
No > size of first paper for next job
Yes &
Paper Type WW High-resolution Edge TH < Center TH - 25 deg C No
Thin paper 130 Large size job start
Recycled paper 1 150 IH ON
Recycled paper 2 190
Plain paper 1 160
Plain paper 2 200
Center Fan ON
Heavy paper 1 170 in NN
Heavy paper 2 190 in NN
&
Pickup stop Yes
Heavy paper 3 190 in NN
Heavy paper 4 190 in NN
Coated paper 1 150 in NN
Coated paper 2 190 in NN
Center Fan ON
Coated paper 3 190 in NN Edge TH >/= Ceter TH -25 deg C &
Coated paper 4 190 in NN No Pickup stop
Yes

Pickup start
(Center Fan follows Center Fan control)

Edge TH >/= Center TH - 25 deg C

F-2-201 No
Yes

Pickup start
(Center Fan follows Center Fan control)

F-2-202

2-150
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Mixed media/width control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence
2-151
■■Down sequence Job start
Default x=0

●● Down sequence to avoid overheating

Edge TH >/= 250 deg C
It controls to prevent the Fixing Unit from being overheated to an overheating error or
Center TH >/= 240 deg C Yes
temperature even in the case of a wrong size/weight setting or double feeding. No IH OFF

IH Heater OFF control Down Level x=0?

or
When the Main Thermistor detects 240 deg C or higher or when the Edge Thermistor detects Number of sheets fed
with Pstx >/= two-sheet Yes
250 deg C or higher, the IH Heater is turned OFF to continue paper feeding. Then, the IH x=x+1
No Outputs at Down Level x
Heater is turned ON again when the Main Thermistor detects lower than 230 deg C while the
Edge Thermistor detects lower than 240 deg C.
2s Over
(Edge TH >/= 260 deg C
or
Productivity down control Yes Center TH >/= 250 deg C) No

When the Main Thermistor detects 240 deg C or higher or when the Edge Thermistor
Edge TH < 240 deg C
detects 250 deg C or higher, the machine reduces its productivity as Down Level 1. At that and
Center TH < 230 deg C No
moment, the temperature should be reduced because the IH Heater OFF control is executed Yes

simultaneously; however, when the Main Thermistor detects 240 deg C or higher, or the Edge IH ON

Thermistor detects 250 deg C or higher after the heater is turned ON again, the Down Level
is increased by 1 to further reduce productivity The step above is repeated until it reaches E001
(High temperature error)
Down Level 4. When Down Level is increased, it will not shift to the next Down Level unless 2 No
Job completion? Job completion?
No
Yes Yes
or more sheets of paper are fed in the existing state. Productivity is back to the normal state
when the job is completed.
Job completion

Down Level Productivity

F-2-203
Level 1 23.53 %
Level 2 17.64 % ●● Down sequence to avoid temperature rising of Core Shift Motor
Level 3 11.76 % In the case of handling media with different paper width, the Outer Cores and the Copper
Level 4 7.84 % Plate are frequently moved, which can cause temperature rising of the Core Shift Motor.
T-2-102 Therefore, the machine reduces its productivity when the average current value of the Core
Shift Motor in the past 40 sec was 0.12A or more. Productivity is calculated by the formula
below.
[Productivity] = [Current productivity (ppm)] x 0.12/[Average current value in the past 40 sec]
Productivity is updated every 40 sec. Productivity is back to the normal state when the job is
completed.

●● Low temperature down sequence

Depending on the conditions of output restriction at low pressure, low temperature
environment, large paper weight, etc., this machine has the down sequence to prevent fixing
failure caused by reduced temperature due to power shortage

2-151
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence
2-152
(The first 5 sheets are ignored) During printing
(operating with initial PPPM0)

Low temperature down The

Number of sheets fed > 5?
sequence converted No
Yes
number of
sheets Meets all of the following
・ Power voltage Vin right before IH is ON >/= Rated voltage VXa

0 sheets 6 sheets 30 sheets 100sheets 300 sheets 1,000 sheets

・Environment temperature Tenv >/= 12.5 deg C
・Paper type = Thin, Plain 1, Plain 2
Yes

to to to to to to No
Environment Low - 20 deg 20 deg C 20 deg C 20 deg C 13 deg C
temperature temperature C Environment Temperature >/= 7.5 deg C
No
is 7.5 deg C
down Yes Center TH <

or higher
Detects Control temperature
with offset - Tds 2 deg C
No
sequence 1 Center TH <
for 1 sec or more

Detects Control temperature Yes

Environment Low - 12 deg 12 deg C 12 deg C 12 deg C 12 deg C with offset - Tds 1 deg C
for 1 sec or more No
temperature temperature C Yes
is less then Outputs PPM0
down
7.5 deg C Outputs with
PPMn=PPM0 -⊿PPM0
sequence 2
T-2-103
Job completion?
Yes
ppm is lowered when the temperature of the Fixing Unit is below the above value as against No

the target temperature of the Fixing Unit (refer to the following table). Paper interval adjusted?
Outputs the last PPM0 to Red1s

Yes
No Follows paper interval fixing control
as Adjusted time-Paper interval of PPMn Job completion
→ Time to judge paper
interval temperature control

The following values are deducted. Paper Interval

Temperature Control
or
Yes
Paper length feed direction (mm) Paper Interval Stop?

No
to 216 216.1 to 431.8 431.9 to 630 630.1 to
Delta PPM Initial Initial Initial Initial Number of sheets fed with PPMn
No >/= two-sheet

ppm×0.25 ppm×0.25 ppm×0.25 ppm×0.25 Yes

The lower limit of PPMn is the initial ppm x 0.25. T-2-104 Center TH <
Detects Control temperature with offset
- 5 deg C for 1 sec or more No
Yes

Center TH <
Detects Control temperature with offset
- Tds 1 deg C for 1 sec or more Outputs with PPMn=PPM0 -⊿PPM0
No
Yes
※⊿⊿PPM depends on ⊿Vin (table 1)
⊿Vin=V-Vin
PPMn=PPMn -⊿PPM V: Rated voltage
Vin: Power voltage right before IH is ON

PPMn </= 0.25xPPM0

No
Yes
Number of sheets fed with PPM0
PPMn=0.25xPPM0 >/= two-sheet No
Yes

F-2-204

2-152
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Internal Fan control
2-153
■■Fixing Internal Fan control Paper Paper Thin paper Recycled paper
width (mm) length The number of To stop when The number of To stop when
●● Center Fan control (mm) sheets to stop temperature sheets to stop temperature
the Center Fan difference the Center Fan difference
during paper between the during paper between the
feeding edge and the feeding edge and
center reaches the center
X deg C. reaches X
deg C.
B5 257 182 1,000 0 1,000 25
B4 257 364 1,000 0 1,000 25
EXEC 267 184 1,000 0 1,000 25
16K 270 390 1,000 0 1,000 25
8K 270 195 1,000 0 1,000 25
LTR 279.4 216 500 -2 1,000 25
LDR 279.4 432 500 -2 1,000 25
A4 297 210 500 -2 1,000 25
FM16 A3 297 420 500 -2 1,000 25
Pressure Film 12×18 304.8 457.2 500 -5 1,000 25
Cooling Fan (Rear)
12×19.2 304.8 487.7 500 -5 1,000 25
FM27 SRA3 320 450 Stopped - Stopped -
Pre-fixing Feed
Cooling Fan 13×19 330.2 482.6 Stopped - Stopped -
FM15
T-2-105
Pressure Film
Cooling Fan (Front)
F-2-205
Paper Paper Plain paper 1 Transparency
The ON/OFF control is executed based on the table and flow chart below.
width (mm) length The number of To stop when The number of To stop when
Paper Paper Thin paper Recycled paper (mm) sheets to stop temperature sheets to stop temperature
width (mm) length The number of To stop when The number of To stop when the Center Fan difference the Center Fan difference
(mm) sheets to stop temperature sheets to stop temperature during paper between the during paper between the
the Center Fan difference the Center Fan difference feeding edge and the feeding edge and
during paper between the during paper between the center reaches the center
feeding edge and the feeding edge and X deg C. reaches X
center reaches the center deg C.
X deg C. reaches X Postcard 100 148 Stopped - Stopped -
deg C. STMTR 139.7 215.9 1,000 0 5 5
Postcard 100 148 Stopped - Stopped - A5R 148 210 1,000 0 5 5
STMTR 139.7 215.9 1,000 0 1,000 25 B5R 182 257 1,000 0 5 5
A5R 148 210 1,000 0 1,000 25 A5 210 148 1,000 0 5 5
B5R 182 257 1,000 0 1,000 25 A4R 210 297 1,000 0 5 5
A5 210 148 1,000 0 1,000 25 LTRR 215.9 279 1,000 0 5 5
A4R 210 297 1,000 0 1,000 25 LGL 215.9 356 1,000 0 5 5
LTRR 215.9 279 1,000 0 1,000 25 B5 257 182 Stopped - 5 5
LGL 215.9 356 1,000 0 1,000 25 B4 257 364 Stopped - 5 5

2-153
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Internal Fan control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Internal Fan control
2-154
Paper Paper Plain paper 1 Transparency
Power-on or
Print signal ON

width (mm) length The number of To stop when The number of To stop when To←Control temperature is calculated
from temperature table

(mm) sheets to stop temperature sheets to stop temperature

the Center Fan difference the Center Fan difference Film Temperature </= 200 deg C?
&
(Moisture content >/= 0g?) No
during paper between the during paper between the Yes

feeding edge and the feeding edge and Paper Type=Unknown

or Thin or Plain1 or Recycled1 or OHP?
&
center reaches the center No (Paper Width >/= 100mm?)

X deg C. reaches X Yes

deg C. Center Fan ON?

No
EXEC 267 184 Stopped - 5 5 Yes
16K 270 390 Stopped - 5 5 Edge MIN - Center TH Edge MIN - Center TH

8K 270 195 Stopped - 5 5

Temperature > 0 deg C Temperature </= -2 deg C
No No
Center
Yes Yes
LTR 279.4 216 Stopped - 2 0 Center Center
Cooling Fan OFF

LDR 279.4 432 Stopped - 2 0

Cooling Fan OFF Cooling Fan ON
Temperature control offset
at center cooling
A4 297 210 Stopped - 2 0 Temperature control offset
at center cooling
Temperature control offset
at center cooling
Ttgt←To

A3 297 420 Stopped - 2 0

Ttgt←To Ttgt←To -X deg C

12×18 304.8 457.2 Stopped - Stopped -

Within 1 sec after paper
enters nip?
Within 1 sec after paper
12×19.2 304.8 487.7 Stopped - Stopped - enters nip? No
Yes
SRA3 320 450 Stopped - Stopped -
13×19 330.2 482.6 Stopped - Stopped -
Edge Fan ON?
T-2-106 Yes
No

Center Fan ON condition?

Refer to table
(Paper Type=Thin or Plain1 or Recycled1 or OHP)
No (Paper Width)

Yes

Number of sheets product < N2?

No
Yes

Center Fan ON?

No
Yes

Edge MIN - Center TH Edge MIN - Center TH

Temperature > Toff2 deg C Temperature </= Ton2 deg C
No No
Yes Yes
Center Center
Cooling Fan OFF Cooling Fan ON

Temperature control offset Temperature control offset

at center cooling at center cooling
Ttgt←To Ttgt←To -T2 deg C

Center
Cooling Fan OFF

Temperature control offset

at center cooling
Ttgt←To

Print completion?
No
Yes
Completion

F-2-206

2-154
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Internal Fan control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Internal Fan control
2-155
●● Edge Fan control Print completion

The ON/OFF control is executed based on the flow chart below.

During paper feed job IH OFF
Core shift HP

No Edge Fan OK？

Yes
Printed paper width </= 300mm?
&
Accumulated number of sheets
for previous job >/= 50 sheet No

Printing Paper Width </= 215.9mm?

No
Printing Paper Width </= 215.9mm?
No Yes
Yes Yes
Edge TH Temperature F or R
Edge TH >/= 230 deg C
or
Edge TH < 220 deg C
>/= 180 deg C? No
Edge TH >/= 210 deg C & Edge TH < 230 deg C
Edge TH-Center TH >/= 25 deg C Edge TH-Center TH < 20 deg C

No No No No Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Edge Cooling Fan ON
Edge Cooling Fan ON Edge Cooling Fan ON Edge Cooling Fan OFF Edge Cooling Fan OFF

No Yes
Moisture content >/= 15g?

Job completion?

No Fixing Motor Stop Fixing Motor Normal Speed Rotation

Yes (Heat Soaking Roller and Fixing Film remain engaged) (Heat Soaking Roller and Fixing Film remain engaged)

During paper feed job

F-2-207

●● Edge Cooling Fan control after job Edge TH Temperature F and R

To prevent image failure when feeding large-width paper after continuous feeding of small- </= 180 deg C? No
width paper, the machine reduces temperature at non paper-feed area by blowing air with Yes
the Edge Fan after completion of the job with small-size paper. When the following job is
introduced while this control is executed, the machine immediately stops the cooling operation Edge Cooling Fan OFF

to start the job.

The control description is described in the flow chart below.
Fixing Motor stop

Standby

F-2-208

2-155
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Fixing Internal Fan control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper Wrapping Prevention Control
2-156
■■Fixing control when feeding envelope =THIN1 / THIN2(Thin paper print fixing film temperature control)
=OHT-1 / OHT2(Transparency print fixing film temperature control)
Although envelops are normally fed at the same control temperature and feeding speed as
those of heavy paper 1 and 2, envelops with 110 mm or smaller width are fed at the same
feeding speed as that of plain paper 1 and 2 under lowered pressure.
• Paper is fed while the Fixing Film is semi-engaged.
■■Paper Wrapping Prevention Control
• Paper is fed at normal speed (note that the productivity is the same as when feeding paper ●● Overview
at 1/2 speed) This control prevents failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the
• The control temperature is the same as that of plain paper 2. Fixing Film and the Pressure Roller.

●● Related error code ●● Control description

• Insufficient temperature increase at power-on This machine uses a sensor to detect paper wrapping around the Heat Film or Pressure
E000-0001 / 0101 Roller to assume a paper wrapping state
• Abnormal temperature rising
Sensor name Condition Detection condition
E001-0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0011 / 0012 / 0013 / 0014 / 0015 / 0102 / 0103 / 0111 / 0112 / Fixing Inner Delivery The paper's leading edge wraps Delay in paper feeding -> Detection
0113 Sensor (PS75) around the Heat Film or the Pressure by PS75
• Insufficient temperature increase Roller.
E002-0002 / 0003 / 0004 / 0005 / 0006 / 0102 T-2-107
• Abnormal low temperature
The DC Controller performs the following remedies once a paper wrapping is detected.
E003-0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0004
1. The brake is applied to the Fixing Motor to immediately stop operation of the Fixing Motor. (to
minimize the paper wrapping level).
●● Related service mode 2. The Heat Film Unit is Pressure Release from the Pressure Roller.
• Output temperature of Fixing Thermistor 3. A jam is displayed. (Jam code: PS75 = 0110)
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-UC / UE / LC / UC2 / UC3 / UE2
• Fixing control temperature change
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-XXX
XXX-1: Immediately before printing
XXX-2: During printing
=P1-1 / P1-2(plain paper 1 print fixing film temperature control))
=P2-1 / P2-2(plain paper 2 print fixing film temperature control)
PS75
=R1-1 / R1-2(Recycled paper 1 print fixing film temperature control)
=R2-1 / R2-2(Recycled paper 2 print fixing film temperature control)
=H1-1 / H1-2(Heavy paper 1 print fixing film temperature control)
=H2-1 / H2-2(Heavy paper 2 print fixing film temperature control)
=H3-1 / H3-2(Heavy paper 3 print fixing film temperature control)
=H4-1 / H4-2(Heavy paper 4 print fixing film temperature control)
F-2-209
=C1A-1 / C1A-2 / C1B-1 / C1B-2 / C1C-1 / C1C-2 / C2-1 / C2-2 / C3-1 / C3-2 / C4-1 / C4-2 /
C5A-1 / C5A-2 / C5B-1 / C5B-2 / C5C-1 / C5C-2(Coated paper print fixing film temperature
control)

2-156
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper Wrapping Prevention Control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Film Unit pressure/semi-pressure/disengagement control
2-157
●● Detection of remaining paper
The Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS70) executes detection of remaining paper to prevent wrapped
IH Unit
paper from being forgotten to be removed at recovery from fixing paper wrapping jam.
PS73
PS110

M48

Pressure Release Cam

Pressure Half Pressure Detachment

PS70 Pressure Release
Roller Gear
F-2-210

■■Heat Film Unit pressure/semi-pressure/disengagement control

●● Overview
To increase jam removability and improve feeding performance of envelopes, the Heat Film
applies pressure/semi-pressure to and disengages from the Pressure Roller as needed.
Pressure Release Cam

●● Execution timing F-2-211

• Applying pressure: Printing ●● Pressure/disengagement detection

• Applying semi-pressure: Envelopes Whether the Film Unit releases/applies pressure is detected by the Fixing Pressure Release
• Releasing pressure: At paper jam, at sleep state or at power-off Sensor (PS73) and the Semi-pressure Sensor (PS110).

●● Control description ●● Related Error Code

The Pressure Film is pressured/released by the drive of the Fixing Pressure Release Motor Pressure Unit pressure release error
(M47). E009-0500/0501/0502
1) When the Fixing Pressure Release Motor (M47) rotates clockwise, the drive of the Motor *The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS73) failed to detect engagement/disengagement of
rotates the Pressure Cam. the Pressure Film.
2) Rotation of the Pressure Cam lifts the Pressure Film Unit. • 0500: Pressure Unit pressure release HP search error
3) Lifting of the Film Unit releases the nip pressure with the Pressure Roller.
●● Related service mode
• Displaying the total number of sheets fed through the Fixing Unit
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U
* The accumulated number of sheet fed (converted into small-size sheet) is displayed.

2-157
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Heat Film Unit pressure/semi-pressure/disengagement control
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection function
2-158
• Displaying the rotation time equivalent to the time when the Fixing Film Unit is at standby
Thermoswitch
COPIER>DISPLAY>FIXING>BLT-TM to 8/BLT2-TM 1 to 8
* To be displayed based on the process speed (321, 280, 160, 140, 107, 93, 32 mm/sec)
• Displaying the accumulated number of sheets fed through the Fixing Unit CPU

COPIER>COUNTER>FIXING>FX-CNT IH Coil
DC Controller PCB
* The accumulated number of sheet fed (converted into small-size sheet) is displayed.
+12V Voltage monitoring
Thermistor (Front)
Thermistor (Rear) circuit
■■Protection function Main Thermistor
Sub Thermistor 1 Fuse Relay
Sub Thermistor 2
●● Overview IH drive circuit
Thermistor Relay
Hardware Relay drive IF
The protection function of this machine prevents damages to the machine from the following connection setection 1
(Main/Edge Front) protection circuit
ASIC IH
Thermistor
2 elements. connection detection 2 Circuit 1
Circuit 2 IH drive IF Power Supply
(Sub 1/Sub 2/Edge Rear) PCB
• Abnormal temperature rising of Fixing Film Fixing Feed Unit
close
• Fixing Film displacement Relay PCB

Fixing Assembly：
Abnormal temperature rising
F-2-212
1 Power shutdown by CPU • Relay drive OFF => DC12V power shutdown
• IH drive I/F OFF => IH drive circuit OFF ●● Related Error Code
2 Shutdown by hardware circuit • Relay drive OFF => +12V shutdown
Error codes Description
• IH drive I/F OFF => IH drive circuit OFF
E000 -0001 The temperature of Fixing Film Main Thermistor does not reach 120 deg C within
3 Power shutdown by the • Thermoswitch OFF (253 deg C) => DC12V power shutdown
20 sec after the Fixing Film temperature control was started.
Thermoswitch operation
E001 -0001 The Fixing Film Main Thermistor exceeds 225 deg C (hardware detection)
Fixing Film displacement
-0002 The Fixing Film Sub 1 Thermistor exceeds 225 deg C (hardware detection)
4 Detection by Thermistor • Detection by temperature difference between the Edge Sub -0003 The Fixing Film Sub 2 Thermistor exceeds 225 deg C (hardware detection)
Thermistors (front and rear)
-0011 The Fixing Film Main Thermistor exceeds 250 deg C consecutively for 2 sec
T-2-108
(software detection)
-0012 The Fixing Film Sub 1 Thermistor detects beyond 250 deg C consecutively for 2
sec. (Software Detection)
-0013 The Fixing Film Sub 2 Thermistor exceeds 250 deg C consecutively for 2 sec
(software detection)
-0014 The Fixing Film Edge Rear Thermistor exceeds 260 deg C consecutively for 2
sec (software detection)
-0015 The Fixing Film Edge Front Thermistor exceeds 260 deg C consecutively for 2
sec (software detection)
E003 -0001 The detected temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor is 120 deg C or less
consecutively for 1 sec during paper feeding

2-158
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection function
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection function
2-159
Error codes Description
E004 -0201 Temperature difference between Sub 1 and Sub 2
-0202 Temperature difference between the Main and Sub 2
-0203 Temperature difference between the Main and Sub 1
-0214 Temperature difference between the Edge Front and the Edge Rear is 50 deg C
or more (Software Detection)
-0215 Temperature difference between the edges is changed by 20 deg C or more
during the sequence to check the Fixing Film
-0301 IH power supply error
-0401 12V error
-0501 Thermistor 1 connection error (Main/Edge Front)
-0502 Thermistor 1 connection error (Sub 1/Sub 2/Edge Rear)
-0702 IH power supply relay error (50V or more at power-off)
E005 -0000 Absence of WEB (60,000 sheets after the Web Level Sensor is ON for 10
consecutive sheets)
E008 -0002 Fixing Film Unit rotation time error 5,206 hours
-0003 Error in the number of sheets fed through the Fixing Film Unit 360,000 sheets
E009 -0500 Fixing Film Unit engagement/disengagement HP search error The HP Sensor
cannot be detected within 5 seconds after starting HP detection.
E840 -0001 1) When moving the Fixing Core/Shield Plate for initializing the Fixing Unit, HP
cannot be detected even if 200 seconds have passed since the moving started.
* The Fixing Unit is initialized at power-on, at recovery from sleep state, and at
recovery from jam.
2) When moving the Fixing Core/Shield Plate except for initializing the Fixing
Unit, HP cannot be detected even if 8 seconds have passed since the moving
started.
-0215 When the Fixing Film initial position checking sequence is executed, the HP
Sensor cannot be detected within 5 seconds after starting HP detection.
E841 -0001 Reciprocation HP search error. The HP Sensor cannot be detected within 5
seconds after starting HP detection.
E842 -0001 Heat Soaking Roller engagement/disengagement HP search error. The HP
Sensor cannot be detected within 10 seconds after starting HP detection.
T-2-109

2-159
2
Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection function
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-160
Servicing ■■When Replacing Parts
When the foregoing counter clear is executed, the following item is cleared.
■■Periodically Replaced Parts
None

■■Consumable Parts
No. Parts name Parts Number Piece Expected life Remarks
1 Fixing Film Unit FM0-0413 1 300,000 sheets DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U
2 Pressure Roller Unit FM0-0387 1 300,000 sheets DRBL-1 > FX-L
3 Web Unit FC0-8030 1 300,000 sheets DRBL-1 > FX-WEB
4 Heat Soaking Roller FC0-7967 1 300,000 sheets DRBL-1 > FX-UH-RL
5 Heat Soaking Roller XG9-0810 2 300,000 sheets -
Bearring
T-2-110

■■Periodical Servicing List

None

2-160
2
Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
 2 Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > Service Note
2-161
■■Major Adjustments ■■Service Note
●● Checking of nip width None
If the paper wrinkle or fixing failure occurs, check whether the fixing nip width is within the
reference range.
However, fixing nip width of this machine cannot be checked in the field.

1) Set the paper to the Multi-purpose Tray. (plain paper, A4 or letter size)
2) Specify the paper size and the paper type.
3) Execute the fixing nip paper output in service mode.
4) Measure the nip width of output paper and check whether it is within the reference range.

< Reference value >

• Center: 9.2 +/- 1.0 mm
• Edge: 8.3 +/- 1.0 mm (at 5 mm from the edge)
If the nip width is not within the range, replace the Fixing Assembly.

Nip width

5 mm
Edge
a

b
Center

c
Edge
5 mm

Paper feed direction

F-2-213

2-161
2
Technology > Fixing System > Servicing > Service Note
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview
2-162

Pickup / Feed System

Overview
• B&W 80 ppm, and color 70 ppm (for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO)

• Adjustment of deck/cassette position is required. Image position can be adjusted in service mode on a paper source basis.

• With gentle curve of the feeding path, face-down delivery and duplex print can be done with the following paper types.
- facedown delivery: 256 g/m2 or less
- 2-sided printing: 220 g/m2 or less

the curve of feed path

has been made gentler

Deck/cassette
position adjustment is
longer necessary

F-2-214

2-162
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications
2-163
■■Specifications
The following shows main specification for pickup feed system:
Item Function/Method Remarks
Paper Storage Method Front Loading Method -
Pickup Method Separation Retard Method -
Paper Feed Standard Center -
Paper Loading Capacity Left/Right Deck 1100 sheets -
(normal paper: 80 g/m2, height: 115.5 mm)
Cassette 3/4 550 sheets -
(normal paper: 80 g/m2, height: 60.5 mm)
Multi-purpose Tray 100 sheets -
(normal paper: 80 g/m2, height: 11.0 mm)
Paper Size Left/Right Deck A4, B5, LTR -
Cassette 3/4 A3, A4, A4R, B4, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", -
LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXE, K8, K16,K16-R
304.8 x 457.2 mm (12" x 18")
320 x 450 mm (SRA3)
330.2 x 482.6 mm (13" x 19")
Irregular size (139.7 x 182.0 mm to 330.2 x 487.7 mm)
Multi-purpose Tray Size that can be loaded to cassette, Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 On 1 Postcard, Envelope, Pickup until 630mm paper is possible by service
Irregular size (100 x 148 mm to 330.2 x 487.7 mm) mode (*1) switch
Paper Type Left/Right Deck Normal Paper, Color Paper, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Bond Paper, Recycle Paper -
Cassette 3/4 Normal Paper, Color Paper, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Bond Paper, Recycle Paper, Index -
Paper
Multi-purpose Tray Normal Paper, Color Paper, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Bond Paper, Recycle Paper, Texture -
Paper, Envelope, Labels, Postcard, Coated Paper, Tracing Paper
Paper Grammage Left/Right Deck 52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 -
Cassette 3/4 52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 -
Multi-purpose Tray 52 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 Facedown Delivery: 256 g/m2 or less
(Coated paper: 106 to 300 g/m2)
Duplex 52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 -
(Coated paper: 106 to 220 g/m2)
Paper Size Switching Left/Right Deck Service Switching -
Cassette 3/4 Auto size detection B5/EXEC, A5R/STMTR can be switched in
Settings/Registration or service mode (*2).
Multi-purpose Tray Depends on user -
Duplex printing method Through path -
Transparency detection Available -
T-2-111

*1: (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST (Display/hide of extra long document button)
Setting value 0: hide, 1: display
*2: Refer to Paper Size Detection (p. 2-176)

2-163
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-164
■■Parts configuration PS37 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
PS38 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
●● Switch/Sensor 1 PS41 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
PS42 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
PS57 PS54 PS41 PS51
PS43 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
PS44 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
PS45 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1
PS46 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2
PS47 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1
PS48 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2
PS38
PS49 Right Deck Pickup Sensor
PS37 PS50 Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
PS51 Right Deck Paper Sensor
PS52 Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
PS52
PS54 Left Deck Pickup Sensor
PS55 PS55 Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor
PS56 PS49 PS56 Left Deck Paper Sensor
PS50 PS57 Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
PS43
PS42 PS59 Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor
PS44 PS61 PS60 Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor
PS62 PS61 Cassette 3 Paper Sensor
PS59 PS62 Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor
PS60 PS64 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor
SW14
SW15 PS67 PS65 Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor
PS64 PS66 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor
SW16 PS65 PS67 Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor
SW17 PS66 SW14 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1
SW15 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 2
SW16 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1
PS46 PS45 PS48 PS47 SW17 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 2
F-2-215

2-164
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-165
●● Sensor 2 PS23 Post-secondary Transfer Sensor
PS24 Duplex Sensor 1
PS75 PS70 PS25 PS23 PS91 PS90 PS29 PS28 PS94,PS95
,PS96,PS97 PS25 Duplex Sensor 2
PS26 Duplex Sensor 3
PS27 Duplex Sensor 4
PS111 PS28 Registration Sensor
PS31 PS29 Transparency Sensor
PS30 Vertical Path Merging Sensor
PS31 Outer Delivery Sensor
PS32 Reverse Sensor
PS33 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1
PS30 PS34 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2
PS32 PS26 PS35 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3
PS27 PS40 Vertical Path Sensor 2
PS33 PS53 Vertical Path Sensor 1
PS53
PS24 PS58 Left Deck Pullout Sensor
PS63 Vertical Path Sensor 3
PS34 PS68 Vertical Path Sensor 4
PS58 PS70 Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS40 PS75 Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor
PS90 Loop Sensor 1
PS63 PS91 Loop Sensor 2
PS94 Original Size Sensor 1
PS95 Original Size Sensor 2
PS68 PS96 Original Size Sensor 3
PS97 Original Size Sensor 4
PS111 Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor

PS35
F-2-216

2-165
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-166
●● Roller [1] Right Deck Pickup Roller
[2] Right Deck Feed Roller
[28] [27] [25] [26] [24] [23] [22] [21] [20] [18] [19]
[3] Right Deck Separation Roller
[4] Left Deck Pickup Roller
[5] Left Deck Feed Roller
[6] Left Deck Separation Roller
[7] Cassette 3 Pickup Roller
[29] [8] Cassette 3 Feed Roller
[9] Cassette 3 Separation Roller
[10] Cassette 4 Pickup Roller
[35] [11] Cassette 4 Feed Roller
[36] [12] Cassette 4 Separation Roller
[30] [13] Vertical Path Roller 1
[13] [14] Vertical Path Roller 2
[31]
[2] [15] Vertical Path Roller 3
[33] [16] Vertical Path Roller 4
[3]
[32] [17] Left Deck Pull Out Roller
[14]
[18] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
[34] [15] [19] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
[8] [20] Multi-purpose Pull-out Roller
[21] Registration Front Roller
[9]
[22] Registration Roller
[16] [23] Secondary Transfer Roller
[11] [24] Pre-fixing Feed Belt
[25] Fixing Film Unit
[12] [26] Pressure Roller
[27] Inner Delivery Roller 1
[28] Inner Delivery Roller 2
[4] [5] [6] [17] [1] [7] [10] [29] Outer Delivery Roller
[30] Outer Delivery Front Roller
F-2-217
[31] Reverse Upper Roller
[32] Reverse Lower Roller
[33] Duplex Roller 1
[34] Duplex Roller 2
[35] Duplex Roller 3
[36] Duplex Roller 4

2-166
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-167
■■Drive Configuration M32 Duplex Left Motor
M34 Registration Motor
M35 Pre-fixing Feed Motor
SL2 M48 M35 M41 M34 SL4
M36 Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray
Drive Motor
M37 Delivery Motor
M38 Reverse Motor
M39 Cassette Vertical Path Motor
M37 M40 Right Deck Vertical Path Motor
M41 Left Deck Vertical Path Motor
M36 M42 Left Deck Pickup Motor
M32 M43 Right Deck Pickup Motor
M44 Cassette 3 Pickup Motor
M54 M45 Cassette 4 Pickup Motor
M48 Fixing Motor
M38 M40 M54 Reverse Detachment Motor
SL2 Delivery Flapper Solenoid
SL6 SL4 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
M43
SL5 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
M42 SL6 Left Deck Pickup Solenoid
SL5 M39 SL7 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid
SL8 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid
SL7
M44
SL8

M45

F-2-218

2-167
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
2-168
■■Paper path
[1] 1-side face-up delivery, duplex face-down
delivery
Delivery Flapper

[2] 1-side face-down delivery, duplex printing

Multi-purpose Tray
[1] Pickup [3] Duplex printing
Delivery
[4] [4] 1-side face-down delivery
[2] Option Pickup

Reverse Flapper [3]

Left Deck Pickup Right Deck Pickup
Paper path

Duplex Flapper
Cassette 3 Pickup

Cassette 4 Pickup

F-2-219

2-168
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-169
■■Interval speed (Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200 iR-ADV C7200
●● Pickup to Registration Roller Series Series
Re-
Interval 1/3
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/1 1/2 1/3 marks
Speed
Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed
Slow
Pickup - Except Multi-purpose
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 -
Pullout Tray
(Vertical Multi-purpose Tray
323.6 161.8 107.9 94.1 282.2 141.1 94.1 -
Path) Roller
Pullout Left Deck and
642 642 642 642 642 642 642 -
(Vertical Cassettes 3/4
Path) Roller - Right Deck 280 to 642 -
Registration Paper Deck and POD
Roller 280 to 750 -
Deck Lite
Multiple Decks 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 -
Duplex 642 642 642 642 642 642 642 -
Multi-purpose Tray 323.6 161.8 107.9 94.1 282.2 141.1 94.1 -
T-2-112

F-2-220

2-169
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-170
●● Registration Control to Fixing Film (Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200
iR-ADV C7200 Series
Series
Re-
Interval 1/3
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/1 1/2 1/3 marks
Speed
Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed
Slow
Registration Roller – Before 600 *1 600 *1 When
advancing to Secondary 280 280 280 280 280 pickup
750 *2 750 *2
Transfer Roller from Multi-
Before advancing to Secondary purpose
Transfer Roller – when passing Tray,
through the Secondary Transfer 323.6 161.8 107.9 94.1 282.2 141.1 94.1 speed
Roller does not
change.
When passing through
321 160.5 107.0 93.3 280 140 93.3 -
Secondary Transfer Roller
After coming out from
Secondary Transfer Roller -
321 160.5 107.0 93.3 280 140 93.3 -
Before advancing to Fixing
Roller
When passing through Fixing
321 160.5 107.0 93.3 280 140 93.3 -
Roller
T-2-113

*1: In the case of paper which length is longer than that of A4R, the feeding speed is 600 mm/
sec.
F-2-221 *2: In the case of B&W printing with A4R or smaller size paper, the feeding speed is 750 mm/
sec.

2-170
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-171
●● Fixing Film to Delivery (Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200 iR-ADV C7200
Series Series
Re-
Interval 1/3
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/1 1/2 1/3 marks
Speed
Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed
Slow
After coming out FU Delivery:
from Fixing Film Buffer Path Unit 642 164.8 109.8 95.8 642 143.8 95.8 -
- Until coming not equipped
out from Outer FU Delivery:
Delivery Roller Buffer Path Unit 329.5 164.8 109.8 95.8 287.5 143.8 95.8 -
equipped
FD Delivery
642 642
(Before 321 321 93.3 321 321 -
*1 *2
reversing)
FD Delivery
(After 642 642 642 642 642 642 642 -
reversing)
Before coming FU Delivery When
out the trailing 321 160.5 107 93.3 321 140 93.3 Buffer
edge from Outer Path
Delivery Roller FD Delivery Unit is
- After coming installed,
out the trailing 334 334 334 334 334 334 334 speed
edge from Outer does not
Delivery Roller change.
F-2-222 T-2-114

*1: In some cases, the feeding speed is 451 mm/sec.

*2: In some cases, the feeding speed is 410 mm/sec.

2-171
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-172
●● Fixing Film to Secondary Transfer Roller (Unit: mm/s)
iR-ADV C9200 iR-ADV C7200
Series Series
Re-
Interval 1/3
1/1 1/2 1/3 1/1 1/2 1/3 marks
Speed
Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed Speed
Slow
After coming out from Fixing
642 642
Film - Before reversing for 321 321 93.3 321 321 -
*1 *2
duplex
After reversing for duplex -
642 642 642 642 642 642 642 -
Registration Roller
Registration Roller - Before
600
advancing to Secondary 280 280 280 600 280 280 -
*3
Transfer Roller
When passing through
Secondary Transfer Roller 321 160.5 107.0 93.3 280 140 93.3 -

T-2-115

*1: In some cases, the feeding speed is 451 mm/sec.

*2: In some cases, the feeding speed is 410 mm/sec.
*3: In the case of B&W printing with A4R or smaller size paper, the feeding speed is 750 mm/
sec. In the case of paper which length is longer than that of A4R, the feeding speed is 600
mm/sec.

F-2-223

2-172
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
2-173
■■Various types of control Deck / Cassette Pickup Unit Basic Movement
Pickup Preceding Control (Left Deck, Cassette 3/4, Multi-drawer
Fixing Unit Fixing Feed Unit Secondary Transfer Registration Unit Paper Deck)
Unit Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck, POD Deck Lite)
Deck/Cassette detection
Paper Size Detection
Paper Level Detection
Delivery Unit
Paper Detection
Lifter Control
Pickup Retry Control
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit Basic Movement
Paper Size Detection
Paper Detection
Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Detection
Pickup Unit Registration Unit Registration Control
Registration Noise Reduction Control
Transparency detection
Paper Size Sensor
Reverse Unit
Secondary Transfer Unit -
Fixing Feed Unit -
Fixing Unit -
Delivery Unit Basic Movement
Delivery Speed Reduction Control
Reverse Unit Basic Movement
Duplex Unit Deck / Cassette Reverse Flapper Movement
Pickup Unit Reverse Detachment Control
Duplex Unit Basic Movement
Duplex Flapper Movement
Circulation quantity and limit
F-2-224
Duplex Reverse Control
Jam detection Jam Code List
Forced Paper Feed Control

T-2-116

2-173
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
2-174
Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit ●● Cassette
Cassette
■■Basic Movement M44 Feed Roller
Cassette /M45
When Deck/Cassette is installed, Motor drives to maintain the height which paper surface Pickup Roller PS59
attaches to Pickup Roller (This is the height of Pickup Roller when Pickup Solenoid is OFF). /PS64
If the Pickup Motor (M43/M42/M44/M45) is turned ON, the Pickup Roller will rotate and the
paper will be fed.
When the Pickup Sensor (PS49/PS54/PS59/PS64) detects paper, the Pickup Solenoid (SL5/
SL6/SL7/SL8) will turn ON, and Pickup Roller will draw away from paper surface.
Only 1 sheet of paper is sent to feed path by the Feed Roller and the Separation Roller, and Cassette Lifter
fed to Vertical Path Roller.
SL7 Cassette
/SL8 Separation Roller
●● Deck
F-2-226
Deck Feed Roller
M43
/M42 PS49 NOTE: Related Service Mode
/PS54 (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW>
DK1-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Right Deck)
DK2-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Left Deck)
DK3-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette3)
DK4-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette4)
Setting Value 0: OFF (Default), 1: ON
SL5
/SL6

Deck Lifter
Deck Separation Roller

Deck Pickup Roller

F-2-225

2-174
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck,
POD Deck Lite)
2-175
■■Pickup Preceding Control (Left Deck, Cassette 3/4, ■■Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck,
Multi-drawer Paper Deck) POD Deck Lite)
In order for the subsequent paper not to interfere the preceding paper at the registration If pickup delays or too fast, feed speed will accelerate or decelerate.
control, the difference of pickup operation speed due to paper type, size and environment is When the difference of pickup operation speed is corrected, in case of paper pickup from
corrected. Right Deck, the distance from pickup to registration is short, so the pickup preceding control
After the sensor that detects each pickup position detects the paper leading edge, the cannot be implemented. For this reason, this control is executed.
corresponding motor will stop temporarily in preceding pickup stop position.
Registration Roller Registration Front Roller
This control is performed on the second paper feeding and after. M36

Left Deck Speed Variable

Area
M42 M41 Pull-out Roller

5.7 mm Vertical Path Roller 1

M40

PS53

Pickup Area
PS58
PS40
M43
57.8 mm

M39

Vertical Path
Roller 3 F-2-228

The speed after passing

Pickup position Detection sensor Pickup speed
Vertical Path Roller 1
Right Deck Vertical Path Sensor 1 Slower than 500 mm/s 500 to 642 mm/s
M44 M45 (PS53) Faster than 500 mm/s 280 to 500 mm/s
Paper Deck Deck Pull-out Sensor (Paper Slower than 500 mm/s 500 to 750 mm/s
F-2-227
Deck) Faster than 500 mm/s 280 to 500 mm/s
Pickup position Sensor Stop motor Stop position POD Deck Lite Deck Pull-out Sensor (POD Slower than 500 mm/s 500 to 750 mm/s
Left deck Left Deck Pull Out Left Deck Pickup Motor (M42) 5.7 mm downstream from Deck Lite) Faster than 500mm/s 280 to 500 mm/s
Sensor (PS58) Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41) the Left Deck Pull-out Roller T-2-118
Cassette 3 Vertical Path Cassette 3 Pickup Motor (M44) 57.8 mm downstream from
Sensor 2 (PS40) Cassette Vertical Path Motor (M39) the Vertical Path Roller 3
Cassette 4 Vertical Path Cassette 4 Pickup Motor (M45) 57.8 mm downstream from
Sensor 2 (PS40) Cassette Vertical Path Motor(M39) the Vertical Path Roller 3
Multi-drawer Pullout Sensor Pickup Motor (Each Deck) Pull-out Roller (Each Deck)
Paper Deck (Each Deck) Pull-out Motor (Each Deck)
T-2-117
2-175
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Speed Variable Control (Right Deck, Paper Deck,
POD Deck Lite)
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
2-176
■■Deck/Cassette detection ●● Cassette
Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch. When all actuators of the Paper Size
Whether Deck/Cassette is installed is detected.
Detection Switch (SW14/SW16) are not pressed, it is detected as no cassette installed.
●● Deck
Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW14) Paper Size Detection Lever
Deck is detected by Paper Level Sensor. When light from 2 Paper Level Sensors is not
Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW16)
blocked, it is detected as no deck installed. Side Slide Guide

Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS41)

Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS43)

Paper Level
detection lever 1

Paper Size Detection

Circular Plate
Deck Projection
detection lever

Trailing Edge Slide Guide

F-2-230

Deck

Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS42)

Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS44)
F-2-229

2-176
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-177
■■Paper Size Detection ●● Cassette
Paper size in cassette 3/4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches.
●● Deck
ON/OFF of 4-actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection
Set in Service Mode.
Circular Plate/Lever Position linked to Trailing Edge/Side Slide Guide. Paper size is detected
by two 4-actuator ON/OFF combinations. And, if all 4-actuator are OFF is detected, it means
NOTE:Related Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 (Right Deck Paper setting) no-cassette.
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 (Left Deck Paper setting) Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW14) Paper Size Detection Lever
Setting Value Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1 (SW16)
0: A4 (default), 1: B5, 2: LTR Side Slide Guide
Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 2 (SW15)
Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 2 (SW17)

Paper Size Detection

Circular Plate

Trailing Edge Slide Guide

F-2-231

F-2-232

F-2-233

2-177
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-178

●● List of size detection switches combination SW14/SW16

1-D
Paper Width Length Width (SW14/SW16) Length (SW15/SW17)
1-C
Size (mm) (mm) 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 2-A 2-B 2-C 2-D
1-B
B5 257.0 182.0 ON - - ON ON ON ON ON
1-A
EXEC 267.0 184.0 ON - - ON ON ON ON ON
16K 270.0 195.0 ON - - ON - ON ON ON
A5-R 148.5 210.0 - ON - ON ON - ON ON
A4 297.0 210.0 ON - ON ON ON - ON ON
STMT-R 139.7 215.9 - ON - ON ON - ON ON
SW15/SW17
LTR 279.4 215.9 ON - - ON ON - ON ON
B5-R 182.0 257.0 - ON - ON ON - ON -
2-D
ON ON - ON ON ON - ON
16K-R 195.0 270.0 2-C
- ON - ON ON ON - ON 2-B
ON ON - ON - ON ON ON 2-A
LTR-R 215.9 279.4
ON ON - ON - ON ON -
F-2-234
A4-R 210.0 297.0 ON ON - ON - - ON ON
LGL 215.9 355.6 ON ON - ON ON ON - -
B4 257.0 364.0 ON - - ON ON ON ON - NOTE:
• Related Settings/registration
8K 270.0 390.0 ON - - ON - - ON ON
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Original
A3 297.0 420.0 ON - ON ON - ON - -
Selection
LDR 279.4 431.8 ON - - ON - - ON - Setting value Cassette3: A5R, STMTR, Cassette4: A5R, STMTR
SRA3 320.0 450.0 ON - ON - - - - ON
12 x 18 304.8 457.2 ON - ON ON - - - ON Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Original Selection
13 x 19 330.2 483.0 ON - ON - - - - - Setting value Cassette3: B5, EXEC, Cassette4: B5, EXEC
K_LGL 268.0 190.0 ON - - ON ON ON ON ON
K_LGL-R 190.0 268.0 - ON - ON ON ON - ON Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Custom Size
G_LTR 267.0 203.0 ON - - ON - ON ON ON Setting value X: 182.0 to 487.7 mm, Y: 139.7 to 330.2 mm (Maximum 5 pieces)
G_LTR-R 203.0 267.0 ON ON - ON ON ON - ON
G_LGL 203.2 330.2 ON ON - ON - ON ON - • Related Service Mode
OFI 216.0 317.0 ON ON - ON ON ON - - (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST
> CST3-P1 (Cassette3 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
E_OFI 220.0 320.0 ON ON - ON ON ON - -
, CST4-P1 (Cassette4 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
M_OFI 216.0 341.0 ON ON - ON ON - ON ON
Setting value 0: A5R, 1: STMTR
B_OFI 216.0 355.0 ON ON - ON ON ON - -
A_OFI 220.0 340.0 ON ON - ON - - ON ON , CST3-P2 (Cassette3 paper size setting (B5/EXEC))
FOLIO 216.0 330.0 ON ON - ON - ON ON - , CST4-P2 (Cassette4 paper size setting (B5/EXEC))
FLSP 216.0 330.0 ON ON - ON - ON ON - Setting value 0: B5, 1: EXEC
A_FLSP 206.0 337.0 ON ON - ON - - ON ON
A_LTR 280.0 220.0 ON - - ON ON - ON ON
A_LTR-R 220.0 280.0 ON ON - ON - ON ON -
A_LGL 220.0 340.0 ON ON - ON - - ON ON
FA4 216.0 343.0 ON ON - ON ON - - ON
FB4 216.0 330.0 ON ON - ON - ON ON -
T-2-119

2-178
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
2-179
■■Paper Level Detection
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS41)
Paper level is detected by two Paper Level sensors in each cassette. Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS43)
- Full (100% to 50%)
●● Deck Paper Level Deck Detection Lever ON OFF
Detection Lever 1
Right Deck Paper Right Deck Paper Control
Level Sensor 1 (PS41) Level Sensor 2 (PS42) Panel
Left Deck Paper Level Left Deck Paper Level Screen
Sensor 1 (PS43) Sensor 2 (PS44) Display Paper Level
Detection Lever 2 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS42)
Full Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS44)
ON OFF
(100% to 50%)
Half
ON ON Deck Lifter
(50% to 25%)
Few
OFF ON
(25% or less)
T-2-120

Paper
- Half (50% to 25%) - Few (25% or less)

ON ON OFF ON

Paper Paper

F-2-235

2-179
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
2-180
●● Cassette • Full (100% to 50%)

Paper Level Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS46)

Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS45) Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS45)
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS48)
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47) Detection Lever Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47) OFF
Paper OFF
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS46)
Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 (PS48)

Cassette Lifter Paper Level Detection Lever Holding Plate

• Half (50% to 25%) F-2-237

OFF
Paper ON

F-2-236

Cassette 3 Paper Level Cassette 3 Paper Level

Sensor 1 (PS45) Sensor 2 (PS46) Control Panel
Cassette 4 Paper Level Cassette 4 Paper Level Screen Display
Sensor 1 (PS47) Sensor 2 (PS48)
Full
OFF OFF
(100% to 50%)
• Few (25% or less) F-2-238
Half
OFF ON
(50% to 25%) Paper ON
Few ON
ON ON
(25% or less)
T-2-121

F-2-239

2-180
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-181
■■Paper Detection ●● Cassette
If paper is present, the Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends, and Paper Cassette 3 Paper Sensor (PS61)
Cassette 4 Paper Sensor (PS66)
Sensor is turned OFF.
If paper finishes, the Detection Lever enters lifter hole, and Paper Sensor is turned ON. Cassette Lifter Paper Detection Lever
●● Deck
Right Deck Paper Sensor (PS51)
Left Deck Paper Sensor (PS56)

Paper Detection Lever

Deck Lifter

Holding Plate

F-2-241

F-2-240

2-181
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
2-182
■■Lifter Control ●● Cassette
Lifter will raise paper to pickup position. Cassette 3 Pickup Motor (M44) One-way clutch
If deck/cassette is set, the Pickup Motor will be driven in reverse direction from pickup Cassette 4 Pickup Motor (M45) Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor (PS60)
Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor (PS65)
movement, and lifter will be ascended until the paper surface arrives at the height of pickup
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor (PS62)
position. Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS67)
One-way Clutch is equipped to the shaft of both Lifter drive and Pickup Roller drive sides.
Cassette lifter
Therefore, the Pickup Roller does not operate when the Lifter is operated, and vice versa. One-way clutch
One-way clutch is attached in the Host Machine shaft, hence when deck/cassette is pulled
out, lifter will descend.
●● Deck

One-way clutch
Right Deck Pickup Motor (M43) Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS50)
Left Deck Pickup Motor (M42) Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS55)

Right Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS52) Holding plate

Left Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS57)
One-way clutch

Lifter wire F-2-243

●● Lifter Error Detection

In case due to some reason the lifter keep ascending even the Paper Surface Height Sensor
is turned ON, the Upper Limit Sensor is provided to prevent damage in this equipment due to
the error in ascending.
Lifter wire

And, if the lifter starts ascending, but not detected by the Paper Surface Sensor and the
Upper Limit Sensor within 3 minutes, the alarm corresponds to the concerned Pickup
Deck lfter Cassette will be triggered. The alarm will release if the corresponding deck/cassette is open
or closed, or the power is turned OFF/ON.
F-2-242

2-182
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
2-183
■■Pickup Retry Control
If paper leading edge is not detected by Pickup sensor within the specified time after pickup
movement starts, it is not immediately determined as jam, and re-pickup movement will be
executed.
During pickup retry, the Pickup Motor will be repeatedly turned ON/OFF with the Pickup Roller
is in descended condition.
Feed Speed Paper length (mm) Retry numbers Typical Paper Type
215.9 or less B5/A4/LTR
297 or less 0 B5-R/A4-R/LTR-R
1/1 Speed 419 or less LGL/B4/8K
431.8 or less A3/LDR
1
431.9 or more SRA3/12x18/13x19
215.9 or less B5/A4/LTR
297 or less B5-R/A4-R/LTR-R
1/2 Speed 419 or less 2 LGL/B4/8K
431.8 or less A3/LDR
431.9 or more SRA3/12x18/13x19
215.9 or less B5/A4/LTR
297 or less B5-R/A4-R/LTR-R
1/3 Speed 419 or less 2 LGL/B4/8K
431.8 or less A3/LDR
431.9 or more SRA3/12x18/13x19
T-2-122

2-183
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-184
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit ■■Paper Size Detection
The setting is performed the Side Guide Plate and size code setting (or irregular size setting
■■Basic Movement
assignment) by and the Control Panel Unit.
1) If the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL4) is turned ON, the semi-toothed gear will rotate. Paper width is detected by the outputted value from the Variable Resistor Assembly (Multi-
2) The holding plate Fixing Members will be released and the holding plate will ascend. purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB (UN26)) which is linked to movement of the Side
Multi-purpose Tray Guide Plate.
Multi-purpose Tray holding plate Setting of the Side Guide Plate on the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray is executed by users after
feed roller
paper is set.
Semi-toothed gear
Multi-purpose Tray Paper
Width Detection PCB (UN26)

Multi-purpose Tray Spring Side Guide

pull-out roller
Multi-purpose Tray
SL4 separation roller

F-2-244
3) When the Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor drives, the Multi-purpose Pull
Out Roller and the Multi-purpose Feed Roller/Multi-purpose Separation Roller will rotate,
and only 1 sheet of paper will be picked up/fed.

Multi-purpose Tray
feed roller

M36

Side Guide

Multi-purpose Tray Multi-purpose Tray F-2-246

pull-out roller separation roller
F-2-245

2-184
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Last Paper Detection
2-185
■■Paper Detection ■■Last Paper Detection
When paper is set, Paper Presence Detection Lever will be pushed, and the Multi-purpose After the Last Paper Detection Wheel rotates, the Multi-purpose Last Paper Sensor (PS38)
Tray Paper Sensor (PS37) will turn ON. will detect whether it is last paper or not.
Last Paper Detection Wheel only rotates when the last paper is picked up.
Since there is slit in the Last Paper Detection Wheel, the output of the Multi-purpose Last
Paper Sensor (PS38) is pulse shape. If 5 or more pieces of pulse are detected, it is the last
paper is determined.
Paper

Last Paper

If 5 or more pieces of pulse are detected,

it is the last paper is determined.

Multi-purpose Tray
Detection Lever Multi-purpose Tray
Paper Sensor (PS37)
Last Paper Sensor (PS38)
F-2-247

Last Paper
Detection Wheel
F-2-248

2-185
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Last Paper Detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Noise Reduction Control
2-186
Registration Unit ■■Registration Noise Reduction Control
Each feed motor stops just before the paper leading edge is pushed-on the Registration Roller
■■Registration Control
(in this moment, paper leading edge doesn't reach the Registration Roller). After specified
Registration Roller is driven by the Registration Motor (M34). time, motor drive restarts, and it forms registration arch. Noise reduction measurement is
It controls so that the paper and the image on ITB is conformed in the specified place. executed by pushing-on the paper leading edge to the Registration Roller in slow speed.
Multi-purpose Paper Multi-purpose
Paper Pull-out Roller Pull-out Roller

Certain distance

Secondary Transfer Registration Registration

Roller Roller Front Roller

M34 M36 Registration Roller PS28 Registration Front Roller

F-2-250
F-2-249
Feed Stop motor Remarks
condition
Multi-purpose Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) -
Tray Pickup
Right Deck Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) -
Pickup Right Deck Vertical Path Motor (M40)
Left Deck Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) -
Pickup Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41)
Cassette 3/4 Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36)Cassette Vertical Path Motor
Pickup Right Deck Vertical Path Motor (M40) (M39) stops only when B4,
Cassette Vertical Path Motor (M39) A3, LDR, and 13” x 19” size
are fed.
Option Pickup Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) -
Duplex printing Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor (M36) Duplex Left Motor (M32)
Left Deck Vertical Path Motor(M41) stops only when 13” x 19”
Duplex Left Motor (M32) size is fed.
T-2-123

2-186
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Noise Reduction Control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Transparency detection
2-187
■■Transparency detection ●● Touch Panel display at detection (Tentative message)
Whether the fed paper is transparency or not is detected. The detection is performed in the
Transparency Sensor (PS29).
The following condition is jam announcement for paper mistake.
• If it is determined that non-transparency paper placed in transparency setting
• If it is determined that transparency paper placed in non-transparency setting

Transparency Sensor (PS29)

Registration Roller
F-2-252

Registration Sensor (PS28)

Registration Motor (M34)

F-2-251

2-187
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Transparency detection
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery Unit > Delivery Speed Reduction Control
2-188
Delivery Unit ■■Delivery Speed Reduction Control
If the Copy Tray is attached, speed reduction is executed to improve paper loading (to
■■Basic movement
prevent the paper from dashing out).
●● Face-up delivery 20mm 45mm
Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL2) is turned ON, and paper is fed to Delivery Inlet.

PS31 PS111 Delivery Flapper

Outer Delivery Roller PS31
Inner Delivery Roller 2
PS111
Inner Delivery Roller 1
Outer Delivery
Roller

45mm

M37 SL2 M48 M37

F-2-253 F-2-255

●● Face-down delivery Control Description Position Where Speed Change

Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL2) is turned OFF, and paper is fed to the Reverse Unit. Speed Reduction Start Paper trailing edge is 45 mm upstream from the Delivery Roller.
Speed Reduction Finish Paper trailing edge is 20 mm downstream from the Delivery Roller.
Delivery Flapper Inner Delivery Roller 2 T-2-124

Inner Delivery Roller 1

PS32

Reverse Upper
Roller M38 SL2 M48

F-2-254

2-188
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery Unit > Delivery Speed Reduction Control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Basic Movement
2-189
Reverse Unit 2) In the point when the leading edge of preceding paper exceeds the position 20 mm
lowstream from the Outer Delivery Front Roller, in order to prepare for the following paper
■■Basic Movement advancement, the Reverse Upper Wheel Detachment Motor (M54) is turned ON, and The
Reverse Upper Wheel will detach.
1) The Reverse Motor (M38) will stop/reverse-rotate when paper trailing edge arrives at the
reverse stop position (30.0 mm upstream from the Reverse Upper Roller) in the specified Outer Delivery Front Roller
time after the Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 (PS34) (Paper length: less than 480 mm) is Outer Delivery Roller Following Paper
turned ON.
If the paper length is 480 mm or more, reverse operation is performed based on the
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 (PS35). 20mm M37
Reverse Upper Roller
Following Paper
M54

Reverse Upper Wheel

30mm
M38
Reverse Upper Roller

Preceding Paper M38 Preceding Paper

Reverse Lower Roller PS34

F-2-257
3) The following paper will be fed to the Reverse Unit direction. Reverse Motor (M38) will stop/
normal-rotates.

Reverse Upper Roller

Following Paper

Reverse Lower
PS35 Roller PS34
Preceding Paper
F-2-256

20mm
M38

Reverse Lower Roller PS34

F-2-258

2-189
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Basic Movement
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Reverse Detachment Control
2-190
4) In the moment when the trailing edge of the preceding paper exceeds the position 10 mm ■■Reverse Flapper Movement
upstream of the Outer Delivery Front Roller (for other than LTR paper), the Reverse Upper
Wheel Detachment Motor (M54) is turned OFF and the Reverse Upper Wheel is attached. Reverse Flapper Paper Reverse Flapper Paper

Outer Delivery Front Roller

Outer Delivery Roller Feed direction
Preceding Paper Following paper

LTR or less: 60.9 mm

Larger than LTR: 38.0 mm M37

M54 Spring Feed direction Spring

Reverse Upper Wheel

M38
Reverse Upper Roller
F-2-260

■■Reverse Detachment Control

Reverse Lower Roller PS34
The Reverse Upper Roller is detached, to make the preceding paper and the following paper
F-2-259 cross on the Reverse Upper Wheel.

Outer Delivery Front Roller

Following Paper

20mm

M54 M38

Reverse Upper Wheel

Reverse Upper Roller

Preceding Paper

PS34
F-2-261

2-190
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Reverse Unit > Reverse Detachment Control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Movement
2-191
Duplex Unit 2) Drive the Duplex Left Motor (M32) and the Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41) to feed
paper to the duplex re-pickup position.
■■Basic Movement
M32 M41
1) When the paper trailing edge arrives at the duplex reverse position (43.6 mm upstream Duplex Roller 1 Duplex Roller 2
from the Reverse Lower Roller), the Reverse Motor (M38) stops/reverses and the paper
will be fed to the Duplex Unit.

Paper
Reverse Lower Roller
M38

43.6 mm

M38

Reverse Lower Roller

Paper

F-2-263

F-2-262

2-191
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Movement
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Flapper Movement
2-192
3) Paper stops in duplex re-pickup position (paper leading edge is 198.2 mm downstream of ■■Duplex Flapper Movement
the Duplex Sensor 1), and after specified time, the Duplex Right Motor (M32) and the Left
Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41)are driven and paper is fed to the Registration Unit.

M32 M41 Duplex Flapper

Duplex Roller 1 Duplex Roller 2
Paper

Paper

198.2 mm Spring
PS24

Feed
direction

F-2-265

F-2-266
F-2-264

Duplex Flapper

Feed Spring
direction

Paper

F-2-267

2-192
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Flapper Movement
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Reverse Control
2-193
■■Duplex Reverse Control ●● 298 mm or more and 390 mm or less in size, 3 sheets in circulation
The following is the timing when the paper is fed from duplex reverse position. (reverse position and re-pickup position is the same) (B4, LGL, 8K)
Paper whose size is 298 mm or more and 390 mm or less in size doesn’t stop in duplex re- Registration
pickup position. position

Paper stops/not in Duplex reverse

If there is no paper in duplex If there is paper in duplex
Paper length duplex re-pickup position
re-pickup position re-pickup position
position
less than 298 mm Feed will certainly start Feed will start after the Stop
(B5 to A4R) preceding paper duplex re-
pickup is started 43.6 mm
298 mm or more Feed will start in the specified In the specified time -
390 mm or less time after the leading edge of after the leading edge of
(B4, LGL, 8K) preceding paper passes the preceding paper passes the
Registration Roller Registration Roller.
exceeds 390 mm Feed will certainly start Feed will start after Stop
(A3 to 19.2 inch) the trailing edge of the
preceding paper passes the
duplex re-pickup position.
F-2-269
T-2-125
●● Exceeds 390 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation (A3 to 19.2 inch)
●● Less than 298 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4)
Duplex re-pickup
Duplex re-pickup position
Registration
position position
Registration
position
Duplex reverse
Duplex reverse position
position

43.6 mm
43.6 mm

196.2 mm

F-2-270
F-2-268

2-193
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Duplex Reverse Control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-194
■■Circulation quantity and limit
Registration ④
The numbers in white background and the numbers in black background show each the first ④ position
page and second page. ⑤

●● Less than 298 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4) ③ Duplex re-pickup
③ position

① Registration ① ② Registration ⑤
position position

④ Duplex re-pickup ⑤ Duplex re-pickup

position position

② ② ③

① Duplex re-pickup
position
① Duplex reverse
position

Registration ③ ④
③ position

F-2-272
② Duplex re-pickup
② position

F-2-271

2-194
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-195
●● 298 mm or more and 390 mm or less in size, 3 sheets in circulation ●● Exceeds 390 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation (A3 to 19.2 inch)
(reverse position and re-pickup position is the same) (B4, LGL, 8K)
① Registration ② Registration
position position
① Registration ② Registration
position position
① Duplex reverse
position
① Duplex reverse
position

② Registration
② position
② Registration ③ Registration
position position
① Duplex re-pickup
position
② Duplex reverse
position
③

③ Registration ③ Registration
position position
③ Registration Registration
position position ②

Registration
position

F-2-274

F-2-273

2-195
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-196
Jam Detection ●● Jam in Feed System
xx = 01: Delay, 02: Stationary, 0A: Residue
■■Jam Code List Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect
Code Jam type
PS75 PS70 PS23 Sensor name
No. Delay Sta-tionary Residue
xx01 PS49 Right Deck Pickup Sensor Yes - -
PS111 xx02 PS54 Left Deck Pickup Sensor Yes - -
PS29 xx03 PS59 Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor Yes - -
xx04 PS64 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor Yes - -
PS31
PS28 xx05 PS53 Vertical Path Sensor 1 Yes Yes Yes
xx06 PS58 Left Deck Pullout Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx07 PS40 Vertical Path Sensor 2 Yes Yes Yes
xx08 PS63 Vertical Path Sensor 3 Yes Yes Yes
PS30 xx09 PS68 Vertical Path Sensor 4 Yes Yes Yes
xx0A PS30 Vertical Path Merging Sensor Yes Yes Yes
PS32 PS27 xx0C PS28 Registration Sensor Yes Yes Yes
PS33 xx0D PS23 Post-secondary Transfer Sensor Yes Yes Yes
PS53 xx0E PS70 Fixing Inlet Sensor - - Yes
PS24 xx0F PS74 Fixing Wrap Sensor - Yes Yes
PS49 xx10 PS75 Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx11 PS31 Outer Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes
PS34 PS40
PS25 PS54 PS58 PS26 xx12 PS32 Reverse Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx13 PS33 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 Yes Yes Yes
PS63 xx14 PS34 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 Yes Yes Yes
PS59 xx15 PS35 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 Yes Yes Yes
xx16 PS24 Duplex Sensor 1 Yes Yes Yes
PS68 xx17 PS25 Duplex Sensor 2 - - Yes
xx18 PS26 Duplex Sensor 3 Yes Yes Yes
PS64
xx19 PS27 Duplex Sensor 4 Yes Yes Yes
PS35 xx1A (PS1) Deck Pickup Sensor Paper Deck Unit/ Yes
xx1B (PS6) Deck Pull-out Sensor POD Deck Lite Yes Yes Yes
F-2-275 xx1C PS85 Buffer Sensor 1 Yes Yes Yes
Buffer Pass Unit
xx1D PS86 Buffer Sensor 2 Yes Yes Yes
xx1E S101 Upper Deck Pickup Sensor Yes
xx1F S102 Upper Deck Pull-out Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx20 S201 Middle Deck Pickup Sensor Yes
xx21 S202 Middle Deck Pull-out Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx22 S301 Lower Deck Pickup Sensor Yes
xx23 S302 Lower Deck Pull-out Sensor Yes Yes Yes
Multi-drawer
xx24 S004 Lower Deck Feed Sensor Yes Yes Yes
Paper Deck
xx25 S001 Vertical Path Upper Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx26 S002 Vertical Path Middle Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx27 S003 Vertical Path Lower Sensor Yes Yes Yes
xx28 S009/ Double Feed Sensor Yes Yes Yes
S010 (Reception/Option)
xx29 S005 Delivery Sensor Yes Yes Yes
T-2-126
2-196
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-197
●● Other Jams Code
Sensor name Jam Type
No.
Code
Sensor name Jam Type 0191 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
No. image formation timing at Right Deck pickup
0B01 PS80 Front Cover Sensor Door Open Jam (Check the feed path from the Right Deck Pickup
0B02 PS79 Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor Assembly to the Registration Assembly.)
0B03 PS39 Lower Right Cover Sensor 0192 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
0B04 PS36 Lower Left Cover Sensor image formation timing at Left Deck pickup (Check
0B05 PS87 Buffer Front Cover Sensor the feed path from the Left Deck Pickup Assembly
0B06 S006 Deck Left Front Cover Sensor to the Registration Assembly.)
0C00 - - Jam, others 0193 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
0CA0 - - Logical jam image formation timing at Cassette 3 pickup (Check
0CA2 - - REFEED command is not received. (Former: the feed path from the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly
E240-0001) to the Registration Assembly.)
0CA3 - - IMAGET_SET command is not received. (Former: 0194 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
E240-0002) image formation timing at Cassette 4 pickup (Check
0CA4 - - PAGE_COMPLETE is not returned. (Former: the feed path from the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly
E240-0004) to the Registration Assembly.)
0CA5 - - PVREQ-K is not received. (Former: E240-0005) 0195 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
0CA6 - - REGON interruption is not received. (Former: image formation timing at Option Deck pickup
E240-0006) (Check the feed path from the Option Deck Pickup
Assembly to the Registration Assembly of the host
0CA7 - - READY is not received from IP. (Former: E240-
machine.)
0007)
0196 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
0CA8 - - IMG2 DMA setting is not finished. (Former: E240-
image formation timing at Multi-purpose Tray
0008)
pickup (Check the feed path from the Multi-
0CA9 - - Initial rotation and last rotation are not finished.
purpose Tray Pickup Assembly to the Registration
(Former: E996-0*00)
Assembly.)
0CF1 - - Error retry occurs.
0197 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
0D91 - - Misprint (Paper is too short.)
image formation timing at Multi Deck Upper Deck
0D92 PS29 Transparency Sensor Misprint (Non-transparency paper in transparency pickup (Check the feed path from the Upper
setting) Deck Pickup Assembly of the Multi Deck to the
0D93 PS29 Transparency Sensor Misprint (Transparency paper in non-transparency Registration Assembly of the host machine.)
setting) 0198 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
1001 S101 Inlet Sensor Finisher delay image formation timing at Multi Deck Middle Deck
1002 S102 Feed Path Sensor pickup (Check the feed path from the Middle
1101 S101 Inlet Sensor Finisher stationary Deck Pickup Assembly of the Multi Deck to the
1102 S102 Feed Path Sensor Registration Assembly of the host machine.)
1300 S101 Inlet Sensor Finisher power-on 0199 - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
S102 Feed Path Sensor image formation timing at Multi Deck Lower Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Lower
1400 S129 Front Door Sensor Finisher Cover open Deck Pickup Assembly of the Multi Deck to the
1500 S131 Staple HP Sensor Finisher staple jam Registration Assembly of the host machine.)
1e00 - - Finisher sequence error jam 019A - - Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing and
1fxx - - Finisher, others image formation timing at 2-sided printing (Check
28xx S009/ Double Feed Sensor Double feed at Multi-drawer Paper Deck the feed path around the Registration Assembly of
S010 (Reception/Option) the host machine.)
T-2-127

2-197
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
2-198
■■Forced Paper Feed Control Condition Drive Motor Remarks
If there Left Deck Pullout Sensor Left Deck Vertical If delay jam of Vertical Path Marge
If there is paper in the following place after jam is detected, the paper will be forcedly fed to
is paper (PS58) is ON Path Motor (M41) Sensor (PS60) occurs on precedent
downstream direction. between Duplex Right paper, feeding is not executed.
This control suppresses paper damage during jam handling. Left Deck Motor (M33)
Pickup Path Left Deck Pickup
Between Between and Duplex Motor (M42)
Reverse Vertical Path M41 M34 Registration Path Path Duplex Sensor 3 (PS26) is Left Deck Vertical -
- Duplex Path - Vertical Path
ON Path Motor (M41)
Duplex Right
Motor (M33)
If paper - In case of pickup from Right Deck -
trailing Right Deck/Cassette 3/ Vertical Path
edge is Cassette 4 Motor (M40)
between - Vertical Path Marge Pre-Registration
M36 Vertical Sensor (PS30) is ON and Multi-Purpose
M32 Path and also, Vertical Path Sensor 1 Drive Motor
PS30 Registration (PS53) is OFF. (M36)
PS53 Path Registration
Motor (M34)
M40 If paper Reverse Vertical Path Duplex Left Motor - If 258 mm to 297 mm (A4R) size paper
PS24 trailing Sensor 2 (PS34) is OFF (M32) stops in the duplex re-pickup position,
edge is and also, Duplex Sensor 1 Left Deck Vertical the machine feeds the paper that
PS34
between (PS24) is ON. Path Motor (M41) stops in the duplex re-pickup position
M42 PS26 Reverse regardless of ON/OFF of the sensor.
Path and - Left Deck Vertical Path Motor (M41) is
Duplex driven only when the paper is lager than
PS58 Path 297mm (A4R).
If there is - Pre-Registration - Feeding is not executed in case
paper that Multi-Purpose of Registration Sensor delay jam at
is being Drive Motor pickup.
picked up (M36) - Feeding is executed not to prevent the
from Multi- paper damage but to return the drive
Purpose parts to the normal position.
Pickup Tray
Between Left Deck - Duplex Path
If paper In case of pickup from Multi Pre-Registration In case of paper with 431.9 mm or more
F-2-276 trailing Deck Multi-Purpose in length (12” x 18”, 12” x 19.2”, SRA3,
edge is (Distance is measured from Drive Motor 13” x 19”), the motor rotates inversely to
in Option the Deck Delivery Sensor.) (M36) return the paper (in order not to reach
Pickup Path In case of pickup from POD Registration the Fixing Roller).
Deck Lite Motor (M34)
(Distance is measured from
the Deck Pullout Sensor.)
In case of pickup from -
Paper Deck
(Distance is measured from
the Deck Pullout Sensor.)
T-2-128

2-198
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
 2 Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Service Work > Periodic Service
2-199
Service Work ■■Periodic Service
When it gets close to its duration period, be sure to clean or replace the concerned parts.
■■Measurement during Parts Replacement
Item Parts name Interval Measure Reference
Perform adjustment and clear counters for the below parts replacement. Periodically
- - - -
Parts name Measure Reference replacement parts
Right Deck Pickup Roller Right Deck Pickup Roller p. 4-4
Left Deck Pickup Roller Left Deck Pickup Roller p. 4-7
Right Deck Feed Roller Right Deck Feed Roller p. 4-4
Left Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Feed Roller p. 4-7
Right Deck Separation Roller Right Deck Separation Roller p. 4-4
Left Deck Separation Roller Left Deck Separation Roller p. 4-7
Cassette 3 Pickup Roller 500K sheets
Clear the corresponding counter. - Cassette 3 Pickup Roller p. 4-9
Cassette 4 Pickup Roller Consumables Replace
Cassette 4 Pickup Roller p. 4-12
Cassette 3 Feed Roller Cassette 3 Feed Roller p. 4-9
Cassette 4 Feed Roller
Cassette 4 Feed Roller p. 4-12
Cassette 3 Separation Roller
Cassette 3 Separation Roller p. 4-9
Cassette 4 Separation Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller Cassette 4 Separation Roller p. 4-12
Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller p. 4-1
120K sheets
T-2-129
Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller p. 4-2
Transparency Sensor Timely p. 3-3
Pre-fixing Feed Film Timely or p. 3-3
Post-secondary Transfer Sensor per 500K sheet p. 3-2
Periodic service Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Cleaning
p. 3-2
Unit
Timely
Lower side of Secondary Transfer Outer
p. 3-2
Roller
T-2-130

2-199
2
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Service Work > Periodic Service
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
2-200

External and Controls

Controls
■■Counter Control
●● Overview
The machine is equipped with counters that indicate the counts of output according to types of job. These counters are indicated in response to a press on the Counter Check key on the control
panel.

Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item

Target Country code
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8
JP model Total 1 Total Copy Total A *1 *1 *1 *1 JP
type1 (Black 1) (Full Color + (Full Color +
(Conventional Single Color1) Single Color 1)
method) 101 108 232 149 0 0 0 0
JP model Total 2 Copy Total A Copy Total A *1 *1 *1 JP
type2 (Full Color + (Full Color + (Black 2) (Black 2)
(New method) Single Color 2) Single Color 2)
102 231 148 222 133 0 0 0
JP model Total 1 Total Copy Total A Total *1 *1 *1 JP
type3 (Black 1) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Single Color 1)
(New method) Single Color 1) Single Color 1)
101 108 232 149 118 0 0 0
JP model Total 1 Total Total Total Total Scan *1 *1 JP
type4 (Full Color + (Full Color + (Black/Small) (Black/Large) (Total 1)
(New method) Single Color/ Single Color/
Small) Large)
101 123 122 113 112 501 0 0
JP model Total 1 Total Total Total Total Total Total Scan JP
type5 (Full Color + (Full Color + (Black/Small) (Black/Large) (Single Color/ (Single Color/ (Total 1)
(New method) Single Color/ Single Color/ Small) Large)
Small) Large)
101 123 122 113 112 111 110 501
Taiwan model Total 1 Total Copy + Print (Full Copy + Print Total *1 *1 *1 TW
(Black 1) Color/Large) (Full Color/Small) (Single Color 1)
101 108 401 402 118 0 0 0

2-200
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
2-201
Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item
Target Country code
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8
UL model Total 1 Total Copy Copy Print Print *1 *1 US
type1 (Black 1) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Full Color + (Full Color +
(Conventional Single Color/ Single Color/ Single Color/ Single Color/
method) Large) Small) Large) Small)
101 108 229 230 321 322 0 0
UL model Total 2 Total Copy Copy Print Print *1 *1 US
type2 (Black 2) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Full Color + (Full Color +
(Conventional Single Color/ Single Color/ Single Color/ Single Color/
method) Large) Small) Large) Small)
102 109 229 230 321 322 0 0
General model Total 1 Total Copy + Print Copy + Print Total Total1 *1 *1 SG/KO/CN
(Black 1) (Full Color/Large) (Full Color/Small) (Single Color 1) (2-Sided)

101 108 401 402 118 114 0 0

UK model Total Total Total Total Scan Print *1 *1 GB
type1 (Black/Large) (Black/Small) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Total 1) (Total 1)
(Conventional Single Color/ Single Color/
method) Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 0 0
240V Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 GB
UK model
type2
(New method) 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CA model TTotal 1 Total Copy Copy Print Print *1 *1 AU
(Black 1) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Full Color + (Full Color +
Single Color/ Single Color/ Single Color/ Single Color/
Large) Small) Large) Small)
101 108 229 230 321 322 0 0
FRN mode Total Total Total Total Scan Print *1 *1 FR
type1 (Black/Large) (Black/Small) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Total 1) (Total 1)
(Conventional Single Color/ Single Color/
method) Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 0 0
FRN model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 FR
type2
(New method) 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-201
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
2-202
Display code of each counter (in service mode)/Item
Target Country code
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8
GER model Total Total Total Total Scan Print *1 *1 DE
type1 (Black/Large) (Black/Small) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Total 1) (Total 1)
(Conventional Single Color/ Single Color/
method) Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 0 0
GER model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 DE
type2
(New method) 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
AMS model Total Total Total Total Scan Print *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/NO/
type1 (Black/Large) (Black/Small) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Total 1) (Total 1) DK/FI/PL/HU/CZ/
(Conventional Single Color/ Single Color/ SI/GR/EE/RU/NL/
method) Large) Small) SK/RO/HR/BG/
112 113 122 123 501 301 0 0 TR

AMS model Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/NO/

type2 DK/FI/PL/HU/CZ/
(New method) SI/GR/EE/RU/NL/
SK/RO/HR/BG/
101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TR

ITA model Total Total Total Total Scan Print *1 *1 IT

type1 (Black/Large) (Black/Small) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Total 1) (Total 1)
(Conventional Single Color/ Single Color/
method) Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 0 0
ITA model Total Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 IT
type2
(New method) 101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
T-2-131

<Code description>
Large : Large size paper (if the width in paper feed direction is over 364mm/count up x1)
Small : Small size paper (if the width in paper feed direction is 364mm or less)
Total : All (C + P), count up x 1
Duplex : At auto duplexing copy, count up x 1
• 3-digit code in counter column is the setting value of the following service mode items.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1 to 6
• Counter2 to 6 can be changed in service mode: COPIER > OPTION > USER.
*1: by default, not indicated; may be changed in service mode.
*2: if '0' is set for the following: COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW.
*3: if '1' is set for the following: COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW.

2-202
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
2-203
●● Count-up Timing
Count-up timing (timing to advance the counter) di_ers according to the following condition:
Print mode (1-sided, 2nd side of the 2-sided print, 1st side of the 2-sided print)
Delivery location (finisher)

Print mode
Delivery location 1-sided/ 2nd side of 2-sided print 1st side of 2-sided print
Count-up timing
1 In the case of host machine only Reference sensor: Outer Delivery Sensor (PS31) Reference sensor: duplex feed sensor 1(PS24)
2 Finisher Saddle finisher Tray A (upper tray) Reference sensor: upper delivery sensor
Tray B (lower tray) Reference sensor: lower delivery sensor
Saddle assembly Reference sensor: saddle inlet sensor
T-2-132

2-203
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Counter Control
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Fan
2-204
■■Fan
1) Fan Control

FM3

FM2
FM22 FM18

FM4 FM19

FM5

FM1 FM20
FM6

FM7
FM9
FM8

F-2-277

2-204
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Fan
2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Fan
2-205

FM16

FM27
[B] FM15

[A]

[A]
[B]
FM10

FM23
FM11
FM24
FM12

FM13

F-2-278

2-205
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Fan
2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Fan
2-206

No. Name Role/function Ecodes

FM1 Pre-fixing Feed Suction Fan E804-0001
FM2 Primary Charging Suction Fan To suction air around the primary charging assembly E804-0002
FM3 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan To exhaust air around the primary charging assembly E804-0003
FM4 Developing and Pre-transfer Charging Fan To cool around the eveloping and Pre-transfer area E804-0004
FM5 Color Cleaning Fan E804-0005
FM6 Fixing Heat Fan To exhaust air around the ÿxing assembly E804-0006
FM7 IH Power Supply Fan To cool the IH power supply assembly E804-0007
FM8 Power Supply Fan 1 To cool the power supply assembly E804-0000
FM9 Power Supply Fan 2 To cool the power supply assembly E804-0000
FM10 Delivery Heat Fan 1 To exhaust air around the delivery area E804-0010
FM11 Delivery Heat Fan 2 To exhaust air around the delivery area E804-0011
FM12 Delivery Heat Fan 3 To exhaust air around the delivery area E804-0012
FM13 Delivery Heat Fan 4 To exhaust air around the delivery area E804-0013
FM15 Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Front) To cool the Pressure Roller. E804-0015
FM16 Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) To cool the Pressure Roller E804-0016
FM17 Front Cooling Fan E804-0017
FM18 Hopper Cooling Fan To suction air around the hopper assembly E804-0018
FM19 Controller Cooling Fan 1 To cool the main controller PCB1 E804-0019
FM20 Controller Cooling Fan 2 To cool the main controller PCB2 E804-0020
FM22 Hopper Cooling Suction Fan To suction air around the hopper area E804-0022
FM23 Anti-adhesion Fan 1 To cool paper that passes through the delivery assembly E804-0023
FM24 Anti-adhesion Fan 2 To cool paper that passes through the delivery assembly E804-0024
FM27 Pre-fixing Feed Cooling Fan E804-0017
T-2-133

2-206
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Fan
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Power Control Function
2-207
2) Fan Sequence ■■Power Control Function
Print
Power supply inside the printer
Symbol Name Pre Normal 1/2 1/3 Post JAM Deep
Rotetion Standby Speed Speed Speed Rotetion /ERR Sleep1 Sleep

FM1 Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan ※1 ※1

Main Power SW Main Controller PCB
FM2 Primary Charging Suction Fan
FM3 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan 8.8WMAX
FM4 Developing and Pre-transfer Charging Fan All Night All Night Circuit
3.3V
FM5 Color Cleaning Fan
Leakage
FM6 Fixing Heat Fan Breaker
3 2 Hard Timer
FM7 IH Power Supply Fan 1
NF (One minute)
FM8 Power Supply Fan １
Leakage
FM9 Power Supply Fan 2 Breaker Relay
FET DC Controller PCB
FM10 Delivery Heat Fan 1 NF 12V-200W limit5A
RMT
FM11 Delivery Heat Fan 2 Fixing Feed Driver PCB
limit5A
FM12 Delivery Heat Fan 3 Relay
FET limit7A Drum ITB Driver PCB
FM13 Delivery Heat Fan 4 24VA-350W
FM15 Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front) RMT Pickup Feed Driver PCB
limit5A
FM16 Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) Relay
FET limit7A Reder / ADF
FM18 Hopper Cooling Fan 24VB-350W
RMT Paper Deck
FM19 Controller Cooling Fan 1 limit5A
Relay board
FM20 Controller Cooling Fan 2 Relay

Relay
Drum Heater Buffer Pass
FM22 Hopper Cooling Suction Fan ×2
(Y,M):19W
Finisher
FM23 Anti-adhesion Fan 1 INV Drum Heater
Anti-adhesion Fan 2 DH_DRV
FM24 (BK):80W
FM27 Pre-fixing Feed Cooling Fan
Deck Heater
FM30 Decurler Suction Fan :20W
FM31 Decurler Side Exhaust Fan
Cassette Heater
FM32 Decurler Lower Exhaust Fan IH Heater :15W
1300W
:Full Speed Reader Heater
:Harf Speed Fixing Unit 20W
:Full speed or half speed depending on the mechanical and process conditions

※1:Full speed only in the cases of postcard, reply postcard, 4 on 1postcard, and Catalog Globe No. 8 (envelop)
(Postcard or envelop, 200 mm or less in length in feed direction, and 1/2 speed or 1/3 speed (paper of 105 g or more)) F-2-280

F-2-279

2-207
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Power Control Function
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Protective Function
2-208
●● Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub
If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer
might be decreased. In order to prevent this symptom, some hubs have the function called
“spanning tree”. If this function is enabled, the device newly connected to the hub can make
data communication with network 10 to 50 seconds (time changes due to the conditions)
after the connection. When the machine enters Deep sleep mode and restores from the sleep
mode, the machine electrically disconnects with the network once. Therefore, if the machine
connects with the spanning tree-installed hub, the machine cannot communicate with network
for approximately 1 minute at a maximum after restoring from the Deep sleep mode.
For this reason, right after restoring from the Deep sleep mode, the following symptoms might
occur: Device status cannot be collected, printing cannot be made, and login using a login
application cannot be made. If such symptoms become any problems, perform the following
operations.

• Using user mode, set not to enter the Deep sleep mode.
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
• Disable the spanning tree function of hub.
• Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning-Tree
• Protocol (RSTP) that resolved such problems.

■■Protective Function
DC power PCB of the host machine and the power PCB of options have the overcurrent
protective function and the abnormal high voltage protective function to prevent the power
circuit brokerage by stopping the output voltage automatically when overcurrent or abnormal
high voltage occur due to the problems such as short circuit etc on each load.
When an error occurs on 3VB (all-night power), all the power will be stopped.
An error occurs on the power other than above, all the power will be stopped except for 3VB
(all-night power).
When an error occurs on 3VB (all-night power), turn OFF the main power switch on the printer
unit and remove the part where the protective circuit has been activated, and then replace the
all-night power PCB (because the fuse of all-night power PCB is burnt.).
In other cases than above, turn OFF the main power switch of the printer unit and remove the
part where the protective circuit is activated. Wait for 3 min or more and turn ON the power to
reset the protective circuit.

2-208
2
Technology > External and Controls > Controls > Protective Function
 2 Technology > External and Controls > Service Works (External Auxiliary System) > When replacing parts
2-209
Service Works (External Auxiliary System)
■■Periodically replaced parts
Parts name Parts number Qty. Estimated life Remarks
1 Toner Filter FL2-0554 2 500K Sheets
2 Primary Charging Ozone FC5-2486 1 500K Sheets
Filter
3 Fixing Ozone Filter FC6-2035 1 500K Sheets
T-2-134

■■Durable parts
No durable parts are assigned

■■Periodical services
There are no parts to execute periodical service

■■When replacing parts

[When replacing the DC controller PCB]
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2)

[Restoration of DC Controller PCB SRAM]

COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES (LEVEL2)

2-209
2
Technology > External and Controls > Service Works (External Auxiliary System) > When replacing parts
 2 Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
2-210

MEAP An example of the LDAP server management screen

Changes
■■LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
LDAP authentication has been added to the server authentication method using Single Sign-
On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H).
LDAP authentication is a user authentication performed by using an LDAP server on the
network linked with the device.

Device LDAP Server

Local user F-2-283

An example of the screen for adding an LDAP server

Remote user
F-2-281
Accordingly, the following item and setting screens have been added to the SSO-H
management screen of the remote UI.
• Drop-down list for selecting the LDAP server as the authentication server
• The LDAP server management screen (when [LDAP Server] is selected from the foregoing
drop-down list)
• The screen for adding an LDAP server

An example of the screen showing the drop-down list for selecting LDAP Server

F-2-284
For details, refer to "Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)" in this chapter.

F-2-282

2-210
2
Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-211
■■Integrated Authentication Disabling Setting Screen Preparation for Using SSO-H
A user setting screen has been added to the integrated authentication function which allows
■■Outline
the authentication information used for logging into the machine to be shared between MEAP
applications. When using Single Sign-On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H) for the login service,
required system environments are different in server authentication or local device
From a security standpoint, the setting screen for disabling the function to allow authentication authentication.
information (Volatile Credential), whose registered information is discarded at the time of See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods:
logout or shutdown of the device, to be used has conventionally been included in service
mode. ■■Server authentication management
In addition to this service mode, a screen that allows even users to make the setting has
The system requirements necessary when using server authentication by SSO-H vary
been added to the remote UI.
depending on the authentication server.
This screen can be also used to disable the integrated authentication function for each
The system requirements for using each authentication server are shown below.
authentication protocol.
For details, refer to "Integrated Authentication Function" in this chapter.
●● Active Directory authentication
In order to use Active Directory authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments
are required.
1) Authentication server (Active Directory : Windows server )
• Active Directory and Domain Name System (DNS) should be installed.
• A group named "Canon Peripheral Admins" should be created on the Active Directory.
• The OS should be one of the followings.
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 *
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 *
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 *
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
* 64-bit version is not supported.
2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server)
F-2-285 • The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory.
• The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low
line), and % (percent).

Note:
The difference in time setting between the authentication server (Active Directory) and
the machine (and the computer for login) should be within 5 minutes. (If the difference in
time setting is 5 minutes or longer, an error will occur at the time of login for the server
authentication.)

2-211
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
2-212

Note:
■■PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
As for the user name for logging into the machine, use the name registered as "User The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC
logon name (pre-Windows 2000)" in the Active Directory.
on the network.
An example of the user registration screen (Windows Server 2003)
●● OS of the PC and Other Environments
Classification Operating System Supported browser Java Runtime Environment
Client OS Windows XP Professional SP3 Internet Explorer 7 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
Internet Explorer 8 or later *1 *3
Windows Vista SP2 Internet Explorer 7 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
Internet Explorer 8 or later *1 *3
Internet Explorer 9 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
or later *2 *3
Windows 7 SP1 Internet Explorer 8 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
or later *1 *3
Internet Explorer 9 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
or later *2 *3
Server OS Windows Server 2003 SP2 Internet Explorer 7 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
F-2-286
Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Internet Explorer 8 or later *1 *3
Windows Server 2008 SP2 Internet Explorer 7 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
Internet Explorer 8 or later *1 *3
Internet Explorer 9 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
●● LDAP authentication or later *2 *3
When using LDAP authentication by SSO-H, the following conditions need to be satisfied. Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Internet Explorer 8 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
1) LDAP server or later *1 *3
Internet Explorer 9 Java Runtime Environment 1.5
• Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
or later *2 *3
• Lotus Domino V8.5 for Windows Mac OS Mac OS X v10.5 Safari 4.0.5 Java 2 Standard Edition 5.0 *1
Safari 5.0.5 *3
2) OS where the LDAP server runs Mac OS X v10.6 Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
• It should comply with the specifications of the LDAP server product.
Safari 5.1
Mac OS X v10.7 Safari 5.1
Operation check has been conducted for the following OS. JRE : Java Runtime Environment T-2-135
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2 J2SE : Java 2 Platform Standard Edition
• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
Note:
Note: *1 Excluding JRE6 update4/5
When an LDAP server other than the server shown above is used, SSO-H may not *2 In order to use JRE1.6 with Internet Explorer 9, JRE1.6.0.24 or later is required.
work properly. *3 Refer to the website of JAVA (http://java.com/) for how to obtain the Java
Windows Active Directory works also as an LDAP server, but is not supported. environment.

2-212
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
2-213
Preparation for Using SMS
Note:
• The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer. To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings
• In Internet Explorer, if [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is disabled in [Internet Options]
need to be set up on the device.
> [Security] > [Custom level...], a warning message that JRE has not yet been installed is
displayed.
• JavaScript should be enabled in all the browsers. ■■Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
• In the case of an IP v6 environment, JRE1.5 or later is required.
• When using Windows XP in an IP v6 environment, IP v6 may need to be installed ●● Checking of operation environment
manually in some cases.
In order to access SMS using password authentication, the PC and browser need to comply
with the following system environment.

●● Network ports used Combination of the Browser and the OS

Port No. Application Operating System Supported browser
Connecting 53 Communication with DNS server (fixed) Windows XP Professional SP3 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
88 Kerberos authentication with KDC (Key Distribution Center) Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
1-65535 Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389, Windows Vista SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
( default:389) may be changed to any port on LDAP service side) Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
Listening 10000 - 10100 Microsoft Internet Explorer 9
T-2-136 Windows 7 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 8
Microsoft Internet Explorer 9
Mac OS X v10.5 Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Mac OS X v10.6 Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Mac OS X Lion Safari 5.1
T-2-137

In order to access SMS using RLS authentication, the environment should comply with the
environment for using SSO-H as the login service. (For details, refer to "PC Environment of
Administrator Users and General Users".)

●● PC and Browser Settings

The PC and browser used to access SMS need to satisfy the following conditions.
• The supported browser language should be the same with the language of the OS.
• Java Script should be enabled.
• The supported screen size should be 800 x 600 or larger (recommended size: 1024 x 768).
• Session cookie should be enabled.
• Only alphanumeric characters and some of the symbols ("-" or ".") should be used as the
machine domain name and host name. If an invalid character string such as a low line ("_")
is included in the host name, cookies cannot be enabled.

2-213
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-214
■■ Settings on the Device Side Note:
When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management
●● Network configuration process Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button.
In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings (This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is
need to be made from the touch panel of the machine. (this setting is [ON] by default). also applied to the touch panel.)
When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check
the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button
1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > for this message.
[Use HTTP] and press [On] button.

F-2-289

2) Press [OK] button to return to Main Menu screen.

3) Restart this device.

CAUTION:
• The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the
device.
F-2-287
• You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use,
enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser.
Note:
In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN
default, so “Network” and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected. Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server
Return to the top screen, press “Login” button at the lower left of the screen, login as group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As
the system manager, and configure the settings. network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator.
The default setting for the System Manager ID is “7654321”, and the password is”
7654321”. • If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to
use SMS.
• To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP
device’s touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some
characters.
• When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate
necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with
[SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL
Settings] on the device.
F-2-288

2-214
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-215
●● Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL 2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key
and Certificate Settings ].
Communication
To use SMS via SSL connection, it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as
the key to be used.
Since a key (default key) that can be used for encrypted SSL communication is installed as
standard on the device, advance setting of the key pair and server certificate is not required.
In order to use an encryption key other than the default key, follow the procedure "Generating
a key pair" shown below to make settings for the key pair and server certificate necessary for
encrypted SSL communication.

Note:
• MFP has a server certificate registered as standard.
• For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting, refer to [e-Manual > Security].
• As for SMS, by setting a Default Key, encrypted SSL communication is always executed
regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings]
(Settings/Registration) > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings]: ON/OFF. F-2-291
3) Click [ Generate Key... ] button.

Generating a key pair

1) From a PC on the same network as the device, use a web browser to access the remote
UI's portal page. Then, select [ Settings/Registration ] from the menu on the right side of
the screen.

URL to access: http://<device's IP address>:8000/

F-2-292
4) Click [ Network Communication ]

F-2-293

F-2-290

2-215
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-216
5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button. 6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Registered Key and Certificate ].

F-2-295
Default Key Settings
1) Click [ Preferences ] > [ Network Settings ] > [TCP/IP Settings ] > [ SSL Settings ].

F-2-294
Input example
Item name Type Content Entry
Key Settings
Key Name Compulsory An arbitrary character string Default Key
Signature Algorithm Compulsory Selected from:SHA1/SHA256/SHA384/SHA512 RSA
Key Algorithm Compulsory Selected from:512/1024/2048/4096 512
Certificate Settings
Validity Start Date Compulsory Date 15/4/2012
Validity End Date Compulsory Date 15/4/2036
Country/Region Compulsory Country or region name US
State Arbitrary State name - F-2-296
City Arbitrary City name -
Organization Arbitrary Organization name -
Organization Unit Arbitrary Organization unit -
Common Name Arbitrary Common Name* -
T-2-138

Note:
When the IP address of the device has been entered in the [Common Name] entry
field, if you install a server certificate to the browser ( see "Installing a server certificate
(reference information)" ), the message "Certificate Error" that usually appears when
access is made from Internet Explorer 7 or later will not be displayed.

2-216
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-217
2) Click [ Key and Certificate...] button. Installing a server certificate (reference information)
When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key
for SSL, "Certificate Error" appears if the version of Internet Explorer (IE) is Version 7 or later.

Error display example

F-2-300
To disable display of "Certificate Error", use the following procedure (for IE8) to set the key
generated in "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication" (i.e.
the key with the IP address of the device specified as the shared name) as an SSL key.

1) Access SMS from the browser, and then click "Certificate Error" in the URL entry field.

F-2-297
3) Select the generated key, and then click the [ Default Key Settings ] button.
F-2-301
2) Click [ View certificates ].

F-2-298
4) Check that [ SSL ] is displayed in the [ Key Usage ] entry field.

F-2-302

F-2-299
5) Log out from the remote UI, and then restart the device.

2-217
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-218
3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab. 5) In [ Certificate Store ], select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and
then click the [ Browse ] button.

F-2-303
4) [ Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-305
6) In [ Select Certificate Store ], select [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ], and then click
the [ OK ] button.

F-2-306

F-2-304

2-218
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-219
7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification 9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes] button. (It does not appear when installing
Authorities" appears in [ Certificate ], and then click the [ Next ] button. the same certificate again.)

F-2-307 F-2-309

8) [ Completing the Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Finish ] button. 10) A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully. Click
the [ OK ] button.

F-2-310

F-2-308

2-219
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
 2 Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
2-220
●● Network Port Settings 4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the is displayed), and press [OK] button.
servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443. In the case that these
ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP
application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well
as the existing system.

1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 2.

2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [NETWORK] buttons.

F-2-313

Note:
A port number can be any integer from 0 to 65535. To avoid port numbers that are
frequently used, do not use any integer from 0 to 1023.

Server Setting value Default value / Value after RAM clear

HTTP Server 1024 to 65535 8000
HTTPS Server 1024 to 65535 8443
T-2-139
F-2-311
3) To set up the HTTP server port, select [ MEAP-PN ]. To set up the HTTPS server port,
Note:
select [MEAP-SSL ].
If PS Print Server Unit is connected, do not specify port 8080.
If port 8080 is specified, it is not possible to access the remote UI of the device where
the MEAP authentication application is running. (Port 8080 is reserved to allow the PS
Print Server Unit to redirect to the device.)

5) Restart the device if the port number is set.

F-2-312

F-2-314

2-220
2
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
 2 Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
2-221
■■How to Check the Serial Number Login to SMS
When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some
■■Outline
cases.
SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via
Examples of where the serial number is necessary the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed
• When initializing SMS login password (obtaining a switch license) to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.
• When obtaining a MEAP application license from LMS
• When obtaining a transfer license of MEAP application SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)
• When obtaining a special license for reinstalling MEAP application
If a problem occurs in the MEAP device and you want to contact the support department of
the sales company, you need to provide the serial number. Perform the following procedure to
get the serial number.

●● Checking from the PC browser

The serial number of the device is displayed on the SMS login screen, SMS screen, and
remote UI portal screen.

F-2-317

Authentication
Login method Authentication service name Users who may log in
method
Password Password SMS Installer Service (Password Users who know the SMS
F-2-315 authentication authentication Authentication) login password
●● Checking from the device's Touch Panel RLS login SSO-H SMS Installer Service (Remote Users registered as
You can see the number by pressing the counter key on the Control Panel of the machine. Login Service Authentication) administrators with SSO-H
T-2-140

Note:
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, ‘RLS
Authentication’ is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if ‘RLS Authentication’ is
selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot
be changed.

F-2-316

2-221
2
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
2-222
●● When SMS Cannot Be Accessed If login is not possible due to exclusive control
If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization) Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already
After changing the default SMS login password, if you forgot the new password and cannot logged into the SMS of the same device.
log in to SMS, you can use a switch license for password initialization to change the password
back to the default value "MeapSmsLogin". An example of the exclusive control message
Note that there is no special password for service.

1) Obtain a switch license file for password initialization.

Contact the person in charge of support at the sales company, give the device's serial
number, and have a switch license file for password initialization issued.
2) Load the switch license file.
With nothing entered, click the [ Log in ] button to display the area for specifying a switch
license file for password initialization.

F-2-319
If you cannot log in due to exclusive control, you need to ask the other user to log out before
you can try again.

Note:
If you close the browser without logging out, the session remains active. In that case,
you cannot log in again.
If this problem occurs, you can wait for 5 minutes so that the session is disconnected.
Or, you can restart the device to force the session to disconnect.

F-2-318
3) Specify the switch license file.
Click the [ Browse ] button and specify the switch license file.
4) Initialize the login password.
Click the [ Initialize ] button to display an initialization confirmation page, and click the [ OK
] button.

Note:
• The default password is “MeapSmsLogin.” (The password is case-sensitive.)
• If you click [Cancel] button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.

2-222
2
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
2-223
If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set
Installing an MEAP Application
If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS
(https://<device's IP address>:8443/sms/). In that case, perform the following procedure. ■■Outline
1) Go to http://<device's IP address>:8000/sms/, and check to see that "HTTP 500 Internal
From the MEAP application installation screen, you can install the MEAP application as well
Server Error" appears.
as the license file.
2) If it appears, perform the procedure "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted
SSL Communication" in this chapter.

Note:
In the case of SMS, by setting the key to be used, encrypted SSL communication
is always executed regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] >
［Management Settings］ > ［License/Other］ > ［MEAP Settings］ > [Use SSL] > ON/
OFF.

●● How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the

Time of Access
F-2-320
When accessing from the browser to SMS, a message "Certificate Error" appears in
Before installing the MEAP application, be sure to check the following items.
some cases. In that case, perform the procedure "Installing a server certificate (reference
information)" in this chapter.
●● Device compatibility with the MEAP application
To find out whether the device is compatible with the MEAP application, check the devices
supported by the MEAP application. Depending on the application, the device's firmware may
require version upgrade.

●● Resources availability (remaining amount)

The necessary resources (free storage space and free memory available) must be secured
for an MEAP application to run; otherwise, you cannot install the MEAP application.
To check the resource information, see "Device's resources" in this manual.

2-223
2
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
2-224
■■Procedure to install applications CAUTION:
1) Long on to SMS. • You cannot install only the license.
2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu. • You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license.
Be sure to select its license file.
• If you are adding a license to an existing application, see "Procedure adding a
license file".
• If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new
application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is
running.

Note:
The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The
application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which
device to install with the license file.
Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should
be taken when confirming the contents of the license file.

Sample file
F-2-321
3) Check [ Install MEAP Application/License ]page appears. License File ID
4) Click [ Browse.. ] button, and select the application file and the license file of the application; Application ID
then, click [ Install ] button. Serial Number
Validated Period
Note:
Application File: identified by the extension “jar”. Counter informations
License File: identified by the extension “lic”.

F-2-323

F-2-322

2-224
2
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
 2 Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
2-225
5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ OK ] button.
Note:
As for an application that has just been installed, the status is "Installed". In order to use
the application, it is necessary to click the [Start] button to change the status to [Started].

F-2-327
F-2-324
6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and
click [ OK ].
7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation. Note:
There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install
using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI.
Screen example

F-2-325
8) Upon installation completed, click [ To MEAP Application Management ] button shown on
the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.

F-2-328
[Register/Update Software] provides two types of installations. One is [Manual
Installation] where you specify a jar file and a license file and then install. The other is
[Delivered Installation] where you enter a license access number.
For details of the procedures, please refer to the e-Manual.

F-2-326

2-225
2
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
 2 Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
2-226
■■Resource Information ●● Device's resources
When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as
●● Outline
follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the
Application Management page shows [ resource information ] for information of the whole
MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS.
device resources including Amount Used, Remaining, and Percent Used.
Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication
This function enables users to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional
function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger
application. Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the
value than the following values.
top of each application, which declares the resources required in the application. Therefore,
the information does not necessarily show the resources actually in use.
List of Available Resources
The following resource information is shown:
Product Name Storage Memory Thread Socket File Description
• Storage
iR-ADV C5051 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
• Memory iR-ADV C9075 PRO series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
• Thread iR-ADV 6075 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
• Socket iR-ADV 8105 PRO series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
• File Descriptor iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series Flash model 220MB 32MB 162 128 128
HDD model 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
iR-ADV 4045 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
If the hard disk does not have enough free space for the application, the application cannot iR-ADV C5255 series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
be installed. iR-ADV C9280 PRO series 1024MB 128MB 256 256 256
Moreover, if the free space of any of the resources (Memory, Thread, Socket, and File T-2-141

Descriptor) is insufficient, the application cannot be started.

The following procedure shows how to check the resource information. Note:
• Among the resources, the free space of Storage is checked when installing an application.
For other resources, the free space is checked when the application is started.
1) Log in to SMS. • Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the
2) Click [ MEAP Application Management ]. User’s Guide that comes with the individual applications.
3) Check [ Resource Information ] for information of the whole device resources. • Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate.
(However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication
application is not included in this number.
• The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication
application is not included in this number.)

CAUTION:
To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the
license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the
license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.
http://www.canon.com/lms/license/

F-2-329

2-226
2
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
2-227
MEAP Specifications Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable
in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP
■■What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of
MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the
MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications
application rejects installation of such an application.
can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses
a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the
MEAP Specifications for each model
function.
Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks
iR-ADV C5051 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.37.xx or later
●● About Name iR-ADV C5045 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
The displayed name for Meap Specifications differs depending on the screen or the location iR-ADV C5035 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
where the name is displayed. iR-ADV C5030 40, 41, 42, 44, 45 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46

In this document, it is referred to as "Meap Specifications". Ver.38.xx or later

The location where the name is displayed/shown Displayed name 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
Platform Information : SMS > [ System Management] > [ System Information MEAP Specifications 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
] > [ Platform Information] 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
System Information Print : Local UI [ Settings/Registration ] > [ Management
Ver.50.xx or later
Settings ] > [ License/Other ] > [ MEAP Settings ] > [ System Information
5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18,19,25,26,27,29,
Print]
30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,44,4
Manifest file of the MEAP application MeapSpecVersion
5,46,47,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59
SDK documents
iR-ADV C9075 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.37.xx or later
T-2-142
iR-ADV C9070 PRO 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
●● Mechanism iR-ADV C9065 PRO 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
iR-ADV C9060 PRO 40, 41, 42, 44, 45 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2 iR-ADV C7065
information below: iR-ADV C7055 Ver.38.xx or later
• Device Specification ID 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
• MEAP Specifications 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including
print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number, Ver.50.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service iR-ADV 6075 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.20.xx or later
iR-ADV 6065 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform iR-ADV 6055 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49 39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54,
installation of such an application. 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
iR-ADV 8105 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.20.xx or later
Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device
iR-ADV 8095 PRO 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 1,
Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always iR-ADV 8085 PRO 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 , 41, 44, 45,
have the same version. 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution.

2-227
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
2-228
Product Name Initial MEAP SpecVer Remarks Ver Description
iR-ADV C2030 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, Ver.10.xx or later 26 MEAP driver preference function
iR-ADV C2025 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25, 27 Symbols that can be used with MibAgent added. (symbols for IPv6 address acquisition)
iR-ADV C2020 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 29 IMI API added (IMI version 1.2.1 enabled)
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53 30 Extended address book function. (e-mail/group/i-FAX/file)
iR-ADV 4045 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, - 31 Integrated ERS function
iR-ADV 4035 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32 Extended Imaging function (function to generate PDF/OOXML (PowerPoint) with visible
iR-ADV 4025 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, signature)
40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49,
33 Extended function for imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE series (API for address book/ CTK/
50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
TopMenu)
58, 59
34 Extended IMI Box function (v1.3.0)
iR-ADV C5255 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, -
35 Extended SIS function (function to check the network cable status, function to check PS print
iR-ADV C5250 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
server unit status)
iR-ADV C5240 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
36 Reserved
iR-ADV C5235 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49,
50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 37 CLS (Contextual Login Service) Supporting API Added
58, 59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 38 imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series administrative privileges supported
70, 71, 72, 74, 78, 80 39 MEAP Specifications added according to Jcrypto API Specification Change
iR-ADV C9280 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, - 40 ImagingAPI (Creation API of Visible Signature PDF) added
iR-ADV C9270 PRO 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 41 Reserved
iR-ADV C7280 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 42 Reserved
iR-ADV C7270 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,46,47, 49, 50, 44 imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series Remote Address Book Supported, RemoteFAX
iR-ADV C7260 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, Supported
59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 45 Addition of API that allows acquisition of the HID installation status
71, 72 ,74 ,78 ,80 ,82 46 Multilingualization of the USB keyboard of the System Driver
T-2-143 47 Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption
MEAP Specifications List PDF document
48 ID expressing the scan function for iR-ADV C2030/C2025/C2020 series
Ver Description 49 Reserved
1 MEAP basic function 50 SecurityOptionalPackage
2 MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy 51 IMI function expansion of iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later) or later
5 MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL 52 (iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later)) Addition of registered API to enable SSL
6 Reserved communication setting (On/Off) for each URL
7 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF (Text Searchable) + USB Host 53 Disclosure of registration/deletion function to/from Quick Menu
(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer) 54 Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode.
9 Reserved 55 System account release function
10 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host (Exception + Clear Feature + Set Feature+ Hot 56 MEAP User Preference Service
Plug) + WINS address acquisition using MIB Agent + Timer Service + SSL client authentication 57 MEAP Application Configuration Service
11 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS 58 MEAP Application Log Service
13 MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth 59 Reserved
PDF + CTK2.0
59 Integrated authentication service
14 Device signature PDF
60 SFP basic functions
15 IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) , IPv6, Extended encryption function (AES/RC4)
61 AVS (Lightweight Applet Viewer Service) for LBP
17 Acquiring images of JBIG format
62 SIS (Lightweight System Interface Service) for LBP
18 Parsing XML documents (XML parser)
63 LDT
19 Enhancement of IMI function (IMI Version1.2 series)
21 Reserved 64 IMI customization
25 API to access the HID/Mass Storage class devices. 65 Extension of MEAP User Preference Service (Ver56) (preference shared among applications)

2-228
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
2-229
Ver Description MEAP Application Management
66 Reserved
68 Addition of Office Open XML's Word creation API ■■Outline
69 Extension of the encryption PDF function (AES 128-bit/256-bit)
70 Addition of 3 formats (uncompressed searchable PDF, XPS, and linearized searchable PDF) You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks
71 Reserved of the MEAP application (start, stop, uninstall), or check the device's resource information.
72 Reserved
73 IMI: API that supports A4 scanners and allows for specifying of the direction of the original
image ■■Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
74 SSL: Support for addition of the CN validation function
●● Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application
75 Reserved
76 Addition of the SFP ExtendedTextInputView class 1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to "Login to SMS" in this manual.)
77 Reserved 2) Click [ Application List ]. (If the Application List is already being displayed, this operation is
78 Reserved not necessary.)
80 Reserved 3) Click [ Start ] or [ Stop ] button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped.
82 API to recover from Sleep 1
T-2-144

F-2-330

2-229
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
2-230
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [ 5) Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application
Stopped ]. Before uninstalling the MEAP application, check that the following conditions are met.
• The MEAP application has stopped.
• The license has been disabled or deleted. (The status is "Not Installed".)

F-2-332
For information on the procedure to stop the MEAP application, see the previous section
"Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application".
For information on the procedure to delete the license file, see the following section
"Managing the License File".

F-2-331

●● If the MEAP application cannot be started Note:

When a user tries to uninstall an application before deleting the license, the following
If the conditions to start the MEAP application are not satisfied, the MEAP application cannot
message is shown.
be started.
If the MEAP application cannot be started, check the following items.

Is a valid license installed?

If the license has expired, you cannot start the application. If the license has already expired,
obtain a new license and then update the license. ( See "Managing the License File" in this
manual.)
F-2-333

Are the necessary resources available? If the license file of the selected application cannot be deleted, the [Uninstall] button is
grayed out and therefore the application cannot be uninstalled.
If the resources such as memory capacity or number of threads are not sufficient, the
application also cannot be started.
Delete any unnecessary data to secure sufficient resources.
CAUTION:
If the application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions, contact the If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message
support department of the sales company. will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be
available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.

2-230
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
2-231
1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu. ■■Managing the License File
2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has
been disabled. (The status is "Not Installed".) ●● Outline
The license file management functions allow you to perform the following operations related
to the license file necessary for the MEAP application to run.
• Update the license which has already expired.
• Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application.
These license management functions can be performed from the [ MEAP Application
Management ] screen.
F-2-334 The main license management functions are as follows:
3) Click [ Uninstall ] button for the application to be uninstalled.
Adding a license
When the license has expired, you can add a license file.

Disabling a License File

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, the license needs to be deleted. In that case, you
must first disable the license file because a license file which has not been disabled cannot
be downloaded or deleted.

Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, you need to delete its license file which has already
been disabled.
By downloading the license file to your PC before it is deleted, you can use it when installing
the application again to the same device.

F-2-335 CAUTION:
4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [ Yes ] button. After deleting the license file which has been disabled, you can no longer download the
Upon [ Yes ] button clicked, uninstallation process is started. license file.

F-2-336

2-231
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
2-232
●● Procedure adding a license file 4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.
1) Log on to SMS.
2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to
add a license file.

F-2-339
F-2-337
5) Click [ Install ] button.
3) In [ Application / License Information ] page shown on the screen, click [ License
Management ] button.

F-2-340

F-2-338
6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [ OK ] button.

2-232
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
2-233
●● Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license) 2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.

CAUTION:
• Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the
application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.
• Once suspended, the status of the license will be ‘Not Installed’, and its application
will no longer be available for use.
• You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the
same iR, the device with the same device serial number.
• If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, use the transfer license
during the replacement. (See "License for forwarding")

1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.

F-2-342
3) On Application/ License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.

F-2-343

F-2-341

2-233
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
2-234
4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button. ●● Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file

Note:
The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same device
(with the same device serial number).

1) Login to SMS.
2) Application List page appears. On MEAP Application Management page , click the name of
the application you want.

F-2-344
5) Click [ Yes ].

F-2-346
3) Check Application/ License Information page appears.
4) On Application / License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.

F-2-345

F-2-347

2-234
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
2-235
5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button. 7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button.

F-2-348 F-2-349

6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by
8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button.
following the instructions on the screen.

F-2-350

CAUTION:
Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice
that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file
before deleting the application.

2-235
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
2-236
■■Other License File Management Functions 2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP
address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).
●● Reusable license
When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, “Disabling a
License File .” and see Chapter 0, “Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File.” in
this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications.
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application
counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times F-2-352
as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'. 3) Specify the application to be forwarded.

●● License for forwarding

If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, you can transfer the license
information used in the MEAP application to the new machine and continue its usage. Service
engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not
open to users).
The procedure is shown below.

1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (see Chapter 0, “Starting and Stopping
a MEAP Application.” in this manual).
F-2-353
4) Click [ Disable ] button on the [ Disable License File ].

F-2-351
F-2-354

2-236
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
2-237
5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ]. 8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ].

F-2-355 F-2-358

6) When [Download] button on the [ Download / Delete Transfer License File ] becomes 9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation
effective, click [Download] button. screen and click [ Yes ] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for
forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).

F-2-359
10) Log out of SMS.
11) Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation,
it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to
the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new
license for installation in the new device.

Note:
F-2-356
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the
7) The dialogue [ File Download ] is displayed. Click [ Save ]. name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of
product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.

12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.

F-2-357

2-237
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-238
Enhanced System Application Management ■■About Login Service
The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled device is
■■Outline
booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System
[ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging Management ] page.
in to devices. The preinstalled login applications are Default Authentication and Single Sign On-H, and
• Installing and uninstalling Enhanced System Application Management (login services, etc.) Default Authentication is enabled by default.
• Switching login services (switching the method to log in to devices)
• Checking installation status of other System Applications CAUTION:
• This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent.

■■Default Authentication overview

This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no
authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting /
Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by
department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered
ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or
Remote UI.

■■SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features.
• The following three authentication methods may be selected from.
F-2-360
• Server authentication
• Server authentication and local authentication
• Local device authentication
• Active Directory or LDAP can be used as the server for server authentication.
• It is not necessary to prepare a server for Security Agent (SA). (In the case of SSO, SA is
necessary.)

2-238
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-239
Differences from conventional SSO ●● Environment confirmation
Domain B Domain C Domain B Domain C Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements
needed in each login service.
DC DC DC DC

DC DC
●● Specification of SSO-H
Item Specification
No. of local device users Up to 5000
Maximum number of domains Active Directory : 200 domains (“this device” not included)
SA
IPv6 Authentication provided in IPv6 supports AD/KDC/DNS of
Windows Server 2008 only)
Resource used Memory : 3584KB
Storage : 25000KB
Device Device File Description : 27
Thread : 33
Domain A Domain A Socket : 33
SSO SSO-H
Network ports Connecting 88 ： KDC
F-2-361 used 53 ： DNS
1 - 65535 ( Default : 389) : LDAP
CAUTION: Listening 10000 - 10100
• When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be Supported authentication server Active Directory ：
used. Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1 * /
Windows Server 2003 R2 * / Windows 2008 Server *
• When the setting is SSO-H, start up takes a little longer when compared to Default
*64-bit OS is not supported.
Authentication (because of the time required for object initialization).
• To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail LDAP ：
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot
Lotus Domino V8.5 for Window
be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the
Supported Active Directory Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1/Windows
device are used.
Server 2003 R2/ Windows 2008 Server(64BitOS not supported)
• The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management
Availability of Department Available only in local authentication
is required. Management Linkage
• Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local T-2-145

device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However, SSO/SDL handling
application settings information cannot be ported. This model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.

2-239
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-240
●● Setting the Authentication Method ●● Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used
In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods. Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.
The combination can be changed from the SSO-H setting screen. (For details, refer to
e-Manual > MEAP > Menu for Administrators > Setting the SSO-H > "Setting the User Usage Conditions
Authentication System".) In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
conditions need to be satisfied.
• Only "Local Device Authentication" can be used as the user authentication method.
• The department ID and password have been already set for the SSO-H login user before
enabling department ID management.
• The information (the department ID and password) set for the login user coincides with the
information registered in Department ID Management.

Setting Procedure
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
F-2-362 procedure needs to be performed to enable the setting.
1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
Note:
Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
The default settings are shown below.
• User authentication method : "Server Authentication + Local Device Authentication" Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
• Type of authentication : "Active Directory"

CAUTION:
• To ensure the security, it is recommended to change the password and the user
name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of
shipment immediately after you have started using SSO-H.
• Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device
has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the
Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.

●● Using an Accounting Product When SSO-H Is Used

F-2-363
SSO-H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE / iW Accounting
Manager, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Console Access
Management Plug-in, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management
Console Accounting Management Plug-in.
For details on the combination, refer to the User's Manual or Service Manual of the product.

2-240
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-241
2) Restart the device. 5) Restart the device.
Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.

3) Disable Depart ID Management. 6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.

In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management] Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/ Department ID Management.
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department
ID Management]. SSO-H user registration information edition screen
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).

F-2-364
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.
Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS". )

F-2-366

F-2-365

2-241
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
2-242
SSO-H user registration information import screen 8) Check that the device can be logged in.
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information] or Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment
(https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import). where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.

F-2-369

F-2-367 Note:
7) Enable Depart ID Management. In the case of conventional SSO, department management can be conducted also
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management] when server authentication is used provided that iWAM/iW EMC account management
is used, which is not supported by SSO-H.
> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Management].
●● Setting the Administrator for Server Authentication
When using Server Authentication, the user who satisfies the specified conditions (user
attribute and its match criteria) becomes the administrator (the device administrator and the
SSO-H administrator).
The default user attribute and whether the setting value can be changed or not are shown
below.
Item Default value Active Directory LDAP
Search Criteria: Exact Match Not Available Available
User Attribute: memberOf Not Available Available
Character String: Canon Peripheral Admins Available Available
The settings of the administrator can be changed on the following screen: remote UI >T-2-146
Single
Sign-On H > Configuration (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/ActionSet)
F-2-368

F-2-370

2-242
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
2-243
●● System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to ■■Local device authentication
SystemManagers) It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H, and is used for an device on a
SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter “SA”) to stand-alone basis.
authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers
(users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this Device
function.
Local user

Remote user

F-2-371
Register the user to be authenticated on the database in the device.
User management can be performed from the User Management screen (http://device's IP
address:8000/sso/) or imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. The login destination is
[This device].

User Management screen

F-2-372

2-243
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
2-244
■■Server authentication (Active Directory authentication) CAUTION:
●● Outline Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
with the device linked with a domain controller on the network in an Active Directory authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has
environment. It is a user authentication where the user is authenticated by the domain on become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has
Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
the network when the user logs into the device. In addition to users belonging to the domain
that includes the device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable relationship with the
domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of the login destination
can be selected by the users themselves upon login. ●● Access Mode in Sites
Using one of the options (Net Spot Accountant, imageWARE Accounting Manager, or With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there
imageWARE EMC Accounting Management Plug-in) makes it possible to analyze/manage is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise
the device usage. multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the
device, or the subnet Active Directory.
Dmain A Domain B
• The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF.
Domain controller Domain controller • Access Active Directory within same site only.
（Active Directory） （Active Directory）
Trusting • If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an
relationship authentication error.
• Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located.
• If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory
external to the site will be accessed.
• If all attempts to access Active Directory fail, there will be an authentication error.
Available
Domain A user Domain B user
Device
The operating specifications of the site internal access mode are as described below.
F-2-373 When first logging in to the login service after booting iR, the domain controller (DC) is
The protocol used is as follows. obtained from the site list.
• Kerberos:LLS/RLS/ILS However, upon the first login, even if the site functionality is active, connection to DC is
• NTLMV2:WLS(Web Service Login Service) random. (This is because, if connection to DC should fail, the site to which the device belongs
User information acquisition is done by LDAP, so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be cannot be ascertained.)
made accessible. If LDAP connection fails, the authentication will end in error. If the device IP address or the domain name are changed, the site settings are acquired once
No. of supported domains: 200 (unchanged from SSO) Site access supported. more.

CAUTION: In this mode, at the first login (first authentication of domain to which the device belongs)
In the case of using Server Authentication (Active Directory authentication), it is LDAP-Bind is performed directly to DC and site information acquired by LDAP from DC.
necessary to synchronize the time settings of the Active Directory server and the
machine (and the PC for login). If the difference in time setting is 5 minutes or longer, From the acquired site list, the site to which the device subnet belongs is extracted and this
an error will occur at the time of login. (The setting of the allowable difference in time becomes the site to which device belongs. Active Directory address is acquired (retrieved
can be changed.)
from DNS)

2-244
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
2-245
Settings for access mode in sites
Note:
Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as
• The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net.
• In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed. detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.
• Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first.
• If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories Site internal access mode settings window (DMS)
belonging to different subnets than the device are listed.
• The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that
where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active
Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained.
• If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is
programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which
the address list was obtained.

Site list acquisition

F-2-374
After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the
The figure below shows a sample of processing Access Mode in Sites.
Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory
Sample of Processing Access Mode in Sites
needs to be accessed in LDAP, so SASL-Kerberos-Bind is used by the login user account. If
authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and
the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login. Domain X
4.Access Active
Directory of same Site:Tokyo::
DNS Server A Repllic 172.24.12.0/24
In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be site ation
records: DC-Tokyo/DNS 172.24.35.0/24
specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed AD 192.168.1.2

n
172.24.12.2 1. When making initial

io
at
AD 172.24.12.2 Site:Osaka::
settings, obtain site list

lic
depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when AD 172.24.35.2

pl
and ascertain which 192.168.1.0/24

Re
AD 211.111.1.30 2.Get Active site the device
acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80 Directory list belongs to. Site:Hakata::
SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90 SSO-Tokyo 211.111.1.0/24
such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3 N 172.24.12.80 WAN
WA3. Access Active
LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No. Directory of same
subnet
389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another
Site:Tokyo
Active Directory will be accessed. DC-Osaka/DNS 172.12.12.0/24 DC-Hakata/DNS
172.168.1.2 172.24.35.0/24 211.111.1.30
Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of
the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after
the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired. SSO-Tokyo SSO-Tokyo
Site:Osaka 192.168.1.90 Site:Hakata 211.111.1.3
192.168.1.0/24 211.111.1.0/24

F-2-375

2-245
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
2-246
1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories. ■■Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active
with the device linked with the LDAP Server on the network in an LDAP environment.
Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings (upon device settings or changes to NW
settings, etc.). Device LDAP Server
[Site subnet list]
Site: Tokyo: = 172.24.12.0/24, 172.24.35.0/24 Local user
Site: Osaka: = 192.168.1.0/24
Site: Hakata: = 211.111.1.0/24
As a result, since SSO-Tokyo is 172.24.12.80, the subnet is 172.24.12.0/24, and is judged
as belonging to site Tokyo.
2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set Remote user
in the device.
F-2-376
[Active Directory] LDAP server authentication can be used for devices that support MEAP User Preference
172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30 Service (MEAP Specification Ver.56) and MEAP Application Setting Information Management
3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are (MEAP Specification Ver.57).
172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2. As for models that do not support MEAP User Preference Service and MEAP Application
Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2. Setting Information Management , [LDAP Server] cannot be selected as the type of the
Therefore, this one will be accessed. authentication server on the SSO-H Configuration page. Moreover, it is not possible to access
4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2, the LDAP Server Management screen and the Add Server screen.
will be accessed.
5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the Simple bind (a method where the password is not encrypted) is used as the bind
order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is (authentication) between SSO-H and LDAP server. It is therefore strongly recommended to
an optional operation. always use SSL connection from a security standpoint.
As for the version of LDAP, only Ver.3 is supported.
Logging into other domains at multi-domain
At multi-domain, if another domain is logged into, based on the site/ subnet information ON/OFF of SSL connection can be changed on the LDAP Server Management page.
retrieved in the home domain, the Active Directories of the login destination domain/ KDC The time-out value of connection is 60 seconds.
address list are computed. In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other In the case of using LDAP server authentication, the characters entered as the user name are
domains are outside of the site access range, and only the domain controller within the site not case-sensitive, but the characters entered as the password are case-sensitive.
is programmed for access, an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site In the case of SSO-H, authentication is not allowed when the user name includes "* (asterisk)".
information is incorrect. If authentication is performed with "* (asterisk)" used in the user name, an authentication error
occurs.

2-246
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
2-247
■■Server authentication and local device authentication 2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click
[SWITCH] button for the login service to be used.
It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication" function and
the "local device authentication" function.
It is possible to use server authentication to authenticate the users registered on the
authentication server under normal conditions and use local device authentication when a
user who cannot be added to the authentication server needs to be temporarily authenticated.
If a trouble occurs in the authentication server, local device authentication can be used as an
emergency measure until recovery from the trouble.

Server authentication
Local user Localローカルデバイス認証
device authentication

F-2-379
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the
Remote user
device.

F-2-377

■■Steps to Change Login Services

1) Click [ Enhanced System Application Management] on [System Management ].

F-2-380

F-2-378

2-247
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-248

CAUTION:
■■Login Service Installation Procedure
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS Follow the procedure show below to install login services.
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login 1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
method. Management].

F-2-381
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication. F-2-382
2) Click the [Browse] button, and specify the enhanced system application file and license file.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.

F-2-383

2-248
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
 2 Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
2-249
3) Click [ Install] button. ■■Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services.
In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status).
Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped.

1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].

F-2-384

F-2-385
2) Click the [Uninstall] button of the login service you want to uninstall.

F-2-386

2-249
2
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
 2 Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
2-250
System Application Management Note:
If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list
This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS.
of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.
There are two login methods: one is "password authentication" where you enter the password
for SMS on the SMS login screen and log in, and the other is "RLS authentication" where you
do not use the SMS login screen but enter the user ID and password on the RLS (Remote
Login Service) screen for authentication.

F-2-388
■■Password authentication
Enter the password on the SMS login screen for authentication. Only one password can be Note:
set for SMS. If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system
The login procedure is shown below. administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the
system administrator. Note that there is no special password for service.

1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The URL
is as follows.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/

Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen
was made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when
accessing with URL (non-SSL) before.

2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is “MeapSmsLogin.” (The password is case-sensitive.)

F-2-389

F-2-387

2-250
2
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
 2 Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
2-251
■■RLS Authentication Note:
Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for Only the following users may us SMS via RLS.
• For local device authentication, users with Administrator or Device Admin authority.
authentication in the RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name • In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon
and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication. Peripheral Admins) specified as the device administrator on the SSO-H Configuration
The login procedures are as follows. screen.

1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls/

Note:
• To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.

F-2-391

F-2-390

Note:
• When the device authentication method used is server authentication, enter the user
name, password and login destination registered with authentication server and then click
‘Log In’.
• If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name,
password and login destination registered in the device and click ‘Log In’ button.
The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are
case sensitive.
• User Name: Administrator
• Password: password

2-251
2
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
 2 Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
2-252

Note: CAUTION:
• SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI.
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to
gain access to SMS. authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
When only the password authentication is enabled, the password authentication screen is method.
shown.
When only the RLS authentication is enabled, no further authentication is needed to
access SMS. This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote
UI.

F-2-393
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.

F-2-392

2-252
2
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
 2 Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-253
Setting the method to login to SMS ●● Setting for login by Password Authentication
The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.
■■Outline
The method to log into SMS can be specified by one of the following methods. 1) Access SMS login screen by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network
• If you want to change the password authentication settings: Use RLS authentication as the MEAP device.
to log in, and change the settings. URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
• If you want to change the RLS authentication settings: Use password authentication Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
to log in, and change the settings.
The following table shows the start/stop combinations of the two login methods. 2) Enter the user name and the password of the user registered as an administrator, select
the login destination, and then click the [Log In] button.
Combination of Login Methods
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)
Start RLS Authentication Stop RLS Authentication
Start Password Authentication Login available with either method Login available only with
Stop Password Authentication Login available only with RLS Setting unavailable
Authentication
T-2-147

CAUTION:
If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons.
• Authentication server is down
• Network problem, no communication with authentication server
In the event of either of these cases, try the following. F-2-394
3) Select [System Application Management]
1. If local device authentication is active, try logging in with local device
authentication.
2. If only server authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device
service mode.
After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and
you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS,
set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP
safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log
into SMS with password authentication.

F-2-395

2-253
2
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-254
4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password ●● Setting for login by RLS Authentication
Authentication) to check if the status is changed. The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.

1) Access the SMS login screen using the normal method (password authentication). The
URL is shown below.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls

2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is "MeapSmsLogin". (Case sensitive)

Login screen by Password Authentication

F-2-396
5) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly.
When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start], another password authentication login
screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after
clicking [Start] to change the status to [Stop], the user is automatically redirected to RLS
authentication screen.

Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen

F-2-398
3) Select [System Application Management] on System Management menu.

F-2-397
F-2-399

2-254
2
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-255
4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote
CAUTION:
Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.

F-2-400 F-2-402

5) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window. This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
When RLS authentication is set to [Start], another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [Stop], the user will be redirected to the Authentication.
password authentication screen. When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen

F-2-401

2-255
2
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
2-256
■■Initial Display Languages of SMS MEAP Application System Information
SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the
■■Outline
drop down list on a login page.
The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting. You can check the device's platform information and the MEAP application's system
information.
Start

Refer to the value of ■■Checking the System Information

Logged in by RLS Yes portalLang stored in
authentication. Cookie. System information that can be checked from the screen
• MEAP Specifications version (MEAP Spec Ver)
No Remote UI display English or Japanese • MEAP Contents version
setup language
Refer to the setting of the • Java Virtual Machine version
Accept-Language header, • System application information
which a browser sends out. Except English or Japanese
Language English or Japanese • The name of the installed system application
priority setting of a • The installation date of the installed system application
browser
Refer to the setting of a language Except English or Japanese
• Application ID of the installed system application
displaying in registration/initial • The status of the installed system application
setting [Additional Function].
Display setting English or Japanese
of a device
The checking procedure is shown below.
Except English or Japanese

Display in English. Display in the

language configured. 1) Log in to SMS.
F-2-403
2) Select [System Management] > [System Information] on System Management menu.

●● When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication)

It is referred in order of the language priority (setting of the Accept-Language header which a
browser sends out) and the display-language setting in the "user mode". When the language
setup is other than English or Japanese, it is displayed in English.

●● When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service

Authentication).
Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie)
selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese,
Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service
(Password Authentication) mentioned above.
F-2-404

2-256
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
2-257
■■Display of System Information Details ■■Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information MEAP system information can be printed out with device for confirmation.
all at the same time: platform information, system application information, information on the
installed MEAP applications, etc. Note:
The system information of the MEAP application that you checked in the previous
section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP application that is
1) Log in to SMS. output.
2) Select [System Info] on System Management menu.
3) Click [Display Details] button.
Follow the steps below when confirming information:

1) Select [ Settings/ Registration] > [ Management Settings] > [ License/ Other] > [MEAP
Settings] > [ Print System Information] .

Note:
When System Manager ID and PIN are set, go to Top screen and log in as System
Manager to continue jobs.

2) Press[ Yes] button.

F-2-405
4) System information of each application (including system applications) is shown in an
additional window. Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as
text information. This function is useful to check status information of each application.

F-2-407

Note:
MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However, the
information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling devices
without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).

F-2-406

2-257
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
2-258
■■Content of MEAP system information MEAP Application Information
Application System Information
■■Outline
Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP
Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5 You can check the MEAP application installed on the device.
Application Version: 1.0.0 The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen.
Status: Resolved
Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003
Vendor : Canon Inc. Application Information
License Status : Installed • Application Name
Maximum Memory Usage : 1024
• Version
Registered Service :
• Application ID
• Installed on
item content • Description
Application Name It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application • Manufacturer
program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application ID/System Application ID (application-id) items which are declared on the declaration
• Resources Used (Storage, Memory, Threads, Sockets, File Descriptors)
Application Name statement in the application program are printed.
Application Version It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement License Information
within the application program.
• Status
Status It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically,
Installed: the application has been installed. • Serial Number
Active: the application is being in use. • Expires after
Resolved: the application is at rest. • Type of Counter
Installed On It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name
(bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program. ■■Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
License Status It indicates the status of the license; specifically,
None: no license is needed. 1) Log in to SMS.
Not Installed: no license has been installed. 2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Information] on System Management
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed.
menu.
Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of
the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Counter Value It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Maximum Memory It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is
Usage the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the
application program, and is expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the
MEAP framework.Some services may not have printable data.
T-2-148

F-2-408

2-258
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
 2 Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
2-259
3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the
Check License
information of the target application.
■■Outline
You can check the contents of the license file.

■■Procedure to Check the License File

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Check License] on System Management menu.

F-2-409

F-2-410
3) Click the [Browse..] button, specify a license file, and click the [Check] button.

F-2-411

2-259
2
Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
2-260
Changing SMS Login Password MEAP Application Setting Information Management
■■Outline and Log Management
You can change the password for logging into SMS. ■■Outline
If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default
The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log
value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"
Management page provide menu related to "MEAP Application Configuration Service" for
in this chapter.
managing MEAP application setting information and menu related to "MEAP Application Log
Service" for managing log information respectively.
■■Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Chage Password] on System Management menu.

F-2-414

●● MEAP Application Configuration Service

This service is used to manage the MEAP application setting information. It has functions
such as saving setting information to the MEAP area. Ver 57 of MEAP Specifications supports
F-2-412
this service.
3) Enter the current password and a new password, and then click the [Change] button.

●● MEAP Application Log Service

This service is used to collect MEAP application logs (debug logs and authentication logs).
Ver 58 of MEAP Specifications supports this service.
The collected logs can be downloaded or deleted in user mode.
The settings such as the log level to be saved cannot be made from SMS.
These settings depend on the MEAP application. For detailed information, refer to the manual
F-2-413
for the application.

Note:
The [Reset] button on the [Change Password] screen is used to clear the value entered
in the text field. It is not a button for changing the SMS login password back to the
default value.

2-260
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
2-261
■■Advantages Obtained When Using the Services ■■MEAP Application Setting Information Management
By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively Application Setting Information Management can be deleted. The procedure is shown below.
perform data management tasks.
1) Log in to SMS.
●● Devices and MEAP applications which do not support new functions 2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] on
System Management menu.
App1 App2
Dedicated management tool Dedicated management tool

Setting and reference Setting and reference

App1 App2
Device

Setting and reference Setting and reference

Config data Pref data Log data Config data Pref data Log data
(App1 format) (App1 format) (App1 format) (App2 format) (App2 format) (App2 format)

F-2-415
As for devices and MEAP applications that do not support the service, the setting information
F-2-417
and log data are managed on an application-by-application basis.
3) Select an application you want to delete, and click the [Delete] button.

●● Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions

General-purpose management tool

Setting and reference

App1 App2
Device

Configuration Preference Log Platform

management service management service management service

Config data Preference data Log data

(common format) (common format) (common format) F-2-418

F-2-416 Note:
As for devices and MEAP applications that support the service, information can be collectively If a MEAP application that contains setting data which can be shared (not dedicated
managed. to the application) is installed, the application name [Shared Setting Information of
Applications] is displayed.

2-261
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
 2 Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
2-262
■■MEAP Application Log Management 4) To download the logs
The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file.
The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted. The procedure is shown below.

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Log Management] on System
Management menu.

F-2-421
5) To delete the logs
The confirmation screen will appear to prompt you to delete the logs. Click the [Yes] button
to delete the logs.

F-2-422

F-2-419
3) Select [Download Application Logs] or [Delete Application Logs].

F-2-420

2-262
2
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
 2 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
2-263
Maintenance ●● Backup Item Automatically Copied
The following data are backed up using SST:
■■Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.
• MEAP applications
Backup Data Using SST
• Setup data generated by MEAP applications (Note that image data stored in BOX will not
●● Outline be saved for MEAP applications using BOX function)
When replacing or formatting the HDD, the data in the MEAP application area needs to be • User information data registered for local device authentication in SSO-H
temporarily saved to your PC. • SMS password
This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and
recovering the backup data. CAUTION:
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
In the case of MEAP-installed devices, the application is license-managed, so the application using SST to recovery of the data.
needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing or formatting the HDD.
In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and
configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens
on the service technician.

The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup
function of SST (Service Support Tool).
This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician.
Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be
recovered only when the device has the same serial number.

CAUTION: F-2-423

• You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to decrypt encrypted
has been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to decrypt
readings and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of the data.
failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation. It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
• Do not disable the license during the period from backup using SST to restoration of recovered using SST.
data. If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
It is not necessary to reinstall the license file when restoring the backup data. SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.

2-263
2
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
 2 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-264
●● Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices ■■Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application. Therefore the
1) Switching Login Service / Backup of Login User Information
following items can be also backed up (stored as Meapbackup.bin).
If SSO-H is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing
• Setting items of each menu in the main menu ( Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and
up the user information. Although SST will back up local device user information, it is
Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, ).
recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information
• Favorite settings
backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H
• Default settings
login page opens with the URL "https://<device IP address>:8443/sso/").
• Settings of option shortcuts
• Previous settings CAUTION:
• Settings of quick menu
• If a HDD of a system that uses SSO-H is formatted without changing the login
• Button size information service to the default authentication, the error message “The login service must be
• Wallpaper settings set again with SMS” appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to
• Quick menu button information restart the system after formatting.
• Restrict quick menu use • If this problem occurs, change the login service to SSO-H with SMS. If you cannot
access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system
●●Requirements for Backup Using the SST with FIXIP mode -hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on.
The IP address “172.16.1.100” will be automatically assigned for the device. Then
The following conditions must be met for use of the function:
log in to SMS specifying the address.

1) Device Firmware Version

Device Firmware Version for SST (Ver4.2x)
2) Starting the device in Download Mode
Boot ROM System SST Press [2] and [8] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series Boot ROM is not Already supported The version supporting switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled
equipped. since the 1st the corresponding
version. devices.
only in Download Mode.

imageRUNNER ADVANCE Already supported Already supported The version supporting

series other than iR-ADV since the 1st since the 1st the corresponding 3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST
C2030/C2020 series version. version. devices. Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to
T-2-149 start SST on the PC.
2) SST Version
Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed,
upgrade the SST.

3) Space for backup

To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at
maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up.

2-264
2
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
 2 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-265
4) Connecting the device using SST 6) Saving backup data
When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button. Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK]
to save the backup data on the PC.

F-2-426
When the file is successfully saved, click [OK] button, and then click [Return to Menu]
button.

F-2-424
5) Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC (uploading)
Click [Upload Data] button of SST and select “Meapback.bin” as the item to be backed up
to click [ Start ] button.

F-2-427

F-2-425

2-265
2
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
 2 Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-266

CAUTION:
■■Procedures to Restore Backup Data
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup 1) Connecting to the device
using SST to recovery of the data. Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.

2) Restoring backup file

Click [Download Data] button and select the data backed up in the previous step (Meapback.
bin) to click [Start Restoring Data]. Note that the data backed up in a different version
cannot be restored.

F-2-428

When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to decrypt encrypted
F-2-429
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to decrypt
3) Transferring Data
the data.
When the data is successfully transferred, click the [OK] button shown on the screen. To
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
continue other jobs, click [Return to Menu] button.
recovered using SST.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.

F-2-430
4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that
MEAP applications are surely restored.

5) Restore the backup data and setting saved. Note that the user information of the local
device is included in the backup data, thus does not need to be restored.

2-266
2
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Outline
2-267
Formatting and Replacing the HDD ●● Formatting the HDD
Procedure to format the hard disk
■■Outline Follow the following procedure to format the HDD.
If the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the system (excluding the
MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced. 1) Connecting to the device
When the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the MEAP application stored in it will be Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of "Procedure for backing up
lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to “Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST".
the MEAP application area using SST” if possible. If a backup cannot be made, the MEAP
application and the license files need to be reinstalled. 2) Formatting the HDD
As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the Select “Format HDD” from SST menu to format the HDD.
conventional counter.
Note:
HDD can be formatted also by starting Download mode using the USB memory and
If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the executing formatting from the displayed menu.
expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP
application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a
general user.
In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in
charge of support of a sales company.
When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to
provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed.

In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the
applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you
to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial
number of the device in question.

Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.

2-267
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Outline
2-268
●● HDD replacement procedure ●● If the MEAP application area can be backed up
Outline If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD,
The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
or not.
1) Preparation for replacement
If the MEAP application area cannot be backed up Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up
If the HDD does not function correctly due to failure or for other reason, the MEAP application the MEAP application area using SST.
area cannot be backed up. It is therefore necessary to reinstall the application after replacing
the HDD. The procedure is shown below. 2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
1) Preparation for replacement
Copy a set of license files for reinstalling the MEAP application (special licenses and 3) Formatting HDD
reusable licenses) to a laptop for service operation. Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
Register a set of system files of a target product to SST. Or, prepare USB thumb drive of
the System file transfer settlement. 4) Restorering the backup file
Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive. 5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.

4) Reinstalling the MEAP application

When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the
user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation.
Installation method is the same as normal installation.

5) Importing user information

As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.

Note:
When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to
reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter
will not be released and the message “The number of applications that can be installed
has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.”
is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you
want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled
before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.

2-268
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Outline
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2-269
■■MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) 3) Press or button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
●● Outline
Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It
will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default
files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.

When you have made changes and restart the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF'
in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut
down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring
the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a
conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so
that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause F-2-432
the trouble. 4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [OK]
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid; button.
otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change
the login service as necessary.

●● Starting in Safe Mode

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.

F-2-433
5) Check that the notation ‘MPSF’ has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
restart the device.

F-2-431

F-2-434

2-269
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2-270
●● How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode
Note:
If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
bar of the browser. 2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.

An example of the title bar displayed at the time of startup in MEAP SAFE mode
Service Management Service : <Device Name>:<Product Name>: Safe Mode

F-2-435

CAUTION: F-2-437

If the device has been started in MEAP SAFE mode, all the MEAP applications stop 3) Press or button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
and the status becomes "Installed". [MEAPSAFE] button.
This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is canceled and the
device is started again in normal mode. It is therefore necessary to access SMS after
normal startup and start the MEAP application.

F-2-438

F-2-436

2-270
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
2-271
4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, press [OK] ■■Collection of MEAP Console Logs
button.
●● Overview
When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases.
The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal
software and service mode.

●● What to Prepare
• PC connected with the same network as the device
• Commercially available terminal software

Note:
In the procedure shown in this manual, "Tera Term Pro" and "Hyper Terminal" are used
F-2-439 as the terminal software.
5) Start service mode again after rebooting the device, and check that the displayed setting
value has changed to "0" and that [MPSF] is no longer displayed at the upper left of the
screen. ●● Work Procedure
Device Setting Procedure
1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1.
2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ] buttons.

F-2-440

F-2-441

2-271
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
2-272
3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button. PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used)
1) Install the terminal software on the PC.
2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button.

F-2-442
4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value
F-2-445
input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.
Connection : Select [TCP/IP] (Default)
Host : Device Host Name or IP Address
Service : Select "Telnet"
TCP port# : Enter 19001

3) The connection window will open. Select [Terminal…] from the [Setup] menu.

F-2-443
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.

F-2-446

F-2-444

2-272
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
2-273
4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the 6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save
"OK" button. destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save] button.

F-2-447

Terminal ID : VT100
F-2-449
New-line Receive : LF
7) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.

5) Select [Log...] from the [File] menu.

F-2-450
8) Click the [Close] button in the log dialog.

F-2-448

F-2-451

Note:
To suspend log collection, click the [Pause] button.

2-273
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
2-274
9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
Note:
While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu.

Comment to Log... :
You can add a comment to the log being collected. The added comment is reflected in
the log file.

F-2-455

Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.

CAUTION:
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
F-2-452
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
Show Log dialog... :
> 0, and restart the device).
The logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed.

F-2-453
Change directory... :
The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed.

F-2-454

2-274
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
2-275
PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used) 4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen.
1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that
appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.

F-2-459
5) The [Console Properties] dialog will appear. Select the [Settings] tab, select [VT100] for
[Emulation], and then click the [OK] button.

F-2-456
2) Set [TCP/IP(Winsock)] for [Connect using].
F-2-460
6) Return to the Hyper Terminal window, and select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] from the
menu.

F-2-457 F-2-461
3) Enter the IP address of the target device in [Host address], and enter "19001" (fixed) in [Port 7) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Specify the save
number]. destination.

F-2-462

F-2-458

2-275
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
2-276
8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect. ■■Using USB Devices
●● USB Driver
Two types of USB drivers
While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively
for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as “MEAP driver”), not only MEAP driver but
also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as “system driver”) can be used in iR-ADV
series.
System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the
other driver cannot be used.

USB driver setting (iR-ADV series):

System driver is active by default in iR-ADV series.
F-2-463
The driver can be changed in Settings/Registration (user mode).
9) Select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] > [Stop] from the menu. Usually, It is not necessary to change the setting because it is specified in the MEAP
application side.
Only in the case of a special MEAP application, it is necessary to change the USB driver
setting.
For details, refer to specifications of MEAP application side.

F-2-464
10) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.

F-2-465

Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.

F-2-466

CAUTION: Note:
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled The [Use USB Host] menu on the screen is hidden at the time of shipment.
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL] To display this menu, start [SERVICE MODE] in level 2, and then change the value of
[COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [USBH-DSP] from ‘0’ to ‘1’.
> 0, and restart the device).

2-276
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
2-277
Operating mode Software keyboard
Conventional USB System driver Note:
settings [Use MEAP application
keyboard enabled MEAP supported MEAP You can display/check the used driver setting at “USB device report print” described
driver as USB input (System Driver/ below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from
application application
device] MEAP Driver) API.
ON Can use USB keyboard. Cannot use USB Cannot use USB
* MEAP driver Can work only on the keyboards. (Device keyboards.
(conventional conventional applications cannot be detected.)
compatibility mode) that support the MEAP Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)
application driver. plugged to device
OFF (*default) Cannot use USB Can use USB Can use USB
When the HID keyboard is MEAP application
* Native driver keyboards. (Device cannot keyboards. keyboards. Via software
be detected.) keyboards only. installed > USB Settings:
Application
T-2-150
Registration [Use MEAP Driver for USB
System System driver with VID/
status of Input Device] Native
driver not supported/ PID
USB device When the Mass Storage is application
Note: supported conventional declared
When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted. A installed > USB Settings:
application application in Manifest
[Use MEAP Driver for
for x
External USB Device]
Not OFF YES YES NO
Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference registration)
registered ON NO NO YES
If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP Registered OFF NO NO YES YES
application driver cannot use the USB input device. ON NO NO YES YES
Therefore, for the USB drivers used by USB devices/MEAP applications, there is setting T-2-151
YES: USB device available NO: USB device not available
function (MEAP driver preference registration) to give priority to the MEAP driver.
If you register the ID of the USB device by using this function, the USB device can use the
Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass
MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings.
Storage) plugged to device

Using this function requires the conditions below: Setting to use MEAP application
Registration
MEAP driver System System driver Application
• Supported MEAP SpecVer: 26 status of USB Native
(Additional driver not supported with VID/PID
• Describe the idVendeor(VID) and idProdutc(PID) of USB device in the manifest or activate/ USB device device application
Functions supported / conventional declared in
deactivate the VID and PID by calling API from MEAP applications. B
mode) application application Manifest for B
Registered Not used B YES YES NO
The driver setting that is used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timing. (Native driver to C YES YES NO
When registering from a manifest file. be used)
To be used B NO NO YES
• The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is
restarted. C NO NO YES
Not Not used B NO NO YES YES
• The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is
registered (Native driver to C YES YES NO NO
restarted. be used)
To be used B NO NO YES YES
C NO NO YES YES
T-2-152
YES: USB device available NO: USB device not available

2-277
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
2-278
Specifications for the use of USB keyboards ●● Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration
Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting
control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard. information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
• When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB
keyboard (in-line entry not possible). Steps to initialize preference use registration
• When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be 1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 1.
remembered. 2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > buttons.
• The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can
be entered from the software keyboard.
• Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will
not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).
• Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software
keyboard or numeric keys.
• Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/
connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when
in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation
guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep.
• When USB device is attached to device, devices do not shift to deep sleep mode.
• Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/
F-2-467
Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the
3) Press or button for several times until [USBM-CLR] is shown on the screen.
software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted
Press [USBM-CLR] button.
is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is
guaranteed.)

Note:
The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit
functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards,
[Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial
settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF).
Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings.
ON: when using MEAP application keyboard
OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)

F-2-468

2-278
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
2-279
4) Press [OK] button to restart this device. 3) Press or button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT]
button.

F-2-471
4) When pressing [OK] button, [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field.

F-2-469

●● USB Device report print

To check the vendor IDs (idVendor) and the product IDs (idProduct) registered in this device
by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications, output the USB Device repot
report print.

Steps to output the USB Device report print

1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 1.
2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [MISC-P] > buttons.

F-2-472
5) When [OK] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the
print.

F-2-470

F-2-473

2-279
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
2-280
Example of output result C : Configure
The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is
******************************** active.
*** USB Device report print ***
********************************
I : Interface
The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle
USB device information
can be recognized.
T: Bus=01 Lev=02 Prnt=03 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0
D: Ver=2.00 Cls=00(>ifc) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1 The value and the content of Driver are as follows.
P: Vendor=066f ProdID=4210 Rev=10.02 Labeling Content
S: Manifacturer=SigmaTel, Inc. usbhid It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device
S: Product=STIr42xx connected.
S: SerialNumber=0002F0F7261287A5 usb-storage It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are
C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=100mA connected.
I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=fe(app.) Sub=02 Prot=00 Driver=irda-usb irda-usb IrDA It is displayed when the dongle is connected.
E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
hub It is displayed when HUB is connected.
E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
gpusb It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned
F-2-474 to the input device connected.
USB device information Content gpusbex It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are
Display the information of the USB device, which the device recognized. preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and
the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.
If not displayed, there may be some fault occurred.
T-2-153
Some of standard optional devices are not displayed on a report.
E:Endpoint
The details of each item are as follows.
The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown.

T : Topology
Right or wrong of report output
Internal hierarchical structure, which a USB device is connected, is shown. The number of
a connected bus, the hierarchical structure and connection speed can be indicated. Connecting device User installation Report printing
HID Available Yes
D : Device Storage Available Yes
Information of USB devices is shown. FAX Not available No
USB Device Port IrDA Not available Yes
P : Product Multimedia Card Reader Not available Yes
Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized IC Card Reader Not available Yes
here.
Image Data Analyzer Board-A1 Not available No
Hub Internal Hub* Not available No
S : String
External Hub Available Yes
The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a T-2-154
* USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction
product name can be recognized here.

2-280
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Using USB Devices
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function
2-281
The content of MEAP preferred device information ■■Integrated Authentication Function
Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with
MEAP application. ●● Sharing the Authentication Information
By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the Separately managing the authentication information at login and the authentication
status using a specific USB device. information for MEAP applications creates inconveniences such as that the authentication
process is executed many times.
AppID : Application ID In order to solve this problem, the device has an integrated authentication function. This
VID : Vendor ID function allows authentication information to be shared between MEAP applications in a
PID : Product ID MEAP environment.
The supported version of MEAP Specifications is Ver.59, which needs to be supported by
Note: both the device and the MEAP application in order to use this function.
By starting, stopping or uninstalling a MEAP application, the driver settings of the There are 2 types of authentication information that can be shared: Volatile Credential whose
USB device may be changed. If the device needs to be restarted following this setting
registered information is discarded at the time of logout or shutdown of the device and
change, a message prompting the user to restart the device is displayed.
Persistent Credential whose registered information is not discarded at the time of logout.

●● Volatile Credential
Volatile Credential is used in cases where the authentication information is shared between
applications which use the same security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by the login application, therefore the applications which
access the security domain that was used for authentication by the login application can use
the credential.

●● Persistent Credential
Persistent Credential is used to help entry of authentication information when accessing a
different security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by general MEAP applications, and the authentication
information can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later.

F-2-475

2-281
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function
2-282
●● Comparison of Functions Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button.

Volatile Credential Persistent Credential

Registered Character strings and arbitrary Character strings only User ID/Password/
information Java objects Domain/Arbitrary character strings
Lifetime Registration At login (the login application), and At any timing of registration by an
at any timing of registration by an application
application
Deletion Can be used until logout/shutdown. Can be used until deletion by the
application or management tool.
Encryption of Not supported Data retained on the HDD is encrypted.
credential data
Store (Save) to Memory in the device HDD in the device
T-2-155

●● Disabling the Integrated Authentication Function

If you do not want Volatile Credential to be used from a security standpoint, the function can
be disabled. F-2-477

The function can be disabled from remote UI or service mode. • [Disable integrated authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled
Persistent Credential cannot be disabled. regardless of the authentication method.
On the setting screen of remote UI, the function can be disabled on a protocol-by-protocol • [Disable integrated authentication using credentials for local device authentication]: The
basis. integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of local device authentication.
• [Disable integrated authentication using credentials for LDAP server authentication]:
Remote UI The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of LDAP server
You can access the setting screen on remote UI for disabling integrated authentication as authentication.
shown below.
Service mode
The location of the service mode setting for disabling integrated authentication:
Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled

F-2-476 F-2-478

2-282
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Integrated Authentication Function
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
2-283
■■Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours"
A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay
Main Power] Setting execution".
If some of the MEAP applications are running on the device, the following problems will occur. If execution is delayed for some reason, the delay time is ignored.
Problem: If 24 hours have passed since the last execution of the task, the task is executed
only once.
●● The [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] setting cannot be
=> The task may be executed at a timing other than the time the user expects it to be
enabled. executed.
If a MEAP application that restricts the device from shifting to deep sleep mode is running,
even when the setting of [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), the device 31/Dec 1/Jan 2/Jan 3/Jan 4/Jan 5/Jan

starts normally instead of quick startup.

In that case, it does not affect the behavior of the MEAP application.
Starting

●● Changes made in the settings of a MEAP application are not

Stopped
reflected. (Quick startup standby)

If the startup setting [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), even when the The timing the task is expected to be executed
Main Power Supply Switch of the machine is turned OFF, a shutdown process is not executed The timing the task was actually executed

internally. F-2-479

Therefore, in the case of a MEAP application where changes in settings are enabled when In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task at 00:00 every day"
the device is restarted, changes in settings are not reflected just by changing the settings. A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-rate
Follow either of the restart procedures shown below to enable the changes made in the execution".
settings. If execution was delayed for some reason, two or more tasks are continuously executed to
• Execute restart from remote UI. "make up for the delay".
• Turn OFF the Main Switch, and then turn it ON within 20 seconds. Problem: The tasks of Jan. 1, Jan. 2, and Jan. 3 are executed after quick startup.

●● After recovery from quick startup, MEAP applications do not work 31/Dec 1/Jan 2/Jan 3/Jan 4/Jan 5/Jan

properly.
MEAP applications that are scheduled to execute processes at specified times may not work
Starting
properly after recovery from quick restart.
Unexpected problems such as that the application executes a task at an unexpected timing
Stopped
may occur. (Quick startup standby)
Problems may occur in the following two cases.
The timing the task is expected to be executed
The timing the task was actually executed
F-2-480

2-283
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
2-284
■■Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Note :
Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H
Unable to Be Logged in do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID
Management, login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
●● Overview • System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management
Department ID Management and SSO-H (Local Device Authentication) manage user Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set.
information separately. Therefore, in order to allow coexistence of Department ID • Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H.
Management and SSO-H, it is necessary that the information of SSO-H and the information
of Department ID Management are the same.
The user information of SSO-H does not coincide with the user information of Department ID
Management in the following cases:
• The user information of SSO-H was different from that of Department ID Management
SSO-H user management information
(1) when Department ID Management was enabled.
User name Password Role Dept. ID Password
Administrator Password Administrator 7654321 7654321 Department ID Management was enabled before changing the department ID and
CANONTARO pass Administrator 1111 1111
password registered in SSO-H to match with the information of Department ID

Password : 1111
ID : 1111
User : CANONTARO CMJTARO Makuhari Administrator 2222 2222
(2)Password : pass Management.
Privilege (3) SSO-H user management information Dept. ID Management info
Authentication elevation User name Password Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID Password
(6) Administrator Password Administrator 7654321 7654321 1111 1111
(5) CANONTARO pass Administrator 1234 1234
Mismatch 2222 2222
SSO-H
CMJTARO Makuhari Administrator 5678 5678 3333 3333

Dept. ID Management
Dept. ID Management Info (4) F-2-482
Dept. ID Password • Only one of information was updated, resulting in mismatch.
O K 7654321 7654321 Verification
1111 1111 Only the department ID and password registered in SSO-H or those in Department ID
2222 2222 Management were changed.
SSO-H user management information Dept. ID Management info
User name Password Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID Password
F-2-481
1) The user enters the ID and password of SSO-H to a device where both SSO-H and
Administrator Password Administrator 7654321 7654321
Match 7654321 7654321
CANONTARO pass Administrator 1234 1234 1234 1234
Department ID Management are enabled. CMJTARO Makuhari Administrator 5678 5678 5678 5678

2) SSO-H checks the entered ID and password with the SSO-H user information table. Only the SSO-H user
information was updated
3) SSO-H sends the department ID and password which correspond to the entered ID and
SSO-H user management information Dept. ID Management info
password to the department ID management function. USer name Password Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID Password
4) The department ID management function checks the department ID and password sent Administrator Password Administrator 1234567 1234567
Mismatch
7654321 7654321
CANONTARO pass Administrator 9999 9999 1234 1234
from SSO-H with the user information table. CMJTARO Makuhari Administrator 8888 8888 5678 5678
5) The user is elevated to the corresponding privilege.
6) The user is authenticated. F-2-483

If the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H do not
coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management,
the authentication ends in failure and the user can no longer log in to the device.

2-284
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
2-285
• Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch. Procedure
Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function", 1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
resulting in mismatch. (The SSO-H user information cannot be changed in Import All Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Function.) Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)

Device A Dept. ID Management Info

Dept. ID Password
1111 1111
2222 2222
3333 3333

Device B
Import All Function (Only the Department
ID Management information was updated.)

SSO-H user management information Dept. ID Management Info

User name PAssword Role Dept. ID Password Dept. ID PAssword
Administrator Password Administrator 1234567 1234567 1111 1111
CANONTARO pass Administrator 9999 9999
Mismatch 2222 2222
CMJTARO Makuhari Administrator 8888 8888 3333 3333

F-2-484

●● Remedy
If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID/password,
perform the following remedy.
F-2-485
2) Restart the device.
Note :
Since the device can be logged in if all of the following conditions are satisfied, Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.
performing only the step 6 of this section can clear the mismatch of the department ID/ 3) Disable Depart ID Management.
password. In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]
• System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management
Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set. > [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
• Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H. Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department
ID Management].

F-2-486

2-285
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
 2 Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
2-286
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication. SSO-H user registration information edition screen:
Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management] (SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".) https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).

F-2-487
5) Restart the device.
Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.
F-2-488
SSO-H user registration information import screen:
6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H. (SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information]
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
Department ID Management.
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.

F-2-489

2-286
2
Technology > MEAP > Formatting and Replacing the HDD > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
 2 Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary
2-287
7) Enable Depart ID Management.
Reference material
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]
> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/ ■■Glossary
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID
Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Application A program unit to provide users with solutions.
Management].
Application ID An identifier assigned to each application.
A unique ID is assigned to each MEAP application.
Applet (Applet Type A MEAP application type created in Java.
Application) This type of applications show buttons on the touch panel display.
Code Sign Information to check if an application is genuine. An application marketed
in the normal procedure has a code sign assigned by LMS. MEAP platform
rejects applications without Canon code signs for being installed or
executed on the device.
CPCA Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object
(Common Peripheral model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or
Controlling modifying objects in the device.
Architecture)

F-2-490
CPCA Java CL CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a
(Class Library) device.
8) Check that the device can be logged in.
Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other
-Department ID authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled. Management turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID
and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control
panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
Device Specification ID allocated to each device type. This represents CPCA API specification
ID and the version number to use MFP generic functions or obtain information
including maximum allowable copies.
Esplet A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications do
(Esplet Type not show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined
Application) word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let]
derived from Applet/Service.
File Description An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a
program. A program descriptor includes an identifier and information such
F-2-491 as a file name and size, which helps OS to judge the file to be edited.
HID class HID stands for Human Interface Device, representing man-machine
interfaces of PC components and peripheral devices. HID class means
USB class classified as HID.
iR Native application The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy,
Universal Send and Mailbox.
ISV Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or
(Independent sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers
Software Vendor) application developer in this document.

2-287
2
Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary
 2 Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary
2-288
Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations
J2ME Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that
(Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular (MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network
Edition) phones and PDA. and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
J2RE A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files
(Java 2 Runtime language of Java2. This set includes Java virtual machine providing (*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
Environment) runtime environment for Java applications among others. Java applets do MEAP-enabled device imageRUNNER (iR) devices with built-in MEAP platform.
not require J2RE since these are executed on Web browsers using Java
runtime environment provided on browsers. However, standalone Java MFP Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one
applications require Java runtime environment such as J2RE for execution. (Multi Function function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
Runtime environments can be downloaded for free of charge from the Web Peripheral)
site of Sun Microsystems, the Java developer.
OSGi Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/".
Java A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A. (Open Service
Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking Gateway Initiative)
advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses
Portal Service The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has
Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java.
been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.
JavaScript A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A.,
Protocol A set of rules applied to data transmission procedures over network. Major
runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer.
communication protocols include:
Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as
• FTP: File Transfer Protocol. This is a communication protocol or
animated buttons and display of timetables.
protocolimplemented commands to provide file transfer between a host
Java VM JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine and clients over TCP/IP network.
(Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native • DHCP: An upward compatible protocol of BOOTP. This communication
instruction set. protocol allocates a dynamic IP address to each client machine upon
License Access A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires communication startup on TCP/IP network and collects the allocated IP
Number entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number address when communication is completed. The server allocates one of
of access numbers, to issue license access numbers multiple IP addresses and notifies the setup information to a client.
• BOOTP: A communication protocol to automatically load setup
Licensae File A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the information including IP address and a domain name from the server to a
license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with client on TCP/IP network.
the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application. • RARP: A communication protocol to request IP address information via
LMS The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled the network adaptor address (MAC address) of a client.
(License Management device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license access • IPP: A communication protocol to execute remote printing between the
System) numbers. print server and clients via Internet.
Login Service Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user • TCP/IP: A standard communication protocol required to access to
names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device Internet and other large-scale network.
- Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple Proxy Server Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a
Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On). user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored
Mass Storage class Mass Storage means a storage device with large capacity, generally in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access
secondary storage devices. Mass Storage class means USB class the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access
classified in the secondary storage device group. services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the
file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the
MEAP (Multifunction Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of
Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file
Platform) platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next
MEAP. request.
MEAP Contents Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device. Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without
this module cannot work on MEAP platform.

2-288
2
Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary
 2 Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
2-289
Terms & Acronyms Definitions and Explanations Option for exclusive individual measure
SDK The kit containing information and tools required for software development.
(Software ■■Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
Development Kit)
Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel.
Service A functional unit or an application program working on MEAP platform.
[Applications] are generally termed [Services] in Java world. This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel.
Servlet A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications is
(Servlet Type designed to show user interface on the Web browser. Default value
Application) 1: display
SMS The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle Setting range, item
(Service Management management.
0: hide 1: display
Service)
Socket A virtual interface of an application for network communication. A user
only needs to specify a socket as a unit of an address and a port from an ●● Setting Procedure
application. This establishes the network connection for data transmission, 1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 1.
eliminating complication related to detailed communication procedures.
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
SSO-H (Single Sign- Login service providing features of both local device authentication and
On H) domain authentication. The former is the method that device independently
authorizes users; whereas the latter is that device links to the domain
controller on the network in the Active Directory environment to authorize
users.
Thread A unit for program execution. A multi-task system allowing multiple
programs to run concurrently assigns a memory space and other resources
independently to each program, providing users with a feel as if only a
program is running. At least one thread is generated upon a program
generated.
URL The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For
(Uniform Resource instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [http://www.w3.org/default. html].
Locator) [http] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web
page on the Internet.
USB Abbreviation of Universal Serial Bus. This is the interface standard to link F-2-492
between information devices. 3) Press [UI-COPY] button.
USB system driver The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there
are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.
T-2-156

F-2-493

2-289
2
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
2-290
4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is ■■Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM
displayed), and press [OK] button.
screen (level 2)
In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/
JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there
will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.

Note:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
• As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed
by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
• As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because
there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]

F-2-494
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device. Default value
1: No activation of warning display

Setting range, item

0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen

●● Setting Procedure
1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 1.
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.

F-2-495

2-290
2
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
 2 Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
2-291
3) Press [ANIM-SW] button.

F-2-496
4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the
numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.

F-2-497
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.

2-291
2
Technology > MEAP > Option for exclusive individual measure > Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2)
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2-292

Embedded RDS ■■Features and benefits

E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing
Product Overview of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware
equipment.
■■Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the ■■Major Functions
host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine,
●● Service Call Button
information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
If a user touches service call button on the touch panel display when corrupt image, paper
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance
jams, or/ and other problem has occurred, E-RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW.
server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/
Moreover, E-RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System).

The following device information/ status can be monitored. ●● Service Browser

• Billing counts Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge, and is
• Parts counter used for referring to the FAQ contents which is connected to UGW.
• Firmware info In order to grasp on which devices the service browser is enabled, when the status of the
• Service call error log service browser is changed from disabled (0: OFF) to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser
• Jam log information to the UGW.
• Alarm log
• Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
●● Service mode menu Transmission
E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs
• When a specific alarm and service call error are detected
communication between this machine and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.
• When the setting is changed in service mode

Customer
Environment UGW The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service
This machine mode menu:
Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry
Internet
When the following alarm is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG No
Firewall HV-STS
Sales Company Alarm codes for transmission: CCD
0x060002,                     // Fixing
DPOT
0x060004 - 0x069999,  // Fixing
Administrator DENS
DNS Server Proxy Server 0x090005 - 0x099999,  // Dram
0x100006 - 0016, 0x100022 - 0099, FIXING
0x100101 - 9900,          // Development SENSOR
0x300001 - 0x309999   // High voltage MISC
The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system configuration
HT-C
F-2-498
HV-TR
P-PASCAL

2-292
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2-293
Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry Limitations
When the following service call error is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG No

Error codes for transmission:

HV-STS ■■Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
CCD
E000 - E00F,  // Fixing 1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.
DPOT
E020,              // Development ATR
DENS • When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E-RDS at power-
E060 - E06F   // High voltage
FIXING on
SENSOR • When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is
MISC
detected
HT-C
• When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an
HV-TR
P-PASCAL alarm or a service call error ended in failure
When a value is set to [COPIER - Adjust] COPIER Adjust Yes • If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being
subordinate’s Service mode menu. obtained after detection of an alarm or a service call error, the data being obtained is
(Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of
not sent.
setting)
When the first communication test is done. COPIER Display ANALOG Yes
2) If alarms/service call errors successively occur, and if the time of the host machine is
(For transmission process, 5 minutes after the HV-STS
execution) corrected or changed while the log is being sent, service mode menu data may not be
CCD
DPOT properly sent. It is because a Link No.* may be applied to the old log although it should be
DENS applied to the new log.
FIXING
* Link No.:
SENSOR
MISC
A common number for linking the service mode menu data with the alarm log/service
HT-C call log data to be sent
HV-TR After completion of log transmission, the service mode menu data is obtained, and is
P-PASCAL sent with this number attached.
Adjust
T-2-157
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
NOTE: service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)

4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or
when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.

2-293
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
2-294
Service cautions NOTE:
*The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result.
1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board, initialization of the E-RDS
If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits)
setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed. appears on the touch panel display.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.

2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
• Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443

• URL setting of UGW

[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR]
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010

3) If the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn

OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS : 0).

4) Communication tests can be conducted in user mode.* When conducting a communication

test in user mode, pay attention on the following points:
• During a communication test in user mode, do not take any actions such as pressing
a key. Actions are not accepted until the communication test is completed (actions are
ignored).
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or user mode,
do not conduct a communication test from the other. These operations are not
guaranteed.

2-294
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-295
E-RDS Setup (3) Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this
■■Confirmation and preparation in advance machine network related settings.
See Users’ Guide for detailed procedures.
To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
required.
CAUTION:
When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to reboot
(1) Advance confirmation
this machine.
Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.

(2) Advance preparations

The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system
administrator in advance.

Information item 1
IP address settings
• Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP
• Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set

Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
• Primary DNS server address
• Secondary DNS server address

Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
• Proxy server address
• Port No. for proxy server

Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
• User name and password required for proxy authentication

2-295
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-296
■■Steps to E-RDS settings (2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.

NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing E-RDS settings".

F-2-500

"OK!" is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized. When "NG!" is displayed, see the
section of "Troubleshooting" to execute the remedy, and then perform initialization of the
CA certificate again and check to see if the CA certificate is initialized.

F-2-499

3. Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot this machine.
• Installation of the CA certificate: Perform installation from SST or Remote UI.
• Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate
in the factory setting is automatically installed.

CAUTION:
After following procedure, the registered key and CA certificate are deleted, and only
the CA certificate installed at the time of shipment is registered.
It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance.
F-2-501
(3) Reboot this machine.
(1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 2.
CAUTION:
If a key and a CA certificate have been registered in order to use a function other than
E-RDS, it is necessary to register again from SST or Remote UI.

2-296
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
2-297
4. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
CAUTION:
5. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS].
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be
change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.

F-2-502

6. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.) 7. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK].

NOTE: NOTE:
This operation enables the communication function with UGW. This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.

F-2-503

F-2-504

2-297
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
2-298
If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the ■■Steps to Service Call button settings
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed.
●● Steps for settings to display the service call button
In order to use the "Service Call" button, follow the procedure shown below to display the
"Service Call" button.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALL-SW].

F-2-505

NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-
LOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.

F-2-506

3. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)

F-2-507

2-298
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
2-299
3. Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1
NOTE:
or 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the Monitoring
Service screen by touching the [Monitoring Service] button on the Check Counter
screen. NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.

F-2-509

●● Steps for settings of service call completion NOTE:

When the service technician completes the work for the service call, follow the instruction as In the current condition, touching the [OK] button completes the service call regardless
of whether 0 or 1 is set.
described below to execute the service call completion work.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALLCMP].

F-2-508

2-299
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
2-300
●● Steps for service call request 4. Select the request details and touch the [Request] button.
Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to
1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter UGW.
screen.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.

F-2-510
3. Touch the [New Request] button on the Service Call screen. F-2-512

5. If the service call request is successful, "The service call request has been sent."
is displayed. If "Could not send the service call request." appears, refer to the
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "The service call request has been sent." is displayed.

F-2-511

CAUTION:
When a service call has been already requested, another service call cannot be sent.
The previous service call needs to be canceled, or a service technician needs to F-2-513
perform processing for service call completion.

2-300
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
2-301
●● Steps for service call cancellation 4. "The request has been canceled." is displayed.
To cancel the service call, follow the instructions as described below.

1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter
screen.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.

F-2-516

F-2-514

3. Touch the [Cancel] button, and touch the [Yes] button in the check screen.

NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.

F-2-515

2-301
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2-302
■■Steps to Service Browser settings 3. Reboot this machine.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

4. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS].
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [BRWS-ACT] and then touch [OK].

NOTE:
When the status of the function is changed from disabled to enabled, E-RDS sends the
browser information to the UGW.

F-2-519

5. When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the
Service Mode screen.

F-2-517

If the connection is established with UGW successfully, "OK!" is displayed. When "NG!" is
displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection is established
with UGW.

F-2-520

NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled (BRWS-STS : 1), it cannot be disabled
(BRWS-STS : 0) again*. To disable service browsing, clear SRAM.
* The function is disabled (BRWS-STS: 2) by executing BRWS-ACT again.

F-2-518

2-302
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-303
■■Initializing E-RDS settings FAQ
It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the No.1
default value. Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!" case.
●● Initialization procedure 1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. halted.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK]. 2. Network cable is blocked off.
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.

No.2
Q: When does E-RDS send counter information to UGW? How many data is sent?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
side. The send time cannot be specified on the E-RDS side. Data is sent once every 16
hours.
The data size of counter information is approx. 285 KB.

No.3
Q: Will data which failed to be sent due to an error in communication with UGW be resent?
A: Data shown below will be resent.
• Jam log
F-2-521 • Service call log
• Alarm log
●● Setting values and data to be initialized • Service mode menu
The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized. The newest data is resent only when the settings are changed in service mode.
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS • Browser information
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR It is resent only when the web browser option is enabled.
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
Data is resent endlessly (after 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 minutes since the occurrence of
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG
communication error; once 30 minutes have passed, it is resent at 30-minute intervals) until it
is sent successfully. Resend continues even if the power is turned OFF and then ON.
CAUTION:
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the
No.4
status is not returned to the factory default.
Q: What is the upper limit of the number of COM-LOGs? What is the upper limit of the number
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is of characters of error information displayed in a COM-LOG?
required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory
A: Up to 30 log data can be saved. The data size of error information is maximum 128
default CA certificate file.
characters.
For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.".

2-303
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-304
No.5 No.10
Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed. Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA? transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic" while "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA transmission?
(as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to
"Basic" authentication on the server. transmission of the service mode, see the "Service mode menu Transmission".

No.6 No.11
Q: Can I turn this machine power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?
operation? A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below.
A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device Transmission timing Detailed procedure Transmission Error occurs
must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time. information
It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of network equipment When the service browser 1) Specify the service browser Service browser mode: Retransmission
such as HUB is made prolonged OFF. is enabled from the setting in the service mode [Register] is not performed.
disabled state [OFF] menu.
2) Send browser information to WEB browser option: ("Disabling
No.7 UGW. [ON] or [OFF] according [OFF]" continues
Q: Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW, the reason is what? 3) Once obtaining OK to the license status to be set.)
response from UGW, enable
A: If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of this machine immediately
the service browser mode
after error occurred once, It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does [ACTIVE].
not take a time from the controller of this machine to NIC though, the data will be saved on (To use the setting, it is
necessary to reboot this
the RAM.
machine)
If the power supply is blocked off while starting up, the data will be inevitably deleted. T-2-158

No.8 No.12
Q: How does E-RDS operate while this machine is placed in the sleep mode? Q: Can I make another service call request when I have already requested a service call?
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up A: No, you cannot make another service call request if you have already made a service call
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of request.
data transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again. Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call which you’d made. Or the service
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition technician performs a service call completion process.
to sleep won’t be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
No.13
No.9 Q: Is the "Requesting" status cancelled when this machine is rebooted?
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Department counter? A: The requesting status is not cancelled even if the device is rebooted. The information
A: No, E-RDS does not support Department counter. of the notified service call request (the time that the request was made, the service call
request description) is also retained during the "Requesting" status.

2-304
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-305
No.14
Troubleshooting
Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this
machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of No.1
this machine is turned ON? Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!
A: Yes. When a scheduled send such as that for counter could not be executed due to the Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
power of this machine being turned OFF, etc., and the scheduled send time has already Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
passed at power-on, the send is executed immediately. 1) Check network connections
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON?
The following shows data send according to the status of this machine.
YES: Proceed to Step 2).
Send types Status of this machine NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
Power ON Power OFF Sleep
Scheduled send Sent Not sent*1 Sent*2
2) Confirm loop back address (* In case of IPv4 )
Immediate send
Sent - Sent*2 Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings]
(Service call log / Alarm log / Jam log)
T-2-159 > [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter "127.0.0.1", and touch the [Start] button.
*1: Immediately sent if the send time has already passed at power-on.
*2: Sent after recovery from sleep mode.

No.15
Q: Some part of information seems to be suppressed as screens passes: Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/ IP Settings, when the device is connected
with a PS server unit. How the authentication information such as CA certificate is dealt?
A: The certificate-related items are displayed. Even when the device is connected with a PS
Server Unit, E-RDS functions.

F-2-522

Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.)
YES: Proceed to Step 3).
NO: There is a possibility that this machine’s network settings are wrong. Check the
details of the IPv4 settings once more.

2-305
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-306
(b) Touch the [Up] button.

F-2-523

F-2-525
3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.
Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network. (c) Select [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS server noted down
Does this machine respond? in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.
YES: Proceed to Step 4).
NO: Confirm the details of this machine’s IP address and subnet mask settings. Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
4) Confirm DNS connection NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address,
(a) Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP and then touch the [Start] button.
Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings], write down the primary
and secondary addresses of the DNS server, and touch the [Cancel] button. Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
address with the user’s system administrator.

F-2-524

2-306
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-307
Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG) 3) When each line is selected, the communication error log detailed screen is displayed as
1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. shown in the figure below. (Example: No. 02)
2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the
right side. The communication error log list screen is displayed.

F-2-527

NOTE:
• A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters)
• Touch the [OK] button to return to the communication error log list screen.

4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and
strings".

No.2
Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Cause: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for
F-2-526
E-RDS have been changed.
Remedy: The following points should be checked.
NOTE: 1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
• Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication error log list 2) Check the E-RDS setting values.
screen.
• Check the communication error log from COM-LOG.
• "*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method
name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only. • Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGW-
PORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see "Service cautions".

2-307
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-308
No.3 No.8
Symptom: Registration information of the E-RDS machine was deleted from the device Symptom: A service call request cannot be made because the [New Request] button is grayed
information on Web Portal, and then registered again. After that, if a communication test is out.
left unperformed, the device setting in the UGW becomes invalid.
Cause: When the registration information of the E-RDS machine is deleted, information
related to E-RDS is also deleted.
Therefore, when 7 days have passed without performing a communication test after
registering the E-RDS machine again, the device setting becomes invalid.
Remedy: Perform a communication test before the device setting becomes invalid.

No.4
Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Network is not ready, try later" in error details of COM-
LOG list.
Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking.
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check networking conditions and connections.
F-2-528
2) Turn on the power supply of this machine and perform a communication test about 60
Cause: There has been already a service call request.
seconds later.
Remedy: Perform either of the following remedy works:
• Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call request that has been made.
No.5
• A service technician performs a complete processing for the service call request that has
Symptom: "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test (COM-TEST) has done
been made.
successfully.
Cause: It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty.
No.9
Remedy: Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status
Symptom: Initializing the CA certificate (CA-KEY) results in NG!
with a network and UGW administrator.
Cause: Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally.
Remedy: Initialize the HDD.
No.6
Symptom: Enabling Service Browser (BRWS-ACT) results NG!
No.10
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
Symptom: A service call request is failed, and a message "Could not send the service call
result is NG!
request" is displayed.
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
successfully.
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
No.7
successfully.
Symptom: The display indicates that the service browser is enabled (BRWS-STS: 1), but the
service browser fails to be activated.
Cause: The main power switch of this machine has not been turned OFF and then ON. ON/
OFF of the service browser is enabled after reboot.
Remedy: Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.

2-308
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-309
No.11
Error code and strings
Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs.
Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COM- The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen.
TEST was executed again. (Here, "server" means UGW.)
Remedy: When repeatedly executing COM-TEST, execute COM-TEST at intervals of 5 • The error information are displayed in the following form.
minutes or more. [*] [Error strings] [Method name] [Error details provided by UGW]

NOTE:
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test
(method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.

No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy

1 0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode Unmatched Operation Mode Initialize the E-RDS setting
changed. (ERDS-DAT).
2 0500 0003 SUSPEND: Rebooting the device while Perform a communication test
Communication test the communication test had (COM-TEST).
is not performed. not been performed although
E-RDS is enabled.
3 0xxx 0003 Server schedule is Blank schedule data have Perform and complete a
not exist been received from UGW. communication test (COM-
TEST).
4 0xxx 0003 Communication test Communication test has not Perform and complete a
is not performed completed. communication test (COM-
TEST).
5 84xx 0003 E-RDS switch is A communication test has Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS)
setted OFF been attempted with the to 1, and then perform a
E-RDS switch being OFF. communication test (COM-
TEST).
6 8600 0002 Event Registration Processing (event processing) Turn the device OFF/ ON.
8600 0003 is Failed within the device has failed. If the error persists, replace
8600 0101 the device system software.
8600 0201 (Upgrade)
8600 0305
8600 0306
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0415
7 8700 0306 SRAM version Improper value is written Turn the device OFF/ ON.
unmatch! in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of E-RDS.
8 8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS Improper value is written Turn the device OFF/ ON.
version unmatch! in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of Ae-RDS.

2-309
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-310
No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy
9 8xxx 0004 Operation is not Method which E-RDS is not Contact help desk 20 8xxx 2003 Network is not Communication attempted Check the network
supported supporting attempted. ready, try later without confirming network connection, as per the initial
10 8xxx 0101 Server response Communication with UGW has Perform and complete a connection, just after booting procedures described in the
error (NULL) been successful, but an error communication test (COM- up a device in which the troubleshooting.
of some sort has prevented TEST). network preparations are not Perform a communication test
UGW from responding. ready. (COM-TEST) about 60 seconds
When (Null) is displayed later, after turn on the device.
at the end of the message, 21 8xxx 2004 Server response Communication with UGW has Try again after a period of time.
this indicates that there has error been successful, but an error Check detailed error code
been an error in the HTTPS ([Hexadecimal]) of some sort has prevented (Hexadecimal) and [Error
communication method. [Error detailed in UGW from responding. details in UGW] from UGW
11 8xxx 0201 Server schedule is During the communication When the error occurs, report UGW]*1 displayed after the message.
8xxx 0202 invalid test, there has been some the details to the support 22 8xxx 200A Server connection • TCP/IP communication fault • Check the network
8xxx 0203 kind of error in the schedule section. error • The IP address of device is connection, as per the initial
8xxx 0204 values passed from UGW. After the UGW side not set. procedures described in the
8xxx 0206 has responded, try the troubleshooting.
communication test again. • When proxy is used, make
12 8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is The schedule data in the Perform a communication test the settings for proxy, and
8xxx 0208 broken inside of E-RDS is not right. (COM-TEST). check the status of the proxy
13 8xxx 0221 Server specified list Alarm/Alert filtering error: The Alert filtering is not supported server.
is too big number of elements of the list by UGW. 23 8xxx 200B Server address Server address name • Check that the value of URL
specified by the server is over resolution error resolution has failed. of UGW (RGW-ADR) is
restriction value. https://a01.ugwdevice.net/
14 8xxx 0222 Server specified list Alarm filtering error: Unjust Alert filtering is not supported ugw/agentif010.
is wrong value is included in the by UGW. • Check that Internet
element of the list specified by connection is available in the
the server. environment.
15 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try The semaphore consumption Try again a communication test 24 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection Could not connect to proxy Check proxy server address /
later error at the time of a after a period of time. error server due to improper port and re-enter as needed.
communication test. address.
16 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact 25 8xxx 2015 Proxy address Could not connect to proxy • Check that the proxy
match TrackingID notified by Updater the support department of the resolution error server due to name resolution server name is correct. If
differs from the thing of UGW sales company. error of proxy address. the proxy server name is
designates. correct, check the DNS
17 8xxx 2000 Unknown error Some other kind of Perform and complete a connection, as per the initial
communication error has communication test (COM- procedures described in the
occurred. TEST). troubleshooting.
18 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme The header of the URL of the Check that the value of URL of • Specify the IP address as the
error(not https) registered UGW is not in https UGW (RGW-ADR) is https:// proxy server name.
format. a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/ 26 8xxx 201E Proxy Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and
agentif010. authentication error password required in order to
19 8xxx 2002 URL server A URL different to that Check that the value of URL of login to the proxy, and re-enter
specified is illegal specified by the UGW has UGW (RGW-ADR) is https:// as needed.
been set. a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.

2-310
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
 2 Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-311
No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy No. Code Error strings Cause Remedy
27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate • No route certificate installed • Install the latest device 35 xxxx xxxx Device internal An internal error, such as Turn the device OFF/ ON.
error in device. system software. (Upgrade) error memory unavailable, etc., Or replace the device system
• Certificate other than • Correctly set the date and has occurred during a device software. (Upgrade)
that initially registered time of the device. internal error phase.
in the user's operating • Execute CLEAR > CA- 36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Internal error occurred at the Turn the device OFF/ ON.
environment is being used, KEY, and turn OFF and Initialize Failure! initiating E-RDS.
but has not been registered then ON the device. (The T-2-160
with the device. CA certificate at the time of
• The date and time of the shipment is automatically *1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW.
device is not correct. installed.) [Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
28 8xxx 2029 Server certificate The server certificate Check that the value of URL of
verify error verification error occurred. UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
29 8xxx 2046 Server certificate • The route certificate Check that the device time and
expired registered with the device date are correctly set.
has expired. If the device time and date are
• Certificate other than correct, upgrade to the latest
that initially registered system software.
in the user’s operating
environment is being used,
but has not been registered
with the device.
• The device time and date
is outside of the certificated
period.
30 8xxx 2047 Server response Due to network congestion, If this error occurs when the
time out etc., the response from UGW communication test is being run
does not come within the or Service Browser is being set,
specified time. (HTTPS level try again after a period of time.
time out)
31 8xxx 2048 Service not found There is a mistake in the Check that the value of URL of
UGW URL, and UGW cannot UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
be accessed. (Path is wrong) a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
32 8xxx 2052 URL error The data which is not URL is Check that the value of URL of
inputted into URL field. UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error SOAP Client fails to obtain Perform and complete a
SOAP Response. communication test (COM-
Possibility of a problem in TEST).
UGW or of a temporary
problem in the network load.
34 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault SOAP communication error Check that the value of port
has occurred. number of UGW (RGW-PORT)
is 443.

2-311
2
Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
 2 Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline
2-312

Updater a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-Remote Update)

If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting
are registered on UGW in advance, full remote firmware update is available on an
Overview imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device. Upon downloaded from CDS, the firmware is
updated on the device.
■■Outline
1) Set up customers, Sales Company
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System 3) Give a firmware distribution
UGW device types, distribution / Partner
schedule and the
V1.0 (hereinafter CDS) or Local CDS to install firmware, MEAP applications and system command to e-ROS.
command for download
options. UGW Operator

• Firmware Installation
2) Notify distribution
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS or Local CDS via e-RDS information to CDS.

Internet. Particularly on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices, 4) Download CDS

firmware
firmware can be updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services. Firmware Upload
Updater Firmware
Canon Inc.

• MEAP Application/System Option Installation imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is

By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to ADVANCE automatically started upon
download completed.
manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,
F-2-529
regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution / Update)
devices.
If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule is registered on UGW in
advance, firmware can be distributed to an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device before
●● Installing Firmware a service technician actually visits the customer site. This allows the service technician to
With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3
update the firmware manually immediately after completing device inspection.
methods.
1) Set up customers, Sales Company
Download Downloadable Firmware Versions UGW device types, distribution / Partner
Update 3) Give a firmware distribution
schedule and the
Distribution Method Commanded Previous Current Newer command to e-ROS.
Timing command for download
by: Ver Ver Ver UGW Operator
a. UGW-linked Download / Update UGW Auto No Yes*1 Yes*2
(Full-remote update)
b. UGW-linked Download UGW Manual Yes Yes*1 Yes 2) Notify distribution
(Remote Distribution / Update) e-RDS information to CDS.
c. Manual Download / Update Local UI Auto No Yes*1 Yes*2 4) Download CDS
(On-site Update via Service mode) Manual Yes Yes*1 Yes firmware

d. Local CDS Download and Update iW EMC + Auto No No Yes*2 Updater Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
(iW EMC + DFU Plug-in*3) DFU Plug-in
*3 imageRUNNER
e. Update by the SST SST - Yes Yes Yes ADVANCE
5) Writing process is started by
Service
*1:You can select the version allowed Remote Update. T-2-161
Technician
manually executing Updater.

*2: Only the versions for which remote update is allowed can be selected.
F-2-530
*3: Device Firmware Update Plug-in

2-312
2
Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline
 2 Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline
2-313
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update via Service Mode) e. SST update
If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device has connection with the external network, In the cases of devices other than imageRUNNER ADVANCE series and devices of
a service technician can gain access to CDS via Service mode to download and update imageRUNNER ADVANCE series that are not connected with external network, the foregoing
firmware. This allows service technicians to update the firmware as needed on the three methods cannot be used to distribute firmware. Firmware released in the future will be
customer site even without PCs. distributed via CDS instead of distribution using a master CD. In the field, these firmware can
1) Manually execute
be downloaded from CDS using a PC web browser.
CDS
Updater.

Updater Firmware Firmware Upload Updater function available machine

Canon Inc.
CDS

imageRUNNER 1) Firmware Update

ADVANCE Firmware
Service 2) Firmware distribution Canon Inc.
Technician
Update function impossible machine
F-2-531

2) Download firmware to PC
NOTE:
“External network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet. 3) Update via SST Sales Company

The service technician downloads Service Technician

d. As preparation for distribution, obtain firmware from the update CDS using the firmware from CDS in advance
and executes update using SST.
iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in) and register the firmware in
the local CDS. In service mode of the host machine, make preparations to allow reception F-2-533

of firmware distributed from the local CDS. The firmware can be updated on the user's
NOTE:
intranet by executing the task from Device Firmware Update Plug-in on iW EMC.
Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 4 methods by introducing
CDS. See User Manual for detailed information.

Download Downloadable Firmware Versions

Update
Distribution Method Commanded
Timing Previous Ver Current Ver Newer Ver
by
Manual download/ Auto No No Yes *1
Local UI
update via Local UI Manual No No Yes *1
Manual download/ Auto No No Yes *1
Remote UI
upload via Remote UI Manual No No Yes *1
Special download/ Specific version only
Remote UI -
F-2-532
upload via Remote UI (Obtain it separately)
Periodical update via
Local UI Auto No No Yes *1
Local UI
T-2-162

*1: Only the latest version of Remote update-enabled version is downloadable.

2-313
2
Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline
 2 Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-314
Installing MEAP Application/System Option LAN LAN
Sales LMS
Company
The following is the installation method of MEAP application/system option which is enabled
by applying CDS.
User
5) Manuals, etc. 2) License
a. LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation Authentication

If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or LAN

CDS Manual
3) Create LF
service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application 1) Enter LAN
Upload

or a system option. Application

Installing MEAP Application 4) Transmit LF Canon Inc.

imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
LAN LAN
Sales LMS
Company
LAN: License Access Number
If a customer enters LAN
LF: License File
purchased from the sales company
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
to an imageRUNNERADVANCE-
User automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
series device, a LF can be installed.
5) Manuals, etc. 2) License entered.)
Authentication MEAP
Application
LAN F-2-535
CDS Manual
3) Create LF
Upload
1) Enter LAN
Application

4) Transmit MEAP Canon Inc.

imageRUNNER Application/LF
ADVANCE

If a customer enters LAN LAN: License Access Number

purchased from the sales company LF: License File
to an imageRUNNERADVANCE- (DSN: Device Serial Number,
series device, MEAP application/LF automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
can be installed. entered.)

F-2-534
Installing System Option

2-314
2
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
 2 Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions
2-315
■■System Configuration ■■List of Functions
The figure below schematically shows the system configuration. The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater.
Service User Remote UGW-
CDS Category Function
Mode Mode UI linked
Checking firmware compatibility Yes - - -
MEAP application Checking special firmware Yes - - -
LMS
User Dealer Manual
Sales Checking latest firmware
- Yes Yes -

Internet
Company version
Manual
License
Readme Registering/deleting firmware
Access No. Yes Yes Yes -
distribution schedule
CDS
Confirming and downloading
Application/License Yes Yes Yes Yes
Updater Business firmware
Firmware
eRDS
Application Group Firmware Updating downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes -
Firmware
Cancelling downloaded
UGW Yes Yes Yes -
firmware
QA Acquiring firmware distribution
Service Command for Firmware Distribution
Technician information registered from - - - Yes
Canon Inc. UGW
Notifying firmware version
F-2-536 - - - Yes
information
Local CDS Periodical update - Yes - -
Inquiring license for MEAP
- Yes Yes -
MEAP application/ application/system option
system option Installing MEAP application /
- Yes Yes -
system option
Settings Yes - - -
System Testing communications Yes Yes Yes -
Management Displaying update logs Yes Yes Yes -
Displaying system logs Yes Yes Yes -
Internal system Notifying internal system error
Yes Yes Yes Yes
error notification occurrence to distribution server
T-2-163

F-2-537

2-315
2
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions
 2 Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow
2-316
Local CDS ■■Distribution Flow
Category Function
Checking latest firmware version ●● Firmware Installation Flow
Registering/deleting firmware distribution schedule Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods.
Firmware
Confirming and downloading firmware
Updating downloaded firmware a: UGW-linked download and update
MEAP application/ Inquiring license for MEAP application/system option b: UGW-linked download
system option Installing MEAP application / system option
c: Manual download and update
Settings
d: Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in)
System Testing communications
Management Displaying update logs e: Update via SST
Displaying system logs
: Operator of each company : User operation
Internal system Notifying internal system error occurrence to distribution server
error notification xxxxx
T-2-164 Firmware
Market Release
d
a e
b
c
Distribution
Firmware acquisition Register the
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1 firmware in the LCDS

Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Executing the task
Download Download Download
Automatic download Via Service mode Scheduled download Via User mode Download via SST from Device
Via User mode
(Local UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI) Firmware Update

Apply (Update) Apply (Update) Apply (Update)

Automatic update Via Service mode Scheduled update Via User mode Via User mode Update via SST Automatic update
(Local UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI)

F-2-538
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.

2-316
2
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow
 2 Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
2-317
●● MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow Limitations and Cautions
MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided.
Be sure to use the user mode to install. ■■Limitations
: Operator of each company : User operation
Changing Date/Time on Device
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting
according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as
Application scheduled.
Market Release
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.

License Access
Number Acquisition Change of Setting from Service mode
(packaged with the Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device.
product)

■■Cautions
Device Serial No.
Acquisition Concurrent use of Updater functions
(from the device)
Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with
Remote UI.
License Key License File
Acquisition Acquisition Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools
(from LMS) (from LMS)
Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions
from Remote UI.
Install distributed System Option System Option MEAP Application
Install
application Install Manual Install Manual Install
Via User mode
Via User mode Via User mode Via User mode Via User mode Using Updater function from Remote UI
(Local UI)
(Remote UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI) (Remote UI) Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for
F-2-539 certain duration.
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of
Remote Login Service via SMS
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use
Remote Login Service via SMS.
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI]
button.

Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function

Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed.
This is the Updater-specific specification.

2-317
2
Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
 2 Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
2-318
Job/Function Receiving Printing Queued print Sending Queued send
type jobs jobs
COPY - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
PRINT Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
(end of job)
FAX Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ
I-FAX Receipt Cancel Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ
processing to
trigger update *
Report Print - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
SEND - - - Cancel Cancel
processing to processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
T-2-165

*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object
after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.

Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is
completed.
Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs,
the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending
on the execution modes).
Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.

2-318
2
Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
 2 Technology > Preparation
2-319

Preparation Installation Method Network Settings

Enabling [Install Application/
Options] Button of User Mode
LMS-linked Installation Yes -
■■Overview of Preparation LMA-linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes
The following should be prepared before using Updater. LMS-linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes
T-2-167
• For updating of firmware

COPIER > ■■Setting Sales Company’s HQ

FUNCTION COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s
Service Mode > INSTALL HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
CDS- changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
CDS-CTL CDS-FIRM LOCLFIRM LCDSFLG
UGW
Default Setting of Sales Setting of Sales Company's
Enabling Market
Enabling Company's HQ HQ after Change
Setting [Manual
[Update Canada US CA
Installation Sales Network Enabling Update] Enabling Latin America US/SG LA
Firmware]
Method Company’s Settings UGW Link Button of [Local CDS] Hong Kong SG HK
Button of User
HQ User Mode T-2-168
Mode
(Remote UI)
UGW-linked Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.
Download and Yes Yes Yes - - - Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
Update Technician (Level 1)
UGW-linked
Yes Yes Yes - - -
Download
Manual
Download and Yes Yes - - - - NOTE:
Update The list below shows the setting of Sales Company’s HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Manual Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
Download and <List of Sales Company’s HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Yes Yes - Yes - -
Update via Japan = JP China = CN
Local UI
USA = US Hong Kong = HK
Manual
Singapore = SG Australia = AU
Download and
Yes Yes - Yes - - Europe = NL Canada = CA
Update via
Remote UI Korea = KR Latin America= LA
Special
Download and
Yes - - - Yes -
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via - - - Yes - Yes
Local CDS
T-2-166

• For Install of Application

2-319
2
Technology > Preparation
 2 Technology > Preparation
2-320
■■Network Settings [COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ] CDS Local
CDS
●● Connecting to External Network CDS-FIRM To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user 1 1
(administrator).
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater can be activated from the user
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details. mode.
0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
LCDSFLG Whether to display or hide the screen for setting the server to be 0 1
NOTE: connected
• See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network. 0: Hide
• Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required. 1: Display
"Enabling UGW Link" CDS-UGW To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server. 1 0
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode" When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode" UGW server in cooperation with CDS.
“External Network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet. 0 to 1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
T-2-169

●● Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

●● Connection to the local CDS
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
When updating firmware using iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in),
start service mode and enable the following setting.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
[COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-FIRM]
2. Press [Updater] button.
[COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ] > [ LCDSFLG]
Then, disable the following setting.
[COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-UGW]

F-2-541

F-2-540

2-320
2
Technology > Preparation
 2 Technology > Preparation
2-321
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the
[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.

Delivery Server CDS

F-2-542
4. Press [Settings] button.

F-2-544
Delivery Server Local CDS

F-2-543

F-2-545

2-321
2
Technology > Preparation
 2 Technology > Preparation
2-322
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
Note:
• For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in
L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port
number.
• To display the button of the local CDS, execute Settings/Registration > Management
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service mode.

6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.

●● Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.

Note:
CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all F-2-547
means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS. 4. Press [Test Communication] button.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.

F-2-548

F-2-546

2-322
2
Technology > Preparation
 2 Technology > Preparation
2-323
5. Press [Yes] button. ■■Enabling UGW Link
When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW-
linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Setting of Device
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW
Service Mode
(0 -> 1)
Service Technician (Level 1)
Setting of UGW In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not
WebPortal distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.

NOTE:
• See “imageWARE Remote Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation
Manual“ for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
F-2-549 • [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
• If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not be set to each account in Firmware
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server). Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.

6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-550

2-323
2
Technology > Preparation
 2 Technology > Preparation
2-324
■■Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode ■■Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation
set to ON for users in advance. should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP
Technician (Level 1) (0 -> 1) Technician (Level 1) (0 -> 1)

• User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)): • User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)):

F-2-551 F-2-553

• User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)): • User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-MEAP(1)):

F-2-552
F-2-554

2-324
2
Technology > Preparation
 2 Technology > Preparation
2-325
■■Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI) ■■Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode
To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-LVUP
Technician (Level 1) (0 -> 1)
firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM
Technician (Level 1) (0 -> 1)

• Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):

F-2-555
• Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (LOCLFIRM (1)):
F-2-557

F-2-556

Note:
In order to use manual update of the remote UI, firmware for manual update is required.
Since firmware update is not supposed to be done by users at this point, we have no
plan to provide dedicated firmware. Just in case it becomes necessary to support such
update on the host machine side, the default value of LOCLFIRM in service mode is set
to "1". On the RUI, the setting of manual update can be made in the following location.
RUI > Settings/Registration > License/Other > Register/Update Software > Update F-2-558
Firmware > Manual Update

2-325
2
Technology > Preparation
2 Technology > Preparation
2-326

F-2-559

F-2-560

2-326
2
Technology > Preparation
 2 Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Various Setting
2-327
System Management Operations 4. Press [Settings] button.

■■Various Setting
●● Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-562
5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
• [Delivery Server URL]:
Enter the "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif"

F-2-561

F-2-563

2-327
2
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Various Setting
 2 Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Various Setting
2-328
• [Delivery Server Local CDS] ●● Setting Log Level
This section describes how to set system log levels.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-564

Note:
• For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in
L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port
number.
• To display the button of the local CDS, execute Settings/Registration > Management
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service
mode. F-2-565
• The URL setting of the local CDS server can be made through the following 2 methods: 4. Press [Settings] button.
- Manual input on this screen
- Distribute the setting information from Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in),
and remotely make the setting.

6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.

F-2-566

2-328
2
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Various Setting
 2 Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
2-329
5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list. ■■Displaying Logs
●● Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and
Firmware Update Logs.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-567
• [Log Level]:
Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4].
See the table below for logs output in each level.
Log Output
Log Level
Trace Information Important Message Ordinary Error System Error
0 - - - - Yes
1 - - - Yes Yes
2 - - Yes Yes Yes
3 - Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
T-2-170

NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output Description F-2-568

Trace Detailed logs for debug

Information Logs related to operations done on the system
Important Message Update logs output by firmware type
Installation logs by MEAP application
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors
System Error Logs for internal system errors

6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.

2-329
2
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
 2 Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
2-330
4. Press [Select Log Display] button. 6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-569
5. Press [Display Update Logs] button. F-2-571

F-2-570

2-330
2
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
 2 Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
2-331
●● System Logs 5. Press [Display System Logs] button.
This section describes how to confirm System Logs.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-574
6. Updater internal logs are displayed.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-572
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.

F-2-575

F-2-573

2-331
2
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs
 2 Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Communication Test
2-332

NOTE:
■■Communication Test
See the section of "Debug Logs" under “Version Upgrade via CDS”, “Version Upgrade” This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual for more detailed information.
server and/or the file server.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-576

2-332
2
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Communication Test
 2 Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Communication Test
2-333
4. Press [Test Communication] button. 6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-579
F-2-577
5. Press [Yes] button.
Caution:
Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS.

F-2-578
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to
execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).

2-333
2
Technology > Preparation > System Management Operations > Communication Test
 2 Technology > Maintenance
2-334

Maintenance ■■How to Replace Controller Boards

The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced.
■■Upgrading Updater • Main Controller Board PCB 1
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See No steps follow.
the section of “Version upgrade” , Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual for how to
update firmware. • Main Controller Board PCB 2 (including SRAM)
The setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are inherited in the upgraded The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See
version. "Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.

■■Formatting Hard Disk ■■How to Replace Devices

Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Preparation" in chapter 2
application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP of this manual for details.
Service Manual for further information.
The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored. See "Preparation" in
chapter 2 of this manual for details.

NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not
updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.

2-334
2
Technology > Maintenance
 2 Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
2-335
FAQ No.4
Q: In the course of “UGW-linked download”, what will happen if the user downloads the
■■FAQ on Installing Firmware firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with “UGW-linked
download” before?
No.1
A: The previously downloaded firmware in the method of “UGW-linked download” will be
Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS?
overridden by the subsequently downloaded one.
A: Firmware can be downgraded in some methods shown in the table below.
This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.
If download and update are performed consecutively, firmware can’t be downgraded.
The firmware downloaded in the method of “Service mode-linked download” and “UGW-
linked download” can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it
Distribution Method Downgrade Possibility
cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service technician.
UGW-linked Download and Update No
UGW-linked Download Yes
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual) Yes No.5
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic) No Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution
T-2-171 schedule has been set in “manual download and update”?
No.2 A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in “manual download and update” schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing
compared to “update via SST”? distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware. valid.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in “manual download and
update” compared to “update via SST” (It depend on network environment.). No.6
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, “manual download and update” Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?
takes less time compared to “update via SST” because updating the firmware to multiple A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by
devices can be executed simultaneously. service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the
ID and password separately.
No.3
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after “UGW-linked download No.7
and update” done? Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen. firmware version?
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service
destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion. technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See "Troubleshooting on
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find Firmware Installation" in chapter 6 of this manual for details.
the distribution status per device as shown in the search result.
No.8
Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware
again?
A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail.
The user should register the firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.

2-335
2
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware
 2 Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
2-336
No.9 ■■FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?
A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown. ●● FAQ on the Number of Devices That Can Be Managed
Q: How many devices can be managed by 1 set of DFU Plug-in + Local CSD?
A: Up to 1000 devices can be registered. However, only up to 5 updaters can access the
local CSD at a time.
●● FAQ on Firmware Distribution Task
Q: If the version of the firmware on the local CDS is the same with or older
than the firmware on the device, what will occur when firmware update is
performed? (Will an error occur because firmware to be distributed does not
exist?)
A: The firmware will not be updated, and the result will be "normally completed".
●● FAQ on Firmware Update Process
Q: Won't timer shutdown occur during a firmware update process?
A: Updater deactivates the timer shutdown function at the start of a firmware update
process. Therefore shutdown will not occur during update.
F-2-580 ●● Operation during Firmware Update
No.10
Q: Can the following operations be performed during device firmware update?
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive
• Automatic timer shutdown
such a notification?
• Shutdown from the local UI
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters
• Reboot from the remote UI
his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting.
• Switching between authentication applications from SMS
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with “,”
A: Updater deactivates the following functions during device firmware update.
(comma) or “;” (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
• Timer shutdown
• Shutdown from the local UI
No.11
• Reboot from the remote UI
Q: How long does the firmware update take?
• Access to SMS
A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies
on the network environment.

2-336
2
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment
 2 Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2-337
■■FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option ■■FAQ on General Matters of Updater
No.1 No.1
Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method?
space? A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the • For updating firmware
required space against free space to judge installation availability.
COPIER >
FUNCTION COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
No.2 Service Mode > INSTALL
Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application? CDS-
A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown. CDS-CTL CDS-FIRM LOCLFIRM LCDSFLG
UGW
Enabling
Enabling
No.3 Setting [Manual
[Update
Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled? Installation Sales Network Enabling Update] Enabling
Firmware]
A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually. Method Company’s Settings UGW Link Button of [Local CDS]
Button of User
HQ User Mode
Mode
(Remote UI)
UGW-linked
Download and Yes Yes Yes - - -
Update
UGW-linked
Yes Yes Yes - - -
Download
Manual
Download and Yes Yes - - - -
Update
Manual
Download and
Yes Yes - Yes - -
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Yes Yes - Yes - -
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Yes - - - Yes -
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via - - - Yes - Yes
Local CDS
T-2-172

• For install Application

2-337
2
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
 2 Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2-338
Enabling [Install Application/
Installation Method Network Settings
Options] Button of User Mode
LMS-linked Installation Yes -
LMA-linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes
T-2-173

No.2
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?
A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode.
• Masking Firmware Installation
Setting Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM
(Level 1) (1 -> 0)
Setting Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM
(Level 1) (1 -> 0)

• Masking Application Installation

Setting Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP
(Level 1) (1 -> 0)

No.3
Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?
A: Yes. During the communication test, “Cancel” button is displayed.

2-338
2
Technology > Maintenance > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
3 Periodic service
■
■Replacement
■
■Periodically
of consumables
replaced parts
■
■Consumable parts
■
■Periodical maintenance

3
Periodic service
 3 Periodic service > Periodically replaced parts > Host machine
3-2

Replacement of consumables Periodically replaced parts

IR-ADV C9280 PRO / C7280i / C9270 PRO(200V) / Host machine

C7270(200V) / C7270i Series No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life
1 Toner Filter FL3-7553 1 500,000 pages
No. Name Q'ty 2 Ozone Filter FL3-4101 2 500,000 pages
1 Toner Cartridge (Bk) 1 3 Dustproof Filter FL2-0439 1 500,000 pages
2 Toner Cartridge (C) 1 4 Primary Charging Assembly FM0-0892 1 1,400,000 pages
3 Toner Cartridge (M) 1 5 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly FM0-0862 1 1,400,000 pages
4 Toner Cartridge (Y) 1 6 Primary Charging Wire FL2-8915 1 150,000 pages
T-3-1
7 Charging Wire Cleaner 1 FL2-7750 1 150,000 pages
8 Charging Wire Cleaner 2 FL3-7560 1 150,000 pages
IR-ADV C9270 PRO(100V) / C7270(100V,120V) / 9 Pre-transfer Charging Wire FL2-8807 1 150,000 pages
10 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner 1 FL2-7750 1 150,000 pages
C7260 / C7260i Series 11 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner 2 FL3-7560 1 150,000 pages
12 Primary Etching Grid FC8-2295 1 150,000 pages
No. Name Q'ty 13 Grid Cleaning Pad FL3-4090 1 150,000 pages
1 Toner Cartridge (Bk) 1 T-3-3
2 Toner Cartridge (C) 1
3 Toner Cartridge (M) 1
4 Toner Cartridge (Y) 1
T-3-2

3-2
3
Periodic service > Periodically replaced parts > Host machine
 3 Periodic service > Consumable parts > Host machine
3-3

Consumable parts A* : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9280 PRO/C7280i

B* : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C9270 PRO/C7270/C7270i
C* : imaga RUNNER ADVANCE C7260 /C7260i
Host machine
No. Parts name Series Parts number Q'ty Estimated life
1 Developing Assembly (Bk) FM0-2709 1 500,000 pages
2 Developing Assembly (Y) FM0-2706 1 500,000 pages
3 Developing Assembly (M) FM0-2707 1 500,000 pages
4 Developing Assembly (C) FM0-2708 1 500,000 pages
5 Cleaner Blade (Bk) A* FC8-2281 1 530,000 pages
B* 1 550,000 pages
C* 1 500,000 pages
6 Cleaner Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) A* FL2-8652 1 530,000 pages
B* 1 550,000 pages
C* 1 500,000 pages
7 Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) A* FL2-8653 1 530,000 pages
B* 1 550,000 pages
C* 1 500,000 pages
8 Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) A* FL2-8654 1 530,000 pages
B* 1 550,000 pages
C* 1 500,000 pages
9 ITB FM4-6624 1 550,000 pages
10 ITB Cleaning Blade FL3-4920 1 200,000 pages
11 Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk) FC0-2331 1 ea. 550,000 pages
12 Secondary Transfer Inner Roller FC7-9325 1 550,000 pages
13 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller FL3-8693 1 550,000 pages
14 Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator FM3-9841 1 550,000 pages
15 ITB Inner Surface Scraper FL3-9149 1 550,000 pages
16 Fixing Film Unit FM0-0413 1 300,000 pages
17 Pressure Roller FM0-0387 1 300,000 pages
18 Fixing Web FC0-8030 1 300,000 pages
19 Fixing Heat Soaking Roller FC0-7967 1 300,000 pages
20 Bearing for Heat Soaking Roller XG9-0810 2 300,000 pages
21 Pickup Roller (Left/Right Deck) FC5-2524 1 ea. 500,000 sheets
22 Feed Roller (Left/Right Deck) FC5-2526 1 ea. 500,000 sheets
23 Separation Roller (Left/Right Deck) FC5-2528 1 ea. 500,000 sheets
24 Pickup Roller (Cassette) FC5-2524 1 ea. 500,000 sheets
25 Feed Roller (Cassette) FC5-2526 1 ea. 500,000 sheets
26 Separation Roller (Cassette) FC5-2528 1 ea. 500,000 sheets
27 Feed Roller (Multi-purpose Tray) FB1-8581 1 120,000 sheets
28 Separation Roller (Multi-purpose Tray) FC6-6661 1 120,000 sheets
29 Waste Toner Container FM0-4545 1 Change alarm lights
at 50,000 pages
(200,000 images)
T-3-4

3-3
3
Periodic service > Consumable parts > Host machine
 3 Periodic service > Consumable parts > Options > Staple Finisher-L1
3-4
Options ■■Staple Finisher-L1
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life Remarks
■■Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-F1 1 Stapler FM2-0665 1 500,000 sheets
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life Remarks 2 Saddle Stapler FL2-0846 1 100,000 sheets
1 Pickup Roller FC8-5577 1 80,000 sheets Replaced based 3 Delivery Static Eliminator (L) FC5-3667 1 1,000,000
on the number of sheets
actually fed paper 4 Delivery Static Eliminator (R) FC5-5571 1 1,000,000
2 Separation Roller FL2-9608 1 80,000 sheets sheets
3 Retard Roller FB2-7777 1 80,000 sheets 5 Inlet Static Eliminator FL2-0822 1 1,000,000
4 Dust Collecting Sheet FC8-5633 2 80,000 sheets sheets
5 Dust Collecting Sheet Type E FC8-5727 8 80,000 sheets 6 Swing Middle Static Eliminator 4F3-0929 1 1,000,000
6 Stamp F26-7610 1 7,000 sheets sheets
7 Buffer Roller FC5-3442 1 1,000,000
T-3-5
sheets
8 Return Roller (Rear) 4A3-0950 1 1,000,000
sheets
■■Paper Deck Unit-C1
9 Return Roller (Front) 4A3-0951 1 1,000,000
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life Remarks sheets
1 Pickup Roller FF5-7829 1 250,000 sheets T-3-9
2 Separation Roller FF5-7830 1 250,000 sheets
3 Feed Roller FF6-1975 1 250,000 sheets
T-3-6

■■POD Deck Lite-A1

No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life Remarks
1 Pickup Roller FF5-7829 1 500,000 sheets
2 Separation Roller FF5-7830 1 500,000 sheets
3 Feed Roller FF6-1975 2 500,000 sheets
T-3-7

■■Multi Deck-A1
No. Parts name Parts number Q'ty Estimated life Remarks
1 Pickup Roller FF5-7829 3 500,000 sheets
2 Separation Roller FB5-6586 3 500,000 sheets
3 Feed Roller FF6-1975 3 500,000 sheets
5 Pickup Clutch FH6-5145 6 4,000,000
pages
6 Pickup Roller Release Solenoid FH6-5146 3 4,000,000
pages
T-3-8

3-4
3
Periodic service > Consumable parts > Options > Staple Finisher-L1
 3 Periodic service > Periodical maintenance > ADF
3-5

Periodical maintenance ADF

Symbols Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection
Printer engine No. Location for maintenance Number of Interval Description Remarks
locations
Symbols Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection 1 Post-separation Sensor 1 160K sheets Δ • Scanner Sensor only
No. Location for maintenance Number of Interval Description Remarks or 12 months
locations 2 Post-separation Sensor 2 1 160K sheets Δ • Cleaned based
1 Developing Assembly Cover 1 ea. 150K Δ or 12 months on the number of
(C/M/Y) actually fed paper
2 Developing Assembly Cover 1 150K Δ 3 Post-separation Sensor 3 1 160K sheets Δ
(Bk) or 12 months
3 Transparency Sensor 1 150K Δ 4 Lead Sensor 1 160K sheets Δ
4 Pre-fixing Feed Belt 1 550K Δ Specified in the or 12 months
5 Post-secondary Transfer 1 550K Δ number of sheets on 5 Registration Sensor 1 160K sheets Δ
Sensor a A4 size conversion or 12 months
6 Registration Sensor 1 550K Δ basis 6 Delivery Sensor 1 160K sheets Δ
or 12 months
7 Paper Width Sensor 4 550K Δ
7 Registration Roller 1 80K sheets or Δ
8 ITB Drive Roller 1 550K Δ
6 months
9 ITB Steering Roller 1 550K Δ
8 Lead Roller 1 1 80K sheets or Δ
10 Post Upper Duct 1 150K Δ
6 months
11 Shield Plate (Primary 1 150K Δ
9 Lead Roller 2 1 80K sheets or Δ
Charging Assembly)
6 months
12 Shield Plate (Pre-transfer 1 150K Δ
10 Lead Roller 3 1 80K sheets or Δ
Charging Assembly)
6 months
13 Developing Lower Toner 1 500K Δ
11 Pullout Roller 1 80K sheets or Δ
Tray
6 months
14 Catch Sheet 1 ea. 150K Δ
12 Feed Roller 1 80K sheets or Δ
15 Drum Heater 1 500K ×/Δ
6 months
T-3-10
13 Delivery Roller 1 80K sheets or Δ
6 months
Reader 14 Rollers/Slave Rollers - 80K sheets or Δ
6 months
Symbols Δ: Cleaning ×: Lubrication □: Adjustment ■: Inspection 15 Scrapers - 80K sheets or Δ
No. Location for maintenance Number of Interval Description Remarks 6 months
locations 16 ADF height adjustment - 80K sheets or □ Adjustment
6 months
1 Surface of the Original Whenever Δ Including the position
T-3-12
Glass (Large) needed of the White Plate on
the back surface of the
glass
2 Surface/rear surface Whenever Δ
of the Original Glass needed
(Small)
3 Scanner Rail Whenever Δ/×
needed
T-3-11

3-5
3
Periodic service > Periodical maintenance > ADF
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning
■
■List
■
■Main
of Parts
Controller System
■
■Laser Exposure System
■
■Image Formation System
■
■Fixing System
■
■Pickup Feed System
■
■External Auxiliary System
■
■Options

4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
4-2

List of Parts Key No. Name Reference

[1] Left Middle Cover (Refer to page 4-345)
[2] Left Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-344)
List of External / Internal Cover [3] Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343)
[4] Upper Cover -
[5] [5] Upper Middle Cover -
[4]
[6] Upper Right Cover -
[3] [7] Front Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-339)
[8] Front Cover -
[2] [9] Deck Right Cover -
[10] Cassette Front Cover -
[1] [11] Upper Left Cover -
[12] Deck Left Cover -
[6] [13] Left Lower Cover 2 -
[20]
[14] Handle Cover -
[15] Left Lower Cover 1 -
[19]
[16] Reverse Door Cover -
[7] [17] Reverse Door Face Cover -
[18] Left Lower Cover 3 (Refer to page 4-345)
[19] Box Left Cover -
[14] [20] Box Left Connector Cover -
T-4-1
[8]

[18] [9]

[17]

[16]
[10]
[15]
[14] [11]

[13]
[12]
F-4-1

4-2
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
4-3
[3] Key No.. Name Reference
[4]
[2] [1] Right Upper Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341)
[2] Right Middle Cover -
[1] [5] [3] Right Upper Cover 2 (Refer to page 4-342)
[4] Box Right Cover (Refer to page 4-342)
[5] Box Right Connector Cover -
[17] [6] Rear Upper Cover -
[6]
[7] Noise Reduction Cover -
[8] Rear Lower Cover (Refer to page 4-346)
[9] HDD Cover -
[10] Waste Toner Container Cover -
[11] Right Lower Cover 3 -
[16]
[12] Handle Cover -
[13] Vertical Path Cover -
[14] Right Lower Cover 1 -
[7] [15] Right Lower Cover 2 -
[16] Multi-purpose Tray -
[12] [17] Multi-purpose Tray Cover -
T-4-2

[15]

[14] [8]

[13]
[9]
[12]
[10]
[11]

F-4-2

4-3
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
4-4

Key No. Name Reference

[1] Toner Container Replacement Cover (Y) -
[3] [2] Toner Container Replacement Cover (M) -
[2] [3] Toner Container Replacement Cover (C) -
[4] Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339)
[1] [4] [5] [5] Toner Container Replacement Cover (Bk) -
[6] Front Inner Handle Right Cover -
[7] ITB Inner Right Cover -
[6] [8] Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover -
[9] Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover -
[10] Process Unit Inner Cover -
[11] ITB Inner Middle Cover -
[12] Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover -
[13] ITB Inner Left Cover -
[14] Front Inner Handle Left Cover -
[14]
T-4-3

[13]

[7]
[12]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
F-4-3

4-4
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-5
List of Main Unit

[1]

[6] [2]

[5]
[4]
[3]

[12]

[13] [10]

[11]

[9]

[8]

[7]

F-4-4

4-5
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-6

Key No. Name Reference

[1] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261)
[2] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-267)
[3] Laser Scanner Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-127)
[4] Laser Scanner Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-127)
[5] Laser Scanner Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-127)
[6] Laser Scanner Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-127)
[7] Process Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-239)
[8] Process Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-239)
[9] Process Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-239)
[10] Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214)
[11] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203)
[12] Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-199)
[13] Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232)
T-4-4

4-6
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-7

[1]

[2]

[4]
[5]
[6]

[8]

[3]

[9]

[7]
[10]

F-4-5

4-7
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-8

Key No. Name Reference

[1] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136)
[2] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285)
[3] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-310)
[4] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334)
[5] Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168)
[6] Pre-Fixing Feed Belt Unit (Refer to page 4-332)
[7] Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-327)
[8] Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326)
[9] Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326)
[10] Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326)
T-4-5

4-8
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-9
[3]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[5]

F-4-6

Key No. Name Reference

[1] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331)
[2] Flat Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-95)
[3] Upright Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-100)
[4] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325)
[5] Vertical Path Unit (Refer to page 4-326)
T-4-6

4-9
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-10

[6]

[5]

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-4-7

4-10
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-11
Key No. Name Reference
[1] Vertical Path Drive Unit -
[2] Cassette Drive Unit -
[3] Deck Drive Unit -
[4] Multi Pickup Drive Unit -
[5] Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254)
[6] Process Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-276)
T-4-7

4-11
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-12
List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning

[1]

[2] [6]

[8]
[7]

[4]

[6]

[7]

[3]

[5]

[8] [6]
F-4-8

4-12
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-13

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] Multi-purpose Tray Roller Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-312) -
[2] Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-313) -
[3] Left Deck Pickup Roller Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-318) -
[4] Left Deck Separation Roller Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-318) -
[5] Left Deck Feed Roller Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-318) -
[6] Right Deck Separation Roller Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-315) -
Cassette 3 Separation Roller Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-320) -
Cassette 4 Separation Roller Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-323) -
[7] Right Deck Feed Roller Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-315) -
Cassette 3 Feed Roller Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-320) -
Cassette 4 Feed Roller Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-323) -
[8] Right Deck Pickup Roller Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-315) -
Cassette 3 Pickup Roller Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-320) -
Cassette 4 Pickup Roller Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-323) -
T-4-8

4-13
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-14
[3]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[6]

[9]

[7]
[11]
[2]

[10]

[8]

[12]

[13]

[14]

F-4-9

4-14
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-15

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] Primary Charging Assembly Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-184) When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-185)
[2] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-203) When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-204)
[3] Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-227) -
[4] Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-219) -
[5] Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-227) -
[6] Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-225) -
[7] Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-195) -
[8] Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-194) -
[9] Primary Charging Wire Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-196) When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit (Refer to page 4-203)
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-200)
Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-199)
[10] Grid Plate Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-189) When Replacing the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-192)
[11] Grid Cleaning Pad Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-192) -
[12] Pre-transfer Charging Wire Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-210) When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-204)
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-213)
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-212)
[13] Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-207) -
[14] Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-207) -
T-4-9

4-15
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-16

[2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-4-10

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-242) When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-248)
Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-247)
[2] Developing Assembly (Bk) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-232) When Replacement the Developing Assembly (Refer to page 4-237)
T-4-10

4-16
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-17

[1]

[4]

[2]

[5]

[3]
F-4-11

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] Primary Transfer Roller ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-157) When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller (Refer to page 4-159)
[2] ITB Cleaning Blade ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-140) After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-144)
[3] Secondary Transfer Inner Roller ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-159) -
[4] ITB ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
Cleaning when replacing the ITB (Refer to page 4-156)
[5] ITB Inside Scraper ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-161) -
T-4-11

4-17
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-18

[5]

[4]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[7]

[3] [6]
F-4-12

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-170) -
[2] Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-169) -
[3] Fixing Heat Soaking Roller Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-302) -
[4] Fixing Pressure Roller Unit Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-301) -
[5] Fixing Film Unit Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-300) -
[6] Ball Bearing Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-302) -
[7] Fixing Web Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-288) -
T-4-12

4-18
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-19

[3]

[1]

[4]

[2]

F-4-13

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] Waste Toner Container Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-277) -
[2] Ozone Filter Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-347) -
[3] Primary Charging Dustproof Filter Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-349) -
[4] Fixing Dustproof Filter Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-347) -
T-4-13

4-19
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-20

[2]

[1]

[6] [5]
[7]
[9]
[8]

[4]

[3]

[10]

F-4-14

4-20
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-21

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] ITB Driver Roller ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-156) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit
(Refer to page 4-133)
[2] ITB Steering Roller ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-156) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit
(Refer to page 4-133)
[3] Original Size Sensor 1 Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-335) -
[4] Original Size Sensor 2 Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-335) -
[5] Original Size Sensor 3 Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-335) -
[6] Original Size Sensor 4 Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-335) -
[7] Transparency Sensor Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-335) -
[8] Registration Sensor Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-335) -
[9] Post-secondary Transfer Sensor Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-333) -
[10] Pre-fixing Feed Belt Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-333) -
T-4-14

4-21
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-22

[1]

[4]

[2]

[5]

[6]
[3]

[7]

[8]

F-4-15

4-22
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
4-23

Key No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
[1] Drum Sliding Shaft Support Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-221) -
[2] Pre-transfer Upper Duct Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-212) -
[3] Toner Catch Tray (Bk) Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-224) -
[4] Primary Charging Shield Plate Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-199) -
[5] Pre-transfer Shield Plate Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-212) -
[6] Sleeve Cover (Bk) Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-238) -
[7] Sleeve Cover (Y)/(M)/(C) Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-247) -
[8] Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-247) -
T-4-15

4-23
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Periodical Consumable Parts/Locations for Periodical Cleaning
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-24
List of Clutch / Solenoid

[A]

SL1

[A] [C]

SL5
[C]

[B] [D]
[D]

[E] SL7
[B]

SL6
[E]

SL8

F-4-16

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

SL1 Registration Patch Shutter Solenoid ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
SL6 Left Deck Pickup Solenoid Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-327) -
SL5 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
SL7 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
SL8 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
T-4-16

4-24
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-25
[B]

SL4

[A]
[B] SL2

[A] SL9

F-4-17

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

SL9 Remote Shut down Solenoid Product Configuration - -
SL2 Delivery Flapper Solenoid Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
SL4 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325) -
T-4-17

4-25
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-26
List of Motor

M29

M27
M28
M26

F-4-18

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

M26 Developing Stirring Motor (Y) Product Configuration - -
M27 Developing Stirring Motor (C) Product Configuration - -
M28 Developing Stirring Motor (M) Product Configuration - -
M29 Developing Stirring Motor (Bk) Product Configuration - -
T-4-18

4-26
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-27

[A]
M83

M82

(Bk)
M81
M86
(C)
M80
M85
(M)
M84
(Y)

M6
[A]
M7
[B]

[C]

M16

M13

M10
M15

M12
M9

[B]

[C]

F-4-19

4-27
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-28

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

M6 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Bk) [B] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
M7 Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk) [B] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
M9 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Y) [C] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
M10 Toner Container Drive Motor (Y) [C] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
M12 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (M) [C] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
M13 Toner Container Drive Motor (M) [C] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
M15 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (C) [C] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
M16 Toner Container Drive Motor (C) [C] Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
M80 Laser Scanner Motor (Y) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
M81 Laser Scanner Motor (M) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
M82 Laser Scanner Motor (C) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
M83 Laser Scanner Motor (Bk) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
M84 Skew Correction Motor (Y) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
M85 Skew Correction Motor (M) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
M86 Skew Correction Motor (C) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
T-4-19

4-28
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-29

[C]

M1
[C]
[D]
M2

[B] [B]
M37 [A]
[A]

M54 [D]

M38

M4

M5

M3

F-4-20

4-29
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-30

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

M37 Delivery Motor [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
M38 Reverse Motor [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
M54 Reverse Detachment Motor [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
M1 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor [C] Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184) -
M2 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor [B] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203) -
M3 ITB Drive Motor [D] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
M4 Steering Drive Motor [D] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
M5 Primary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor [D] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
T-4-20

4-30
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-31
[A]

M57

M34
M56

M55
M35
[B]
M48

[C]

M31
[B]

[D]
[A]
[D]

[C]

M32

F-4-21

4-31
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-32

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

M48 Fixing Motor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-305) -
M55 Web Motor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
M56 Core Shutter Motor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
M57 Reciprocation Motor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
M31 Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-285) -
M34 Registration Motor [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
M35 Pre-fixing Feed Motor [C] Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
M32 Duplex Left Motor [D] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
T-4-21

4-32
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-33

M18

M24
M22
M30

M20
M19

M25
[A]
M23

M21

[B]
[F]
[A]
[F]
[B]
M36
[E]
[C] [E]

M40

[C] M43

[D]
M39 M41

M44
M42

M45

[D]

F-4-22

4-33
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-34
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
M18 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk) [A] Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
M19 Drum Motor (Bk) [A] Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254) -
M20 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y) [B] Process Drive Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-276) -
M21 Drum Motor (Y) [B] Process Drive Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-257) -
M22 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M) [B] Process Drive Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-276) -
M23 Drum Motor (M) [B] Process Drive Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-257) -
M24 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C) [B] Process Drive Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-276) -
M25 Drum Motor (C) [B] Process Drive Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-257) -
M30 Drum Cleaning and Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor [A] Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
M36 Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor [F] Multi Pickup Drive Unit - -
M39 Cassette Vertical Path Motor [C] Vertical Path Drive Unit - -
M40 Right Deck Vertical Path Motor [C] Vertical Path Drive Unit - -
M41 Left Deck Vertical Path Motor [C] Vertical Path Drive Unit - -
M42 Left Deck Pickup Motor [E] Deck Drive Unit - -
M43 Right Deck Pickup Motor [E] Deck Drive Unit - -
M44 Cassette 3 Pickup Motor [D] Cassette Drive Unit - -
M45 Cassette 4 Pickup Motor [D] Caseette Drive Unit - -
T-4-22

4-34
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-35
List of Fan

FM3

FM2
FM22 FM18

FM4 FM19

FM5

FM1 FM20
FM6

FM7
FM9
FM8

F-4-23

4-35
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-36
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
FM1 Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
FM2 Primary Charging Suction Fan Product Configuration - -
FM3 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-261) -
FM4 Developing and Pre-transfer Charging Fan Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
FM5 Color Cleaning Fan Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
FM6 Fixing Heat Fan Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
FM7 IH Power Supply Fan Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-117) -
FM8 Power Supply Fan 1 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
FM9 Power Supply Fan 2 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
FM18 Hopper Cooling Fan Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
FM19 Controller Cooling Fan 1 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-104) -
FM20 Controller Cooling Fan 2 Product Configuration - -
FM22 Hopper Cooling Suction Fan Product Configuration - -
T-4-23

4-36
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-37

FM16

FM27
[B] FM15

[A]

[A]
[B]
FM10

FM23
FM11
FM24
FM12

FM13

F-4-24

4-37
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-38
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
FM10 Delivery Heat Fan 1 [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
FM11 Delivery Heat Fan 2 [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
FM12 Delivery Heat Fan 3 [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
FM13 Delivery Heat Fan 4 [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
FM23 Anti-adhesion Fan 1 [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
FM24 Anti-adhesion Fan 2 [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
FM15 Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Front) [B] Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-332) -
FM16 Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) [B] Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-332) -
FM27 Pre-fixing Feed Cooling Fan [B] Pre-Fixing Paper Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-332) -
T-4-24

4-38
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fan
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-39
List of Sensor

PS112
TS9

PS41
PS42
PS43

PS46 PS45

PS80

PS44

PS47
PS48

PS35

F-4-25

4-39
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-40

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

PS35 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 Product Configuration - -
PS41 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Product Configuration - -
PS42 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Product Configuration - -
PS43 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 Product Configuration - -
PS44 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Product Configuration - -
PS45 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Product Configuration - -
PS46 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 Product Configuration - -
PS47 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1 Product Configuration - -
PS48 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2 Product Configuration - -
PS80 Front Cover Sensor Product Configuration - -
PS112 Waste Toner Battele Set Sensor Product Configuration - -
TS9 Waste Toner Full Sensor Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-118) -
T-4-25

4-40
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-41
[A]
PS97
PS96
PS29
PS100 PS30
PS99
PS95
PS28
PS70 PS90 PS94
PS102
PS23
PS75 PS73 PS91 PS22
PS98

PS110
[B]

[C]

[D]

[B]
[C] PS27

PS26
[A]
[D]
PS25

PS24

F-4-26

4-41
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-42

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

PS70 Fixing Inlet Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS73 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS75 Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS98 Core HP Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS99 Fixing Uunifiform Roller HP Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS100 Reciprocation HP Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS102 Web Level Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS110 Half Pressure Position Sensor [A] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS22 Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor [C] Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-168) -
PS23 Post-secondary Transfer Sensor [C] Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-168) -
PS28 Registration Sensor [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
PS29 Transparency Sensor [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
PS30 Vertical Path Merging Sensor [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
PS90 Loop Sensor 1 [C] Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-168) -
PS91 Loop Sensor 2 [C] Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-168) -
PS94 Original Size Sensor 1 [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
PS95 Original Size Sensor 2 [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
PS96 Original Size Sensor 3 [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
PS97 Original Size Sensor 4 [B] Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
PS24 Duplex Sensor 1 [D] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
PS25 Duplex Sensor 2 [D] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-310) -
PS26 Duplex Sensor 3 [D] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-168) -
PS27 Duplex Sensor 4 [D] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-334) -
T-4-26

4-42
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-43
PS84
PS8
[A]
PS9

PS83 TS5
PS17
[D]
[B]
PS82 [E]
PS14 TS8
PS81
PS11 TS7

TS6 [C]
PS18 PS7
PS103
PS15

PS12 TS1
PS92
PS6 PS16
(Bk) PS104
PS13 TS4
PS93
PS10 TS3

TS2
(Y) / (M) / (C) [G]
PS50
PS52
[B] PS49
[A]
PS51
PS53

[H]
[E] [F] PS60
PS62
PS58 PS59
[D] PS55

[F] PS57 PS61

[C] [G] PS54 PS63
PS56 [I]
PS65
[H] PS67
PS64
[I]
PS66
PS68

F-4-27

4-43
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-44

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

PS6 Toner Supply Cover Sensor [A] Hopper Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS7 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Bk) [A] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
PS8 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Bk) [A] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
PS9 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Bk) [A] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
PS10 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Y) [A] Hopper Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS11 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Y) [A] Hopper Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS12 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Y) [A] Hopper Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS13 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (M) [A] Hopper Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS14 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (M) [A] Hopper Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS15 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (M) [A] Hopper Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS16 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (C) [A] Hopper Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS17 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (C) [A] Hopper Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS18 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (C) [A] Hopper Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS81 Toner Container Phase Sensor (Y) [A] Hopper Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS82 Toner Container Phase Sensor (M) [A] Hopper Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS83 Toner Container Phase Sensor (C) [A] Hopper Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS84 Toner Container Phase Sensor (Bk) [A] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
TS5 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Bk) [A] Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-261) -
TS6 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y) [A] Hopper Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-267) -
TS7 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M) [A] Hopper Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-267) -
TS8 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C) [A] Hopper Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-267) -
PS92 Primary Wire HP Sensor [E] Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184) -
PS93 Pre-transfer Charging Wire HP Sensor [D] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203) -
PS103 Primary Charging Wire Rotation Position Sensor [E] Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184) -
PS104 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor [D] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203) -
TS1 Toner Density Sensor (Bk) [B] Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214) -
TS2 Toner Density Sensor (Y) [C] Process Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-239) -
TS3 Toner Density Sensor (M) [C] Process Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-239) -
TS4 Toner Density Sensor (C) [C] Process Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-239) -
PS49 Right Deck Pickup Sensor [G] Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS50 Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor [G] Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS51 Right Deck Paper Sensor [G] Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS52 Right Deck Paper Height Sensor [G] Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS53 Vertical Path Sensor 1 [G] Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS54 Left Deck Pickup Sensor [F] Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-327) -
PS55 Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor [F] Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-327) -
PS56 Left Deck Paper Sensor [F] Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-327) -
PS57 Left Deck Paper Height Sensor [F] Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-327) -
PS58 Left Deck Pullout Sensor [F] Left Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-327) -
PS59 Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor [H] Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS60 Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor [H] Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS61 Cassette 3 Paper Sensor [H] Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS62 Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor [H] Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS63 Vertical Path Sensor 3 [H] Cassette 3 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS64 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor [I] Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -

4-44
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-45
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
PS65 Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor [I] Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS66 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor [I] Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS67 Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor [I] Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS68 Vertical Path Sensor 4 [I] Cassette 4 Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
T-4-27

4-45
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-46

PS20 [B]
[A]
PS21

PS19

PS2
PS5

PS4
PS3
PS38 PS79
PS37

[C] [D]

PS111
PS101
PS31
PS33

[B] PS32

PS34
[A]
PS36 PS40

PS39
[D]
[C]

F-4-28

4-46
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-47
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
PS2 ITB Displacement Sensor [A] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
PS3 Steering Drive HP Sensor [A] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
PS4 Primary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor [A] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
PS5 ITB HP Sensor [A] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
PS19 Registration Patch Sensor (Front) [A] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
PS20 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) [A] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
PS21 Patch Sensor [A] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
PS37 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor [B] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325) -
PS38 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor [B] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325) -
PS79 Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor [B] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325) -
PS31 Outer Delivery Sensor [C] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
PS32 Reverse Sensor [C] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
PS33 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 [C] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
PS34 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 [C] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
PS36 Lower Left Cover Sensor [C] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
PS101 Reverse Roller Detachment HP Sensor [C] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-330) -
PS111 Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor [C] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-330) -
PS39 Lower Right Cover Sensor [D] Vertical Path Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
PS40 Vertical Path Sensor 2 [D] Vertical Path Unit (Refer to page 4-326) -
T-4-28

4-47
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
4-48
Lamp / Heater, others

THM6

THM5

H6

ENV1

ELB2
ELB1,ELB3
IL1 IL2

F-4-29

4-48
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
4-49

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

H6 Cassette Heater Product Configuration - -
ELB1 Leakage Breaker 1 (100V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
ELB2 Leakage Breaker 2 (120V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
ELB3 Leakage Breaker 3 (200V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
IL1 Inlet Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
IL2 Inlet Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
ENV1 Environment Sensor Product Configuration - -
THM5 Drum Thermopile Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-175) -
THM6 Drum Thermistor Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-181) -
T-4-29

4-49
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
4-50
[A]

[B]

H1
LED4

LED3

LED2

[A]

[B] LED1
[C]

[C]

VR1
[D]
H11

H10

[D]

H4

THM15

THM14
THM13
THM11
TP2 THM12
THM16

F-4-30

4-50
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
4-51
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
H1 Drum Heater (Bk) [A] Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214) -
LED2 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y) [B] Process Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-239) -
LED3 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) [B] Process Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-239) -
LED4 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) [B] Process Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-239) -
H10 Drum Heater (Y) [C] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
H11 Drum Heater (M) [C] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
LED1 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) [C] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
VR1 ITB Unit Varistor [C] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
THM11 Main Thermistor [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
THM12 Thermistor (Front) [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
THM13 Sub Thermistor 1 [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
THM14 Sub Thermistor 2 [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
THM15 Thermistor (Rear) [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
THM16 Pressure RollerThermistor [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
TP2 Fixing Thermal Switch [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
H4 IH Coil [D] Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285) -
T-4-30

4-51
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Lamp / Heater, others
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-52
List of Switch

SW9
SW18
SW10

SW14
SW7

SW15
SW1
SW16 SW2

SW17

SW12
SW13

F-4-31

4-52
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-53

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

SW1 Front Door Switch 1 Product Configuration - -
SW2 Front Door Switch 2 Product Configuration - -
SW7 Fixing Feed Unit Switch Product Configuration - -
SW9 Key Switch Product Configuration - -
SW10 Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch Product Configuration - -
SW12 Environment Switch Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
SW13 Cassette Heater Switch Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
SW14 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-337) -
SW15 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 2 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-337) -
SW16 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-337) -
SW17 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 2 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-337) -
SW18 Main Switch Product Configuration - -
T-4-31

4-53
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switch
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-54
[B]

SW3

[B]
[A]

[A]

SW5

F-4-32

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

SW5 Delivery Door Switch [A] Reverse Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-331) -
SW3 Multi-purpose Tray Unit Switch [B] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325) -
T-4-32

4-54
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switch
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-55
List of PCB

[A]

[A]

UN15

UN14
[B]

UN67

UN66

[B]
F-4-33

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

UN14 Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) [A] Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-182) -
UN15 Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C)/(Bk) [A] Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-182) -
UN66 Secondary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance [B] Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-168) -
UN67 Secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage Contact Resistance [B] Secondary Transfer Unit (Refer to page 4-168) -
T-4-33

4-55
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-56

UN107

[A]
UN105
[B]

UN103 UN65
UN108
UN64
UN101
UN106
(Bk) UN63

UN62 UN28
UN104 (C)

UN102
(M) UN17

UN16
(Y)

[C]

[A]

UN49

UN48

UN5
[B]

[C]

F-4-34

4-56
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-57
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
UN101 Laser Driver PCB (Y) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN102 BD PCB (Y) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN103 Laser Driver PCB (M) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN104 BD PCB (M) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN105 Laser Driver PCB (C) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN106 BD PCB (C) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN107 Laser Driver PCB (Bk) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN108 BD PCB (Bk) [A] Laser Scanner Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-127) When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-130)
UN16 ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 [B] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
UN17 ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 [B] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
UN28 ITB Relay PCB [B] ITB Unitt (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
UN62 Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y) [B] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
UN63 Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (M) [B] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
UN64 Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (C) [B] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
UN65 Primary Transfer High Voltage Contact Resistance (Bk) [B] ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-147) Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-133)
UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB [C] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-124) -
UN48 Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB [C] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-122) -
UN49 Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB [C] Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-123) -
T-4-34

4-57
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-58
UN202
UN201

[C] UN200

[A]

UN207

UN205
UN206

UN26

[C]

[B]

[B]
[A]
UN110

UN111
UN112

UN113

F-4-35

4-58
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-59
No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen
UN26 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB [A] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325) -
UN110 Ten Key PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-95) -
UN111 CPU PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-95) -
UN112 Sub Key PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-95) -
UN113 Volume PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-95) -
UN200 TALLY PCB [C] Upright Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-100) -
UN201 CPU PCB [C] Upright Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-100) -
UN202 Ten Key PCB [C] Upright Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-100) -
UN205 Volume PCB [C] Upright Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-100) -
UN206 Sub Key PCB [C] Upright Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-100) -
UN207 LED Driver PCB [C] Upright Control Panel Unit (Refer to page 4-100) -
T-4-35

4-59
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-60

UN29
UN6
UN55
UN58
UN57
UN56 UN51
UN39

UN40
UN61
UN54
UN60 UN43
UN53
UN52 UN4
UN50 UN59
UN37

UN33
UN34
UN30

UN80

UN38
UN8,9,10
UN7
UN11,12

UN31

UN35
F-4-36

4-60
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-61

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-111) -
UN29 Potential Control PCB Product Configuration - -
UN51 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Bk) Product Configuration - -
UN52 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Y) Product Configuration - -
UN53 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (M) Product Configuration - -
UN54 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (C) Product Configuration - -
UN55 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (Bk) Product Configuration - -
UN56 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y) Product Configuration - -
UN57 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (M) Product Configuration - -
UN58 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage Contact Resistance (C) Product Configuration - -
UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-118) -
UN7 Relay PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
UN8 AC Driver PCB (100V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
UN9 AC Driver PCB (120V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
UN10 AC Driver PCB (200V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB (100V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB (200V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
UN30 IH Power Supply PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-117) -
UN31 All-night Power Supply PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-114) -
UN33 DC Power Supply PCB (12V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
UN34 DC Power Supply PCB (24VA) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
UN35 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-113) -
UN37 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-118) -
UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-118) -
UN50 Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk) Product Configuration - -
UN80 ECO-ID PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-117) -
UN39 Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-112) -
UN40 Developing High Voltage PCB (CL) Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-112) -
UN59 Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y) Product Configuration - -
UN60 Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (M) Product Configuration - -
UN61 Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (C) Product Configuration - -
UN43 Pre-transfer PCB Product Configuration - -
T-4-36

4-61
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-62

UN115
UN83

UN100 UN116

UN2

UN99

F-4-37

4-62
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-63

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

UN2 DC Controller PCB Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-109) -
UN83 Riser PCB Product Configuration - -
UN100 Laser Interface PCB Product Configuration - -
UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-104) -
UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 Product Configuration (Refer to page 4-106) -
UN99 Laser Power Supply Relay PCB Product Configuration - -
T-4-37

4-63
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-64

[A]

[B]

UN19
UN18
UN25
UN24 UN22
UN23

UN21
[A]
UN20

[B]
F-4-38

4-64
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-65

No. Name Main Unit Reference Adjustment during parts replacemen

UN18 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 [A] Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254) -
UN19 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 [A] Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254) -
UN20 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 [B] Process Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-257) -
UN21 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 [B] Process Unit (Y) (Refer to page 4-257) -
UN22 Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 [B] Process Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-257) -
UN23 Drum Speed Detection PCB (M )2 [B] Process Unit (M) (Refer to page 4-257) -
UN24 Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 [B] Process Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-257) -
UN25 Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 [B] Process Unit (C) (Refer to page 4-257) -
T-4-38

4-65
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCB
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-66
List of Connectors

24

30
35

37
38 36

27

26
25 31

16
22 8 15
7
2 13 33
1 5
3 4
6 10
18 17
19 20
11 9
28 14
12
34

23
32 29
21

F-4-39

4-66
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-67
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1200 UN2 DC Controller PCB 21 J1817 UN7 Relay PCB
2 J1201 UN2 DC Controller PCB 22 J5600 UN99 Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
3 J1210 UN2 DC Controller PCB J9002 - - RS232C I/F
4 J1211 UN2 DC Controller PCB J9005 - - -
5 J1212 UN2 DC Controller PCB 23 J9007 UN80 ECO-ID PCB
6 J1214 UN2 DC Controller PCB 24 J9006 SW9 Key Switch
7 J1220 UN2 DC Controller PCB 25 J5501 UN100 Laser Interface PCB
8 J1221 UN2 DC Controller PCB 26 J5502 UN100 Laser Interface PCB
9 J1222 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8023 27 J1511 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB
10 J1223 UN2 DC Controller PCB 28 J1400 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB
11 J1224 UN2 DC Controller PCB 29 J1805 UN7 Relay PCB
12 J1225 UN2 DC Controller PCB 30 J1901 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB
13 J1226 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8223 - - Buffer Driver
13 J1226 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8227 - - To finisher
14 J1227 UN2 DC Controller PCB J3030 31 J3045 UN40 Developing High Voltage PCB (CL)
14 J1227 UN2 DC Controller PCB 32 J3051 UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color)
15 J1228 UN2 DC Controller PCB 33 J3570 UN43 Primary Transfer PCB
16 J1230 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8240 - - Multi Deck
17 J1231 UN2 DC Controller PCB 34 J1401 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB
18 J1240 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8010 J8050 35 J2700 UN28 ITB Relay PCB
19 J1241 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8010 J8050 35 J2700 UN28 ITB Relay PCB
20 J1242 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8011 J8050 J8047 36 J7318 UN16 ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1
20 J1242 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8011 J8050 J8047 37 J7319 UN17 ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2
20 J1242 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8011 J8050 38 J7518 M3 ITB Drive Motor
T-4-39

4-67
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-68

18 22
16
13 11
10 19
15
12
23
9
14 21
8 20
4
7
6
5

17

1
2

F-4-40

4-68
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-69

KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1243 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8038 J3031 4 J7152 M29 Developing Stirring Motor (Bk)
1 J1243 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8038 J3031 5 J7156 M28 Developing Stirring Motor (M)
1 J1243 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8038 J3031 6 J7157 M27 Developing Stirring Motor (C)
1 J1243 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8038 J3031 7 J7158 M26 Developing Stirring Motor (Y)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8085 J8087 J8028 8 J7133 TS2 Toner Density Sensor (Y)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8085 J8088 J8029 9 J7134 TS3 Toner Density Sensor (M)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8086 J8089 J8030 10 J7135 TS4 Toner Density Sensor (C)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8080 J8117 J8015 11 J7146 TS1 Toner Density Sensor (Bk)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8093 12 J7533 UN14 Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8093 13 J7534 UN15 Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB (C)/(Bk)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8085 J8087 J7130 14 J7547 LED2 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8085 J8088 J7131 15 J7548 LED3 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8086 J8089 J7132 16 J7549 LED4 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C)
2 J1244 UN2 DC Controller PCB 17 J8094 PS80 Front Cover Sensor
3 J1245 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8002 J80009 J80011 18 J10021 PS92 Primary Charging Wire HP Sensor
3 J1245 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8002 J80009 J80011 19 J10022 PS103 Primary Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor
3 J1245 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8002 J80009 J80010 20 J10023 PS93 Pre-transfer Charging Wire HP Sensor
3 J1245 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8002 J80009 J80010 21 J10024 PS104 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Rotary Position Sensor
3 J1245 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8002 J8009 22 J7147 M1 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
3 J1245 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8002 J8009 23 J7148 M2 Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
T-4-40

4-69
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-70

28
21 29
30
26 27
22 33
18
14 23 34
16
13
35
24 25
11 31
17
12 20
15 10
19
8

7
9 6

36

1
3
4
2

F-4-41

4-70
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-71
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1246 UN2 DC Controller PCB 6 J7122 PS10 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Y)
1 J1246 UN2 DC Controller PCB 7 J7125 PS13 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (M)
1 J1246 UN2 DC Controller PCB 8 J7128 PS16 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (C)
1 J1246 UN2 DC Controller PCB 9 J7137 PS6 Toner Supply Cover Sensor
1 J1246 UN2 DC Controller PCB 10 J7138 PS7 Toner Container Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (Bk)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8107 J7105 11 J10031 M12 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (M)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8106 J7104 12 J7100 M9 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Y)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8106 J7100 13 J7104 M10 Toner Container Drive Motor (Y)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8107 J7101 14 J7105 M13 Toner Container Drive Motor (M)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8106 15 J7121 TS6 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Y)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8106 16 J7123 PS81 Toner Container Phase Sensor (Y)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8107 17 J7124 TS7 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (M)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8107 18 J7126 PS82 Toner Container Phase Sensor (M)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8106 19 J7418 PS12 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Y)
2 J1247 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8107 20 J7419 PS15 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (M)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8040 J7103 21 J10025 M7 Toner Container Drive Motor (Bk)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8108 J7102 22 J10026 M16 Toner Container Drive Motor (C)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8040 J7107 23 J10028 M6 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (Bk)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8108 J7106 24 J10033 M15 Hopper and Stirring Supply Motor (C)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8108 25 J7127 TS8 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (C)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8108 26 J7129 PS83 Toner Container Phase Sensor (C)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8040 27 J7136 TS5 Hopper Toner Level Sensor (Bk)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8040 28 J7139 PS84 Toner Container Phase Sensor (Bk)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8040 J7135 29 J71750 PS8 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Bk)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8040 30 J7417 PS9 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (Bk)
3 J1248 UN2 DC Controller PCB J8108 31 J7420 PS18 Toner Feed Screw Rotation Sensor (C)
4 J1249 UN2 DC Controller PCB 32 J7111 FM3 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan
4 J1249 UN2 DC Controller PCB J7197 33 J71970 PS17 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (C)
4 J1249 UN2 DC Controller PCB J7198 34 J71980 PS14 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (M)
4 J1249 UN2 DC Controller PCB J7199 35 J71990 PS11 Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor (Y)
5 J1251 UN2 DC Controller PCB 36 J7520 FM6 Fixing Heat Fan
T-4-41

4-71
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-72

29

13 15 12
17 14 16
42

8
28
10 37
25 9 26
44
43
20 32
27
21 39 38
24
11 22 40
18
23
19
41

30

31 34

5
35
33
3
1
36
6 2
7
4

F-4-42

4-72
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-73
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1402 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8144 8 J7033 PS41 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
1 J1402 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8144 9 J7034 PS42 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
1 J1402 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8146 10 J7035 PS43 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
1 J1402 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8146 11 J7036 PS44 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
2 J1403 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8063 12 J7060 PS54 Left Deck Pickup Sensor
2 J1403 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8063 13 J7061 PS55 Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor
2 J1403 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8063 14 J7062 PS56 Left Deck Paper Sensor
2 J1403 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8063 15 J7063 PS57 Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
2 J1403 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8063 16 J7064 PS58 Left Deck Pullout Sensor
2 J1403 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8063 17 J7065 SL6 Left Deck Pickup Solenoid
3 J1404 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8141 18 J7019 SW14 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 1
3 J1404 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8043 19 J7021 SW16 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 1
3 J1404 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8141 20 J7038 PS45 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1
3 J1404 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8141 21 J7039 PS46 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2
3 J1404 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8043 22 J7040 PS47 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 1
3 J1404 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8043 23 J7041 PS48 Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor 2
4 J1405 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8062 J7000 24 J7000 M38 Reverse Motor
4 J1405 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8062 J7002 25 J7002 M37 Delivery Motor
4 J1405 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8062 26 J7008 PS101 Reverse Roller HP Sensor
4 J1405 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8062 27 J7030 M54 Reverse Detachment Motor
4 J1405 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8062 J8036 28 J7540 PS111 Outer Delivery OHP Sensor
5 J1406 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB 29 J8116 SW10 Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch
5 J1406 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J7001 30 J7001 M36 Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor
5 J1406 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J7527 31 J7527 M39 Cassette Vertical Path Motor
6 J1407 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB 32 J7003 M31 Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor
6 J1407 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB 33 J7004 M42 Left Deck Pickup Motor
6 J1407 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB 34 J7005 M43 Right Deck Pickup Motor
6 J1407 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB 35 J7006 M44 Cassette 3 Pickup Motor
6 J1407 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB 36 J7007 M45 Cassette 4 Pickup Motor
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 J8113 37 J7023 PS31 Outer Delivery Sensor
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 J8105 38 J7024 PS32 Reverse Sensor
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 J8105 39 J7025 PS33 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 40 J7026 PS34 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 41 J7028 PS36 Lower Left Cover Sensor
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 J8113 42 J7029 SL2 Delivery Flapper Solenoid
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 J8113 J8114 43 J7161 FM10 Delivery Heat Fan 1
7 J1408 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8060 J8113 J8114 44 J7541 FM11 Delivery Heat Fan 2
T-4-42

4-73
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-74

22

20
19
21
14 44
15 16 48 43
13
41 17
26
28
27 25 47
29
30
37
39
36
40 35
23
31 46
33
38 24
34 18
32

42

49
50
2 7
11
4 6
5
10
3
12
8
1

45

F-4-43

4-74
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-75
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1409 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2633 13 J7054 PS49 Right Deck Pickup Sensor
1 J1409 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2633 14 J7055 PS50 Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
1 J1409 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2633 15 J7056 PS51 Right Deck Paper Sensor
1 J1409 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2633 16 J7057 PS52 Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
1 J1409 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2633 17 J7058 PS53 Vertical Path Sensor 1
1 J1409 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2633 18 J7059 SL5 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
2 J1410 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8059 19 J7015 PS37 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
2 J1410 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8059 J8110 20 J7016 PS38 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
2 J1410 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8059 21 J7017 SL4 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
2 J1410 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8059 J8110 22 J7018 UN26 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB
3 J1411 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8055 23 J7020 SW15 Cassette 3 Size Detection Switch 2
3 J1411 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8055 24 J7022 SW17 Cassette 4 Size Detection Switch 2
4 J1412 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2635 25 J7042 PS59 Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor
4 J1412 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2635 26 J7043 PS60 Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor
4 J1412 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2635 27 J7044 PS61 Cassette 3 Paper Sensor
4 J1412 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2635 28 J7045 PS62 Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor
4 J1412 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2635 29 J7046 PS63 Vertical Path Sensor 3
4 J1412 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2635 30 J7047 SL7 Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid
5 J1414 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8104 31 J7542 FM12 Delivery Heat Fan 3
5 J1414 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8104 32 J7543 FM13 Delivery Heat Fan 4
5 J1414 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8104 J8244 33 J7545 FM23 Anti-adhesion Fan 1
5 J1414 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8104 J8244 34 J7546 FM24 Anti-adhesion Fan 2
6 J1415 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8023 35 J1510 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB
7 J1416 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2636 36 J7048 PS64 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor
7 J1416 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2636 37 J7049 PS65 Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor
7 J1416 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2636 38 J7050 PS66 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor
7 J1416 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2636 39 J7051 PS67 Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor
7 J1416 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2636 40 J7052 PS68 Vertical Path Sensor 4
7 J1416 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J2636 41 J7053 SL8 Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid
8 J1417 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8090 J8068 42 J7027 PS35 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3
8 J1417 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8061 43 J7031 PS39 Lower Right Cover Sensor
8 J1417 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8061 J8075 44 J7037 PS40 Vertical Path Sensor 2
9 J1450 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB 45 J1821 UN7 Relay PCB
10 J1460 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J8000 46 J7108 ENV1 Environment Sensor
11 J1470 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J898 47 J8981 TS9 Waste Toner Full Sensor
11 J1470 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J899 48 J8980 PS112 Waste Toner Battele Set Sensor
12 J1499 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J7525 49 J7525 M40 Right Deck Vertical Path Motor
12 J1499 UN4 Pickup Feed Driver PCB J7526 50 J7526 M41 Left Deck Vertical Path Motor
T-4-43

4-75
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-76

44 43
28
18
17 29
16 27 40
47 42
46 11
41 39 6
13 5
4
3
20 2
22 7
21
23
8
36 9
38 1
48 12
32 34 10
45 24
35

19 30
15

26
25
14
33
37

31

F-4-44

4-76
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-77
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1500 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8098 J8023 13 J1816 UN7 Relay PCB
2 J1501 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 14 J7200 M32 Duplex Left Motor
2 J1501 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8142 15 J7201 M35 Pre-fixing Feed Motor
2 J1501 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 16 J7208 PS25 Duplex Sensor 2
2 J1501 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 17 J7209 PS26 Duplex Sensor 3
2 J1501 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 18 J7210 PS27 Duplex Sensor 4
2 J1501 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J7202 19 J17205 M57 Reciprocation Motor
3 J1502 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8102 20 J7214 PS22 Secondary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor
3 J1502 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8102 21 J7215 PS23 Post-secondary Transfer Sensor
3 J1502 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8102 22 J17224 PS90 Loop Sensor 1
3 J1502 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8102 23 J17225 PS91 Loop Sensor 2
4 J1503 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8037 24 J7230 FM15 Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Front)
4 J1503 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8037 25 J7236 FM27 Pre-fixing Feed Cooling Fan
5 J1504 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8033 26 J7235 FM16 Pressure Roller Cooling Fan (Rear)
6 J1505 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8091 27 J7211 PS28 Registration Sensor
6 J1505 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 28 J7212 PS29 Transparency Sensor
6 J1505 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J8092 29 J7213 PS30 Vertical Path Merging Sensor
7 J1506 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 30 J7203 M34 Registration Motor
8 J1507 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 31 J7217 M48 Fixing Motor
9 J1508 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 32 J8101 PS24 Duplex Sensor 1
9 J1508 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18138 33 J17206 M56 Core Shutter Motor
9 J1508 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18004 34 J17218 PS98 Core HP Sensor
9 J1508 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18004 35 J17220 PS73 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor
9 J1508 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18138 36 J17229 PS75 Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor
9 J1508 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18004 37 J18007 M55 Web Motor
9 J1508 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18004 38 J18033 PS110 Half Pressure Position Sensor
10 J1509 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 39 J3062 UN48 Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB
10 J1509 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 40 J3540 UN49 Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB
11 J1512 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 41 J18 PS94 Original Size Sensor 1
11 J1512 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 42 J19 PS95 Original Size Sensor 2
11 J1512 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 43 J20 PS96 Original Size Sensor 3
11 J1512 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB 44 J21 PS97 Original Size Sensor 4
12 J1513 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18006 45 J8039 THM16 Pressure Roller Thermistor
12 J1513 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18006 46 J10011 PS100 Reciprocation HP Sensor
12 J1513 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18006 47 J17219 PS99 Fixing Uunifiform Roller HP Sensor
12 J1513 UN5 Fixing Feed Driver PCB J18006 48 J17223 PS70 Fixing Inlet Sensor
T-4-44

4-77
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-78

43
32
34
29 28 37
3 5
11
6
7 36
9 33
1 30
10 31
2
4
8

39
40
42
41 38

35 44
23
27
21 26
15 19 25
17
20
24
14
22
16
13
18

12

F-4-45

4-78
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-79
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1900 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 12 J1815 UN7 Relay PCB
2 J1902 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8019 13 J7300 M21 Drum Motor (Y)
2 J1902 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8020 14 J7302 M23 Drum Motor (M)
2 J1902 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8020 15 J7314 UN22 Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1
2 J1902 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8020 16 J7315 UN23 Drum Speed Detection PCB (M )2
2 J1902 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8019 17 J7316 UN20 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1
2 J1902 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8019 18 J7317 UN21 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2
3 J1903 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 19 J7306 M19 Drum Motor (Bk)
4 J1904 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8021 20 J7304 M25 Drum Motor (C)
4 J1904 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8021 21 J7312 UN24 Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1
4 J1904 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8021 22 J7313 UN25 Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2
5 J1905 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 23 J7310 UN18 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1
5 J1905 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 24 J7311 UN19 Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2
6 J1906 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8034 25 J7535 M20 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Y)
6 J1906 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8034 26 J7536 M22 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (M)
6 J1906 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8034 27 J7537 M24 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (C)
7 J1907 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8035 28 J7140 SL1 Registration Patch Shutter Solenoid
7 J1907 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8035 29 J7142 LED1 Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk)
7 J1907 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8035 J7408 30 J7408 PS19 Registration Patch Sensor (Front)
7 J1907 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8035 31 J7409 PS19 Registration Patch Sensor (Front)
7 J1907 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8035 J7410 32 J7410 PS20 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear)
7 J1907 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8035 33 J7411 PS20 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear)
7 J1907 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8035 34 J7412 PS21 Patch Sensor
8 J1908 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 35 J3530 UN29 Potential Control PCB
8 J1908 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8017 J8133 36 J7032 PS79 Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor
8 J1908 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8017 37 J7109 FM2 Primary Charging Suction Fan
9 J1909 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J8176 J7515 - - To Paper Deck
10 J1910 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 38 J7112 FM5 Color Cleaning Fan
10 J1910 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 39 J7116 FM18 Hopper Cooling Fan
10 J1910 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 40 J7149 FM4 Developing and Pre-transfer Charging Fan
10 J1910 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB J7159 41 J7160 FM1 Pre-fixing Feed Attraction Fan
10 J1910 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 42 J7231 FM22 Hopper Cooling Suction Fan
11 J1914 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 43 J7538 M18 Developing Sleeve Drive Motor (Bk)
11 J1914 UN6 Drum ITB Driver PCB 44 J7539 M30 Drum Cleaning and Waste Toner Feed Drive Motor
T-4-45

4-79
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-80

18 19
20
22

23
21

1
2
3

30

5
9
6
4

F-4-46

4-80
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-81
46

33

28

24
45
25
39

26

43
44
32
40 34
31

29

27
37

35 38
41
42

13
8
11
16
36
7

14
12
15
17
10

F-4-47

4-81
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-82

KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J1801 UN7 Relay PCB 18 J201 UN33 DC Power Supply PCB (12V)
2 J1802 UN7 Relay PCB 19 J202A UN34 DC Power Supply PCB (24VA)
3 J1803 UN7 Relay PCB 20 J202B UN35 DC Power Supply PCB (24V)
4 J1804 UN7 Relay PCB 21 J691 UN31 All-night Power Supply PCB
5 J1807 UN7 Relay PCB 22 J811 UN8 AC Driver PCB 100V
5 J1807 UN7 Relay PCB 22 J811 UN9 AC Driver PCB 120V
5 J1807 UN7 Relay PCB 22 J811 UN10 AC Driver PCB 200V
6 J1809 UN7 Relay PCB 23 J2202 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB 100/120V
6 J1809 UN7 Relay PCB 23 J2202 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB 200V
7 J1810 UN7 Relay PCB J8170 J8001 24 J7404 THM11 Main Thermistor
7 J1810 UN7 Relay PCB J8170 J8001 24 J7404 THM12 Front Thermistor
7 J1810 UN7 Relay PCB J8170 J8001 25 J8003 THM13 Sub Thermistor 1
7 J1810 UN7 Relay PCB J8170 J8001 25 J8003 THM14 Sub Thermistor 2
7 J1810 UN7 Relay PCB J8170 J8001 25 J8003 THM15 Rear Thermistor
7 J1810 UN7 Relay PCB J8170 J8001 J7499 26 J180330 PS102 Web Level Sensor
8 J1811 UN7 Relay PCB 27 J104 UN83 Riser PCB
8 J1811 UN7 Relay PCB J1821 J8103 J8082 28 J1002 UN111 CPU PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
8 J1811 UN7 Relay PCB J1821 J8103 J8082 46 J1001 UN201 CPU PCB [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
8 J1811 UN7 Relay PCB J1821 29 J9001 - USB Device Port
9 J1812 UN7 Relay PCB J8005 30 J501 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB
10 J1813 UN7 Relay PCB J8122 J8001 J8025 - TP2 Fixing Thermal Switch
10 J1813 UN7 Relay PCB J8238 31 J8237 SW5 Delivery Door Switch
10 J1813 UN7 Relay PCB J8165 32 J8057 SW7 Fixing Feed Unit Switch
10 J1813 UN7 Relay PCB J8165 33 J1012 SW18 Main Switch
10 J1813 UN7 Relay PCB J8024 34 J18230 SL9 Remote Shutdown Solenoid
11 J1814 UN7 Relay PCB 35 J3011 UN37 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)
11 J1814 UN7 Relay PCB 36 J3021 UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color)
11 J1814 UN7 Relay PCB J8207 37 J3041 UN40 Developing High Voltage PCB (CL)
11 J1814 UN7 Relay PCB J8205 38 J3545 UN50 Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)
12 J1815 UN7 Relay PCB J8184 J7515 - - To Paper Deck
13 J1816 UN7 Relay PCB J8023 J8099 39 J3541 UN49 Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB
13 J1816 UN7 Relay PCB J8023 J8099 40 J7612 M48 Fixing Motor
14 J1819 UN7 Relay PCB J8239 - - To Color Image Reader
15 J1821 UN7 Relay PCB J8229 - - Buffer Driver
16 J1830 UN7 Relay PCB 41 J7400 FM9 Power Supply Fan 2
16 J1830 UN7 Relay PCB 42 J7401 FM8 Power Supply Fan 1
17 J1850 UN7 Relay PCB J8235 43 J8236 SW1 Front Door Switch 1
17 J1850 UN7 Relay PCB J8235 44 J8236 SW2 Front Door Switch 2
17 J1850 UN7 Relay PCB J8234 45 J8056 SW3 Multi-purpose Tray Unit Switch
T-4-46

4-82
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-83

14
13

15

7 10
9
4
5
3
8
18 21
12
19 2
17
20
6
16
11
1 22

F-4-48

4-83
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-84
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J801 UN8 AC Driver PCB - ELB1 Leakage Breaker 1 100V
2 J803 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8083 J8084 13 J7 - Modular PCB (1 line) 100V
2 J803 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8083 J8084 14 J601 - Modular PCB (2 line) 100V
3 J805 UN8 AC Driver PCB - SW12 Environment Switch 100V
3 J805 UN8 AC Driver PCB - SW13 Cassette Heater Switch 100V
4 J806 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8126 15 J8130 H6 Cassette Heater 100V
5 J808 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8079 J8081 - - To Deck Heater 100V
5 J808 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8109 J8233 - - To Color Image Reader 100V
6 J809 UN8 AC Driver PCB 16 J500 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB 100V
7 J812 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8120 17 J503 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB 100V
7 J812 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8123 J8228 - - To finisher 100V
8 J813 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8190 18 J101A UN33 DC Power Supply PCB (12V) 100V
8 J813 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8191 19 J102A UN34 DC Power Supply PCB (24VA) 100V
8 J813 UN8 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8192 20 J102B UN35 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) 100V
9 J814 UN8 AC Driver PCB 21 J2200 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB 100V
10 J815 UN8 AC Driver PCB 21 J2200 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB 100V
11 J816 UN8 AC Driver PCB - ELB1 Leakage Breaker 1 100V ONLY
12 J820 UN8 AC Driver PCB 22 J681 UN31 All-night Power Supply PCB 100V
1 J801 UN9 AC Driver PCB - ELB2 Leakage Breaker 2 120V
2 J803 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8083 J8084 13 J7 - Modular PCB (1 line) 120V
2 J803 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8083 J8084 14 J601 - Modular PCB (2 line) 120V
3 J805 UN9 AC Driver PCB - SW12 Environment Switch 120V
3 J805 UN9 AC Driver PCB - SW13 Cassette Heater Switch 120V
4 J806 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8126 15 J8130 H6 Cassette Heater 120V
5 J808 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8079 J8081 - - To Deck Heater 120V
5 J808 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8109 J8233 - - To Color Image Reader 120V
6 J809 UN9 AC Driver PCB 16 J500 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB 120V
7 J812 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8120 17 J503 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB 120V
7 J812 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8123 J8228 - - To finisher 120V
8 J813 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8190 18 J101A UN33 DC Power Supply PCB (12V) 120V
8 J813 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8191 19 J102A UN34 DC Power Supply PCB (24VA) 120V
8 J813 UN9 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8192 20 J102B UN35 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) 120V
9 J814 UN9 AC Driver PCB 21 J2200 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB 120V
10 J815 UN9 AC Driver PCB 21 J2200 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB 120V
12 J820 UN9 AC Driver PCB 22 J681 UN31 All-night Power Supply PCB 120V
1 J801 UN10 AC Driver PCB - ELB3 Leakage Breaker 3 200V
2 J803 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8083 J8084 13 J7 - Modular PCB (1 line) 200V
2 J803 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8083 J8084 14 J601 - Modular PCB (2 line) 200V
3 J805 UN10 AC Driver PCB - SW12 Environment Switch 200V
3 J805 UN10 AC Driver PCB - SW13 Cassette Heater Switch 200V
4 J806 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8126 15 J8130 H6 Cassette Heater 200V
5 J808 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8079 J8081 - - To Deck Heater 200V
5 J808 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8109 J8233 - - To Color Image Reader 200V
6 J809 UN10 AC Driver PCB 16 J500 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB 200V
7 J812 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8120 17 J503 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB 200V

4-84
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-85
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
7 J812 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8123 J8228 - - To finisher 200V
8 J813 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8190 18 J101A UN33 DC Power Supply PCB (12V) 200V
8 J813 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8191 19 J102A UN34 DC Power Supply PCB (24VA) 200V
8 J813 UN10 AC Driver PCB J8129 J8192 20 J102B UN35 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) 200V
9 J814 UN10 AC Driver PCB 21 J2200 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB 200V
10 J815 UN10 AC Driver PCB 21 J2200 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB 200V
12 J820 UN10 AC Driver PCB 22 J681 UN31 All-night Power Supply PCB 200V
T-4-47

4-85
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-86

20
25
18 19
26
23
17 6

7
4 21
5
22 24

27

12 11
29
28

13 10
9

15
14
16 2

F-4-49

4-86
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-87

KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J2201 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8111 - H1 Drum Heater (Bk) 100/120V
1 J2201 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8111 - H1 Drum Heater (Bk) 200V
2 J2204 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8189 J8050 17 J8051 H10 Drum Heater (Y) 100/120V
2 J2204 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8189 J8050 17 J8051 H10 Drum Heater (Y) 200V
2 J2204 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8189 J8050 18 J8052 H11 Drum Heater (M) 100/120V
2 J2204 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8189 J8050 18 J8052 H11 Drum Heater (M) 200V
3 J2202 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8018 J8058 19 J7519 THM5 Drum Thermopile 100/120V
3 J2202 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8018 J8058 19 J7519 THM5 Drum Thermopile 200V
3 J2202 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8018 J8058 20 J8032 THM6 Drum Thermistor 100/120V
3 J2202 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8018 J8058 20 J8032 THM6 Drum Thermistor 200V
3 J2202 UN11 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8018 J80110 J8050 - - - 100/120V
3 J2202 UN12 Drum Heater Driver PCB J8018 J80110 J8050 - - - 200V
4 J2701 UN28 ITB Relay PCB 21 J7113 PS4 Primary Transfer Roller Detachment HP Sensor
4 J2701 UN28 ITB Relay PCB J7114 22 J7114 M5 Primary Transfer Roller Detachment Motor
4 J2701 UN28 ITB Relay PCB J8044 23 J7414 M4 Steering Drive Motor
4 J2701 UN28 ITB Relay PCB J8045 24 J7416 PS3 Steering Drive HP Sensor
5 J2702 UN28 ITB Relay PCB 25 J7415 PS2 ITB Displacement Sensor
6 J2703 UN28 ITB Relay PCB - - -
7 J2704 UN28 ITB Relay PCB J8046 26 J7528 PS5 ITB HP Sensor
8 J3531 UN29 Potential Control PCB 27 J8073 - Potential Sensor
9 J510 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB J8026 - H4 IH Coil
9 J510 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB J8027 - H4 IH Coil
10 J521 UN30 IH Power Supply PCB 28 J7403 FM7 IH Power Supply Fan
11 J3010 UN37 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk) 14 J3050 UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color)
12 J3012 UN37 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk) - - -
13 J3022 UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) - UN59 Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (Y)
14 J3050 UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) 29 J3544 UN50 Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (Bk)
15 J3322 UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) - UN60 Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (M)
16 J3522 UN38 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Color) - UN61 Primary Charging High Voltage Contact Resistance (C)
T-4-48

4-87
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-88

1
2
26

12
11
14
13
28
5
16 4 [A] 62
15 3 56 54
18
17
8 60
9 57

61
58
64 55
59
65
63

[A]

10 32
45
31
41
30
37 47
29 44
43
33 40 46
[B]
36 42
39
34 38
35 [B]
20
7 21
27 50
49
6 23 48
51 19
52
25
22
24
53

F-4-50

4-88
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-89
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J3040 UN39 Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) 26 J3046 UN40 Developing High Voltage PCB (CL)
2 J3044 UN39 Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) - UN55 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (Bk)
3 J3042 UN40 Developing High Voltage PCB (CL) J8135 - UN56 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (Y)
4 J3342 UN40 Developing High Voltage PCB (CL) J8136 - UN57 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (M)
5 J3542 UN40 Developing High Voltage PCB (CL) J8137 - UN58 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (C)
- UN48 Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB J8042 - UN66 Secondary Transfer High Voltage Contact
Resistance
6 J3061 UN48 Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 27 J3541 UN49 Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination
High Voltage PCB
7 J35420 UN49 Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High J8042 - UN67 Secondary Transfer Static Elimination High
Voltage PCB Voltage Contact Resistance
8 J35470 UN50 Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB J3547 - - Post-charging transformer
(Bk)
9 J35480 UN50 Pre-primary Transfer Charging High Voltage PCB - - Post-charging transformer
(Bk)
- UN51 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Bk) J8134 - UN55 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (Bk)
- UN52 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (Y) - UN56 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (Y)
- UN53 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (M) - UN57 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (M)
- UN54 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage PCB (C) - UN58 Developing Toner Collection High Voltage
Contact Resistance (C)
10 J5601 UN99 Laser Power Supply Relay PCB 28 J5500 UN100 Laser Interface PCB
11 J5505 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 29 J5100Y UN101 Laser Driver PCB (Y)
12 J5506 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 30 J5100M UN103 Laser Driver PCB (M)
13 J5507 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 31 J5100C UN105 Laser Driver PCB (C)
14 J5508 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 32 J5100K UN107 Laser Driver PCB (Bk)
15 J5509 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 33 J5101Y UN101 Laser Driver PCB (Y)
15 J5509 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8070 34 J7530Y UN102 BD PCB (Y)
15 J5509 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8070 35 J7531Y M84 Skew Correction Motor (Y)
15 J5509 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8070 36 J7532Y M80 Laser Scanner Motor (Y)
16 J5510 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 37 J5101M UN103 Laser Driver PCB (M)
16 J5510 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8076 38 J7530M UN104 BD PCB (M)
16 J5510 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8076 39 J7531M M85 Skew Correction Motor (M)
16 J5510 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8076 40 J7532M M81 Laser Scanner Motor (M)
17 J5511 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 41 J5101C UN105 Laser Driver PCB (C)
17 J5511 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8064 42 J7530C UN106 BD PCB (C)
17 J5511 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8064 43 J7531C M86 Skew Correction Motor (C)
17 J5511 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8064 44 J7532C M82 Laser Scanner Motor (C)
18 J5512 UN100 Laser Interface PCB 45 J5101K UN107 Laser Driver PCB (Bk)
18 J5512 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8066 46 J7530K UN108 BD PCB (Bk)

4-89
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-90
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
18 J5512 UN100 Laser Interface PCB J8066 47 J7532K M83 Laser Scanner Motor (Bk)
19 J2 UN109 LCD 48 J1006 UN111 CPU PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
20 J3001 UN110 Ten Key PCB 49 J1009 UN111 CPU PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
21 J3002 UN110 Ten Key PCB 50 J1008 UN111 CPU PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
22 J1003 UN111 CPU PCB 51 J4001 UN112 Ten Key PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
23 J1005 UN111 CPU PCB - - Transparent touch panel [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
24 J1007 UN111 CPU PCB 52 J1 - LCD [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
25 J4002 UN112 Sub Key PCB 53 J5001 UN113 Volume PCB [B] Flat Control Panel Unit
54 UN201 J1002 CPU PCB 60 J1 UN200 TALLY PCB [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
54 UN201 J1002 CPU PCB 61 J1 UN206 Sub Key PCB [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
55 UN201 J1003 CPU PCB - - Transparent touch panel [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
56 UN201 J1004 CPU PCB - - - [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
57 UN201 J1005 CPU PCB 62 J1 UN202 Ten Key PCB [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
58 UN201 J1007 CPU PCB J1 - LCD [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
59 UN201 J1008 CPU PCB 63 J1 UN205 Volume PCB [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
59 UN201 J1008 CPU PCB 64 J501 UN207 LED Driver PCB [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
- - LCD 65 J502 UN207 LED Driver PCB [A] Upright Control Panel Unit
T-4-49

4-90
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-91

15

16 11
13 7
20
9 14
5 24
2
16 1
23
12
8
10
21

19
18
17
22
3
6
4

25

F-4-51

4-91
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-92
KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J101 UN83 Riser PCB 23 J14 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2
2 J103 UN83 Riser PCB 24 J17 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1
3 J105 UN83 Riser PCB - HDD0 Standard HDD
3 J105 UN83 Riser PCB - HDD1 Removable HDD
4 J107 UN83 Riser PCB - HDD0 Standard HDD
4 J107 UN83 Riser PCB - HDD1 Removable HDD
5 J108 UN83 Riser PCB 25 J7544 FM20 Controller Cooling Fan 2
6 J111 UN83 Riser PCB - - -
7 J2 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - -
8 J3 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - -
9 J4 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - CPU
10 J5 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - USB(H)
11 J6 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - DEVICE PORT HUB OPTION
12 J7 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - ETHERNET
13 J8 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - TOPAZ
14 J11 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - SATA FLASH
15 J13 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - VOICE GUIDANCE OPTION B
15 J13 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - VOICE OPERATION OPTION A
16 J15 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - FM19 Controller Cooling Fan 1
16 J15 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - DEBUG SERIAL1
17 J19 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - CPLD WR
18 J20 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - CARD READER IF KIT OPTION A
18 J20 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - RS-CONV OPTION B
18 J20 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - COIN VENDER OPTION C
19 J21 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - CC-VI I/F CABLE OPTION
20 J22 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - POSTPONE I/F
21 J40 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - USB(H)
22 J1025 UN115 Main Controller PCB 1 - - YON-RISER OPTION
T-4-50

4-92
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-93

28

11
1
12
10
2
8
9 4
7
6 5 3

15
16
23
26 18

30
25 17

13
29
27 14
22
24
31,32

19,20,21
32

F-4-52

4-93
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
4-94

KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name Relay Connector KeyNo. Jack No. Symbol Name REMARKS
1 J13 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - DDR2 DIMM (512MB) OPTION
2 J15 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - USB(D)
3 J16 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 22 J403 - G3 FAX Control PCB
4 J17 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 23 J8 - G3 FAX PCB
5 J18 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - FRAM COUNTER
6 J20 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - JTAG
7 J21 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - ICE
8 J23 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - DEBUG SERIAL
9 J24 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - DEBUSSY-A
10 J1000 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - MINERVA OPTION
11 J1010 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - GIOVANNI-A
11 J1010 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - EFI CONTROLLER OPTION
12 J3003 UN116 Main Controller PCB 2 - - Reader Controller PCB
13 J103 - G3 FAX PCB 24 J4 - Modular PCB (1 line)
14 J104 - G3 FAX PCB 25 J303 - Pseudo CI PCB
15 J105 - G3 FAX PCB 26 J301 - Pseudo CI PCB
16 J106 - G3 FAX PCB 27 J208 - G3 FAX Control PCB
17 J107 - G3 FAX PCB J8132 28 J2121 SP1 Speaker
18 J109 - G3 FAX PCB 29 J205 - G3 FAX Control PCB
18 J109 - G3 FAX PCB 30 J302 - Pseudo CI PCB
19 J204 - G3 FAX Control PCB 31 J604 - Modular PCB (2 line)
20 J802 - G3 FAX Control PCB 32 J504 - Modular PCB (4 line)
21 J804 - G3 FAX Control PCB 32 J504 - Modular PCB (4 line)
- - Modular PCB (1 line) - - HANDSET-G2
T-4-51

4-94
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Connectors
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Copier Model)
4-95

Main Controller System 2) Remove the Control Panel Right Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

Removing the Flat Control Panel

[2]
■■Preparation (Copier Model)
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover(Refer to page 4-339).
3) Close the Front Cover.
4) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
5) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
6) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
[1]

■■Procedure (Copier Model)

1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1]. F-4-54
• 1 Screw [2] 3) Remove the Control Panel Left Cover [1].
• 2 Protrusions [3] • 2 Screws [2]

[1]
[1]
x2
[3]

[2]

[3]

[2]

F-4-53 F-4-55

4-95
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Copier Model)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Copier Model)
4-96
4) Move the Control Panel Plate [1]. 6) Free the Control Panel Cable [1] and the Power Supply Cable [2] from the Edge Saddle [3]
• 1 Screw [2] and the Wire Saddle [4], and disconnect the connector [5] of the Power Supply Cable.

[1] [3]
[1]
x2 [4]

[2]

[5] [2]

F-4-58
F-4-56 7) Lift up the Flat Control Panel [1] in the direction of the arrow, and disconnect the Control
5) Remove the 4 screws [2] securing the Flat Control Panel [1], and move the Flat Control
Panel Cable [2].
Panel aside. (The removed screws will be used when installing the Upper Front Cover
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
(Middle).)
• 1 Connector [4]
[2]
[1]
[4] [2]
x4

[2]

[3]
[1]

F-4-57
F-4-59

4-96
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Copier Model)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Printer Model)
4-97
8) Disconnect the USB Cable [1]. ■■Preparation (Printer Model)
• 2 Screws [2]
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
9) Free the cable from the USB Cable Guide [A], and remove the Flat Control Panel [3].
2) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
3) Remove the Box Right Cover (Refer to page 4-342).
4) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).

[3] x2 [2]
■■Procedure (Printer Model)
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Protrusions [3]

[1]

[A] [1] [2] [3]

F-4-60
[2]

[3]

F-4-61

4-97
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Printer Model)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Printer Model)
4-98
2) Free the Control Panel Cable [2] and the Power Supply Cable [3] from the 3 Wire Saddles 4) Open the Upper Front Cover [1].
[1]. 5) Remove the Control Panel Right Cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
NOTE:
This step is for allowing extra cable to make it easier to remove the Printer Cover. [3]

[2]
[3] [2]
x3

[1]
[1]

F-4-62 F-4-64
3) Remove the Printer Cover [1]. 6) Remove the Control Panel Left Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2] • 2 Screws [2]

[1] [1]

x4
x2

[2]
[2]
F-4-63
F-4-65

4-98
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Printer Model)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Printer Model)
4-99
7) Remove the 4 screws [2] of the Flat Control Panel [1]. 9) Lift up the Flat Control Panel [1] in the direction of the arrow, and disconnect the Control
Panel Cable [2].
[2] [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Connector [4]
x4
[1]
[4] [2]

[1]

[3]
F-4-66
8) Free the Control Panel Cable [1] and the Power Supply Cable [2] from the Edge Saddle [3]
and the Wire Saddle [4], and disconnect the connector [5].
F-4-68

[5] [3] 10) Disconnect the USB Cable [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
x2 11) Free the cable from the USB Cable Guide [A], and remove the Flat Control Panel [3].
[4]
[3]

x2
[2] [2]
[1]

F-4-67

[A] [1] [2]

F-4-69

4-99
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Flat Control Panel > Procedure (Printer Model)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel > Procedure
4-100
Removing the Upright Control Panel [1]

■■Procedure [B]

1) Remove the Joint Cover R [1].

• 2 Rubber Caps [2]
• 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) [3]

CAUTION:

When assembling, be sure to pass the Power Supply Cable [4] through the groove [A]
of the Joint Cover R.
[2]

[1] F-4-71
[3]
3) Disconnect the Control Panel Cable [1].
x2 • 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Reuse Band [3]

CAUTION:
[2]
When assembling, pay attention to the following points.
• Do not route the Control Panel Cable clockwise.
• After the cable has been secured, cut off the excess length of the Reuse Band.
• Be sure to store the slack [A] of the Control Panel Cable inside the cover.
[A] [4]
[3]
F-4-70
2) Remove the Joint Cover L [1]. [3]
[1]
CAUTION:

When assembling, be sure to pass the Control Panel Cable [2] through the groove [B]
[A]
of the Joint Cover L.

[2]

F-4-72

4-100
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel > Procedure
4-101
4) Disconnect the Power Supply Cable [1]. 5) Remove the Upright Control Panel [1].
• 1 Connector [2] • 4 Screws (TP; M4x8) [2]
• 1 Screw (TP; M4x8) [3] • 2 Protrusions [3]
• 1 Cable Clamp [4] • 2 Bosses [4]
• 1 Reuse Band [5]
NOTE:
CAUTION: When installing, be sure to tighten the screws from the upper part.

When installing, pay attention to the following points.

[1]
• Do not route the Power Supply Cable clockwise. [4] [3] [4]
• When routing the Power Supply Cable, put the cable below the Cable Clamp inside
the black guide. x4

[4]

[3]

[2]
[2] F-4-74

CAUTION:
[5] When installing, be sure that the Flexible Cable [2] is not trapped by the Panel Base [1].
[1]

F-4-73
[2] [1]

F-4-75

4-101
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit > Procedure
4-102
Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit 2) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
2) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
3) Remove the Box Right Cover (Refer to page 4-342). [1]
4) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Base Cover (Front) [1] and the Base Cover (Rear) [2].
• 2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8) [3]

[2]

x2 F-4-77
3) Disconnect the Control Panel Cable [1].
• 8 Wire Saddles [2]
• 1 Edge Saddle [3]
• 2 Reuse Bands [4]
• 1 Connector [5]
[2]

[1] [2] [3]

x11
[3]
F-4-76

[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]

[4]
[5]
F-4-78

4-102
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Upright Control Panel Arm Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD > Procedure
4-103
4) Disconnect the Power Supply Cable [1].
Removing the HDD
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
• 1 Screw [3] ■■Procedure
• 1 Cable Clamp [4]
1) Push the [A] part to open the HDD Cover.
• 1 Connector [5]

[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[A]

x2
[4]

F-4-81
F-4-79 2) Open the HDD Cap.
5) Remove the Upright Arm [1] from the Frame Base [2]. • 1 Screw
• 2 Screws [3]

x2 [1]

[3]
F-4-82
[2]

F-4-80

4-103
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the HDD > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Disassembling Procedure
4-104
3) Turn the HDD Fixation Plate toward the front.
Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
• 1 Screw
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Box Right Cover (Refer to page 4-342).

■■Disassembling Procedure
1) Disconnect the USB Cable [1] and the Control Panel Cable [2].

x2

[1]

F-4-83
4) Remove the HDD. [2]
• 2 Connectors

x2
F-4-85
2) Remove the 2 screws [1].

x2

[1]
F-4-84

F-4-86

4-104
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Assembling Procedure
4-105
4) Be sure to remove the parts from the old PCB to the new PCB.
CAUTION:

When replacing the Boards installed on the Main Controller PCB 1, remove Main CAUTION:
Controller PCB 1 and place it on a flat surface for the work. Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
number).
If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail
the restoration.

• Flash PCB
• TPM PCB

F-4-87

3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 [3] while holding the grip [1] and keeping the harness [2]
away from the PCB. Flash
[2]
TPM

[1]

[3]

F-4-88

4-105
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1 > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Disassembling Procedure
4-106
■■Assembling Procedure 2) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers [1], and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 1 [2].
• 2 Screws [3] (Removed in step 2. Install the lower one first and then the upper one.)

CAUTION: [3]

• When replacing the PCB, transfer any optional PCBs installed on the old Main
Controller PCB 1 to the new PCB. x2
• When assembling, install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to
trap the cables.

1) Release the 2 Lock Levers [1] in the direction of the arrows, and uniformly push in the Main
Controller PCB 1 [2] with both hands until it stops. [1]
[3] [2]

F-4-90

CAUTION:
[1] Be sure to perform the work in the order from (1) to (4) in the figure because the Inner
Connector of the Main Controller PCB 1 may not be connected.
[2]

F-4-89

4-106
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Assembling Procedure
4-107
Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 ■■Assembling Procedure
■■Preparation CAUTION:
1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
• When replacing the PCB, transfer any optional PCBs installed on the old Main
Controller PCB 2 to the new PCB.
■■Disassembling Procedure • When assembling, install the Main Controller PCB 2 while paying attention not to
1) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1], and release the 2 Lock Levers [2]. trap the cables.

1) Release the 2 Lock Levers [1] in the direction of the arrows, and uniformly push in the Main
Controller PCB 2 [2] with both hands until it stops.

[1]

[2] [2]

[1]

F-4-91
2) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 [2] while holding the grip [1].
• 2 Screws [3]

F-4-93

x2
[3]

[2]

[1]

[3]
F-4-92

4-107
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Controller PCB 2 > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Open the Controller Box > Procedure
4-108
2) Turn over the 2 Lock Levers [1], and push in and secure the Main Controller PCB 2 [2].
Open the Controller Box
• 2 Screws [3] (Removed in step 2. Install the lower one first and then the upper one.)
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
x2 2) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).

[2]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the 3 screws [1] from the Controller Box Unit.
[1]
[3]
[1]

x3

F-4-94

CAUTION:

Be sure to perform the work in the order from (1) to (4) in the figure because the
connector of the Main Controller PCB 2 may not be connected.

F-4-95

4-108
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Open the Controller Box > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure
4-109
2) Open the HDD Cover [1], remove the screw [2], and open the Controller Box Unit [3].
Removing the DC Controller PCB
CAUTION: ■■Preparation
Do not install/remove the Controller Cover [4] while the Controller Box Unit [3] is open. 1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
2) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
3) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).

[4] ■■Procedure
[3]
1) Remove the DC Controller Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2] (to loosen)

[2]

F-4-96

[1]
[1] [2]
[3]

[2]
F-4-98

F-4-97

4-109
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the DC Controller PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Laser Interface PCB > Procedure
4-110
2) Remove the DC Controller PCB [1].
Removing the Laser Interface PCB
• 27 Connectors [2]
• 8 Screws [3] ■■Preparation
[3] 1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
2) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
x27 3) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).

[1]
■■Procedure
x8 1) Remove the DC Controller Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2] (to loosen)

[2]
[2]

[3] [3]
F-4-99

[1]

[2]

F-4-100

4-110
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Laser Interface PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB > Procedure
4-111
2) Disconnect the 7 connectors [1], and disconnect the 4 Small Gauge Coaxial Cable 3) Remove the Laser Interface PCB [1].
Connectors [2] by pulling the tag horizontally. • 6 Screws [2]
• 1 Connector [3]
CAUTION:
[2]
The Small Gauge Coaxial Cable Connectors cannot be pulled out upward. They need
to be pulled out toward the front.
x6

[2]

[1]

[3] [2]
F-4-103

F-4-101

[2]

x11

[1]

[1] [1]
F-4-102

4-111
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
4-112
Removing the Drum ITB Driver PCB 2) Remove the Drum ITB Driver PCB [1].
• 12 Connectors [2]
■■Preparation • 6 Screws [3]

1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343). [3] [3]
2) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
3) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108). x12

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Duct [1]. x6 [1]
• 3 Screws (RS) [2]
• 1 Screw (P Tightening) [3] [2]

x4 [3]
F-4-105
[1]
[2]

[2] [3]
F-4-104

4-112
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Power Supply Box > Procedure
4-113
Removing the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit 2) Remove the Developing High Voltage PCB Unit [1].
• 2 Connectors [2]
■■Preparation • 2 Wire Saddles [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
2) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343). [4]
3) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
x2 x2 x2
■■Procedure [2]
1) Free the 4 harnesses [1].
• 5 Wire Saddles [2]
• 6 Harness Guides [3]
[3]
• 4 Connectors [4] [1]
• 2 Grounding Wires [5]
[2]
• 1 Screw [6]
[4] [1] [4] [1] [4] [1] [4] [1] [2]
F-4-107

x4

x14

[5] [6]
[3]

F-4-106

4-113
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Main Power Supply Box > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Procedure
4-114
Removing the Main Power Supply Box 2) Open the 20 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the 20 connectors [2] of the Relay PCB Unit.

■■Preparation [2]
1) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346). x13 x4 [2]

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Fan Duct [1].
x9 x6
• 1 Connector [2]
[1]
• 2 Screws [3]
[2]
[3] [1]

[1]

[2] [2]

x2 x3
[2]

[3] x5

F-4-108 [1]

F-4-109
3) Remove the Main Power Supply Box [1].
• 3 Screws [2]

[2]

x3

[1]

[2] F-4-110

4-114
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Procedure
4-115
Removing the AC Driver Box 2) Open the 6 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the 14 connectors [2].

■■Preparation
1) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346).
x5
2) Remove the Lower Left Cover 3 (Refer to page 4-345).
[2]
[2]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Fixing Heat Fan Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Guide [3]
• 1 Screw (black, RS) [4]
• 2 Screws (P Tightening) [5]

[4] [1] [5]

x4 x2
x3
x3
x6 [2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [2]
[2] [3]
[1] [2]

F-4-112

F-4-111

4-115
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit
4-116
3) Remove the AC Driver Box [1]. ■■Installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit
• 1 Connector [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
NOTE:
The following procedure shows the procedure for installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit to
[3] the host machine.

x4
1) Disassemble the Fixing Heat Fan Unit.
• 1 Fan Duct 1 [1]
• 4 Claws [2]
• 1 Fixing Heat Fan [3]
• 4 Screws [4]
[1]
• 1 Fan Duct 2 [5]

[4]
[3]
[5]
[2] [3]
x4 [3]
F-4-113 [1]

[2]
x4 [2]

[2]

[4]
F-4-114

4-116
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the AC Driver Box > Installing the Fixing Heat Fan Unit
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box > Procedure
4-117
2) Install the Fan Duct 2 [1] to the host machine. 4) Install the Fan Duct 1 [1].
• 2 Screws [2] • 4 Claws [2]

[1] [1]

x2 x4

[2]
[2]
[2]

F-4-115 F-4-117
3) Install the Fixing Heat Fan [1].
• 4 Screws (TP) [2]
• 1 Screw (black, RS) [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [4]
• 1 Connector [5]

x5
[1]

[3]
[2]

[5] [4]
[2]

F-4-116

4-117
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box > Procedure
4-118
Removing the IH Power Supply PCB Box Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346). 1) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346).
■■Procedure 2) Remove the Waste Toner Container (Refer to page 4-277).

1) Remove the Fan Duct [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
■■Procedure
• 2 Screws [3] 1) Remove the Handle Cover [1].
• 1 Claw [2]
[3] [1]
• 1 Hook [3]

[2]

x2
[2]
[1]
[3]
[3]

F-4-118
2) Remove the IH Power Supply PCB Box [1].
• 3 Connectors [2]
F-4-120
• 2 Wire Saddles [3]
2) Remove the Lower Right Cover 3 [1].
• 1 Screw [4]
• 2 Screws [2]

[1] [2]

x3
[4] [2]
x2

x2

[2] [3]

[1]
[2]

[2]
F-4-119 F-4-121

4-118
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
4-119
3) Remove the Fixation Plate [1]. [2] [3] [4]
• 1 Screw [2]

x4
x2

x7
[5]

[1]
[2]
x10 [1] [5]

F-4-122
4) Remove the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box [1]. [2] [2]
• 4 Screws [2] F-4-124

• 7 Wire Saddles [3]

• 1 Fasten Terminal [4]
• 11 Connectors [5]

CAUTION:

During disassembly/assembly work, be careful not to hit the Waste Toner Full Sensor [1]
against the plate [2].

[1]

[2]

F-4-123

4-119
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit > Procedure
4-120
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB 2) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB Unit [1].
• 4 Connectors [2]
Unit • 2 Wire Saddles [3]
• 4 Harness Guides [4]
■■Preparation
• 1 Screw [5] (to loosen)
1) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346). • 1 Screw [6]
2) Remove the Waste Toner Container (Refer to page 4-277).
3) Remove the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box (Refer to page 4-118). [6]
[4]
[2]
■■Procedure x4
[2]
1) Shift the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit [1].
• 3 Connectors [2]
x6
• 3 Wire Saddles [3] [3]
• 4 Screws [4]

[2]
[3]
[5]
x3 [1]

[2] [1] F-4-126

[4]
x3 CAUTION:

When assembling, be sure to secure the harness [1] with the 4 Harness Guides [2]
[4]
inside the PCB.
x4 [2]

[4] [2]

[4]
F-4-125
x4

[1]

F-4-127

4-120
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Environment Sensor > Procedure
4-121
Removing the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit Removing the Environment Sensor
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346). 1) Pull out the Cassette 3, the Cassette 4 and the Right Deck.
2) Remove the Waste Toner Container (Refer to page 4-277).
3) Remove the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box (Refer to page 4-118). ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Sensor Cover [1].
■■Procedure • 3 Screws [2]
1) Open the 15 Wire Saddles [1] and disconnect the 21 connectors [2].

x3 [1]

x15

x21 [1]

[2]

[2]
F-4-130
F-4-128
2) Remove the Pickup Feed Driver PCB Unit [1].
• 4 Screws [2]

[1]
x4 [2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-4-129

4-121
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Environment Sensor > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB > Procedure
4-122
2) Remove the Environment Sensor [1].
Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Claw [3] ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
[1]
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
4) Remove the Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334).

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Cover [1].
[2]
[3] • 4 Claws [2]

[2]

x4
[2]

F-4-131 [2]
[1]

F-4-132

4-122
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB > Procedure
4-123
2) Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1].
Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static
• 2 Connectors [2]
• 1 Fasten Terminal [3] Elimination High Voltage PCB
• 6 PCB Spacers [4]
■■Preparation
[4] 1) Open the Front Cover.
[1] 2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
[3]
x3 [4] 3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
[4] 4) Remove the Registration Unit (Refer to page 4-334).

■■Procedure
[4] 1)Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Cover [1].
[2]
• 4 Claws [2]

[2]

F-4-133
x4
[2]

[2]
[1]

F-4-134

4-123
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB > Procedure
4-124
2) Remove the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB [1].
Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB
• 3 Connectors [2]
• 3 PCB Spacers [3] ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
[2]
x3
[2]
[1]
■■Procedure
[3]
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]

[3] [2]

F-4-135

[1]
[3]

F-4-136

4-124
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Fixing Feed Driver PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Transfer PCB > Procedure
4-125
2) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover [1].
Removing the Primary Transfer PCB
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Knob [3] ■■Preparation

CAUTION:
x2 [1] When delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.

[3] 1) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).

2) Remove the Left Middle Cover (Refer to page 4-345).

■■Procedure
[2]
1) Remove the Primary Transfer PCB [1].
• 2 Wire Saddles [2]
F-4-137 • 4 Terminals [3]
3) Remove the Fixing Feed Driver PCB [1]. • 1 Connector [4]
• 14 Connectors [2] • 4 Screws [5]
• 6 Screws [3]
[3] [5]

x5
x14
[3]
[3] [2]

[1]
x2 [1]
x6

x4 [5]
[2] [4]

[5]
[3]
F-4-139
F-4-138

4-125
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Main Controller System > Removing the Primary Transfer PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dustproof Glass > Procedure
4-126

Laser Exposure System 2) Insert the Dustproof Glass cleaning tool [1] into a cleaning hole [2] and clean the Dustproof
Glass on the top side.

Cleaning the Dustproof Glass CAUTION:

■■Preparation • Push the Dustproof Glass cleaning tool until it stops, and then pull it out.
• Push and pull the tool at least one time.
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339). [2]

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Dustproof Glass cleaning tool [1] from the backside of the Toner Container
Replacement Unit Inner Cover.

[1]

[1]

F-4-141
3) Pull out the Dustproof Glass [1], and clean both sides of the Dustproof Glass with lint-free
paper [2] moistened with alcohol.

[2]

F-4-140
[1]

[1]

F-4-142

4-126
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dustproof Glass > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparation
4-127

CAUTION: Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

When installing the Dustproof Glass, insert it into the mounting hole [1] with the mark ■■Preparation
"UP" [A] upward.
CAUTION:

When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the
[1]
host machine.

1) Remove the Box Right Cover (Refer to page 4-342).

2) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
3) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
4)Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
5) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover .
6) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).
[A]
NOTE:
Be sure to refer to the correct step according to the following instruction since the
F-4-143
step differs between the copier model and the printer model.

• For copier model, refer to step 7-1.

• For printer model, refer to step 7-2.

7-1) Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit (for copier model) (Refer to page 4-352).
7-2) Removing the Printer Upper Cover (for printer model) (Refer to page 4-359).

4-127
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Preparation
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-128
■■Procedure CAUTION:

The Small Gauge Coaxial Cable Connector [1] cannot be pulled out upward (in the
NOTE:
This procedure shows the steps to be taken in the case of Laser Scanner Unit (Y). direction toward the harness). Do not pull it upward or the cable will be broken.
Disassemble and assemble the Laser Scanner Units (M), (C), and (Bk) in the same
way.

1) Remove the Top Plate Cover [1].

[1]
• 3 Screws [2]
• 4 Protrusions [3]

[1]
[3]

x3

F-4-145

2) Pull the connector [1] and the tag [2] horizontally to disconnect the Small Gauge Coaxial
Cable Connector [3].
[2]
F-4-144
[3]
x2

[2]

[1]

F-4-146

4-128
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-129
3) Move the Laser Scanner Unit [1].
NOTE:
• 3 Stepped Screws [2]
The number of Wire Saddles differ depending on the Laser Scanner Units (Y), (M), (C),
• 3 Washers [3] and (Bk). Follow the instruction shown below.
• 3 Springs [4]
• 1 Guide [5] • In the cases of Laser Scanner Units (Y), (M), and (C), refer to step 4-1.
• In the case of Laser Scanner Unit (Bk), refer to step 4-2.

[2]
x3 [2] 4-1) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1].
[3] • 2 Wire Saddles [2]
[2]
• 1 Connector [3]
[3] [4]
[3]
[4]
[4] [3]
x2
[1]

[2]

[5] [1]

F-4-148
4-2) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit (Bk) [1].
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
F-4-147 • 1 Connector [3]

[1]

[3] [2]

F-4-149

4-129
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
4-130
When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Buffer Path Unit (Refer to page 4-361).
2) Remove the DADF Unit and the Reader Unit (Refer to page 4-352).
3) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 4-127).

■■Procedure
Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit
1) Adjust the initial position of the Skew Correction Motor.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER > LD-ADJ-Y/M/C)

After replacing the Laser Scanner Unit

1) Execute color displacement correction.
(Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct
Color Mismatch)

4-130
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Open the Process Unit Inner Cover. > Procedure
4-131

Image Formation System 2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the
pressure.

Open the Process Unit Inner Cover.

■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:
[1]
When releasing pressure of the ITB Unit, execute the Adjustment when Installing/
Removing the ITB Unit.
F-4-151
3) Remove the Front Inner Handle Left Cover [1].
1) Remove the ITB Inner Middle Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2] (to loosen)
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
• 2 Hooks [3]
4) Remove the Front Inner Handle Right Cover [4].
• 1 Screw [5] (to loosen)
• 2 Hooks [6]

[1] [5]

[2] [3]

[3]

[2] [6]
[4]
F-4-150
[1]

F-4-152

4-131
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Open the Process Unit Inner Cover. > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
4-132
5) Turn the 2 handles (right and left) [1] downward, and pull out the Process Unit Inner Cover [2]
Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover
until it stops and move downward to open it.
■■Procedure
1) Hold the 2 handles (right and left) [1] and raise the Process Unit Inner Cover [2].
2) Push the Process Unit Inner Cover [2] to the rear side, and push on the 2 Stopper Plates [A]
[2]
of the right and left hooks to the 2 end faces (right and left) [B] of the Hinge Shaft Holder.

[1]
[1]
[2]

F-4-153

[1]
[2]
[B] [A] [1]

F-4-154
3) Raise the 2 handles (right and left) [1] at a 90-degree angle further and close the Process
Unit Inner Cover.

[1]
[1]

F-4-155

4-132
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Closing the Process Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-133

CAUTION: Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit

Be sure that the 2 hooks (right and left) [1] of the Process Unit Inner Cover are hooked ■■Procedure
and locked to the 2 Hinge Shafts [2] at the right and left sides of the host machine.
CAUTION:

If the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] is turned to release the pressured, perform this
[1] [1]
procedure to make adjustment.

[1]

[2] [2]

F-4-156

4) Install the Front Inner Handle Left Cover.

5) Install the Front Inner Handle Right Cover.
6) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever to apply pressure.
F-4-157

CAUTION:
1) Execute the ITB edge profile/Steering Roller neutral position measurement mode.
When releasing pressure of the ITB Unit, execute the Adjustment when Installing/ (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INIT-ITB)
Removing the ITB Unit. 2) From the user mode:
Execute Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
7) Install the ITB Inner Middle Cover. Correct Color Mismatch.
8) Install the Upper Front Cover.
9) Close the Front Cover.

4-133
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling out the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-134
Pulling out the ITB Unit 2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the
pressure.
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover. [1]

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• If you have operated the ITB Pressure Release Lever to install or remove the ITB
Unit, execute the adjustment when installing/removing the ITB Unit.
• Be careful not to touch the ITB with fingers or damage it. (Otherwise failure may
occur in the output image.)

1) Remove the ITB Inner Middle Cover [1]. F-4-159

• 1 Screw [2] 3) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the ITB Frame.
• 2 Hooks [3]

x2

[1]

[2] [1]

[3] [1]
F-4-160
F-4-158

4-134
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling out the ITB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling out the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-135
4) Hold the handle [1] to pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [2]. 6) Hold the handle [1] to pull out the ITB Unit [2].
5) Press the 2 Release Springs [3] at both sides of the rail to release the locks, and further 7) Press the 2 Release Springs [3] at both sides of the rail to release the locks, and further
pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [2] until it stops. pull out the ITB Unit [2] until it stops.

[3] [3]

[2]
[2]

[3] [3]

[1]

[1]

F-4-161 F-4-163

CAUTION:

When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit [1], pulling it out beyond the rear end [A] of the
Release Springs [2] on the rear side may cause falling of the Fixing Feed Unit.

[A] [2]

[A]
[2] [1]
[1]

F-4-162

4-135
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Pulling out the ITB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-136
Removing the ITB Unit 1) Move the ITB Unit [1] to the rear side to remove the 2 Fixation Pins [A] of the Secondary
Transfer Outer Unit.
■■Preparation
[1]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). [A]

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• Be careful not to touch the ITB with fingers or damage it.

(Otherwise failure may occur in the output image.)
• Place the ITB Unit on a sheet of paper, etc.
• Support the ITB Unit at the 3 locations: the lower left [A] of the ITB Unit Front Plate,
the foot [B] of the ITB, and molded area [C] of the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper F-4-165

Guide. 2) Hold the 2 handles [1] to remove the ITB Unit [2] by lifting upward.

[1]

[A] [B] [C] [2] [1]

F-4-164 F-4-166

4-136
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-137
Removing the ITB Frame Installing the ITB Unit
■■Preparation ■■Procedure
1) Open the Front Cover. 1) Push in the ITB Frame [1] and align the side [A] of the ITB Pressure Release Lever [2] with
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). the side [B] of the cover [3] of the Fixing Feed Unit.
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
■■Procedure
[2]
1) Press the 2 Release Springs [1] at both sides of the rail to release the locks, and pull out
the ITB Frame [2]. [1]
[A]

[B]

[3]
F-4-169

CAUTION:

F-4-167 If their positions are not aligned, the ITB Unit [1] may become on top of the Secondary
CAUTION: Transfer Unit [2], and the ITB [3] may be damaged when storing the ITB Unit [1] in the
host machine.
Put the 2 rails [2] pulled out back in the host machine as needed.
• 2 Rail Lock Levers [1] [1]

[3]
[1]

[1]

[2]

[2] F-4-170

F-4-168

4-137
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-138
2) Hold the 2 handles [1], and align the right edge [A] and left edge [B] of the ITB Unit Front 3) Check that the groove [A] of the ITB Frame and the leading edge [B] of the ITB Pressure
Plate with the 2 marks [2] on the ITB Frame to place the ITB Unit [3] horizontally. Arm are aligned in a straight line (2 locations).

[1] NOTE:
[2] If the 2 leading edges [B] of the ITB Pressure Arm are not engaged with the groove
[A] of the ITB Frame, the pressure will not be transmitted to the ITB Unit after putting it
back.
[1]
[A]

[B]

[3]
[2]

F-4-171

CAUTION: [B] [A]

• After placing on the ITB Frame, check that the right edge [A] of the ITB Unit Front
Plate is located to the right of the bended part [B] of the plate on the right side of the
F-4-173
ITB Frame.
4) Put the handle [1] of the ITB Unit back.
• Check that the bended part [C] on the left edge of the ITB Unit Front Plate is on top
of the bended part [D] of the plate on the left side of the ITB Frame.
[1]

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D] F-4-174

F-4-172

4-138
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Storing the ITB Unit > Procedure
4-139
Storing the ITB Unit 1) Put the ITB Unit [1] back in the host machine.

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• If you have operated the ITB Pressure Release Lever to install or remove the ITB
Unit, execute the adjustment when Adjustment when Installing/Removing the ITB
Unit.
[1]
• When putting the ITB Unit back in the host machine, be sure that the ITB Pressure
Release Lever is released (horizontal) and then push in the unit.
(If the unit is pushed in while the ITB Pressure Release Lever is in the engaged state
(not horizontal), pressure will not be applied to the ITB Unit even by turning the ITB
Pressure Release Lever.
When the host machine operates in this state, the belt displacement error E075 F-4-176
occurs.) 2) Secure the ITB Unit [1] with the 2 screws [2], and turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever [3]
in the direction of the arrow to apply pressure.

CAUTION:

Tighten the 2 screws of the ITB Frame to secure the ITB Unit, and then turn the ITB
Pressure Release Lever.
(If pressure is not applied at the proper position, the ITB Unit may be pushed up in the
host machine, causing damage to the ITB.)

[2]

x2
F-4-175

[1]
[3]

[2]

F-4-177

4-139
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Storing the ITB Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-140
3) Put the Fixing Feed Unit [1] back in the host machine.
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

[1] • When replacing this part, execute the actions After Replacing the ITB Cleaning
Blade Unit.
F-4-178 • Be careful not to touch the ITB with fingers or damage it.
4) Install the ITB Inner Middle Cover [1]. (Otherwise failure may occur in the output image.)
• 1 Screw [2] • Because there is toner on the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1], be sure to place it on a
• 2 Hooks [3] sheet of paper [2], etc.

[1] [2]

[1]

[2]

F-4-180

[3]

F-4-179
5) Close the Front Cover.

4-140
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-141
1) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1].
[2]
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
[1]
CAUTION:
[3]
• When disassembling/assembling, be sure to remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1] x2
before removing the ITB Cleaning Unit [2] to prevent the ITB Cleaning Blade from
being damaged. [2]

[1]
[2]
[3]

F-4-183

F-4-181

• Be sure to tilt the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit not to contact with the ITB in order to
prevent the ITB Cleaning Blade [1] and the ITB [2] from being damaged when
disassembling/assembling.

[1]

[2]
F-4-182

4-141
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade > Procedure
4-142
Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade 1) Remove the 2 springs [2] from the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1].

[2]
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140). [2]

■■Procedure

CAUTION: [1]

Be careful not to touch the [A] part of the ITB Cleaning Blade.
F-4-185
2) Change the direction of the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1].

[A]

F-4-184

F-4-186

4-142
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade > Procedure
4-143
3) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade [2] from the ITB Cleaning Unit [1].
CAUTION:
• 1 Stepped Screw [3]
• 1 Wave Washer [4] At installation, be sure to align the 2 holes [1] of the IITB Cleaning Blade Unit with the 2
• 1 Spacer [5] bosses [2] of the spacer.

CAUTION:

Be sure to hold the plate [A] of the Side Seal when removing the ITB Cleaning Blade.

[A]

[2]
[2]
[1]
F-4-189

F-4-187

[3] 4) Remove the 2 Side Seals [2] from the ITB Cleaning Blade [1].

[2] [3]
[4]

[2]
x2
[1]

[1]

[3]
[5]

F-4-188
[2]

F-4-190

4-143
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
4-144

CAUTION: After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit

• At installation, be sure to place the 2 Side Seals [1] inwards. ■■Procedure
[1] 1) After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit, apply lubricant [1] (FY9-6007-000) to
the application area [A] on the ITB surface in the longitudinal direction [B] (1 reciprocation).
x2 (Execute this step without the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit being installed.)

CAUTION:

Target application area is to be the area surrounded by the application width as shown
below.
• Application area
Application width in the longitudinal direction [B] is shorter than the width of the
Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2].
Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2]
[1] width.
• Target: Between the point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit Rear Plate [3] and the
point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit Front Plate [4].
F-4-191
The application width in the belt's rotation direction is between the Primary Transfer
• Be sure that there is the clearance [A] between the ITB Cleaning Blade and the plate
Roller (Y) [2] and the ITB Driver Roller [5].
of the Side Seal.
Target: Between the point of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2] Shaft Support (Front/
Rear) Cover edge [C] and the point approx. 45 mm below the edge.

CAUTION:

Points to Note when Applying Lubricant (FY9-6007-000) [1]

• Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the application width in the
longitudinal direction [B].
• When lubricant [1] is applied outside the application area, be sure to wipe with lint-
free paper.
[A] [A]

F-4-192

4-144
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > After Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure
4-145

approx 35mm
Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit

[3] [4]
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
[B] 2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
[2] 3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140).

[C] [C] ■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Because there is toner on the ITB Cleaning Unit [1], be sure to place it on a sheet of
paper [2], etc.

approx 45mm [5] [1] [A] approx 45mm

F-4-193
[2]
2) Rotate the ITB Drive Motor [1] with hand counterclockwise, and then rotate the ITB until the
lubricant [2] applied to the ITB is hidden in the Scoop-up Sheet [3] of the ITB Cleaning Unit.
(The applied lubricant [2] passes through the Scoop-up Sheet [3] of the ITB Cleaning Unit.)

CAUTION:
Be sure to turn the ITB Drive Motor [1] counterclockwise only and be careful not to turn
it clockwise.
[1]

[2] F-4-195

[3]

[1]
F-4-194
3) Install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit to the ITB Unit.

4-145
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure
4-146

CAUTION: CAUTION:

• Do not turn the ITB Cleaning Unit [1] upside down to prevent toner from scattering Do not touch the Scoop-up Sheet [1] directly with hand.
around. If there is folding line on the Scoop-up Sheet, failure may occur in the output image.

[1]

[1]

F-4-198
F-4-196
• When disassembling/assembling, be sure to remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit [1]
• When installing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit, check that waste toner is not before removing the ITB Cleaning Unit [2] to prevent the ITB Cleaning Blade from
accumulated on the back side of the Scoop-up Sheet [1] of the ITB Cleaning Unit. being damaged.
If there is waste toner, gently tap the unit to drop it to the screw.
[1]
[2]
[1]

F-4-197 F-4-199

4-146
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Cleaning Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
4-147
1) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit [1].
Removing the ITB
• 2 Screws [2]
• 3 Bosses [3] ■■Preparation
[3]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
[3]
x2 [2]
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
[1] 4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140).
5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145).

■■Procedure
[2]
[3] CAUTION:
F-4-200
• When replacing this part, execute the Cleaning when replacing the ITB.
• Be careful not to touch any part of the ITB other than the specified part with finger or
damage the ITB.
(Otherwise failure may occur in the output image.)
• Do not touch the surfaces of the ITB Drive Roller [1], Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller [2], ITB Steering Roller [3], and Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk) [4].
(Otherwise, it may cause image failure.)
• Be sure not to damage the ITB Retainer Sheet [5].

[4]
[1]

[3]

[2]
[5]
[4]
F-4-201

4-147
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
4-148
1) Turn the ITB Unit Front Plate [1] downward, and stand the ITB Unit [2] vertically.
[3]

[2]
x2
[1]

[2] [2]

F-4-202
2) Remove the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide [1] in the direction of the arrow.
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
• 2 Protrusions [4]
[4] [1]
NOTE:
One of the screws [2] tightens the grounding together. F-4-203

NOTE:
When installing the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide [1], align it with the 2 bosses
[2], and then insert the 2 protrusions [3] of the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide in
the ITB Unit to make the work easy.

x2

[3] [1] [2]

F-4-204

4-148
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
4-149
3) Remove the ITB Unit Right Rear Small Plate [1]. 5) Turn the ITB Tension Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release the pressure applied
• 1 Screw [2] on the ITB [2].
• 2 Bosses [3]
• 1 Hook [4]

[2]

[1] [1]
[2]
F-4-207
6) Place the ITB Unit [1] vertically, and turn the handle [2] toward the Rear Plate of the ITB
[4] [3] Unit.
F-4-205
4) Place the ITB Unit [1] sideways to change its orientation. [1]

[1]

[2]

F-4-208

F-4-206

4-149
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
4-150
When removing the ITB using the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet
CAUTION:
7-1) Insert the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [1] included in the package between the ITB [3]
• The ITB is thinner than the existing ones, so it can be easily bent. and the ITB Unit, with the folded slant area [A] of the sheet coming on the upper side of the
Be sure to handle it with care not to bend when working. ITB Drive Roller [2].
• Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ITB.
It is for not to touch the image area of the ITB.
[1]
• Be sure to place the ITB on a sheet of paper.

10mm

[A]
[2]
[3]

10mm F-4-210
7-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB, and remove the ITB [1] while paying attention not to
F-4-209
damage it.

NOTE:
• If the ITB of the service parts is available for the purpose of replacement, use the
ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package to prevent the ITB from being
damaged.
If the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet is used: perform steps 7-1 through 7-3.

• If the ITB of the service parts is not available, use 2 sheets of A3 paper instead of the ITB
Installation Auxiliary Sheet.
[A]
If 2 sheets of A3 paper are used: perform steps 8-1 through 8-3.

[1]

F-4-211

4-150
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
4-151
7-3) Remove the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [1]. 8-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB, and remove the ITB [1] while paying attention not to
damage it.

[1]

[1]
[A]

F-4-212
When removing the ITB using the 2 sheets of A3 paper F-4-214
8-3) Remove the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] and the 4 tapes [2] from the ITB Front Plate.
8-1) Insert the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] between the ITB and the ITB Unit to wrap around the
2 ends [A] of the ITB Unit, and then use the tapes [2] to secure them to the ITB Front Plate.

[1] [2]

[2]

[2]

[A] [2] [A] [1]

F-4-213

F-4-215

4-151
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
4-152
Installing the ITB CAUTION:

■■Procedure When installing the ITB to the ITB Unit, be sure that the pressure applied to the ITB is
released.

CAUTION:
• The ITB is thinner than the existing ones, so it can be easily bent.
Be sure to handle it with care not to bend when working.
• Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ITB.
It is for not to touch the image area of the ITB.
• Be sure to place the ITB on a sheet of paper.

10mm

10mm

F-4-216

• Do not touch the surfaces of the ITB Drive Roller [1], Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller [2], ITB Steering Roller [3], and Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk) [4].
(Otherwise, it may cause image failure.)
• Be sure not to damage the ITB Retainer Sheet [5].
F-4-218

[4]
[1]

[3]

[2]
[5]
[4]
F-4-217

4-152
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
4-153
1) Turn the ITB Unit Front Plate [1] downward, and stand the ITB Unit [2]. 2-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB to place the white sheet [1] on top of it, and install while
paying attention not to damage the ITB [2].
[2]
[1]

[1]

[A]

F-4-219 [2]

F-4-221
NOTE: 2-3) Remove the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [1].
• If the ITB of the service parts is available for the purpose of replacement, use the
ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet included in the package to prevent the ITB from being
damaged.
If the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet is used: perform steps 2-1 through 2-3.
• If the ITB of the service parts is not available, use 2 sheets of A3 paper instead of the ITB
Installation Auxiliary Sheet.
If 2 sheets of A3 paper are used: perform steps 3-1 through 3-3.

When using the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet

[1]
2-1) Insert the ITB Installation Auxiliary Sheet [2] included in the package with the folded slant
area [A] of the sheet coming on the upper side of the ITB Drive Roller [1].

F-4-222

[A]
[2]
[1]

F-4-220

4-153
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
4-154
When using the 2 sheets of A3 paper 3-3) Remove the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] and the tapes [2] from the ITB Front Plate.
3-1) Use the 4 tapes [2] to secure the 2 sheets of A3 paper [1] to the ITB Front Plate to wrap
[1]
around the 2 ends [A] of the ITB Unit.

[2]
[2]

[2]
[2]
F-4-225
4) Place the ITB Unit [1] sideways to change its orientation.
[1] [A] [A]

[1]
F-4-223
3-2) Hold the edge [A] of the ITB to place the white sheet [1] inside the ITB on the top, and
install while paying attention not to damage the ITB [2].

[1]

F-4-226

[2]
[A]

F-4-224

4-154
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
4-155
5) Align the center of the ITB [2] with the center [A] of the left and right rollers [1] of the ITB 6) Turn the ITB Tension Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to apply tension to the ITB [2].
Unit.
CAUTION:
[2] [1] • To avoid applying tension quickly, hold the ITB Tension Lever and the Stopper Cam
at the rear side with both hands and then turn them slowly.
• After applying tension to the ITB with the ITB Tension Lever, be sure to hook the
Stopper Cam to the shaft at the rear side of the ITB Unit to lock it.
At this time, be sure that a click sound is heard.

[A]

[1]

F-4-227

CAUTION

• Install the ITB [1], and place the ITB Retainer Sheet [2] of the Front Plate on top of
the ITB while paying attention not to fold it.
• Be sure to place the leading edge of the ITB Position Flag [3] on top of the ITB [1].

F-4-229

[1]

[2]

[1] [3]

[2] [1]

F-4-230

F-4-228

4-155
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning when replacing the ITB > Procedure
4-156
Cleaning when replacing the ITB 2) Clean the whole circumference [A] of the surface of the ITB Steering Roller with lint-free
paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140). [A]
5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145).
6) Remove the ITB (Refer to page 4-147).
[1]

■■Procedure
1) While rotating the Drive Motor [2] in the direction of the arrow, clean the whole
circumference [A] of the surface of the Drive Roller with lint-free paper [1] moistened with
alcohol.
F-4-232
3) Clean the whole circumference [A] of the surface of the Pre-secondary Transfer Idler Roller
with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.

[A]

[A]
[1]

[1]

[2]

F-4-231

F-4-233

4-156
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning when replacing the ITB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller > Procedure
4-157
4) Clean the soiling adhered at the hole [A] of the HP Sensor PCB [2] with a blower [1].
Removing the Primary Transfer Roller
■■Preparation
[A] 1) Open the Front Cover.
[1]
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140).
5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145).
6) Remove the ITB (Refer to page 4-147).

■■Procedure
[2]
CAUTION:
F-4-234
• When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the
5) While pushing down the Flag [1], clean the soiling adhered at the Edge Sensor [3] with a
Primary Transfer Roller.
blower [2].
• Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

NOTE:
[3] This procedure indicates the location of the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk).
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Primary Transfer Roller (Y), (M), and (C).

1) Place the ITB Unit [1] sideways to change its orientation.

[2]

[1] [1]

F-4-235

F-4-236

4-157
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller > Procedure
4-158
2) Open the Shaft Support Cover (Front) [2] and the Shaft Support Cover (Rear) [3] by 4) Remove the Primary Transfer Roller [1] in the direction of the arrow.
releasing them from the protrusions [1].

[2] [1]
[3]

[1]
[1]

F-4-237
3) Release the rear shaft of the Primary Transfer Roller by holding the shaft [1] of the Primary
F-4-239
Transfer Roller and pushing down the Shaft Support [2] at the rear side.
CAUTION:

[1] Be sure to push the shafts [1] at front and rear sides of the Primary Transfer Roller into
the Shaft Support [2] from above.
If no click sound is heard at this time, reinstall the roller.

[1]

[2]

F-4-238

[2]

F-4-240

4-158
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Transfer Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure
4-159
When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Execute the primary transfer ATVC. 1) Open the Front Cover.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > 1ATVC-EX) 2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140).
5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145).
6) Remove the ITB (Refer to page 4-147).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

1) Remove the Bearing Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]

[3]
x2

[1]

[2]

F-4-241

4-159
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure
4-160
2) Remove the bearing [1] and the Secondary Transfer Roller [2] in the direction of the arrow.
NOTE:
CAUTION: If replacement is not required, there is no need to remove the bearing [1] at the
lower side.
• Be sure not to deform the Grounding Spring [1]. If it is removed, place it in the Bearing Holder [2].
• Be sure to keep the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [2] from coming in contact with
the Grounding Spring [1] to prevent it from being damaged.

[1]

[1]
[2]

F-4-244

[2] 3) Remove the bearing [2] from the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [1].

F-4-242

[1]
[2]

[1]

[2]
F-4-245

F-4-243

4-160
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder > Procedure
4-161
Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder 1) Place the ITB Unit [1] sideways.

■■Preparation [1]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140).
5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145).
6) Remove the ITB (Refer to page 4-147).

■■Procedure

CAUTION: F-4-247

Do not touch or bend the 2 sheets [1] in the ITB Inner Scraper Holder. 2) Remove the ITB Inner Scraper Holder [1].
• 2 Screws [2]

[2] [1] [2]

[1]
x2

[1]

F-4-246

F-4-248

4-161
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Inner Scraper Holder > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater Unit > Procedure
4-162
Cleaning the ITB Inner Scraper Removing the Drum Heater Unit
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover. 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). 2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136). 3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140). 4) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 4-140).
5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145). 5) Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-145).
6) Remove the ITB (Refer to page 4-147). 6) Remove the ITB (Refer to page 4-147).

■■Procedure ■■Procedure

CAUTION: CAUTION:

If the ITB Inner Scraper is soiled when the ITB is removed, be sure to perform the Because the Drum Heater is hot, be sure to perform disassembly/assembly after it is
following procedure to clean it. cooled down.

1) Clean the leading edge of the ITB Inner Scraper [2] with lint-free paper moistened with 1) Place the ITB Unit [1] sideways to change its orientation.
alcohol [1].

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-4-250

F-4-249

4-162
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Motor > Procedure
4-163
2) Remove the Drum Heater (M) Unit [1].
Removing the ITB Motor
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
• 1 Connector [3] ■■Preparation
• 2 Screws [4]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
[4]

[3] ■■Procedure
1) Remove the ITB Motor [1].
[2]
• 1 Connector [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
[3]
x2
[1]

[2]
F-4-251
3) Remove the Drum Heater (Y) Unit [1]. x4
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
• 2 Connectors [3]
• 3 Spacers [4]
[1]

[3]
x2 [4] F-4-253
[2]

[3] [1]

[4]

F-4-252

4-163
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the ITB Motor > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
4-164
Removing the Patch Sensor Unit ■■Procedure
■■Preparation CAUTION:
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the Patch
2) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341).
Sensor Unit.
3) Open the Front Cover.
4) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). 1) Disconnect the connector [1].
5) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136). • 1 Edge Saddle [2]
6) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine.

[2]

[1]
[1]
[2]
F-4-255
F-4-254
7) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
8) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(Perform steps 3 through 5.)
9) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
10)Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
11) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).

4-164
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
4-165
2) While inserting the connector [1] in the host machine, remove the Patch Sensor Unit [2].
• 1 Screw [3]

CAUTION:

If the 2 Positioning Pins [1] of the rear side are removed when removing the Patch
Sensor Unit, the Patch Sensor Unit may fall off inside the host machine. Therefore,
firmly support the unit during the work.
[1]
[1]

[2]

[3]

F-4-256

F-4-257

4-165
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
4-166

NOTE: When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit

Patch Sensor Unit installation method
1) Pass the connector [1] through the hole [A] of the plate. ■■Procedure
2) Hook the plate [B] of the Patch Sensor Unit to the 2 protrusions [2] of the host
machine and then fit the Positioning Pins [3] of the rear side to the 2 holes [4] of the 1) Enter the alpha value of the Patch Sensor.
Rear Plate. (COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-C)
• 1 Screw [5] (Enter the 4-digit number below the barcode of the Patch Image Read Sensor Unit in the
[B] [3] [4] [4] [2] following service mode: ALF-C.)

VoP(B):0518
VoS(B):0352
VoP(A):0978
*1/1468*
[5]
[1] ALF-C
[A]

F-4-258

F-4-259

2) Adjust the light intensity of the Patch Sensor.

(COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > PT-LPADJ)

4-166
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
4-167
Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit ■■Procedure
1) Open the Shutter [1] and clean the surface [A] of the Patch Sensor with tightly-wrung cotton
■■Preparation
swab [2] moistened with water in the single direction.
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341). After cleaning, check that there is no soiling caused by toner on the surface [A] of the
2) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341). sensor.
3) Open the Front Cover.
4) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). CAUTION:
5) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
• Do not use alcohol because it causes melting and clouding of the sensor window.
6) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine.
• Do not dry wipe the sensor window because it is charged to attract toner.

[A]

[1]
[2] [1]

F-4-260
7) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
8) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(Perform steps 3 through 5.)
9) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184). [2] [2]
10) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203). [A] [A]

11) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).

12) Remove the Patch Sensor Unit (Refer to page 4-164).

F-4-261

4-167
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
4-168
Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit 2) Lift the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit [1] vertically to remove it.
• 2 Connectors [2]
■■Preparation • 2 Stepped Screws [3]

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309). [3]

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Be sure not to touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller when
disassembling/assembling.

1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3] [2]
x2
[2]

[3]

[1]

F-4-263

[1]
[3]

F-4-262

4-168
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator > Procedure
4-169

CAUTION: Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator

When installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit to the Fixing Feed Unit, be sure to do ■■Preparation
so after releasing the pressure applied on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
1) Open the Front Cover.
(Otherwise, the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller may be deformed, or the ITB may be 2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
damaged.)
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
How to release the pressure applied on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
The pressure on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [3] can be released by turning the ■■Procedure
gear [1] and changing the direction of the cam [2].
Be sure to keep the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller lowered.
CAUTION:
[1]
Be sure not to touch the surface of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller when
[3] disassembling/assembling.

1) Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide [1].

• 1 Screw (with washer) [2]
• 1 Protrusion [3]

[2] [1] [3]

[2]

[3] [2]

F-4-265
F-4-264

4-169
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller > Procedure
4-170

CAUTION: Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

• Be sure not to deform the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator [1]. ■■Preparation
• Be sure not to deform the Grounding Spring [2]. 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
[1] 3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
[2]
4) Remove the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator (Refer to page 4-169).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• If the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is soiled when replacing it, Cleaning the
Secondary Transfer Outer Unit and Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Static
F-4-266 Eliminator Unit.

2) Hold the protrusions [A] (front and rear) to remove the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator • Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.
[1].
1) Remove the 2 E-rings [1] at the front and rear sides.

[1]

[1]
[1]
[A]

F-4-267

F-4-268

4-170
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller > Procedure
4-171
2) While pressing the Secondary Transfer Holder [1], remove the 2 arms [2] one by one. 4) Remove the 2 Secondary Transfer Holders (with springs) [2] from the Secondary Transfer
Outer Roller [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

F-4-271

CAUTION:
F-4-269
When assembling, be sure to install with the groove [1] of the Secondary Transfer Outer
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [1] and the 2 Secondary Transfer Holders (with
Roller facing the rear side of the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit.
springs) [2].

[2]

[2]
[1]

[1]

F-4-270

F-4-272

4-171
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
4-172
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Unit Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit
■■Preparation ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover. 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309). 2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168). 3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
4) Remove the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator (Refer to page 4-169). 4) Remove the Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator (Refer to page 4-169).
5) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller (Refer to page 4-170).
■■Procedure
1) Clean paper dust accumulated at the back side [A] of the Secondary Transfer Static
■■Procedure
Eliminator Unit with dry lint-free paper [1]. 1) Clean paper dust accumulated at the groove [A] of the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit with
dry lint-free paper [1].

[A]

[A]

[1]

[1]
F-4-273

F-4-274

4-172
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Rail > Procedure
4-173
Removing the Primary Charging Rail ■■Procedure
1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
■■Preparation
• 5 Wire Saddles [2]
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341). • 1 Edge Saddle [3]
2) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341).
3) Open the Front Cover.
4) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
5) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136). x5 [2]
6) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine.

x2

[1]
[3]

F-4-276
2) Put the removed harness [1] inside the host machine.
[1]
[2]
[1]
F-4-275
7) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
8) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(Perform steps 3 through 5.)
9) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
10) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
11) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
12) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).

F-4-277

4-173
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Rail > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Rail > Procedure
4-174
3) Remove the Primary Charging Rail [1].
NOTE:
• 2 Wire Saddles [2]
When installing, insert the Primary Charging Rail [1] at the angle as shown in the figure,
• 1 Harness Guide [3] and then insert the 2 bosses [2] in the boss holes [3] of the host machine.
• 1 Screw [4]

[4] [3] [1]

[1]
[2]
x3
[3]
[2]

[2]

F-4-280

F-4-278

CAUTION:

Install the wiring [1] of the Potential Control PCB Unit along the Harness Guide [A] of
the Primary Charging Rail.

[1] [1]

[A] [A]

F-4-279

4-174
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Rail > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermopile > Procedure
4-175
Removing the Drum Thermopile ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Drum Thermopile [2] from the Primary Charging Rail [1].
■■Preparation
• 1 Guide [3]
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341). • 1 Connector [4]
2) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341). • 2 Screws [5]
3) Open the Front Cover.
4) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
5) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136). [5] [4]
6) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine.
[3]

[1] x2
[2] [5]

F-4-282

[1]
[2]

F-4-281
7) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
8) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(Perform steps 3 through 5.)
9) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
10) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
11) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
12) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
13) Remove the Primary Charging Rail (Refer to page 4-173).

4-175
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermopile > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB) > Procedure
4-176
Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit ■■Procedure
(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB)
CAUTION:
■■Preparation
When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the Potential
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341). Sensor and Potential Control PCB.
2) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341).
3) Open the Front Cover.
4) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). NOTE:
If the Potential Sensor is replaced, also replace the harness connected to the Potential
5) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
Sensor and the Potential Control PCB as a Potential Control PCB Unit.
6) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine.

1) Remove the harness [1] connected to the Potential Sensor, Potential Sensor Protection
Sheet [2], and Potential Sensor [3].
• 2 Wire Saddles [4]
• 2 Harness Guides [5]
• 1 Screw [6]

[1]
[2] [1]
x4 [3] [2]
F-4-283
7) Remove the Upper Front Cove (Refer to page 4-339)r. [5]
8) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(Perform steps 3 through 5.)
9) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
10) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203). [6]
11) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
12) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
13) Remove the Primary Charging Rail (Refer to page 4-173). [4]

F-4-284

4-176
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
(including Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
4-177

CAUTION: When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential

When installing, remove the release paper, and align the Potential Sensor Protection Control PCB
Sheet with the marking line [A] to affix it (be sure that the gap [B] between the marking
line and the release paper is less than 0.5 mm). ■■Procedure

NOTE:
When replacing the Potential Sensor, replace the Potential Control PCB Unit (including
the Potential Sensor, harness and Potential Control PCB).

1) Install the Primary Charging Rail [1] with the Potential Sensor removed to the host
machine.
• 1 Screw [2]

[B] [2]
[A]
F-4-285

2) Remove the Potential Control PCB [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
• 5 PCB Supports [4]
[1]
[4]

F-4-287

[1]

[2]
[4] [3]

F-4-286

4-177
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
4-178
5) Install a new Potential Control PCB [1].
NOTE:
• 1 Connector [2]
When installing, insert the Primary Charging Rail [1] at the angle as shown in the figure,
and then insert the 2 bosses [2] in the boss holes [3] of the host machine. • 1 Screw [3]
• 5 PCB Supports [4]

[1] [4]

[2]

[3]

[2]
[1]

[2]
F-4-288 [3]
[4]
2) Install the ITB Unit to the host machine.
F-4-290
3) Connect a new cable [3] to the connector [2] of a new Potential Sensor [1].
6) Pass the harness [1] of the Primary Charging Rail and the electrode for checking the
4) Install the Potential Sensor [1] to the 2 pin electrodes [4] for checking the Potential Sensor.
Potential Sensor from the Edge Saddle [2] of the Right Side Plate of the host machine, and
• 1 Connector [2]
connect the 5 Wire Saddles [3] and the 2 connectors [4].
• 1 Screw [5]

CAUTION:

Secure the screw firmly so that the Potential Sensor is not removed. x2 [3] [4]

[1]
[5]
x5

[3] [1]
[2]
[4]

F-4-291
[4]
[4] [2]

F-4-289

4-178
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
4-179
7) Place the electrode [1] for checking the Potential Sensor on the Process Unit Inner Cover [2], 11) Use a dedicated tool [1] to deactivate the Front Door Switch.
and use the Electrode Clip [3] to pinch the plate of the hinge to ground.

CAUTION:

Be careful not to drop the electrode for checking the Potential Sensor.

[1]

F-4-293
12) When the screen [A] displays [READY] in the service mode, adjust the Potential Sensor.
[3] Service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST

[1] Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

[2] < DPC > <　1/ 2　> <READY > <LEVEL 1 >
F-4-292 DPC
8) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit.
OFST
DRM-RSET
CAUTION:
OFST-Y
Be careful not to trap the cable. OFST-M
OFST-C
9) Turn ON the main power switch. DRMRSETY
10) Disable the warm-up rotation in service mode immediately after turning ON the main DRMRSETM
power switch.
OK
Set the service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF to 1.
F-4-294

4-179
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
4-180
13) Press [OK] on the indicator and the display changes from [ACTIVE] to [OK!].
CAUTION:
Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

< DPC > <　1/ 2　> <WAITING > <LEVEL 1 > < DPC > <　1/ 2　> <READY > <LEVEL 1 > When installing, remove the release paper, and align the Potential Sensor Protection
DPC DPC Sheet with the marking line [A] to affix it (be sure that the gap [B] between the marking
OFST ACTIVE OFST OK! line and the release paper is less than 0.5 mm).
DRM-RSET DRM-RSET
OFST-Y OFST-Y
OFST-M OFST-M
OFST-C OFST-C
DRMRSETY DRMRSETY
DRMRSETM DRMRSETM

OK

F-4-295
14) Enable the warm-up rotation in the service mode.
Set the service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF to 0.
[B]
[A]
15) Turn OFF the main power switch.
F-4-297
16) Install a new Potential Sensor [1] to the Primary Charging Rail.
• 1 Harness [2] 18) Install the Primary Charging Rail to the host machine.
• 2 Wire Saddles [3] 19) Install the removed parts in reverse order.
• 2 Harness Guides [4]
• 1 Screw [5]
17) Install a new Potential Sensor Protection Sheet [6].

[2]
[1] [6]

[4]

x4

[5]

[3]

F-4-296

4-180
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermistor > Procedure
4-181
Removing the Drum Thermistor ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Drum Thermistor [1].
■■Preparation
• 1 Connector [2]
1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341). • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
2) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341). • 1 Harness Guide [4]
3) Open the Front Cover.
4) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
5) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136). [4]
6) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine. [3]
[2]

[1]

F-4-299

[1]
[2]

F-4-298
7) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
8) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(Perform steps 3 through 5.)
9) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
10) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
11) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
12) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
13) Remove the Primary Charging Rail (Refer to page 4-173).

4-181
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Thermistor > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk) > Procedure
4-182
Removing the Developing Assembly ■■Procedure
Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk)
NOTE:
■■Preparation The 2 Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCBs for (Y)/(M) [1] and (C)/
(Bk) [2] are installed.
1) Open the Front Cover. This procedure explains how to remove the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature
2) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). Detection PCB (C)/(Bk).
Be sure to perform the same procedure to remove the Developing Assembly Inner
3) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136). Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M).
4) Put the ITB Frame [1] and the Fixing Feed Unit [2] back in the host machine.

[1] [2]

[1]
[2]
F-4-301
F-4-300
5) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
6) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
7) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).

4-182
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk) > Procedure
4-183
1) Remove the Thermistor Holder [1]. 3) Remove the Developing Assembly Inner Temperature Detection PCB [1].
• 1 Claw [2] • 2 Claws [2]
• 1 Protrusion [3]
[2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [4]

x2

[2]

[1]
[2] [3]

F-4-304

[4]

[1]

F-4-302
2) Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

F-4-303

4-183
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
Inner Temperature Detection PCB (Y)/(M) and (C)/(Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-184
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

■■Preparation [1]

1) Open the Front Cover.

x2
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the
Primary Charging Assembly.
• Do not touch the surface [1] of the Grid Plate. Otherwise functional failure may occur. F-4-306

• Do not place the side with the Grid down when placing the Primary Charging 2) While pressing down the claw [1], pull out the Primary Charging Assembly [2] horizontally.
Assembly.
[2] [1] [2]

[1]

F-4-307

F-4-305

4-184
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-185

CAUTION: When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly

When installing, align the 2 rails [1] of the Primary Charging Assembly with the 2 ■■Procedure
protrusions [A] of the Primary Charging Assembly, and then install it horizontally.
1) Output a Bk halftone image using the service mode.
• (TEST > PG > TYPE: 5 )
[1] • (TEST > PG > COLOR-Y/M/C: 0)
• (TEST > PG > COLOR-K: 1)

[A] 2) If there is density difference between the front and the rear side of the test print image,
refer to step 4 to adjust if the front side is dark, or refer to step 3 if the rear side is dark.
[1]
If the density is even, execute step 6 and later.

3) Move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2].
• 2 Screws [3]

[A]
[3]
F-4-308

[2]
[1]

F-4-309
4) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (if the front side of the test print image is dark).

NOTE:
• If the front side of the test print image is dark [1], execute steps from 4-1 to 4-3 as shown
below until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 6
and later.
• If the adjustment screw is turned counterclockwise, the Charging Wire goes down (gap
between the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes narrow). As a result, the density of
output image becomes light. If the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging
Wire goes up (gap between the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes wide). As a result,
the density of output image becomes dark.

4-185
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-186
5) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (if the rear side of the test print image is dark).
[A]
NOTE:
[B]
• If the rear side of the test print image is dark [2], execute steps from 5-1 to 5-3 as shown
below until the density becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute steps 6
and later.
• If the adjustment screw is turned counterclockwise, the Charging Wire goes down (gap
between the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes narrow). As a result, the density of
output image becomes light.
If the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes up (gap between
the Grid and the Charging Wire becomes wide). As a result, the density of output image
becomes dark.

[A]

[B]

F-4-310
4-1) Rotate the Resin Screws [A] a full turn counterclockwise.
While referring to the Removing the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the host
machine, output a test print and check the image.

4-2) If the front side of the test print image is still dark, further rotate the Resin Screw [A] a full
turn counterclockwise.
While referring to the Removing the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the host
machine, output a test print and check the image.

4-3) If the front side of the test print image is still dark, rotate the Resin Screw [B] a half turn
clockwise.
F-4-311
While referring to the Removing the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the host
machine, output a test print and check the image.

4-186
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit > Procedure
4-187
5-1) Rotate the Resin Screw [B] a full turn counterclockwise.
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
While referring to the Removing the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the host
machine, output a test print and check the image. ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
5-2) If the rear side of the test print image is still dark, further rotate the Resin Screw [B] a full
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
turn counterclockwise.
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
While referring to the Removing the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the host
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
machine, output a test print and check the image.

5-3) If the rear side of the test print image is still dark, rotate the Resin Screw [A] a half turn ■■Procedure
clockwise.
While referring to the Removing the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the host CAUTION:
machine, output a test print and check the image.
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Grid when disassembling/assembling.

6) Clean the Charging Wire using the service mode.

(FUNCTION > CLAENING > WIRE-CLN) Time required: Approx. 30 sec. [A]

7) Execute the potential control using the service mode.

(COPIER > FUNCTION >DPC >DPC) Time required: Approx. 30 sec.

8) Execute the uneven density correction using the user mode.

(Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct
Shading)

F-4-312

4-187
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit > Procedure
4-188
1) Loosen the 2 screws [3] of the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2]. 3) Remove the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixtures [2] from the Shutter Arm [1].
• 2 Claws [3]

[1] [3] [3]

[2]
[2]
[2]

[3] [1] [1]

F-4-313
2) Move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2] until they stop.

[1]
[2]

F-4-315

CAUTION:
F-4-314

When installing the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixture, check that the Shutter Arm is
engaged with the claw properly.
(Move the Shutter Sheet installation Fixture to the right and left to check that it does not
come off.)

4-188
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Plate > Procedure
4-189
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit [1].
Removing the Grid Plate
• 3 Claws [2]
• 2 Bosses [3] ■■Preparation
[2] [1] 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
x3 3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).

[3]
■■Procedure
[3] [2]
CAUTION:

• When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the
Primary Charging Assembly.
[2]
• Do not touch the surface [A] of the Grid when disassembling/assembling.
F-4-316
5) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor [2] from the Primary Charging
Assembly Shutter Unit [1]. [A]
• 1 Connector [3]
• 2 Claws [4]

[1]

x2

[3] F-4-318

[4]
[2]
[4]

F-4-317

4-189
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Plate > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Plate > Procedure
4-190
1) Loosen the 2 screws [3] of the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2]. 3) Remove the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixtures [2] from the Shutter Slider [1].
• 2 Claws [3]

[1] [3] [3]

[2]
[2]
[2]

[3] [1] [1]

F-4-319
2) Move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2] until they stop.

[1]
[2]

F-4-321

CAUTION:
F-4-320
When installing the Shutter Sheet Installation Fixture, check that the Shutter Arm is
engaged with the claw properly.
(Move the Shutter Sheet installation Fixture to the right and left to check that it does not
come off.)

4-190
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Plate > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Plate > Procedure
4-191
4) Press the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove the Grid Plate [2].
CAUTION:
• 2 Claws [3]
Point to Note When Installing the Grid Plate
• The Grid Plate [1] has a front side and a rear side. Therefore, install it in the correct
direction.
• Be sure that the Grid Plate [1] is not placed on the protrusions [2] of the Primary
Charging Assembly when installing it.
• After installing the Grid Plate [1] on the Primary Charging Assembly, check that the
protrusions [2] are fitted in the holes [A] of the Grid.

[1]
[3]
[2] [1]

x2

[A]

[2] [2] [1]

[1]

[2]
F-4-322

[1]

F-4-323

4-191
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Plate > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad > Procedure
4-192
When Replacing the Grid Plate Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Clean the Charging Wire. 1) Open the Front Cover.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX) 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
2) Execute the potential control. 3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC) 4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-189).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Do not touch the Primary Charging Wire [1] when disassembling/assembling.

[1]

F-4-324

4-192
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad > Procedure
4-193
1) Move the Cleaning Pad Arm [1] to the center of the Primary Charging Assembly [2]. 3) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad [1] in the direction of the arrow.
• 2 Protrusions [2]

[3] [1]
[2]

[1]

[2]

F-4-325

F-4-327
CAUTION:

After the work, return the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front.
This is to shorten the Cleaning Pad Arm detection time after the power is turned ON.

2) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (L) [1] and the Primary Charging
Assembly Rear Cover [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[3]

x2
[3]

[2]

[1]

F-4-326

4-193
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Grid Cleaning Pad > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder > Procedure
4-194
Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad CAUTION:
Holder Push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder [1] until it is secured to the 2
claws [2].
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover. [1]

2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).

3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-189).
6) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad (Refer to page 4-192).

■■Procedure [2]

CAUTION: F-4-329

Do not damage the Primary Charging Wire when disassembling/assembling.

1) Use your fingers to pinch and remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder [1].

[1]

F-4-328

4-194
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider > Procedure
4-195
Removing the Primary Charging Wire CAUTION:
Cleaning Pad Slider Push the Charging Wire [3] against the 2 pads [2] of the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider [1] to install.
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131). [1]
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-189).
6) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad (Refer to page 4-192).
7) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder (Refer to page 4-194).

■■Procedure

CAUTION: [2] [3]

F-4-331
Do not damage the Primary Charging Wire when disassembling/assembling.

1) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1].

[1]

F-4-330

4-195
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Disassembling Procedure
4-196
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire 1) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring [1] to remove it from the hook [2].
2) Remove the Primary Charging Wire [3] from the groove [B] in the direction of the arrow.
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339). [A]
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131). [2]
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-189).
6) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad (Refer to page 4-192).
7) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder (Refer to page 4-194).
8) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-195). [1]

[B] [3]
■■Disassembling Procedure

CAUTION:

• When replacing this part, Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly and execute the
actions to be taken When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire.
• In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A].
• Do not use the spring [B] attached to the Charging Wire.

F-4-333

[A] [B]

F-4-332

4-196
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
4-197
3) Remove the Charging Wire [1] from the groove [A] in the direction of the arrow. ■■Assembling Procedure
4) Remove the block [2] with tweezers by pulling it upward, and then remove Primary
Charging Wire Unit [3].
CAUTION:

Do not touch the new Charging Wire with hand.

Otherwise functional failure may occur.

1) Untie approx. 5 cm of the new Charging Wire [2] from the 0.06 mm (wire-diameter)
[2] Charging Wire Reel [1] to make a 3-mm-diameter ring at the block [A].

NOTE:
When creating the ring, wrap the Charging Wire [2] around the block [A] to make a full
round, and then turn the block [3] for 6 times or more to twist the Charging Wire [2] for a
[A] length of 4 mm.
[3] [1]

2) Cut the Charging Wire [2] to leave an edge of 1.5 mm or less with nippers.

[A] [1]

[3] [2]
F-4-335
3) Insert the block [1] into the groove [A] of the Primary Charging Assembly.
F-4-334 4) Pass the Charging Wire [2] through the lower part [B] of the groove.
5) Cut off the old Charging Wire from the block with nippers.
[A]

[1]

[B]
[2]

F-4-336

4-197
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
4-198
5) After hooking the Charging Wire [1] to the charging wire positioning part [A] at the rear 8) Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
side of the Primary Charging Assembly, hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring [2] to the 9) Assemble the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider and the Primary Charging Wire
Charging Wire [1] at the position shown in the figure below and twist with it. Cleaning Pad Holder in reverse order.

[2] [A] [1]

(REAR) (FRONT)

F-4-337
6) Cut off extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers.
7) Pass the Charging Wire [1] through the lower part [A] of the groove, and then use tweezers
to hold the leading edge of the spring [2] and attach it to the hook [3].

CAUTION:

The groove used for hooking the Charging Wire must be at the position shown in the
figure (the side for installing the Grid).

[3]

[2]

[A] [1] [1]

F-4-338

CAUTION:

After hooking the Charging Wire, be sure that it is not broken or twisted.

4-198
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-199
Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly 2) Clean both sides of the Shield Plate (Right) [1] removed from the Primary Charging
Assembly with lint-free paper [2] moistened with alcohol.
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-189).
6) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad (Refer to page 4-192).
7) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder (Refer to page 4-194).
[2]
8) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-195).
9) Replace the Primary Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-196). [1]

■■Procedure
F-4-340
1) Clean the Inner Shield Plate [1] of the Primary Charging Assembly with lint-free paper [2]
moistened with alcohol.

[1]

[2]

F-4-339

4-199
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Disassembling Procedure
4-200
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Clean the Charging Wire. 1) Open the Front Cover.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX) 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
2) Execute the potential control. 3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC) 4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Grid Plate (Refer to page 4-189).
6) Remove the Grid Cleaning Pad (Refer to page 4-192).

■■Disassembling Procedure

CAUTION:

When replacing this part, Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly and execute the
actions to be taken When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire.

1) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring [1] to remove it from the hook [2].
2) Remove the Primary Charging Wire [3] from the groove [B] in the direction of the arrow.

4-200
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Disassembling Procedure
4-201
4) Remove the Charging Wire [1] from the groove [A] in the direction of the arrow.
5) Remove the block [2] with tweezers by pulling it upward, and then remove Primary
[A] Charging Wire Unit [3].
[2]

[2]

[1]

[B] [3]
[A]
[3] [1]

F-4-341
3) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad [2] from the Cleaning Pad Arm [1].
F-4-343

[2]

[1]

F-4-342

4-201
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Assembling Procedure
4-202
■■Assembling Procedure 3) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad [2] to the Cleaning Pad Arm [1].

CAUTION: [2]

When replacing, do not touch the new Primary Charging Wire [1] directly with hand.

[1]

F-4-346
4) Pass the Charging Wire [1] through the lower part [A] of the groove, and then use tweezers
to hold the leading edge of the spring [2] and attach it to the hook [3].
[1]
F-4-344 CAUTION:
1) Insert the block [1] into the groove [A] of the Primary Charging Assembly. The groove used for hooking the Charging Wire must be at the position shown in the
2) Pass the Charging Wire [2] through the lower part [B] of the groove. figure (the side for installing the Grid).

[A]

[1] [3]

[B] [2]
[2]

[A] [1] [1]

F-4-345 F-4-347

4-202
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-203
When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Clean the Charging Wire. 1) Open the Front Cover.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX) 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
2) Execute the potential control.Z 3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC)
■■Procedure

CAUTION:

When replacing this part, execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the Pre-
transfer Charging Assembly.

1) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

x2

[1]

F-4-348

4-203
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-204
2) While pressing down the claw [1], pull out the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly [2]
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
horizontally.
■■Procedure
1) Clean the Charging Wire.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX)
[2]

[1] [2]

F-4-349

CAUTION:

When installing, align the rail [1] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with the
protrusion [A] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, and then install it horizontally.

[A]

[1]

F-4-350

4-204
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Shutter Unit > Procedure
4-205
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly 1) Remove the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Slider [1].
Shutter Unit • 1 Hook [3]

■■Preparation CAUTION:
1) Open the Front Cover.
Because the Shutter Sheet is taken up when the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] is removed
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1], attach the hook [3] of the
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
removed Shutter Sheet Holder to the [A] part of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
4) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203). Shutter in advance.

■■Procedure
[2]

CAUTION:
[3]
Do not touch the Charging Wire with hand.
Otherwise functional failure may occur.

[2]
[1]

[3]

[A]

F-4-351

4-205
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Shutter Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Shutter Unit > Procedure
4-206
2) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit [1]. 4) Remove the Post Charging Wire HP Sensor [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
• 2 Connectors [2] Shutter Unit [1].
• 1 Guide [3] • 2 Claws [3]
• 3 Claws [4] • 2 Hooks [4]
• 2 Bosses [5]

[2]
x2
x2 x2 [4]

[4] [5]
[3] [3]

[1]
[1]
[2]
[4] [2]
[4] [5] F-4-354

F-4-352
3) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Shutter Unit [1].
• 2 Claws [3]

[1]

x2

[3]

[2]

[3]

F-4-353

4-206
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Shutter Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider > Pro
4-207
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1) Remove the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Slider [1].
Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning • 1 Hook [3]
Pad Slider
CAUTION:
■■Preparation
Because the Shutter Sheet is taken up when the Shutter Sheet Holder [2] is removed
1) Open the Front Cover. from the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1], attach the hook [3] of the
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339). removed Shutter Sheet Holder to the [A] part of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131). Shutter in advance.
4) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).

[2]
■■Procedure
[3]
CAUTION:

Do not touch the Charging Wire with hand.

Otherwise functional failure may occur.

[2]
[1]

[3]

[A]

F-4-355
2) Move the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1] to the cut-off [A] of the Shield
Plate at the front side.

4-207
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider > Pro
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider > Pro
4-208

NOTE:
When assembling the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cover, insert the protrusion [1]
of one side and bend the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cover, and then insert the
protrusion [2] of the opposite side to install.

[1]
[2]
[1]

[1]
[2]

[A]

F-4-356
3) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cover (Front) [1] and Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Cover (Rear) [2].

F-4-358

4) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring to remove it from the hook [1].

CAUTION:

When disassembling/assembling the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder

[1] [2] and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider, do not damage the Charging
Wire.

[1]

[A]

F-4-357 F-4-359

4-208
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider > Pro
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider > Pro
4-209
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer
CAUTION:
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [2] from the Cleaning Pad Arm [1].
• When assembling, push in the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder [1]
[1]
until it is secured to the 2 claws [2].

[1]

[2]

[2]
F-4-362
F-4-360
6) Use your fingers to pinch and then remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad • When assembling, push the Charging Wire [3] against the 2 pads [2] of the Pre-
Holder [1] and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [2]. transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1] to install.

[2] [1]

[1]
[2] [3]
F-4-363
F-4-361

4-209
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider > Pro
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
4-210
Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire ■■Assembling Procedure
■■Preparation CAUTION:
1) Open the Front Cover.
• In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A].
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
• Do not use the spring [B] attached to the Charging Wire.
4) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-207).

■■Disassembling Procedure

CAUTION:

When replacing this part, Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly and execute the
actions to be taken When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.

[A] [B]
1) Cut off the old Charging Wire [1] from the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with nippers.
F-4-365

1) Untie approx. 5 cm of the Charging Wire [2] from the 0.06 mm (wire-diameter) Charging
[1] Wire Reel [1] to make a 2-mm-diameter ring [3] at the edge.

NOTE:
The ring [3] can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire
[2] around the Hex Key [4] to make a full round, and then turn the Hex Key [4] for 3 to 4
times to twist the Charging Wire [2].
[4]
[3]

F-4-364

[2]
[1]

F-4-366

4-210
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
4-211
2) Cut off the edge (extra wire) [A] of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers. 4) On the front side of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, hook the Charging Wire Tension
Spring [1] to the Charging Wire [2] at the position [A] shown in the figure below to twist with
[3] 2.
0 it.
m
m 5) Cut off extra length of the Charging Wire [B] with nippers.

[2] [B]
[2] [A]

[A]

[1]
F-4-367
3) Attach the ring [1] of the Charging Wire to the hook [2], and then pass it through the groove [1]
[A] of the rear side and the groove [B] of the sponge.

F-4-369
[1] 6) Clean the Charging Wire [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.

[B]

[A]

[2] [2]

[1]
F-4-368

F-4-370

4-211
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
4-212
7) Use tweezers to hold the leading edge [A] of the spring to attach it to the hook [1].
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder and the Pre-transfer
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Refer to page 4-207).
[1]
6) Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire (Refer to page 4-210).

[A] ■■Procedure
1) Clean the Upper Duct [1] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with lint-free paper [2]
F-4-371
moistened with alcohol.
8) Assemble the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider and the Pre-transfer
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder in reverse order.

[1]

F-4-372

4-212
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Procedure
4-213
2) Clean the Inner Shield Plate [1] of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with lint-free paper [2]
When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
moistened with alcohol.
■■Procedure
1) Clean the Charging Wire.
[1] (COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX)

[2]

F-4-373

4-213
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
4-214
Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) 1) Raise the Lock Release Lever [1] to release the lock of the Black Developing Assembly
Pressure Lever [2].
■■Preparation: Removing the Toner Container Manually [2] [2]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).

■■Procedure [1]

CAUTION:

When handling the Drum Unit (Bk), be sure to follow the points to note below.
• When handling the Drum Unit (Bk) [1], place it on a sheet of paper [2], etc. F-4-375

• After removing the Drum Unit (Bk), be sure to block light to the drum. 2) Pull out the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] until it stops to release the
Cover with the Drum Protection Sheet [3] or wrap 5 or more papers [3] around the pressure applied on the Developing Assembly (Bk).
drum to block light.

[3] [2]

[1]

[1]
F-4-376

F-4-374

• Do not place the Drum (Bk) in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun
(e.g. near the window).
• Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
• Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.

4-214
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
4-215
4) Remove the Drum Shaft Cap [1].
CAUTION:
• 1 Screw [2]
When installing, push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] until it stops.

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-4-379

F-4-377

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

[1]

x2

F-4-378

4-215
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
4-216

CAUTION: CAUTION:

• When installing the Drum Shaft Cap [1], be sure to install it in the phase where the • When tightening the screw of the Drum Shaft Cap, tighten the screw while pushing
hole [A] of the Drum Shaft Cap is aligned with the leading edge [B] of the Drum Drive the Drum Shaft Cap against the rear side, until it is no longer easy to turn the
Shaft [2], and at the same time the protrusion [C] of the Drum Shaft Cap is aligned screwdriver so that it does not cause the drum to rotate clockwise together.
with the groove [D] of the Drum Flange. • After tightening the screw, check that the end face [A] of the Drum Shaft Cap touches
• If the phase is mismatched, hook the protrusion of the Drum Shaft Cap to the groove the drum.
of the Drum Flange, and then rotate the Drum Flange [3] counterclockwise so that
the phase is matched.

[A]

[A] [B]

[A] [1] [B] [3]

[D]

[2] [C]

F-4-380
F-4-381

4-216
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
4-217
5) Hold the handle [A] to pull out the Drum Unit (Bk) [1] for about 30 cm.
CAUTION:

When installing/removing, do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.

cm
30

[A]
[1]

F-4-382
6) Hold the front upper part [A] and the left side [B] of the Drum Unit (Bk) and remove it.
F-4-384

[A]

[B]

F-4-383

4-217
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit > Procedure
4-218

CAUTION: Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit

When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) [1], place the lower right side of the Drum Unit (Bk) ■■Preparation
on the guide [A] of the Process Unit Inner Cover, then check that the Drum Unit (Bk) [1]
1) Open the Front Cover.
is placed on the guide [B], and then push it in slowly and horizontally.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
[B] 4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
6) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Because there is toner on the Drum Cleaning Unit [1], be sure to turn it over and then
place it on a sheet of paper [2], etc.

[2]

[A] [1]

[1]

F-4-385 F-4-386

4-218
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and
the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) > Procedure
4-219
1) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit [1].
Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and
• 6 Screws [2]
• 2 Bosses [3] the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear)
[2] ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
x6 [1] 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
[3]
[2] 5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
6) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
7) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-218).

[3]
■■Procedure

CAUTION:
F-4-387

Because there is toner on the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) [1], Blade Spacer [2], and the
Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) [3], be sure to place them on a sheet of paper [4], etc.

[4]

[3]

[1] [2]

F-4-388

4-219
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and
the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and
the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) > Procedure
4-220
1) Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Cover [1]. 2) Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) [1], Blade Spacer [2], and Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) [3]
• 2 Screws [2] from the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit.
• 3 Screws [4]
CAUTION:

When disassembling/assembling the Drum Cleaning Blade Cover [1], do not bend the
sheet [2].
x3

[3]

[2]
[1] [4]
[1]
[2]
F-4-391

CAUTION:
F-4-389 When assembling the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit, be sure to pay attention to the
direction of installing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) [1], Blade Spacer [2], and Side Seal
(Front)/(Rear) [3].

x2

[1]

[2] [3]

[2]
F-4-390

[1]
F-4-392

4-220
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade (Bk) and
the Side Seal (Front)/(Rear) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum (Bk) > Procedure
4-221
Removing the Drum (Bk) CAUTION:

■■Preparation • Cover the drum [1] with 5 or more papers or the Lightproof Sheet [2].

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
6) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
7) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-218).

■■Procedure
[2]
CAUTION: [1]

• When replacing this part, Cleaning the Patch Sensor Unit and execute the actions to F-4-394
be taken When Replacing the Drum (Bk).
• When installing/removing, do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
NOTE:
An illustration from a new photo.
If there is abnormal noise from the drum (Bk), apply Barrierta to the circumference of the
3 Slip Rings [1] of the Sliding Assembly of the drum.
(Apply 1 rice-grain sized, 2 rice-grain sized, and 3 rice-grain sized Barrierta from the
[A]
innermost side (in order of increasing diameter).)

[1]

F-4-393

F-4-395

4-221
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum (Bk) > Procedure
4-222
1) Remove the Drum Shaft Bearing (Front) [1] and Drum Shaft Bearing (Rear) [2]. 2) Remove the SD Spacer (Front) [1] and SD Spacer (Rear) [2].
• 2 Screws [3] for each

x2

[2]

[3] [2]

x2

[3]

[1]

[1]
F-4-397

F-4-396

4-222
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum (Bk) > Procedure
4-223
3) Move the Drum (Bk) [1] in the direction of the arrow by about 5.0 mm, and then remove the
CAUTION:
Drum Sliding Assembly [2].
• When installing a new drum (Bk), be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet [3] after
ap
pr installing the drum [1] to the Drum Unit Frame [2].
ox
5.
0m
m
[2]

[1]

[2]

[1] [3]

F-4-398
4) Pull out horizontally the Drum Shaft [1] on the front side from the groove [A] of the Drum F-4-400

Unit Frame, and then remove the Drum (Bk) [2] in the direction of the arrow. • In addition, be sure to rotate the drum [2] counterclockwise when removing the
Lightproof Sheet [1].
(If the drum is rotated clockwise, the Scoop-up Sheet [3] may be everted.)
[2]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] [A]
F-4-399

F-4-401

4-223
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) > Procedure
4-224
Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk)
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184). [4]
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
6) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Because there is toner on the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) [1], be sure to place it on a sheet of
paper [2], etc.

[2]

[1]
[1] [3]
[2]

F-4-403
2) Remove soiling accumulated at the [A] part of the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.

[A] [1]

F-4-402

1) Remove the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
• 1 Claw [4]

F-4-404

4-224
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Tray (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
4-225
When Replacing the Drum (Bk) Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk)
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Disable the warm-up rotation control. 1) Open the Front Cover.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF) 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
2) Turn OFF the main power, and replace the Drum (Bk). 3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
3) Turn ON the main power. 4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
4) Execute the drum replacement mode forcibly. 5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETK) 6) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
5) Enable the warm-up rotation control. 7) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-218).
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF) 8) Remove the Drum (Bk) (Refer to page 4-221).
6) Execute Settings/Registration > Adjustment /Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation > Full Adjustment. ■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Because there is toner on the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Plate [1] and the Drum Cleaning
Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [2], be sure to place them on a sheet of paper [3], etc.

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-4-405

4-225
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
4-226
1) Move the Drum Unit (Bk) [1] in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:

When disassembling/assembling the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk), perform

[1] the operation in the order below, because the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1]
needs to overlap the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3] in the
correct order.
• When disassembling:
Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] first, before the Edge Scraper 1
(Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].
• When assembling:
Install the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] last, after the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk)
[2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].

F-4-406
2) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Plate [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Protrusion [3]

[3] [3]
[3] [1] [1]

[1]

[2]

F-4-407
[2] [2]
[1] [1]

F-4-408

4-226
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and
the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) > Procedure
4-227
3) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1].
Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and
• 2 Screws [2]
the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk)
■■Preparation
x2 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
[1] 5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
6) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
7) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-218).
8) Remove the Drum (Bk) (Refer to page 4-221).
[2]
9) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) (Refer to page 4-225).

F-4-409
■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Because there is toner on the Drum Sliding Shaft Support [1], the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [2]
and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3], place them on a sheet of paper [4], etc.

[3] [2]

[1] [4]

F-4-410

4-227
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and
the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and
the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) > Procedure
4-228
1) Move the Drum Unit (Bk) [1] in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:

When disassembling/assembling the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk), perform

the operation in the order below, because the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] [1]
needs to overlap the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3] in the
correct order.
• When disassembling:
Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] first, before the Edge Scraper 1
(Bk) [2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].
• When assembling:
Install the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) [1] last, after the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk)
[2] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [3].

F-4-412
2) Remove the Drum Sliding Shaft Support [1] at the rear side.
• 2 Screws [2]

x2
[3] [3]
[1] [1]
.

[1]

[2]

F-4-413

[2] [2]
[1] [1]

F-4-411

4-228
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and
the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Fur Brush > Procedure
4-229
3) Remove the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) [1] and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) [2].
Removing the Drum Fur Brush
• 2 Screws [3]

[3]
■■Preparation
[3]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
[1] 4) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
5) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
6) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
7) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit (Refer to page 4-218).
[2] 8) Remove the Drum (Bk) (Refer to page 4-221).
9) Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet (Bk) (Refer to page 4-225).
10) Remove the Edge Scraper 1 (Bk) and the Edge Scraper 2 (Bk) (Refer to page 4-227).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Because there is toner on the Drum Fur Brush [1] and the Felt Seal [2], place them on a
sheet of paper [3], etc.

[3]

F-4-414

[2] [1]

F-4-415

4-229
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Fur Brush > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Fur Brush > Procedure
4-230
1) Remove the E-ring [1] and the 2 gears [2]. 3) Remove the E-ring [1], washer [2], and Ball Bearing [3].

[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]

[2]

[1]

F-4-416 F-4-418

2) Remove the Brush Plate [1]. 4) Remove the E-ring [1] to move the Drum Fur Brush [2].
• 1 Screw [2] 5) Remove the gear [3] and the Ball Bearing [4].

[1]

[2]

[2]

[4]
[3]
[1]

F-4-417 F-4-419

4-230
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Fur Brush > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Fur Brush > Procedure
4-231
6) Remove the Drum Fur Brush [1] and the 2 Felt Seals [2] in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
[2]
[2]
• When installing the Drum Fur Brush [1], install it with the shaft [A] on the rear side.
[1] [1]
• When installing the 2 Felt Seals [2], install it with the long side [B] up.
[2]
[2]
[B]
[2] [2]

F-4-420
7) Remove the 2 Felt Seals [2] from the Drum Fur Brush [1]. [B]

[2] [A]

[2]

[1]

F-4-421
[1]

F-4-422

4-231
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Fur Brush > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
4-232
Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk) CAUTION:

■■Preparation Do not touch the surface [A] of the Developing Cylinder.

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Be sure to place the Developing Assembly (Bk) [1] on a sheet of paper [2], etc.
[A]
[2]

F-4-424

[1]

F-4-423

4-232
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
4-233
1) Raise the Lock Release Lever [1] to release the Black Developing Assembly Pressure
Lever [2].

[2] [2]

[1]

[1]
F-4-426
4) Free the harness from the guide [A], and hold the handle [B] to pull out the Developing
Assembly (Bk) [1] for approx. 100 mm.
• 1 Connector [2]

[A]
[2]

F-4-425
2) Pull out the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] until it stops to release the
pressure applied on the Developing Assembly (Bk).
3) Turn the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] in the direction of the arrow.

10 cm
[1] [B]

F-4-427

4-233
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)
4-234
5) Hold the front upper part and the left side of the Developing Assembly (Bk) and remove it
Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk)
horizontally.
■■Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)
CAUTION:

If the Developing Assembly is tilted inside the host machine, the Developing Assembly CAUTION:
and the drum may come into contact causing damage to the drum. Therefore, be sure to
When taking out a Developing Assembly, do not tilt it or shake it strongly.
install or remove it horizontally.
Otherwise, toner may scatter.

1) Unpack the Developing Assembly, and remove the packaging material.

CAUTION:

• Do not remove the tape [A] of the Supply Mouth until just before installing it in the
host machine.
• Do not remove tapes [B] and [C].
• Be sure to remove tapes [B] and [C] after the Sleeve Seal because the roller is fixed
so that it cannot move when removing the Sleeve Seal.
• Be sure that there is no foreign matter (metal pieces in particular) on your hand when
touching the Developing Assembly. (If any foreign matters get onto the cylinder of the
Developing Assembly, it may cause image failure.)
F-4-428 • After unpacking, do not work with the Supply Mouth facing down to avoid any risk of
toner spilling out.

Packing [B]
Material
[C]

[A]

F-4-429

Supply Mouth
F-4-430

4-234
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)
4-235
2) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly (Bk). 4) Make the gear of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow
(clockwise).
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When removing the Sleeve Seal, be careful not to make any crease in the seal.
Otherwise, the Toner Blocking Sheet may be caught and damaged by the crease. Do not turn the Developing Sleeve in the reverse direction.
If you rotate it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner
Blocking Sheet on the cylinder.

Black Developing Assembly

NOTE:
Toner clots are removed by rotating the cylinder in the direction of the arrow (clockwise).

Sleeve Seal

F-4-431
3) Remove tape [B] and tape [C] securing the roller.
Gear

F-4-433

[B]

[C]

F-4-432

4-235
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Bk)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
4-236
5) Remove the tape [A] and the packaging material of the Supply Mouth. ■■Procedure
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove the packaging material of the Supply Mouth.
When replacing this part, execute the When Replacement the Developing Assembly
and Cleaning the Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk).

1) Align the rail [A] of the Developing Assembly (Bk) with the rail receptacle [B] of the host
machine, and then insert the Developing Assembly (Bk) horizontally about 2/3 of its length.

[B]

[A]

[A]

Toner Mouth Packing

F-4-434

F-4-435
2) Press the handle [A] of the Developing Assembly (Bk) with your finger to align the 2
Positioning Pins [1] with the 2 boss holes [2], and push the assembly until it stops.

[1] [2]

[2]

[A]

F-4-436

4-236
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Installing the Developing Assembly (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacement the Developing Assembly > Procedure
4-237
3) Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the
When Replacement the Developing Assembly
connector.
■■Procedure
1) Turn OFF the warm-up rotation control
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF)
2) Turn OFF the main unit.
3) Install the Developing Assembly with Drum Unit.
x3 4) Turn ON the main unit.
Connector 5) When machine comes to ready status, execute the initial settings mode of the Developing
Assembly.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y/M/C/K/4)
Harness
Guide 6) Execution of setting of toner density
Harness Guide Reuse Band (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TD-AD-Y/M/C/K/4C)
7) Refresh the screen and ensure that the warm-up rotation control is set back to 0.
F-4-437 (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF)
4) Turn the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] counterclockwise, and push in the 8) Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust
Developing Assembly (Bk) to apply pressure. Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation

[1] NOTE:
If installing multiple Developing Assemblies, execute this procedure for each Developing
Assembly installed. If installing all four (4) Developing Assemblies, use INISET-4 and
TD-AD-4C.

F-4-438

4-237
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacement the Developing Assembly > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/
Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
4-238
Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/ 2) Clean the inner surface [A] of the Toner Blocking Sheet [1] of the Developing Assembly with
lint-free paper.
Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk)
CAUTION:
■■Preparation
• When cleaning, do not touch the surface [2] of the Developing Cylinder.
1) Open the Front Cover.
• Check that the developer is not placed on the Toner Blocking Sheet before returning
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
it to the host machine.
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).

[A]
■■Procedure [1]
[1]

CAUTION:

Clean the following parts at work intervals of 150,000 sheets, or as needed basis when
[2]
soiling is remarkable.

1) Clean the Sleeve Cover (Bk) [1] of the Developing Assembly with lint-free paper.

F-4-440
[1]

F-4-439

4-238
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly Sleeve Cover (Bk)/
Developing Assembly Toner Blocking Sheet (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-239
Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) CAUTION:

■■Preparation • When handling the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1], place it on a sheet of paper [2] and
cover it with the Drum Protection Sheet, or wrap 5 or more papers [3] around it to
1) Open the Front Cover.
block light.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).

[2]
■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• When replacing this part, Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) and execute
the actions to be taken When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) and the When
Replacement the Developing Assembly.
• When releasing pressure of the ITB Unit, execute the Adjustment when Installing/
[3]
Removing the ITB Unit. [1]

CAUTION: F-4-442

• Do not place the Drum in a location where is exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g.
When handling the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), be sure to follow the points to note below. near the window).
• Do not touch the surface [A] of the Photosensitive Drum. • Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
• Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.

[A]

F-4-441

4-239
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-240
1) Disconnect the connector [1], and hook the handle [2] of the Drum Cartridge with your
NOTE:
index finger to pull out the Process Unit [3] for about 200 mm.
This procedure explains the case for the Process Unit (Y) [1].
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Process Unit (M) [2]/(C) [3].
[1]

[2]

[2]

[3]
[2]
[1]

F-4-443

20 c
m

[3]

F-4-444

4-240
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-241
2) Hold the front upper part and the left side of the Process Unit [1] and pull it out horizontally.
CAUTION:
CAUTION: When installing, place the left side [A] of the Process Unit on the guide [1] of the
If the Process Unit [1] is tilted inside the host machine, it may damage the ITB. Process Unit Inner Cover, and align the lower right side [B] of the Process Unit with the
Therefore, hold it horizontally when pulling out/pushing in. guide [2] of the Process Unit Inner Cover. Then push it in horizontally.

[1]

F-4-445

[A] [B] [2]

[1]

[1] F-4-447

F-4-446

4-241
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-242

NOTE: Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)

The following shows the guides [1] and [2] on the Process Unit Inner Cover for (Y), (M),
and (C).
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
■■Preparation
[1] [2] 1) Open the Front Cover.
[2]
[2] [1] 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
[1] 3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Because there is toner on the Developing Assembly [1] and the Drum Unit [2], be sure
to place them on a sheet of paper [3], etc.
F-4-448
To prevent the sensitivity of the Photosensitive Drum from deteriorating, note the
following points.
• Do not touch the surface [A] of the Photosensitive Drum.
• To prevent the Photosensitive Drum from exposure to light for a long time, cover it
with 5 or more papers [4] or the Lightproof Sheet [4].

[A] [4]

[1]
[2]

[3]
F-4-449

4-242
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-243

CAUTION: CAUTION:

• Do not place the Process Unit and the Drum in a location where is exposed to direct When connecting the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit, move the lock [B] of the
rays of the sun (e.g. near the window). Connecting Arm to the position where the lines [A] of the Connecting Arm can be seen,
• Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where and then lock it.
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
• Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.

[B] [B]
1) While pressing the locks [1] of the Connecting Arms, release the 2 Connecting Arms [2] to
open them, and separate the Developing Assembly [3] and the Drum Unit [4].
• 2 Harness Guides [5]
• 1 Connector [6]

[1]

[A] [A]

F-4-451

[2]
x2
[1] [6]
[4]
[2]

[5]
[3]

F-4-450

4-243
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)
4-244
■■Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
and Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)

CAUTION:

• A Developing Assembly (for color use) is specified with color.

Supply Mouth
• When taking out a Developing Assembly (for color use), do not tilt it or shake it Packing
Material
strongly.
Otherwise, toner may scatter.
When replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), Cleaning the Developing Assembly Toner
[B]
Blocking Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) and execute the actions to be taken When Replacing the [C]
Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C). [A]
F-4-452
1) Unpack the Developing Assembly, and remove the packaging material. 2) Remove the Sleeve Seal from the Developing Assembly.

CAUTION: CAUTION:

• Do not remove the tape [A] of the Supply Mouth until just before installing it in the When removing the Sleeve Seal, be careful not to make any crease in the seal.
host machine. Otherwise, the Toner Blocking Sheet may be caught and damaged by the crease.
• Do not remove tapes [B] and [C].
• Be sure to remove tapes [B] and [C] after the Sleeve Seal because the roller is fixed
so that it cannot move when removing the Sleeve Seal.
Color Developing Assembly
• Be sure that there is no foreign matter (metal pieces in particular) on your hand when
touching the Developing Assembly. (If any foreign matters get onto the cylinder of the
Developing Assembly, it may cause image failure.)
• After unpacking, do not work with the Supply Mouth facing down to avoid any risk of
toner spilling out.

Sleeve Seal

F-4-453

4-244
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)
4-245
3) Remove tape [B] and tape [C] securing the roller. 5) Take out the Drum Unit from the packaging box.
6) Unpack the Drum Unit, and remove the packaging material.

CAUTION:

• Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum.

• During work, cover it with the Protection Sheet.

[B] Protection Sheet

[C]

F-4-454
4) Make the coupling of the Sleeve rotate a full turn or 1.5 turns in the direction of the arrow Packing
Material
(clockwise).

CAUTION:

Do not turn the Developing Sleeve in the reverse direction.

If you rotate it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner F-4-456
Blocking Sheet on the cylinder. 7) Pull the 2 spacers in the direction of the arrow to remove them from the Drum Unit.

NOTE: Spacer
Toner clots are removed by rotating the cylinder in the direction of the arrow (clockwise).

Packing
Material

F-4-457

Coupling

F-4-455

4-245
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)
4-246
8) Release the lock of the Fixation Lever of the Drum Unit to lift up the Fixation Lever.
CAUTION:

Check to see whether the lock is securely in place or the grooves as shown in the figure
Lock
are visible. (If the lock is not completely secure when the Process Unit is introduced into
the host machine, it may not be possible to remove it from the host machine.)

Lock

Fixing Lever

F-4-458
9) Insert the 2 protrusions of the Developing Assembly into the Drum Unit (yellow) to join
the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit, and then turn over the Fixation Lever in the Groove
direction of the arrow to assemble the Process Unit.

F-4-460
Fixation Lever Fixation Lever

10) Secure the harness using the Harness Guide and the Reuse Band, and connect the
Slot
connector.
Protrusion

Slot

Protrusion x4
Connector

Harness Guide
Reuse Band Harness Guide

F-4-461
Color Developing
Assembly Color Drum Unit

F-4-459

4-246
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C)
from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Unpacking a new Developing Assembly (Y)
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-247
11) Remove the tape [A] and the packaging material of the Supply Mouth.
Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C)
CAUTION: ■■Preparation
Be sure to remove the packaging material of the Supply Mouth. 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).
5) Separate the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to
page 4-242).

[A]
■■Procedure
Toner Mouth Packing 1) Remove soiling at the surface [A] of the Sleeve Cover, as well as the front side [B] and the
back side [C] of the Toner Catch Sheet of the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) with dry lint-
free paper.

[1] [A]
F-4-462

[B]

[1]
[1] [C]

F-4-463

4-247
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Toner Catch Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-248

CAUTION: When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)

Do not touch the surface of the sleeve [A] with the lint-free paper or finger. ■■Procedure
1) Disable the warm-up rotation control.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF)
2) Turn OFF the main power, and replace the Drum Unit.
3) Turn ON the main power.
4) Execute the drum replacement mode forcibly.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DRMRSETY/M/C)
[A] 5) Enable the warm-up rotation control.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF)
6) Execute Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust.

F-4-464

4-248
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > When Replacing the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Manually > Procedure
4-249
Cleaning the Developing Assembly Removing the Toner Container Manually
Toner Blocking Sheet (Y)/(M)/(C) ■■Preparation
■■Preparation 1) Open the Upper Front Cover.
2) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
1) Open the Front Cover.
3) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
4) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).
5) Separate the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to ■■Procedure
page 4-242).
NOTE:
This procedure explains how to remove the Toner Container (Bk).
■■Procedure Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).
1) Clean the inner surface [A] of the Toner Blocking Sheet [1] of the Developing Assembly with [Bk] [C] [M] [Y]
lint-free paper.

CAUTION:

• When cleaning, do not touch the surface [2] of the Developing Cylinder.
• Check that the developer is not placed on the Toner Blocking Sheet before returning
it to the host machine.

[1] [1]
[A]

F-4-466
[2]

F-4-465

4-249
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Manually > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Manually > Procedure
4-250
1) Remove the Toner Container Removing Tool [1]. 3) Rotate the Toner Container Removing Tool [1] counterclockwise to set the Toner Container
• 1 Screw [2] to "unlocked state".
Unlocked state refers to the following condition:
(1) The Toner Replacement Small Door [2] at the front side opens.
[1] (2) A click sound is heard.
[2] (3) After that, the pin pops out to its maximum (approx. 1 cm).

1 cm

Toner Replacement Small Door opens Unlocked

F-4-467
2) nsert the Toner Container Removing Tool [2] into the Toner Container Lock Shaft [1]. Locked

[2] [1]

F-4-469

[1]

F-4-468

[2]
F-4-470

4-250
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Manually > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Manually > Procedure
4-251

NOTE: Unlocked state of the Toner Container

Normally, the Toner Container is "locked" so that it cannot be taken out.
To manually take out the Toner Container, you need to rotate the Lock Shaft
counterclockwise to set it to the "unlocked state".
The Toner Container is in the "unlocked state" when the pin pops out to its maximum at
this moment.
Because the Lock Shaft cannot be rotated reversely, if you miss the "unlocked state" 1 cm
once, wait for the next turn when the pin pops out to its maximum, which indicates the
next "unlocked state".
1-roundtrip
Toner Replacement Small Door opens Unlocked
Locked Locked

1 cm 1 cm

1-roundtrip 2-roundtrip
Unlocked

Locked

F-4-471

4-251
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Container Manually > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk) > Procedure
4-252
4) Take out the Toner Container [1].
Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk)
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Toner Container (Bk).

NOTE:
Before turning OFF the power of the host machine, use the Control Panel to remove the
Toner Container of the corresponding color.
If the power of the host machine is already turned OFF, see the procedure on manually
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding color.

2) Open the Front Cover.

3) Remove the Front Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
[1]
4) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
F-4-472
5) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
6) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
CAUTION:

Even when the Toner Container is "locked", you can install it and close the Toner ■■Procedure
Replacement Small Door. 1) Free the harness [1].
In this case, toner is not supplied from the Toner Container and "Remaining Toner Error • 1 Connector [2]
Message" appears. • 1 Harness Guide [3]
When this happens, remove and then install the Toner Container again. • 1 Reuse Band [4]

[4]
[1]

x2

[3]
[2]

F-4-473

4-252
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-253
2) Free the 2 harnesses [1] from the 2 guides [2], and disconnect the 2 connectors [3] and the
Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C)
2 Relay Connectors [4].
■■Preparation
1) Remove the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).
[2]
x2 [1] NOTE:
Before turning OFF the power of the host machine, use the Control Panel to remove the
[3] Toner Container of the corresponding color.
If the power of the host machine is already turned OFF, see the procedure on manually
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding color.

x2 2) Open the Front Cover.

3) Remove the Front Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
4) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
[4] 5) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).

F-4-474 ■■Procedure
3) Remove the Hopper Tray (Bk) [1] while bending it.
• 2 Screws [2]
NOTE:
This procedure explains how to remove the Hopper Tray (Y).
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Hopper Tray (M)/(C).

x2
[1]

[C]
[2]
[M]
F-4-475
[Y]
F-4-476

4-253
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Tray (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Preparation
4-254
1) Free the harness [1].
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk)
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
2) Free the harness [3]. ■■Preparation
• 1 Connector [4] 1) Open the Front Cover.
• 1 Harness Guide [5] 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
[1] 4) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
[2] 5) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
6) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
7) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
8) Push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] to apply pressure.
[3] [5]
x2
[4]

F-4-477
3) Remove the Hopper Tray (Y) [1] while bending it.
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
[1]

F-4-479
9) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].
[1]

[1]

[3]

[3] [2]

F-4-478

F-4-480
10) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).

4-254
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Preparation
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
4-255
11) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343). ■■Assembling Procedure
12) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
13) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
NOTE:
Because the positioning of the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) is necessary for installation, tighten
■■Disassembling Procedure the screws according to the following order.

1) Remove the Flywheel [1].

1) Install the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) [1], and tighten the 3 screws [3] temporarily.
• 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Connectors [2]

x3
x2 [1]

[2] x3 [3]

[1] [2]
[3] [2]
F-4-481
2) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) [1]. F-4-483

• 2 Connectors [2] 2) Install the Drum Cap [1].

• 3 Screws [3] • 1 Screw [2]

x2 [1]

x3 [3]

[1]

[3] [2]
[2]
F-4-484
F-4-482

4-255
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
4-256
3) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1]. 5) Install the Flywheel [1].
• 3 Screws [2]

[1]

x3

[2]

F-4-485
4) Install the Front Inner Handle Left Cover [1] and the Front Inner Handle Right Cover [2] in [1] [2]
the direction of the arrows, and tighten a screw [3] for each of them.
F-4-487
6) Finally, push the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) [1] against the Rear Plate, and fully tighten the 3
[3] [1] [2] [3] screws [2].

[1]

F-4-486

[2] [2]
F-4-488
7) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover, and remove the Drum Cap installed in step 2.]

4-256
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Disassembling Procedure
4-257
Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) ■■Disassembling Procedure
■■Preparation NOTE:
1) Open the Front Cover. This procedure explains how to remove the Drum Drive Unit (C).
Be sure to perform the same procedure for the Drum Drive Unit (M)/(Y).
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
4) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).
5) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].

[1]

[C] [M] [Y]

F-4-490

1) Remove the Waste Toner Container Cover [1].

F-4-489 • 1 Finger Screw [2] (to loosen)
6) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134). • 2 Hooks [3]
7) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
8) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
9) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
[2]

[3] [1]
F-4-491

4-257
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Disassembling Procedure
4-258
2) Remove the Handle Cover [1]. 4) Remove the Right Middle Cover [1].
• 1 Claw [2] • 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Hook [3]

[2]
x2 [1]
[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-4-494

F-4-492 5) Remove the Flywheel [1].

3) Remove the Lower Right Cover 3 [1]. • 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
NOTE:
[2] When removing the Drum Drive Unit (M)/(Y), there is no need to remove the Flywheel.
[1]
x2
[1]

x3
[2]

[2]

F-4-493

[2]
F-4-495

4-258
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Disassembling Procedure
4-259
6) Remove the Duct [1]. 8) Disconnect the connector [1].
• 3 Screws (RS) [2]
• 1 Screw (Tapping) [3] NOTE:
When removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y) [1], remove the Wire Saddle [2] and the Relay
Connector [3].
NOTE:
When removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y), there is no need to remove the Duct.
[1]

[2]

x4 [2]

[1]

[3] [2]
[3]
F-4-498
[2]

F-4-496
7) Tilt the PCB Mounting Base [1] forward.
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Connectors [3]

NOTE:
When removing the Drum Drive Unit (M)/(Y), there is no need to tilt the PCB Mounting
Base forward.

[3] [3]
x2

[1]
x2 F-4-499

[2] [1] [2]

F-4-497

4-259
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
4-260
9) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (C) [1]. ■■Assembling Procedure
• 3 Screws [2]

[1] NOTE:
Because the positioning of the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) is necessary for installation,
tighten the screws according to the following order.
x3 [2]
1) Install the Drum Drive Unit (C) [1], and tighten the 3 screws [2] temporarily.

[1]

x3 [2]

[2]

F-4-500

[2]
F-4-501
2) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].

[1]

F-4-502

4-260
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Preparation
4-261
3) Install the Front Inner Handle Left Cover [1] and the Front Inner Handle Right Cover [2] in
Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk)
the direction of the arrows, and tighten a screw [3] for each of them.
■■Preparation
[3] [1] [2] [3] 1) Remove the Toner Container (Bk).

NOTE:
Before turning OFF the power of the host machine, use the Control Panel to remove the
Toner Container of the corresponding color.
If the power of the host machine is already turned OFF, see the procedure on manually
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding
color.

2) Open the Front Cover.

3) Remove the Front Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
4) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
5) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
F-4-503
6) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
4) Finally, push the Drum Drive Unit (C) [1] against the Rear Plate, and fully tighten the 3
7) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
screws [2].
8) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
[1] 9) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
10) Push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] to apply pressure.

[2]

[2]

F-4-504 [1]

F-4-505

4-261
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Preparation
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Disassembling Procedure
4-262
11) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1]. ■■Disassembling Procedure

[1] CAUTION:

Place the Hopper Unit (Bk) [1] on a sheet of paper [2], etc. when disassembling/
assembling.

[1]

F-4-506
12) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
13) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
14) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
15) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
16) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254).
[2]
F-4-507

1) Pull the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] toward the front to release the
pressure.

[1]

F-4-508

4-262
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Disassembling Procedure
4-263
2) Remove the Duct [1]. 4) Remove the Fan Unit [1].
• 3 Screws (RS) [2] • 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Screw (Tapping) [3]
[1]
[2]

x2
[2]
x4

[1]

[2]
[3]
[2] F-4-511
5) While opening the upper part of the Hopper Shield [1], pull it forward to remove it.
F-4-509
3) Free the harness [1]. • 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Connectors [2] • 1 Hook [3]
• 3 Wire Saddles [3] [2]
• 1 Reuse Band [4]
• 1 Edge Saddle [5]

[2]

x2 [5]

x5

[3] [1]
F-4-512
[1]
[4]
[3]
F-4-510

4-263
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Disassembling Procedure
4-264
6) Remove the Rail Cover (Front) [1] and the spring [2]. 8) Remove the Hopper Unit (Bk) [1].
• 1 Screw [3] • 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Stepped Screw [3]
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to hold the Rail Cover (Front) [1] not to drop the spring [2] when removing it.
When removing the Hopper Unit (Bk), be sure not to spill toner [2] from the Toner
Supply Mouth [1].

[2]
[1]

[3]

[2]

F-4-513
[1]
7) Remove the screw [1] of the pipe and the Rail Cover (Rear) [2].
F-4-515

[1] [2] [2]

[2]
x2

[3] [1]
F-4-514
F-4-516

4-264
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
4-265
■■Assembling Procedure 2) Install the Hopper Unit (Bk) [1].
• 3 Bosses [2]
• 1 Stepped Screw [3]
CAUTION:
• 1 Screw [4]
When assembling the Hopper Unit (Bk), pull out the Small Door Open/Close Shaft [1] at
the front side of the host machine by approx. 50 mm, and then install the Hopper Unit [2] [4]
(Bk).
x2

5
cm
[1] [3] [1] [2]

F-4-519
3) Match the phase of the tooth [A] of the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] with the tooth [B] of the gear [2],
and then push in the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] until it stops.
F-4-517

[1]
NOTE: [1]
When assembling the Hopper Unit (Bk), use the following procedure to match the
phase of the gear.
[A]
1) Be sure that the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] is pulled to the front.

[B]

[2]
[2]
F-4-520

[1]

F-4-518

4-265
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
4-266
4) Align the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) with the line [B] on the Toner Supply 5) Install the Rail Cover (Front) [1].
Mouth, and then use the screw [1] to secure it. • 1 Spring [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
[1]

[2]
[1]

[3]

[A] [B]

F-4-521

F-4-523
CAUTION: 6) Install the Hopper Shield, Fan Unit, harness, and duct.

• Be sure that the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] touches the plate [2] on the rear side.
• Be sure to rotate the Toner Supply Mouth in the direction of the arrow until it stops so
that the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) is aligned with the line [B] on the
Toner Supply Mouth.

[2] [1]

[A] [B]

F-4-522

4-266
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Bk) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-267
Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) 9) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].

■■Preparation [1]
1) Remove the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).

NOTE:
Before turning OFF the power of the host machine, use the Control Panel to remove the
Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).
If the power of the host machine is already turned OFF, see the procedure on manually
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container (Y)/(M)/(C).

2) Open the Front Cover.

3) Remove the Front Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
F-4-525
4) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
10) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
5) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
11) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
6) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).
12) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
7) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232).
13) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
8) Push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] to apply pressure.
14) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-257).
15) Remove the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-276).
■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Place the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1] on a sheet of paper [2], etc. when disassembling/
assembling.

[1]

[1]

F-4-524

[2]

F-4-526

4-267
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-268
1) Close the Controller Box [1]. 3) Open the Controller Box [1].
4) Free the harness [2].
CAUTION: • 2 Connectors [3]

When closing the Controller Box, be careful not to trap the harness. • 3 Wire Saddles [4]
• 1 Reuse Band [5]
• 1 Edge Saddle [6]

[1] [1]

x2 x5
[5] [3] [6]
[2]

[3] [4]

F-4-527
2) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C). F-4-529
5) Remove the Fan Unit [1].
• 2 Screws [2]

x2 [2]

x2

[1]

[2] [1]
F-4-528

F-4-530

4-268
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-269
6) While opening the upper part of the Hopper Shield [1], pull it forward to remove it. 8) Remove the screw [1] of the pipe and the Rail Cover (Rear) [2].
• 1 Claw [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
[1] [2] [2]
[2]

F-4-533

[3] [1] 9) Remove the DC Controller Cover [1].

F-4-531
• 4 Screws [2] (to loosen)
7) Remove the Rail Cover (Front) [1] and the spring [2]. [2]
• 1 Screw [3]

CAUTION:

Be sure to hold the Rail Cover (Front) [1] not to drop the spring [2] when removing it.

[1]
[2]
[1]

[2]
[3]
F-4-534

F-4-532

4-269
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
4-270
10) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] and remove the 2 Wire Saddles [2]. 12) Remove the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1].
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
[1]
• 3 Screws [3]
[2] • 4 Bosses [4]
x3 • 1 Hook [5]

x2 [2] [1] [4]

[5]
[1]

x3 [4]

F-4-535 [4]
11) Remove the Hopper Cooling Suction Fan [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Claw [3] [3]
F-4-537

[1]
CAUTION:

When disassembling/assembling the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), pay attention to the

[3] following points.
• When removing, be sure to avoid the contact with the gear [1] of the Hopper Unit (Bk).

[2]

F-4-536

[1]

F-4-538

4-270
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
4-271

CAUTION:
■■Assembling Procedure

• Do not spill toner [2] from the Toner Supply Mouth [1].
CAUTION:
[1] When assembling the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), pull out the 3 Small Door Open/Close
Shafts [1] at the front side of the host machine by approx. 50 mm, and then install the
Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C).

[1]
[1]
[1] [1]

5c
m
[2]
F-4-539

• Do not hook the harness [1] at the upper part of the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) to the
guides [A].

[A] F-4-541

NOTE:
When assembling the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C), use the following procedure to match
the phase of the gear.

1) Be sure that the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] is pulled to the front.

[1]

F-4-540

[1]

F-4-542

4-271
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
4-272
2) Install the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1]. 4) Align the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) with the line [B] on the Toner Supply
• 1 Hook [2] Mouth, and then use the screw [1] to secure it.
• 4 Bosses [3]
[1]
• 3 Screws [4]
• 1 Wire Saddle [5]

[5] [1] [3]

x3
[2]

[3]

[A] [B]
[3]
F-4-545

[4] CAUTION:

F-4-543 • Be sure that the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] touches the plate [2] on the rear side.
3) Match the phase of the tooth [A] of the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] with the tooth [B] of the gear [2], • Be sure to rotate the Toner Supply Mouth in the direction of the arrow until it stops so
and then push in the Rail Cover (Rear) [1] until it stops. that the line [A] on the pipe of the Hopper Unit (Bk) is aligned with the line [B] on the
Toner Supply Mouth.
[1]
[1]
[2] [1]

[A]

[B]

[2]
[2] [A] [B]
F-4-544

F-4-546

4-272
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
4-273
5) Install the Rail Cover (Front) [1]. 7) Install the 3 connectors [1] and the 2 Wire Saddles [2].
• 1 Spring [2]
[1]
• 1 Screw [3]
[2]
x3
[2]
[1]
x2

[3]
[1]

F-4-549
8) Install the DC Controller Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
F-4-547
6) Install the Hopper Cooling Suction Fan [1]. [2]
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Claw [3]

[1]

[1]
[3]

[2]

F-4-550

[2]

F-4-548

4-273
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
4-274
9) Install the Hopper Shield [1]. 11) Connect the harness [2].
• 1 Claw [2] • 2 Connectors [3]
• 1 Hook [3] • 3 Wire Saddles [4]
• 1 Reuse Band [5]
[2]
• 1 Edge Saddle [6]

[5] [3] [6] [2]

x2

x5

[3] [1]
[2] [4]
F-4-551
10) Install the Fan Unit [1].
• 2 Screws [2] F-4-553
12) Close the Controller Box [1].

[2]
CAUTION:
x2 When closing the Controller Box, be careful not to trap the harness.

13) Install the 2 screws [1] of the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C).

x2
[2] [1]

F-4-552
[1]

F-4-554
14) Open the Controller Box.

4-274
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk) > Procedure
4-275
Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk) 10) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].

■■Preparation [1]
1) Remove the Toner Container (Bk).

NOTE:
Before turning OFF the power of the host machine, use the Control Panel to remove the
Toner Container of the corresponding color.
If the power of the host machine is already turned OFF, see the procedure on manually
removing the Toner Container to remove the Toner Container of the corresponding
color.

2) Open the Front Cover.

3) Remove the Front Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-339). F-4-556
4) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131). 11) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
5) Remove the Developing Assembly (Bk) (Refer to page 4-232). 12) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
6) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184). 13) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
7) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203). 14) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
8) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214). 15) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254).
9) Push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] to apply pressure. 16) Remove the Hopper Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-254).

■■Procedure
1) Free the harness [1].
• 3 Connectors [2]
• 5 Wire Saddles [3]
• 1 Edge Saddle [4]

[1]

x3
[1]

F-4-555
x6 [3]

[4]

[3] [2] [2]

F-4-557

4-275
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Bk) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Preparation
4-276
2) Remove the Developing Drive Unit (Bk) [1].
Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)
• 1 Timing Belt [2]
• 5 Screws [3] ■■Preparation
[1] 1) Open the Front Cover.
[3]
2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
3) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
x5
[3] 4) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).
5) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-4-558

CAUTION:

When assembling the Developing Drive Unit (Bk), be sure to hook the leading edge [A]
F-4-560
of the spring to the groove [B] of the Developing Drive Unit (Bk).
6) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
7) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
8) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
9) Open the Controller Box (Refer to page 4-108).
10) Remove the Drum Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-257).

[B] [A]

F-4-559

4-276
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) > Preparation
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container > Procedure
4-277
■■Procedure Removing the Waste Toner Container
1) Remove the Developing Drive Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) [1].
■■Procedure
• 1 Connector [2]
• 5 Screws [3] 1) Remove the Waste Toner Container Cover [1].
• 1 Finger Screw [2]
[3] [3] [3]
• 2 Hooks [3]

x5

[2]

[2] [3] [1] [3]

F-4-561
[3] [1]
F-4-562
2) Pull out the Waste Toner Container [1].

[1]
F-4-563

4-277
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Preparation
4-278
3) Take out the lid [1] from the Lid Storage of the host machine and use it to cover the old
Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Waste Toner Container [2].
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed)
[1]
[1]
■■Preparation

CAUTION:

When delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).
3) Remove the Left Middle Cover (Refer to page 4-345).
[2] [2] 4) Remove the Lower Left Cover 3 (Refer to page 4-345).
F-4-564 5) Remove the Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-330).
6) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
NOTE: 7) Remove the Reverse Unit (Refer to page 4-331).
Set the lid [1] of a new Waste Toner Container to the Lid Storage [2] of the host machine.
8) Pull out the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-134).
[1] 9) Remove the ITB Unit (Refer to page 4-136).
10) Remove the ITB Frame (Refer to page 4-137).
11) Put the ITB Slide Rail back in the host machine.
12) Remove the Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285).
[2] 13) Remove the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-310).
14) Store the Fixing Feed Unit Rail.
15) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-325).
16) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
17) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-341).
18) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).
19) Open the Process Unit Inner Cover (Refer to page 4-131).
20) Remove the Process Unit (Y)/(M)/(C) (Refer to page 4-239).
F-4-565 21) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-184).
22) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 4-203).
23) Remove the Drum Unit (Bk) (Refer to page 4-214).
24) Remove the Patch Sensor Unit (Refer to page 4-164).

4-278
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Preparation
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
4-279
25) Push in the Black Developing Assembly Pressure Lever [1] to apply pressure. ■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• When disassembling/assembling the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit and the
Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit, prepare a dedicated vacuum cleaner for toner
because the toner may scatter around.
• Because the toner may spill out from the 8 Toner Collection Mouths [A] of the Waste
Toner Secondary Feed Unit [1] and Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit [2], place them
on a sheet of paper [3], etc. when disassembling/assembling.

[A] [A]
[1]
[2]

F-4-566
26) Close the Process Unit Inner Cover [1].
[1]

[1]

[A] [A] [3]

F-4-568

F-4-567
27) Remove the Lower Rear Cover (Refer to page 4-346).
28) Remove the Waste Toner Container (Refer to page 4-277).
29) Remove the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB Box (Refer to page 4-118).

4-279
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
4-280
1) Insert a sheet of paper to the clearance at the lower side of the Pre-transfer Charging High 4) To avoid toner from spilling out, cover the Toner Collection Mouth [1] of the Waste Toner
Voltage PCB (Bk) [2] to prevent the spring to be removed in step 3 from falling to the back Secondary Feed Unit with a tape [2] measuring approx. 5 cm x 5 cm.
side of the Pickup Feed Driver PCB [1].

[1] [2]

[2]
[1]

[2]
[3]
50 mm

50
mm
[1]
F-4-571
F-4-569
2) Place a sheet of paper [1] on the Waste Toner Bottle Base because toner may spill out. 5) Remove the Front Door Switch Cover [1].
3) Remove the Waste Toner Cap Base [2]. • 2 Screws [2]
• 4 Protrusions [3] [1]
• 1 Spring [4]
x2
[2]
[3]

[2]

[4]

[3]
F-4-572

[1]

F-4-570

4-280
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
4-281
6) Place a sheet of paper [1] inside the host machine.
CAUTION:
CAUTION: When assembling, align the positioning boss of the Fixing Upper Duct with the hole of
Be sure to place a sheet of paper [1] inside the host machine during work. the host machine to install.

• This is to prevent the screws from falling off and becoming missing. 8) Remove the ITB Pressure Plate (Rear left) [1].
• This is because toner may spill out when the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit is • 1 Screw [2]
removed.
[1] [2]

F-4-575
[1]
9) Remove the ITB Drawer Base [1].
F-4-573
7) Remove the Fixing Upper Duct [1]. • 4 Connectors [2]
• 1 Screw [2] • 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Boss [3]
[2] [3]
• 1 Protrusion [4]

[4] [1] x4 [2]

[3]

x2

[1]

[3]
[2] F-4-576

F-4-574

4-281
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
4-282
10) Remove the Waste Toner Gear Cover [1]. 12) Remove the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
CAUTION:
[1] When installing/removing the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit [1], be careful not to
spill toner.

[2]

F-4-577
11) Remove the Waste Toner Drive Gear Unit (2) [1].
• 1 Screw (RS M3) [2]
[1] [1]
• 2 Screws (RS M4) [3]
• 1 Screw (Tapping) [4]
F-4-579

[3] [1]
CAUTION:
[2]
x4 Be careful not to lose the bushing [2] and the gear [3] of the Waste Toner Secondary
Feed Unit [1] when disassembling/assembling.
[1]

[4] [3]
[2]
[3]
F-4-578 [3]
[2] [1]

F-4-580

4-282
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
4-283

CAUTION: CAUTION:

When installing the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit, go through the following steps. 2) Remove the gear (white) [1] and the Parallel Pin [2], and hold and then turn the
1) While the gear (white) [1] of the Waste Toner Secondary Feed Unit is at upper side, projection (turning stopper) [4] of the bushing (8 mm diameter) [3] to fit to the groove
see the clearance between the gear (white) and the case to check whether the [5] of the case.
Shaft Support (8 mm diameter) [2] does not project approx. 1 mm from the case.
[1]
If operating the machine while the Shaft Support (8 mm diameter) is projected from
the case, sliding resistance between the end of the screw and the case is increased
which may cause occurrence of E00013-0001. To prevent it occurs, perform steps 2
[2]
and 3.

[3]

1mm [1]

[5] [4]

[2] F-4-582

3) Reinstall the Parallel Pin and the gear (white), and check that the bushing (8 mm
diameter) does not project from the case by seeing from end-on again.

F-4-581

4-283
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
4-284
13) Remove the Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit [1].
• 2 Bosses [2]
• 1 Screw [3]

CAUTION:

When installing/removing the Waste Toner Primary Feed Unit [1], be careful not to spill
toner.

[2] [3] [2]

[1]

F-4-583

CAUTION:

When assembling, insert the leading edge into the U-shaped Plate [1], and fit the 2
Positioning Bosses [2] to the holes of the host machine to install it firmly into place.

[2] [2]

[1]

F-4-584

4-284
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Pipe (Waste Toner
Primary Feed, Waste Toner Secondary Feed) > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Unit > Procedure
4-285

Fixing System 2) Remove the Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
Removing the Fixing Unit • 1 Hook [4]

■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).

■■Procedure [1]

CAUTION:

Because the Fixing Unit is hot, be sure to perform disassembly/assembly after it is

[4]
cooled down.
[3]
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1]. [2]
F-4-586
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
NOTE:
[2] The Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1] can be installed easily by fitting the hook [2]
into the groove [3] of the Fixing Feed Unit in advance.

[1]
[3]
[2] [3]

F-4-585 [1]
F-4-587

4-285
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Unit > Procedure
4-286
3)Remove the Fixing Unit [1].
CAUTION:
• 5 Connectors [2]
• 3 Screws [3] (to loosen) • Be sure to install the Fixing Fee Unit by fitting the 2 protrusions [A] of the Fixing
Feed Unit to the 2 Positioning Holes [B] of the Fixing Unit.
[3] • Do not hit the Fixing Unit against the Harness Guide [C] when removing/installing.

[B] [A]

[3]

[2]
[A]
x5

[C]

[B]
[2]
[2]

[1]

F-4-588 F-4-589

4-286
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Unit > Procedure
4-287
Removing the Fixing Web Unit 2) While holding the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [1], remove the Fixing Web Unit [2].
• 2 Screws [3] (to loosen)
■■Preparation
CAUTION:
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309). Be careful not to damage the surface of the Fixing Pressure Roller [1] and the Fixing
Heat Soaking Roller [2] when disassembling/assembling.
■■Procedure
1) Open the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [1]. [1]

[2]

F-4-591

[1]

F-4-590
[3]

[1] [2]

F-4-592

4-287
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Disassembling Procedure
4-288
Replacing the Fixing Web 1) Remove the Fixing Web Guide [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■■Preparation
[2]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Fixing Web Unit (Refer to page 4-287). [1]

■■Disassembling Procedure

CAUTION:

Do not touch the surface of the Fixing Web Roller when replacing.

F-4-594
2) Turn the bushing [1], hold the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [2], and then remove the Fixing
Web (roll-out side) [3].
3) Remove the bushing [1].

F-4-593

[1]

[3]
[1]

[2]

F-4-595

4-288
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Disassembling Procedure
4-289
4) Turn over the Fixing Web Unit [1]. 5) Turn the bushing [1], and remove the Fixing Web (take-up side) [2].
6) Remove the bushing [1].

[1]
[1]

F-4-596 [1]

CAUTION:

When turning over the Fixing Web Unit, be careful not to damage the Fixing Web Level
Detection Flag [1]. [2]

F-4-598

[1]
F-4-597

4-289
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Disassembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Assembling Procedure
4-290
■■Assembling Procedure 1) Align the cut-off [A] of the Fixing Web (take-up side) with the Pin [1] to install the Fixing
Web (take-up side) [2].
• 1 Bushing [3]
CAUTION:
Because the Fixing Web needs to follow the direction to take up, be sure to install it in
the direction as shown in the figure below. [1]

• Fixing Web (take-up side) [1]

• Fixing Web (roll-out side) [2]

[A]

[1] [2]
F-4-599

[2]

[3]

F-4-600
2) Turn over the Fixing Web Unit [1].

[1]

F-4-601

4-290
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Assembling Procedure
4-291
3) Hold the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [1], and install the Fixing Web (roll-out side) [2] by 4) Make sure that there is no extra slack of the Fixing Web [2] by turning the gear [1] of the
aligning it with the boss [3]. Fixing Web (take-up side) in the direction of the arrow.
• 1 Bushing [4]
[2]
CAUTION:

Be sure to place the Fixing Web Level Detection Flag [1] inside the Fixing Web [2].

[1]

[1]

F-4-604
5) Install the Fixing Web Guide [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
[2]
F-4-602

[1]

[3]

[2] F-4-605

[1] [4]

F-4-603

4-291
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Replacing the Fixing Web > Assembling Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Roller > Procedure
4-292
Removing the Fixing Web Roller 2) Turn the bushing [1], hold the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [2], and then remove the Fixing
Web Roller (roll-out side) [3].
■■Preparation 3) Remove the bushing [1].

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Fixing Web Unit (Refer to page 4-287).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:
[1]
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

1) Remove the Fixing Web Guide [1]. [3]

• 1 Screw [2] [1]

[2]

[1] [2]

F-4-607

F-4-606

4-292
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Web Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-293
4) Remove the Fixing Web Roller [1].
Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
• 2 Springs [2]
• 2 E-rings [3] ■■Preparation
• 2 Bushings [4]
1) Open the Front Cover.
[2] 2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
[2]
3) Remove the Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285).

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Fixing Upper Cover [1].
• 1 Stepped Screw [2]
• 1 Screw (with washer) [3]
[4] [4]
[3]
[3] [3]
[1]
x2 [2]

[1]

F-4-608

F-4-609

4-293
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-294
2) Free the harness [1]. 3) Remove the edge [1] of the spring on the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit from the hook [2] of the
• 1 Connector [2] Fixing Rear Plate.
• 3 Wire Saddles [3]
• 2 Reuse Bands [4]
• 4 Edge Saddles [5]
[1]
[2]
[2]

[3]
[5]
[4] [3]
x9 [5]

[3]
[1]
[5] [4]

F-4-610

F-4-611

4-294
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-295
4) Open the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [1], and remove the edge [2] of the spring on the Fixing 5) While lifting the Fixing Unit [1], align the D-cut [A] on the shaft with the hooks [B] of the
Inner Delivery Unit from the hook [3] of the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit. Fixing Inner Delivery Unit to remove the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [2].

[2]
[3]

[B]
[A] [A]
[B]

[1]

[1]
F-4-612

[2]
F-4-613

4-295
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
4-296
Removing the Fixing IH Unit 2) Remove the Fixing Upper Cover [1].
• 1 Stepped Screw [2]
■■Preparation • 1 Screw (with washer) [3]

1) Open the Front Cover. [3]

2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
[2]
x2
■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Do not touch the surface [1] of the Fixing Film Unit when disassembling/assembling.

[1]

F-4-616
3) Remove the Fixing IH Drawer Connector Base [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Screw [3] (to loosen)
• 2 High Voltage Harnesses [4]
[1] • 1 Harness Guide [5]
F-4-614
[4] [5]
1) Open the Fixing Inner Delivery Unit. [4]
[3]

[1] [2]

F-4-617
[1]

F-4-615

4-296
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
4-297
4) Open the Fixing Pressure Arm [1].
NOTE:
• 2 Screws [2]
When removing the screws [2] securing the Fixing Pressure Arm [1] while in the
[2] engaged state, it causes a gap [C] between the Fixing Pressure Arm [1] and the Fixing
Front/Rear Plate [3].
[2] Pressure is applied when securing the Fixing Pressure Arm [1] with the screws [2].
x2 Therefore, be sure to tighten one side (1) temporarily, then securely tighten the other
side (2), and finally securely tighten the temporarily-tightened side (3).

[2] [1]
[1]
[C]
[1]
[2]

[3]

F-4-618

NOTE: x2
When opening/closing the Fixing Pressure Arm, there are 2 types of the states as
shown in the figure below: the engaged state [A] and the disengaged state [B].

[A] [1] [B] [1]

[2]
[2] [2]

F-4-620

F-4-619

4-297
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
4-298
5) Remove the Fixing IH Unit [1].
CAUTION:
• 4 Connectors [2]
• When tightening the screws [2], be sure that there is no gap [C] between the Fixing
Pressure Arm [1] and the Fixing Front/Rear Plate [3]. CAUTION:
• Be sure that the screws [2] are securely tightened. Be sure to turn over the removed Fixing IH Unit [1] when placing it.

[1] [1] [1]

[2] [2]

[C]

[3] [3]

F-4-621 F-4-622

x3 [2]
[2] [2]

[1]

F-4-623

4-298
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
4-299

CAUTION: CAUTION:

When installing the Fixing IH Unit [1], be sure to align the [A] parts of the Fixing Front When securing the Fixing Pressure Arm, be sure to check the height of the Fixing IH
Plate/Fixing Rear Plate with the guides [B] of the Fixing IH Unit. Unit [1] and the Fixing Front Plate/Fixing Rear Plate [2].

[2] [2]

[A]

[B] [1]
[A] [1]

[B]

[1]
[2]
[2]

[1]
[1]

F-4-624 F-4-625

4-299
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing IH Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit > Procedure
4-300
Removing the Fixing Film Unit 2) Remove the Separation Plate [2] from the Fixing Film Unit [1].
• 2 Springs [3]
■■Preparation
[3] [3]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Fixing IH Unit (Refer to page 4-296).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• Do not touch the surface of the Fixing Film Unit when disassembling/assembling.
• Be sure to Cleaning the Fixing Unit when removing the Fixing Film Unit.
[2]

1) Remove the Fixing Film Unit [1].

• 2 Springs [2]

[2] [1]
[2]
F-4-627

[1]

F-4-626

4-300
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit > Procedure
4-301

CAUTION: Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit

When installing the Fixing Film Unit, align the protrusions [B] of the Fixing IH Unit into ■■Preparation
the guides [A] of the Fixing Film Unit.
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Fixing IH Unit (Refer to page 4-296).

[A]
■■Procedure
[A]

CAUTION:
[B] Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.
[B]
1) Open the Fixing Inlet Guide [1].

[1]

F-4-628

F-4-629

4-301
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing > Procedure
4-302
2) Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit [1] by wrapping a sheet of paper [2] around it.
Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing
CAUTION: ■■Preparation
Be careful not to damage the gear [3] of the Fixing Roller Unit when installing/removing. 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Fixing IH Unit (Refer to page 4-296).
4) Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit. (Refer to page 4-301)
5) Remove the Fixing Web Unit (Refer to page 4-287)..

[3] ■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

[2] 1) Remove the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller [1] by wrapping a sheet of paper [2] around it.
[1]

F-4-630
3) Remove the gear [2] from the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit [1].
• 1 E-ring [3]

[1]

[2]
[3]

[1]
[2]

F-4-632
F-4-631

4-302
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Thermistor > Procedure
4-303
2) Remove the 2 bearings [2] from the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller [1].
Removing the Fixing Thermistor
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
[2] 2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285).
4) Remove the Fixing IH Unit (Refer to page 4-296).
[1]

■■Procedure
[2]
1) Open the guide [1], free the harness from the Reuse Band [2] and the Edge Saddle [3], and
F-4-633
remove the 2 screws [4].

[4]
[1]
x2 [3]

x2

[2]

F-4-634

4-303
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Thermistor > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Thermistor > Procedure
4-304
2) Close the guide [1] and move the Fixing Inlet Guide [2]. 3) Remove the Fixing Thermistor [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• Guide [A]
• 1 Connector [3]
[1]

[2]

[A] [3]

[2]
[1]

F-4-636

F-4-635

4-304
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Thermistor > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Motor > Procedure
4-305
Removing the Fixing Motor NOTE:
The Fixing Feed Right Upper Inner Cover [1] can be installed easily by fitting the hook [2]
■■Preparation into the groove [3] of the Fixing Feed Unit in advance.
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Left Inner Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
• 1 Hook [4]

[2] [3]

[1]
F-4-638

[1]

2) Remove the Fixing Drive Motor [1].

• 2 Connectors [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
[4]
• 1 Hook [4]
[3]
[2] [2]
F-4-637
x2 [4]
[1]

x4

[3]

F-4-639

4-305
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Motor > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Unit > Procedure
4-306
Cleaning the Fixing Unit 2) Clean the Slide Shaft [A] of the Fixing IH Unit, the [B] part of the IH Unit, and the [C] part of
the slider with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
■■Preparation [1]
[B]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Fixing IH Unit (Refer to page 4-296).
4) Remove the Fixing Film Unit (Refer to page 4-300).

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Core Shutter Motor [1] from the Fixing IH Unit.
• 2 Screws [2]
[A] [C]

x2 F-4-641
3) Move the slider [2] by rotating the Slide Shaft [1] of the Fixing IH Unit, and clean the [A] part
[1] being hidden with lint-free paper [3] moistened with alcohol.

[2]
[1]
[3]

[2]

F-4-640

[A]

F-4-642

4-306
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Unit > Procedure
4-307
4) Rotate the Slide Shaft [1] of the Fixing IH Unit, and move the slider [2] somewhere between 5) Clean the Separation Plate [1] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [2].
the hole [A] and the protrusion [B].
Then, install the Core Shutter Motor [3]. CAUTION:
• 2 Screws [4] When cleaning the Separation Plate [1], be careful not to deform it because it is thin.

x2 [2]

[3] [4] [1]

[A]
[B]
[B]
[A]

F-4-645

[1] [2]

F-4-643

CAUTION:

If it is installed while the slider [2] is too near the center or too near the edges, E840
may occur. As a result of that, reassembling will be needed.

[2]

[2]
F-4-644

4-307
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Unit > Procedure
4-308
6) Clean the paper feed side [A] of the Fixing Inlet Guide with lint-free paper [1] moistened
with alcohol.

CAUTION:

• Do not touch the surface of the Fixing Pressure Roller [2] when cleaning.
• Be careful not to damage the Sensor Flag [3] when cleaning.

[2] [A] [3]

[1]

F-4-646
7) Install the removed parts in reverse order.
• Install the Fixing Film Unit.
• Install the Fixing IH Unit.
• Put the Fixing Feed Unit back in the host machine.
• Close the Front Cover.

4-308
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Cleaning the Fixing Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. > Procedure
4-309

Pickup Feed System NOTE:

Perform step 2 as necessary when installing/removing the units (Fixing Unit [1],
Secondary Transfer Outer Unit [2], Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit [3], Registration Unit [4],
Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. etc.) installed in the Fixing Feed Unit.
[1] [3] [2] [4]
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.

■■Procedure
1) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [1].

[1]

F-4-648

F-4-647

4-309
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Fixing Feed Unit > Procedure
4-310
2) Press the 2 Release Springs [1] at both sides of the rail to release the locks, and further
Removing the Fixing Feed Unit
pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [2] until it stops.
■■Preparation
CAUTION:
1) Open the Front Cover.
When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit [1], pulling it out beyond the rear end [A] of the 2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
Release Springs [2] on the rear side may cause falling of the Fixing Feed Unit. 3) Remove the Fixing Unit (Refer to page 4-285).

[1] ■■Procedure
[A] [2]
1) Remove the red screw [1] securing the Fixing Feed Unit Rail.

[A]
[2]
[1]

F-4-649
[1]

[1]

F-4-651

[1]

[2]

F-4-650

4-310
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Fixing Feed Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Fixing Feed Unit > Procedure
4-311
2) Push the 2 Release Springs [2] on the rear side of both sides of the Fixing Feed Unit [1] 3) Hold the bottom side [A] on the rear side of the Fixing Feed Unit and the bottom side [B] on
to release the locks, and then pull out the Fixing Feed Unit [1] to the rear end [A] of the its front side, and remove the Fixing Feed Unit [1] by pulling it out toward the front.
Release Spring on the rear side.

CAUTION:

When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit [1], pulling it out beyond the rear end [A] of the
Release Springs [2] on the rear side may cause falling of the Fixing Feed Unit.

[A]
[2]
[1]

[A]

[1] [B]
[A]
F-4-654
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:

Put the 2 rails [1] pulled out back in the host machine as needed.
• 2 Rail Lock Levers [2]
F-4-652

[1]

[1]

[A]

[2]
F-4-655

[2]

F-4-653

4-311
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Fixing Feed Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller > Procedure
4-312
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller 5) Remove the Resin Ring [1], and remove the Feed Roller [2].

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [1].

2) Release the claw [2] to remove the gear [3].
3) Release the claw [4] to remove the Shaft Support [5]. [1]

[2]

x2 F-4-658

[1]
[5]

[4]
[2] [3]

F-4-656
4) Remove the Feed Upper Cover [1].

[1]

F-4-657

4-312
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure
4-313
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller 2) While holding the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [1], remove the Paper Guide
(Center) [2].
■■Preparation • 2 Hooks [3]
• 2 Claws [4]
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller (Refer to page 4-312).

■■Procedure [3] [4]

x2
CAUTION:

Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

1) Remove the Paper Guide (Front) [1] and the Paper Guide (Rear) [2].
• 4 Claws [3]
• 4 Hooks [4] [2]
[1]

F-4-660

NOTE:
When installing the Paper Guide (Center), pressing down the Separation Roller makes
the work easy.

3) Remove the Separation Roller [1].

• 1 Claw [2]

[1]
[3]

x4
[3]

[4]
[2]

[2]

F-4-661
[4] [1]
F-4-659

4-313
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck > Procedure
4-314
Removing the Right Deck CAUTION:

■■Preparation • At installation, be sure to align the 4 pins [1] of the rail with the 4 grooves [A] of the
Right Deck.
1) Open the Front Cover.

[A]
■■Procedure [A]
1) Pull out the Right Deck [1].
2) Remove the Right Deck [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
[A]

x2 [1]

[1]
[1]
F-4-663

• Put the 2 rails [1] pulled out back in the host machine as needed.

[1]
[2]
[2]
F-4-662

[1]
F-4-664

4-314
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/Right Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
4-315
Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/ Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller
3) Remove the Stopper Spring [1].
Right Deck Separation Roller 4) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Roller [2].
• 1 Hook [3]
■■Preparation

CAUTION:

When pickup system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.

1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Right Deck (Refer to page 4-314). [1]
[3]
[2]

■■Procedure

CAUTION:
F-4-666
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

CAUTION:

1) Store the 2 rails [1] of the Right Deck in the host machine. Be sure to install it with the protrusions [1] of the Pickup Roller facing the rear side of
2) Open the Vertical Path Unit [2]. the host machine.

[2]

[1]

[1]

F-4-665 F-4-667

4-315
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/Right Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/Right Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
4-316
Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller 7) Remove the Right Deck Separation Roller [1].
5) Remove the Right Deck Feed Roller [1]. • 1 Resin Ring [2]
• 1 Resin Ring [2]

[2]
[1] [1]
[2]

F-4-670

F-4-668
Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller
6) Remove the Feed Guide [1] while pressing the [A] part.
• 2 Bosses [2]

[1]
[2]

[A]

[2]

F-4-669

4-316
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup/Right Deck Feed/Right Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck > Procedure
4-317
Removing the Left Deck CAUTION:

■■Preparation • At installation, be sure to align the 4 pins [1] of the rail with the 4 grooves [A] of the
Left Deck.
1) Open the Front Cover.

[A]
■■Procedure
1) Pull out the Left Deck [1].
2) Remove the Left Deck [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[1] [A]

x2
[1] [A]

[1]
[1]
F-4-672

[1] • Put the 2 rails [1] pulled out back in the host machine as needed.

[2] [2]

F-4-671

[1]
F-4-673

4-317
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/Left Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
4-318
Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/Left Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller
3) Remove the Stopper Spring [1].
Deck Separation Roller 4) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Roller [2].
• 1 Hook [3]
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Right Deck (Refer to page 4-314).
3) Remove the Left Deck (Refer to page 4-317).

■■Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
[3]
Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling. [2]

1) Store the 4 rails [1] of the Right and Left Decks in the host machine.
2) Open the Vertical Path Unit [2].
F-4-675

CAUTION:
[2]
Be sure to install it with the protrusions [1] of the Pickup Roller facing the rear side of
the host machine.

[1]

F-4-674 [1]

F-4-676

4-318
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup/Left Deck Feed/Left Deck Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 > Procedure
4-319
Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller
Removing the Cassette 3
5) Remove the Left Deck Feed Roller [1].
• 1 Resin Ring [2] ■■Preparation
1) Pull out the Cassette 3.

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Cassette 3 [1].
• 4 Screws [2]

[2] [2]
x4
[1]

F-4-677
Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller
6) Remove the Left Deck Separation Roller [1].
• 1 Resin Ring [2]
[2]
[1]

[2] F-4-679
[1]

F-4-678

4-319
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
4-320

CAUTION: Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup / Feed / Separation

• At installation, be sure to align the 4 pins [1] of the rail with the 4 grooves [A] of the
Roller
cassette.
■■Preparation
[1]
CAUTION:
[1]
[A] When pickup system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.

1) Pull out the Cassette 3.

2) Remove the Cassette 3 (Refer to page 4-319).

■■Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
F-4-680 Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.
• Put the 2 rails [1] pulled out back in the host machine as needed.
1) Store the 2 rails [1] of the Cassette 3 in the host machine.
[1]
2) Open the Vertical Path Unit [2].

[2]
[1]

F-4-681

F-4-682

4-320
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
4-321
Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller Removing the Cassette 3 Feed Roller
3) Remove the Stopper Spring [1]. 5) Remove the Cassette 3 Feed Roller [1].
4) Remove the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller [2]. • 1 Resin Ring [2]
• 1 Hook [3]

[2]

[1]
[1]
[3]
[2]

F-4-685
F-4-683
Removing the Cassette 3 Separation Roller
6) Remove the Feed Guide [1] while pressing the [A] part.
CAUTION:
• 2 Bosses [2]
Be sure to install it with the protrusions [1] of the Pickup Roller facing the rear side of
the host machine.
[1]
[2]

[A]

[1] [2]

F-4-686

F-4-684

4-321
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 4 > Procedure
4-322
7) Remove the Cassette 3 Separation Roller [1].
Removing the Cassette 4
• 1 Resin Ring [2]
■■Preparation
1) Pull out the Cassette 4.
[1]
[2]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Cassette 4 [1].
• 4 Screws [2]

x4
[2]

F-4-687

[2] [1]

F-4-688

4-322
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 4 > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
4-323

CAUTION: Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup / Feed / Separation

• At installation, be sure to align the 4 pins [1] of the rail with the 4 grooves [A] of the
Roller
cassette.
■■Preparation

[1] CAUTION:
[A] When pickup system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
[1]
machine.

1) Pull out the Cassette 4.

2) Remove the Cassette 4 (Refer to page 4-322).

■■Procedure
[1]
CAUTION:
F-4-689 Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling..
• Put the 2 rails [1] pulled out back in the host machine as needed.

1) Store the 2 rails [1] of the Cassette 4 in the host machine.

[1] 2) Open the Vertical Path Unit [2].

[2]

[1]

F-4-690

F-4-691

4-323
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
4-324
Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller Removing the Cassette 4 Feed Roller
3) Remove the Stopper Spring [1]. 5) Remove the Cassette 4 Feed Roller [1].
4) Remove the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller [2]. • 1 Resin Ring [2]
• 1 Hook [3]

[2]

[1] [1]
[3]
[2]

F-4-694

F-4-692 Removing the Cassette 4 Separation Roller

6) Remove the Feed Guide [1] while pressing the [A] part.
CAUTION: • 2 Bosses [2]
Be sure to install it with the protrusions [1] of the Pickup Roller facing the rear side of
the host machine.

[1]
[2]

[A]

[2]
[1]

F-4-695

F-4-693

4-324
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup / Feed / Separation Roller > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-325
7) Remove the Cassette 4 Separation Roller [1].
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
• 1 Resin Ring [2]
■■Procedure
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [1].
[1] 2) Remove the Stepped Screw [2] and store the slider [3] in the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
[2]
Unit [1].
3) Remove the Connector Cover [4].
• 1 Screw [5]

[2]
[3]

x2
[4]

F-4-696

[1]
[5]

F-4-697
4) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Reuse Band [3]
• 2 Hinge Pins [4]

[4]
[2]

[3]
[1]

F-4-698

4-325
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4 Pickup Unit, and Right Deck Pickup Unit > Procedure
4-326
Removing the Vertical Path Unit Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4
■■Preparation Pickup Unit, and Right Deck Pickup Unit
■■Preparation
CAUTION:

When pickup system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host CAUTION:
machine.
When pickup system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the host
machine.
■■Procedure
1) Open the Vertical Path Unit [1]. 1) Remove the Vertical Path Unit (Refer to page 4-326).
2) Pull out the Cassette 3, the Cassette 4 and the Right Deck.

[1] ■■Procedure

NOTE:
This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit.
Perform the same procedure also for the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit and Right Deck Pickup
Unit.

CAUTION:

Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

F-4-699 1) Remove the Connector Cover [1].

2) Remove the Vertical Path Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hinge Pins [2]

[1]
[2]

[1]
[2]
[2]

F-4-700 F-4-701

4-326
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Unit, Cassette 4 Pickup Unit, and Right Deck Pickup Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni > Procedure
4-327
2) Disconnect the connector [1].
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni
[1] ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Remove the Right Deck (Refer to page 4-314).
3) Remove the Left Deck (Refer to page 4-317).

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

Be sure not to touch the surface of the roller when disassembling/assembling.

F-4-702 1) Disconnect the connector [1].

3) Remove the Pickup Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]

[1]

[1]

F-4-704
[2]

F-4-703

4-327
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni > Procedure
4-328
2) Remove the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Upper) [1] and the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Right)
CAUTION:
[2].
• 2 Screws [3] When installing the Left Deck Pickup Unit, align the bosses [2], [3] and [4] of the Left
• 1 Protector [4] Deck Pickup Unit [1] with the grooves [A] and [B], and the hole [C] of the host machine.

CAUTION: [A] [B] [C]

[3] [2]
[4]
When removing the Fixation Plate, hold the Pickup Unit to prevent it from falling down.

[1]

x2
[3]
[1]

[4]
F-4-707

[2]

F-4-705
3) Holding the [A] part and the [B] part of the Pickup Unit, remove the Pickup Unit [1].

[1]

F-4-706

4-328
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Uni > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Heater Unit > Procedure
4-329

CAUTION: Removing the Cassette Heater Unit

When securing the Left Deck Pickup Unit, perform the following steps. ■■Preparation
1) Install the Left Deck Pickup Unit [1] to the host machine. 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Install the Protector [2] and the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Right) [3] with the screw [4]. 2) Remove the Right Deck (Refer to page 4-314).
3) Install the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Upper) [5] with the screw [6]. 3) Remove the Left Deck (Refer to page 4-317).
4) Remove the Cassette 3 (Refer to page 4-319).

If the Pickup Unit Fixing Plate (Upper) [5] is installed first, the Left Deck Pickup Unit may
not be secured properly, resulting in jam. ■■Procedure
[6] 1) Remove the Connector Cover [1].
[5]
• 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Protrusions [3]
x2
[1]

[2]

[4]
[3]

[2] [3]
[1]

F-4-708

F-4-709
2) Disconnect the connector [1].

[1]

F-4-710

4-329
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Heater Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Delivery Unit > Procedure
4-330
3) Remove the Cassette Heater Unit [1].
Removing the Delivery Unit
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Bosses [3] ■■Preparation
• 2 Protrusions [4]
• 2 Holes [5] CAUTION:

CAUTION: When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the
host machine.
• At assembly, align the 2 protrusions [4] with the 2 holes [5] of the Rear Plate.
• When securing the Cassette Heater Unit, secure it with the 2 screws [2] with the 2 1) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).
bosses [3] in the correct positions. 2) Remove the Left Middle Cover (Refer to page 4-345).
3) Remove the Lower Left Cover 3 (Refer to page 4-345).

[3] [4] [5] [4] [1] ■■Procedure

x2 1) Open the Delivery Unit [1], and remove the Connector Cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3]

[1]

[2]
F-4-711

[3]
[2]

F-4-712

4-330
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Delivery Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Reverse Unit > Procedure
4-331
2) Disconnect the connector [1].
Removing the Reverse Unit
• 1 Reuse Band [2]
■■Preparation

[1] CAUTION:

When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the
host machine.

1) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).

2) Remove the Left Middle Cover (Refer to page 4-345).
3) Remove the Lower Left Cover 3 (Refer to page 4-345).
[2]
4) Remove the Delivery Unit (Refer to page 4-330).
5) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).

F-4-713
■■Procedure
3) Remove the Delivery Unit [1].
• 2 Pins [2] 1) Pull out the Cassette 4.
2) Use a flat-blade screwdriver [1], etc. to release the claw [2] and remove the Handle Cover [3].
• 1 Hook [4]

[1]
[2]

[2]

[2]

[1] [3] [3] [4]

F-4-714

F-4-715

4-331
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Reverse Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit > Procedure
4-332
3) Remove the Lower Left Cover [1].
Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit
• 4 Screws [2]
■■Preparation
[1]
1) Open the Front Cover.
x4 2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).

■■Procedure
[2]
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Belt Unit [1].
[2] • 3 Connectors [2]
• 2 Screws (RS) [3]

[3]

F-4-716 x2
4) Store the Cassette 4. [1]
5) Remove the Reverse Unit [1]. [2]
• 3 Connectors [2] x3 [3]
• 2 Wire Saddles [3]
• 1 Edge Saddle [4] [2]
• 6 Screws [5]
• 2 Hooks [6]

[2]
[6] [1]
F-4-718
x6

[3]
x3 [6]

[5]
[4]
x3
[2] [2] [5]

F-4-717

4-332
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor and the Pre-fixing Feed Belt > Procedure
4-333
Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor and the 2) Clean the surface [A] of the Fixing Feed Belt [1] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
• Move the lint-free paper in the direction of [B] to wipe it.
Pre-fixing Feed Belt • Rotate the Belt Roller [2] in the direction of [C] to clean the whole circumference of the
surface [A] of the belt.
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover. CAUTION:
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
Do not move the Fixing Feed Belt [1] toward the front/rear.
3)Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).
[1]

■■Procedure
1) Use a blower to clean the soiling on the surface of the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor
from the hole [A] of the Guide.

[A]

F-4-720

F-4-719

4-333
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Post-secondary Transfer Sensor and the Pre-fixing Feed Belt > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit > Procedure
4-334
Removing the Registration Unit
[A]

[2]
■■Preparation
[A]
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).
3) Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Unit (Refer to page 4-168).

■■Procedure
[B] [C]
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Lower Inner Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Knob [3]

x2 [1]

[1] [2]
F-4-721

F-4-722
2) Open the Edge Saddle [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

[2]
[1]

F-4-723

4-334
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/
Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor > Procedure
4-335
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the 2 Reuse Bands [2].
Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/
Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor
[2]
x2 ■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit (Refer to page 4-309).

x2
■■Procedure
1) Open the Upper Cover [1] of the Registration Unit, and direct the edge of the blower toward
the hole [A] of the Guide to clean the soiling on the Transparency Sensor [2].
[1]

F-4-724
[1]
4)Remove the Registration Unit [1]. [2]
• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
[A]

[1] [2]

x4

F-4-726

F-4-725

4-335
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Cleaning the Transparency Sensor/
Registration Sensor / Original Size Sensor > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit > Procedure
4-336
2) Direct the edge of the blower toward the hole [A] of the guide to clean the soiling on the
Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit
Registration Sensor [1].
■■Preparation
1) Pull out the Cassette 3.
[A] 2) Remove the Cassette 3 (Refer to page 4-319).
3) Pull out the Cassette 4.
4) Remove the Cassette 4 (Refer to page 4-322).

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Cassette Size Detection Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
[1]
• 4 Screws [3]

[3]
F-4-727
3) Direct the edge of the blower toward the 4 holes [A] of the guide to clean the soiling on the
Original Size Sensor [1].
[1]

[A]
x4

[A]
[2]
[1] [3]

F-4-729

[1]

F-4-728

4-336
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Size Detection Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
4-337
Removing the Cassette 3 and 4 Paper Level Detection Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit
Units ■■Preparation
■■Preparation 1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Right Deck.
1) Pull out the Cassette 3.
3) Remove the Right Deck (Refer to page 4-314).
2) Remove the Cassette 3 (Refer to page 4-319).
4) Remove the Vertical Path Unit (Refer to page 4-326).
3) Pull out the Cassette 4.
5) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit (Refer to page 4-326).
4) Remove the Cassette 4 (Refer to page 4-322).

■■Procedure ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit [1].
1) Remove the Cassette 3 Paper Level Detection Unit [1] and the Cassette 4 Paper Level
• 1 Connector [2]
Detection Unit [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
• 2 Connectors [3]
• 1 Hook [4]
• 2 Screws [4] (to remove)
• 2 Screws [5] (to loosen)

[4] [4]
[1] [3]
x2 [2]
[3]

x2 [4] x2
[5]

[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]

F-4-730 F-4-731

4-337
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
4-338
Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit
■■Preparation
1) Open the Front Cover.
2) Pull out the Right Deck.
3) Remove the Right Deck (Refer to page 4-314).
4) Pull out the Left Deck.
5) Remove the Left Deck (Refer to page 4-317).
6) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit(Refer to page 4-327).

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Hook [4]

[4] [2]

[3]
x2

[1]

[3]

F-4-732

4-338
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Paper Level Detection Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
4-339

External Auxiliary System Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner
Cover
Removing the Upper Front Cover
■■Preparation
■■Preparation 1) Open the Front Cover.
1) Open the Front Cover. 2) Remove the Upper Front Cover (Refer to page 4-339).

■■Procedure ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Upper Front Cover [1]. 1) Remove the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover [1].
• 2 Hinge Pins • 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Claws [3]
• 4 Protrusions [4]
[2]
[1]
[2]

x4 x2

[3]

[2]
[4]

[2]
F-4-734

[1]

F-4-733

4-339
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
4-340

CAUTION: CAUTION:

• When installing, be sure to install the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover If the Toner Container (Bk) is not installed, be sure to install the Toner Container
[2] after tilting the 4 Parallel Pins [1] of the Inner Door Link Shaft at an angle of Replacement Unit Inner Cover [2] while opening the Lock Lever [1] of the Toner
approx. 45 degrees. Container (Bk).

[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
45°

[2]

F-4-735
• When installing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover [1], be sure to
prevent the cover from interfering with and damaging the 4 Toner Insertion Inlet
Cover Open/Close Sensors [2] and the 4 Grounding Wires [3] on the upper side of
the sensors.

[2],[3]

F-4-737

[1] [2] [3]

F-4-736

4-340
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Toner Container Replacement Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
4-341
Removing the Upper Right Cover 1 Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover [1]. 1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341).
2) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 [2]. ■■Procedure
• 1 Rubber Cap [3]
1) Remove the link [1] of the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
• 2 Screws [4]
• 1 Stepped Screw [2]
• 4 Hooks [5]
2) Remove the Connector Cover [3].
[5] • 1 Screw [4]
[4]
[2] [3] [2]
[1]
x2
x2

[4]
[3]

[4]
[1]

F-4-738
F-4-739

4-341
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Multi Unit Inner Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Right Cover > Procedure
4-342
2) Remove the Multi Door Switch Cover [1].
Removing the Box Right Cover
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Protrusions [3] ■■Procedure
1) Push [A] part to open the HDD Cover [1].

[2]
[1]

[1]
[A]

[3]
[3]

F-4-740
3) Remove the Multi Unit Inner Cover [1].
F-4-742
• 2 Relay Connectors [2]
2) Remove the Box Right Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Protrusion [4]

[4]
[2] [1] x2
[1]

[2]
[3]
[2]

F-4-743

F-4-741

4-342
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Right Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Upper Cover > Procedure
4-343
Removing the Box Left Cover Removing the Box Upper Cover
■■Procedure ■■Preparation
1) Remove the Box Left Cover [1]. 1) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
• 2 Screws [2]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the screw [1] of the Box Right Cover, and remove the Box Upper Cover [2].
x2 • 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Protrusion [4]

[2]
x3
[1] [2]

[4]

F-4-744
[3]

[1]

F-4-745

4-343
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Box Upper Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper Left Cover > Procedure
4-344

CAUTION: Removing the Upper Left Cover

When installing, be sure to put the protrusion [1] and the rib [2] of the Box Upper Cover ■■Preparation
inside the Box Right Cover [3].
CAUTION:

When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the
[1] x2 host machine.

■■Procedure
1) Remove the Upper Left Cover [1].
[2] • 3 Screws [2]
• 4 Protrusions [3]

[3] [3]
[1]

F-4-746
x3

[2]

F-4-747

4-344
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper Left Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Left Cover 3 > Procedure
4-345
Removing the Left Middle Cover Removing the Lower Left Cover 3
■■Preparation ■■Preparation

CAUTION: CAUTION:

When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the
host machine. host machine.

1) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).

■■Procedure
■■Procedure
1) Remove the Handle Cover [1].
1)Remove the Left Middle Cover [1].
• 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Hook [3]

[1]
x2

[2]

[2]
[1]

[2] [3]
F-4-748

F-4-749

4-345
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Left Cover 3 > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Rear Cover > Procedure
4-346
2) Remove the Lower Left Cover 3 [1].
Removing the Lower Rear Cover
• 5 Screws [2]
■■Procedure
1) Remove the 2 screws [1] of the Lower Left Cover.
x5

x2
[2]

[1]
[1]

[2]

F-4-750

F-4-751
2) Remove the Lower Rear Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [3] (to loosen)
[2]

x2

[1]

[3]
F-4-752

4-346
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Lower Rear Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone Filter > Procedure
4-347

CAUTION: Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone

• When disassembling/assembling, do not deform the Grounding Plate [1].
Filter
[1] ■■Procedure
1) Remove the Noise Reduction Duct Filter Unit [2] while pressing the 2 claws [2] on both
sides.

x2

[1]

F-4-753

• When assembling, be sure to insert the edge [A] of the Lower Left Cover in the [1]
groove [B] of the Lower Rear Cover.
[2]
[1]
[B] [A]
F-4-755
2) Remove the Fixing Dustproof Filter [1].

[1]

F-4-754

F-4-756

4-347
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone Filter > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone Filter > Procedure
4-348
3) Remove the 2 Ozone Filters [2] from the Filter Case [1].
CAUTION:
[1]
Be sure to pay attention to the direction of installing the filters.

• Be sure to install the Fixing Dustproof Filter with its sponge [1] on the lower side and
the rib [2] on the rear side.
• Be sure to install the Ozone Filter with its sponge [3] on the upper side.

[2]

F-4-757

[2] [2]

[1] [1]

[3] [3]

F-4-758

4-348
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Dustproof Filter and the Ozone Filter > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter > Procedure
4-349
Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter
■■Procedure
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover [1].
2) Remove the Filter Cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3]

[1]
[2]

[3]

F-4-759
3) Hold the grip [A] to remove the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter [1].

[1]

[A]
F-4-760

4-349
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Primary Charging Dustproof Filter > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit > Procedure
4-350

Options 3) Remove the Inner Plate [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
Removing the DADF Unit [2]
■■Procedure
1) Open the DADF [1].

[3]
[1]
x4

[2]

[1]

F-4-763
4) Disconnect the Power Supply Cable [1].
• 1 Edge Saddle [2]
• 1 Connector [3]
• 2 Flat Cables [4]
F-4-761
2) Remove the PCB Cover [1].
[1]
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]

x2 x3

[2]

[3]
[4]

F-4-764

[1]
F-4-762

4-350
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit > Procedure
4-351
5) Remove the DADF [1].
CAUTION:
• 4 Screws [2]
Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide [1] of the removed
[1] DADF.
[2]
x4

[2]

F-4-765 [1]

CAUTION:
F-4-767

Be careful not to damage the white sheet [1] of the removed DADF.

[1]

F-4-766

4-351
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
4-352
Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit 1) Disconnect the Reader Power Supply Cable [1].
• 2 Connectors [2]
■■Preparation • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
• 1 Screw [4]

CAUTION: • 1 Round Shape Terminal [5]

• 1 Toothed Washer [6]
When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the
host machine.

[4]
1) Remove the Box Right Cover (Refer to page 4-342).
2) Remove the Box Left Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
[5]
3) Remove the Box Upper Cover (Refer to page 4-343).
4) Remove the Upper Right Cover 1 (Refer to page 4-341). [6]
x2 [3]
5) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
[2]
6) Remove the Upper Left Cover (Refer to page 4-344).
[1]

■■Procedure

CAUTION:

• Because the weight of the equipment is approx. 40 kg, be sure to work with 2 or [2]
more people when lifting it up/down. Also, be sure to lift the equipment horizontally.
• To prevent deformation of the bottom of the Reader Unit, be sure that the Reader
F-4-769
Support Plate [B] is installed when placing it on the floor.
2) Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1].
• 1 Wire Saddle [2]
• 2 Connectors [3]

[3]

x2
[B] [B] [2]

F-4-768
[1]

[3]
F-4-770

4-352
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
4-353
4-2) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1] (Flat Control Panel model).
NOTE:
• 1 Screw [2]
Be sure to refer to the correct steps according to the following instruction since the
steps differ between the Upright Control Panel model and the Flat Control Panel model. • 1 Protrusion [3]

• For Upright Control Panel model, refer to steps 3, 4-1, and 5-1.
• For Flat Control Panel model, refer to steps 4-2, and 5-2.

[1]
3) Remove the Base Cover (Front) [1] and the Base Cover (Rear) [2] (Upright Control Panel
model). [2]
• 2 Screws [3]

x2

[3]

F-4-773
5-1) Remove the Reader Fixation Plate (R) [1] (Upright Control Panel model).
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
[1] [2] [3]
[1]

F-4-771
4-1) Remove the Upper Right Cover 2 [1] (Upright Control Panel model).
• 1 Screw [2]

[1] [3]

[2]
[3]
[2]

F-4-774

F-4-772

4-353
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
4-354
5-2) Open the Wire Saddle [1], lift the Control Panel Cable [2] and the Power Supply Cable [3], 7) Open the DADF, and remove the Left Upper Small Cover.
and then remove the Reader Fixation Plate (R) [4] (Flat Control Panel model). • 1 Claw [2]
• 1 Screw [5] • 1 Hook [3]
• 2 Bosses [6]

[4] [1]
[2]
[1]

[6]
[5] [3] [2]
[3]
[6]
F-4-777
F-4-775 8) Install the Scanner System Fixation Tool [1] that has been kept in a safe place since
6) Remove the Reader Fixation Plate (L) [1]. installation.
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]

[1] [1]

[3]

[3]
[2] F-4-778

F-4-776

4-354
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
4-355
9) Close the DADF. 12) Install the Reader Support Plate [A].
10) Remove the Reader Support Plate [1]. • 2 Screws [1]
• 1 Screw [2]

[2]
x2
[A]

[1]

[1]

F-4-781
F-4-779
11) Remove the Reader Support Plate [A] from the Reader Support Plate [B].
• 2 Screws [1]

[1]

x2 [A]

[B]

F-4-780

4-355
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
4-356
13) Lift up the DADF + Reader Unit slightly with a screwdriver by applying the principle of
CAUTION: leverage, and remove the 4 Rubber Plates [1] from the host machine (printer).
• When attempting to lift up the DADF + Reader Unit fully without first removing the 4
Rubber Plates, force is generated when the Rubber Plates are removed, which may
cause the DADF + Reader Unit to fall.
• To make the work easier, remove the Rubber Plates in the front side first.
• Do not use a long screwdriver. Otherwise, it may be bent.
• When removing the Rubber Plate [A] on the front side, do not insert a screwdriver
between the front side of the plate and the host machine because harnesses [2] are
routed there.
• When removing the Rubber Plate [A] on the rear side, do not insert a screwdriver
[1] [1] [1] [1]
between the rear side of the plate and the host machine because harnesses [3] are
routed there.

[A] [2] [A] [2]

F-4-783

CAUTION:

• Because the weight of the equipment is approx. 40 kg, be sure to work with 2 or
more people when lifting it up/down. Also, be sure to lift the equipment horizontally.
[3] [3] • When lifting up/down the DADF + Reader Unit, be careful not to get the cables and
fingers caught.
[B] [B]

F-4-782

4-356
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
4-357

CAUTION:

Points to note when installing/removing the DADF + Reader Unit

• Do not trap the Reader Power Supply Cable [2] and the Reader Communication
Cable [3].
[2]
• Be careful not to break the 2 Dust Collection Cups [4].
• Be careful not to break the Wire Saddle [5].

[4] [1]

[5]

[2]
45mm
[3]

F-4-785

[1]

F-4-784

14) Remove the DADF + Reader Unit [1] from the 2 pins [2] of the host machine, and place it
temporarily while being shifted for approx. 45 mm toward left side of the host machine.

4-357
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
4-358
15) Install the Reader Support Plate [B]. 16) Lift the DADF + Reader Unit [1] with 2 or more people, and remove it by passing over the
• 1 Screw [1] front side of the host machine.

CAUTION: CAUTION:

When lifting down the DADF + Reader Unit from the host machine, be sure to install the Because the center of gravity of the equipment is at the rear, be careful not to drop it
Reader Support Plate [B] to the DADF + Reader Unit before lifting it down. This is to when lifting it.
prevent deformation of the bottom of the Reader Unit.

[1]

[A]

[1] [B]

F-4-788
[B]

F-4-786
NOTE:
Installation to the host machine
Place the DADF + Reader Unit temporarily on the floor with the 2 pins [1] of the host
CAUTION: machine and the 2 holes of the DADF + Reader Unit located as shown in the figure.
Then, place the DADF + Reader Unit on the host machine from the front side of the
When lifting up/down the DADF + Reader Unit, be sure to hold the position [A] shown in
machine.
the figure.

[A]
[A]

[2] [1]

F-4-789
F-4-787

4-358
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the DADF Unit + Reader Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the the Printer Cover > Procedure
4-359
Removing the the Printer Cover 4) Remove the Right Upper Cover 2.
• 1 Screw
■■Preparation • 2 Protrusions

CAUTION:

When the delivery system options are installed, be sure to disconnect them from the Protrusion
host machine.

■■Procedure
1) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Cover.
2) Remove the Right Upper Cover 1. Protrusion
• 1 Rubber Cap
• 2 Screws
• 4 Protrusions
F-4-791
5) Push [A] area to open the HDD Cover.
Protrusion

x2

[A]

F-4-790
3) Close the Multi-purp.
F-4-792

4-359
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the the Printer Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the the Printer Cover > Procedure
4-360
6) Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit. 8)Remove the Box Upper Cover.
• 2 Screws • 2 Screws

x2 x2

F-4-793 F-4-795
7) Remove the Box Left Cover. 9) Remove the Left Upper Cover.
• 2 Screws • 3 Screws
• 4 Protrusions

Protrusion
x2
x3

F-4-794

F-4-796

4-360
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the the Printer Cover > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
4-361
10) Free the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable from the 3 Wire Saddles.
Removing the Buffer Path Unit
NOTE: ■■Preparation
Allow flexibility of the cables so that the Printer Cover can be easily removed.

NOTE:
Power Supply Control Panel When removing the Buffer Path Unit from the host machine, be sure to remove the
Cable Cable delivery system options in advance.

x3

■■Procedure
1) Open the Buffer Front Cover [1], and remove the Hinge Shaft [2].
[1]

Wire Saddle
[2]

F-4-797
11) Remove the Printer Cover.
• 4 Screws

x4
F-4-799
2)Turn the Jam Removal Lever [1], and push it against the grove [A].

[A]

F-4-798

[1]

F-4-800

4-361
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
4-362
3) Disconnect the Buffer Cable [1]. 5) Remove the Connecting Harness Cover [1] from the host machine.
• 1 Wire Saddle [2] • 1 Claw [2]
• 2 Protrusions [3]
6) Disconnect the Buffer Cable [4] from the groove [A] of the Connecting Harness Cover.

[1]

[3] [2]
[2]

F-4-801 [A] [1] [4]

4) Remove the Buffer Left Lower Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2] F-4-803

• 2 Protrusions [3] 7) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] from the host machine.

[3]

x4 x3

[2]

[1]
[2]
[1]

F-4-802

F-4-804

4-362
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
4-363
8) Remove the Connecting Harness Stopping Plate [1].
CAUTION:
• 2 Screws [2]
Do not hold the area inside the dotted line of the figure; otherwise the Paper Path Guide
[1] may be deformed.

x2

[2]

F-4-807
F-4-805

CAUTION:

Do not place the unit on the floor while being tilted; otherwise the [C] part may be
deformed.

[C]

F-4-806

4-363
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
4-364
9) Remove the 4 shafts [A] of the Buffer Path Unit from the 4 U-shaped grooves [B] of the host
CAUTION:
machine, and remove the Buffer Path Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2] When placing the Buffer Path Unit horizontally
Be sure to hold the frame [D] and the frame [E] of the Buffer Path Unit [1]. Be sure to
avoid the harness [2] when holding the frame [E]; otherwise the harness [2] may get
damaged.

[2]

[2]
[1]

[B]
[A]

[B]
[E]

[D]

[A]
[1]

F-4-808
[1]

F-4-809

4-364
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
 4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
4-365
10) Remove the Delivery Outlet Upper Guide [1]. 12) Remove the Buffer Mounting Plate (Front) [1] and the Buffer Mounting Plate (Rear) [2].
• 1 Screw [2] • 4 Screws [3]
• 3 Hooks [3]

[3]
x4

[3]

[1]
[1]
[2] [3]

[2]
F-4-812
F-4-810
11) Remove the Cover Support Plate (Front) [1] and the Cover Support Plate (Rear) [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
• 2 Hooks [4]

[1]

x2

x2
[4]

[2] [3]
F-4-811

4-365
4
Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Options > Removing the Buffer Path Unit > Procedure
5 Adjustment
■
■Overview
■
■When replacing parts
■
■When clearing RAM

5
Adjustment
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller
5-2

Overview When replacing parts

In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are
mentioned. Parts to be replaced are categorized into 5 blocks based on their related Main Controller
technology as shown below.
HDD
Main Controller System HDD (Refer to page 5-2)
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the HDD."
Main Controller PCB 1 (Refer to page 5-4)
the Parts
Main Controller PCB 2 (Refer to page 5-4)
DC Controller PCB (Refer to page 5-5)
TPM PCB (Refer to page 5-5)
Laser Exposure System Laser Scanner Unit (Refer to page 5-5)
Image Formation System Primary Charging Wire (Refer to page 5-6)
Grid Plate (Refer to page 5-6)
Primary Charging Assembly (Refer to page 5-6)
Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Wire (Refer to page 5-7)
Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Assembly (Refer to page 5-7)
Drum Unit (Refer to page 5-7)
Developing Assembly (Refer to page 5-8)
Potential Sensor (Refer to page 5-8)
ITB Cleaning Blade Unit (Refer to page 5-11)
ITB (Refer to page 5-13)
Primary Transfer Roller (Refer to page 5-13)
Patch Sensor Unit (Refer to page 5-13)
Fixing System Fixing assembly (Refer to page 5-14)
Fixing Film Unit (Refer to page 5-14)
Fixing Pressure Roller Unit (Refer to page 5-14)
Fixing Heat Soaking Roller (Refer to page 5-14)
Fixing Web (Refer to page 5-14)
T-5-1

5-2
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller
5-3
Before 1) Backup of data Aftter 1) Format the HDD.
Replacing Remote UI Replacement 1-1) Start the machine in safe mode (turn ON the main power switch while
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up simultaneously pressing 2+8 keys).
Target data: 1-2) Execute Formatting All Partitions using SST.
• Mail Box 2) Download the system software
• Memory RX Inbox 2-1) Download the system software (system/LANG/RUI, etc.) using SST.
• Confidential Fax Inbox 3) Initialize the key/certificate/CA certificate.
• Advanced Box (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
• Form for Composition 4)Turn OFF and then ON the power
*Cannot back up Advanced Box data to the SMB server when an optional HDD 5) Restore the backup data.
(except 160 GB) is installed. 5-1) Backup of data
2)Export of settings Remote UI
Remote UI Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Restore
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Export 5-2) Export of settings
Target data: Remote UI
• Settings/Registration Basic Information Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import
• Paper Type Management Settings 5-3) Backup of MEAP
• Forwarding Settings SST(Meapback)
• Box Settings 5-4) TPM
• Department ID Management Settings TPM setup
• Main Menu Settings Backup data of the TPM key can be used only when replacing the TPM PCB.
• Web Access Settings When replacing the HDD, perform backup with TPM [ON] again.
• Favorite Settings 5-5) Service mode setting values (DC-CON)
• Address Book Since the backup data cannot be saved to a location outside of the device, it is
• User Access Control for Advanced Box recommended to perform backup again after replacing the HDD.
• Quick Menu Settings When the DC Controller PCB needs to be replaced, in order to update the data
• MEAP Application Setting Information to the latest one, perform backup again immediately before replacing the PCB.
• User Setting Information 5-6) Service mode setting values (R-CON)
• iW Function Flow Settings Since the backup data cannot be saved to a location outside of the device, it is
• Service Mode Settings recommended to perform backup again after replacing the HDD.
*When exporting "Service Mode Settings", select Copier > Option > USER > When the Reader Controller PCB needs to be replaced, in order to update the
SMD-EXPT > 1. data to the latest one, perform backup again immediately before replacing the
SMD-EXPT cannot be exported, therefore the settings need to be made every PCB.
time the HDD is replaced. 6) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added
3)Backup of MEAP by the user, ask the user to execute regeneration.
Target data: 7) Execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust). Settings/Registration mode:
SST(Meapback) Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
• MEAP application(SMS)
• User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication
user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
*Meapback.bin can be restored after replacement or initialization of the HDD.
[CAUTION]
When the following service mode is executed, Meapback.bin cannot be
restored.
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > CHK-TYPE > 7
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR
4) TPM
Check User TMP back up.

5-3
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller > Main controller PCB 2
5-4
When using 1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value ■■Main controller PCB 2
the Card of the leading card which is used for Department ID.
Reader and Then, press “OK” button. (e.g.: If No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the Main Controller PCB 2."
imageWARE Department ID, enter “1” of the leading card.) the Parts
Accounting 2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following Before Be sure to gain agreement from the user in advance to execute the following work.
Manager operations from Settings/Registration mode. Replacement 1)»Backup the Settings/Registration data
• In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory
Page Totals, be sure that “ID00000001” to “ID00001000” are created. device or an HDD from download mode.
• Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings>IP * However, if the HDD Encryption Board is installed, backup to an HDD is not
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask possible. It is therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory
• In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information device.
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Operation method:
Then, turn OFF and ON the main power switch. COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
If “System Manager ID” and “System PIN” are not registered, “card registration then,
to device” cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting Download Menu > Backup > SRAM(HDD/USB)
operation. Note:
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body Download Menu is not intended for the "Settings/Registration > Paper Type
again. Management Settings".
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User You need back up from:
Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only Remote UI
the downloaded card ID is displayed. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Export
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. At replacement Replace the part from the old PCB to the new PCB.
Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE • Option SDRAMs
Accounting Manager is collected. • Bypass PCB
Points to Note when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the • Memory PCB
HDD which was installed the system software of the other machine (different serial
Aftter 1. Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2.
number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation.
Replacement 1) While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
2) The restore of backup data:
Points to note Use of an HDD in which the system software of another machine (a machine of a
When Download Menu is displayed, connect USB memory to the main body.
when using different serial number) is installed for a troubleshooting is possible if it is an HDD
Download Menu 2 > Restore
an HDD with of a model of iR-ADV C5255 series and later. However, be sure to format it after
3) Specify and register the data again.
system software installing it. Operation is not guaranteed if it is continued to be used as is.
Import from:
already installed In addition, an HDD used in iR-ADV C5255 series and later cannot be accessed
Remote UI
from a PC due to enhanced security.
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import
T-5-2
4) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added
by the user, ask the user to execute reinstallation.
■■Main controller PCB 1
Points to Note If mismatch between the box management information included in the SRAM
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the Main Controller PCB 1." data and box data on the HDD occurs, which is caused by starting the machine
the Parts normally without restoring SRAM data after replacing the Main Controller 2 PCB,
Operation at Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB the box management information is initialized. As a result, box documents on the
Replacement • Flash PCB HDD are deleted.
• TPM PCB Therefore, be sure to back up the box documents on remote UI.
Restrictions Do not transfer the following parts to another machine (a machine of a different
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is serial number).
replaced. The machine will not start up normally, and may become unrecoverable in some
T-5-3 cases.
• Main Controller PCB 2 (with the Memory PCB unremoved)
• Memory PCB
T-5-4

5-4
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Main Controller > Main controller PCB 2
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Laser Exposure System > Laser Scanner Unit
5-5
■■DC controller PCB Laser Exposure System
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the DC Controller PCB."
the Parts ■■Laser Scanner Unit
Before Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Laser Scanner Unit."
Replacing COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2) replacement
“ACTIVE” is displayed and then “OK!” is displayed about 2 minutes later. Procedure of 1) Execute the initial position adjustment of the Skew Correction Motor.
Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete. adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER > LD-ADJ-Y/M/C)
Aftter Replacing Restoration of DC Controller PCB SRAM 2) Execute the color displacement correction.■
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES (LEVEL2) (Additional Functions (Setup/Register) > Adjustment/Maintenance > Image
“ACTIVE” is displayed at execution and then “OK!” is displayed about 2 minutes Adjustment > Color Displacement Correction)
later. Restoration is complete.
T-5-7
Prohibited • When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use
Operation the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine.
T-5-5

■■TPM PCB
How to Replace see Chapter 2, "TPM PCB."
the Parts
* Be sure to perform the installation work by referring to the procedure above. T-5-6

5-5
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Laser Exposure System > Laser Scanner Unit
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
5-6
Image Formation System Procedure of 3) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (in the case of dark image at the front
adjustment side on the test print).
■■Primary Charging Wire
NOTE :
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Replacing the Primary Charging Wire." • In the case of dark image at the front side of the test print [1],
replacement execute step 3-1) through 3-3) below until the density gets even.
Procedure of 1) Execute cleaning of the Charging Wire. Then, if there is no density unevenness, execute the work in
adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX) step 5) and later.
2) Execute the potential control.■ • Turning the adjustment screw counterclockwise moves down the
(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC) Charging Wire (the gap between the grid and the charging wire
T-5-8 gets narrower), resulting in lighter output image density. Turning
the adjustment screw clockwise moves up the Charging Wire
■■Grid Plate (the gap between the grid and the charging wire gets wider),
resulting in darker output image density.
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Grid Plate."
replacement
Procedure of 1) Execute cleaning of the Charging Wire.
adjustment (COPIERER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIR E-EX) [A]

2) Execute the Potential Control.■ [B]

(COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC)
T-5-9

■■Primary Charging Assembly

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly."
replacement
Procedure of 1) Output the Bk halftone image in Service Mode.■
adjustment (TEST > PG > TYPE: 5)■
(TEST > PG > COLOR-Y/M/C: 0)■
(TEST > PG > COLOR-K: 1)
2) In the case of density difference between the front and the rear on the test
print image with the dark image on the front side of the test print, go to step
3-1) to make adjustments. With the dark image on the rear side of the test
print, go to step 4-1) to make adjustments. If there is no density unevenness,
execute the work in step 5) and later.

3-1) Turn the plastic screw [A] counterclockwise to make a full round. Refer to
the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
Primary Charging Assembly to the Host Machine, and then output the test
print to check the image.
3-2) If the image at the front side of test print image is still dark, turn the
plastic screw [A] counterclockwise to make another full round. Refer to the
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
Primary Charging Assembly to the Host Machine, and then output the test
print to check the image.
3-3) If the image at the front side of the test print is still dark, turn the plastic
screw [B] clockwise to make a half round. Refer to the replacement
procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the Primary Charging
Assembly to the Host Machine, and then output the test print to check the
image.

5-6
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Drum Unit
5-7
Procedure of 4) Adjust the Primary Charging Assembly (in the case of dark image at the rear Procedure of 5) Execute cleaning of the Charging wire in Service Mode (FUNCTION >
adjustment side on the test print). adjustment CLAENING > WIRE-CLN) Duration: approx. 30 sec.
6) Execute the potential control in Service Mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
NOTE : > DPC) Duration: approx. 30 sec.
• In the case of dark image at the rear side of the test print [2], 7) Execute the density unevenness correction in User Mode■
execute step 4-1) through 4-3) below until the density gets even. Execute Density Unevenness Correction ([Setting/Register)] > [Adjustment/
Then, if there is no density unevenness, execute the work in Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Correct shading])
step 5) and later. T-5-10
• Turning the adjustment screw counterclockwise moves down the
Charging Wire (the gap between the grid and the charging wire ■■Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Wire
gets narrower), resulting in lighter output image density. Turning Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire."
the adjustment screw clockwise moves up the Charging Wire replacement
(the gap between the grid and the charging wire gets wider),
Procedure of 1) Execute cleaning of the Charging Wire.
resulting in darker output image density.
adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX)
T-5-11

[A] ■■Pre-Primary Transfer Charging Assembly

[B] Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly."
replacement
Procedure of 1) Execute cleaning of the Charging Wire.
adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX)
T-5-12

■■Drum Unit
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Drum (Bk)."
replacement see Chapter 4, "Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the
Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)."
Procedure of 1) Disable (OFF) the warm-up rotation. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-
adjustment OFF)
2) Turn OFF the main power switch. (Replace the Drum.)
3) Turn ON the main power switch.
4) Forcible execution of Drum replacement mode
(COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DRMRSETY/M/C/K)
5) Enable (ON) the warm-up rotation. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-
OFF)
4-1) Turn the plastic screw [B] counterclockwise to make a full round. Refer to
T-5-13
the replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
Primary Charging Assembly to the Host Machine, and then output the test
print to check the image.
4-2) If the image at the rear side of the test print is still dark, turn the plastic
screw [B] counterclockwise to make another full round. Refer to the
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the
Primary Charging Assembly to the Host Machine, and then output the test
print to check the image.
4-3) If the image at the rear side of the test print is still dark, turn the plastic
screw [A] clockwise to make a half turn. Refer to the replacement procedure
of the Primary Charging Assembly to install the Primary Charging Assembly
to the Host Machine, and then output the test print to check the image.

5-7
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Drum Unit
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor
5-8
■■Developing Assembly ■■Potential Sensor
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Developing Assembly (Bk)." Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit (including Potential
replacement see Chapter 4, "Separating the Developing Assembly (Y)/(M)/(C) from the replacement Sensor and Potential Control PCB)."
Drum Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)." Procedure of 1) Install the Primary Charging Rail [1] with the Potential Sensor removed to
Procedure of 1) Turn OFF the warm-up rotation control adjustment the host machine.
adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF) • 1 Screw [2]
2) Turn OFF the main unit.
3) Install the Developing Assembly with Drum Unit. [2]
4) Turn ON the main unit.
5) When machine comes to ready status, execute the initial settings mode of
the Developing Assembly.
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y/M/C/K/4)
6) Execution of setting of toner density
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TD-AD-Y/M/C/K/4C)
7) Refresh the screen and ensure that the warm-up rotation control is set back
to 0. [1]
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>AINR-OFF)
8) Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust
Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation F-5-1

NOTE:
NOTE: When installing, insert the Primary Charging Rail [1] at the angle
If installing multiple Developing Assemblies, execute this procedure as shown in the figure, and then insert the 2 bosses [2] in the boss
for each Developing Assembly installed. If installing all four (4) holes [3] of the host machine.
Developing Assemblies, use INISET-4 and TD-AD-4C.

[1]

[2]

T-5-14 [3]

[2]

F-5-2

2) Install the ITB Unit to the host machine.

NOTE:
Purpose to remove the ITB Unit in this procedure is to prevent the
ITB from a damage caused by dropping a part.

T-5-15

5-8
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor
5-9
Procedure of 3) Connect a new cable [3] to the connector [2] of a new Potential Sensor [1]. Procedure of 6) Pass the harness [1] of the Primary Charging Rail and the electrode for
adjustment 4) Install the Potential Sensor [1] to the 2 pin electrodes [4] for checking the adjustment checking the Potential Sensor from the Edge Saddle [2] of the Right Side
Potential Sensor. Plate of the host machine, and connect the 5 Wire Saddles [3] and the 2
• 1 Connector [2] connectors [4].
• 1 Screw [5]

CAUTION:
x2 [3] [4]
Secure the screw firmly so that the Potential Sensor is not
removed.
x5

[1]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]

[3]
7) Place the electrode [1] for checking the Potential Sensor on the Process Unit
Inner Cover [2], and use the Electrode Clip [3] to pinch the plate of the hinge
to ground.

[4] CAUTION:
[4] [2]
Be careful not to drop the electrode for checking the Potential
Sensor.

5) Install a new Potential Control PCB [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
• 5 PCB Supports [4]

[4]

[3]
[1]
[1]
[2] [2]
[4] [3]

T-5-17

T-5-16

5-9
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor
5-10
Procedure of 8) Close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit. Procedure of 13) Press [OK] on the indicator and the display changes from [ACTIVE] to [OK!].
adjustment adjustment Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter

CAUTION: < DPC > <　1/ 2　> <WAITING > <LEVEL 1 > < DPC > <　1/ 2　> <READY > <LEVEL 1 >

DPC DPC

Be careful not to trap the cable. OFST ACTIVE OFST OK!

DRM-RSET DRM-RSET
OFST-Y OFST-Y
OFST-M OFST-M
OFST-C OFST-C
9) Turn ON the main power switch. DRMRSETY DRMRSETY
10) Disable the warm-up rotation in service mode immediately after turning ON DRMRSETM DRMRSETM
the main power switch. OK

Set the service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF to 1.
F-5-3

11) Use a dedicated tool [1] to deactivate the Front Door Switch. 14) Enable the warm-up rotation in the service mode.
Set the service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > AINR-OFF to 0.

15) Turn OFF the main power switch.

16) Install a new Potential Sensor [1] to the Primary Charging Rail.
• 1 Harness [2]
• 2 Wire Saddles [3]
• 2 Harness Guides [4]
• 1 Screw [5]
17) Install a new Potential Sensor Protection Sheet [6].

[1]

[2]
12) When the screen [A] displays [READY] in the service mode, adjust the
Potential Sensor. [1] [6]
Service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST
[4]
Display I/O Adjust Function Option Test Counter
x4
< DPC > <　1/ 2　> <READY > <LEVEL 1 >

DPC
[5]
OFST
DRM-RSET
[3]
OFST-Y
F-5-4
OFST-M
OFST-C T-5-19
DRMRSETY
DRMRSETM

OK

T-5-18

5-10
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Potential Sensor
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
5-11
Procedure of ■■ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
adjustment CAUTION:
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit."
When installing, remove the release paper, and align the Potential replacement
Sensor Protection Sheet with the marking line [A] to affix it (be sure CAUTION:
that the gap [B] between the marking line and the release paper is
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Unit, ITB, Primary Transfer Roller,
less than 0.5 mm).
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller, etc. is accompanied by removal of
the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit, so be sure to see this procedure and
make an adjustment "After Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit".
1

Procedure of 1) After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit, apply lubricant [1]
adjustment (FY9-6007-000) to the application area [A] on the ITB surface in the
longitudinal direction [B] (1 reciprocation).
[B] (Execute this step without the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit being installed.)
[A]
F-5-5 CAUTION:

Target application area is to be the area surrounded by the

18) Install the Primary Charging Rail to the host machine. application width as shown below.
19) Install the removed parts in reverse order.
• Application area■
T-5-20
Application width in the longitudinal direction [B] is shorter than
the width of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2].■
Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the Primary
Transfer Roller (Y) [2] width.
• Target: Between the point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit
Rear Plate [3] and the point approx. 35 mm inside the ITB Unit
Front Plate [4].■
The application width in the belt's rotation direction is between
the Primary Transfer Roller (Y) [2] and the ITB Driver Roller [5].■
Target: Between the point of the Primary Transfer Roller (Y)
[2] Shaft Support (Front/Rear) Cover edge [C] and the point
approx. 45 mm below the edge.

T-5-21

5-11
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
5-12
Procedure of Procedure of 2) Rotate the ITB Drive Motor [1] with hand counterclockwise, and then rotate
adjustment CAUTION: adjustment the ITB until the lubricant [2] applied to the ITB is hidden in the Scoop-up
Sheet [3] of the ITB Cleaning Unit.■
Points to Note when Applying Lubricant (FY9-6007-000) [1] (The applied lubricant [2] passes through the Scoop-up Sheet [3] of the ITB
• Be careful not to apply lubricant to the outside of the application Cleaning Unit.)
width in the longitudinal direction [B].
CAUTION:
• When lubricant [1] is applied outside the application area, be
Be sure to turn the ITB Drive Motor [1] counterclockwise only and
sure to wipe with lint-free paper.
be careful not to turn it clockwise.

approx 35mm

[3] [4]
[2]
[B]
[2]

[C] [C]

[3]

[1]

approx 45mm [5] [1] [A] approx 45mm 3) Install the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit to the ITB Unit.

T-5-23
T-5-22

5-12
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > ITB Cleaning Blade Unit
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Patch Sensor Unit
5-13
■■ITB ■■Patch Sensor Unit
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the ITB Unit." Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Patch Sensor Unit."
replacement replacement
Procedure of Procedure of 1) Enter the Patch Sensor Alpha Value.
adjustment CAUTION: adjustment (COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-C)

Be sure to execute “Operation after ITB replacement” when (Enter the 4-digit number below the barcode of the Patch Image Read
releasing the ITB pressure. Sensor Unit in the following service mode: ALF-C.)

T-5-24
VoP(B):0518
■■Primary Transfer Roller VoS(B):0352
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Primary Transfer Roller." VoP(A):0978
replacement
Procedure of 1) Execute the Primary Transfer ATVC. *1/1468*
adjustment (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P> 1ATVC-EX)
T-5-25 ALF-C

F-5-6
2) Adjust the Patch Sensor Light Intensity. ■
(COPIER > FUNCTION >MISC-P > PT-LPADJ)
T-5-26

5-13
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Patch Sensor Unit
 5 Adjustment > When replacing parts > Fixing System > Fixing Web Unit
5-14
Fixing System ■■Fixing Pressure Roller Unit
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller Unit."
■■Fixing assembly replacement
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Unit." Procedure of 1) Clear the counter.
replacement adjustment COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-L (Lv1)
Procedure of 1) Clear the counter.
adjustment COPIER > COUNTER > FIXING > FX-CNT (Lv1) NOTE:
When the foregoing counter clear is executed, the following item is
NOTE: cleared.
• COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > FX-L-TM1~8 (Lv2)
When the foregoing counter clear is executed, the following item is
cleared.
• COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> KIN-HP T-5-29
• COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> CORE-DST
• COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> RCPR-HP ■■Fixing Heat Soaking Roller
• COPIER> DISPLAY> FIXING> PRS-HP Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Heat Soaking Roller/Bearing."
replacement
Procedure of 1) Clear the counter.
• COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-BLT-U (Lv1)
adjustment COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UH-RL (Lv1)
• COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-L (Lv1)
• COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-UH-RL (Lv1)
• COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> FX-WEB (Lv1)
NOTE:
When the foregoing counter clear is executed, the following item is
T-5-27
cleared.
■■Fixing Film Unit • COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > KIN-TM1~8 (Lv2)

Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Removing the Fixing Film Unit." T-5-30
replacement
Procedure of 1) Clear the counter. ■■Fixing Web Unit
adjustment COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U (Lv1)
Procedure of parts see Chapter 4, "Replacing the Fixing Web."
replacement
NOTE:
Procedure of 1) Clear the counter.
When the foregoing counter clear is executed, the following item is
adjustment • COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB1~4 (Lv1)
cleared.
• COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > FX-WEB (Lv1)
• COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > BLT-TM1~8(Lv2)
• COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > BLT2-TM1~8(Lv2) T-5-31

• COPIER > DISPLAY > FIXING > BLT-TM(Lv2)

T-5-28

5-14
5
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Fixing System > Fixing Web Unit
 5 Adjustment > When clearing RAM > DC controller PCB
5-15

When clearing RAM

DC controller PCB
How to Replace see Chapter 4, "Removing the DC Controller PCB."
the Parts
Before Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Replacing COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2)
“ACTIVE” is displayed and then “OK!” is displayed about 2 minutes later.
Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
Aftter Replacing Restoration of DC Controller PCB SRAM
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES (LEVEL2)
“ACTIVE” is displayed at execution and then “OK!” is displayed about 2 minutes
later. Restoration is complete.
Prohibited • When replacing the DC Controller PCB, be sure to use a new one. Do not use
Operation the DC Controller PCB which was used with another machine.
T-5-32

5-15
5
Adjustment > When clearing RAM > DC controller PCB
6 Troubleshooting
■
■Making
■
■Test
Initial Checks
Print
■
■Image Faults
■
■Error Code
■
■Alarm Code
■
■Startup System Failure Diagnosis
■
■Controller Self Diagnosis
■
■Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs
■
■Debug log
■
■Network Packet Capture
■
■Version upgrade

6
Troubleshooting
 6 Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
6-2

Making Initial Checks

List of Initial Check Items

Item No. Detail Check
Site Environment 1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%).
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near
a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold
place. The machine is not near a source of fire or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise,
provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine
level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power
outlet.
Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the
Placement of Paper paper is not in excess of a specific level.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed
in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
Checking the 11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end
Durables of its life.
Checking the 12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically
Periodically replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached the
Replaced Parts time of replacement.
T-6-1

6-2
6
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
 6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > Selecting Test Print TYPE
6-3

Test Print

Overview
This machine has several test print types shown in the table below. A circle in each image check item shows the availability to check the different type of image faults. If the faulty image shown in
the output does not appear in the appropriate test print type, the cause may lie in PDL input or the reader

Items
Uneven
PG TYPE TYPE Pattern Transfer Uneven Density at Color Straight Originator
Gradation Fogging Black line White line Right Angle
Fault Density the Front / displacement Lines
Rear
0 Normal copy / print ----
1 to 3 (For R&D) ----
4 16-Gradation Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB
5 Full Area Half Tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB
6 Grid Yes Yes Main controller PCB
10 MCYBk Horizontal Line Yes Yes Main controller PCB
12 64-Gradation Yes Main controller PCB
14 Full Color 16-gradation Yes Yes Main controller PCB
T-6-2

Selecting Test Print TYPE

1) Set the copy count, paper size, and pickup mode (single-sided or double-sided).
2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > TEST > PG.
3) Make the following selections: COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE.
4) Enter the appropriate TYPE No. using the keypad, and press the OK key.
5) Set the density using DENS-K (valid only if TYPE=5).
6) Set the image mode by TXPH
7) Press the start key.

6-3
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Selecting Test Print TYPE
 6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)
6-4

How to check test print ■ Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)

This test print can mainly check transfer failure, black line, white line, and pitch unevenness.
■ 16-Gradation (TYPE=4)
This test print can mainly check gradation performance, image fogging, white line, and density
unevenness at the rear/front.

16-Gradation

COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
F-6-2

F-6-1
NOTE:
・ Output by every developing color is available by specifying the developing color COLOR-Y/
(1) Gradation M/C/K in the following service mode: COPIER>TEST>PG
If there is no 16-step density gradation, it may be caused by fault of drum unit or laser ・ In the case of changing density of the test print, execute followings in service mode for
scanning system. density setting: TEST>PG>DENS-Y/M/C/K
(2) Foggy image
If there is foggy image only at the white area as shown in the figure below, it may be
caused by fault of drum unit or laser scanning system. (1) Transfer failure
(3) Vertical white/black line If there is transfer failure, it may be caused by fault of transfer (intermediate transfer/
If there is white line in the image, it may be caused by fault of developing system. secondary transfer) unit.
(4) Density unevenness at the rear/front (2) Horizontal unevenness
If there is density unevenness at the rear/front, it may be caused by fault of drum unit, If there is horizontal unevenness, it may be caused by fault of photosensitive drum drive
laser scanning system or transfer unit. unit, drum ITB motor, or drum unit.
(3) Vertical unevenness
If there is vertical unevenness, it may be caused by soiled LDE lens, fault of drum unit, or
deterioration of intermediate transfer belt.

6-4
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)
 6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)
6-5
■ Grid (TYPE=6) ■ MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)
This test print can mainly check color displacement, right angle accuracy and linearity. This test print can mainly check the dark area density of each color, balance among each
color and white line by developing.

F-6-3

(1) Color displacement

If there is color displacement, it may be caused by fault of each laser scanning system,
transfer (intermediate transfer/secondary transfer) unit or photosensitive drum drive unit.
(2) Right angle accuracy and linearity
F-6-4
If there is fault of right angle accuracy or linearity, it may be caused by fault of laser (1) Solid density of each color and balance among each color.
scanning system, or defective shape of registration (upper/lower) roller or the secondary ・ Density is not extremely light.
transfer outer roller. ・ In the case of light density with a certain color, it may be caused by the developer of the
color in question, or fault of primary transfer roller, laser scanning system or high voltage
system.
(2) White/black line
If there is white/black line with a certain color, it may be caused by fault of the drum unit
of the color in question, or soiled laser light path.
(3) Density unevenness at the rear/front
If there is density unevenness with a certain color, it may be caused by fault of drum unit,
laser scanning system or transfer (intermediate transfer/secondary transfer) unit.
If there is density unevenness with all colors, it may be caused by deterioration of
intermediate transfer unit.

6-5
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)
 6 Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)
6-6
■ 64-Gradation (TYPE=12) ■ Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)
YMCBk64 gradation test print can mainly check gradation performance of each color (YMBCk) Full color 16-gradation test print can mainly check gray balance, gradation performance of
at one time. each color (YMCBk) and foggy image.

Light Areas

White Area White Area

F-6-5 F-6-6

(1) Gray balance

Check to see if the output comes with even density of each color at gray scale area.
(2) Gradation performance
Check gradation performance and density difference of each color (YMCBk)
(3) Foggy image
If there is foggy image at the white area, it may be caused by fault of developing system
or photosensitive drum, or correction fault of laser scanning system.

6-6
6
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to check test print > Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)
 6 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Developing Sleeve Ghost
6-7

Image Faults 6) Adjust the upper limit of the density correction of the Toner Density Sensor for the color
with which the phenomenon occurs.
Select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PT* (corresponding color) (Level 2), and set the
Developing Sleeve Ghost setting value to “-1”. (Default: 0)

[Location of Failure]
7) Execute step 3 through 5.
Developing Sleeve
If the phenomenon is disappeared, finish the work.
If the phenomenon is not disappeared, select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PT*
[Cause]
(corresponding color) (Level 2) and set the setting value to “-2”. Then execute step 2 through 5.
It is caused by increase of the low tribo toner adhered on the Sleeve due to low transition of
If the phenomenon still appears, execute step 8.
toner charge (tribo).

8) Select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-* / HLMT-PT* (corresponding color) (Level 2),
[Occurrence Condition]
and return the setting value to the default “0”. Then, replace the Developing Assembly.
At end of life of the Developer

NOTE:
[Field Remedy] To make the T/D ration in the Developing Assembly to the set value, the toner should
Solve the phenomenon by reducing the T/D ratio in the Developing Assembly with service be consumed; therefore, it is required to execute step 3..
mode.
1) Adjust the target value of ATR patch density for the color with which the phenomenon
occurs. [Points to Note about Field Remedy]
Select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-* (corresponding color) (Level 2), and set the As the setting value of COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-*/HLMT-PT* become smaller,
setting value to “-1”. (Default: 0) carrier adhesion tends to be occurred (A phenomenon that carrier is developed.)

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

3) Print 50-sheet of image with 10% image ratio for 4 times. (e.g, COPIER > TEST > PG >
TYPE: “16”, COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-* (corresponding color): “1”)

4) Execute the Full Adjust by selecting Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >

Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust.

5) Print the original with which the phenomenon occurred, and check if the phenomenon is
disappeared.
If the phenomenon is disappeared, finish the work.
If the phenomenon is not disappeared, select COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > P-TG-*
(corresponding color) (Level 2) and set the setting value to “-2”. Then execute step 2 through 5.
If the phenomenon still appears, execute step 6 and later steps.

6-7
6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Developing Sleeve Ghost
 6 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due to the soiled Charging Roller
6-8
[Sample Image]
Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due to the
soiled Charging Roller
[Location of Failure]
Soiled Charging Roller

[Cause]
Soiled Charging Roller caused by degradation of cleaning performance due to durability of
the Cleaning Roller.

[Occurrence Condition]
At end of life of the Drum Unit

[Field Remedy]
1) Replace the Drum Unit for the corresponding color with which the uneven vertical lines
occur.

[Points to Note about Field Remedy]

None.

[Sample Image]
F-6-7

F-6-8

6-8
6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven vertical lines on a halftone image due to the soiled Charging Roller
 6 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly
6-9
Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly [Sample Image]

[Location of Failure]
Developing Assembly (Toner Blocking Plastic Film)

[Cause]
Due to dropping the toner accumulated on the Developing Assembly Upper Cover (the Toner
Blocking Plastic Film) onto the drum.

[Occurrence Condition]
It tends to occur with the following conditions: a high temperature/high humidity environment,
and high average image Duty.

[Field Remedy]
1) Clean inside of the Toner Blocking Plastic Film in the Developing Assembly with lint-free
paper.

[Points to Note about Field Remedy]

• Be sure not to touch the surface of the Sleeve when cleaning.
• Be careful not to leave toner on the urethane sheet. F-6-10

Toner Blocking Plastic Film

Surface Of The Sleeve

F-6-9

6-9
6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Toner Drops in the Developing Assembly
 6 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side of coated paper
6-10
Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side of NOTE:
coated paper 1. The setting of “Tail End White Patch Correction” can be changed only for the paper
that is duplicated and then registered.
[Location of Failure] 2. With “Tail End White Patch Correction”, the Secondary Transfer bias is adjusted.
Changing the value in a positive direction: increase the Secondary Transfer bias
Secondary Transfer Assembly Changing the value in a negative direction: decrease the Secondary Transfer bias

[Cause]
It is due to the occurrence of gap voltage between the ITB and a paper at the Secondary [Points to Note about Field Remedy]
Transfer nip due to upward curl on the trailing edge of the 2nd side. None.

[Occurrence Condition] [Sample Image]

At duplex printing with coated paper from the Multi-purpose Tray

[Field Remedy]
1. Ask user to use papers to which “curl straightening” is performed. (For the details, refer to
the Users Manual).
[For curled papers, be sure to flatten them before use. (Degree of curl: paper: 10mm or less,
heavy paper: 5mm or less) Paper may not be fed depending on the paper quality.]
If the phenomenon still occurs, execute the following.

2. Adjust the Secondary Transfer bias by selecting User Mode > Tail End White Patch
Correction.
1)Select COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> IMAC-ADJ, and set the item to “1”.

2)Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management
Settings, and select the corresponding paper (with which the phenomenon occurred).

NOTE:
To select “Paper Type Management Settings”, it is required to login to “System
Management Mode”.
F-6-11

3)Select Details/ Edit > Tail End White Patch Correction > Back Side.
Correction level: increase the value in stages until the white patch disappeared.
Degree of correction: enter the range where the white patch occurs. (Distance from the
trailing edge: mm)

6-10
6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Transfer failure on the trailing edge of the 2nd side of coated paper
 6 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Calibration for color difference on front and back sides
6-11
Calibration for color difference on front and back sides CAUTION:
When significant color difference appears between the scanned images by Front Side • Make sure to place the correction chart in the indicated direction in step 4) and 5).
Scanner Unit and by the Back Side Scanner Unit, execute the adjustment.
• If placing it in a wrong direction, “NG!” is displayed in each service mode and retry is
required.
NOTE:
This adjustment is only effective for the models that are equipped with the 2 Scanner
Units (inside the Reader and inside the DADF).

NOTE:
Even though the correction chart is placed correctly in step 4) and 5), “NG!” may be
1) Check that A4 paper (plain) is set to the deck or the cassette. displayed. So repeat the steps several times.

2) Output a correction chart from (Lv.1) COPIER > TEST > PG.
<Setting>
TXPH=1 (low screen ruling), THRU=0 (Pascal gamma applied), TYPE=58 4) Place the outputted correction chart on the Original Pickup Tray with face-up, select the
following item and press OK key.
NOTE: • 1PSCLB_A (Execution of DADF 2-sides color difference correction (front side))
Before outputting a correction chart, it is recommended to print out the documents with
high screen ruling to stabilize the engine.
CAUTION:

Make sure to place the correction chart with the printed side facing-up and also the
corner blue patch is positioned in the front left.
3) Display the screen of (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R and specify the reference
side in the following item.
• 1PCLBSET (Setting of the reference side for DADF 2-sides color difference correction)
<Setting value>
0: None (default), 1: Adjust the back side to the front, 2: Adjust the front side to the back

CAUTION:

• It is not possible to execute the adjustment when “0” is specified in this setting.
• If adjustment is not made, be sure to set this item to "0".

F-6-12

NOTE:
When exiting the MISC-R screen during scanning, the scanned value is cleared.

6-11
6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Calibration for color difference on front and back sides
 6 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Calibration for color difference on front and back sides
6-12
5) Place the outputted correction chart on the Original Pickup Tray with face-down, select the 7) Depending on the correction result, execute the step a to c as necessary.
following item and press OK key. a. When resetting the correction result.
• 1PSCLB_B (Execution of DADF 2-sided color difference correction (back side)) Specify “0” in the following item and turn OFF/ON the power.
• 1PCLBSET (Setting of reference side for DADF 2-sides color difference correction)
CAUTION:

Make sure to place the correction chart with the printed side facing-down and also the b. If the color that was not displaced before correction is displaced and wants to correct.
corner blue patch is positioned in the rear left. Specify “1” in the following item and return to the step 3).
• 1PCLBUDR (Setting of DADF 2-sides color correction lower limit level)
<Setting value>
0: OFF (default), 1: ON

c. If there is a color that is extremely displaced after correction.

Specify “1” or “2” in the following item and return to the step 3).
• 1PCLBOVR (Setting of DADF 2-sides color correction upper limit level)
<Setting value>
0: No control amount (default), 1: Control amount low, 2: Control amount high

F-6-13

NOTE:
When exiting the MISC-R screen during scanning, the scanned value is cleared and
processing will be canceled.

6) Make sure that “OK!” is displayed on 1PSCLB_A & 1PSCLB_B and turn OFF/ON the
power.

6-12
6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Calibration for color difference on front and back sides
 6 Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Vertical Lines
6-13
Vertical Lines NOTE: Cleaning the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet
If dust larger than 1mm adheres on the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet, it may block
1. Analysis Case
the light path.
Because dust is more likely to adhere to near the sheet affixed to cover the light source
a. Cause of the Scanner Unit, inspect visually and remove the dust.
Dust is adhered on the following places. Predict the location of dust from the location of vertical lines on the copied image.
- Reader
• Copyboard Glass/Stream Reading Glass/Reading Glass
• Standard White Plate
• Turndown Mirror
• Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet

b. Field Remedy
• Clean the Copyboard Glass/Stream Reading Glass/Reading Glass.
Scanner Unit
Reflection Light
• Clean the Standard White Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. Inlet

F-6-14

• Dry wipe the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet with lint-free paper. - DADF
If dust is not removed even cleaning the Scanner Unit Reflection Light Inlet with lint-free
paper, remove the dust with tweezers.

• Clean the Turndown Mirror.

Scanner Unit
Reflection Light
Inlet

F-6-15

6-13
6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Vertical Lines
 6 Troubleshooting > Error Code > E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main body
6-14

Error Code By rotating it in the reverse direction, toner clots on the Sleeve may damage the Toner
Blocking Sheet on the cylinder.

E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw

of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main
body
[Location of Failure]
Screw of color Developing Assembly (and coupling of main body)

[Cause]
Mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main
body

[Condition]
Mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main
body

[Field Remedy]
In case of E201, be sure to perform the following procedures in order to match the phase
between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main body.

1) Remove the color Developing Assembly where the error occurs and make the coupling of
the Sleeve rotate 1/4 turn in the direction of the arrow (clockwise).

Color Developing Coupling

Assembly
[Points to note about field remedy] F-6-16
Do not turn the Developing Sleeve in the reverse direction.

6-14
6
Troubleshooting > Error Code > E021-xxx due to mismatched phase between the screw of color Developing Assembly and coupling of main body
 6 Troubleshooting > Alarm Code > How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:
6-15

Alarm Code How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:

When the Lifter Plate of the Multi Deck is at the lower limit position (when the Lifter Lower
How to clear 04-3042, 04-3142 and 04-3242: Limit Sensor is ON) for some reasons, the Lifter Plate does not restore even after stopping
the lifting operation of the Lifter Plate, and turning OFF and then ON the power supply.
When the Lifter Plate of the Multi Deck is at the upper limit position (when the Lifter Upper
Move up the Lifter Plate from the lower limit position, according to the procedure shown
Limit Sensor is ON) for some reasons, the Lifter Plate does not restore even after stopping
below.
the lifting operation of the Lifter Plate, and turning OFF and then ON the power supply.
[Field Remedy]
Move down the Lifter Plate from the upper limit position, according to the procedure shown
1) Turn OFF the power supply of the main body.
below.
2) Remove the Rear Cover of the Multi Deck.
[Field Remedy]
3) While closing the receptacle where the lifter does not operate, turn the belt of the Lifter
1) Turn OFF the power supply of the main body.
Motor clockwise until the shaft of the Lifter Motor revolves 5 times.
2) Remove the Rear Cover of the Multi Deck.
The Lifter Motor is released from the lower limit position.
3) While closing the receptacle where the Lifter Plate does not operate, turn the belt of the
Lifter Motor counter-clockwise until the shaft of the Lifter Motor revolves 5 times.
The Lifter Motor is released from the upper limit position. Lifter Motor Shaft

Lifter Motor Shaft

F-6-18
4) Turn ON the power supply of the main body.
The Lifter Plate can operate now.
F-6-17
4) Turn ON the power supply of the main body.
The Lifter Plate can operate now.

6-15
6
Troubleshooting > Alarm Code > How to clear 04-3043, 04-3143 and 04-3243:
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > The viewpoint of this Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Useful Operations
6-16

Startup System Failure Diagnosis

The viewpoint of this Startup System Failure Diagnosis

The goal of the startup system failure diagnosis is to be able to solve troubles associated with
a Control Panel display failure by performing the following steps.
It is assumed that the users have already learned the following items:
• How to use a tester
• Roles of the All-night Power Supply (3.3V) and Non-all-night Power Supply (12V)
• How to back up data (HDD and Main Controller)

■■Useful Operations
The items of detailed procedure explanation start with a description of the flow diagram. The
items and procedures checked in the flow diagram are described separately in a check item
table. The flow diagram contains numbers (e.g. (1)) corresponding to the check items so that
the readers can grasp the relevant parts of the check item table.

Flow Check item list

Start

Has only
the backlight gone off? Yes
(Can you hear the operation sound
of the Hard Key?)
[Assumed failure location]
No 1. Control Panel Unit
(2) 2. 12V Connector of the Control Panel
(1) 3. Main Controller PCB1
Is 12V supplied to C1005 Yes
of the Control Panel CPU PCB?

[Assumed failure location] The location of each check item

No (3) 1. Control Panel CPU PCB
2. Main Controller PCB1 can be referenced by the
Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch (2) 3. 12V Connector of the Control Panel corresponding number in the flow
4. Control Panel Unit
diagram.

F-6-19

6-16
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > The viewpoint of this Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Useful Operations
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Startup Failure Analysis Policy
6-17
Startup Failure Analysis Policy Structure overview of each flow

Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure

Startup Failure Analysis Policy describes troubleshooting related to "Execution Flow for
Control Panel Startup Failure" for the All-night Power Supply (3.3V) and 12V Power Supply.
Flow E: Flow D:
If the host machine does not start successfully even when its Power Switch is turned ON, All-night Power Supply
12V Power Supply
identify the location of the failure by referencing the following diagram. System Flow (3.3V) System Flow
Select the appropriate failure location identification procedure based on the display status of
the Control Panel.
Warm-up rotation failed Control Panel LED activation failure
(Check the 12V Power Supply) Check the (Check the Control Panel
Preconditions Main Controllers /All-night Power Supply (3.3V))
12V power supply Check whether the
If the following two parts are not operating with the main power turned ON, it is likely that a All-night Power Supply (3.3V)
cable is trapped Control Panel
failure has occurred.
• Control Panel Main Power LED (All-night Power Supply 3.3V system)
• Rotation noise of the motor at warm-up rotation and activation of the Control Panel
Backlight (12V system) Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow
Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow
Power-On Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow
Not lit
Flow A: Flow G: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis
Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure

Lit
F-6-21

Solid black Only the bar is displayed The logo is displayed Display of E-code

Yes Procedure A:
"NG" is displayed Detailed Procedure
as a result in the startup system Refer to the error code
of Startup System
failure diagnosis correspondence table
Failure Diagnosis
for countermeasures
No
Flow A: Countermeasures related to system software
Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure - Reinstall the system.
- Replace the HDD.

F-6-20

Memo:
• It may take about 5 minutes or more to display E 602-0001.

6-17
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Startup Failure Analysis Policy
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Status Check
6-18
Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup The Control Panel does not display

Failure Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF

■■Status Check 1.Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.
2.Disconnect and then connect the two power plugs of the host machine.
If nothing is displayed on the Control Panel when the power of the host machine is turned 3.Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine.
ON, identify the location of the failure according to the flow. Yes
Does the
host machine start warm-up rotation?
●● Flow for narrowing down troubles
No Flow B : To Control Panel 12V Check Flow
If the Main Power LED is ON, the All-night Power Supply (3.3V) is being supplied.
(1) Yes
If the 12V Power Supply is activated, the Control Panel Backlight can be activated. Is the Control Panel LED
If the power-on signal (3.3V) is supplied to the 12V Power Supply, the 12V can still activate ON?
No
the Control Panel Backlight. (2)
Is the Main Controller 1 Yes
If the power-on signal is blocked, the 12V Power Supply stops supplying power.
LED9 ON?
If the Main Controller LED is momentarily activated or the fan momentarily rotates and then No Flow B : To Control Panel 12V Check Flow
stops after the Main Power SW is turned ON, the overcurrent protection may be active and (3)
Is 3.3V supplied to the Yes
stopping the supply of power.
Riser PCB C26?
Consult this flow when checking the 3.3V and 12V power supplies and identifying the location No Replace Main Controller 1
of the failure in "Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure" described below.
Flow D : To All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow

(4b)
Is 12V supplied to Yes
Main Controller 1 and
Main Controller 2?
Flow C : To Main Controller Analysis Flow
No [Check points]
(4a) 1. - Activation of Main Controller 1 LED9
(4a) - Activation of Main Controller 2 LED4
At the time of startup, (4b) 2. RISER PCB J104 pin 1 - pin 4(12V)
does the LED of Main Controller Yes
1 or 2 momentarily turn ON
or do the fans of the Main
Flow F :
Controllers rotate?
To Connector Disconnection Flow
(Model Specific)
No
Flow E : To 12V Power Supply System Flow
F-6-22

6-18
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Status Check
6-19
●● Check item Item Check item Location
(4a) Main Controller
Item Check item Location PCB1: LED9
(1) Control Panel Main Controller
LED LED9
PCB2: LED4 LED4

(2) Main Controller

PCB1: LED9
LED9 (4b) Check each
of the pin 1
through 4 (12V)
of J104 on the
Riser PCB
* e.g. 1 4 5
pin 1(12V) and J104

pin 5(GND)
J104

(3) RISER PCB

Main Controller 1
C26(3.3V) Riser PCB Main Controller 2

C26

Tester

T-6-3

6-19
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow
6-20
Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow ●● Check item
Item Check item Location
●● Control Panel 12V Check Flow (1) Control Panel
Check the 12V input to the
CPU PCB
Start C1005 (12V)
Control Panel CPU PCB
(C1005)
Has only
the backlight gone off? Yes
(Can you hear the operation sound
of the Hard Key?)
[Assumed failure location] Tester
No 1. Control Panel Unit
(2) 2. 12V Connector of the Control Panel
(1) 3. Main Controller PCB1
Is 12V supplied to C1005 Yes
of the Control Panel CPU PCB?

[Assumed failure location]

No (3) 1. Control Panel CPU PCB
2. Main Controller PCB1
(2) 3. 12V Connector of the Control Panel
(4) 4. Control Panel Unit
Is the FU2 of the No (2) Disconnect
Relay PCB disconnected? and then
connect the
Disconnect and then connect the 12V
Yes (5) 12V Power
Connector of the Control Panel
[Assumed failure location] Supply
Disconnect the following connectors: 1. Disconnect the following connectors: Connector of
(6) - J1811 of the Relay PCB - J1811 of the Relay PCB the Control
(2) - J1002 of the Control Panel CPU PCB - J1002 of the Control Panel CPU PCB Panel
2.Check the conduction of the cables
between J1811(pin 11 - pin 12) and
(6)
Check the following resistances of the J1002(pin 2 - pin 3)
cables connected to J1811 of the Relay PCB: 3. Relay PCB
- Between pins 11,14 and pins 12,13(GND)
- Between pin 11 and the chassis

No
Is any one of them 0 ohm?

Yes

[Assumed failure location] [Assumed failure location]

1. Short circuit of the cables 1. Control Panel Unit
Replace the Relay PCB after fixing Replace the Control Panel Unit and
the short circuit of the cables the Relay PCB
F-6-23
J1002 12V connector form Relay PCB

6-20
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow
6-21
Item Check item Location Item Check item Location
(3) Control Panel (5) Relay PCB
CPU PCB J1811
pin 11, pin 12
J1811

11
12
13
14
Control Panel CPU PCB
(Note that an open circuit is likely to occur when the
cable is being disconnected and then connected) Control Panel
CPU PCB
J1002
J1002
(4) Disconnect pin 2, pin 3
J1811 of the
Relay PCB
FU2 2
and check
the following 3
resistance:
Relay PCB
FU2
Normal value: Check the cables between J1811 of the Relay PCB and J1002 of the Control Panel CPU
0 ohm PCB.
1. Disconnect the connectors of J1811 and J1002.
2. Check if power is distributed between J1811 connector(pin 11, pin 12) and all the
corresponding pins of J1002 connector.(pin 2. pin 3) Normal value: 0 ohm
(6) Check the
following
resistances
of the cables
J1811
connected to
J1811 of the
Relay PCB
- Between pins
11,14 and pins
12,13(GND)
- Between pin 11
11 and the 12
13
chassis
14

T-6-4

6-21
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel 12V Check Flow
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check
6-22
Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow - Check whether the Main Controller 1 and Main Controller 2
are connected properly to the Riser PCB.
■■Status Check - Check whether the cables between the Main Controller 1
and the Control Panel are connected properly.
If the Main Controller 1 LED 9 and Main Controller 2 LED 4 cannot be turned ON, identify the
location of the failure according to the flow.
Yes Has the machine
Analysis complete
normally started up?
●● Flow for narrowing down troubles
Pre-check items No
• Check whether the Main Controller 1 and Main Controller 2 are connected properly to the (1) Visually check the
Main Controller 2 LED 4
Riser PCB.
• Check whether the cables between the Main Controller 1 and the Control Panel are
connected properly. Yes (1)
Is LED 4 ON?
If the Control Panel is not turned ON even after these checks, try identifying the location of
No
the failure through the following procedure.
(1) Visually check the (2) After turning OFF the power
Main Controller 1 LED 9 of the host machine, remove
the Main Controller 2 from
the host machine and turn OFF
No
Is LED 9 ON? the power of the host machine.

Yes
(1) Visually check the
(2) After turning OFF the power Main Controller 1 LED 9
of the host machine, remove
the Main Controller 2 from
the host machine and turn OFF No
the power of the host machine. Is LED 9 ON?

Yes

(3)
E602 displayed? No
(Wait about five minutes until it
is displayed)

Yes
Replace the Main Replace the Main Replace the Main
Controller PCB1 Controller PCB2 Controller PCB1

Restart the host machine

F-6-24

6-22
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check
6-23
●● Check item Item Check item Location
(2) Remove
Item Check item Location the Main
(1) Check Controller 2
the Main
Controller LED9
1 LED 9
activation

Check
the Main
Controller
2 LED 4
activation

Main Controller PCB1 Main Controller PCB2

LED4

LED4

You can check the activation of LED 4 (orange) through the hole of the connector for Main (3) Display of
Controller 2. E-code

T-6-5

6-23
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check
6-24
Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow Identify the cause in the following flow:

■■Status Check The All-night Power Supply (3.3V) is not

supplied to the Main Controllers.
Disconnect J1804 of the Relay PCB and, if 3.3V is not supplied to the pink and blue Lead
Wires, identify the location of the failure according to the flow.
1.Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch
2. Disconnect and then connect the
●● Flow for narrowing down troubles two power plugs of the host machine.
(1)
The following diagram shows the 3.3V power supply route.
3.Disconnect J1804 of the Relay PCB
4.Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch
All-night power
AC driver PCB Relay PCB
supply PCB(3.3V) DC
J820 AC power J1804
J691 (1)
(e.g.115 V - 230V) 3.3V Do the pink
F-6-25 (pins 1,2) and blue (pins 3,4)
Lead Wires on the Connector Terminal
side have 3.3V output? Yes
- Failure of the Main Controller
No - Failure of the Relay PCB
- Harnesses between the All-night Power
1.Turn OFF the main power Supply and Relay PCB are trapped
switch of the host machine. - The harness of the Relay PCB/Riser
2.Disconnect the two power plugs PCB is trapped
of the host machine.
(2)
3.Remove the AC driver BOX
4.Connect the two power plugs
of the host machine.

(3)
Is the AC voltage
AC power(e.g.115 V - 230V)
or more between pin 1 and pin 3 Yes
on the PCB side
of J820?
No

- Check if the Leakage Breaker is

Failure of the All-night Power Supply
turned OFF
- Failure of the AC Driver
F-6-26

6-24
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check
6-25
●● Check item Item Check item Location
(1) Check the pins 1
Item Check item Location and 2 (pink) and
(1) Relay PCB pins 3 and 4 (blue)
J1804 on the cable side,
respectively.
e.g. Lead Wire: Blue
pin 1 (pink) and pin
4 (blue)

Lead Wire: Pink

J1804 is the connector to input 3.3V from the 3.3V All-night Power Supply to the Relay PCB.
Normal value: 3.3V
J1804

6-25
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check
6-26
Item Check item Location
(2) AC driver BOX

AC Driver Box
(3) PCB side of J820
Between pin 1 and
pin 3
Normal value:
AC power
(e.g.115 V - 230 V)

AC ドライバ基板
3 1

J820
J820 is the connector to supply AC from the AC Driver PCB to the All-night Power Supply.
Check whether the pin on the AC Driver PCB has output. Normal value: AC power(e.g.115 V -
230 V)
T-6-6

6-26
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: All-night Power Supply (3.3V) System Flow > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles
6-27
Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow ●● Check item
Check the output from the 12V Power Supply
■■Status Check Item Check item Location
If 12V is not output to the orange and blue Lead Wires of the 12V Power Supply Connector, (1) PCB side of
J1801 on the
identify the location of the failure according to the flow.
Relay PCB
Between pin 8 3
J1801
■■Flow for narrowing down troubles 3(+12V) and
pin 8(GND)
Description Normal value:
12V
To check the output of the 12V Power Supply, check the following two points.
• Check the output from the 12V Power Supply
• Check the output from the AC Power Supply

●● 12V Power Supply System Flow

12V is not supplied to

the Main Controllers.

- Check the connection of the

Relay PCB connectors.
1.Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch. J1801 pin 3 (+12V) and pin 8(GND) > Normal value: 12V
- Disconnect and then connect all
the connectors, and restart (2) (2) Disconnect
2.Check the resistance of FU1, FU2,
of the Relay PCB.
J1811 of the
Relay PCB
FU2
(3) and check
(1)
3.If any of the cables are trapped between the following
Check the output from J1811(pins 1-10) of the Relay PCB and J104 resistance:
pin 3 of the J1801 on the of the Riser PCB, correct them. Relay PCB
Relay PCB Yes
4.If no cable is trapped, replace all of the following: FU1
Main Controller 1, Main Controller 2, Riser PCB, FU2
No and Relay PCB.
Normal value:
0 ohm
(4)
(5)
Is the AC Power Supply
Check whether the following Harnesses
being output? Yes of the Relay PCB are trapped
- J1801(pin 1, pin 3 - pin 5)
No - J1805(pin 5)
[Replacement work after check]
1.Replace the AC Driver PCB - Replace the 12V Power Supply
2.Replace the Main Controller PCB1
3.Check the harnesses of the
- Replace the Relay PCB FU1
AC Driver (three points)

F-6-27

6-27
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles
6-28
Item Check item Location Check the output from the AC Power Supply
(3) Relay PCB Item Check item Location
J1811
J1811 pin1-4 (4) AC driver pin pin
pins 1-10
1 and pin 4
Normal value:
1
AC power
(e.g.115 V - 230
V)

10

Riser PCB
J104
1 AC driver pin 1 and pin 4 (Normal value: AC power(e.g.115 V - 230 V))

J104

10

Check for any trapped cables and short circuit between J1811(pins 1-10) of the Relay PCB
and J104 of the Riser PCB.
1. Disconnect the connectors of J1811 and J104.
2. Check if power is distributed between pins (pins 1-10) of J1811 connector and all the
corresponding pins of J104 connector(pins 1-10). Normal value: 0 ohm
<In case FU1 or FU2 on the Relay PCB is blown out>
3. Check for any trapped cables and short circuit between pin 1 of J1811 connector and all
the pins of J104 connector (except for the corresponding one), as well as between pin 1 of
J1811 and the chassis. Normal value: ∞ ohm
4. Check the rest of the pins (pins 2-10)of J1811 connector in the same manner as step 3.
T-6-7

6-28
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles
6-29
Item Check item Location
(5) • Check whether
the following J1801 pin1,3-5
Harnesses
ex:
J1801 8 1
5 - 3
pin 1 and pin
8(GND)

• J1805(pin 5) Check cable “5” from

the triangle mark.

J1801

5
J1805

Check whether the cables are trapped

• J1801(pin 1,3 - 5)
• J1805(pin 5)
T-6-8

6-29
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: 12V Power Supply System Flow > Flow for narrowing down troubles
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow > Status Check
6-30
Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow ●● Check item
1. If the problem remains unsolved even after checking the short circuit of the harnesses,
■■Status Check disconnect the following connector one by one and repeat the following procedure to check
At the time of startup, the LEDs of Main Controller 1 and 2 turn ON and the Main Controller whether the symptoms change.
Fan rotates, but it stops immediately. 1-a. Open the front door. (Disable the operation of the host machine)

●● Flow for narrowing down troubles Front Door

Flow E:
From 12V Power Supply System Flow

Open the front door

Note:
Disable the operation of the host machine

Check whether
the 12V Power Supply starts No F-6-29
by disconnecting the connectors of the 1-b. Check whether the 12V Power Supply starts by disconnecting the appropriate
Relay PCB in order
connectors of the Relay PCB.
J1811 Main controller , UI
Yes J1817 DC controller, VIDEO bord
J1814 Transfer High Voltage PCB(Primary, POST, Developing)
J1819 Reader, ADF
Check the destination short circuit Replace the 12V Power Supply J1816 Fixing Feed Driver PCB
of the narrowed-down connectors
T-6-9
(harnesses and PCB)
1-c. If 12V Power Supply does not start even if disconnecting and connecting the
* e.g. connector, replace the 12V Power Supply.
If 12V starts when the DC Controller connector is disconnected
Disconnect the connector of the DC Controller PCB in order and identify the location of failure
2. Check the destination short circuit of the narrowed-down connectors (harnesses and PCB).
F-6-28
e.g.
If 12V starts when the DC Controller connector is disconnected,
disconnect the connector of the DC Controller PCB in order and identify the problem.

6-30
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow F: Connector Disconnection Flow > Status Check
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight
6-31
Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel
Backlight
●● Description
Following are the details of conditions when the Control Panel Backlight is activated:
●● Field Remedy
The Control Panel Backlight is turned ON when 12V power is supplied from the Relay PCB.
The details on the route to supply 12V power are as follows:
• The Control Panel Backlight is turned ON when 12V power is supplied. The 12V
power is supplied through the following route:
AC Driver PCB > 12V Power Supply PCB > Relay PCB > Control Panel
• The power-on signal (which keeps the supply of 12V power) is sent through the
following route:
Main Controller 2 > Main Controller 1 > Riser PCB > DC Controller > Relay PCB
> 12V Power Supply
• The 12V Power Supply receives its power supply from the AC Driver PCB and the
power-on signal (which keeps the supply of AC power) is sent through the following
route:
Main Controller PCB2 > Main Controller PCB1 > RISER PCB > DC Controller
PCB > Relay PCB > AC driver PCB

Power-on signal
J811 J1801 Power-on signal

DC
Controller Riser Main
PCB PCB Controller
Relay
PCB
J1801 J104
AC
line 12V Power Supply line
AC 12V Control Panel
J1801
driver Power control signal
PCB Supply Control
12V Power Supply line Panel

F-6-30
Reference:
When the power-on signal is blocked, the power supply stops even if the Power Supply
Unit is operating properly.
The power-on signal is output at 1 to 3V.

6-31
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow F: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Check item
6-32
Flow F: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure ■■Check item
Diagnosis Startup Method
1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4'
■■Status Check simultaneously.
If startup does not complete properly with only the Control Panel bar displayed, identify the
location of the failure according to the flow.
Flow for narrowing down troubles

Description
The workflow of the Controller system failure diagnosis to be executed when only the Control
Panel bar is displayed.

Main Power Supply Switch

F-6-32
2. Keep pressing the numeric keys until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.
(approx. 20 seconds)

F-6-31

F-6-33

6-32
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow F: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Check item
 6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis
6-33
Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System
Failure Diagnosis
1. Perform the following checks if the failure diagnosis does not start. If it starts, proceed
to the next step.
• Install the system software (Download by 2+8 startup)
• Replace the Main Controller PCB1
• Replace the HDD.
• Replace the Main Controller PCB2

2. When the detected location is displayed on the screen where "NG" is displayed,
identify the location of the failure by referencing the controller system failure diagnosis,
and perform the remedy. If the diagnosis does not proceed to a status where "NG" is
displayed, proceed to the next step.

3. If the failure diagnosis does not finish, perform the following work:
• Install the system software (Download by 2+8 startup)
• Replace the HDD.
• Replace the Main Controller PCB1
• Replace the Main Controller PCB2

6-33
6
Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis
 6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool
6-34

Controller Self Diagnosis Overview

Error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations shown below.
Introduction
DC Controller PCB
Operation of the error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for errors are
HDD
described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in field and Option Reader
improve the accuracy of specifying error locations.
This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.
• An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 and other related
PCBs (child PCBs such as SDRAM or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB 1/2). Flash PCB
Controller system
PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow: failure diagnosis
tool
■■Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool
• Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, TPM PCB> Main Main
Riser PCB
• Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM (M0*, M1), SDRAM (P), Controller PCB1 Controller PCB2
Memory PCB, Open I/F PCB (option)>
• Rizer PCB / HDD Operation panel All-night Option
Non-all-right
Power Supply
* SDRAM (M0) is an option.
F-6-34
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the blue frame (dotted
line).

■■Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main
Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel.

6-34
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool
 6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing
6-35
■■Layout Drawing Main Controller PCB 1

Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis SDRAM

BAT

Main controller PCB 1

Main controller PCB 2

F-6-36
Main Controller PCB 2

F-6-35

DDR2-SDRAM(M0)

J13 DDR2-SDRAM(M1)

DDR2-SDRAM(P)

BAT

F-6-37

6-35
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing
 6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-36
Basic Flowchart Operation
Basic Check Items ■■Controller System Error Diagnosis
Check all of the items shown below.
●● Boot Method
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys ‘2’ and ‘4’
Turn O N the m ain pow er s w itc h.
simultaneously.

Does the No
Power Supply LED on the Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.
Control Panel light up?

Yes

F-6-39
Does the main body No Ex ec ute Controller Sy s tem
boot c orrec tly ? Error Diagnos is Tool.

Yes

Take an ac tion appropriate

f or the error.

F-6-38

■■Basic Check Items Main Power

1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF. Supply Switch
2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected.
3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is
disconnected. F-6-40

4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Main Controller PCB 2 definitely?
5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Change Non-all-night Power Supply if
not recovered.

6-36
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
 6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-37
2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen ●● Diagnosis Time
appears on the Control Panel. Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.

<When the diagnosis result is normal>

F-6-41

NOTE: F-6-43

When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed. <When an error is detected by diagnosis>
In this case, perform the following remedy. Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name
Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown
of the test where an error was detected is indicated.
above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, “--.--” is displayed in Service
Mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > BCT) in the main body.

F-6-44

F-6-42

6-37
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
 6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-38
<How to view the error result> Test Name Description Assumed Error Remedy Error
The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above. Location Code
Explanation of the detailed error information is described. SN-6 PCI Check a PCI bus • Main Controller 1. Check the connection of the Main -
Config error in the Main PCB 1 Controller PCB 1, and the Main
Maestro Controller PCB • Main Controller Controller PCB 2.
1 and the Main PCB 2 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Controller PCB 2 • SDRAM on Main 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Controller PCB
2
SN-7 PCI Check a LAN chip • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. -
F-6-45 Config error on the Main PCB 1
[no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted. LANC Controller PCB 1
SN-8 PCI Check a PCI bus • Main Controller 1. Check the installation between the -
When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been Config PCI- error between the PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 1.
occurring. Bridge Main Controller 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard. PCB 1
SN-9 CPLD Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. -
CPLD chip on the PCB 1
<Controller System Error Diagnosis Table> Main Controller
The error locations are identified according to the following table. PCB 1
SN-10 Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. -
Test Name Description Assumed Error Remedy Error
LANC SPI LANC SPI on the PCB 1
Location Code Main Controller
SN-1 IA- Check an error • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. - PCB 1
DDR2 between the Main PCB 1 SN-11 RTC Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. -
SDRAM Controller PCB 1 • SDRAM on Main CHECK RTC on the Main PCB 1
and SDRAM on Controller PCB Controller PCB 1
the Main Controller 1 SN-12 TPM Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the TPM E746
PCB 1 the TPM PCB on PCB 1 PCB.
SN-2 SM Check an SM bus • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. - the Main Controller • TPM PCB 2. Replace the TPM PCB.
BUS IA error in SDRAM PCB 1 PCB 1 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
DIMM1 (outside) on the • SDRAM * TPM PCB is
Main Controller (outside) on not installed in
PCB 1 Main Controller products for China.
PCB 1 So, the diagnosis
SN-4 SM Check an SM • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. - results NG.
BUS IA bus error in Clock PCB 1 SN-13 Check an error • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of SDRAM -
Clock Gen Generator on the DDR2 between SDRAMs PCB 2 (M0) on the Main Controller PCB 2.
Main Controller SDRAM on the Main • SDRAM (M0) on 2. Replace SDRAM (M0) on the Main
PCB 1 Controller PCB 2 Main Controller Controller PCB 2.
SN-5 SM Check an SM bus • Main Controller 1. Check the connection of the Main - PCB 2 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
BUS SOC error in the Main PCB 1 Controller PCB 1, and the Main SN-14 Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. -
DIMM1 Controller PCB • Main Controller Controller PCB 2. FLASH CPU ROM (IC60) PCB 2
1 and the Main PCB 2 2. Check the installation of SDRAM ROM on the Main
Controller PCB 2 • SDRAM on Main (M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2. Controller PCB 2
Controller PCB 3. Replace SDRAM (M1) on the Main
2 Controller PCB 2.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.

6-38
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
 6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-39
Test Name Description Assumed Error Remedy Error Test Name Description Assumed Error Remedy Error
Location Code Location Code
SN-15 Check an error • Main Controller 1. Check the connection of the bypass E747 SN-23 HDD Check an HDD I/F • Main Controller 1. Check the cable connection of the -
P-DDR2 between the Main PCB 2 board /Open I/F board. E748 error PCB 2 HDD.
SDRAM Controller PCB 2 • SDRAM (P) 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. • HDD Cable 2. Check the connection between the
and SDRAM (P) on • Open I/F PCB • HDD Main Controller PCB 2 and the Main
the Main Controller • Bypass board Controller PCB 1.
PCB 2 3. Replace the HDD.
SN-16 Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Check the connection of the bypass E747 SN-24 Check an SRI bus • Main Controller 1. Check the Image Processing Sub
GOR(R)- Rchip SDRAM on PCB 2 board /Open I/F board. E748 S-SRI PCB 2 PCB connection
DDR2 the Main Controller • Open I/F PCB 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. • Image 2. Replace the Image Processing Sub
SDRAM PCB 2 • Bypass board Processing Sub PCB
SN-17 Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. E747 PCB 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
S-SDRAM Schip SDRAM on PCB 2 E748 SN-100 HDD S.M.A.R.T HDD • If the result(S.M.A.R.T Check) is not
the Main Controller E732 information [0], recommend the backup of user
PCB 2 collection and data.
SN-18 Check failure of • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the Open I/ E747 performance • If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or
GOR- Ochip SDRAM on PCB 2 F PCB. E748 check (Refer to the less, recommend to replace the
DDR2 the Open I/F PCB • Open I/F PCB 2. Replace the Open I/F PCB. display example HDD.
SDRAM 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. shown below.) • If the result(CheckResult) is
CAUTION, recommend the backup
Supplementary Information: If the of user data.
Open I/F PCB is not installed, [no] • If the result(Exec SN-100 HDD
is displayed for the diagnosis result. HEALTHCHECK) is NG, replace the
SN-19 Check a GUBUS • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the Open E747 HDD.
GU BUS error on the Main PCB 2 I/F PCB or the Bypass I/F PCB on E748 T-6-10
Controller PCB 2 • Open I/F PCB the Main Controller PCB 2.
• Bypass PCB 2. Replace the Open I/F PCB or
the Bypass I/F PCB on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
SN-20 Check failure • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the E355
FRAM between the Main PCB 2 Memory PCB on the Main Controller
Controller PCB 2 • Memory PCB PCB 2.
and the Memory 2. Replace the Memory PCB on the
PCB Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
SN-21 Check failure • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. E246
SRAM of SDRAM and PCB 2 E350
battery exhaustion E355
on the Main
Controller PCB 2
SN-22 JUST Check ROM • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. -
ROM READ READ on the Main PCB 2
Controller PCB 2

6-39
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
 6 Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
6-40
Display HDD S.M.A.R.T
Note:
Correspondence at the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit use.
The SMART contents are diagnosis results of the master HDD.
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the
green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is
accessed firstly.
The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.

●● Restrictions
<Controller System Error Diagnosis>
Refer to <S.M.A.R.T Check>. • Regarding the diagnosis for the test names (SN-1, 2, 7, 15, 21, 24), if an error occurs in the
S.M.A.R.T Check ----- See below. diagnosis under the test names, this diagnosis tool will not boot.
05: Reallcated Sectors Count:[000000000000] • When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, the following judgment results
C5: Current Pending Sector Count:[000000000000] The average transfer speed of a normal are displayed.
C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count:[000000000000]
HDD displays [80-90MB/s]. Standard PCB: [NG]
Read Performance Check ----- If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or less, Optional PCB: [OK]
[90.8MB/s] recommend to replace the HDD. However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
CheckResult => [NORMAL]
If the result is CAUTION,
Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK]
=================================== recommend the backup of user data.
Exec SCENARIO-1 Preocessing BoxMode => [OK]

If the result is NG, replace the HDD.

F-6-46
<S.M.A.R.T Check>
S.M.A.R.T Check Explanation Countermeasure
05: Reallcated Sectors Count of reallocated sectors. If the result is not [0000000000000],
Count:[0000000000000]
recommend the backup of user data.
C5: Current Current count of unstable If the result is not [0000000000000],
Pending Sector sectors (waiting for remapping).
recommend the backup of user data.
Count:[0000000000000]
C6: Uncorrectable Quantity of uncorrectable • If the result is not [0000000000000],
Sector errors.
recommend the backup of user data and
Count:[0000000000000]
replace the HDD.
* Alarm 31-0008 may occur in the main
body.
T-6-11

6-40
6
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis
 6 Troubleshooting > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Overview > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
6-41

Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs ■■ Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2

Overview
Check the lighting of the LED on
You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by the Main Controller PCB 2
checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.

■■Location of LEDs
- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board
LED4 is lit. - Check whether the connector (on the Main
Controller PCB 2 side) is securely connected
No
Yes

Normal operation
LED1 Green
F-6-48
LED 4 Red

LED9 Green
LED16 Green

Main Controller PCB 1 Riser PCB Main Controller PCB 2

F-6-47

■■ Preconditions
Check whether the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 are properly
inserted.
Check whether the connectors are securely connected. LEDs are not lit when the contaction
is poor. (Power-on is not possible)
When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit, check the connection of cables (such
as UI Cable).

6-41
6
Troubleshooting > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Overview > Checking the lighting of the LED4 RED on the Main Controller 2
 6 Troubleshooting > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Overview > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
6-42
■■Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
• Main Controller PCB 1 - LED9, LED16
• Flash PCB - LED1

Check the lighting of the LDEs on

the Main Controller PCB 1

- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board

- Check whether the connector (on the Main
LED16 is lit. Controller PCB 1 side) is securely connected
No - Replace the Main Controller PCB
Yes
Determine the faulty PCB by the error code (E602-0001) after
LED9 is lit. removing the Main Controller PCB 2 and turning ON the power.
- No error code is displayed => Replace the Main Controller PCB 1
No - Error code (E602-0001) is displayed => Replace the Main Controller
Yes PCB 2

LED1 of the Flash - Check for poor connection of the FLASH PCB connector
PCB is lit. - Replace the FLASH PCB / Main Controller PCB 1
- In the case of startup failure (error code cannot be displayed)
No although the LED is lit, replace the FLASH PCB
Yes

Replace the
Normal startup
FLASH PCB
No
Yes

Normal operation
F-6-49

6-42
6
Troubleshooting > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Overview > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
 6 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
6-43

Debug log ●● Types of Logs

There are continuous logs, event logs, and manual logs.
Type Collecting method Size of logs Setting
Scope of Application Event log Automatically recorded in accordance Less than 500MB Service mode Lev2: COPIER
with the conditions specified in > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
■■Purpose DEBUG-1. DEBUG-1 > 3 (default)
3: Exception + E code + Reboot
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log
Make movement same as 3
by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the even if you change setting of it.
cause. Manual log Perform the following procedure. n/a
1. Hold down the [Counter] button (10
seconds or longer).
Overview 2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.
3. Press 2 on the numeric keypad.
4. Press 3 on the numeric keypad.
■■Function Overview While logs are being obtained, the
screen is locked. It takes approx. 3
Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software
minutes before obtaining the logs is
modules in the device for debug purpose. completed and the user can work on
In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve the screen.
efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at T-6-12
the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D.
●● Conditions of Log Collection
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware
• Logs can be collected on a PCB-by-PCB basis. (SUBLOG, SUBLOG_RCON, SUBLOG_
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to
DCON)
determine the cause.
●● Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log
Location File name Automatic collection Manual collection
• The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company
Logs generated Event log Manual log
or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up. while the host When an event has
• When the error frequency is low. machine is occurred
• When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical being operated.
failure. Main Controller SUBLOG Yes Yes Yes
* Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and Reader Controller SUBLOG_RCON No Yes Yes
the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge DC Controller SUBLOG_DCON No Yes Yes
of quality follow-up. T-6-13

●● Collection of Logs
Connect SST or a USB memory device,
and select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK to collect logs.

6-43
6
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
 6 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
6-44
■■Description of Log to be Collected ■■Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
When operation from the Control Panel or an event log (exceptional operation, error code, or
reboot) occurs, the number of logs increases. NOTE:
When the data is sent to the USB memory device:
Logs are stored from the latest one, and the latest file is always stored.
USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using
Logs earlier than those logs are overwritten and deleted from the oldest log. the SST.
When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted.

Note: 1) Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK
The number of files stored differs depending on the model and situation.
Connect the USB memory device to the machine.
2) [5] Execute [BACKUP].

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]

Previous time
-------------------------------------
Delete 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
This time
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
Delete Delete 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
F-6-50 [4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
Collecting System Information [7]: Clear downloaded files
■■Collection Destination [8]: download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP
server or SST (Ver. 4.63 or later). /[5] has been selected. Execute?/
●● Collection Method - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -
Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods.
F-6-52
• Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode
3) [1] Execute [Sublog].
Lev1: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click OK.
• Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log.
• Transfer the debug log to a USB memory device that stores the system of the machine. [[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
●● File Name of Sublog ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー
Whether the file is new or old can be judged by the year, month, day, hour, and minute. [1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
SUBLOG04_0014_0515204388.Z [5]: Netcap
[6]: SRAM(HDD)
Layer number mmddhhmm [7]: SRAM(USB)
Sequence number [C]: Return to Main Menu
F-6-51 F-6-53

6-44
6
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
 6 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
6-45
●● When the data is sent to the USB memory device ■■Uploading Data by SST
A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.63 or
log file is saved in the folder. later) running to the machine.

Example: Folder 201205241821

■■Preconditions:
In addition to continuous logs, obtained manual logs (holding down the counter + 1, 2, and 3
keys) and event logs (DEBUG-1) are stored in the machine.
A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine, and the machine is in download
mode.

Note:
Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.

1. Start SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) and select iRC5051 from Model List. Press the Start button.

F-6-55

F-6-54

6-45
6
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
 6 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
6-46
2. Press the Upload Data button. 4. Press the "Save" button.

F-6-56 F-6-58
3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button. 5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.
When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload".
When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment
column just below.
It is displayed as "log" in the figure below.

Note:
The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button.
It is deleted from the main body.

F-6-59

F-6-57

6-46
6
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
 6 Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
6-47
6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC.
In the initial setting:
Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) >
20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm)

F-6-60

6-47
6
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
 6 Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs
6-48
When to Obtain Logs ●● Checking the name of the log file
Check the date of the file whose name begins with SUBLOG00_00. It is highly possible that
The assumed procedure to be taken when a request for log collection has been received is
files of around the date and time the symptom occurred contain information recorded at the
shown below.
time when the failure occurred.

●● Preconditions
When the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up determines the need for an SUBLOG00_0014_0515204388.Z
analysis of debug log by the R&D department, log collection is requested via sales company
HQ. Logs are used to determine the cause. Log classification mmddhhmm
Sequence number
●● Anticipated log collection procedure
F-6-61
1. Contact the user to identify the date and time the failure to be analyzed occurred. ( The
An example of log acquisition when the occurrence date has been specified
date and time of occurrence is used to judge whether it is included in the dates and times of
• An example of a failure which occurred around 20:38 on October 3:
the obtained log files. The date and time of occurrence needs to be informed together with
the obtained logs. The information is necessary in order to shorten the time required for the Around 20:38 on October 3
↓
analysis. If multiple failures have occurred, the dates and times of those failures need to be
informed. If the exact date and time is not clear, just a rough idea will do. ) The time when the status is assumed It is highly possible that logs recorded
The time when the symptom is
to have changed from normal operation at the time when the symptom
2. At the user’s site, enter download mode and obtain logs. assumed to have occurred.
to occurrence of the symptom occurred are included.
3. Check that files of around the specified date are included in the logs.
↑ ↑
4. If the symptom can be reproduced, reproduce it. SUBLOG00_0024_1003193499.Z SUBLOG00_0025_1003205099.Z
5. Press the counter + 1, 2, and 3 keys to obtain logs. 19:34 on October 3 20:50 on October 3

6. Collect all the obtained logs. F-6-62

NOTE:
• If the obtained log file name contains "SHT", it means that the log was recorded at the
NOTE:
time of shutdown.
• Prepare a USB memory device of 2 GB or more in capacity as the USB memory device
used for log collection. It is necessary in order to secure enough capacity when logs are Example:
obtained multiple times. SUBLOG00_0001_0918140788SHT.TXT
• As for the collected logs, all the logs moved to the USB memory device should be sent.
• The logs are directly saved to the HDD. It is assumed that logs of a day (if various When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if the performed operations
operations are continuously performed) or logs of approx. 30 days (in the case of common include turning OFF the power, use the file name "SHT" as a clue for identifying the date
use) can be stored. In the case of logs within the foregoing assumed storage period, it is and time.
rare that the logs are overwritten and need to be collected again. • If the number of seconds is expressed as "99 + three-digit number", the number shows
the cause which triggered the log acquisition (e.g. acquisition due to an error code
E[three-digit number]).

Example:
When an error code E747 occurred
SUBLOG00_0001_0918140799747.TXT
When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if an error code has occurred,
use E[three-digit number] as a clue for identifying the date and time.

6-48
6
Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
6-49

Network Packet Capture ■■Overall flow

1) Enable network capture
Overview 2) Start the network capture function
3) Overwrite function
The network capture function is an embedded function of the machine.The network data 4) Encryption function
sent to and received from the machine can be collected (captured) without using any special 5) Start/stop network capture
equipment. 6) Stop the network capture function
Until now, in the case of network failures that could not be solved at the first visit, the service 7) Disable network capture
technician collected packet at the second visit to solve it.
By providing this function, investigation to determine the cause is available before the second
■■Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
visit to take some measures. Also, service technicians can reproduce the symptoms of
network failure and collect network packet to bring it back to the office. ●● Enable network capture
To enable this function, the following 2 steps need to be executed.
The network capture data can be collected using SST/USB memory. • Enabling the license of network capture
• Enabling user mode > Network > Store Network Packet Log
There is no need to prepare dedicated equipments (PC, HUB, cable, packet capture software,
etc.) that have been needed before. Because this function is able to acquire the customer information such as print data, it is not
standard function.You make it valid as free license option after obtaining permission from
The following effects can be expected thanks to the embedded feature. the customer.Then it displays "OFF/ON" in the user mode, you obtain permission from the
• The packet in customer environment can be collected by remote operation. customer again and let the customer change it to ON.
• Packet collection can be continued when the symptom is not reproduced during the visit.
• For network failures on iR-ADV collaboration (a function to communicate between
machines across a network), packet collection for both sides becomes easy.

Caution:
The network capture function may fail to collect a part of packet in a high-loaded
network environment.
The network capture function of the machine is more prone to failures in collecting
packet than when using a PC to do so.
F-6-63
When collecting packet due to trouble of print data, etc., a case is assumed in which Changing it to "ON" in user mode, it is displayed in Service Mode.
it is impossible to judge whether it is a failure in the print data or a failure in collecting
packet.
To check whether packet is failed to be collected by the network capture function of the
machine, there may be a case where user is requested to collect packet using a PC.

6-49
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
6-50
●● Start the network capture function
Select the following: Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > "1". The following shows the machine behavior when the HDD space reaches full.

When the overwriting setting is ON

• The oldest packet file is deleted. The oldest file is determined by the last update time of the
file (not by the date and time attached to the file).
• When the HDD space reaches full during packet collection, the oldest file is deleted to
continue collecting packet data to the currently-stored file.
• CAPSTATE of capturing continues to be "RUNNING".

When the overwriting setting is OFF

• Capturing is stopped.
• CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "HDDFULL". Note that STT-STP remains as start state
(1). Capturing is started again by changing the value from STT-STP (0) to STT-STP (1).
F-6-64 • If the HDDFULL state is cleared when starting capturing again, capturing is started.
*1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available. • CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "RUNNING".
• If the HDDFULL state is not cleared, starting data capturing results in an error.
●● Overwrite function • CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "HDDFULL".
Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT > 1 • When a command of stopping data capturing is given during the "HDDFULL" state,
CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "STOP".

●●

F-6-65

Note:
When the HDD space becomes full after starting the capture, the oldest file is deleted
and the captured data continues to be saved; therefore, it is necessary to set "1:
Overwrite" in advance.

6-50
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
6-51
●● Encryption function ●● Start/stop network capture
Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA >2. 1) Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > STT-STP > 1.
0: Data is encrypted at data extraction (factory setting value). 2) To stop capturing, set "0".
1: Data is not encrypted at data extraction.
2: Two types of files (one in encrypted format and another in clear text format) are extracted
at data extraction.

F-6-67
"RUNNING" is displayed for the item CAPSTATE during packet collection.
“STOP” is displayed at the time of shipment or at completion of packet collection, and
F-6-66
“HDDFULL” is displayed when 1GB of data (the upper limit for packet collection) is collected.

Note: ●● Stop the network capture function

When collecting data using SST, the above service mode setting is not reflected and
Select the following: Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON > 0.
both files in encrypted format and clear text format are always collected.

When the encryption setting is enabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.
can.
When the encryption setting is disabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.
cap.
This setting applies only when using USB memory for data extraction.
This setting is ignored when using SST for data collection because both files in encrypted
format and clear text format are extracted.

F-6-68

6-51
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Embedded Network Packet Capture Collection
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Other functions
6-52

Caution:
■■Other functions
Be sure to stop the network capture function after collecting network packet capture ●● Payload discard function
data. Payload is customer data. Data is collected including payload by default. To prevent leak
of customers' information or large volume of network packet, the network packet can be
collected while payload is discarded.
0: OFF (disabled) The capture function is not available. At the time of shipment.
1: ON (enabled) The capture function is available. Service Mode(Level 2) Copier>Test>NET-CAP>PAYLOAD
0: Payload is not discarded (factory setting value)
●● Disable network capture 1: Payload is discarded
1) Select the following: Service Mode(Lv2) Copier > Option > LCNS-TR > ST-NCAPT > 0,
and click OK.
2) Select the following in user mode: Network > Store Network Packet Log > OFF.

F-6-70
F-6-69

Caution: ●● Filter function

Be sure to disable the network capture function once analysis of network failure is Filtering setting is available.
complete. It is required to disable and transfer the license; however, the further step, Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT
LMS license transfer, is not required. 0: Filtering is performed. All the data is collected (factory default setting).
1: Only the packet data where the machine's MAC address is included in the destination
address or sender's address of Ether header is captured.

6-52
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Other functions
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Other functions
6-53
●● Delete files
Delete all the network capture data stored on the HDD.
Select Service Mode(level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > FILE-CLR, and then click the OK
button.

F-6-71

●● Collection function at startup

Setting this service mode automatically starts collecting packet data if the condition of
network capture operation is satisfied when the main power of the host machine is turned
F-6-73
ON. Completion of packet data collection needs to be executed manually.

Service Mode(Level 2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > PONSTART

0: Data is not automatically collected at startup (factory setting value).
1: Data is automatically collected at startup.

F-6-72

6-53
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > Overview > Other functions
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection > Overflow
6-54
SST Network Packet File Collection ●● Starting the Machine and SST
1) Start the machine using the 2 and 8 keys, and connect SST in Single mode.
■■Overview 2) Click the "Start" button.
• Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using SST. 3) Select a model to connect and "Single", check the network settings, and then click the
• It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software, "Start" button.
such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of
failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
• When using SST for collecting data, the setting of encryption function in Service Mode(level
2) Copier > Test > NET-CAP > ENCDATA is disabled and files in clear text format/encrypted
format can be always collected.

■■Preparation
PC with SST (V4.62 or later) registered
(The system software of the corresponding model must have been registered with SST.)

■■Overflow
1) Connect the machine to SST
2) Upload data
F-6-74
3) Collect the network capture data
●● Upload data
1) Click the [Upload Data] button on SST.
2) When a list of packet files stored in the device appears, select target data files to upload.

F-6-75

6-54
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > SST Network Packet File Collection > Overflow
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection > Overall flow
6-55

Note: USB Network Packet File Collection

When using SST to collect data, you can select both files in encrypted format and clear
text format. ■■Overview
• Collect the network capture data that has been stored in the machine using a USB memory.
• It is possible to use files in clear text format for in-house analysis by using free software,
●● Collect the network capture data such as Wireshark. Note that only Canon Inc. can analyze encrypted files. In the case of
1) In the case of the default installation destination for SST, click the folder with the name of failure in solving problems, send encrypted files to Canon Inc.
the serial number of the machine stored in C drive > ServData > target model (e.g.: iAC5255)
on the PC. ■■Preparation
2) Three types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap), a file in encrypted
USB memory
format (xxx.can), and a list of collected network capture files (ufset.txt).
Store in advance the system software of the machine to connect to.
For the system software, it is fine to store just one of the system software of the machine
(LANG, etc). There is no need to store the full set.

F-6-76 ■■Overall flow

1) Enter download mode
2) Select Backup
3) Transfer the network capture data
4) Collect the network capture data

●● Enter Download Mode

F-6-77 1) Connect the USB memory to the USB port.
3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format
2) Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, and then press [OK].
(xxx.cap).
3) When the machine recognizes the USB memory, download Menu (USB) appears on the
Control Panel.

Note:
When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.

F-6-78

6-55
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection > Overall flow
 6 Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection > Overall flow
6-56
●● Select Backup ●● Transfer the network capture data
1) When Download Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Backup. 1) Store all the network capture data stored in the machine on the USB memory.

F-6-81
2) When “---Please hit any key---” appears, press any key.
3) Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (HDD).
4) Press the [Reset] key to shut down the machine.

F-6-79
2) Select - (OK): 0. ●● Collect the network capture data
3) When Backup Menu (USB) appears, select [5]: Netcap. 1) Check that the network capture files are stored on the USB memory.
2) Two types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap) and a file in encrypted
format (xxx.can).

F-6-82

F-6-80 3) Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format
4) Select - (OK): 0. (xxx.cap).

Note:
When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to Canon Inc.

6-56
6
Troubleshooting > Network Packet Capture > USB Network Packet File Collection > Overall flow
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-57

Version upgrade

Overview
■■Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.

●● Downloading System Software

This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.
1. Download via the service support tool (hereinafter “SST”)
Connect this machine to the PC by the cross cable to download the system software using SST installed in the PC.
2. Download using the USB memory storage device
Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device.
3. Download via Contents Delivery System (hereinafter “CDS”)
Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine.

System CD SST Host Machine

System Software System Software
Download mode Write the
system software
Normal mode
/(Safe mode) Restart

Copy the
System Software Automatically restarted

USB menu

USB memory
storage device Activate the machine with the
System Software new system software version
Temporary Memory Space

Done

CDS
System Software Updater
F-6-83

6-57
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software
6-58
■■Writing System Software
The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the temporary memory space.
After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the software in the machine.
In case the main power switch is turned OFF during the writing process, the machine may not be started.
This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS. When upgrading the system software via CDS, the warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the
power switch.

F-6-84
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown.
The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message, “version up…..error”. Check the name if the software is for the option not attached to the machine. If so,
turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see Troubleshooting for details).

Log

version up...
error massage

Error
massage

F-6-85

6-58
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
6-59
■■Download Mode
When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with
other iR-series models.

●● Normal mode(recommend):
• Start from Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download.
• Conventionally, the main power switch of this machine was turned ON while pressing 1 and 7 keys. However, the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and enables the
download same as before.
• You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors.

NOTE :
When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed.■
This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must start Download mode after the version information has been obtained.

●● Safe mode:
• Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.
* Be sure to use "Single mode" when using SST. SST "Assist mode" cannot be used in safe mode. Any mode can be used when using USB.

6-59
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
6-60
■■System Software Components
The table below shows the system software components for this machine.
Display on SST How to upgrade versions
Software to be upgraded Registered name Name of system Remarks
SST USB memory Others
of product software
Host Machine Main Controller iAC7260 SYSTEM ○ ○ -
Language Module LANGUAGE ○ ○ -
Remote UI Contents RUI ○ ○ -
RUI portal RPTL ○ ○ -
Accessibility ACSBT ○ ○ -
UI-BOX BOX ○ ○ -
UI-COPY COPY ○ ○ -
UI-Intro INTRO ○ ○ -
UI-SEND SEND ○ ○ -
MEAP Libraly MEAP ○ ○ -
Paper Type Information File MEDIA ○ ○ -
Service Mode Contents SMCNT ○ ○ -
DC Controller DCON ○ ○ -
Box Checker BCT ○ ○ -
WebDAV Contents WEBDAV ○ ○ -
Custom Menu Application CSTMN ○ ○ -
Error Recovery System ERS ○ ○ -
Job Hold Application HOLD ○ ○ -
NLS Application NLS ○ ○ -
Image Analysis Board TSP ○ ○ -
WDS-SCAN (JAVA UI) WSDS ○ ○ -
Key/Certificatefor Encrypted Communication iAXXXX KEY ○ ○ -
ADF ADF Controller DADF-R1 RCOND ○ - -
Staple Finisher – L1/Saddle Finisher Controller FIN_L1 FIN_CON ○ ○ - Staple Finisher – L1/Saddle Stitch Finisher – L1
Stitch Finisher – L1 SDL_CON ○ ○ -
Staple Finisher – K1/Saddle Finisher Controller FIN_K1 FIN_CON ○ ○ - Staple Finisher – K1/Saddle Stitch Finisher – K1
Stitch Finisher – K1 SLD_CON ○ ○ -
FLD_CON ○ ○ -
IST_CON ○ ○ -
TRM_CON ○ ○ -
Interface Conttroller PUI_B1 PUI_CON ○ ○ -
Extensions System Option Voice Synthesis Dictionary iAC7260 TTS ○ ○ -
Voice Recognition Dictionary ASR ○ ○ -
Resources for Web Browser BROWSER ○ ○ -
OCR Libraly iAXXXX CDICT ○ ○ -
G3FAX iAC7260 G3CCB ○ ○ -
G3CCM ○ ○ -
T-6-14

This machine holds the increased number of system software components compared to conventional iR machines to meet vastly extended functionality.

6-60
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
6-61
The Image Reader for this machine consists of 2-sided Single Pass and 2-sided Double Pass, requiring specific system software for each.
• The name of the system software for the 2-sided Single Pass Image Reader (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit – B1): RCOND
• The name of the system software for the 2-sided Double Pass Image Reader (Color Image Reader Unit – B1): RCONS
The finisher for this machine supports version upgrade via the host machine in any of the above-mentioned methods, i.e., via SST, USB memory storage device storage device or CDS. Note that the
External 2-hole Puncher B1 does not support version upgrade via the host machine. To upgrade versions, connect the option with the PC using the downloader PCB to download the system software
via SST.

6-61
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
6-62
■■Note on Download Process

CAUTION: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process.
Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of machine start-up at power-on.
If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad).
When the machine is successfully started in Safe mode, execute formatting of BOOTDEV partition, retry downloading the system software.

CAUTION:
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not possible to start this machine and enter service mode.
In safe mode, version information of SYSTEM, MEAPCONT, LANGUAGE, RUI, and SDICT can be obtained, but version information of other system software such as DCON and RCON cannot
be obtained. Therefore the following points to note are required when downloading in safe mode.

[RCON]
The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or when "Overwrite all" of USB download menu is used.
[DCON and others]
The following symptoms occur when SST (Single mode) or USB download menu (Auto) is used.
- The time for download/write becomes longer because the software is overwritten even when system software of the same version is being written.
- A confirmation message is not displayed when a lower version is going to be downloaded.

CAUTION: error code E753-0001

When an error occurs during writing process of the system software downloaded using SST or USB memory, error code E753-0001 is displayed.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the correct target option, and then execute downloading again.

6-62
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6-63
Version Upgrade via SST ●● Downloading System Software
System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST.■
■■Overview
Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash
The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST. ROM.
• Assist mode (recommended) After the writing has been completed normally, this machine automatically restarts with the
• Single mode new system software.
Assist mode provides the following features. 1) Download the system software
• Attached option types are automatically recognized. -
[
- - Download Mode - - -
iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete

• The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically
[ iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete

searched.
• The set of system software with interactive behavior confirmed is automatically
downloaded.
HDD
• The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download
System
the system software for each accessory. Software
System
Software
Temporary
memory space

This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts
during operation. Behaviors of such system software should be confirmed when these are
downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download the system
software for this machine.

Automatically restarted
2) 主電源スイッチOFF/ON

NOTE : 3) The system software is written

Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
• When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
<<<<< download shell >>>>>

HDD
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete

• When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted.

[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++

System
Software
Temporary
memory space

System
memory area

Automatically restarted
4) 主電源スイッチOFF/ON

FLASH
ROM 5) Start with the new version.

F-6-86

6-63
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
6-64
■■Copying System Software 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button.

●● System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.

NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.

Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver.4.41 or later installed
• The system CD for this machine

F-6-88
Steps to copy the system software
6) The system software stored in the system CD is listed.
1) Start the PC Uncheck the box(es) for unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click “Copy”
2) Set the system CD in the PC button.
3) Start SST
4) Click “Register Firmware” button.

F-6-89

F-6-87

6-64
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
6-65
7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click “OK” button. ■■Connection
The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode.
• IP address:172.16.1.100
• Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network
address to the following.
• IP address:172.16.1.160
• Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: arbitrary

CAUTION:
If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the above-
F-6-90 mentioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that
the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings.
Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.

Preparation
Requirements
• PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored
• Cross cable
10Base-T : Category 3 or 5
100Base-T : Category 5
1000Base-T : Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later

CAUTION:
Disconnect USB memory storage device storage devices if connected.
Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB memory storage device
storage device is recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device storage device
cannot be used concurrently.

6-65
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
6-66
4) Check the IP address of the PC.
Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt.
Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC.
If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network
settings of the PC.

F-6-92

CAUTION:
IP address：172.16.1.160
Subnet mask：255.255.255.0 The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from
IP address：172.16.1.100 the network. To check the settings, connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the
Subnet mask：255.255.255.0 cross cable.
Cross cable
10Base-T：Category 3, 5 or later
100Base-TX：Category 5 or later
1000Base-TX： Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
F-6-91
Steps
1) Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed.
2) Turn on the main power switch of this machine.
3) Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode.
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD and press [OK].

6-66
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-67
■■Downloading System Software (Assist mode) NOTE:
If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode,
1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
DOWNLOAD).
2) Connect the PC to this machine and start SST.
3) Click “Start Assist mode” button.
Skip this step when starting SST in Assist mode.

F-6-94
only the system software of SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT and SDICT can
acquire version information.

F-6-93
4) Click “Start” button
If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically
selected.

NOTE:
If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any
versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection.

F-6-95
When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing
process.The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.
Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is
displayed.

6-67
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-68

NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes

■■Downloading System Software (Single mode)
Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes. The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system

• Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
software can be downloaded similarly).
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message. 1) Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions. 2) Connect the PC to this machine to start SST.
• Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions 3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”, check the network settings. Click “Start”
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions. button.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
• Overwrite all versions
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.

By default, “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
versions” is selected.

5) Click"Next"button.

F-6-97

F-6-96

6) Disconnect the cross cable from the machine.

7) Enter Service mode to check the system software versions.
8) Click"OK"button.
The main menu is displayed.

6-68
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-69

NOTE: NOTE: Download Confirmation Message Modes

The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen. Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
• IP address • Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
• Model name Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
• Download mode Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
• Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
• Overwrite all versions.
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
By default, “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded

5) When download is completed, click “OK” button.

F-6-98

4) Select the DCON version to be downloaded and click “Start” button.

Multiple files can be selected in this step.

F-6-100
The main menu is displayed.

F-6-99

6-69
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-70
6) Click “Shutdown / Restart” button.
NOTE:
If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted
not written on HDD or Flash ROM.
1) Click “Clear” button.
“Clear” button

F-6-104

7) Click “Restart” button.

F-6-101
2) Click “Execute Clear” button.
The system software, which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD, is deleted.

F-6-105
The machine is restarted.
The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM.
F-6-102 8) Click"OK"button.
3) Click“OK”button.
Return to the previous screen. 9) Enter Service mode to check the versions.

F-6-103

6-70
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-71
■■Formatting HDD When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL
startup in normal mode
●● Overview
Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL
This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.
• ALL:to format the whole HDD
• When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted Automatically restart
• When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the
system software.
Select download mode Select download mode
Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications
([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended) ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)
held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.

• BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.

• When clearing the system software storage area and reloading the system software Download the system software
Download the system software
HDD needs not to be formatted at version upgrade. for the main controller

HDD can be formatted only in Single mode. Automatically restart Automatically restart
After HDD is formatted, the machine cannot be started before the system software is
downloaded.
Writing process Writing process

After Format ALL is executed, the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting
Automatically restart Automatically restart
to HDD. At this time, the machine automatically starts in Download mode. For BOOTDEV
format, the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting.
After formatting, enter either Assist mode(recommended) or Single mode to download the Start in the new version Start in the new version
system software.
of the system software of the system software

F-6-106

6-71
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-72

When executing format ALL startup in normal mode ●● Steps of Formatting

When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL 1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the
Execute format ALL Execute format ALL machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.)
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
Automatically restart Automatically restart 3) Select the model to be connected and “single”. Check the network settings and click “Start”
button.

Select Download mode Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode) (preferably in assist mode)

Download the system software Download the system software

for the main controller

Automatically restart Automatically restart

Writing process Writing process

Automatically restart Automatically restart F-6-108

4) Click“Format HDD”button
Start in Download mode
Start in Download mode
of Normal mode
of Normal mode

Download the system software for

Since there is no system software DCON/RCON/option
to be downloaded,
the shutdown sequence is executed
Automatically restart
restart the machine manually
Writing process
Start in the same version
of the system software Automatically restart
F-6-109

Start in the new version

of the system software

F-6-107

6-72
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-73
5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start". 7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See
the steps to download the system software for details.

F-6-110

6) Click "Execute Format" button. F-6-112

CAUTION:
After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software
is not downloaded, E602 error is triggered at power-on.

CAUTION:
Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is
downloaded (to write the downloaded software).
Down time may be approx. 5 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process.
Never turn OFF the machine while Starting screen is shown.

F-6-111
HDD is formatted.

6-73
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
6-74
●● Mounting New HDD When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure.
After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the
this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted. message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.

The figure below shows the abbreviated steps.

Replacing HDDs

Start the machine in Safe mode

(by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad)

Connect to SST

F-6-114
Click "Yes" and the message is shown, confirming whether to format HDD.
Confirm that the new HDD is successfully mounted

Format HDD (Format ALL)

Follow the steps as described in Format ALL section.

F-6-113

F-6-115
Click “Initialize” button to initialize HDD (Format ALL). Follow the steps described in Format
ALL section to download the system software.

6-74
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-75
■■Backup NOTE:
Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode.
●● Overview The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader
PCB to migrate them to the new PCB. Controller PCB.

Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The
• Backup via SST backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
Backup data Downloaded/Uploaded file names enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Controller
PCB.
Backup data RAM SramImg.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
MEAP applications MeapBack.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, upload SramImg.bin. By downloading
For investigation in Dev Sublog.bin((Uploadable)) SramImg.bin after replacement, the new Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data
Service Print The text file of the contents which You output to paper with a service including Service mode stored in the old PCB
mode(Uploadable).
T-6-15 Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All
• Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2. Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS.
(Because setting data of service mode for the parts counter and the Main Controller are Restore Meapbackup.bin which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
stored, be sure to back up the data when replacing the Main Controller PCB and the DC
Controller PCB.)
• MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD

• Backup via Service mode

Backup data Service mode
Backup of Reader COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP (Backup)
Controller PCB COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMRES (Restore)
Backup of DC Controller COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (Backup)
PCB COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (Restore)
T-6-16

Data is stored in HDD.

6-75
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-76
●● Steps to Upload Data ●● Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack.
1) Enter Download mode.
CAUTION:
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
• When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation 3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network settings and click “Start”.
to determine the cause.
• The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were
uploaded.
• This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon

iR ADVNCE C5051 Series

Service PC
SST
iR ----
F-6-117
Upload/Download Main controller PCB1
System 4) Click “Upload Data” button.
MeapBack
/ SramImg.bin

Main controller PCB2

SRAM

HDD
SramImg.bin
Meapback.bin

Main controller

F-6-116 F-6-118

6-76
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-77
5) Select “MeapBack.bin” to click “Start” button. ●● Steps to Download Data

CAUTION:
• The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were
uploaded
• Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All
Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS. Restore Meapbackup.bin
which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.

Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack.

1) Enter Download mode
2) Connect the PC to the machine and start SST.
F-6-119
3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network setting and click “Start”
6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click “Save” button.
button.

F-6-120
F-6-121
7) Click “OK” button.

6-77
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
6-78
4) Click “Download Data” button.

F-6-122

5) Select the data to be downloaded and click “Start” button.

F-6-123

6) When the data are successfully downloaded, click “OK” button.

7) Restart the machine

6-78
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device
6-79
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device ●● Downloading System Software
Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device, the system
■■Relation between SST and USB memory storage device software is stored in the temporary memory space in HDD.
The system software is written in the system memory area, Boot area and Flash ROM upon
Storage Device
the machine restarted.
When using the USB memory storage device storage device for version upgrade, the system When the writing process is successfully completed, the machine is automatically restarted
software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device. By inserting with the new version of the system software.
the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine, the system
software can be upgraded. Tasks in the customer site
The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device storage 1) Download the system software
device. -
[
- - Download Mode - - -
iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete

PC iR ----
[ iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete

Task in the office

USB memory HDD

storage device
System System System
Software Software Software
Temporary
SST memory space

System software
Copying the system software

Copying the System Software

システムソフトウェアのコピー
Automatically restarted
2) 主電源スイッチOFF/ON

3) The system software is written

USB memory
storage device HDD <<<<< download shell >>>>>

HDD
Downloading the
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete

SST system software

[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++

System
Software
Temporary
memory space

System software Flash ROM System

memory area

F-6-124
When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below. Automatically restarted
4) 主電源スイッチOFF/ON

• Normal mode (recommended)

Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download in Service mode and press [OK]. FLASH
ROM 5) Start with the new version.
• Safe mode (only when any system error occurs or the machine is unable to start normally;
turn ON the main power switch by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric
keypad)
F-6-125

6-79
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory storage device Storage Device
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-80
■■Copying System Software 5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button.

●● System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.

NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.

Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
• The system CD for this machine
F-6-127

Steps to copy the system software 6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the
1) Start the PC. screen.
Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and
2) Set the system CD to the PC.
click “Copy” button.
3) Start SST.
4) Click “Register Firmware” button.

F-6-128

F-6-126

6-80
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-81
7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click “OK” button. ●● SST to USB memory Storage Device
Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.

Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
• USB memory storage device (*)

Requirements for USB memory storage device:

Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software
is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption
F-6-129
technology.

Steps to copy the system software

1) Start the PC.
2) Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the PC.
3) Start SST.

6-81
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
6-82
4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen. 6) Select “Series” and “Version” (the System Version).

F-6-130 F-6-132

5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is
NOTE:
inserted.
The signs shown in the field of “Firmware registration static” indicate the following:
Y: Stored in SST
N: Not stored in SST

F-6-131

6-82
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
6-83
7) Click “Start” button. ■■Connection
Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device.

CAUTION:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory
storage device; therefore, SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at
the same time.

Preparation
Item to prepare: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine
is stored.
Procedure
1) If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
F-6-133

NOTE:
When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software
is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is
triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded. (If this occurred,
turn OFF/ON the power to recover the error.)

8) Click “OK” when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage
device storage device.

USB memory

USB port

F-6-135
F-6-134

6-83
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6-84
3) Switch to the download mode to use. ■■Upgrading System Software
• In the case of normal mode (Recommended)
Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; ●● Menu/Function Overview
and then press [OK].
• In the case of safe mode (This mode should not be used as general rule. To be used only [[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]
when normal startup fails, such as a system error, etc.) -------------------------------------
While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch. [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
displayed on the Control Panel. [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] [7]: Clear downloaded files
------------------------------------- [8]: download Menu 2
[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [9]: Other Menu
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [Reset]: Shutdown
[4]: Format HDD F-6-137
[5]: Backup Downloading System Software
[7]: Clear downloaded files [1]: Upgrade(Auto)
[8]: download Menu 2 To download/write the system software (automatic)
[9]: Other Menu [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
To download the system software (confirmation)
[Reset]: Shutdown [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
F-6-136
To download the system software (overwriting)
[4]: Format HDD
CAUTION: To format the HDD/BOOTDEV partition
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB [5]: Backup
memory storage device. Collection of debug Log or Service Print(Because You are for R&D review, do not use it
This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60 other than the following.)
seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB [7]: Clear downloaded files
memory storage device is failed within the time period. To clear the system software immediately after downloading (before writing)
In such a case, use another USB memory storage device. [8]: Download Menu 2
To move to Download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
Others (e.g.: version information)
[Reset]: Shutdown
To execute shutdown sequence

Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions.

6-84
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6-85
●● Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software
CAUTION: Note when the power is turned OFF

NOTE: Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode.

The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the
system software (any download work other than downloading after replacing/formatting shutdown sequence.
the HDD):
Download mode --- Normal mode Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
Download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto)

CAUTION: Prohibition to turn OFF the power during downloading/writing

Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software;
otherwise, this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON.
If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON, start the machine in
safe mode (pressing 2 + 8 keys).
When the machine can be started in safe mode, be sure to download the system
software once again.
If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system
software.

F-6-138

6-85
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-86
■■Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
●● [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download only the system software with newer version in the 3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD. [1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared). [[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT -------------------------------------
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained, [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded. [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows: [4]: Format HDD
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)> [5]: Backup
• When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the [7]: Clear downloaded files
download mode) is before 00.36 [8]: download Menu 2
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be [9]: Other Menu
downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
• When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the [Reset]: Shutdown
download mode) is 00.36:
F-6-139
For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded. During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel.
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board – AE1 is not
installed (E753 is displayed).
• When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.

<In the case of startup in safe mode>

The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.

After downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to write the

downloaded system software to the HDD system area/flash ROM.

F-6-140

6-86
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
6-87
Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the ■■Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
HDD system area/flash ROM.
The screen shows the countdown once writing process is properly complete. ●● [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB
memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older, a
confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether
to overwrite or not.

In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.

For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
F-6-141 <In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
Once the countdown shows 0, this machine is automatically restarted.
• When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
4) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the lower right on the touch download mode) is before 00.36:
panel and select removal of the memory media, and then remove the USB memory storage All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be
device. downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
• When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
CAUTION:■ download mode) is 00.36:
After HDD formatting and downloading, this machine takes a long time (for writing the For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
software).■
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board – AE1 is not
This machine, in some cases, stays in standby screen up to 10 min during writing. At
installed (E753 is displayed).
this time, do not turn off the main power switch.
• When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.

<In the case of startup in safe mode>

The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.

Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.

6-87
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
6-88
Operation procedure Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset”
1) Enter download mode. key.

2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.

3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[2] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]

-------------------------------------
[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[7]: Clear downloaded files
[8]: download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu F-6-144

4) Press the “Reset” key.

/[2] has been selected. Execute?/ Shutdown sequence is executed.
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys - 5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6) Remove the USB memory storage device.
F-6-142
During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel. 7) Ensure the LED at the lower right on the Control Panel is turned OFF, and turn ON the
Main Power Switch.
NOTE: Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or the countdown once the writing process is properly completed.
older than the system software in the HDD, a message is displayed in each case to
confirm whether to overwrite or not. The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly completed. This
Press the key on the Control Panel. machine is restarted with the downloaded system software at the count of 0.
[0]: To overwrite/Any key other than [0]: Not to overwrite

F-6-143

6-88
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-89
■■Downloading System Software (Overwriting) CAUTION:
●● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system
Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well. Therefore,
USB memory storage device is downloaded. be sure to keep the following in mind: If the USB memory storage device includes the
Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the system software of non-connecting option, E753-0001 is displayed when the writing
process is completed.
USB memory storage device is downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading. In the case of an error in downloading of the non-connecting option, the machine can
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup. be recovered by turning OFF/ON the power.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software To prevent such error, uncheck the applicable system software so that the system
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but software of the non-connecting option is not downloaded when downloading the system
execute normal startup to execute writing. software from SST to USB.

Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset”

Operation procedure
key.
1) Enter download mode.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[3] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]

-------------------------------------
[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[7]: Clear downloaded files F-6-146
[8]: download Menu 2 4) Press the “Reset” key.
[9]: Other Menu Shutdown sequence is executed.
5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
/[3] has been selected. Execute?/ 6) Remove the USB memory storage device.
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys - 7) After checking that the LED is turned OFF at the lower right on the Control Panel, turn ON
F-6-145
the Main Power Switch.
During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel. Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
the countdown once the writing process is properly complete.
When the countdown shows 0, this machine is restarted with the downloaded system
software.

6-89
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
6-90
■■Formatting HDD When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL
startup in normal mode
●● HDD Format Overview
Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL
The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine:
• ALL: To initialize the entire HDD
• In the case of installing the HDD provided as a service part (a new HDD). Automatically restart
• In the case of cleaning the entire software and data in the HDD to reinstall the system
software.
Select download mode Select download mode
All the user data and MEAP application in the HDD is deleted when executing Format ALL
([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended) ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)
with the machine in use; therefore, be sure to obtain agreement from the user to execute
Format ALL.

Download the system software Download the system software

• BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD. for the main controller
• In the case of normal upgrading by cleaning the storage area of the system software
• User data will not be deleted. Automatically restart Automatically restart
To reinstall the system software, HDD formatting is not required.

Writing process Writing process

After formatting, this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded.
When Format ALL is executed, initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this
Automatically restart Automatically restart
machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode. In the case of
formatting BOOTDEV, the machine is not automatically restarted, but the system software
can be downloaded. Start in the new version Start in the new version
After formatting is executed, be sure to download the system software by “[1]: Upgrade
of the system software of the system software
(AUTO)” in main menu. F-6-147

6-90
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
6-91
●● [4]: Format HDD 4) Press the key on the Control Panel.
This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD. [1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu
screen.
Operation procedure [2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD/Any key other than [0]: To return to the
menu screen.
1) Enter download mode.
[C]: To return to the menu screen.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[4] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]

-------------------------------------
[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[7]: Clear downloaded files
[8]: download Menu 2
F-6-149
[9]: Other Menu
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset”
key.
/[4] has been selected. Execute?/
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -
5) Press any key to return to the menu screen.
F-6-148
6) Download the system software.
Refer to “Separate Download” for details.

6-91
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2
6-92
■■Backup ■■Clearing Download File
●● [5]: Backup ●● [7]: Clear downloaded files
This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD.
CAUTION: This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the
This function includes R&D review. system software in menu [2] or [3].
Do not usually use it other than the following function. Operation procedure
The USB memory collecting log uses the USB memory where You registered a system 1) After downloading by menu [2] or [3], press the “Reset” key to execute shutdown sequence,
software for this Host machine with by SST. and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears.
2) Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the
Main Power Switch).
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode. If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. machine in safe mode, the system software is deleted. In such a case, the following message
is displayed on the touch panel.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
“All downloaded file is deleted.”
[5] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
4) SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB 2
3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
[1] Sublog -> Collect debugging log.
[4] ServicePrint -> Save the service data which P-PRINT or etc. output to paper with a text 4) Remove the USB memory storage device.
format.

[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]] ■■Download Menu 2

ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー ●● [8]: Download Menu 2
[1]: Sublog [1]: Service Mode Password Clear
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap [[[[[ download Menu 2nd (USB) ]]]]]]
[C]: Return to Main Menu ------------------------------------
[1]: Service Mode Password Clear
[C]: Return to Main Menu
F-6-150

F-6-151

6-92
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-93
■■Other Menu Troubleshooting
●● [9]: Other Menu ■■Error Code: E753-0001
This mode displays other menu.
●● Cause
Operation procedure In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing
the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E753-
1) Enter download mode.
0001.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
●● Remedy
[9] -> [0]: To display other menu/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.
Be sure to check the system software with the error (error or NG) displayed.
●● [1]: Version Information Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the
This mode displays the version of download mode. correct target option, and then execute downloading again.

Upgrading by SST
Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the non-
connecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode.
In Single mode, it is available to download the system software of the option that is not
installed.
In the case of downloading the Finisher’s system software, make the download mode of
the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system
software of the Finisher with the version information displayed at the right side of the SST
screen.
In the case that Super G3FAX Board – AE1 is not installed or in the case of download mode
in safe mode, G3CCB/G3CCM is not displayed on the list of downloadable system software.

F-6-152
NOTE:
Press any key to return to the main menu. Image Reader has 2 types of system software: RCOND and RCONS.
Downloading both RCOND and RCONS results in writing of only the system software
that complies with the Image Reader installed in the Host Machine. When downloading
the system software that does not comply with the Image Reader installed in the Host
Machine, it results in skipping of writing process (it will not be an error).

6-93
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview
6-94

Version Upgrade via CDS

■■Overview
Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the
following 3 methods are available using Updater functions.

a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)

b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
d: Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in)
e: Update via SST

: Operator of each company : User operation

Firmware
Market Release
d
a e
b
c
Distribution
Firmware acquisition Register the
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1 firmware in the LCDS

Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Executing the task
Download Download Download
Automatic download Via Service mode Scheduled download Via User mode Download via SST from Device
Via User mode
(Local UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI) Firmware Update

Apply (Update) Apply (Update) Apply (Update)

Automatic update Via Service mode Scheduled update Via User mode Via User mode Update via SST Automatic update
(Local UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI)

F-6-153
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.

NOTE:
• See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
• When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the
communication with the distribution server is normal.

6-94
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Overview
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
6-95
■■Preparation • For Install of Application
Enabling [Install Application/
●● Overview of Preparation Installation Method Network Settings
Options] Button of User Mode
The following should be prepared before using Updater. LMS-linked Installation Yes -
• For updating of firmware LMA-linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes
COPIER > T-6-18
FUNCTION COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
Service Mode > INSTALL
CDS- ●● Setting Sales Company’s HQ
CDS-CTL CDS-FIRM LOCLFIRM LCDSFLG
UGW When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s
Enabling HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Enabling
Setting [Manual changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
[Update
Installation Sales Network Enabling Update] Enabling Default Setting of Sales Setting of Sales Company's
Firmware] Market
Method Company’s Settings UGW Link Button of [Local CDS] Company's HQ HQ after Change
Button of User
HQ User Mode Canada US CA
Mode
(Remote UI) Latin America US/SG LA
UGW-linked Hong Kong SG HK
Download and Yes Yes Yes - - - T-6-19
Update
UGW-linked Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.
Yes Yes Yes - - -
Download Service Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
Manual Technician (Level 1)
Download and Yes Yes - - - -
Update
Manual
Download and NOTE:
Yes Yes - Yes - -
Update via The list below shows the setting of Sales Company’s HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Local UI Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
Manual <List of Sales Company’s HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Download and
Yes Yes - Yes - - Japan = JP China = CN
Update via
Remote UI USA = US Hong Kong = HK
Special Singapore = SG Australia = AU
Download and Europe = NL Canada = CA
Yes - - - Yes -
Update via Korea = KR Latin America= LA
Remote UI
Scheduled
update via - - - Yes - Yes
Local CDS
T-6-17

6-95
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
6-96
●● Network Settings 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
1.Connecting to External Network
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.

NOTE:
• See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
• Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"

NOTE:
“External Network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.

2.Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

F-6-155
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server. 4. Press [Settings] button.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.

F-6-156

F-6-154

6-96
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
6-97
5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the
Note:
[Delivery Server URL] button.
For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one. number.
To display the button of the local CDS, execute Settings/Registration > Management
Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service
Delivery Server CDS mode.

6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.

3.Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.

F-6-157
Delivery Server Local CDS

F-6-159

F-6-158

6-97
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
6-98
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button. 5. Press [Yes] button.

F-6-162
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
F-6-160
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
4. Press [Test Communication] button.
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).

6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-6-161

F-6-163

6-98
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
6-99
●● Enabling UGW Link
When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW-
linked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Setting of Device
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW
Service Mode
(0 -> 1)
Service Technician (Level 1)
Setting of UGW In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not
WebPortal distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.

NOTE:
• See “imageWARE Remote Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation
Manual“ for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
• [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
• When using the Device Firmware Update Plug-in and Local CDS, it is necessary to
disable "UGW linkage".

6-99
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
6-100
■■a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update) ■■b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked Download and Update”. See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked download”.

STEP 1 STEP 1 STEP 2

Scheduling Scheduling Update using
via UGW via UGW Updater

F-6-164 F-6-165
STEP1: Scheduling via UGW STEP 1: Scheduling via UGW
The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW. The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See “UGW-linked Download and Update” in chapter 5 of Operation Manual of Content See “UGW-linked Download” in Operation Manual of Content Delivery System (for Firmware
Delivery System V1.0 for Firmware Distribution for details. Distribution) for details.

The device checks the schedule concerned every 12 hours on UGW. This allows the device
to register the firmware distribution setting, enabling automatic firmware download and NOTE:
The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from User
update.
mode, but cannot be updated. If a user download the other firmware, the firmware
downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.
CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
• Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during non-
business hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
• Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.

-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)

See Chapter 1 “Limitations and Cautions“ of this manual for more detailed information.

NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.

6-100
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
6-101
STEP 2: Update using Updater 3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
The firmware downloaded on the device can be updated using Updater functions.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.

F-6-167
4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.

F-6-166

F-6-168

6-101
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
6-102
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.
CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
• Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during non-
business hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
• Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.

-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)

See Chapter 1 “Limitations and Cautions“ of this manual for more detailed information.

F-6-169
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
NOTE:
firmware is successfully applied. To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.
1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of “Manual Download and Update”.

6-102
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-103
■■c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service 3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

Mode)
The figure below shows the operational flow of “Manual Download and Update”.

STEP 1 STEP 2
Download using Update using
Updater Updater

F-6-170
STEP 1: Download using Updater
The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

F-6-172
4. Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways.
• To update to the official edition, press [Confirm Applicable Firmware] button and go to Step 6.
• To update to the individual response edition, press [Special Firmware] and go to Step 5.

2. Press [Updater] button.

F-6-173

F-6-171

6-103
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-104
5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. 6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.

F-6-174
• [Retrieval ID]: F-6-175
• [Version]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
The current firmware version is shown.
• [Password]:
• [Applicable Firmware]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.
• [Additional Languages]:
If there are any additional languages, they are displayed.
More than 1 language can be selected, and it is possible to add another language when
upgrading the firmware.
Up to 8 languages can be added, including Japanese and English. The languages already
registered in the device are always selected, and SST is used to delete an unnecessary
language from the device.
• [Release Note]:
If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.

NOTE:
To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and
password that you input is displayed in [Applicable Firmware].

6-104
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-105
7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button. [E-mail]:
E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here.
Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge.
Enter 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters.
• [Comments]:
Enter the comment in 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 128 characters.
Enter the comment to be automatically included in E-mail. Model Name in the comment will
be helpful to identify the device relevant to the E-mail.

NOTE:
[Timing to Apply]
• For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in
[Timing to Apply]

[Updated Module Only]

• For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be
F-6-176 selected in [Updated Module Only].
• [Delivery Time]:
Press either [Now] or [Set Time] button. [E-mail]
• [Now]: • To send E-mails to multiple destinations, each E-mail address should be delimited with
The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set. comma (,) or semi-colon (;).
• [Set Time]: • For E-mail addresses entered in this field, a notification E-mail is sent at the following
Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on timing.
the specified date and time. -Distribution Set
-Distribution Started
Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of “yyyy/mm/dd -Distribution Finished
hh:mm:ss” -Update Started
-Update Finished
• [Timing to Apply]: -Error Occurred
Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button.
• [Auto]:
The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.
• [Manual]:
The firmware is automatically downloaded. Go to [Apply Firmware] to set up for
updating the downloaded firmware.
• [Updated Module Only]:
Press either [On] or [Off] button.
• [On]:
Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded.
• [Off]:
The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded.

6-105
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-106
8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept] • When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
button. [Manual], respectively:
Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.

F-6-177 F-6-179

9. One of the screens below is shown according to the setting. • When Distribution Time is set to [Set Time] in Distribution Setting:
• When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and Confirm the distribution schedule and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully
[Auto], respectively: completed.
Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device. The device is
automatically restarted upon update completed. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.

F-6-180

F-6-178

6-106
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-107
STEP 2: Update using Updater 3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is
updated automatically. Only when Timing to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to
update the firmware.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.

F-6-182
4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.

F-6-181

F-6-183

6-107
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6-108
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button. 7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.
1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of “Manual Download and Update”.

CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
• Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during non-
business hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
• Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
F-6-184
queue.
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied. -Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)

See Chapter 1 “Limitations and Cautions“ of this manual for more detailed information.

6-108
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-109
■■Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule 4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button.

This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.

3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

F-6-186
5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.

F-6-185

F-6-187
6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button. Now the
firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.

6-109
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-110
■■Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) 4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.

This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Press [Updater] button.

3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

F-6-189
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.

F-6-188

F-6-190
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.

6-110
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware
6-111
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. 4. Press [Delete Firmware] button.
1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.

■■Deleting Downloaded Firmware

This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

F-6-192
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button.
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

F-6-193
6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is
successfully deleted.

F-6-191

6-111
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Deleting Downloaded Firmware
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
6-112
■■Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation No.2
Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions.
No.1
Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like.
Symptom: I can’t find the firmware to be updated using Updater.
Action: Retry download. Firmware under download is cancelled upon aborted.
Cause: Preparation has not been properly done.
Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Company’s HQ bellow.
No.3
Setting of Device [SERVICE MODE] (Level1)
Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
device cannot be started.
Cause: The power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action: Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST.
1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device.
1) Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
2) [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI.
If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory,
service parts) should be replaced (takes up to 1 minute for rewriting).
If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps
below.

F-6-194 2. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.

Cause: The version currently in use is not available for update.
Action: Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version available 3. Via SST, install the firmware in the device.
for update.

Cause: You try to download firmware from User mode.You can download only the latest
version of firmware from User mode.
Action: Download from Service mode.

<User Mode> <Service Mode>

F-6-195
F-6-196

6-112
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports
6-113
No.4 ■■Information required for Reports
Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule.
Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held, ●● Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site
the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule. • Update Logs
Action: Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution • System Logs (Log Level: 4)
should be rescheduled for the firmware.
●● Information to Report
Cause: At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on • Symptom occurred
CDS. • Location of the device
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware. • Date and Time that symptom occurred
• Steps taken for reproduction
Cause: After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST. • Firmware / Application you tried to install
(Status of the firmware in the device is changed.) • Occurrence frequency
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware. • Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models)
• Dependency on firmware/MEAP application/system option
Cause: The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time. • Conditions of symptom occurrence
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware. • Model
• Firmware version installed on the device
Cause: The network between the updater and the CDS server has stopped. • List of MEAP applications installed on the device
Remedy: Conduct a communication test and check the state of network. • Network setting information of the device
There are some cases where the network is stopped only at night, during which update is • Service mode setting information
performed. If the communication test ended in success, check the state of network during the Setting of device service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
period when update is scheduled. (Level 1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
No.5
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-LVUP
Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded
was overridden by the newly downloaded one.
* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided
Action: Retry the firmware download.
will be helpful for investigation.

6-113
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Information required for Reports
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs
6-114
■■Debug Logs NOTE:
• See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 2 for details of changing Log Level
●● Obtaining Log Files
Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI.
This procedure is shown below. 4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the
original value and then restart the device to enable this setting.
1. Check that the “CDS-MEAP” or “CDS-FIRM” is enabled in the service mode. If they are not
enabled, change the value to “1” and then restart the device. Obtaining the log files is completed.
Service mode (Level1) > Mode List
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP: 1
• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM: 1

2. Log in the remote UI (URL: http://<device’s IP address or host name>) using the system
administrator right.

3. From “Display Logs/Communication Test” screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and
Update Logs by copy & paste.
Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/
Others] > [Register/Update Software] > “Display Logs/Communication Test”

F-6-197

6-114
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Debug Logs
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-115
■■Error Messages
Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list.
No. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy
1 An error occurred with the delivery In communicating with System error occurred in server. Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of
server. the delivery server. Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
Contact your sales representative. company.
Error Code: [xxx]
2 Delivery server is stopped. In communicating with Delivery server stopped. Check the delivery server stop information. After the delivery server starts, perform the
Wait a while and then try to perform the delivery server. operation from this application.
the operation again. When the delivery server stop information is not available, contact the sales company's
Check the following URL for details. Support Department.
<Stopped Delivery Server URL>
3 Failed to connect to delivery server. In communicating with Communication error due to incorrect settings of Set correct CDS URL in the Updater settings.
Check the delivery server and the delivery server. CDS URL.
network. Excluding delivery server stop, communication Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
error to the delivery server occurred. If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version
Upgrade via CDS” under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
4 Download was stopped because an At the time of file Communication error to the delivery server Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
error occurred with the file server. download occurred. If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version
Check the network. Upgrade via CDS” under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
5 Downloaded files are invalid. Check At the time of file The received file is broken. After checking the network environment of the device, re-execute the job.
the network. download If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
6 Failed to retrieve information of special Acquisition of applicable No information exists about firmware for special Enter the correct firmware ID or Password applicable to the firmware information.
firmware. firmware information firmware retrieval ID or Password is invalid. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Check the retrieval ID and password. Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
7 Scheduled delivery information of Acquisition of applicable Delivery information with specified delivery ID does Register the delivery schedule again. If this occurs at the time of canceling file download,
firmware does not exist. firmware information not exist. deleting downloaded firmware or deleting scheduled delivery, no remedy is required.
Check it because it may already have
been deleted.
8 Failed to apply firmware. Firmware application Error due to the application (NLM) Obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version Upgrade”of
error Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.

6-115
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-116
No. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy
9 Delivery Server : Connect Failed Communication test, In the communication test, failed to connect to the Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job.
File Server : Retrieve Failed etc. (communication test delivery server. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Error Code: [xxxx] result dialogue) In SOAP communication, failed to success after 1 Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
min retry. sales company.
ID and Password required for proxy to connect to Set proxy and restart the communication test.
the internet are not configured in device. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The access to the network is limited. Set the user environment to make the access to the following domain available.
https://device.cdsknn.net/
http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery server stopped. Contact Field Support Group in the sale company.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company again.
10 Delivery Server : Connect OK Delivery Server : Connect Due to no return of data for the communication Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
File Server : Retrieve Failed OK test, time-out (in HTTP communication, no If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Error Code: [xxxx] File Server : Retrieve response for 1min) occurred. After that, retried but Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Failed failed to connect to server. sales company.
Error Code: [XXXX] The network cable was disconnected during data Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test.
download in the communication test. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The file server stopped during data download in Contact the sales company's Support Department.
the communication test. After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company again.
Hash value in the communication test file is Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
incorrect. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.

6-116
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-117
No. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy
11 An error occurred. communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new Check if the log file exceeded the max value.
Error Code: [xxx] (main screen) log was not accepted. <Update log>
Normally an old log file is deleted before the max Max space: 128KB/file
value (space/file) is exceeded, but error may occur Max file number: 4
due to other element (e.g. I/O error).
<System log>
Max space: 512KB/file
Max file number: 4

If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Notice of version Failed to acquire version information of device Re-execute the job.
information (main screen) due to no CDS registration of firmware version of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
device. Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the time of notifying version information, failed to Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
connect to the delivery server. If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version
No return of notifying version information Upgrade via CDS” under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
Network cable was disconnected during notice of Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
version information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Failed to send notice of version information since Re-execute the job.
the main power was turned OFF and then ON If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
during the sending. Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Server stopped at the time of sending notice of Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
version information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending Obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version Upgrade”of
notice of version information. Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.

6-117
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-118
No. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy
11 An error occurred. UGW linkage (main UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF
Error Code: [xxx] screen) OFF. the UGW linkage.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
delivery information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
On-site (error dialogue) An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
applicable firmware information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending Re-execute the job.
approval information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of delivery Re-execute the job.
order If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Immediate download An internal error occurred at the time of requesting Re-execute the job.
(error dialogue) firmware delivery information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
During the download, all space in the storage disk After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the job.
was occupied. (DiskFull) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the end of receipt, an internal error occurred. Re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Manual update (error At the update start, an internal error occurred. Re-execute the job.
dialogue) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company
Automatic update (error At the update start, an internal error occurred. Re-execute the job.
dialogue) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Deletion of downloaded At the time of notifying cancellation, an internal Re-execute the job.
firmware error occurred. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.

6-118
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-119
No. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy
12 An error occurred. Check the Update UGW linkage (main eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
Firmware screen. screen) to server. resend the order from the eRDS.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery server stopped. Contact the sales company's Support Department.
After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Scheduled date and time acquired from the Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
delivery server was before current time (15 or more If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
min had passed.) Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Scheduled data and time acquired from the Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
delivery server did not exist. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Immediate download At the time of immediate download, turned OFF Re-execute the job.
(main screen) and then ON the power of device main body. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Manual update (main Updated version was different from the ordered Re-execute the job.
screen) version. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Automatic update (main Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
screen) sales company.
After the update, failed to connect to the delivery Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
server. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, delivery server stopped. Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, the network cable was Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
disconnected. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, server returned an error. Obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version Upgrade”of
Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.
After the update, an internal error occurred. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.

6-119
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
6-120
No. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy
13 Delivery Error UGW linkage (Update eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
Error Code: [xxx] Firmware screen) to the server. resend the order from the eRDS.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The delivery server stopped. Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The scheduled data and time acquired from Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
delivery server does not exist. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
14 Delivery Error UGW linkage (Update The scheduled date and time acquired from Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
Delivery Time Firmware screen) delivery server was before current time (15 or more If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Delivery Firmware Label min had passed). Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Delivery Firmware version sales company.
Error Code: [ xxx ] Immediate download At the time of immediate download, turned OFF Re-execute the job.
(Update Firmware and then ON the power of device main body. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
screen) Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
15 Applicable firmware is not registered. On-site (error dialogue) At the user site, no latest firmware exists. This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has no impact.
But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g. released new firmware
information has been notified, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
No applicable firmware exists on CDS, so the Contact the sales company's Support Department.
service person can't select any applicable firmware.
16 Restart failed. Manual update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
Turn the main power OFF and ON. dialogue) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Automatic update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
dialogue) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to “Version Upgrade via CDS” under “Version
Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
17 Specify [E-Mail Address] with up to 64 At the time of periodical The specified E-mail address exceeded 64 Specify E-mail address within 64 characters.
characters. update setting characters.
18 The following characters cannot be At the time of periodical The E-mail address was including the characters Do not specify E-mail address with characters which cannot be used.
used for the [E-Mail Address]: update setting which could not be used.
,:;“()[]<>\
19 Specify [Comments] with up to 128 At the time of periodical Comments exceeded 128 characters. Specify comments within 128 characters.
characters. update setting
20 The [Delivery Server URL] is incorrect. In setting with the deliver The specified deliver server URL is wrong. Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif)
server URL.
T-6-20

6-120
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Messages
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > How to read an error code
6-121
■■Error Code
The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the device (local UI) and explanation of those error codes.

■■How to read an error code

84014206 Code Value Contents

Local UI The first digit 8 Error

Error field
The second digit 0 Not defined.
Operator 1 CDS server
2 Updater
3 UGW
4 Service person
5 IT administrator (User)
6 Scheduled Update
The 3rd - 4th digits XX Method
Error Message dialogue Method category
The 5th digit 0 Category code
Category code 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
The 6 - 8th digits 000- See Error code list
Description code

F-6-198

6-121
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > How to read an error code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
6-122
■■List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
In the list shown below, error codes which are likely to be displayed are classified into two groups:
• Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81")
• Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86")

When an error code is displayed, check this list first. If it is not in this list, see "Error Code".

●● Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81")
Error Description Remedy
Code (hex
number)
Error codes starting with "81": CDS server
81021008 As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no applicable device code product Check registration of LMS. (CINC)
81040002 In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type is/are set against the regulations When 81040002 is displayed:
81040002 is displayed in the following cases: Enter the correct ID and password for Special Firmware. (User)

• The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8.

• The registration ID or password includes characters other than single-byte numeric characters.
81041012 Device is "Not applicable to CDS" (Firmware distribution) Register the device as a CDS device.
* It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed.
81060002 In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type is/are set against the regulations When 81060002 is displayed due to an error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or
81060002 is displayed in the following cases: Firmware Group Version, register the correct firmware again.(CINC)
• The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type, Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or
Firmware Label does not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters. When 81060002 is displayed due to an invalid e-mail address, register the correct
• The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) includes characters other than numeric e-mail address. (User)
values.
• The number of digits of E-mail Address mailAddress) is larger than 128.
• Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols are used for E-mail Address
(mailAddress).
• An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, .(dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.)
81081014 When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time-out. Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.
CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time. The device has been turned OFF, the
network has been disconnected, etc.
81091001 81091001 is displayed in the following cases: If distribution of the firmware is necessary, search the applicable firmware again, and
• The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of distribution differs from the firmware perform distribution of the firmware.
information of the device at the time of registration of the distribution schedule.■
The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution schedule for the device that supports the
UGW-linked function had been registered.
• As a result, the firmware information of the CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the
firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of the distribution schedule.■
When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated was disabled after distribution schedule was
registered using auto update.
8106100A The delivery status is Applying After 2 hours and 30 minutes have passed since the failed attempt to distribute
After the firmware was updated and when an update completion notification has not been sent to CDS, the firmware, search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the
distribution of the firmware was attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS. firmware.

6-122
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
6-123
Error Description Remedy
Code (hex
number)
8108100D The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.
8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule information was checked with CDS. (CDS has
not been notified of the status change due to a network
810A1015 When firmware distribution time-out occurs. Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.
A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours after the start of the distribution. The
device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc.
810B1010 The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.
810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid status. (The CDS server failed to receive
the status change due to a network error, etc.)
810C1016 Firmware update time-out occurred. Check the device to see if the update has been completed. When the update has
An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after 2 hours since the start of the update. ended in failure, execute the operation again if there is no problem with the device.
T-6-21

●● Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86")
Error Description Remedy
Code (hex
number)
Error codes starting with "82": Updater
82001106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update processing. Start the operation again after terminating the job of the device
82005202 Failed to connect to the server Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS
server), and start the operation again.
82005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
82005204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
82005205 Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
82005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment.
82005300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
82005304 Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
82005308 Invalid hash code of the download file Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
82005309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
82007502 The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a certain period of time due to the power of the Scheduled deliveries not executed within the defined period of time are abandoned,
device being OFF at the scheduled time or other reasons. so register a scheduled delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the scheduled delivery, be sure to designate a time
when the device is ON.
82095204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
82095206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment.

6-123
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
6-124
Error Description Remedy
Code (hex
number)
82095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
82095309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
Error codes starting with "84": Service person
84001106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update processing. Start the operation again after terminating the job of the device
84005202 Failed to connect to the server Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS
server), and start the operation again.
84005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
84005204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
84005205 Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
84005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment.
84005300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
84005304 Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
84005308 Invalid hash code of the download file Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
84005309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
84095203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
84095204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
84095205 Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
84095206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment.
84095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
84095309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
Error codes starting with "85" :IT administrator (User)
85001106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update processing. Start the operation again after terminating the job of the device
85005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
85005204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.

6-124
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
6-125
Error Description Remedy
Code (hex
number)
85005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment.
85005300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
85005308 Invalid hash code of the download file Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
85005309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
85095203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
85095204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
85095206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment.
85095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
850C1104 Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after issuing delivery ID) Start the operation again from the beginning
Error codes starting with "86": Scheduled Update
86001106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update processing. Start the operation again after terminating the job of the device
86005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
86005204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
86005205 Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
86005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment.
86005300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
86005304 Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
86005305 Failed to receive the data Check that no problem is found in the HDD.
When this error occurs again, contact Support Group of sales companies.
86005308 Invalid hash code of the download file Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again.
86005309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)
86095203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the
operation again.
86095204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication
test. If any problem was found, check the network environment.
86095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment.
T-6-22

6-125
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-126
■■Error Code
The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 Error
8 0 Not defined.
8 1 CDS server
8 1 x x Relating method code
8 1 x x 0 Not categorized
8 1 x x 0 001 No value is set in a mandatory data entry item Contact the support department of the Yes - Yes - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 0 002 In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type When 81040002 is displayed: Yes - Yes - -
is/are set against the regulations • Enter the correct ID and password for
81040002 is displayed in the following cases: Special Firmware. (User)
• The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8.
• The registration ID or password includes characters other than When 81060002 is displayed due to an
single-byte numeric characters. error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or
Firmware Group Version:
81060002 is displayed in the following cases: • Register the correct firmware again.
• The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type, (CINC)
Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or Firmware Label does
not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters. When 81060002 is displayed due to an
• The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) invalid e-mail address: - Register the
includes characters other than numeric values. correct e-mail address. (User)
• The number of digits of E-mail Address (mailAddress) is larger than
128.
• Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and
symbols are used for E-mail Address (mailAddress).
• An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, .
(dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.)
8 1 x x 0 003 In an data entry item, the value is set against the regulations Contact the support department of the Yes - Yes - -
(E.g. the set value is other than "Operator: 4. Service person, 5. User") sales company.
8 1 x x 0 004 No applicable delivery information exists Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.

6-126
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-127
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 1 x x 1 Operation
8 1 x x 1 001 Inconsistency between the current firmware component in the data If distribution of the firmware is necessary, Yes - Yes - -
entry item and delivery information (E.g. the conditions for automatic search the applicable firmware again,
update are not met. The settings of a mandatory additional set are and perform distribution of the firmware.
invalid)

81071001 is displayed in the following cases:

• A cancellation notification was sent to CDS when the distribution
status was not correct. (CDS has not received the status change due
to a network failure, etc.)

81091001 is displayed in the following cases:

• The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of
distribution differs from the firmware information of the device at the
time of registration of the distribution schedule.
• The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution
schedule for the device that supports the UGW-linked function
had been registered. As a result, the firmware information of the
CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the
firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of
the distribution schedule.
• When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated
was disabled after distribution schedule was registered using auto
update.
8 1 x x 1 002 In a notice of delivery-allowed information, an install-set was release to Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
the market, but the market release was stopped during the delivery sales company.
8 1 x x 1 003 No mail template file exists Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 1 004 The device serial number in the data entry item differs from that in Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
delivery information sales company.
8 1 x x 1 005 User is selected as Operator in the data entry items and the retrieval Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
type is other than the latest sales company.
8 1 x x 1 006 The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and registration Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
ID and individual Password are not set (* Operator did not enter sales company.
registration ID and individual Password)
8 1 x x 1 007 The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and Operator is not Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
Service person sales company.
8 1 x x 1 008 As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no Check registration of LMS. (CINC) Yes - - - -
applicable device code product
8 1 x x 1 009 The retrieval type in the data entry items is special and there are no Enter correct ID and the password. Yes - - - -
basic-set applicable to the registration ID and Password (* When
wrong registration ID or Password was entered by an operator)

6-127
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-128
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 1 x x 1 00A The delivery status is Applying After 2 hours and 30 minutes have Yes - - - -
After the firmware was updated and when an update completion passed since the failed attempt to
notification has not been sent to CDS, distribution of the firmware was distribute the firmware, search the
attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS. applicable firmware again, and perform
distribution of the firmware.
8 1 x x 1 00B No approval information exists about EULA or the export criteria when Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
the delivery is determined sales company.
8 1 x x 1 00C The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again, Yes - - - -
When the distribution status was not correct, distribution information and perform distribution of the firmware.
was obtained from CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the status
change due to a network failure, etc.)
8 1 x x 1 00D The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again, Yes - - - -
8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule and perform distribution of the firmware.
information was checked with CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the
status change due to a network

8 1 x x 1 00E The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributed/Applying/ Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
Finished/Failed sales company.
8 1 x x 1 00F The delivery code is other than Distributing. Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
(Firmware distribution) sales company.
8 1 x x 1 010 The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/Applying/ Search the applicable firmware again, Yes - - - -
Finished/Failed and perform distribution of the firmware.
810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid
status. (The CDS server failed to receive the status change due to a
network error, etc.)
8 1 x x 1 011 The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 1 012 Device is "Not applicable to CDS" Register the device as a CDS device. Yes - - - -
(Firmware distribution)
* It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed.
8 1 x x 1 013 When the specified distribution time was within the time frame of CDS Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
distribution stop. sales company.
(Firmware distribution)
8 1 x x 1 014 When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time- Search the applicable firmware again, Yes - - - -
out. and perform distribution of the firmware.
CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time.
The device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected,
etc.
8 1 x x 1 015 When firmware distribution time-out occurs. Search the applicable firmware again, Yes - - - -
A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours and perform distribution of the firmware.
after the start of the distribution. The device has been turned OFF, the
network has been disconnected, etc.

6-128
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-129
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 1 x x 1 016 Firmware update time-out occurred. Check the device to see if the update has Yes - - - -
An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after been completed. When the update has
2 hours since the start of the update. ended in failure, execute the operation
again if there is no problem with the
device.
8 1 x x 1 017 When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
in processing the distribution information. sales company.
8 1 x x 1 018 When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
in processing the scheduled update information. sales company.
8 1 x x 1 019 When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set", Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
"Finished", or "Failed". sales company.
8 1 x x 1 020 When the status of the scheduled update information is "Waiting to Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
Transmit" or "New". sales company.
8 1 x x 1 021 When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set". Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 1 022 The scheduled update setting information differs between the input Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
information and the distribution information. sales company.
8 1 x x 1 023 When the distribution status is "Cancel". Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 2 I/O
8 1 x x 2 001 The specified license access number does not exist in LMS Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 2 002 The specified license access number has been deauthorized Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 2 003 The package product of the entered license access number doesn't Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
include MEAP application/System Option sales company.
8 1 x x 2 004 The sales company for the MEAP application isn't identical with the Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sale company for the package product sales company.
8 1 x x 2 005 The number of licenses to be issued will exceed the limit number Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
allowed to register sales company.
8 1 x x 2 006 As for System Option for the same function, the license keys were Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
issued more than the defined number of times for the same device sales company.
serial number
8 1 x x 2 007 No device product exists applicable to the optional product Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 2 008 No product exists applicable to the device serial number Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 2 009 The product of the entered license access number cannot be used with Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
this device because the settings of the sales company are incorrect sales company.
8 1 x x 2 00A No product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
for delivery sales company.

8 1 x x 2 00B Although the product linked to the license access number is registered Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
in CDS for delivery, the delivery is stopped now sales company.
8 1 x x 2 00C No existence of optional product applicable to the device serial number.Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.

6-129
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-130
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 1 x x 2 00D The license access number has been registered for another device Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x 2 00E For the device product applicable to the device serial number, no Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
available software (MEAP application, System Option) exists sales company.
8 1 x x 2 010 LMS system error Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
* In support of multi-manifest, when the MFP/SFP section value shows sales company.
any value other than 0 or 1, LMS returns an error code "-215" to
CDS.
8 1 x x 2 011 LMS system error Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
* In the case of failure in collection of manifest in support of multi- sales company.
manifest, LMS returns an error code "-999" to CDS.
8 1 x x 2 012 License cannot be issued for the upgrade product. Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
Since the configuration has been changed in the upgrade product, sales company.
there are no applications and options for which a license can be
issued.
8 1 x x 2 013 Not registered in CSA Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
CSA associated with the license access number does not include any sales company.
products associated with the group ID.
8 1 x x F L-CDS
8 1 x x F 000 Unclassified Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
sales company.
8 1 x x F 001 Communication test information not registered Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Download file information for communication test does not exist. sales company.
8 1 x x F 003 Firmware information not registered Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Firmware information corresponding to the target device serial number sales company.
does not exist.
8 1 x x F 007 Invalid firmware version Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
The firmware version at the time of registration of the distribution sales company.
schedule differs from the current firmware version.
8 1 x x F 008 Invalid firmware information Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Firmware information to be distributed does not exist. sales company.
8 1 x x F 009 Forcible termination Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Distribution information is forcibly terminated from the server UI. sales company.
8 1 x x F 00F Invalid distribution status Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Distribution status of the server is in a condition where a requested sales company.
method from the client cannot be accepted.
8 1 x x F 010 Invalid parameter Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Requested parameter from the client is not correct. sales company.
8 1 x x F 011 Version information not registered Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Version information corresponding to the specified serial number has sales company.
not been registered.
8 1 x x F 012 Distribution time-out Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Distribution has not been completed even after a certain period of time sales company.
from the start of the distribution.

6-130
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-131
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 1 x x F 013 Unable to judge the necessity of distribution Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Version information from a device has not been registered in the local sales company.
CDS. ■
Since the local CDS does not know the version information of the
device, it cannot respond to the distribution request from updater. As a
result of that, an error occurred when the request has been made.
8 1 x x F FFE DB error Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
General error to access DB. sales company.
8 1 x x F FFF DB error Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
Internal error other than error to access DB (file I/O, etc.). sales company.
8 2~6
8 2~6 x x Relating method code
8 2~6 x x 0 Not cartelized
8 2~6 x x 0 000 Not defined Normally not indicated
8 2~6 x x 0 100 Unknown error Normally not indicated
8 2~6 x x 1 Operation
8 2~6 x x 1 001 Processing exclusively Start the operation again after terminating - - Yes - -
other Updater operations being executed
simultaneously
8 2~6 x x 1 002 Stopped Restart the device, and start the - - Yes - -
operation again.
8 2~6 x x 1 101 Failed to process preparation for use Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 102 Failed to process use end Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 103 Time out during restart of readiness preparation Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 104 Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after issuing Start the operation again from the - - Yes - -
delivery ID) beginning
8 2~6 x x 1 105 CDS URL is not set Set CDS URL - - Yes - -
8 2~6 x x 1 106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update Start the operation again after terminating - - Yes - -
processing. the job of the device
8 2~6 x x 1 201 Specifying of an iR option for a model that does not support iR options Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 202 Specifying of scheduled update for a model that does not support Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
scheduled update sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 203 Firmware processing for a model that does not support firmware Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
processing sales company.

8 2~6 x x 1 204 L-CDS update process for a model that does not support L-CDS Contact the support department of the - Yes - - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 301 Security Token verification error Contact the support department of the - - - - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 302 Privilege check error Perform the authentication as a correct - - - - Yes
user.
8 2~6 x x 1 303 Parameter error Contact the support department of the - - - - Yes
sales company.

6-131
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-132
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 2~6 x x 1 304 There is no distribution information from the server. Contact the support department of the - - - - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 305 Version notification is not required. Contact the support department of the - - - - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 1 306 Connection server information mismatch error Check the connection server settings. - - - - Yes
8 2~6 x x 2 I/O
8 2~6 x x 2 1xx An internal error about file operation Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 2 2xx An internal error about xML file operation Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 2 301 Failed to output the license file Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 2 400 Codes other than the following "4xx" definition Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 2 401 Failure in creation of an auto shutdown stop file Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 2 402 Failure in deletion of the auto shutdown stop file Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 3 Device
8 2~6 x x 3 1xx An internal error in CPCA Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 3 2xx An internal error in IMI Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 3 3xx An internal error in SMS Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 3 4xx An internal error in NLM Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 3 5xx Configuration Service property setting error Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 3 6xx An internal error related to APL_CDS partition Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 3 7xx DCM-related service error Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 SOAP communication
8 2~6 x 4 101 The processing thread stopped Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 102 Processing SOAP communication now Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 103 The function type is not matched Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 104 An invalid SOAP response error Check the network environment. Yes - - - -
When this problem recurs, contact
the support department of the sales
company.
8 2~6 x x 4 201 An internal error about application information Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.

6-132
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-133
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 2~6 x x 4 202 config.xml is NOT FOUND Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 203 type.xml is NOT FOUND Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 204 An error in binding type.xml Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.

8 2~6 x x 4 205 An error in creating a service tab Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 206 A runtime error in performing the web method Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 207 An unknown host error in performing the web method • Check the network environment of the Yes - Yes - Yes
device and start the operation again
• Check if the URL settings of the
CDS server are correct, and start the
operation again after resetting
8 2~6 x x 4 301 The delivery server is stopped Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 4 302 <In the case of scheduled update> <In the case of scheduled update> Yes - Yes - -
In response to a download start notification sent from the device, the Specify the distribution settings again,
distribution server returned an error and stopped the operation of the making sure that the distribution server
device within a certain period of time before the distribution server maintenance time and the scheduled
maintenance time. update time do not overlap.

<In the case of distribution executed by specifying the date and time> <In the case of distribution executed by
The firmware version of the device at the time when the distribution specifying the date and time>
settings were specified and the version at the time immediately before Specify the distribution settings again,
update are different. making sure that the firmware version of
device at the time when the distribution
settings are specified and the version at
the time immediately before update are
the same.
8 2~6 x x 5 HTTP communication
8 2~6 x x 5 101 Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 102 Download file URL is invalid Check the URL setting of CDS server, - - Yes - -
reset the setting, and then start the
operation again.
8 2~6 x x 5 103 No network cable connection (device side) Check the network environment of the - - Yes - -
device, and start the operation again.
8 2~6 x x 5 201 Invalid HTTP request Contact the support department of the - - Yes Yes Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 202 Failed to connect to the server Check the network environment of the - - Yes Yes Yes
device (check for any problem in the DNS
server), and start the operation again.

6-133
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-134
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 2~6 x x 5 203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the - - Yes Yes Yes
device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start
the operation again.
8 2~6 x x 5 204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the Check that no problem is found in - - Yes Yes Yes
server the two items displayed during the
8 2~6 x x 5 205 Failed to read a HTTP response communication test. If any problem was - - Yes Yes Yes
found, check the network environment.
8 2~6 x x 5 206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. - - Yes Yes Yes
8 2~6 x x 5 207 Generation of secure socket failed. Contact the support department of the - Yes Yes Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 208 Certificate check error Contact the support department of the - - Yes Yes Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 209 Connection time-out Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition Check that no problem is found in the Yes - Yes Yes Yes
proxy settings and network environment.
8 2~6 x x 5 301 Failed to retrieve the data stream Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 302 Failed to create the file object for receipt Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 303 Failed to create the data stream of the file for receipt Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 304 Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the - - Yes Yes Yes
device, and start the operation again.
8 2~6 x x 5 305 An error about reserving the file data for receipt Check that no problem is found in the - - Yes - -
HDD.
When this error occurs again, contact
Support Group of sales companies.
8 2~6 x x 5 306 Failed to close the data stream Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 307 Failed to close the file data for receipt Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 5 308 Invalid hash code of the download file Check the network environment of the Yes - Yes Yes Yes
device, and start the operation again.
8 2~6 x x 5 309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the Check the proxy authentication method - - Yes - Yes
CDS file server is not permitted. being used, change the setting to use a
supported proxy authentication, and then
start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL is
permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol:
http)

6-134
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-135
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 2~6 x x 6 Socket communication
8 2~6 x x 6 101 Failed to connect the eRDS Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 6 102 No response from eRDS Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 6 103 No notice of start from the eRDS Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 6 104 Error of socket reading Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 6 105 Socket communication time-out Contact the support department of the - - Yes - Yes
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 Other internal codes
8 2~6 x x 7 002 One of installation, start or authorization failed Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
(When installation or authorization failed, it is regarded as an error) * sales company.

8 2~6 x x 7 03x An internal error in processing the installation Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 1xx An error by using invalid API Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 2xx An internal error in SMS Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 301 No existence of delivery ID Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 302 Invalid delivery ID Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 303 The updated firmware information is not identical with the firmware Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
information after activation of the Updater sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 304 The process of firmware download is incomplete Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
It occurs when the power of the device is turned OFF during download. sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 305 The update process is incomplete Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
The power was turned OFF after completion of download and before sales company.
start of update processing.
8 2~6 x x 7 306 The installment process is incomplete Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 401 Failed to retrieve delivery information Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 501 Failed to execute the delivery process Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 2~6 x x 7 502 The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a Scheduled deliveries not executed - - Yes - -
certain period of time due to the power of the device being OFF at the within the defined period of time are
scheduled time or other reasons. abandoned, so register a scheduled
delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the
scheduled delivery, be sure to designate
a time when the device is ON

6-135
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-136
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 2~6 x x A Internal Module
8 2~6 x x A xxx Communication error in the internal module Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
sales company.
8 x
8 x x x
8 x x x 1 I/O
8 x x x 1 200 An error occurred in the CDS server. Contact the support department of the - - Yes - -
8 x x x 1 201 sales company. Yes - - - -
8 x x x 1 202 Yes - - - -
8 x x x 1 203 Yes - - - -
8 x x x 3 Device
8 x x x 3 303 Restart of the device failed. Restart the device, and perform the - - Yes - -
operation again.
8 x x x 3 304 When this problem recurs, obtain the - - Yes - -
Updater log, and contact the support
department of the sales company.
8 x x x 3 401 Application of the firmware failed. Obtain the Updater log, and contact - - Yes - -
8 x x x 3 402 the support department of the sales - - Yes - -
8 x x x 3 403 company. - - Yes - -
8 x x x 3 404 - - Yes - -
8 x x x 3 405 - - Yes - -
8 x x x 3 406 - - Yes - -
8 x x x 3 407 Restart of the device failed. Restart the device, and perform the - - Yes - -
operation again.
When this problem recurs, obtain the
Updater log, and contact the support
department of the sales company.
8 x x x 3 409 Application of the firmware failed. Obtain the Updater log, and contact - - Yes - -
the support department of the sales
company.
8 x x x 4 SOAP communication
8 x x x 4 104 An error occurred in the CDS server. Contact the support department of the Yes - - - -
sales company.
8 x x x 4 207 An error occurred in the CDS server due to an unknown host error at Check the network environment of the Yes - Yes Yes Yes
execution of Web method. device, and then check that the URL
setting of the CDS server is correct, and
perform the operation again.

6-136
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
6-137
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th CDS Local UP CDS file Network
digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits delivery CDS DATER server
field digit Method Category Description server server
Operator category code code
8 x x x 5 HTTP communication
8 x x x 5 101 Download was canceled due to an error that occurred in the file server. Check the network environment. - - Yes - -
8 x x x 5 201 When there is no problem with the - - Yes Yes Yes
8 x x x 5 202 network environment, collect the Updater - - Yes Yes Yes
8 x x x 5 203 log, and contact the support department - - Yes Yes Yes
8 x x x 5 204 - - Yes Yes Yes
8 x x x 5 205 of the sales company. - - Yes Yes Yes
8 x x x 5 206 - - Yes Yes Yes
8 x x x 5 300 - - Yes - Yes
8 x x x 5 301 - - Yes - Yes
8 x x x 5 302 - - Yes - Yes
8 x x x 5 303 - - Yes - Yes
8 x x x 5 304 - - Yes Yes Yes
8 x x x 5 305 - - Yes - -
8 x x x 5 306 - - Yes - -
8 x x x 5 307 - - Yes - -
8 x x x 5 309 - - Yes - Yes
8 x x x 5 308 An error occurred in the CDS server due to an invalid hash code of Check the network environment, and - - Yes Yes Yes
download file. perform the operation again.
When there is no problem with the
network environment, collect the Updater
log, and contact the support department
of the sales company.
* Not displayed on a device UI T-6-23

6-137
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Code
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function
6-138
■■Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function
Codes displayed as eRDS errors when the UGW-linked function is used
Error Code (hex number) Description Remedy Cause of error
The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits CDS UP CDS file Network
digit Error digit digits Method Category Description delivery DATER server
field Operator category code code server
8 Error
x
x x
0 Unclassified
000 An unexpected error occurred in the device. Restart the device, and perform the operation again. - Yes - -
When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device
needs to be reinstalled (upgraded).
002 A time-out error occurred due to no response from Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department - Yes - -
Updater within the specified time (3 seconds). of the sales company.
101 Processing in the device (event processing) Restart the device, and perform the operation again. - Yes - -
failed. Restart the device, and perform the When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device
operation again. needs to be reinstalled (upgraded).
303 Queue could not be sent due to failure of Restart the device, and perform the operation again. - Yes - -
processing in the device (event processing). When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device
needs to be reinstalled (upgraded).
304 An error occurred in control of synchronization or Wait for a while, and perform a communication test - Yes - -
interruption processing between processes being again.
handled in parallel.
706 Communication with Updater failed. Restart the device, and perform the operation again - Yes - -
after checking that Updater has been started.
707 When this problem recurs, obtain the sublog, and - Yes - -
708 contact the support department of the sales company. - Yes - -
709 At the time of firmware update, the Tracking Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department - Yes - -
ID ordered by UGW and the one to which the of the sales company.
Updater responded did not match.
T-6-24

6-138
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function
 6 Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
6-139
■■Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
●● Scenes Where an Error Occurs
When an error code not included in the error code list is displayed, one of the errors shown in the following scenes may have occurred.

Scenes Where an Error Occurs

Scenes Where an Error Occurs Content
Communication test, etc. (main screen) Log could not be written due to maximum value (capacity/the number of files) being exceeded.
Version information notification (main screen) Retrieval of device version information ended in failure because the firmware version of the device was not registered in CDS.
Connection to the delivery server failed at the time of notification of version information.
The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information.
Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was restarted during notification of version information.
UGW linkage (main screen) UGW linkage was turned ON while eRDS was OFF.
On-site (error dialog) An internal error occurred when obtaining the applicable firmware information.
Immediate download (error dialog) An internal error occurred at the time of request of firmware delivery information.
Free space in the storage destination disk ran out during download. (DiskFull)
Manual/auto update (error dialog) An internal error occurred at start of update.
Deletion of downloaded firmware An internal error occurred at the time of cancellation notification.
T-6-25

●● Remedy
Check that the log files shown below do not exceed the maximum values.
When this problem recurs, obtain the log, and contact the support department of the sales company.

Logs and maximum capacity / number

Log name Maximum capacity Maximum number of files
Update log 128KB/ file 4
System log 512KB/ file 4
T-6-26

6-139
6
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via CDS > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
7 Error Code
■
■Over
■
■Error
View
Code
■
■Jam Code
■
■Alarm Code

7
Error Code
 7 Error Code > Over View > Outline > Pickup size
7-2

Over View ■■Pickup position code

When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
Outline In the jam display screen, the “P” row corresponds to the pickup position code.
Pickup position Pickup position code
■■Outline At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup 0
operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the Right deck 1
product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows. Left deck 2
Code type Explanation Reference Cassette 3 3
Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. p. 7-4 Cassette4 4
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. p. 7-130 Multi-purpose Tray 5
Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is p. 7-146 Side Paper Deck 6
malfunctioned. Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through F0
the Duplex Paper Sensor (PS24).)
• Error code notation T-7-1
Multi-drawer Paper Deck-A1 Upper deck 11
An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. Middle deck 12
However, [000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using Lower deck 13
5 to 7 digit in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012) Document Insertion Unit Upper tray 2A
Lower tray 2B
Document Insertion / Folding Unit 28
■■Location Code T-7-3

Error code and jam code include the location information. ■■Pickup size
Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows.
When a jam occurs, a paper size is displayed. (The row displaying "SIZE" on the jam screen
In the jam display screen, the “L” row corresponds to the location code.
refers to the paper size.)
Device DISPLAY>JAM DISPLAY>ERR
Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters, some paper size names are
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C9075 PRO/9065 PRO 00 Main Controller = 00
Printer engine = 05 omitted. The following is the list of displayed row of texts and corresponding paper sizes.
Color Image Reader Unit - A1(Reader+DADF) 01 04 * The following is based on the display specification and not all paper sizes can actually be
Multi Color Image Reader - A1(Reader+DADF) used.
POD Deck Light - A1 00 05
Paper Deck Unit - A1 00 05
Display Paper Size Display Paper Size
Multi Deck - A1 00 05 A0 A0 LDR LEDGER
Buffer Path Unit - F1 00 05 A1 A1 LDRFB LEDGERFULLBLEED
Insertion Unit -H1 02 05 A2 A2 LGL LEGAL
Insertion Unit -J1 02 05 A3 A3 LTR LETTER
Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 02 05 A3FB A3FULLBLEED EXE EXECUTIVE
Professional Puncher - C1 02 05 A4 A4 STMT STATEMENT
/ Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1 A5 A5 10x8 10x8
Paper Folding Unit - G1 02 05 A6 A6 12x18 12x18
External 2(2/3,2/4,4)-hole Puncher - A1 02 05 A7 A7 13x19 13x19
Saddle Finisher - A1/Staple Finisher - A1 02 05 I-B0 ISOB0 15x11 15x11
Saddle Finisher - B1/Staple Finisher - B1 02 05 I-B1 ISOB1 17x22 17x22
Inner Trimmer - A1 02 05 I-B2 ISOB2 18x24 18x24
T-7-2
I-B3 ISOB3 A-FLS Australian-FOOLSCAP
I-B4 ISOB4 ALGL Argentina-LEGAL

7-2
7
Error Code > Over View > Outline > Pickup size
 7 Error Code > Over View > Outline > Measures for E747
7-3
Display Paper Size Display Paper Size ■■Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON
I-B5 ISOB5 ALTR Argentina-LETTER
I-B6 ISOB6 OFI OFICIO • Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings,
I-B7 ISOB7 A-OFI Argentina-OFICIO Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set
I-C0 ISOC0 B-OFI Bolivia-OFICIO Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation,
I-C1 ISOC1 E-OFI Ecuador-OFICIO ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
I-C2 ISOC2 M-OFI Mexico-OFICIO
• When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is,
I-C3 ISOC3 KLGL Korea-LEGAL
I-C4 ISOC4 GLGL Government-LEGAL error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and
I-C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government-LETTER switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status.
I-C6 ISOC6 IND-LGL India-LEGAL •
I-C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10
I-SRA3 SRA3 DL DL ■■Points to Note When Clearing HDD
J-B0 JISB0 E_C2 Nagagata 2 As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the
J-B1 JISB1 E_C3 Nagagata 3
target partition may be cleared.
J-B2 JISB2 E_C4 Nagagata 4
J-B3 JISB3 E_C5 Nagagata 5 When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of
J-B4 JISB4 E-K2 Kakugata 2 HDD partition and explain to the user before starting work.
J-B5 JISB5 E_K3 Kakugata 3
J-B6 JISB6 E_K4 Kakugata 4
J-B7 JISB7 E_K5 Kakugata 5
■■Measures for E747
K16 K16 E_K6 Kakugata 6 There are many detail codes in E747. Since these detail codes are for R&D use, remedy to
K8 K8 E_K7 Kakugata 7
be performed in the field is the same, except for E747-1201 and E747-FF01. Because of that,
ND-PCD Newdry Postcard E_K8 Kakugata 8
OTHER OTHER E_Y1 Yougata 1 errors other than the 2 errors mentioned above are described as E747-XXXX, and common
PCARD Postcard E-Y2 Yougata 2 remedy is described.
PCARD4 4 on 1 Postcard E_Y3 Yougata 3
F4A F4A E-Y4 Yougata 4
F4B F4B E_Y5 Yougata 5
FLSC FOOLCAP E_Y6 Yougata 6
FOLIO FLIO E_Y7 Yougata 7
FREE FREE SIZE EVLP_YN3 Yougatanaga 3
ICARD INDEXCARD E-B5 B5 Envelope
USER Custom E-C5 C5 Envelope
MONA MONARCH
EVLP Unknown size envelope
T-7-4

7-3
7
Error Code > Over View > Outline > Measures for E747
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-4

Error Code E code

Detailed Occurance
Items Description
code area
E001 -0001 -05 Title Abnormal temperature rise of fixing main thermistor
Error Code Details Description Fixing main thermistor (THM1) sensed an abnormal high
of detection temperature. (ASIC detection)
■■E000 to E015 Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing main
thermistor (THM1) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY>
Detailed Occurance ANALOG> FIX-UC).
E code Items Description A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC
code area
E000 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Film temperature rise is insufficient at power ON. A-1. The cable of the fixing main thermistor is
Description Fixing main thermistor (THM1-1) temperature does not caught -> replace the fixing film unit
of detection reach 50 degrees Celsius within 20 seconds after startup B. In case that the detection temperature is other than
of fixing film temperature control. 250 degC
B-1. Replace the DC controller PCB
Measures Check if the detection temperature of the thermistor is
NOTE:
risen in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG>
After performing the above remedy work, go through
FIX-xx).
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
A. In case that either one of the thermistor detection
CLEAR> ERR
temperature is risen
A-1. Replace the fixing film unit E001 -0002 -05 Title Abnormal temperature rise of fixing subthermistor 1
A-2. Faulty drawer connector -> Clean the drawer (THM3)
connector or replace the fixing drawer cable Description Fixing subthermistor 1 (THM3) sensed an abnormal high
B. In case that neither of them are not risen of detection temperature. (ASIC detection)
B-1. Check the connection of the fixing thermistor (to Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub
see if the connection of the drawer is faulty, the thermistor 1 (THM3) in service mode (COPIER>
connector is physically removed or DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE).
disconnected) -> replace the fixing film unit A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC
B-2. Check the connection of the IH power A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 1 is
connector (to see if the connector is physically caught -> replace the fixing film unit
removed or disconnected, or the cable is B. In case that the detection temperature is other than
caught) 250 degC
B-3. Replace the IH power unit B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is
B-4. Replace the DC controller PCB inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit
NOTE: B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB
After performing the above remedy work, go through NOTE:
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> After performing the above remedy work, go through
CLEAR> ERR the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> ERR

7-4
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-5
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E001 -0003 -05 Title Abnormal temperature rise of fixing subthermistor 2 E001 -0012 -05 Title Fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) abnormal temperature
(THM4) rise
Description Fixing subthermistor 2 (THM4) sensed an abnormal high Description Fixing sub thermistor 1 (THM3) detected abnormal high
of detection temperature. (ASIC detection) of detection temperature. (software detection)
Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub
thermistor 2 (THM4) in service mode (COPIER> thermistor 1 (THM3) in service mode (COPIER>
DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE2). DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE).
A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC
A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 2 is A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 1 is
caught ->replace the fixing film unit caught -> replace the fixing film unit
B. In case that the detection temperature is other than B. In case that the detection temperature is other than
250 degC 250 degC
B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is
inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit
B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB
NOTE: NOTE:
After performing the above remedy work, go through After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> ERR CLEAR> ERR
E001 -0011 -05 Title Fixing main thermistor abnormal temperature rise E001 -0013 -05 Title Fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) abnormal temperature
Description Fixing main thermistor (THM1) detected abnormal high rise
of detection temperature. (software detection) Description Fixing sub thermistor 2 (THM4) detected abnormal high
Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing main of detection temperature. (software detection)
thermistor (THM1) in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> Measures Check the detection temperature of the fixing sub
ANALOG> FIX-UC). thermistor 2 (THM4) in service mode (COPIER>
A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-UE2).
A-1. The cable of the fixing main thermistor is A. In case that the detection temperature is 250 degC
caught -> replace the fixing film unit A-1. The cable of the fixing sub thermistor 2 is
B. In case that the detection temperature is other than caught -> replace the fixing film unit
250 degC B. In case that the detection temperature is other than
B-1. Replace the DC controller PCB 250 degC
NOTE: B-1. Location of the fixing main thermistor is
After performing the above remedy work, go through inappropriate -> replace the fixing film unit
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> B-2. Replace the DC controller PCB
CLEAR> ERR NOTE:
After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> ERR

7-5
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-6
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E001 -0014 -05 Title Abnormal temperature rise of Fixing Edge Rear E003 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Film abnormally low temperature
Thermistor (THM5) Description After standby, fixing main thermistor (THM1) detected
Description The Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor (THM5) detected of detection less or equal to 110 degrees Celsius in succession for 1
of detection abnormal high temperature (software detection). second.
Remedy Check the detected temperature of the Fixing Edge Rear Measures 1. Check the rear louver. (If the rear of the machine is
Thermistor (THM5) in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY close to the wall, temperature of the power supply area
> ANALOG > FIX-UE). may rise)
A. When the detected temperature was 260 deg C or 2. Check the detection temperature of the thermistor in
higher service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> FIX-
A-1. Cable of the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor is xx).
caught. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. A. In case that either one of the thermistor detection
B. When the detected temperature was lower than 260 temperature is risen
deg C A-1. Check the fixing film unit (to see if the
B-1. The Fixing Main Thermistor is not securely location of the thermistor is inappropriate or
attached. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. the thermistor failure) -> replace the fixing
B-2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. film unit
NOTE: A-2. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer
After performing the remedy work above, go through connector or replace the fixing drawer cable
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION > B. In case that neither of them are not risen
CLEAR > ERR. B-1. Check the connection of the fixing thermistor
E001 -0015 -05 Title Abnormal Temperature Rise of Fixing Edge Front (to see if the connection of the drawer is
Thermistor (THM2) faulty, the connector is physically removed
Description The Fixing Edge Front Thermistor (THM2) detected or disconnected) -> replace the fixing film
of detection abnormal high temperature (software detection). unit
Remedy Check the detected temperature of the Fixing Edge Front B-2. Check the connection of the IH power
Thermistor (THM2) in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY connector (to see if the connector is
> ANALOG > FIX-UE2) physically removed or disconnected, or the
A. When the detected temperature was 260 deg C or cable is caught)
higher B-3. Replace the IH power unit
A-1. Cable of the Fixing Edge Front Thermistor is B-4. Replace the DC controller PCB
caught. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. NOTE:
B. When the detected temperature was lower than 260 After performing the above remedy work, go through
deg C the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
B-1. The Fixing Main Thermistor is not securely CLEAR> ERR
attached. -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit. E004 -0201 -05 Title Fixing Film temperature difference error 1
B-2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Description Difference of detected temperature between the fixing
NOTE: of detection subthermistor 2 (THM4) and the fixing subthermistor 1
After performing the remedy work above, go through (THM3) is bigger than the rated value.
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION > Measures 1. Fixing main /sub thermistor (THM1-1/2/3) connector
CLEAR > ERR. disconnetion (pinching wire, broken wire) -> replace
the fixing film unit
2. Check the rotation of the fixing motor (to see if the
connector is physically removed or disconnected) ->
replace the fixing motor or the harness
3. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector
or replace the fixing drawer cable
4. Replace the DC controller PCB

7-6
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-7
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E004 -0202 -05 Title Fixing Film temperature difference error 2 E004 -0301 -05 Title IH overcurrent detection error
Description Difference of detected temperature between the fixing Description Detected an overcurrent on IH power supply board.
of detection main thermistor (THM1) and the fixing subthermistor 1 of detection
(THM3) are bigger than the rated value. Measures 1. Faulty fixing film unit -> replace the fixing film unit
Measures 1. Fixing main /sub thermistor (THM1-1/2/3) connector 2. Faulty fixing IH unit -> replace the fixing IH unit
disconnetion (pinching wire, broken wire) -> replace 3. Faulty IH power PCB -> replace the IH power PCB
the fixing film unit E004 -0401 -05 Title 12V failure error
2. Check the rotation of the fixing motor (to see if the Description Detected abnormality on the 12V power supply line.
connector is physically removed or disconnected) -> of detection
replace the fixing motor or the harness Measures 1. Check the Fixing Film -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit
3. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector when it is damaged.
or replace the fixing drawer cable 2. Check connection of the Fixing Thermoswitch (TP2) (to
4. Replace the DC controller PCB see if Thermoswitch is being turned OFF/open circuit).
E004 -0203 -05 Title Fixing Film temperature difference error 3 -> Replace the Fixing Film Unit.
Description Difference of detected temperature between the fixing 3. Replace the Relay PCB.
of detection main thermistor (THM1) and the fixing subthermistor 2 4. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
(THM1) are bigger than the rated value. 5. Replace the IH power supply.
Measures 1. Fixing main /sub thermistor (THM1-1/2/3) connector NOTE:
disconnetion (pinching wire, broken wire) -> replace After performing the remedy work above, go through
the fixing film unit the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
2. Check the rotation of the fixing motor (to see if the CLEAR > ERR.
connector is physically removed or disconnected) -> E004 -0501 -05 Title Connection error of Fixing Main Thermistor or Fixing
replace the fixing motor or the harness Edge Front Thermistor
3. Faulty drawer connector -> clean the drawer connector Description Connection detection signal for the Fixing Main
or replace the fixing drawer cable of detection Thermistor or Fixing Edge Front Thermistor could not be
4. Replace the DC controller PCB detected.
E004 -0214 -05 Title Fixing Film temperature difference error 4 Measures 1. Check connection of the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace
Description Temperature difference between the Fixing Edge Front the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged.
of detection Thermistor (THM2) and the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor 2. Failure in Drawer Connector. -> Clean the Drawer
(THM5) is 50 deg C or greater. Connector/Replace the Fixing Drawer Harness.
Remedy 1. Replace the Fixing Film Unit. E004 -0502 -05 Title Connection error of Fixing Sub Thermistor 1/2 or Fixing
2. Replace the Fixing Motor/Harness. Edge Rear Thermistor
3. Clean the Drawer Connector/Replace the Fixing Description Connection detection signal for Fixing Sub Thermistor 1/2
Drawer Harness. of detection or Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor could not be detected.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Measures 1. Check connection of the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace
E004 -0215 -05 Title Fixing Film displacement error the Fixing Film Unit when it is damaged.
Description Temperature difference between the Fixing Edge Front 2. Failure in Drawer Connector. -> Clean the Drawer
of detection Thermistor (THM2) and the Fixing Edge Rear Thermistor Connector/Replace the Fixing Drawer Harness.
(THM5) was 20 deg C or greater when checking E004 -0702 -05 Title IH power supply relay abnormality
operation of the Fixing Film. Description Voltage shows abnormal value even with the relay-off
Remedy Replace the Fixing Film Unit. of detection
Measures IH power supply replacement

7-7
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-8
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E005 -0000 -05 Title Fixing Web level absence error E008 -0003 -05 Title Fixing Film Unit life detection error
Description The count exceeded 60,000 (using A4/Letter size Description Count of the number of fed sheets through the Fixing
of detection or smaller paper) after the Fixing Web Level Sensor of detection Film reached approx. 360,000 sheets (A4/LTR).
detected absence of the web. Measures 1. Life of the Fixing Film Unit -> Replace the Fixing Film
Remedy 1. Check the Fixing Web. Unit.
2. When the Fixing Web is replaced, execute the 2. When the Fixing Film Unit is replaced, turn OFF and
following to clear the counter value: COPIER > then ON the main power after executing the following:
COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB1 to 4, or COPIER> COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U.
COUNTER>MISC>FX-WEB. Then, turn OFF and then NOTE:
ON the main power. Only applicable under the following condition: OPTION
3. Check the Sensor Harness. > IMG-FIX > FX-ERRSW = 1. The print counter setting
4. Replace the Web Level Sensor (PS102). value can be changed by selecting the following: OPTION
5. Replace the Torsion Spring. > IMG-FIX > FX-U-ERR.
6. Replace the Level Detection Arm. E009 -0500 -05 Title Pressure unit pressure release HP search error
7. Replace the Web Sensor Support Plate. Description The Fixing Motor failed to stop within a specified period
E006 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Feed drawer connection error of detection of time (10 seconds).
Description Fixing feed knob of fixing drawer is abnormal (Sensor Measures 1. Check connectors of the Fixing Motor (M48), Fixing
of detection cannot detect) Pressure Release Sensor (PS73) and Half Pressure
Measures 1. Fixing Feed drawer connector has connection failure Position Sensor (PS110).
2. Wire harness failure 2. Check the harness of the foregoing parts. -> Replace
3. Sensor failure the harness if it is disconnected.
E006 -0002 -05 Title Fixing Feed drawer connection error 3. Replace the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor and Half
Description Fixing Feed drawer connector is abnormal (Sensor Pressure Position Sensor.
of detection cannot detect) 4. Replace the Fixing Motor.
Measures 1. Fixing feed knob of fixing drawer has connection failure 5. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
2. Wire harness failure 6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
3. Sensor failure 7. Check the Fixing Pressure Release Drive System
E008 -0002 -05 Title Fixing Film Unit life detection error Gear. -> Replace the Fixing Unit when it is damaged.
(Contact to the sales company.)
Description Total rotation time of the Fixing Film reached 5206 hours.
of detection
Measures 1. Life of the Fixing Film Unit -> Replace the Fixing Film
Unit.
2. When the Fixing Film Unit is replaced, turn OFF and
then ON the main power after executing the following:
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-BLT-U.

7-8
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-9
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E009 -0501 -05 Title Pressure unit pressure release HP search error E012 -0101 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 signal error
Description The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor and the Half (Controller Version 2x.xx or later)
of detection Pressure Position Sensor do not turn ON when the B. Drum motor (Y) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
Pressure Roller is driven. Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection
Measures 1. Check connectors of the Fixing Motor (M48), Fixing of detection PCB (Y) 1/2 signal error is detected.
Pressure Release Sensor (PS73) and Half Pressure B. The lock signal for the drum motor (Y) (M21) cannot be
Position Sensor (PS110). detected within a specified period.
2. Check the harness of the foregoing parts. -> Replace • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking
the harness if it is disconnected. (shorting))
3. Replace the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor and Half • Drum (unit) not inserted
Pressure Position Sensor. • Drum unit failure
4. Replace the Fixing Motor. • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.)
5. Check the Bearing Housing. -> Replace it when it is Measures A:
damaged. A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed
6. Check the flange of the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace it Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21). (Sensor side)
if it is damaged. Sensor side: J7316, J7317, J8019
7. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5). A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed
8. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 is properly installed.
9. Check the Pressure Release Cam. -> Replace the A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB
Fixing Unit when it is damaged. (Contact to the sales (UN6).
company.) PCB side: J1902
A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 and
Encoder Wheel.
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2.
A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
B:
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Y)
(M21) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking
(shorting)))
Motor side: J7300/J8019, PCB side: J1902
B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed
detection PCB (Y) (UN20/21) and the drum ITB
driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(Breaking (shorting)))
Motor side: J7316/J7317/J8019, PCB side: J1902
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Y).
B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.)
B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB.
NOTE:
In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
detection PCB.

7-9
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-10
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0102 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 signal error E012 -0103 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 signal error
(Controller Version 2x.xx or later) Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more.
B. Drum motor (Y) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) of detection
Description A. The signal is not detected for 80msec or more. Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection
of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (Y) (M21) cannot be PCB (Y) 2 (UN21).
detected for the specified period of time after first Sensor side: J7317, J8019PCB side:J1902
detection 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2 to
• Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking clean.
(shorting)) 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 2.
• Drum (unit) not inserted 4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection
• Drum unit failure PCB (Y) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s
• Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) disconnected.)
Measures A: 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection E012 -0104 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) Encoder Wheel error
PCB (Y) 1 (UN20). Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB
Sensor side: J7316, J8016PCB side:J1910 of detection (Y) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1 to Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) to clean
clean. the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21) and
A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1. Encoder Wheel.
A-4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection 2. Replace the Encoder Wheel.
PCB (Y) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2.
disconnected.) 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
A-5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). E012 -0105 -05 Title Drum Motor (Y) control error
B:
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (Y)
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Y)
of detection
(M21) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (Y) is installed.
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) to clean
(shorting)))
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Y) 1/2 (UN20/21) and
Motor side: J7300/J8019, PCB side: J1920
Encoder Wheel.
B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed
3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk).
detection PCB (Y) (UN20/21) and the drum ITB
4. Replace the Drum Unit (Y).
driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking
5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
(Breaking (shorting)))
E012 -0106 -05 Title Drum Motor (Y) rotation error
Motor side: J7316/J7317/J8016, PCB side: J1910
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Y). Description The Drum Motor (Y) is not rotating at the specified speed,
B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be of detection or it is stopped.
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and
B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
NOTE: Sensor side: J7300, J8019PCB side: J1902
In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is 2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced.
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed 3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
detection PCB. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).

7-10
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-11
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0201 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 signal error E012 -0202 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 signal error
(Controller Version 2x.xx or later) (Controller Version 2x.xx or later)
B. Drum motor (M) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) B. Drum motor (M) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection Description A. The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more.
of detection PCB (M) 1/2 signal error is detected. of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (M) (M23) cannot be
B. The lock signal for the drum motor (M) (M23) cannot detected for the specified period of time after first
be detected within a specified period. detection
• Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking
(shorting)) (shorting))
• Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum (unit) not inserted
• Drum unit failure • Drum unit failure
• Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.)
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23). (Sensor side) PCB (M) 1 (UN22).
Sensor side: J7314, J7315, J8020 Sensor side: J7314, J8020PCB side:J1902
A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1 to
Detection PCB (M) 1/2 is properly installed. clean.
A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB A-4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1.
(UN6). A-5. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB side: J1910 PCB (M) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s
A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 disconnected.)
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 and A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
Encoder Wheel. B:
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2. B-1. Check the connection of the drum motor (M) (M23).
A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking
B: (shorting)))
B-1. Check the connection of the drum motor (M) (M23). Motor side: J7302/J8020, PCB side: J1902
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed
(shorting))) detection PCB (M) (UN22/23) and the drum ITB
Motor side: J7302/J8020, PCB side: J1902 driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector,
B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
detection PCB (M) (UN22/23) and the drum ITB Motor side: J7314/J7315/J8020, PCB side: J1902
driver PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (M).
Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be
Motor side: J7314/J7315/J8020, PCB side: J1902 overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.)
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (M). B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB.
B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be NOTE:
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is
B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
NOTE: dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is detection PCB.
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
detection PCB.

7-11
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-12
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0203 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 signal error E012 -0301 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 signal error
Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. (Controller Version 2x.xx or later)
of detection B. Drum motor (C) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx)
Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection
PCB (M) 2 (UN23). of detection PCB (C) 1/2 signal error is detected.
Sensor side: J7315, J8020PCB side:J1902 B. The lock signal for the drum motor (C) (M25) cannot be
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2 to detected within a specified period.
clean. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking
4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 2. (shorting))
5. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection • Drum (unit) not inserted
PCB (M) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s • Drum unit failure
disconnected.) • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.)
6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). Measures A:
E012 -0204 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) Encoder Wheel error A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection
Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB PCB (C) 1/2 (UN24/25). (Sensor side)
of detection (M) Encoder Wheel error is detected. Sensor side: J7312, J7313, J8021
Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) to clean A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23) and Detection PCB (C) 1/2 is properly installed.
Encoder Wheel. A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB
2. Replace the Encoder Wheel. (UN6).
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2. PCB side: J1910
4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2 to
E012 -0205 -05 Title Drum Motor (M) control error clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/ and
Encoder Wheel.
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (M)
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2.
of detection
A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (M) is installed.
B:
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) to clean
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (C)
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (M) 1/2 (UN22/23) and
(M25) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
Encoder Wheel.
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking
3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk).
(shorting)))
4. Replace the Drum Unit (M).
Motor side: J7304/J8021, PCB side: J1904
5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed
E012 -0206 -05 Title Drum Motor (M) rotation error
detection PCB (C) (UN24/23) and the drum ITB
Description The Drum Motor (M) is not rotating at the specified driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking
of detection speed, or it is stopped. (Breaking (shorting)))
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and Motor side: J7312/J7313/J8021, PCB side: J1904
Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (C).
Sensor side: J7302, J8020PCB side: J1902 B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be
2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.)
ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced. B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB.
3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade. NOTE:
4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
detection PCB.

7-12
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-13
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0302 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 signal error E012 -0303 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 signal error
(Controller Version 2x.xx or later) Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more.
B. Drum motor (C) error (Prior to Controller Version 1x.xx) of detection
Description A. The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection
of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (C) (M25) cannot be PCB (C) 2 (UN25).
detected for the specified period of time after first Sensor side: J7313, J8021PCB side:J1904
detection 2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2 to
• Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking clean.
(shorting)) 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 2.
• Drum (unit) not inserted 4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection
• Drum unit failure PCB (C) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s
• Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) disconnected.)
Measures A: 5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection E012 -0304 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) Encoder Wheel error
PCB (C) 1 (UN24). Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB
Sensor side: J7312, J7313, J8021PCB side:J1904 of detection (C) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1 to Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
clean. to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1. (UN24/25) and Encoder Wheel.
A-4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection 2. Replace the Encoder Wheel.
PCB (C) 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s 3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2.
disconnected.) 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
A-5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6). E012 -0305 -05 Title Drum Motor (C) control error
B:
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (C)
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (C)
of detection
(M25) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (C) is installed.
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
(shorting)))
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (C) 1/2
Motor side: J7304/J8021, PCB side: J1904
(UN24/25) and Encoder Wheel.
B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed
3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk).
detection PCB (C) (UN24/23) and the drum ITB
4. Replace the Drum Unit (C).
driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking
5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
(Breaking (shorting)))
E012 -0306 -05 Title Drum Motor (C) rotation error
Motor side: J7312/J7313/J8021, PCB side: J1904
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (C). Description The Drum Motor (C) is not rotating at the specified speed,
B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be of detection or it is stopped.
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and
B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
NOTE: Sensor side: J7304, J8021PCB side: J1904
In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is 2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced.
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed 3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
detection PCB. 4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.

7-13
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-14
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0401 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 signal error E012 -0402 -05 Title A. Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 signal error
(Controller Version 2x.xx or later) (Controller Version 2x.xx or later)
B. Drum motor (Bk) error (Prior to Controller Version B. Drum motor (Bk) error (Prior to Controller Version
1x.xx) 1x.xx)
Description A. This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection Description A. The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more.
of detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 signal error is detected. of detection B. Lock signal of Drum motor (Bk) (M19) cannot be
B. The lock signal for the drum motor (Bk) (M19) cannot detected for the specified period of time after first
be detected within a specified period. detection
• Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking
(shorting)) (shorting))
• Drum (unit) not inserted • Drum (unit) not inserted
• Drum unit failure • Drum unit failure
• Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.) • Encoder failure (This occurs in very rare cases.)
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection A-1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19). (Sensor side) PCB (Bk) 1 (UN18).
Sensor side: J7310, J7311 Sensor side: J7310PCB side: J1905
A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the Drum Speed A-2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1 to
Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 is properly installed. clean.
A-3. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB A-3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1.
(UN6). A-4. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection
PCB side: J1905 PCB (Bk) 1 (UN18) is faulty. (Replace the Harness if
A-4. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 it’s disconnected.)
to clean the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 A-5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
and Encoder Wheel. B:
A-5. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2. B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Bk)
A-6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. (M19) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
B: (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking
B-1. Check the connection between the drum motor (Bk) (shorting)))
(M19) and the drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). Motor side: J7306, PCB side: J1903
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed
(shorting))) detection PCB (Bk) (UN18/19) and the drum ITB
Motor side: J7306, PCB side: J1903 driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking
B-2. Check the connection between the drum speed (Breaking (shorting)))
detection PCB (Bk) (UN18/19) and the drum ITB Motor side: J7310/J7311, PCB side: J1905
driver PCB. (Connection of the connector, Breaking B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Bk).
(Breaking (shorting))) B-4. Replace the drum cleaning unit and the drum unit.
Motor side: J7310/J7311, PCB side: J1905 (Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of
B-3. Reinstall the drum unit (Bk). the blade, etc.)
B-4. Replace the drum cleaning unit and the drum unit. B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB.
(Drum drive may be overloaded due to peeling of NOTE:
the blade, etc.) In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is
B-5. Replace the drum ITB driver PCB. not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
NOTE: dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is detection PCB.
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
detection PCB.

7-14
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-15
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0403 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 signal error E012 -0501 -05 Title A. ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17)
Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. signal error
of detection B. ITB drive motor error
Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum Speed Detection Description A. This error occurs when the ITB Drive Roller Speed
PCB (Bk) 2 (UN19). of detection Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17)signal error is detected.
Sensor side: J7311PCB side: J1905 B. The lock signal for the ITB drive motor (M3) cannot be
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2 to detected within a specified period.
clean. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking
4. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 2. (shorting))
5. Check if the Harness of the Drum Speed Detection • Drum (unit) Y/M/C/K not inserted
PCB (Bk) 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s • Peeling of the ITB cleaning blade
disconnected.) • Encoder Y/M/C/K failure (This occurs in rare cases.)
6. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
E012 -0404 -05 Title Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) Encoder Wheel error
Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB
of detection (Bk) Encoder Wheel error is detected.
Measures 1. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19)
and Encoder Wheel.
2. Replace the Encoder Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2.
4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
E012 -0405 -05 Title Drum Motor (Bk) control error
Description Unstable rotation of the Drum Motor (Bk)
of detection
Measures 1. Check if the Drum Unit (Bk) is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) to clean
the Drum Speed Detection PCB (Bk) 1/2 (UN18/19)
and Encoder Wheel.
3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk).
4. Replace the Drum Unit (Bk).
5. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
E012 -0406 -05 Title Drum Motor (Bk) rotation error
Description The Drum Motor (Bk) is not rotating at the specified
of detection speed, or it is stopped.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum Motor and
Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
Sensor side: J7306PCB side: J1903
2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or
ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced.
3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
4. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.

7-15
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-16
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0501 -05 Measures A: E012 -0502 -05 Title A. ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 signal error
A-1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed B. ITB drive motor error
Detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Sensor side) Description A. The signal is not detected for 80msec or more.
Sensor side: J7318, J7319, J8047 of detection B. Lock signal of ITB drive motor (M3) cannot be detected
A-2. Check that the Encoder Wheel of the ITB Drive for the specified period of time after first detection
Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 is properly installed. • Connector disconnected, Breaking (Breaking
A-3. Check the connection of the DC controller PCB. (shorting))
PCB side: J1912 • Drum (unit) Y/M/C/K not inserted
A-4. Manually turn the Rotor of the ITB Drive Motor • Peeling of the ITB cleaning blade
(M3) clockwise and check that the ITB Rotation • Encoder Y/M/C/K failure (This occurs in rare cases.)
Sensor Encoder Wheel rotates. If the Encoder Measures A:
Wheel does not rotate, replace the Drum Drive Unit. A-1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed
A-5. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB Detection PCB 1 (UN16).
1/2 to clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection Sensor side: J7318, J8047PCB side: J1242
PCB 1/2 and Encoder Wheel. A-2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB
A-6. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1 to clean.
1/2. A-3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1.
A-7. Replace the DC controller PCB. A-4. Check if the Harness of the ITB Drive Roller Speed
B: Detection PCB 1 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if
B-1. Check the connection between the ITB driver motor it’s disconnected.)
(M3) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the A-5. Replace the DC controller PCB.
connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) B:
Motor side: J7518, J8011,J8050, PCB side: J1242 B-1. Check the connection between the ITB driver motor
B-2. Check the connection of the ITB drive roller speed (M3) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the
detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting))) Motor side: J7518, J8050 PCB side: J1242
Motor side: J7318, J7319, J8047, J8050 PCB side: B-2. Check the connection of the ITB drive roller speed
J1242 detection PCB 1/2 (UN16/17). (Connection of the
B-3. Reinstall the 4 color drum units. (If the drum unit is connector, Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
not installed properly, more load is applied to ITB Motor side: J7318, J7319, J8047, J8050 PCB side:
drive.) J1242
B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be B-3. Reinstall the 4 color drum units. (If the drum unit is
overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) There not installed properly, more load is applied to ITB
may be cause in each color. drive.)
B-5. Replace the DC controller PCB. B-4. Replace the drum unit. (Drum drive may be
NOTE: overloaded due to peeling of the blade, etc.) There
In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is may be cause in each color.
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when B-5. Replace the DC controller PCB.
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed NOTE:
detection PCB. In some rare cases, this error occurs when the encoder is
not installed with the drum speed detection PCB or when
dirt is applied to the sensor surface of the drum speed
detection PCB.

7-16
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-17
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E012 -0503 -05 Title ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 signal error E012 -2000 -05 Title Rotation error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19)
Description The signal is not detected for 80 msec or more. and ITB Drive Motor
of detection Description Simultaneous rotation error in all Motors
Measures 1. Check the connection of the ITB Drive Roller Speed of detection
Detection PCB 2 (UN17). Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
Sensor side:J7319, J8047PCB side: J1242 PCB side: J1902 to J1904
2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2 2. Check the connection of the Relay PCB.
to clean. PCB side: J1805
3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 2. 3. Check the Interlock Switch.
4. Check if the Harness of the ITB Drive Roller Speed 4. Check if the Harness of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6)
Detection PCB 2 is faulty. (Replace the Harness if it’s is faulty.
disconnected.) E012 -3000 -05 Title Error in Drum Speed Detection PCB (UN18 to 25) of all
5. Replace the DC controller PCB. colors
E012 -0504 -05 Title ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB Encoder Wheel Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection
error of detection PCB (UN18 to 25) error is detected for all colors
Description This error occurs when the Drum Speed Detection PCB simultaneously.
of detection (Bk) Encoder Wheel error is detected. Measures 1. Check the connection of the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
Measures 1. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB to PCB side: J1902, J1904, J1905
clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 2. Check if the Harness of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6)
(UN16/17) and Encoder Wheel. is faulty.
2. Replace the Encoder Wheel. 3. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB.
3. Replace the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB E012 -3001 -05 Title Control error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19)
1/2. Description This error occurs when the Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
4. Replace the DC controller PCB. of detection (M21/23/25/19) control error is detected for all colors
E012 -0505 -05 Title ITB Drive Motor control error simultaneously.
Description Unstable rotation of the ITB Drive Motor Measures 1. Check the Process Unit (to see if the Connector is
of detection physically removed).
Measures 1. Check if the ITB (Unit) is installed. 2. Check the Drum Unit (to see if the Connector is
2. Take out the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB to physically removed).
clean the ITB Drive Roller Speed Detection PCB 1/2 E012 -3002 -05 Title Rotation error of Drum Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19)
(UN16/17) and Encoder Wheel. Description All of the Drum Motors (Y/M/C/Bk) (M21/23/25/19) are
3. Remove and then reinstall the Process Unit (Bk). of detection not rotating at the specified speed, or they are stopped.
4. Replace the ITB Unit. Measures Check the connector of the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6).
5. Replace the DC controller PCB. PCB side: J1902 to J1904
E012 -0506 -05 Title ITB Drive Motor rotation error
Description ITB Drive Motor is not rotating at the specified speed, or
of detection it is stopped.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the ITB Drive Motor
and DC controller PCB.
Sensor side: J7518, J8047, J8050PCB side: J1912,
J8011
2. Check the ITB. Check to see if the ITB is displaced or
ripped. Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced.
3. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
4. Replace the DC controller PCB.

7-17
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
7-18
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E013 -0001 -05 Title Waste toner feed screw lock detection error E014 -0001 -05 Title Fixing motor error (At start-up)
Description When the waste toner pipe screw lock SW (SW10) Description Locking was not released within 3 seconds after the fixing
of detection detected the lock status for 500 msec (100 msec x 5 of detection motor was turned on.
times) consecutively Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 38 V Power
Measures • Pull out the Waste Toner Container. If it is full of toner, Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart
go to Step 1, 2, and 5. and check the power output before the machine detects
• If the Waste Toner Container is not full of toner, go to the error to determine whether the cause of the error is
Step 1, 2, and 4. power supply.
• If the Waste Toner Container is not full and the Waste If there is no power output, power supply is the cause.
Toner Pipe is not clogged with toner, go to Step 3 and 4. If there is power output, factor other than power supply
1. Remove the toner in the Waste Toner Pipe. can be the cause of the error.
2. Replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor and the Waste 1. Check the fixing unit drive gear -> replace the gear
Toner Container. 2. Replace the fixing motor (M48)
3. Replace the Waste Toner Screw Lock Detection Switch 3. Replace the pckup feed drive PCB.
(SW10). 4. Check the connection of the 38 V Power Supply
4. Replace the Waste Toner Drive Unit. connector.
5. Reduce the value of timing setting for waste toner full 5. Replace the 38 V Power Supply.
alert display (COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> WT-FL-LM) 6. Replace the DC controller PCB
by 1. E014 -0002 -05 Title Fixing motor error (At regular rotation)
E013 -0003 -05 Title Waste toner full sensor error Description Locking was released for 1 second consecutively after
Description Output of the waste toner full sensor cannot be detected. of detection the fixing motor (M48) was locked.
of detection Measures 1. Check the fixing unit drive gear -> replace the gear
Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power 2. Replace the fixing motor (M48)
Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart 3. Replace the pickup feed drive PCB.
and check the power output before the machine detects 4. Replace the DC controller PCB
the error to determine whether the cause of the error is E015 -0001 -05 Title Decurler incoming amount control error 1
power supply. Description Change of the decurler HP sensor 1 (PS88) cannot be
If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If of detection detected even when a specified period of time elapsed
there is power output, factor other than power supply can after driving of the decurler compression distance
be the cause of the error. adjustment motor 1 (M50) started.
1. Check the connection between the Waste Toner Measures 1. Failure of the decurler HP sensor 1 (PS88)
Full Sensor (TS9) and thePickup feed drive PCB. 2. Failure of the decurler compression distance
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (Breaking adjustment motor 1 (M50)
(shorting)), Wire caught by parts) 3. Failure of the buffer driver PCB (UN150)
Sensor side: J8981, PCB side: J898, J1470 E015 -0002 -05 Title Decurler incoming amount control error 2
2. Check the connection of the 24 V Power Supply
Description Change of the decurler HP sensor 2 (PS89) cannot be
connector.
of detection detected even when a specified period of time elapsed
3. Replace the Waste Toner Full Sensor.
after driving of the decurler compression distance
4. Replace the 24 V Power Supply.
adjustment motor 2 (M53) started.
Measures 1. Failure of the decurler HP sensor 2 (PS89)
2. Failure of the decurler compression distance
adjustment motor 2 (M53)
3. Failure of the buffer driver PCB (UN150)
T-7-5

7-18
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E015
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-19
■■E020 E code
Detailed Occurance
Items Description
code area
Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E020 -0082 -05 Title Patch sensor light intensity correction error
code area Description When executing correction of patch sensor light intensity,
E020 -0080 -05 Title ITB base light intensity upper limit error of detection the P wave output is not more than 500 and less than
Description When executing ITB base correction, the average value 900.
of detection of P wave light intensity detected/calculated is more than Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
900. P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of applied to the patch sensor.
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
applied to the patch sensor. of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small occurred.
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking 1. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
occurred. 2. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
1. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). the Drum ITB driver PCB. (Connector, Shorting)
2. Check the connection between the patch sensor and Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
the Drum ITB driver PCB(UN6). (Connector, Shorting) 3. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 4. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB.
3. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt
4. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB
If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt cleaning blade at the same time.
is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB 5. Replace the patch sensor unit.
cleaning blade at the same time. E020 -0120 -05 Title Initial installation toner density sensor (Y) output lower
5. Replace the patch sensor unit. limit error
E020 -0081 -05 Title ITB base light intensity lower limit error Description When executing the developing assembly initial
Description When executing ITB base correction, the average value of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
of detection of P wave light intensity detected/calculated is less than INISET-Y), the output level does not reach 128 even
300. when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> 255 or more.
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
applied to the patch sensor. Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value <Y> sensor side:
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking <M> sensor side:
occurred. J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
1. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). <C> sensor side:
2. Check the connection between the patch sensor and J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
the Drum ITB driver PCB. (UN6. (Connector, Shorting) <Bk> sensor side:
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
3. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 2. Check whether the toner density sensor is not
4. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. disconnected or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) occurs.
If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt 3. Replace the developing assembly.
is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB
cleaning blade at the same time.
5. Replace the patch sensor unit.

7-19
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-20
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0124 -05 Title Initial installation patch (Y) density lower limit error E020 -0130 -05 Title Initial installation toner density sensor (Y) output upper
Description When executing the developing assembly initial limit error
of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
INISET-Y), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y),
than 79. the output level does not reach 128 even when control
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> voltage of the toner density sensor became less than 55.
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
applied to the patch sensor. Shorting)
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value <Y> sensor side:
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking <M> sensor side:
occurred. J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum <C> sensor side:
unit are properly installed. J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). <Bk> sensor side:
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
(shorting)) density sensor occurs or not.
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 3. Replace the developing assembly.
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
5. Clean or replace the ITB.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-20
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-21
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0134 -05 Title Initial installation patch (Y) density upper limit error E020 -0136 -05 Title Initial installation patch (Y) sampling error
Description When executing developing assembly initial installation Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-Y), the
ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. variation before average patch P wave light intensity is
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> more than 100.
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
applied to the patch sensor. P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value applied to the patch sensor.
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
occurred. (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum occurred.
unit are properly installed. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). unit are properly installed.
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
5. Clean or replace the ITB. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it 5. Clean or replace the ITB.
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT- is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
CLN). (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to CLN).
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
6. Replace the patch sensor unit. scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
7. Replace the developing assembly. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-21
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-22
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0190 -05 Title Patch (Y) density lower limit error E020 -0191 -05 Title Patch (Y) density upper limit error
Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970.
of detection of detection
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is COPIER> DISPLAY > DENS >P-SENS-P is small,
applied to the patch sensor. there is a high possibility that dirt is applied to the
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value patch sensor.
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
occurred. (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum occurred.
unit are properly installed. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). unit are properly installed.
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB.
is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt
cleaning blade at the same time. is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB
6. Replace the patch sensor unit. cleaning blade at the same time.
NOTE: 6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in NOTE:
the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply- This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in
related parts in the developing assembly. the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply-
related parts in the developing assembly.
E020 -01A0 -05 Title Toner density sensor (Y) output lower limit error
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than
of detection 43.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
Breaking (shorting))
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
density sensor occurs or not.
3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-22
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-23
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -01A2 -05 Title Toner density sensor (Y) output upper limit error E020 -0220 -05 Title Initial installation toner density sensor (M) output lower
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than limit error
of detection 247. Description When executing the developing assembly initial
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, INISET-M), the output level does not reach 128 even
Breaking (shorting)) when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached
<Y> sensor side: 255 or more.
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
<M> sensor side: sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 Breaking (Breaking (shorting))
<C> sensor side: <Y> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<Bk> sensor side: <M> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner <C> sensor side:
density sensor occurs or not. J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
3. Replace the developing assembly. <Bk> sensor side:
E020 -01C2 -05 Title Patch (Y) sampling error J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity 2. Check whether the toner density sensor is not
of detection is more than 100. disconnected or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) occurs.
Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum 3. Replace the developing assembly.
unit are properly installed.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
4. Clean or replace the ITB.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it is dirty,
perform cleaning with the service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
5. Replace the patch sensor unit.
6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether
there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)

7-23
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-24
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0224 -05 Title Initial installation patch (M) density lower limit error E020 -0230 -05 Title Initial installation toner density sensor (M) output upper
Description When executing the developing assembly initial limit error
of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
INISET-M), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M),
than 79. the output level does not reach 128 even when control
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> voltage of the toner density sensor became less than 55.
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
applied to the patch sensor. Shorting)
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value <Y> sensor side:
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking <M> sensor side:
occurred. J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum <C> sensor side:
unit are properly installed. J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). <Bk> sensor side:
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
(shorting)) density sensor occurs or not.
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 3. Replace the developing assembly.
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
5. Clean or replace the ITB.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-24
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-25
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0234 -05 Title Initial installation patch (M) density upper limit error E020 -0236 -05 Title Initial installation patch (M) sampling error
Description When executing developing assembly initial installation Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-M), the
ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. variation before average patch P wave light intensity is
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>P- more than 100.
LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
applied to the patch sensor. P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value applied to the patch sensor.
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
occurred. (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum occurred.
unit are properly installed. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). unit are properly installed.
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
5. Clean or replace the ITB. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it 5. Clean or replace the ITB.
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT- is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
CLN). (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to CLN).
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
6. Replace the patch sensor unit. scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
7. Replace the developing assembly. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-25
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-26
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0290 -05 Title Patch (M) density lower limit error E020 -0291 -05 Title Patch (M) density upper limit error
Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970.
of detection of detection
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
applied to the patch sensor. applied to the patch sensor.
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
occurred. occurred.
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
unit are properly installed. unit are properly installed.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB.
If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt
is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB
cleaning blade at the same time. cleaning blade at the same time.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
NOTE: NOTE:
This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in
the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply- the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply-
related parts in the developing assembly. related parts in the developing assembly.
E020 -02A0 -05 Title Toner density sensor (M) output lower limit error
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than
of detection 43.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
Breaking (shorting))
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
density sensor occurs or not.
3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-26
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-27
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -02A2 -05 Title Toner density sensor (M) output upper limit error E020 -0320 -05 Title Initial installation toner density sensor (C) output lower
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than limit error
of detection 247. Description When executing the developing assembly initial
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, INISET-C), the output level does not reach 128 even
Breaking (shorting)) when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached
<Y> sensor side: 255 or more.
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
<M> sensor side: sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
<C> sensor side: <Y> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<Bk> sensor side: <M> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner <C> sensor side:
density sensor occurs or not. J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
3. Replace the developing assembly. <Bk> sensor side:
E020 -02C2 -05 Title Patch (M) sampling error J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity 2. Check whether the toner density sensor is not
of detection is more than 100. disconnected or Breaking (Breaking (shorting)) occurs.
Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum 3. Replace the developing assembly.
unit are properly installed.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
4. Clean or replace the ITB.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
5. Replace the patch sensor unit.
6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether
there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)

7-27
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-28
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0324 -05 Title Initial installation patch (C) density lower limit error E020 -0330 -05 Title Initial installation toner density sensor (C) output upper
Description When executing the developing assembly initial limit error
of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
INISET-C), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C),
than 79. the output level does not reach 128 even when control
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> voltage of the toner density sensor became less than 55.
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
applied to the patch sensor. Shorting)
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value <Y> sensor side:
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking <M> sensor side:
occurred. J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum <C> sensor side:
unit are properly installed. J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). <Bk> sensor side:
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) 2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 density sensor occurs or not.
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 3. Replace the developing assembly.
5. Clean or replace the ITB.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-28
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-29
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0334 -05 Title Initial installation patch (C) density upper limit error E020 -0336 -05 Title Initial installation patch (C) sampling error
Description When executing developing assembly initial installation Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-C), the
ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. variation before average patch P wave light intensity is
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> more than 100.
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>P-
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
applied to the patch sensor. P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value applied to the patch sensor.
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
occurred. (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum occurred.
unit are properly installed. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). unit are properly installed.
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
5. Clean or replace the ITB. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it 5. Replace the patch sensor unit.
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode 6. Replace the developing assembly.
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-29
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-30
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0390 -05 Title Patch (C) density lower limit error E020 -0391 -05 Title Patch (C) density upper limit error
Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970.
of detection of detection
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
applied to the patch sensor. applied to the patch sensor.
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
occurred. occurred.
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
unit are properly installed. unit are properly installed.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21) . 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21) .
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB.
If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt
is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB
cleaning blade at the same time. cleaning blade at the same time.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
NOTE: NOTE:
This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in
the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply- the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply-
related parts in the developing assembly. related parts in the developing assembly.
E020 -03A0 -05 Title Toner density sensor (C) output lower limit error
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than
of detection 43.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
Breaking (shorting))
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
density sensor occurs or not.
3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-30
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-31
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -03A2 -05 Title Toner density sensor (C) output upper limit error E020 -0420 -05 Title Initial installation toner density sensor (Bk) output lower
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than limit error
of detection 247. Description When executing the developing assembly initial
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, INISET-K), the output level does not reach 128 even
Breaking (shorting)) when control voltage of the toner density sensor reached
<Y> sensor side: 255 or more.
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
<M> sensor side: sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
<C> sensor side: <Y> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<Bk> sensor side: <M> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner <C> sensor side:
density sensor occurs or not. J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
3. Replace the developing assembly. <Bk> sensor side:
E020 -03C2 -05 Title Patch (C) sampling error J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity 2. Check whether disconnection or Breaking (Breaking
of detection is more than 100. (shorting)) of the toner density sensor occurs or not.
Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum 3. Replace the developing assembly.
unit are properly installed.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
4. Clean or replace the ITB.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
5. Replace the patch sensor unit.
6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether
there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)

7-31
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-32
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0424 -05 Title Initial installation patch (Bk) density lower limit error E020 -0430 -05 Title Upper limit error for output of Toner Density Sensor (Bk)
Description When executing the developing assembly initial at initial installation
of detection installation mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> Description When executing the initial installation mode of the
INISET-K), the ATR patch detection value (SigD) is less of detection Developing Assembly (COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
than 79. > INISET-K), output failed to reach 128 although the
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> control voltage value of the Toner Density Sensor
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of reached 55 or smaller.
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
applied to the patch sensor. sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value Breaking (Breaking (shorting)))
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small <Y> sensor side:
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
occurred. <M> sensor side:
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
unit are properly installed. <C> sensor side:
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and <Bk> sensor side:
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 2. Check whether disconnection or Breaking (Breaking
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. (shorting)) of the toner density sensor occurs or not.
5. Clean or replace the ITB. 3. Replace the developing assembly.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN).
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-32
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-33
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0434 -05 Title Initial installation patch (Bk) density upper limit error E020 -0436 -05 Title Initial installation patch (K) sampling error
Description When executing developing assembly initial installation Description When executing developing assembly initial installation
of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the of detection mode (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET-K), the
ATR patch output (SigD) is more than 970. variation before average patch P wave light intensity is
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> more than 100.
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
applied to the patch sensor. P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value applied to the patch sensor.
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
occurred. (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum occurred.
unit are properly installed. 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). unit are properly installed.
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
5. Clean or replace the ITB. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it 5. Clean or replace the ITB.
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode • Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT- is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode
CLN). (COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to CLN).
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. • If it is assumed that this error occurred due to
6. Replace the patch sensor unit. scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB.
7. Replace the developing assembly. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
7. Replace the developing assembly.

7-33
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
7-34
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E020 -0490 -05 Title Patch (Bk) density lower limit error E020 -0491 -05 Title Patch (Bk) density upper limit error
Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is less than 79. Description The ATR patch detection output (SigD) is more than 970.
of detection of detection
Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> Measures • When the value of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS>
P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of P-LED-DA is large (153(D) or more) and the value of
P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is P-SENS-P is small, there is a high possibility that dirt is
applied to the patch sensor. applied to the patch sensor.
• This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value • This occurs only at a regular timing. When the value
of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small of COPIER> DISPLAY> DENS> DENS-S-x is small
(2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking (2 digits), there is a high possibility that breaking
occurred. occurred.
1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum
unit are properly installed. unit are properly installed.
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). 2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21).
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and 3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting) the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Shorting)
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907
4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter. 4. Check open/close operation of the patch shutter.
5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB. 5. Check whether scratches/dirt are applied to the ITB.
If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt If many scratches are found, replace the ITB. If dirt
is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB is applied, clean the ITB. In this case, check the ITB
cleaning blade at the same time. cleaning blade at the same time.
6. Replace the patch sensor unit. 6. Replace the patch sensor unit.
NOTE: NOTE:
This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in This error also occurs when there is not enough toner in
the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply- the developing assembly. In this case, check the supply-
related parts in the developing assembly. related parts in the developing assembly.
E020 -04A0 -05 Title Toner density sensor (Bk) output lower limit error
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than
of detection 43.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector,
Breaking (shorting))
<Y> sensor side:
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<M> sensor side:
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085
<C> sensor side:
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086
<Bk> sensor side:
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner
density sensor occurs or not.
3. Replace the developing assembly.

7-34
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E020
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-35

E code
Detailed Occurance
Items Description
■■E021 to E077
code area
Detailed Occurance
E020 -04A2 -05 Title Toner density sensor (Bk) output upper limit error E code Items Description
Description The toner density sensor output (Vsig_ind) is less than
code area
of detection 247. E021 -0101 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) error
Measures 1. Check the connection between the toner density Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (Y)
sensor and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, of detection (M20) cannot be detected within a specified period.
Breaking (shorting)) • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
<Y> sensor side: • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
J7133, J8028, J8087 PCB side: J1244, J8085 overloaded)
<M> sensor side: • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6)
J7134, J8029, J8088 PCB side: J1244, J8085 • Failure of the developing sleeve motor
<C> sensor side: Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve
J7135, J8030, J8089 PCB side: J1244, J8086 drive motor (Y) (UN20) and the Drum ITB driver
<Bk> sensor side: PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
J7146, J8015, J8117 PCB side: J1244, J8080 (shorting))
2. Check whether disconnection or shorting of the toner Motor side: J7535, J8034 PCB side: J1220
density sensor occurs or not. 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y).
3. Replace the developing assembly. 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
E020 -04C2 -05 Title Patch (Bk) sampling error 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Y).
Description The variation before average patch P wave light intensity E021 -0102 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) error
of detection is more than 100. Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (Y) (M20)
Measures 1. Check whether the developing assembly and the drum of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after
unit are properly installed. first detection
2. Clean the patch sensor (PS21). • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
3. Check the connection between the patch sensor and • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). (Connector, Breaking overloaded)
(shorting)) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6)
Sensor side: J7412, J8035 PCB side: J1907 • Failure of the developing sleeve motor
4. Clean or replace the ITB. Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve
• Check whether the ITB belt is dirty or not. If it drive motor (Y) (M20) and the Drum ITB driver PCB
is dirty, perform cleaning with the service mode (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT- (shorting))
CLN). Motor side: J7535, J8034 PCB side: J1220
• If it is assumed that this error occurred due to 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y).
scratches on the ITB, replace the ITB. 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
5. Replace the patch sensor unit. 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Y).
6. Replace the developing assembly. (Check whether
there is not uneven coating on the developing sleeve.)
T-7-6

7-35
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-36
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E021 -0201 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (M) error E021 -0301 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (C) error
Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (M) Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (C)
of detection (M22) cannot be detected within a specified period. of detection (M24) cannot be detected within a specified period.
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
overloaded) overloaded)
• Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6)
• Failure of the developing sleeve motor • Failure of the developing sleeve motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve
drive motor (M) (M22) and the Drum ITB driver drive motor (C) (M24) and the Drum ITB driver PCB
PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(shorting)) (shorting))
Motor side: J7536, J8034 PCB side: J1220 Motor side: J7537, J8034 PCB side: J1906
2. Replace the developing assembly (M). 2. Replace the developing assembly (C).
3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 3. Replace the DC controller interface PCB.
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (M). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (C).
E021 -0202 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (M) error E021 -0302 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (C) error
Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (M) (M22) Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (C) (M24)
of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after
first detection first detection
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
overloaded) overloaded)
• Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6)
• Failure of the developing sleeve motor • Failure of the developing sleeve motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve
drive motor (M) (M22) and the Drum ITB driver drive motor (C) (M24) and the Drum ITB driver PCB
PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(shorting)) (shorting))
Motor side: J7536, J8034 PCB side: J1220 Motor side: J7537, J8034 PCB side: J1906
2. Replace the developing assembly (M). 2. Replace the developing assembly (C).
3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). 3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (M). 4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (C).

7-36
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-37
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E021 -0401 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) error E022 -0001 -05 Title Drum cleaning / waste toner feed drive motor error
Description The lock signal of the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) Description The lock signal of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed
of detection (M18) cannot be detected within a specified period. of detection drive motor (M30) cannot be detected within a specified
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) period.
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
overloaded) • Failure of the drum cleaning unit (Overload)
• Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the waste toner feed screw (Overload)
• Failure of the developing sleeve motor • Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve • Failure of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
drive motor (Bk) (M18) and the Drum ITB driver motor
PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking Measures 1. Check the connection between the drum cleaning/
(shorting)) waste toner feed drive motor and the Drum ITB driver
Motor side: J7538, PCB side: J1914 PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk). (shorting))
3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). Motor side: J7539, PCB side: J1914
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk). 2. Clean the screw in the drum cleaning unit (Bk), or
E021 -0402 -05 Title Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) error replace the unit.
Description Lock signal of Developing sleeve drive motor (Bk) (M18) Remove toner clog with the feed screw.
of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after 3. Clean the waste toner feed pipe unit, or replace the
first detection unit.
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) Remove toner clog with the feed screw.
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve 4. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
overloaded) 5. Replace the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive
• Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). motor.
• Failure of the developing sleeve motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing sleeve
drive motor (Bk) (M18) and the Drum ITB driver
PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Motor side: J7538, PCB side: J1914
2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk).
3. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6).
4. Replace the developing sleeve drive motor (Bk).

7-37
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-38
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E022 -0002 -05 Title Drum cleaning / waste toner feed drive motor error E023 -0102 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (Y) error
Description Lock signal of Drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (Y) (M26)cannot
of detection motor (M30) cannot be detected for the specified period of detection be detected for the specified period of time after first
of time after first detection detection
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
• Failure of the drum cleaning unit (Overload) • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
• Failure of the waste toner feed screw (Overload) overloaded)
• Failure of the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6) • Failure of the DC controller PCB
• Failure of the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive • Contact failure of the drawer connector
motor • Failure of the developing stirring motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the drum cleaning/ Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring
waste toner feed drive motor and the Drum ITB driver motor (Y) and the DC controller interface PCB (UN2).
PCB (UN6). (Connection of the connector, Breaking (Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting))
(shorting)) Motor side: J7158, J8031 PCB side: J1243
Motor side: J7539, PCB side: J1914 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y).
2. Clean the screw in the drum cleaning unit (Bk), or 3. Replace the DC controller PCB.
replace the unit. 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031).
Remove toner clog with the feed screw. 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Y).
3. Clean the waste toner feed pipe unit, or replace the E023 -0201 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (M) error
unit. Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (M) (M28)
Remove toner clog with the feed screw. of detection cannot be detected within a specified period.
4. Replace the Drum ITB driver PCB (UN6). • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
5. Replace the drum cleaning/waste toner feed drive • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
motor. overloaded)
E023 -0101 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (Y) error • Failure of the DC controller PCB
Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (Y) (M26) • Contact failure of the drawer connector
of detection cannot be detected within a specified period. • Failure of the developing stirring motor
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve motor (M) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
overloaded) the connector, Breaking (shorting))
• Failure of the DC controller PCB Motor side: J8031 PCB side: J1243
• Contact failure of the drawer connector 2. Replace the developing assembly (Y).
• Failure of the developing stirring motor 3. Replace the DC controller PCB.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031).
motor (Y) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (M).
the connector, Breaking (shorting))
Motor side: J7158, J8031 PCB side: J1243
2. Replace the developing assembly (Y).
3. Replace the DC controller PCB.
4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031).
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Y).

7-38
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-39
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E023 -0202 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (M) error E023 -0302 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (C) error
Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (M) (M28) cannot Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (C) (M27) cannot
of detection be detected for the specified period of time after first of detection be detected for the specified period of time after first
detection detection
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
overloaded) overloaded)
• Failure of the DC controller PCB • Failure of the DC controller PCB
• Contact failure of the drawer connector • Contact failure of the drawer connector
• Failure of the developing stirring motor • Failure of the developing stirring motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring
motor (M) and the DC controller interface PCB (UN2). motor (C) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
(Connection of the connector, Breaking (shorting)) the connector, Breaking (shorting))
Motor side: J7156, J8031 PCB side: J1243 Motor side: J7157, J8038 PCB side: J1243
2. Replace the developing assembly (Y). 2. Replace the developing assembly (C).
3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 3. Replace the DC controller PCB.
4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031).
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (M). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (C).
E023 -0301 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (C) error E023 -0401 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (Bk) error
Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (C) (M27) Description The lock signal of the developing stirring motor (Bk) (M29)
of detection cannot be detected within a specified period. of detection cannot be detected within a specified period.
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) • Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting)
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve • Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve
overloaded) overloaded)
• Failure of the DC controller PCB • Failure of the DC controller PCB
• Contact failure of the drawer connector • Contact failure of the drawer connector
• Failure of the developing stirring motor • Failure of the developing stirring motor
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring
motor (C) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of motor (Bk) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of
the connector, Breaking (shorting)) the connector, Breaking (shorting))
Motor side: J7157, J8038 PCB side: J1243 Motor side: J7152, J8038 PCB side: J1243
2. Replace the developing assembly (C). 2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk).
3. Replace the DC controller PCB. 3. Replace the DC controller PCB.
4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). 4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031).
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (C). 5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Bk).

7-39
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-40
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E023 -0402 -05 Title Developing stirring motor (Bk) error E025 -0110 -05 Title Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP
Description Lock signal of Developing stirring motor (Bk) (M29) sensor timeout (Y) error
of detection cannot be detected for the specified period of time after Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect
first detection of detection within specified period of time.
• Connector disconnected, breaking (shorting) Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive
• Failure of the developing assembly (Sleeve motor (M10) harness. (Check whether the wire is not
overloaded) caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC
• Failure of the DC controller PCB controller PCB.
• Contact failure of the drawer connector Motor side: J7100 PCB side: J1247
• Failure of the developing stirring motor 2. Check the connection between the release holder shift
Measures 1. Check the connection between the developing stirring cam HP sensor (PS8) and the DC controller PCB.
motor (Bk) and the DC controller PCB. (Connection of Sensor side: J7135, J8040 PCB side: J1248
the connector, Breaking (shorting)) 3. Replace the toner container drive motor.
Motor side: J7152, J8038 PCB side: J1243 4. Clean and replace the release holder shift cam HP
2. Replace the developing assembly (Bk). sensor.
3. Replace the DC controller interface PCB. 5. Replace the hopper unit.
4. Check the contact of the drawer connector (J8031). CAUTION:
5. Replace the developing stirring motor (Bk). As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause,
E025 -0102 -05 Title Block supply timeout (Y) error it is recommended to replace the unit.
Description The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect NOTE:
of detection rotation of the screw. After performing the above remedy work, go through
Measures 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
supply motor (M9) and the DC controller PCB. CLEAR> ERR
Motor side: J7104, J8106 PCB side: J1247 E025 -0120 -05 Title Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (Y)
2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw error
rotation sensor (PS12) and the DC controller PCB. Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the
Sensor side: J7418, J8106 PCB side: J1247 of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift
3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor. cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the
4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the
sensor. toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor
5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit. was transmissive).
6. Replace the hopper unit. Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn
CAUTION: OFF/ON the power.
Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is 2. Check the connection between the toner container
overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS10) and
interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector,
cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. Breaking, Wire caught by parts)
Sensor side: J7122, PCB side: J2146
3. Check the connection between the release holder shift
cam phase sensor (PS81) and the DC controller PCB.
(Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught
by parts)
Sensor side: J7123,J8106, PCB side: J1247
4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/
close sensor.

7-40
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-41
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -01A0 -05 Title Error in Y Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor E025 -01B0 -05 Title Error in Y Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor
(PS11) (PS11)
Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift
of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the
cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be
judged. judged.
Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at
the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side.
1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is
soiled and the installation of the sensor. soiled and the installation of the sensor.
2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container
Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER>
I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit12) to see that the output I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit12) to see that the output
value of the sensor is changed. value of the sensor is changed.
Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it,
repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the
screen until the value is changed. screen until the value is changed.
If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed
when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be
sure to perform step 4 and later steps. sure to perform step 4 and later steps.
2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit,
check the drive system such as gears. check the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit
and then perform step 4 and later steps. and then perform step 4 and later steps.
2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not
changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, changed although the Hopper Unit is driven,
check the Sensor Harness (to see if the check the Sensor Harness (to see if the
harness is caught, disconnected or physically harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed). removed).
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After
checking the output value in step 2, perform checking the output value in step 2, perform
step 4 and later steps. step 4 and later steps.
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform
step 4 and later steps. step 4 and later steps.
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and
then ON the main power. then ON the main power.
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally. that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-41
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-42
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -01C0 -05 Title Error in Y Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS10) E025 -0202 -05 Title Block supply timeout (M) error
Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet Description The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect
of detection Cover when removing the Toner Container. of detection rotation of the screw.
Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link Measures 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring
mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or supply motor (M12) and the DC controller PCB.
problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side. Motor side: J7105, J8107 PCB side: J1247
1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> 2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw
Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion rotation sensor (PS15) and the hopper driver PCB.
Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft Sensor side: J7419, J8107 PCB side: J1247
area, etc.). 3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor.
2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is 4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation
soiled and the installation of the sensor. sensor.
3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> 5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit.
P035 bit7) to see that the output value of the Toner 6. Replace the hopper unit.
Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when CAUTION:
opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is
If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear
Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the
and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When cause, it is recommended to replace the unit.
closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it E025 -0210 -05 Title Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP
becomes 1. sensor timeout (M) error
3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not opened Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect
although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the drive of detection within specified period of time.
system from upstream (Hopper Unit -> link mechanism Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive
of Hopper Tray -> Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Unit). motor (M13) harness. (Check whether the wire is not
If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and then caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC
perform step 5 and later steps. controller PCB.
3-2. When the output value is not changed normally Motor side: J7101,J8107, PCB side: J1247
although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can be 2. Check the connection between the release holder shift
opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness (to see cam HP sensor (PS14) and the DC controller PCB.
if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically Sensor side: J7198 PCB side: J1249
removed, *including the Relay Connector). 3. Replace the toner container drive motor.
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After 4. Clean and replace the release holder shift cam HP
checking the output value in step 3, perform step 5 and sensor.
later steps. 5. Replace the hopper unit.
4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing CAUTION:
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause,
step 5 and later steps. it is recommended to replace the unit.
5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> NOTE:
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and After performing the above remedy work, go through
then ON the main power. the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner CLEAR> ERR
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-42
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-43
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -0220 -05 Title Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (M) E025 -02A0 -05 Title Error in M Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor
error (PS14)
Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift
of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the
cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be
toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the judged.
toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
was transmissive). mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at
Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side.
OFF/ON the power. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is
2. Check the connection between the toner container soiled and the installation of the sensor.
inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS13) and 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container
the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER>
Breaking, Wire caught by parts) I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit11) to see that the output value
Sensor side: J7125 PCB side: J1246 of the sensor is changed.
3. Check the connection between the release holder shift Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it,
cam phase sensor (PS82) and the hopper driver PCB. repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the
(Connection of the connector, Breaking, Wire caught screen until the value is changed.
by parts) If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed
Sensor side: J7126 PCB side: J1247 when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be
4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/ sure to perform step 4 and later steps.
close sensor. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check
the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then
perform step 4 and later steps.
2-2 When the output value of the sensor is not changed
although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor
Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected
or physically removed).
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After
checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and
later steps.
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform
step 4 and later steps.
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and
then ON the main power.
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-43
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-44
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -02B0 -05 Title Error in M Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor E025 -02C0 -05 Title Error in M Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS13)
(PS14) Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet
Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cover when removing the Toner Container.
of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link
cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or
judged. problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side.
Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to 1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance>
mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion
the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft
1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is area, etc.).
soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is
2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container soiled and the installation of the sensor.
Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> 3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON>
I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit11) to see that the output value P035 bit6) to see that the output value of the Toner
of the sensor is changed. Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when
Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover.
repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the
screen until the value is changed. Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool
If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When
when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it
sure to perform step 4 and later steps. becomes 1.
2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, check 3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not
the drive system such as gears. opened although the Hopper Unit is driven,
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit and then check the drive system from upstream (Hopper
perform step 4 and later steps. Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner
2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not changed Insertion Inlet Cover Unit).
although the Hopper Unit is driven, check the Sensor If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and
Harness (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected then perform step 5 and later steps.
or physically removed). 3-2. When the output value is not changed normally
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can
checking the output value in step 2, perform step 4 and be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness
later steps. (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing or physically removed, *including the Relay
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform Connector).
step 4 and later steps. If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> checking the output value in step 3, perform
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and step 5 and later steps.
then ON the main power. 4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ step 5 and later steps.
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check 5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
that toner replacement can be performed normally. FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and
then ON the main power.
6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-44
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-45
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -0302 -05 Title Block supply timeout (C) error E025 -0320 -05 Title Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (C)
Description The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect error
of detection rotation of the screw. Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the
Measures 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift
supply motor (M15) and the DC controller PCB. cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the
Motor side: J7102, J8108 PCB side: J1248 toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the
2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor
rotation sensor (PS18) and the DC controller PCB. was transmissive).
Sensor side: J7420, J8108 PCB side: J1248 Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn
3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor. OFF/ON the power.
4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation 2. Check the connection between the toner container
sensor. inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS16) and
5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit. the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector,
6. Replace the hopper unit. Shorting, Wire caught by parts)
CAUTION: Sensor side: J7128, PCB side: J1246
Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is 3. Check the connection between the release holder shift
overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear cam phase sensor (PS82) and the DC controller PCB.
interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by
cause, it is recommended to replace the unit. parts)
E025 -0310 -05 Title Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP Sensor side: J7129, PCB side: J1248
sensor timeout (C) error 4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/
Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect close sensor.
of detection within specified period of time.
Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive
motor (M16) harness. (Check whether the wire is not
caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC
controller PCB.
SinceMotor side: J7102,J8108 PCB side: J1248
2. Check the connection between the release holder shift
cam HP sensor (PS17) and the DC controller PCB.
SinceSensor side: J7197, PCB side: J1249
3. Replace the toner container drive motor.
4. Clean and replace the release holder shift cam HP
sensor.
5. Replace the hopper unit.
CAUTION:
As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause,
it is recommended to replace the unit.
NOTE:
After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
CLEAR> ERR

7-45
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-46
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -03A0 -05 Title Error in C Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor E025 -03B0 -05 Title Error in C Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor
(PS17) (PS17)
Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift
of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the
cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be
judged. judged.
Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at
the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side.
1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is
soiled and the installation of the sensor. soiled and the installation of the sensor.
2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container
Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER>
I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit10) to see that the output I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit10) to see that the output
value of the sensor is changed. value of the sensor is changed.
Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it,
repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the
screen until the value is changed. screen until the value is changed.
If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed
when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be
sure to perform step 4 and later steps. sure to perform step 4 and later steps.
2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit,
check the drive system such as gears. check the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit
and then perform step 4 and later steps. and then perform step 4 and later steps.
2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not 2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not
changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, changed although the Hopper Unit is driven,
check the Sensor Harness (to see if the check the Sensor Harness (to see if the
harness is caught, disconnected or physically harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed). removed).
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After
checking the output value in step 2, perform checking the output value in step 2, perform
step 4 and later steps. step 4 and later steps.
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing 3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform
step 4 and later steps. step 4 and later steps.
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> 4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and
then ON the main power. then ON the main power.
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner 5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally. that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-46
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-47
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -03C0 -05 Title Error in C Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS16) E025 -0402 -05 Title Block supply timeout (Bk) error
Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet Description The toner supply screw rotation sensor cannot detect
of detection Cover when removing the Toner Container. of detection rotation of the screw.
Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link Measures 1. Check the connection between the hopper/stirring
mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or supply motor (M6) and the DC controller PCB.
problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side. Motor side: J7107, J8040 PCB side: J1248
1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance> 2. Check the connection between the toner feed screw
Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion rotation sensor (PS9) and the DC controller PCB.
Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft Sensor side: J7417, J8040 PCB side: J1248
area, etc.). 3. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor.
2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is 4. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation
soiled and the installation of the sensor. sensor.
3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON> 5. Replace the toner supply pipe unit.
P034 bit5) to see that the output value of the Toner 6. Replace the hopper unit.
Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when CAUTION:
opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. Remedies 5 and 6 are taken when the motor is
If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the overloaded due to toner adhesion in the unit or gear
Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool interlocking failure, etc. Since it is difficult to identify the
and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When cause, it is recommended to replace the unit.
closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it E025 -0410 -05 Title Toner container sealing/release holder shift cam HP
becomes 1. sensor timeout (Bk) error
3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not Description HP sensor of release holder shift cam cannot detect
opened although the Hopper Unit is driven, of detection within specified period of time.
check the drive system from upstream (Hopper Measures 1. Check the connection of the toner container drive
Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner motor (M7) harness. (Check whether the wire is not
Insertion Inlet Cover Unit). caught by parts.) Check the connection with the DC
If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and controller PCB.
then perform step 5 and later steps. Motor side: J7103, J8040 PCB side: J1248
3-2. When the output value is not changed normally 2. Check the connection between the release holder shift
although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can cam HP sensor (PS8) and the DC controller PCB.
be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness Sensor side: J7135, J8040 PCB side: J1248
(to see if the harness is caught, disconnected 3. Clean and replace the toner feed screw rotation
or physically removed, *including the Relay sensor.
Connector). 4. Replace the hopper/stirring supply motor.
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After 5. Replace the hopper unit.
checking the output value in step 3, perform CAUTION:
step 5 and later steps. As for Remedy 5, since it is difficult to identify the cause,
4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing it is recommended to replace the unit.
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform NOTE:
step 5 and later steps. After performing the above remedy work, go through
5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and CLEAR> ERR
then ON the main power.
6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-47
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-48
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -0420 -05 Title Toner container/toner container inserting inlet phase (Bk) E025 -04A0 -05 Title Error in Bk Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor
error (PS8)
Description When the power was turned on, it was detected that the Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift
of detection toner container cap was opened (the release holder shift of detection Cam HP Sensor status (ON -> OFF) when opening the
cam phase sensor was protected against light) AND the cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be
toner container inserting inlet cover was opened (the judged.
toner container inserting inlet cover open/close sensor Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
was transmissive). mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at
Measures 1. Close the toner container inserting inlet cover and turn the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side.
OFF/ON the power. 1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is
2. Check the connection between the toner container soiled and the installation of the sensor.
inserting inlet cover open/close sensor (PS7) and 2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container
the DC controller PCB. (Connection of the connector, Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER>
Shorting, Wire caught by parts) I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit9) to see that the output value
Sensor side: J7138, PCB side: J1246 of the sensor is changed.
3. Check the connection between the release holder shift Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it,
cam phase sensor (PS84) and the DC controller PCB. repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the
(Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by screen until the value is changed.
parts) If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed
Sensor side: J7139, J8040 PCB side: J1248 when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be
4. Replace the toner container inserting inlet cover open/ sure to perform step 4 and later steps.
close sensor. 2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit,
check the drive system such as gears.
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit
and then perform step 4 and later steps.
2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not
changed although the Hopper Unit is driven,
check the Sensor Harness (to see if the
harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed).
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After
checking the output value in step 2, perform
step 4 and later steps.
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform
step 4 and later steps.
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and
then ON the main power.
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-48
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-49
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E025 -04B0 -05 Title Error in Bk Toner Container Reciprocation HP Sensor E025 -04C0 -05 Title Error in Bk Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor (PS7)
(PS8) Description Unable to detect opening of the Toner Insertion Inlet
Description Unable to detect the change in the Release Holder Shift of detection Cover when removing the Toner Container.
of detection Cam HP Sensor status (OFF -> ON) when closing the Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to link
cap so that open and close status of the cap cannot be mechanism to open the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover or
judged. problem at the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor side.
Measures Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to 1. Perform the user mode (Adjustment/Maintenance>
mechanical problem to open/close the cap or problem at Replace Specified Toner) to check if the Toner Insertion
the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor side. Inlet Cover opens normally (damage, slide of shaft
1. Check if the Release Holder Shift Cam HP Sensor is area, etc.).
soiled and the installation of the sensor. 2. Check if the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is
2. Drive the Hopper Unit a little with the Toner Container soiled and the installation of the sensor.
Removing Tool, and check the service mode (COPIER> 3. Check the service mode (COPIER> I/O> DC-CON>
I/O> DC-CON> P036 bit9) to see that the output value P035 bit4) to see that the output value of the Toner
of the sensor is changed. Insertion Inlet Cover Sensor is changed normally when
Since it is difficult to check the screen while driving it, opening/closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover.
repeat the operation to drive it a little and check the If it is normal, the value becomes 0 by driving the
screen until the value is changed. Hopper Unit with the Toner Container Removing Tool
If it is normal, the output value of the sensor is changed and opening the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover. When
when opening/closing the cap. Even if it is normal, be closing the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover by hand, it
sure to perform step 4 and later steps. becomes 1.
2-1. If there is an error in drive of the Hopper Unit, 3-1. When the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover is not
check the drive system such as gears. opened although the Hopper Unit is driven,
If it is damaged, replace the Set-on Drive Unit check the drive system from upstream (Hopper
and then perform step 4 and later steps. Unit -> link mechanism of Hopper Tray -> Toner
2-2. When the output value of the sensor is not Insertion Inlet Cover Unit).
changed although the Hopper Unit is driven, If it is damaged, replace the damaged part and
check the Sensor then perform step 5 and later steps.
Harness (to see if the harness is caught, 3-2. When the output value is not changed normally
disconnected or physically removed). although the Toner Insertion Inlet Cover can
If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After be opened/closed, check the Sensor Harness
checking the output value in step 2, perform (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected
step 4 and later steps. or physically removed, *including the Relay
3. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing Connector).
parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform If there is no problem, replace the sensor. After
step 4 and later steps. checking the output value in step 3, perform
4. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER> step 5 and later steps.
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and 4. If the problem is not solved by replacing the foregoing
then ON the main power. parts, replace the DC controller PCB and then perform
5. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner step 5 and later steps.
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/ 5. Clear the error in service mode (COPIER>
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR), and then turn OFF and
that toner replacement can be performed normally. then ON the main power.
6. Replace the toner (reinstall the removed Toner
Container) at least once in user mode (Adjustment/
Maintenance> Replace Specified Toner), and check
that toner replacement can be performed normally.

7-49
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-50
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E056 -0001 -05 Title Reverse Roller disengagement home position error E060 -0002 -05 Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP close error
Description At initial operation, the Reverse Roller Disengagement Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92)
of detection HP Sensor (PS101) failed to detect home position despite of detection detected that the shutter was closed although it was
an operation of the Reverse Disengagement Motor (M54). moved to the open position.
Remedy 1. Replace the Reverse Disengagement Motor. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire
2. Check the mechanism to detect home position for Cleaning Motor (M1).
disengagement of the Reverse Roller. 2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
3. Replace the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP (M1).
Sensor. 3. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire
E056 -0002 -05 Title Reverse Roller operation error Shutter HP Sensor (PS92).
Description During printing, the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP 4. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
of detection Sensor (PS101) failed to detect change in the detection (PS92).
flag despite an operation of the Reverse Disengagement 5. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging
Motor (M54). Assembly.
Remedy 1. Replace the Reverse Disengagement Motor. 6. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
2. Check the mechanism to detect home position for 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
disengagement of the Reverse Roller. E060 -0011 -05 Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 1 when cleaning the
3. Replace the Reverse Roller Disengagement HP Primary Charging Wire
Sensor. Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92)
E060 -0001 -05 Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP open error of detection failed to be detected although 10 seconds have passed
Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92) since the Primary Charging Wire Shutter started its
of detection detected that the shutter was open although it was moved operation.
to the close position. Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire
Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92).
Cleaning Motor (M1). 2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (PS92).
(M1). 3. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging
3. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire Assembly.
Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 4. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
4. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
(PS92). E060 -0012 -05 Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 2 when cleaning the
5. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging Primary Charging Wire
Assembly. Description The Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor (PS92)
6. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. of detection remained to be detected although 10 seconds have
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. passed since the Primary Charging Wire Shutter started
its operation.
Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire
Shutter HP Sensor (PS92).
2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
(PS92).
3. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging
Assembly.
4. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

7-50
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-51
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E060 -0023 -05 Title Error in the Primary Charging Wire Shutter position E061 -0003 -05 Title Potential control Vd failure
during rotation of the Bk Drum Description At the time of measurement of Vd at potential control,
Description Faulty position of the Primary Charging Wire Shutter was of detection the value is more than +50 V or less than -200 V against
of detection detected while the Bk Drum was rotating. Vgrid.
Remedy 1. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire • Drum cleaning pre-exposure is not performed correctly.
Cleaning Motor (M1). • Primary charging is not performed correctly.
2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor • The drum is reaching the end of life.
(M1). Measures 1. Check the connection of the drum cleaning pre-
3. Check connection of the Primary Charging Wire exposure LED.
Shutter HP Sensor (PS92). 2. Check the connection of the primary charging
4. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor assembly.
(PS92). • Check whether the grid plate is properly installed.
5. Check shutter mechanism of the Primary Charging • Check whether the shield plate is not soiled by toner.
Assembly. -> Clean the shield plate.
6. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly. • Check whether disconnection of the connector or
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. shorting does not occur or the wire is not caught by
E061 -0001 -05 Title Primary charging bias (Bk) lower limit error parts.
Description At initial rotation, the drum surface potential Vd at 3. Replace the parts.
of detection potential control is less than 30 V. • Drum cleaning pre-exposure LED
• Primary charging bias (Bk) is not properly applied. • Primary charging assembly
• The drum does not rotate correctly. • Drum (Checking can be performed by COPIER>
Measures 1. Check whether the primary charging assembly is DISPLAY>DPOT>D-CONT-K. Estimated life is 150,000
properly installed or connected. (Connection of the or less.)
connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) E061 -0004 -05 Title Laser power shortage error
2. Check whether the primary charging high-voltage PCB Description At the time of measurement of 8 bright section potential
(Bk) is properly installed or connected. (Connection of of detection VI at potential control, the grid bias Vgrid is more than
the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by parts) 100 V at least at one point.
3. Check whether the drum motor (Bk) is properly • Dirt is applied to the dust prevention glass.
installed or connected. (Connection of the connector, • Laser is not applied correctly.
Shorting, Wire caught by parts) Measures 1. Clean the dust prevention glass.
4. Replace the parts. 2. Check the connection of the laser scanner unit.
• Primary charging assembly (Connection of the connector, Shorting, Wire caught by
• Primary charging high-voltage PCB (Bk) parts)
• Drum/ITB drive motor 3. Replace the parts.
• DC controller interface PCB • Laser scanner unit (Bk)
• DC controller PCB • Laser interface PCB
E061 -0002 -05 Title Potential sensor offset adjustment error E064 -1101 -05 Title Primary charging DC bias (Y) output error
Description When the result of potential sensor offset adjustment is Description The primary charging DC bias (Y) output showed an
of detection more than +/-30 V. of detection abnormal value.
Measures 1. Check whether the potential sensor offset adjustment Remedy Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C).
tool is properly installed. E064 -1103 -05 Title Developing DC bias (Y) output error
2. Replace the potential sensor. Description The developing DC bias (Y) output showed an abnormal
of detection value.
Remedy Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C).

7-51
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-52
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E064 -2201 -05 Title Primary charging DC bias (M) output error E066 -0002 -05 Title Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP close error
Description The primary charging DC bias (M) output showed an Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
of detection abnormal value. of detection (PS93) detected that the shutter was closed although it
Remedy Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). was moved to the open position.
E064 -2203 -05 Title Developing DC bias (M) output error Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Description The developing DC bias (M) output showed an abnormal Cleaning Motor (M2).
of detection value. 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning
Remedy Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). Motor (M2).
E064 -3301 -05 Title Primary charging DC bias (C) output error 3. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Shutter HP Sensor (PS93).
Description The primary charging DC bias (C) output showed an
4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP
of detection abnormal value.
Sensor (PS93).
Remedy Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C).
5. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging
E064 -3303 -05 Title Developing DC bias (C) output error
Assembly.
Description The developing DC bias (C) output showed an abnormal 6. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
of detection value. 7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Remedy Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). E066 -0011 -05 Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 1 when cleaning the
E064 -4403 -05 Title Developing DC bias (Bk) output error Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Description The developing DC bias (Bk) output showed an abnormal Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
of detection value. of detection (PS93) failed to be detected although 10 seconds have
Remedy Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk). passed since the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter
E064 -1000 -05 Title No output of reference signal for primary charging DC started its operation.
bias (Y/M/C) Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Description No output of reference signal for primary charging DC Shutter HP Sensor (PS93).
of detection bias (Y/M/C). 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP
Remedy Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C). Sensor (PS93).
E064 -1001 -05 Title No output of reference signal for developing DC bias (Y/ 3. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging
M/C/Bk) Assembly.
Description No output of reference signal for developing DC bias (Y/ 4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
of detection M/C/Bk). 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Remedy Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C, Bk). E066 -0012 -05 Title Primary Charging Wire Shutter error 2 when cleaning the
E066 -0001 -05 Title Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP open error Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor Description The Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Sensor
of detection (PS93) detected that the shutter was open although it of detection (PS93) remained to be detected although 10 seconds
was moved to the close position. have passed since the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter started its operation.
Cleaning Motor (M2). Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Shutter HP Sensor (PS93).
Motor (M2). 2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP
3. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Sensor (PS93).
Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). 3. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging
4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP Assembly.
Sensor (PS93). 4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
5. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging 5. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Assembly.
6. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB.

7-52
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-53
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E066 -0023 -05 Title Error in the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter position E074 -0001 -05 Title Primary transfer roller detachment/attachment error
during rotation of the Bk Drum Description The primary transfer roller attachment/detachment HP
Description Faulty position of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter of detection sensor (PS4) cannot detect the home position within a
of detection was detected while the Bk Drum was rotating. specified period.
Remedy 1. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Measures 1. Check the connection between the primary transfer
Cleaning Motor (M2). roller detachment HP sensor (PS4) and the ITB relay
2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning PCB (UN28). (Connector, Breaking (shorting))
Motor (M2). Sensor side: J7113 PCB side: J2701
3. Check connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire 2. Check the connection between the ITB relay PCB and
Shutter HP Sensor (PS93). the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking (shorting))
4. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Shutter HP ITB relay PCB: J2700, J8050 DC controller PCB:
Sensor (PS93). J1241, J8010
5. Check shutter mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging 3. Replace the primary transfer roller detachment HP
Assembly. sensor.
6. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. 4. Check the link parts of the primary transfer roller
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (pressure release lever, link, cam).
E073 -0001 -05 Title Host machine interlock failure If foreign matters are found, remove them. If they are
Description Interlock at 24 V cannot be detected in the condition soiled with toner, etc., perform cleaning (when the
of detection where all of the front cover, left lower cover, and manual parts do not move smoothly due to dirt).
feed cover are closed. 5. Check whether the gear is not damaged.
Measures 1. Check whether shorting does not occur to the harness If it is damaged, replace the attachment/detachment
of the interlock group. If it occurs, replace the harness. drive unit (FM3-4905).
2. Replace the relay board. (Blowout at the relay PCB E075 -0000 -05 Title Steering HP error
(UN7)) Description The home position of the steering roller cannot be
3. Replace the interlock switch. of detection detected. It cannot move from the home position.
• Front door open/close switch 1 (SW1) Measures 1. Check the connection between the steering drive
• Front door open/close switch 2 (SW2) HP sensor (PS3) and the ITB relay PCB (UN28).
• Manual feeding unit open/close switch (SW3) (Connector, Breaking (shorting))
• Paper delivery door open/close switch (SW4) Sensor side: J7416, J8045 PCB side: J2701
2. Check the connection between the steering drive motor
(M4) and the ITB relay PCB. (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Sensor side: J7414, J8044 PCB side: J2701
3. Replace the parts.
• Steering drive HP sensor
• Steering drive motor
E075 -0001 -05 Title ITB displacement sensor lower limit error
Description The output value of the ITB displacement sensor (PS2)
of detection continues to be the lower limit value.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the ITB displacement
sensor (PS2) and the ITB relay PCB (UN28).
(Connector, Breaking (shorting))
Sensor side: J7415 PCB side: J2702
2. Clean the ITB displacement sensor.
3. Replace the parts.

7-53
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
7-54
Detailed Occurance Detailed Occurance
E code Items Description E code Items Description
code area code area
E075 -0002 -05 Title ITB displacement sensor upper limit error E077 -0001 -05 Title Secondary transfer external roller detachment/attachment
Description The output value of the ITB displacement sensor (PS2) error
of detection continues to be the upper limit value. Description The secondary transfer roller attachment/detachment HP
Measures 1. Check whether the ITB displacement sensor (PS2) and of detection sensor (PS22) cannot detect the home position within a
the ITB displacement sensor flag are installed properly. specified period.
• Isn’t the ITB displacement sensor flag inserted under Measures 1. Check the connection between the secondary transfer
the ITB? roller attachment/detachment HP sensor (PS22) and
• Is the ITB displacement sensor installed correctly? the fixing feed driver (UN5). (Connector, Breaking
2. Replace the parts. (shorting))
• Replace the ITB displacement sensor flag (if the flag is Sensor side: J7214, J8102 PCB side: 1509
damaged). 2. Check the connection between the fixing feed driver
• Replace the ITB displacement sensor. and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Shorting)
• Replace the ITB. (Replace the ITB of which edge is Fixing feed driver: J1510 DC controller PCB: J1215
damaged.) 3. Check the connection between the secondary transfer
• Replace the steering control mechanism parts. roller detachment motor (M31) and the pickup feed
(Pressure spring removed from the steering arm, etc.) driver PCB (UN4). (Connector, Breaking (shorting))
Motor side: J7003 DC controller interface side: 1409
4. Check the connection between the pickup feed driver
PCB and the DC controller PCB. (Connector, Breaking
(shorting))
Pickup feed driver PCB: J1401 DC controller PCB:
J1215
5. Check the installation condition of the detachment
mechanism assemblies (cam, arm, secondary transfer
external roller holder).
Check the condition of the attachment/detachment cam
mechanism assembly.
6. Replace the secondary transfer roller attachment/
detachment HP sensor.
7. Check the drive gear. -> Replace the gear.
8. Replace the secondary transfer roller detachment
motor.
9. Replace the drive unit.
T-7-7

7-54
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E021 to E077
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-55
■■E100 to E197 E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E100 -0301 -05 Title Laser scanner motor BD (C) error
code code area Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal
E100 -0101 -05 Title Laser scanner motor BD (Y) error of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation.
Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed.
of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB,
Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector
DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
(UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201,
connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser
Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Interface PCB: J5500
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit
Interface PCB: J5500 and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open
3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit circuit/the caught cable).
and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open Laser Scanner Unit: J8064, J5511, Laser Interface
circuit/the caught cable). PCB: J5101C
Laser Scanner Unit: J8070, J5509, Laser Interface 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
PCB: J5101Y 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.
5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. E100 -0401 -05 Title Laser scanner motor BD (Bk) error
6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal
E100 -0201 -05 Title Laser scanner motor BD (M) error of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation.
Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed.
of detection and PLOCK signal during BD rotation. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB,
Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector
DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
(UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201,
connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser
Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Interface PCB: J5500
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit
Interface PCB: J5500 and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open
3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit circuit/the caught cable).
and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open Laser Scanner Unit: J8066, J5512, Laser Interface
circuit/the caught cable). PCB: J5101K
Laser Scanner Unit: J8076, J5510, Laser Interface 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
PCB: J5101M 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.
5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.

7-55
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-56
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E102 -0101 -05 Title Laser scanner unit (Y) EEPROM error E102 -0301 -05 Title Laser scanner unit (C) EEPROM error
Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data
of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected. of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected.
Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed.
2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB,
DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
(UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector
connection, open circuit, the caught cable). connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201,
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser
Interface PCB: J5500 Interface PCB: J5500
3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit
and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open
circuit/the caught cable). circuit/the caught cable).
Laser Scanner Unit: J8070, J5509, Laser Interface Laser Scanner Unit: J8064, J5511, Laser Interface
PCB: J5101Y PCB: J5101C
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.
7. Replace the Relay PCB (UN7). E102 -0401 -05 Title Laser scanner unit (Bk) EEPROM error
E102 -0201 -05 Title Laser scanner unit (M) EEPROM error Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data
Description Laser scanner unit EEPROM failure / Failure of the data of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected.
of detection written in the laser scanner unit EEPROM was detected. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed.
Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB,
2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector
(UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
connection, open circuit, the caught cable). Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201,
Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Interface PCB: J5500
Interface PCB: J5500 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit
3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open
and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open circuit/the caught cable).
circuit/the caught cable). Laser Scanner Unit: J8066, J5512, Laser Interface
Laser Scanner Unit: J8076, J5510, Laser Interface PCB: J5101K
PCB: J5101M 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.
6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.

7-56
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-57
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E110 -0101 -05 Title Laser scanner motor (Y) error E110 -0301 -05 Title Laser scanner motor (C) error
Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal
of detection during FG rotation. of detection during FG rotation.
Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed.
2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB,
DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
(UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector
connection, open circuit, the caught cable). connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201,
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser
Interface PCB: J5500 Interface PCB: J5500
3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit
and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open
circuit/the caught cable). circuit/the caught cable).
Laser Scanner Unit: J8070, J5509, Laser Interface Laser Scanner Unit: J8064, J5511, Laser Interface
PCB: J5101Y PCB: J5101C
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.
E110 -0201 -05 Title Laser scanner motor (M) error E110 -0401 -05 Title Laser scanner motor (Bk) error
Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal Description The laser scanner motor cannot detect the VLOCK signal
of detection during FG rotation. of detection during FG rotation.
Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed. Measures 1. Check that the cover is closed.
2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB, 2. Check connection of the following parts: Relay PCB,
DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB DC Controller PCB, Laser Power Supply Relay PCB
(UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector (UN101), and Laser Interface PCB (UN100) (connector
connection, open circuit, the caught cable). connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201, Relay PCB: J1817, DC Controller PCB: J1200, J1201,
Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser Laser Power Supply Relay PCB: J5600, J5601, Laser
Interface PCB: J5500 Interface PCB: J5500
3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit 3. Check connection between the Laser Scanner Unit
and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open and Laser Interface PCB (connector connection/open
circuit/the caught cable). circuit/the caught cable).
Laser Scanner Unit: J8076, J5510, Laser Interface Laser Scanner Unit: J8066, J5512, Laser Interface
PCB: J5101M PCB: J5101K
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 5. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB. 6. Replace the Laser Power Supply Relay PCB.
E197 -0000 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver
of detection PCB.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver
PCB (J1511) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222).
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.

7-57
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-58
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E197 -0001 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -0009 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver Description Ex serial communication error with the Multi Deck.
of detection PCB. of detection
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB
PCB (J1511) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222). and the DC Controller PCB (J1226).
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB.
E197 -0002 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -000a -05 Title Serial communication error
Description Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed Description Ex serial communication error with the Multi Deck.
of detection Driver PCB. of detection
Measures 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB
PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221). and the DC Controller PCB (J1226).
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB.
E197 -0003 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -0010 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed Description Communication error between the VIDEO Board and the
of detection Driver PCB. of detection scanner (Y)
Measures 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver Measures 1. Check the harness between the scanner and the
PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221). VIDEO Board.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 2. Replace the Scanner Board.
3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB. 3. Replace the VIDEO Board.
E197 -0004 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -0011 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description Ex serial communication error with the DC Controller Description Communication error between the VIDEO Board and the
of detection PCB. of detection scanner (M)
Measures 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). Measures 1. Check the harness between the scanner and the
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. VIDEO Board.
E197 -0006 -05 Title Serial communication error 2. Replace the Scanner Board.
Description Ex serial communication error with the DC Controller 3. Replace the VIDEO Board.
of detection PCB. E197 -0012 -05 Title Serial communication error
Measures 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). Description Communication error between the VIDEO Board and the
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. of detection scanner (C)
E197 -0007 -05 Title Serial communication error Measures 1. Check the harness between the scanner and the
Description Ex serial communication error with the Buffer Path Unit. VIDEO Board.
of detection 2. Replace the Scanner Board.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB 3. Replace the VIDEO Board.
and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). E197 -0013 -05 Title Serial communication error
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Description Communication error between the VIDEO Board and the
3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB. of detection scanner (Bk)
E197 -0008 -05 Title Serial communication error Measures 1. Check the harness between the scanner and the
Description Ex serial communication error with the Multi Deck. VIDEO Board.
of detection 2. Replace the Scanner Board.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB 3. Replace the VIDEO Board.
and the DC Controller PCB (J1226).
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB.

7-58
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-59
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E197 -0020 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -0033 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description HOB serial communication (= register serial Description HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface
of detection communication) error with the DC Controller PCB. of detection PCB.
Measures 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). Measures 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220).
E197 -0021 -05 Title Serial communication error 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
Description HOB serial communication error in the Drum ITB Driver 3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB.
of detection PCB. E197 -0040 -05 Title Serial communication error
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum ITB Driver Description Communication error due to poor contact of Drawer
PCB (J1901) and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). of detection Connector with the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. Measures Replace the PCB and the harness.
3. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. E197 -0050 -05 Title Serial communication error
E197 -0022 -05 Title Serial communication error Description Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver
Description HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface of detection PCB.
of detection PCB. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface PCB (J1551) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222).
PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220). 2. Replace the DC ControllerPCB.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.
3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. E197 -0051 -05 Title Serial communication error
E197 -0023 -05 Title Serial communication error Description Ex serial communication error with the Fixing Feed Driver
Description HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface of detection PCB.
of detection PCB. Measures 1. Check the connection between the Fixing Feed Driver
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface PCB (J1551) and the DC Controller PCB (J1222).
PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220). 2. Replace the DC ControllerPCB.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.
3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. E197 -0052 -05 Title Serial communication error
E197 -0030 -05 Title Serial communication error Description Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed
Description HOB serial communication (= register serial of detection Driver PCB.
of detection communication) timeout error with the DC Controller Measures 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver
PCB. PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221).
Measures 1. Check connection of the DC Controller PCB (J1210). 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB.
E197 -0031 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -0053 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description HOB serial communication error in the Drum ITB Driver Description Ex serial communication error with the Pickup Feed
of detection PCB. of detection Driver PCB.
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Drum ITB Driver Measures 1. Check connection between the Pickup Feed Driver
PCB (J1901) and the DC Controller PCB (J1226). PCB (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1221).
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Drum ITB Driver PCB. 3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB.
E197 -0032 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -0057 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description HOB serial communication error with the Laser Interface Description Ex serial communication error with the Buffer Path Unit.
of detection PCB. of detection
Measures 1. Check the connection between the Laser Interface Measures 1. Check the connection between the Buffer Driver PCB
PCB (J5501) and the DC Controller PCB (J1220). (J1401) and the DC Controller PCB (J1226).
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
3. Replace the Laser Interface PCB. 3. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB.

7-59
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-60
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E197 -0100 -05 Title Serial communication error E197 -2000 -05 Title Serial communication error
Description Serial communication error in ASIC Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
of detection description (UN2) and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5)
Measures Laser Interface PCB Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
E197 -0101 -05 Title Serial communication error (UN2) and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
Description Serial communication error in ASIC 2. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
of detection 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
Measures Laser Interface PCB E197 -2001 -05 Title Serial communication error
E197 -0102 -05 Title Serial communication error Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
Description Serial communication error in ASIC description (UN2) and the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4)
of detection Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
Measures Laser Interface PCB (UN2) and the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4).
E197 -0103 -05 Title Serial communication error 2. Replace the Pickup Driver PCB (UN4).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
Description Serial communication error in ASIC
of detection E197 -2002 -05 Title Serial communication error
Measures Laser Interface PCB Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
description (UN2) and the Drum Driver PCB (UN6)
E197 -1000 -05 Title Serial communication error
Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
(UN2) and the Drum Driver PCB (UN6).
description (UN2) and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB
2. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN6).
(UN37, 38)
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
E197 -2003 -05 Title Serial communication error
(UN2) and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB
(UN37, 38). Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
2. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB description (UN2) and the Relay PCB (UN7)
(UN37, 38). Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). (UN2) and the Relay PCB (UN7).
E197 -1001 -05 Title Serial communication error 2. Replace the Relay PCB (UN7).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
description (UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB E197 -2004 -05 Title Serial communication error
Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
(UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB. description (UN2) and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150)
2. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB. Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). (UN2) and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150).
E197 -1002 -05 Title Serial communication error 2. Replace the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
description (UN2) and the High Voltage PCBs E197 -2005 -05 Title Serial communication error
Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB Detection Communication error between the DC Controller PCB
(UN2) and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB description (UN2) and the other Driver PCB
(UN37, 38). Remedy 1. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
2. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB (UN2) and other Driver PCB.
(UN2) and the Developing High Voltage PCB. 2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
3. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB.
4. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB.
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).

7-60
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
7-61
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E198 -0001 -05 Title DC Controller PCB IC error
Detection The fuse of the DC Controller PCB has melted.
description
Remedy [CAUTION] The fuse (FU1) has melted, therefore the
whole DC Controller PCB (UN2) needs to be replaced.

1. Check the following harnesses connected with the

DC Controller PCB. -> Replace the harness if it is
disconnected.
- Between J1222 and the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5)
J1511
- Between J1223 and the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN4)
J1400
- Between J1225 and the Drum ITB Driver PCB (UN6)
J1901
- Between J1226 and the Buffer Driver PCB (UN150)
J2102
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB. (For details, refer to
Chapter 6 of the Service Manual.)
T-7-8

7-61
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E100 to E197
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
7-62
■■E202 to E280 E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E227 -0001 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error
code code area Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of power-on.
E202 -0001 -04 Title Scanner home position error of detection
Description Failure of detection of the home position of the optical Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power
of detection unit for front side (outward) Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the and check the power output before the machine detects
optical home position sensor (SR2) the error to determine whether the cause of the error is
2. Damage to the optical home position sensor power supply.
3. Damage to the optical motor (M1) If there is no power output, power supply is the cause.
4. Damage to the reader controller PCB (PCB1) If there is power output, factor other than power supply
E202 -0002 -04 Title Scanner home position error can be the cause of the error.
Description Failure of detection of the home position of the optical 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
of detection unit for front side (homeward) 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer,
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
optical home position sensor (SR2) 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and
2. Damage to the optical home position sensor DADF Driver PCB.
3. Damage to the optical motor (M1) 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
4. Damage to the reader controller PCB (PCB1) side.
E202 -0003 -04 Title Scanner home position error 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver
Description Faulty position of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) at the PCB.
of detection start of a reading job E227 -0002 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job start.
optical home position sensor (SR2) of detection
2. Damage to the optical home position sensor Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power
3. Damage to the optical motor (M1) Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart
4. Damage to the reader controller PCB (PCB1) and check the power output before the machine detects
E202 -0101 -04 Title Glass home position error the error to determine whether the cause of the error is
Description Failure of detection of the glass home position (outward) power supply.
of detection If there is no power output, power supply is the cause.
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the If there is power output, factor other than power supply
glass movement home position sensor (SR11) can be the cause of the error.
2. Damage to the glass movement home position sensor 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
3. Damage to the glass movement motor (M9) 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer,
4. Damage to the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
E202 -0102 -04 Title Glass home position error 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and
DADF Driver PCB.
Description Failure of detection of the glass home position
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
of detection (homeward)
side.
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver
glass movement home position sensor (SR11)
PCB.
2. Damage to the glass movement home position sensor
3. Damage to the glass movement motor (M9)
4. Damage to the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)

7-62
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
7-63
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E227 -0003 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error E227 -0101 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job completion. Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of power-on at
of detection of detection DADF.
Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power
Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart
and check the power output before the machine detects and check the power output before the machine detects
the error to determine whether the cause of the error is the error to determine whether the cause of the error is
power supply. power supply.
If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause.
If there is power output, factor other than power supply If there is power output, factor other than power supply
can be the cause of the error. can be the cause of the error.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer,
and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and
DADF Driver PCB. DADF Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side. side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver
PCB. PCB.
E227 -0004 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error E227 -0102 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of load drive. Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job start at
of detection of detection DADF.
Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power
Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart
and check the power output before the machine detects and check the power output before the machine detects
the error to determine whether the cause of the error is the error to determine whether the cause of the error is
power supply. power supply.
If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. If there is no power output, power supply is the cause.
If there is power output, factor other than power supply If there is power output, factor other than power supply
can be the cause of the error. can be the cause of the error.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, 2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer,
and check that the Cable is not open-circuit. and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and 3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and
DADF Driver PCB. DADF Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer 4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side. side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver 5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver
PCB. PCB.

7-63
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
7-64
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E227 -0103 -04 Title Power supply (24 V) error E247 -0003 -00 Title System error
Description The 24 V port is turned off at the time of job completion Description ---
of detection at DADF. of detection
Measures Because the DC Controller turns OFF the 24 V Power Measures Contact each sale company bases
Supply when an error is detected, it is needed to restart E247 -0004 -00 Title System error
and check the power output before the machine detects Description ---
the error to determine whether the cause of the error is of detection
power supply. Measures Contact each sale company bases
If there is no power output, power supply is the cause. E248 -0001 -04 Title EEPROM error
If there is power output, factor other than power supply
Description Failure of power-on at EEPROM for the reader controller
can be the cause of the error.
of detection PCB (PCB1)
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Measures Replace the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer,
E248 -0002 -04 Title EEPROM error
and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24 V port of the Reader Controller PCB and Description Failure of writing at EEPROM for the reader controller
DADF Driver PCB. of detection PCB (PCB1)
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer Measures Replace the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
side. E248 -0003 -04 Title EEPROM error
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DADF Driver Description Failure of reading after writing at EEPROM for the reader
PCB. of detection controller PCB (PCB1)
E246 -0001 -00 Title System error Measures Replace the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Description --- E260 -0000 -05 Title Power supply (24VA/24VB) error
of detection Description 24V power (+24VA, +24VB) was not supplied.
Measures Contact each sale company bases of detection
E246 -0002 -00 Title System error Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of harness with
Description --- the corresponding PCB.
of detection Check connectors and harnesses between the
Measures Contact each sale company bases following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power
E246 -0003 -00 Title System error Supply PCB (24VA), DC Power Supply PCB (24VB).
2. Failure of PCB.
Description ---
Replace the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC
of detection
Power Supply PCB (24VA), DC Power Supply PCB
Measures Contact each sale company bases
(24VB).
E246 -0005 -00 Title System error
E260 -0001 -05 Title Power supply (24VA) error
Description ---
Description 24V power (+24VA) was not supplied.
of detection
of detection
Measures Contact each sale company bases
Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of harness with
E247 -0001 -00 Title System error
the corresponding PCB.
Description --- Check connectors and harnesses between the
of detection following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power
Measures Contact each sale company bases Supply PCB (24VA).
E247 -0002 -00 Title System error 2. Failure of PCB.
Description --- Replace the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC
of detection Power Supply PCB (24VA).
Measures Contact each sale company bases

7-64
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
7-65
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E260 -0002 -05 Title Power supply (24VB) error E270 -0101 -04 Title Failure of the backside vertical scanning direction
Description 24V power (+24VB) was not supplied. synchronization signal
of detection Description The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC)
Remedy 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of harness with of detection was not sent from the CMOS PCB (backside optical unit)
the corresponding PCB. correctly, and an image failure occurred or the operation
Check connectors and harnesses between the stopped in failure.
following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC Power Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
Supply PCB (24VB). optical unit (DADF)
2. Failure of PCB. 2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
Replace the following: AC Driver PCB, Relay PCB, DC reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Power Supply PCB (24VB). 3. Failure of the optical unit (DADF)
E260 -0003 -05 Title DC Controller PCB 5V error 4. Failure of the reader controller PCB
Description An error in the 5V output from the DC Controller PCB E280 -0001 -04 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB
of detection was detected. (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader)
Measures Replace the DC Controller PCB. Description Within the specified period of time, communication
E270 -0001 -04 Title Failure of the front side vertical direction synchronization of detection between the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit
signal (Paper Front) was not started.
Description The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC) Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner
of detection was not sent from the CMOS PCB (front side optical unit) Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/
correctly, and an image failure occurred or the operation Replace the harness.
stopped in failure. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/
optical unit (reader) Replace the harness.
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Reader).
reader controller PCB (PCB1) 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
3. Failure of the optical unit (reader) E280 -0002 -04 Title Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB
4. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader)
E270 -0002 -04 Title Failure of the horizontal/vertical direction synchronization Description Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB
signal of detection (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader).
Description The vertical direction synchronization signal (VSYNC) Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner
of detection was not sent due to a failure of the horizontal direction Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/
synchronization signal (HSYNC), and an image failure Replace the harness.
occurred or the operation stopped in failure. 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/
optical unit (reader/DADF) Replace the harness.
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
reader controller PCB (PCB1)
3. Failure of the optical unit (reader/DADF)
4. Failure of the reader controller PCB

7-65
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E202 to E280
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
7-66
E Detailed Occurance Items Description ■■E301 to E490
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E280 -0101 -04 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) code code area
Description Within the specified period of time, communication E301 -0001 -04 Title Front side light intensity failure
of detection between the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit Description The light intensity amount at front side shading is less
(Paper Back) was not started. of detection than the standard level.
Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Measures Replace the optical unit (reader)
Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/ E301 -0101 -04 Title Backside light intensity failure
Replace the harness. Description The light intensity amount at backside shading is less
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader of detection than the standard level.
Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Measures Replace the optical unit (DADF)
Replace the harness. E302 -0001 -04 Title Front side white shading failure
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Reader). Description Shading RAM access failure occurred, or the shading
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB. of detection value is less than or more than the specified level.
E280 -0102 -04 Title Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner
(PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/
Description Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB Replace the harness.
of detection (PCB1) and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader). 2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader
Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/
Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/ Replace the harness.
Replace the harness. 3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader).
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader 4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ E302 -0002 -04 Title Error in paper front black shading
Replace the harness. Description Shading RAM access error, or the shading value was
T-7-9 of detection either below or higher than the specified level.
Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner
Unit (Paper Front) (Reader). → Connect the connector/
Replace the harness.
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader
Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/
Replace the harness.
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) (Reader).
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
E302 -0101 -04 Title Backside white shading failure
Description Shading RAM access failure occurred, or the shading
of detection value is less than or more than the specified level.
Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner
Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/
Replace the harness.
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader
Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/
Replace the harness.
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader).
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.

7-66
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
7-67
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E302 -0102 -04 Title Error in paper back black shading E354 -0002 -00 Title System error
Description Shading RAM access error, or the shading value was Description ---
of detection either below or higher than the specified level. of detection
Measures 1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Measures Contact each sale company bases
Unit (Paper Back) (Reader) → Connect the connector/ E355 -0001 -00 Title System error
Replace the harness. Description ---
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader of detection
Controller PCB (PCB1). → Connect the connector/ Measures Contact each sale company bases
Replace the harness. E355 -0002 -00 Title System error
3. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) (Reader).
Description ---
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
of detection
E315 -000e -00 Title Error in the soft decode
Measures Contact each sale company bases
Description JBIG decode error
E355 -0003 -00 Title System error
of detection
Description ---
Measures Replace the main controller PCB
of detection
E350 -0000 -00 Title System error
Measures Contact each sale company bases
Description ---
E355 -0004 -00 Title System error
of detection
Description ---
Measures Contact each sale company bases
of detection
E350 -0001 -00 Title System error
Measures Contact each sale company bases
Description ---
E400 -0001 -04 Title Communication error between Reader Controller PCB
of detection
and DADF
Measures Contact each sale company bases
Description A check error occurred at the time of communication
E350 -0002 -00 Title System error of detection between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF.
Description --- Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the DADF driver
of detection PCB (PCB1) and the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Measures Contact each sale company bases 2. Failure of the DADF driver PCB
E350 -0003 -00 Title System error 3. Failure of the reader controller PCB
Description --- E400 -0002 -04 Title Failure of communication between the reader controller
of detection PCB (PCB1) and the DADF
Measures Contact each sale company bases Description A reception error occurred in communication between the
E350 -3000 -00 Title System error of detection reader controller PCB and the DADF.
Description --- Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the DADF driver
of detection PCB (PCB1) and the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Measures Contact each sale company bases 2. Failure of the DADF driver PCB
E351 -0000 -00 Title System error 3. Failure of the reader controller PCB
Description --- E400 -0003 -04 Title Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB
of detection and DADF
Measures Contact each sale company bases Description Harness disconnection between Reader Controller PCB
E354 -0001 -00 Title System error of detection and DADF.
Description --- Remedy 1. Check connection between the DADF Driver PCB and
of detection the Reader Controller PCB (connector connection/open
Measures Contact each sale company bases circuit/the caught cable).
2. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.
3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.

7-67
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
7-68
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E401 -0001 -04 Title Pickup roller unit up/down failure E412 -0001 -04 Title Failure in drive of the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (Reader
Description Even when the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) Assembly)
of detection is driven, the level of the pickup roller unit up/down Description The Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was not driven.
home position sensor (SR12) does not change within a of detection
specified period. Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the 2. Check if there is open circuit.
pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12) 3. Replace the corresponding fan.
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.
pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) E412 -0002 -04 Title Failure to stop Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (Reader
3. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down home position Assembly)
sensor Description The Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was not stopped.
4. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down motor of detection
E401 -0002 -04 Title Pickup roller unit up/down failure Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
Description Even when the pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) 2. Check if there is open circuit.
of detection is driven, the level of the pickup roller unit up/down 3. Replace the corresponding fan.
home position sensor (SR12) does not change within a 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.
specified period. E412 -0003 -04 Title Failure in drive of the DADF Cooling Fan 3
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the Description DADF Cooling Fan 3 was not driven.
pickup roller unit up/down home position sensor (SR12) of detection
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
pickup roller unit up/down motor (M10) 2. Check if there is open circuit.
3. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down home position 3. Replace the corresponding fan.
sensor 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.
4. Failure of the pickup roller unit up/down motor E412 -0004 -04 Title Failure to stop DADF Cooling Fan 3
E407 -0001 -04 Title Failure of the tray up/down motor (M8) Description DADF Cooling Fan 3 was not stopped.
Description Even when the tray up/down motor (M8) is driven, the of detection
of detection tray home position sensor (SR13) is not turned ON or Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
OFF within a specified period. 2. Check if there is open circuit.
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the 3. Replace the corresponding fan.
tray home position sensor (SR13) 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the E412 -0005 -04 Title Failure in drive of the DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2
tray up/down motor (M8)
Description DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 was not driven.
3. Failure of the tray home position sensor
of detection
4. Failure of the tray up/down motor
Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
E407 -0002 -04 Title Failure of the tray up/down motor (M8)
2. Check if there is open circuit.
Description Even when the tray up/down motor (M8) is driven, the 3. Replace the corresponding fan.
of detection paper surface sensor (SR6) is not turned ON within a 4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.
specified period.
E412 -0006 -04 Title Failure to stop DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
Description DADF Cooling Fan 1 or 2 was not stopped.
paper surface sensor (SR6)
of detection
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
Remedy 1. Disconnect and then connect the connector.
tray up/down motor (M8)
2. Check if there is open circuit.
3. Failure of the paper surface sensor
3. Replace the corresponding fan.
4. Failure of the tray up/down motor
4. Replace the DADF Driver PCB.

7-68
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
7-69
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E413 -0001 -04 Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) E423 -0001 -04 Title DADF SDRAM error
Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) is driven, Description SDRAM access error
of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) is of detection
not turned ON within a specified period. Measures Failure of the SDRAM (video image memory) located on
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) E423 -0002 -04 Title DADF SDRAM error
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the Description SDRAM Verify error
detachment motor 1 (M6) of detection
3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 1 Measures Failure of the SDRAM (video image memory) located on
4. Failure of the detachment motor 1 the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1) E490 -0001 -04 Title DADF model mismatch error
E413 -0002 -04 Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) Description DADF that is not supported is installed.
Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 1 (M6) is driven, of detection
of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) is Measures 1. DADF of a different model is installed.
not turned OFF within a specified period. 2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the 3. Failure of the DC controller PCB
detachment home position sensor 1 (SR15) 4. Failure of the main controller PCB
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the T-7-10
detachment motor 1 (M6)
3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 1
4. Failure of the detachment motor 1
5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)
E413 -0011 -04 Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7)
Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7) is driven,
of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16) is
not turned ON within a specified period.
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16)
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
detachment motor 2 (M7)
3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 2
4. Failure of the detachment motor 2
5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)
E413 -0012 -04 Title Failure of the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7)
Description Even when the DADF detachment motor 2 (M7) is driven,
of detection the DADF detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16) is
not turned OFF within a specified period.
Measures 1. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
detachment home position sensor 2 (SR16)
2. Displacement/disconnection of the connector of the
detachment motor 2 (M7)
3. Failure of the detachment home position sensor 2
4. Failure of the detachment motor 2
5. Failure of the DADF driver PCB (PCB1)

7-69
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E301 to E490
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-70
■■E500 to E551 E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E503 -0002 -05 Title A. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle
code code area stitcher (Finisher-K1)
E500 -0000 -05 Title A. Error in IPC communication(Finisher-K1) B. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle
B. Communication error(Finisher-L1) stitcher (Finisher-L1)
Description A. Communication failed between the host machine and Description A. Communication failed between the finisher and the
of detection the finisher of detection saddle stitcher
B. The communication with the connected device is B. The communication with the saddle stitcher is
interrupted. interrupted.
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. IPC cable is disconnected. A-1. The connector on the wiring between the finisher
A-2. IPC cable is faulty. controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller
A-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. PCB is disconnected.
A-4. The host machine controller PCB is faulty. A-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
B: and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
B-1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The connected device DC controller PCB is faulty. A-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
E503 -0001 -05 Title A. Communication error with insertion unit (Document B:
Insertion Unitr-J1,Paper Folding Unit-G1) B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
B. Error in communication between the finisher - saddle and saddle controller PCB is faulty.
stitcher (Finisher-K1) B-2. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Description A. Communication failed, or the communication line has B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
of detection been interrupted for a specified period of time. E503 -0003 -05 Title A. Communication error between the integration unit -
B. Communication failed between the finisher and the professional puncher
saddle stitcher B. Communication error (Finisher-L1)
Measures A: Description A. Communication failed between the integration unit -
A-1. DC controller PCB is faulty of detection professional puncher
A-2. Disconnection of communication cable B. The communication with the puncher unit is interrupted.
A-3. Connector on the DC controller PCB is Measures A:
disconnected A-1. Connector on the integration unit controller PCB is
B: disconnected.
B-1. The connector on the wiring between the finisher A-2. Connector on the professional puncher controller
controller PCB and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is disconnected.
PCB is disconnected. A-3. The integration unit controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB A-4. The professional puncher controller PCB is faulty.
and the saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B:
B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. and host machine DC controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B-4. The connected device DC controller PCB is faulty.

7-70
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-71
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E503 -0004 -05 Title A. Inserter communication error (Finisher-L1) E503 -0062 -05 Title Error in communication between the finisher - paper
B. Paper Folding Inserter Unit / Inserter Unit folding unit (Finisher-K1)
Communication error (Finisher-L1) Description Communication failed between the finisher - paper folding
Description A. The communication with the inserter or the folder is of detection unit
of detection interrupted. Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and
B. Communication failed for 3 consecutive times, or the the paper folding unit is disconnected.
communication line has been interrupted for a specified 2. The cable between the finisher and the paper folding
period of time. unit is faulty.
Measures A: 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
A-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB 4. The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty.
and the connected device controller PCB is faulty. E503 -0081 -05 Title Error in communication between the saddle stitcher -
A-2. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. trimmer (Finisher-K1)
A-3. The connected device controller PCB is faulty. Description Communication failed between the saddle stitcher -
B: of detection trimmer
B-1. Controller PCB is faulty. Measures 1. The connector on the wiring between the saddle
B-2. Disconnection of communication cable stitcher and the trimmer is disconnected.
B-3. DC controller PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer
E503 -0021 -05 Title Error in communication between the finisher - inserter is faulty.
(Finisher-K1) 3. The trimmer controller PCB is faulty.
Description Communication failed between finisher - insertion unit 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
of detection 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and E503 -0082 -05 Title Error in communication between the saddle stitcher -
the insertion unit is disconnected. trimmer (Finisher-K1)
2. The cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is Description Communication failed between the saddle stitcher -
faulty. of detection trimmer
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Measures 1. The connector on the wiring between the saddle
4. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty. stitcher and the trimmer is disconnected.
E503 -0022 -05 Title Error in communication between the finisher - inserter 2. The wiring between the saddle stitcher and the trimmer
(Finisher-K1) is faulty.
Description Communication failed between finisher - insertion unit 3. The trimmer controller PCB is faulty.
of detection 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
the insertion unit is disconnected. E505 -0001 -05 Title A. Backup data error (failed data reading) (Document
2. The cable between the finisher and the insertion unit is Insertion Unit-J1/Paper Folding Unit-G1)
faulty. B. EEPRAM error (Finisher-K1/L1)
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Description A. Data failed to be read properly
4. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty. of detection B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the finisher
E503 -0061 -05 Title Error in communication between the finisher - paper controller PCB (The checksum for the EEPROM data
folding unit (Finisher-K1) has an error.)
Description Communication failed between the finisher - paper folding Measures A. DC controller PCB is faulty.
of detection unit B. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector on the cable between the finisher and
the paper folding unit is disconnected.
2. The cable between the finisher and the paper folding
unit is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
4. The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty.

7-71
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-72
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E505 -0002 -05 Title A. Backup data error (failed data writing) (Document E514 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the gripper base motor (Finisher-K1)
Insertion Unit-J1/Paper Folding Unit-G1) B. Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-L1)
B. EEPROM error (External 2 Hole Puncher-A1) Description A. The gripper does not come off the gripper base rear
Description A. Data failed to be written properly of detection sensor when the gripper base motor has been driven
of detection B. The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error. for 3 seconds.
Measures A. DC controller PCB is faulty B. The stapler does not leave the rear end assist home
B. Punch controller PCB is faulty position when the rear end assist motor has been
E505 -0003 -05 Title A. Insertion unit back-up RAM error (Finisher-K1) driven for 3 seconds.
B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM (Document Folding Measures A:
Insertion Unit / Insertion Unit -H1) A-1. The connector of the gripper base rear sensor
Description A. Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the insertion unit (S117) or the gripper base motor (M116) are
of detection controller PCB. disconnected.
B. Reading/writing error of EEPROM A-2. The wiring of the gripper base rear sensor or the
Measures A. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty. gripper base motor are faulty.
B. DC controller PCB is faulty A-3. The gripper base rear sensor is faulty.
E505 -0005 -05 Title Paper folding unit backup RAM error A-4. The gripper base motor is faulty.
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Description Reading/writing error of EEPROM on the paper folding
B:
of detection unit controller PCB
B-1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109)
Measures The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty.
is faulty.
E509 -0001 -05 Title Mismatched connection code between the host machine
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and Finisher (Finisher-K1/L1)
and rear end assist motor is faulty.
Description A wrong host machine has been connected. B-3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
of detection B-4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
Remedy 1. Connection with a wrong host machine. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.

7-72
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-73
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E514 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the gripper base motor (Finisher-K1) E514 -8005 -05 Title Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-L1) Description The gripper does not come off the position sensor when
Description A. The gripper base rear sensor dose not detect the of detection the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
of detection gripper when the gripper base motor has been driven Measures 1. The connector of the gripper position sensor (S115) or
for 3 seconds. the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
B. The stapler does not return to the rear end assist home 2. The wiring of the gripper position sensor or the gripper
position when the rear end assist motor has been motor are faulty.
driven for 3 seconds. 3. The gripper position sensor is faulty.
Measures A: 4. The gripper motor is faulty.
A-1. The connector of the gripper base rear sensor 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
(S117) or the gripper base motor (M116) are E514 -8006 -05 Title Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-K1)
disconnected. Description The gripper position sensor does not detect the gripper
A-2. The wiring of the gripper base rear sensor or the of detection when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
gripper base motor are faulty. Measures 1. The connector of the gripper position sensor (S115) or
A-3. The gripper base rear sensor is faulty. the gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
A-4. The gripper base motor is faulty. 2. The wiring of the gripper position sensor or the gripper
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. motor are faulty.
B: 3. The gripper position sensor is faulty.
B-1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109) 4. The gripper motor is faulty.
is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB E518 -8001 -05 Title Error in folding feed motor lock (Document Insertion
and rear end assist motor is faulty. Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
B-3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
Description The fold transport motor (M5/M11) lock signal has been
B-4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
of detection detected for more than the specified period of time.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Measures 1. Connector of Folding feed motor (M5/M11) is
E514 -8003 -05 Title Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-A1)
disconnected.
Description The gripper does not come off the gripper HP sensor 2. Folding feed motor is faulty.
of detection when the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
E519 -0002 -05 Title Gear change home position error (Finisher-L1)
Measures 1. The connector of the gripper HP sensor (S140) or the
Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn ON
gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
of detection when the gear change motor has been driven for 387
2. The wiring of the gripper HP sensor) or the gripper
pulses.
motor are faulty.
Measures 1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is
3. The gripper HP sensor is faulty.
faulty.
4. The gripper motor is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
gear change motor is faulty.
E514 -8004 -05 Title Error in the gripper motor (Finisher-K1)
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
Description The gripper HP sensor does not detect the gripper when 4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty.
of detection the gripper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector of the gripper HP sensor (S140) or the
gripper motor (M117) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the gripper HP sensor or the gripper
motor are faulty.
3. The gripper HP sensor is faulty.
4. The gripper motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-73
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-74
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E519 -8001 -05 Title Gear change home position error (Finisher-L1) E530 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the front alignment motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn B. Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
of detection OFF when the gear change motor has been driven for Description A. The front alignment HP sensor does not detect the
387 pulses. of detection front alignment plate when the front alignment motor
Measures 1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is has been driven for 4 seconds.
faulty. B. The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and home position sensor when the alignment plate front
gear change motor is faulty. motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty. Measures A:
4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty. A-1. The connector of the front alignment HP sensor
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. (S108) or the front alignment motor (M108) are
E530 -8000 -05 Title Error in the front or rear alignment motor disconnected.
Description The front or rear alignment motor operate abnormally A-2. The wiring of the front alignment HP sensor or the
of detection during initialization. front alignment motor are faulty.
Measures 1. The connector of the front/rear alignment HP sensor A-3. The front alignment HP sensor is faulty.
(S108/S109) or the front/rear alignment motor (M108/ A-4. The front alignment motor is faulty.
M109) are disconnected. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring of the front/rear alignment HP sensor or the B:
front/rear alignment motor are faulty. B-1. The front aligning plate home position sensor
3. The front/rear alignment HP sensor is faulty. (PI106) is faulty.
4. The front/rear alignment motor is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. and front aligning plate motor is faulty.
E530 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the front alignment motor (Finisher-K1) B-3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
B. Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) B-4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Description A. The front alignment plate does not come off the front
of detection alignment HP sensor when the front alignment motor E531 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the staple motor (Finisher-K1)
has been driven for 4 seconds. B. Staple home position error (Finisher-L1)
B. The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate Description A. The staple unit does not come off the staple HP sensor
front home position sensor when the alignment plate of detection when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second.
front motor has been driven for 4 seconds. B. The stapler does not leave the staple home position
Measures A: when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second.
A-1. The connector of the front alignment HP sensor Measures A:
(S108) or the front alignment motor (M108) are A-1. The connector of the staple unit is disconnected.
disconnected. A-2. The wiring of the staple unit is faulty.
A-2. The wiring of the front alignment HP sensor or the A-3. The staple unit is faulty.
front alignment motor are faulty. A-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
A-3. The front alignment HP sensor is faulty. B:
A-4. The front alignment motor is faulty. B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. and stapler is faulty.
B: B-2. The stapler is faulty.
B-1. The front aligning plate home position sensor B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
(PI106) is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and front aligning plate motor is faulty.
B-3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
B-4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-74
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-75
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E531 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the staple motor (Finisher-K1) E532 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the staple motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Staple home position error (Finisher-L1) B. Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The staple HP sensor does nor detect the staple unit Description A. The staple unit does not come off the stapler shift HP
of detection when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second. of detection sensor when the staple shift motor has been driven for
B. The stapler does not return to the staple home position 5 seconds.
when the staple motor has been driven for 0.4 second. B. The stapler does not leave the stapler shift home
Measures A: position when the stapler shift motor has been driven
A-1. The connector of the staple unit is disconnected. for 5 seconds.
A-2. The wiring of the staple unit is faulty. Measures A:
A-3. The staple unit is faulty. A-1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107)
A-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. or the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected.
B: A-2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the
B-1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB staple shift motor are faulty.
and stapler is faulty. A-3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty.
B-2. The stapler is faulty. A-4. The staple shift motor is faulty.
B-3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E532 -8000 -05 Title Error in the staple shift motor B:
Description The staple shift motor operate abnormally during B-1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is
of detection initialization. faulty.
Measures 1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107) or B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected. and stapler shift motor is faulty.
2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the staple B-3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
shift motor are faulty. B-4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty.
3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller
4. The staple shift motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-75
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-76
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E532 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the stapler shift motor (Finisher-K1) E535 -0003 -05 Title Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-L1) Description The swing guide height detection sensor failed to be ON
Description A. The stapler shift HP sensor does not detect the staple of detection even though specified period of time has passed when
of detection unit when the staple shift motor has been driven for 5 lowering the swing guide.
seconds. Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide height detection
B. The stapler does not leave the stapler shift home sensor (S118) or the swing guide motor (M110) are
position when the stapler shift motor has been driven disconnected.
for 5 seconds. 2. The wiring of the swing guide height detection sensor
Measures A: or the swing guide motor are faulty.
A-1. The connector of the stapler shift HP sensor (S107) 3. The swing guide height detection sensor is faulty.
or the staple shift motor (M107) are disconnected. 4. The swing guide motor is faulty.
A-2. The wiring of the stapler shift HP sensor or the 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
staple shift motor are faulty. E535 -0004 -05 Title Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1)
A-3. The stapler shift HP sensor is faulty. Description The swing guide height detection sensor failed to be OFF
A-4. The staple shift motor is faulty. of detection even though specified period of time has passed when
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. raising the swing unit.
B: Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide height detection
B-1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is sensor (S118) or the swing guide motor (M110) are
faulty. disconnected.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB 2. The wiring of the swing guide height detection sensor
and stapler shift motor is faulty. or the swing guide motor are faulty.
B-3. The stapler shift base is faulty. 3. The swing guide height detection sensor is faulty.
B-4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty. 4. The swing guide motor is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E535 -0001 -05 Title Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1) E535 -8001 -05 Title Swing home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description The swing guide does not come off the swing guide HP Description The stapler does not leave the swing home position when
of detection sensor when the swing guide motor has been driven for 3 of detection the swing motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
seconds. Measures 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide HP sensor (S110) or 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected. swing motor is faulty.
2. The wiring of the swing guide HP sensor or the swing 3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
guide motor are faulty. 4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
3. The swing guide HP sensor is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
4. The swing guide motor is faulty. E535 -8002 -05 Title Swing home position error (Finisher-L1)
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Description The stapler does not return to the swing home position
E535 -0002 -05 Title Error in the swing guide motor (Finisher-K1) of detection when the swing motor has bee driven for 3 seconds.
Description The swing guide HP sensor does not detect the swing Measures 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
of detection guide when the swing guide motor has been driven for 3 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
seconds. swing motor is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide HP sensor (S110) or 3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
the swing guide motor (M110) are disconnected. 4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
2. The wiring of the swing guide HP sensor or the swing 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
guide motor are faulty.
3. The swing guide HP sensor is faulty.
4. The swing guide motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-76
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-77
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E537 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the rear alignment motor (Finisher-K1) E537 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the rear alignment motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) B. Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The rear alignment plate does not come off the rear Description A. The rear alignment HP sensor does not detect the rear
of detection alignment HP sensor when the rear alignment motor of detection alignment plate when the rear alignment motor has
has been driven for 4 seconds. been driven for 4 seconds.
B. The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate B. The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate
rear home position sensor when the alignment plate rear home position sensor when the alignment plate
rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds. rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds.
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the rear alignment HP sensor A-1. The connector of the rear alignment HP sensor
(S109) or the rear alignment motor (M109) are (S109) or the rear alignment motor (M109) are
disconnected. disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the rear alignment HP sensor or the A-2. The wiring of the rear alignment HP sensor or the
rear alignment motor are faulty. rear alignment motor are faulty.
A-3. The rear alignment HP sensor is faulty. A-3. The rear alignment HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The rear alignment motor is faulty. A-4. The rear alignment motor is faulty.
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B: B:
B-1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor B-1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor
(PI107) is faulty. (PI107) is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and aligning plate rear motor is faulty. and aligning plate rear motor is faulty.
B-3. The rear aligning plate is faulty. B-3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
B-4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty. B-4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-77
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-78
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E540 -8001 -05 Title A. Tray 1 time-out error (Finisher-A1) E540 -8002 -05 Title A. Tray 1 area error (Finisher-K1)
B. Upper tray time-out error (Finisher-B1) B. Upper tray time out error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The tray 1 does not return to home position when the Description A. The tray 1 detects the discontinuous area with the tray
of detection tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds. of detection 1 area sensors.
The tray 1 does not come off the tray 1 area sensor at B. The dangerous area is reached before the tray 1 paper
the same area when the tray 1 shift motor has been surface sensor detects paper surface during the paper
driven for 4 seconds. surface detection operation.
B. If the tray does not return to home position when the A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
tray 1 shift motor is driven for the specified period of Measures A:
time. A-1. The connectors of the tray 1 area sensors (S122/
If the tray does not move to other area when tray 1 S123/S124) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are
shift motor is driven for the specified period of time. disconnected.
Measures A: A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 area sensors or the tray 1
A-1. The connectors of the tray 1 area sensors (S122/ shift motor are faulty.
S123/S124) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are A-3. The tray 1 area sensors is faulty.
disconnected. A-4. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 area sensors or the tray 1 A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
shift motor are faulty. B:
A-3. The tray 1 area sensors is faulty. B-1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
A-4. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty. B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. and tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
B: B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
B-1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. B-4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. E540 -8003 -05 Title A. Error in the tray 1 lower safety switch (Finisher-K1)
B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. B. Swing guide switch/Staple safety switch error
B-4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. (Finisher-L1)
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Description A. The tray 1 lower safety switch is turned ON while the
of detection tray 1 operates.
B. The swing guide switch or staple safety switch is
activated while the tray is operating.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the tray 1 lower safety
switch (SW110) or the tray 1 shift motor (M105)
are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the tray 1 lower safety switch or the
tray 1 shift motor are faulty.
A-3. The tray 1 lower safety switch is faulty.
A-4. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-78
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-79
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E540 -8004 -05 Title The tray 1 shift motor clock error (Finisher-L1) E540 -8013 -05 Title Error in the swing guide safety switch
Description The FIG input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift Description The swing guide safety switch is turned ON while the tray
of detection motor has been driven for 0.2 second. of detection1 operates.
Measures 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide safety switch (front/
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray rear) (SW102/SW104) or the staple position switch
1 shift motor is faulty. (SW103) are disconnected.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 2. The connector of the swing guide solenoid (SL101) or
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. the tray 1 shift motor (M105) are disconnected.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 3. The wiring of the swing guide safety switch (front/rear)
E540 -8005 -05 Title The tray 1 shift motor speed error (Finisher-L1) or the staple position switch are faulty.
Description The lock detection signal turns OFF for 200 mseconds 4. The wiring of the swing guide solenoid or the tray 1
of detection after the lock detection signal turned ON 150 mseconds. shift motor are faulty.
Measures 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 5. The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 6. The staple position switch is faulty.
1 shift motor is faulty. 7. The swing guide solenoid is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 8. The tray 1 shift motor is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. E542 -8001 -05 Title A. Tray 2 time-out error (Finisher-K1)
E540 -8006 -05 Title The tray 1 shift motor acceleration error (Finisher-L1) B. Upper tray time out error (Finisher-L1)
Description The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray Description A. The tray 2 does not return to home position when the
of detection 1 shift motor has been driven for 1 second. of detection tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds.
Measures 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. The tray 2 does not come off the tray 2 area sensor at
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray the same area when the tray 2 shift motor has been
1 shift motor is faulty. driven for 4 seconds.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. B. If the tray does not return to home position when the
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. tray 1 shift motor is driven for 25 seconds.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. If the tray does not move to other area when tray 2
shift motor is driven for 5 seconds.
E540 -8007 -05 Title The tray 1 shift motor error (Finisher-L1)
Measures A:
Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the
A-1. The connectors of the tray 2 area sensors (S125/
of detection tray 1 shift motor is at a stop.
S126/S127) or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are
Measures 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
disconnected.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray
A-2. The wiring of the tray 2 area sensors or the tray 2
1 shift motor is faulty.
shift motor are faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
A-3. The tray 2 area sensors is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
A-4. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and tray 2 shift motor is faulty.
B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-79
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-80
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E542 -8002 -05 Title A. Tray 2 area error (Finisher-K1) E542 -8004 -05 Title The tray 2 shift motor clock error (Finisher-L1)
B. Upper tray time out error (Finisher-L1) Description The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 2 shift
Description A. The tray 2 does not return to home position when the of detection motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
of detection tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds. Measures 1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
The tray 2 does not come off the tray 2 area sensor at 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray
the same area when the tray 2 shift motor has been 2 shift motor is faulty.
driven for 4 seconds. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
B. The upper limit area is reached before the tray 2 paper 4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty.
surface sensor 1 detects the paper surface during 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
paper surface detection operation. E542 -8005 -05 Title The tray 2 shift motor speed error (Finisher-L1)
A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation. Description The lock detection signal turns OFF for 200 mseconds
The area beyond the the tray 2 paper surface sensor of detection after the lock detection signal turned ON 150 mseconds.
2 is reached before the tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 Measures 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
detects the paper surface during evacuation operation. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray
Measures A: 2 shift motor is faulty.
A-1. The connectors of the tray 2 area sensors (S125/ 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
S126/S127) or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty.
disconnected. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
A-2. The wiring of the tray 2 area sensors or the tray 2 E542 -8006 -05 Title The tray 2 shift motor acceleration error (Finisher-L1)
shift motor are faulty.
Description The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray
A-3. The tray 2 area sensors is faulty.
of detection 2 shift motor has been driven for 1 second.
A-4. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty.
Measures 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray
B:
2 shift motor is faulty.
B-1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty.
and tray 2 shift motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B-3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
E542 -8007 -05 Title The tray 2 shift motor error (Finisher-L1)
B-4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the
of detection tray 2 shift motor is at a stop.
E542 -8003 -05 Title Error in the tray 1 lower safety switch (Finisher-K1)
Measures 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
Description The tray 1 lower safety switch is turned ON while the tray
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray
of detection 2 operates.
2 shift motor is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector of the tray 1 lower safety switch (SW110)
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
or the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected.
4. The tray 2 shift motor (M108) is faulty.
2. The wiring of the tray 1 lower safety switch or the tray
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2 shift motor are faulty.
3. The tray 1 lower safety switch is faulty.
4. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-80
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
7-81
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E542 -8013 -05 Title Error in the swing guide safety switch E551 -0011 -05 Title Error in the power supply fan of the insertion unit
Description The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is turned ON Description The loch signal is detected for the specified period of
of detection while the tray 2 operates. of detection times while the fan operates.
Measures 1. The connector of the swing guide safety switch (front/ Measures 1. The connector of the fan (F1) is disconnected.
rear) (SW102/SW104) or the staple position switch 2. The wiring of the fan is faulty.
(SW103) are disconnected. 3. The fan is faulty.
2. The connector of the swing guide solenoid (SL101) or 4. The insertion unit controller PCB is faulty.
the tray 2 shift motor (M217) are disconnected. E551 -0021 -05 Title Error in the fan of the paper folding unit
3. The wiring of the swing guide safety switch (front/rear) Description The loch signal is detected for the specified period of
or the staple position switch are faulty. of detection times while the fan operates.
4. The wiring of the swing guide solenoid or the tray 2 Measures 1. The connector of the fan (F1) is disconnected.
shift motor are faulty. 2. The wiring of the fan is faulty.
5. The swing guide safety switch (front/rear) is faulty. 3. The fan is faulty.
6. The staple position switch is faulty. 4. The paper folding unit controller PCB is faulty.
7. The swing guide solenoid is faulty. T-7-11
8. The tray 2 shift motor is faulty.
9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E551 -0001 -05 Title A. Error in power supply fan (Document Insertion Unit)
B. Error in power supply fan (FAN101) (Finisher)
Description A. The lock signal ON is detected while the fan operation.
of detection B. The lock signal is detected 1.2 seconds or more while
the fan operation.
Measures A:
A-1. Power supply fan is faulty.
A-2. Connector of the power supply fan is disconnected
B:
B-1. The connector of the power supply fan (FAN101)
is disconnected.
B-2. The wiring of the power supply fan is faulty.
B-3. The power supply fan is faulty.
B-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E551 -0002 -05 Title A. Error in power supply fan (Paper Folding Unit)
B. Error in power supply fan (FAN101) (Finisher)
Description The lock status is released when the fan stops.
of detection
Measures A:
A-1. Connector of the power supply fan is
disconnected.
A-2. Power supply fan is faulty.
B:
B-1. The connector of the power supply fan (FAN101)
is disconnected.
B-2. The wiring of the power supply fan is faulty.
B-3. The power supply fan is faulty.
B-4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-81
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E551
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-82
■■E562 to E5F9 E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E568 -8002 -05 Title Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor
code code area (Finisher-K1)
E562 -8001 -05 Title Error in slowing timing sensor (Paper folding unit Description The feed roller separation HP sensor does not detect the
(Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) of detection disengage roller when the feed roller disengage/buffer
Description The receiving-light intensity failed to be within the flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
of detection threshold although the emitting-light intensity is adjusted Measures 1. The connector of the feed roller separation HP sensor
to be within the threshold when adjusting the sensor. (S111) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor
Measures 1. Connector of the slowing timing sensor (S24/S30) is (M119) are disconnected.
disconnected. 2. The wiring of the feed roller separation HP sensor
2. Slowing timing sensor is faulty. or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are
E562 -8002 -05 Title Error in the disengagement timing sensor of paper folding faulty.
unit (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) 3. The feed roller separation HP sensor is faulty.
Description The disengagement timing sensor (S21) adjustment 4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty.
of detection failed. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Measures 1. Connector of the disengagement timing sensor (S21) E568 -8003 -05 Title Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor
is disconnected. (Finisher-K1)
2. Disengagement timing sensor is faulty. Description The buffer flapper does not come off the buffer flapper
E562 -8003 -05 Title Error in the folding position accuracy sensor (Document of detection HP sensor when the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper
Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Description The folding position accuracy sensor (S23) adjustment Measures 1. The connector of the buffer flapper HP sensor (S142)
of detection failed. or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119)
Measures 1. Connector of the folding position accuracy sensor (S23) are disconnected.
is disconnected. 2. The wiring of the buffer flapper HP sensor or the feed
2. Folding position accuracy sensor is faulty. roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty.
E562 -8004 -05 Title Error in the upper stopper HP sensor (Document Insertion 3. The buffer flapper HP sensor is faulty.
Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit) 4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty.
Description The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) adjustment failed. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
of detection E568 -8004 -05 Title Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor
Measures 1. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is (Finisher-K1)
disconnected. Description The buffer flapper HP sensor does not detect the buffer
2. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty. of detection flapper when the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper
E568 -8001 -05 Title Error in the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
(Finisher-K1) Measures 1. The connector of the buffer flapper HP sensor (S142)
Description The disengage roller does not come off the feed roller or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor (M119)
of detection separation HP sensor when the feed roller disengage/ are disconnected.
buffer flapper motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 2. The wiring of the buffer flapper HP sensor or the feed
Measures 1. The connector of the feed roller separation HP sensor roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are faulty.
(S111) or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor 3. The buffer flapper HP sensor is faulty.
(M119) are disconnected. 4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty.
2. The wiring of the feed roller separation HP sensor 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
or the feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor are
faulty.
3. The feed roller separation HP sensor is faulty.
4. The feed roller disengage/buffer flapper motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-82
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-83
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E569 -8001 -05 Title Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to go E56A -8002 -05 Title C-fold stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to return
through HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding
Folding Unit) Unit)
Description The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) failed to be OFF Description The C-fold stopper motor HP sensor (S17) failed to be
of detection despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the of detection ON despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that
upper stopper motor started to be driven while the upper the C-fold stopper motor started to be driven while the
stopper HP sensor was ON. C-fold stopper motor HP sensor was OFF.
Measures 1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M7) is Measures 1. Connector of the C-fold stopper motor (M8) is
disconnected. disconnected.
2. Upper stopper motor is faulty. 2. C-fold stopper motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is 3. Connector of the C-fold stopper HP sensor (S17) is
disconnected. disconnected.
4. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty. 4. C-fold stopper HP sensor is faulty.
E569 -8002 -05 Title Upper stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to return E56B -8001 -05 Title Folding belt motor of paper folding unit failed to go
to HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding through HP (Document InsertionFolding Unit/Paper
Unit) Folding Unit)
Description The upper stopper HP sensor (S16) failed to be ON Description During initialization or at paper delivery to the Folding
of detection despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the of detection upper tray, the Folding belt HP sensor has not turned
upper stopper motor started to be driven while the upper OFF within the specified pulse.
stopper HP sensor was OFF. Measures 1. Connector of the Folding belt motor is disconnected.
Measures 1. Connector of the upper stopper motor (M7) is 2. Folding belt motor is faulty.
disconnected. 3. Connector of the Folding belt motor HP sensor is
2. Upper stopper motor is faulty. disconnected.
3. Connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S16) is 4. Folding belt motor HP sensor is faulty.
disconnected. E56B -8002 -05 Title Folding tray motor of paper folding unit failed to return to
4. Upper stopper HP sensor is faulty. HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper Folding Unit)
E56A -8001 -05 Title C-fold stopper motor of paper folding unit failed to go Description During initialization or at paper delivery to the Folding
through HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit/Paper of detection upper tray, the Folding tray motor HP sensor has not
Folding Unit) turned ON within the specified pulse.
Description The C-fold stopper motor HP sensor (S17) failed to be Measures 1. Connector of the folding tray motor (M6) is
of detection OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that disconnected.
the C-fold stopper motor started to be driven while the 2. Folding tray motor is faulty.
C-fold stopper motor HP sensor was ON. 3. Connector of the folding tray motor HP sensor (S19) is
Measures 1. Connector of the C-fold stopper motor (M8) is disconnected.
disconnected. 4. Folding tray motor HP sensor is faulty.
2. C-fold stopper motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold stopper HP sensor (S17) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold stopper HP sensor is faulty.

7-83
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-84
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E56D -8001 -05 Title Error in the stacking tray paper retainer motor E56E -8002 -05 Title Lead-edge retaining guide motor of paper folding unit
(Finisher-K1) failed to return to HP (Paper Folding Unit)
Description The stacking tray paper retainer does not come off the Description The lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor failed to be ON
of detection stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor when the stacking of detection despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that the
tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds. lead-edge retaining guide motor started to be driven while
Measures 1. The connector of the stacking tray paper retainer HP the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor was OFF.
sensor (S114) or the stacking tray paper retainer motor Measures 1. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide motor (M10)
(M114) are disconnected. is disconnected.
2. The wiring of the stacking tray paper retainer HP 2. Lead-edge retaining guide motor is faulty.
sensor or the stacking tray paper retainer motor are 3. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor
faulty. (S25) is disconnected.
3. The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor is faulty. 4. Lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor is faulty.
4. The stacking tray paper retainer motor is faulty. E578 -8001 -05 Title Error in the paper return guide motor (Finisher-K1)
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Description The paper return guide does not come off the paper
E56D -8002 -05 Title Error in the stacking tray paper retainer motor of detection return guide HP sensor when the paper return guide
(Finisher-K1) motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Description The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor does not Measures 1. The connector of the paper return guide HP sensor
of detection detect the stacking tray paper retainer when the stacking (S112) or the paper return guide motor (M112) are
tray paper retainer motor has been driven for 3 seconds. disconnected.
Measures 1. The connector of the stacking tray paper retainer HP 2. The wiring of the paper return guide HP sensor or the
sensor (S114) or the stacking tray paper retainer motor paper return guide motor are faulty.
(M114) are disconnected. 3. The paper return guide HP sensor is faulty.
2. The wiring of the stacking tray paper retainer HP 4. The paper return guide motor is faulty.
sensor or the stacking tray paper retainer motor are 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
faulty. E578 -8002 -05 Title Error in the paper return guide motor (Finisher-K1)
3. The stacking tray paper retainer HP sensor is faulty. Description The paper return guide HP sensor does not detect the
4. The stacking tray paper retainer motor is faulty. of detection paper return guide when the paper return guide motor
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. has been driven for 3 seconds.
E56E -8001 -05 Title Lead-edge retaining guide motor of paper folding unit Measures 1. The connector of the paper return guide HP sensor
failed to go through HP (Paper Folding Unit) (S112) or the paper return guide motor (M112) are
Description The lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor failed to be disconnected.
of detection OFF despite the drive of specified pulse in the case that 2. The wiring of the paper return guide HP sensor or the
the lead-edge retaining guide motor started to be driven paper return guide motor are faulty.
while the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor was ON. 3. The paper return guide HP sensor is faulty.
Measures 1. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide motor (M10) 4. The paper return guide motor is faulty.
is disconnected. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. Lead-edge retaining guide motor is faulty.
3. Connector of the lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor
(S25) is disconnected.
4. Lead-edge retaining guide HP sensor is faulty.

7-84
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-85
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E57B -8001 -05 Title Error in the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor E57C -8002 -05 Title Error in the processing tray paper retainer motor
(Finisher-K1) (Finisher-K1)
Description The paper trailing edge pushing guide does not come off Description The paper retainer HP sensor does not detect the paper
of detection the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor when of detection retainer when the processing tray paper retainer motor
the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor has been has been driven for 3 seconds.
driven for 3 seconds. Measures 1. The connector of the paper retainer HP sensor (S135)
Measures 1. The connector of the paper trailing edge pushing guide or the processing tray paper retainer motor (M118) are
HP sensor (S113) or the paper trailing edge pushing disconnected.
guide motor (M113) are disconnected. 2. The wiring of the paper retainer HP sensor or the
2. The wiring of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP processing tray paper retainer motor are faulty.
sensor or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor 3. The paper retainer HP sensor is faulty.
are faulty. 4. The processing tray paper retainer motor is faulty.
3. The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor is 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
faulty. E583 -8001 -05 Title Error in the tray auxiliary guide motor (Finisher-K1)
4. The paper trailing edge pushing guide motor is faulty. Description The tray auxiliary guide does not come off the tray
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. of detection auxiliary guide front/rear HP sensors when the tray
E57B -8002 -05 Title Error in the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor auxiliary guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
(Finisher-K1) Measures 1. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide front HP
Description The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor does sensor (S137) or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP
of detection not detect the paper trailing edge pushing guide when the sensor (S136) are disconnected.
paper trailing edge pushing guide motor has been driven 2. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide motor (M120)
for 3 seconds. is disconnected.
Measures 1. The connector of the paper trailing edge pushing guide 3. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor or
HP sensor (S113) or the paper trailing edge pushing the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor are faulty.
guide motor (M113) are disconnected. 4. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
2. The wiring of the paper trailing edge pushing guide HP 5. The tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor is faulty.
sensor or the paper trailing edge pushing guide motor 6. The tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor is faulty.
are faulty. 7. The tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
3. The paper trailing edge pushing guide HP sensor is 8. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
faulty. E583 -8002 -05 Title Error in the tray auxiliary guide motor (Finisher-K1)
4. The paper trailing edge pushing guide motor is faulty. Description The tray auxiliary guide front/rear HP sensors does nor
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. of detection detect the tray auxiliary guide when the tray auxiliary
E57C -8001 -05 Title Error in the processing tray paper retainer motor guide motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
(Finisher-K1) Measures 1. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide front HP
Description The paper retainer does not come off the paper retainer sensor (S137) or the tray auxiliary guide rear HP
of detection HP sensor when the processing tray paper retainer motor sensor (S136) are disconnected.
has been driven for 3 seconds. 2. The connector of the tray auxiliary guide motor (M120)
Measures 1. The connector of the paper retainer HP sensor (S135) is disconnected.
or the processing tray paper retainer motor (M118) are 3. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor or
disconnected. the tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor are faulty.
2. The wiring of the paper retainer HP sensor or the 4. The wiring of the tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
processing tray paper retainer motor are faulty. 5. The tray auxiliary guide front HP sensor is faulty.
3. The paper retainer HP sensor is faulty. 6. The tray auxiliary guide rear HP sensor is faulty.
4. The processing tray paper retainer motor is faulty. 7. The tray auxiliary guide motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 8. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-85
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-86
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E584 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor E584 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor
(Finisher-K1) (Finisher-K1)
B. Shutter home position error (Finisher-L1) B. Shutter home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The shutter does not come off the shutter HP sensor Description A. The shutter HP sensor does not detect the shutter
of detection when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been of detection when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has been
driven for 3 seconds. driven for 3 seconds.
B. The shutter does not leave the shutter home position B. The shutter does not return to the shutter home
when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 3 position when the stack ejection motor has been driven
seconds. for 3 seconds.
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the shutter HP sensor (S106) A-1. The connector of the shutter HP sensor (S106)
or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122) or the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122)
are disconnected. are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the shutter HP sensor or the stack A-2. The wiring of the shutter HP sensor or the stack
delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty. delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty.
A-3. The shutter HP sensor is faulty. A-3. The shutter HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty. A-4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty.
A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B: B:
B-1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty. B-1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB B-2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB
and stack ejection motor, and between the finisher and stack ejection motor, and between the finisher
controller PCB and shutter clutch is faulty. controller PCB and shutter clutch is faulty.
B-3. The shutter mechanism is faulty. B-3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The stack ejection motor (M102)/the shutter clutch B-4. The stack ejection motor (M102)/the shutter clutch
(CL101)/the stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL101)/the stack ejection lower roller clutch
(CL102) are faulty. (CL102) are faulty.
B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E584 -8003 -05 Title Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor
(Finisher-K1)
Description The shutter does not come off the shutter close detection
of detection sensor when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has
been driven for 3 seconds.
Measures 1. The connector of the shutter close detection sensor
(S148)/the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122)
are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the shutter close detection sensor / the
stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty.
3. The shutter close detection sensor is faulty.
4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-86
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-87
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E584 -8004 -05 Title Error in the stack delivery lower/shutter motor E590 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1)
(Finisher-K1) B. Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Description The shutter close detection sensor does not detect the Description A. The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor
of detection shutter when the stack delivery lower/shutter motor has of detection when the punch motor has been driven for 0.2 second.
been driven for 3 seconds. The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor
Measures 1. The connector of the shutter close detection sensor during initialization.
(S148)/the stack delivery lower/shutter motor (M122) B. After the motor has been stopped at time of punch
are disconnected. motor initialization, the puncher does not detect punch
2. The wiring of the shutter close detection sensor / the home position sensor.
stack delivery lower/shutter motor are faulty. Measures A:
3. The shutter close detection sensor is faulty. A-1. The connector of the punch HP sensor (S104) or
4. The stack delivery lower/shutter motor is faulty. the punch motor clock sensor (S105) are
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. disconnected.
E590 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1) A-2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is
B. Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher) disconnected.
Description A. During initialization, the punch HP sensor does not A-3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch
of detection detect the puncher when the punch motor has been motor clock sensor are faulty.
driven for 0.5 second after the puncher has come off A-4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty.
the punch HP sensor. A-5. The punch HP sensor is faulty.
After initialization, the punch motor does not return to A-6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty.
home position. A-7. The punch motor is faulty.
B. The puncher does not detect the punch home position A-8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
sensor when the puncher motor has been driven for A-9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
200 msec. B:
Measures A: B-1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and
A-1. The connector of the punch HP sensor punch motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
(S104) or the punch motor clock sensor (S105) B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and
are disconnected. sensor is faulty.
A-2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is B-3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
disconnected. B-4. The punch motor (M61) is faulty.
A-3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
motor clock sensor are faulty. B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
A-4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty.
A-5. The punch HP sensor is faulty.
A-6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty.
A-7. The punch motor is faulty.
A-8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
A-9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and
punch motor clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and
sensor is faulty.
B-3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The punch motor (M61) is faulty.
B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-87
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-88
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E590 -8003 -05 Title Error in the Punch motor (Finisher-K1) E591 -8002 -05 Title Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Description The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
of detection when the punch motor has been driven for 0.2 second. of detection when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector
The puncher does not come off the punch HP sensor sensor has been decreased to 0 %.
during initialization. Measures 1. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty.
Measures 1. The connector of the punch HP sensor (S104)/the 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
punch motor clock sensor (S105) are disconnected. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. The connector of the punch motor (M102) is E592 -0003 -05 Title Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor
disconnected. (B5R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
3. The wiring of the punch HP sensor or the punch motor Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR5) was 2.5V or less
clock sensor are faulty. of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED5).
4. The wiring of the punch motor is faulty. Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/
5. The punch HP sensor is faulty. PCB4)
6. The punch motor clock sensor is faulty. 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1).
7. The punch motor is faulty. 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
8. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty. E592 -0004 -05 Title Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor
9. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. (B5R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
E591 -0001 -05 Title Upper limit error with Punch Waste Sensor (Puncher Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR5) was 2.0V or more
Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED5).
Description The light-receiving voltage was 3.0V or less despite Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/
of detection increase in sensor light-emission. PCB4)
Remedy 1. Failure of Punch Waste Sensor (PCB2). 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1).
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. E592 -0005 -05 Title Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor
E591 -0002 -05 Title Lower limit error with Punch Waste Sensor (Puncher (A4R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR1) was 2.5V or less
Description The light-receiving voltage was 2.0V or more despite of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED1).
of detection reduction in sensor light-emission. Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/
Remedy 1. Failure of Punch Waste Sensor (PCB2). PCB4)
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1).
3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
E591 -8001 -05 Title Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher) E592 -0006 -05 Title Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor
Description The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even (A4R) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
of detection when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR1) was 2.0V or more
sensor has been increased to 66 % or more. of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED1).
Measures 1. The wiring between the scrap full detector PCB and Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/
punch controller PCB is faulty. PCB4)
2. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty. 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1).
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-88
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-89
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E592 -0007 -05 Title Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor E592 -000C -05 Title Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor
(B4) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) (A3) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1)
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR2) was 2.5V or less Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR4) was 2.0V or more
of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED2). of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED4).
Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/
PCB4) PCB4)
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1).
3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. 3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
E592 -0008 -05 Title Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor E592 -8001 -05 Title Trailing edge sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
(B4) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR2) was 2.0V or more of detection when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor
of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED2). (LED5, PTR5) has been increased to 66 % or more.
Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ Measures 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB
PCB4) and punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
E592 -0009 -05 Title Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
(LDR) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) E592 -8002 -05 Title Trailing edge sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR3) was 2.5V or less Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED3). of detection when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor
Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ has been decreased to 0 %.
PCB4) Measures 1. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E592 -000A -05 Title Lower limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor E592 -8003 -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 1 error (External 2 Hole
(LDR) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) Puncher)
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR3) was 2.0V or more Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even
of detection despite reduction in sensor light-emission (LED3). of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1) has been increased to 66 % or
PCB4) more.
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). Measures 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB
3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. and punch controller PCB is faulty.
E592 -000B -05 Title Upper limit error with Puncher Side Registration Sensor 2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
(A3) (Puncher Unit-BE1/BF1/BG1/BH1) 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
Description The light-receiving voltage (PTR4) was 2.5V or less 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
of detection despite increase in sensor light-emission (LED4). E592 -8004 -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 1 error (External 2 Hole
Remedy 1. Failure of Puncher Side Registration Sensor (PCB3/ Puncher)
PCB4) Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
2. Failure of Puncher Driver PCB (PCB1). of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
3. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB. sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1) has been decreased to 0 %.
Measures 1. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-89
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-90
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E592 -8005 -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 2 error (External 2 Hole E592 -8009 -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 4 error (External 2 Hole
Puncher) Puncher)
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even
of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
sensor 2 (LED2, PTR2) has been increased to 66 % or sensor 4 (LED4, PTR4) has been increased to 66 % or
more. more.
Measures 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB Measures 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB
and punch controller PCB is faulty. and punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E592 -8006 -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 2 error (External 2 Hole E592 -800A -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 4 error (External 2 Hole
Puncher) Puncher)
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
sensor 2 (LED2, PTR2) has been decreased to 0 %. sensor 4 (LED4, PTR4) has been decreased to 0 %.
Measures 1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. Measures 1. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E592 -8007 -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 3 error (External 2 Hole
Puncher)
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even
of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
sensor 3 (LED3, PTR3) has been increased to 66 % or
more.
Measures 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB
and punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E592 -8008 -05 Title Horizontal registration sensor 3 error (External 2 Hole
Puncher)
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even
of detection when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration
sensor 3 (LED3, PTR3) has been decreased to 0 %.
Measures 1) The LED PCB/photosensor PCB is faulty.
2) The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3) The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-90
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-91
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E593 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the punch slide motor (Finisher-K1) E593 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the punch slide motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Horizontal registration home position error (External 2 B. Horizontal registration home position error (External 2
Hole Puncher) Hole Puncher)
Description A. The punch unit does not come off the horizontal Description A. The horizontal registration HP sensor does not detect
of detection registration HP sensor when the punch slide motor has of detection the punch unit when the punch slide motor has been
been driven for 0.68 second. driven for 3.3 seconds.
B. At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the B. At time of horizontal registration motor initialization,
punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home the punch slide unit does not return to the horizontal
position sensor even when it has been driven for 9 registration home position sensor even when the unit
mm. has been driven for 37 mm.
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the horizontal registration HP A-1. The connector of the horizontal registration HP
sensor (S101) or the punch slide motor (M101) sensor (S101) or the punch slide motor (M101)
are disconnected. are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the horizontal registration HP sensor A-2. The wiring of the horizontal registration HP sensor
or the punch slide motor are faulty. or the punch slide motor are faulty.
A-3. The horizontal registration HP sensor is faulty. A-3. The horizontal registration HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The punch slide motor is faulty. A-4. The punch slide motor is faulty.
A-5. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty. A-5. The puncher driver PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B: B:
B-1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is B-1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is
faulty. faulty.
B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and B-2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and
sensor is faulty. sensor is faulty.
B-3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty. B-3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
B-4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty. B-4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty.
B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. B-5. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E5A3 -0001 -05 Title Error in the registration motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The registration HP sensor does not turn ON when the
of detection registration motor has been driven for 2.933 seconds.
Measures 1. The connector of the registration HP sensor (S105) or
the registration motor (M102) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the registration HP sensor/the registration
motor are faulty.
3. The registration HP sensor is faulty.
4. The registration motor is faulty.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.

7-91
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-92
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5A3 -0002 -05 Title Error in the registration motor (Finisher-K1) E5AA -8002 -05 Title Error in the cutter motor (Finisher-K1)
Description The registration HP sensor does not turn OFF when the Description The cutter motor clock sensor does not come off the
of detection registration motor has been driven for 0.67 msecond. of detection home position of the trimming blade when the cutter
Measures 1. The connector of the registration HP sensor (S105) or motor has been driven for 0.5 second.
the registration motor (M102) are disconnected. Measures 1. The connector of the cutter motor clock sensor (S108)
2. The wiring of the registration HP sensor/the registration or the cutter motor (M106) are disconnected.
motor are faulty. 2. The wiring of the cutter motor clock sensor/the cutter
3. The registration HP sensor is faulty. motor are faulty.
4. The registration motor is faulty. 3. The cutter motor clock sensor is faulty.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. 4. The cutter motor is faulty.
E5A4 -8001 -05 Title Error in the press motor (Finisher-K1) 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
Description The press motor HP sensor does not turn ON when the E5AA -8003 -05 Title Cutter motor clock error (Finisher-K1)
of detection press motor has been driven for 0.926 second. Description The cutter motor clock sensor does not detect the motor
Measures 1. The connector of the press motor HP sensor (S106) or of detection clock when the cutter motor has been driven for 0.625
the press motor (M105) are disconnected. second.
2. The wiring of the press motor HP sensor/the press Measures 1. The connector of the cutter motor clock sensor (S108)
motor are faulty. or the cutter motor (M106) are disconnected.
3. The press motor HP sensor is faulty. 2. The wiring of the cutter motor clock sensor/the cutter
4. The press motor is faulty. motor are faulty.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. 3. The cutter motor clock sensor is faulty.
E5A4 -8002 -05 Title Error in the press motor (Finisher-K1) 4. The cutter motor is faulty.
Description The press motor HP sensor does not turn OFF. 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
of detection E5AE -8000 -05 Title Trimmer stationary paper error
Measures 1. The connector of the press motor HP sensor (S106) or Description The inlet sensor detects the stationary paper after
the press motor (M105) are disconnected. of detection performing the paper delivery operation.
2. The wiring of the press motor HP sensor/the press Measures 1. The paper has jammed in the trimmer.
motor are faulty. 2. The connector of the inlet sensor (S101) is
3. The press motor HP sensor is faulty. disconnected.
4. The press motor is faulty. 3. The wire of the inlet sensor is faulty.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. 4. The inlet sensor is faulty.
E5AA -8001 -05 Title Error in the cutter motor (Finisher-K1) 5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
Description The home position of the trimming blade is not detected E5BA -8001 -05 Title Error in the front estrangement motor (Finisher-K1)
of detection when the cutter motor has been driven for 5 sec. Description The front estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn
Measures 1. The connector of the cutter motor clock sensor (S108) of detection ON when the front estrangement motor has been driven
or the cutter motor (M106) are disconnected. for 0.191 second.
2. The wiring of the cutter motor clock sensor/the cutter Measures 1. The connector of the front estrangement motor HP
motor are faulty. sensor (S102) or the front estrangement motor (M103)
3. The cutter motor clock sensor is faulty. are disconnected.
4. The cutter motor is faulty. 2. The wiring of the front estrangement motor HP sensor/
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. the front estrangement motor are faulty.
3. The front estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty.
4. The front estrangement motor is faulty.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.

7-92
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-93
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5BA -8002 -05 Title Error in the front estrangement motor (Finisher-K1) E5BB -8002 -05 Title Error in the waste paper full sensor (Finisher-K1)
Description The front estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn Description The A/D input value does not enter into the D/A output
of detection OFF when the front estrangement motor has been driven of detection lower limit of the waste paper full sensor.
for 0.724 second after the front estrangement motor HP Measures 1. The connector of the waste paper full sensor (emitting/
sensor has turned ON. receiving) (S011) is disconnected.
Measures 1. The connector of the front estrangement motor HP 2. The wire of the waste paper full sensor is faulty.
sensor (S102) or the front estrangement motor (M103) 3. The waste paper full sensor is faulty.
are disconnected. 4. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.
2. The wiring of the front estrangement motor HP sensor/ E5E1 -0001 -05 Title Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to go through
the front estrangement motor are faulty. HP (Document Insertion Unit)
3. The front estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty. Description The paper feed sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the
4. The front estrangement motor is faulty. of detection inserter paper feed tray moved up.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. Measures 1. Connector of the motor (M2) is disconnected
E5BA -8011 -05 Title Error in the rear estrangement motor (Finisher-K1) 2. Upper stopper motor is faulty
Description The rear estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn 3. Connector of the Paper feed sensor (S3) is
of detection ON when the rear estrangement motor has been driven disconnected
for 0.18 second. 4. Paper feed sensor is faulty
Measures 1. The connector of the rear estrangement motor HP E5E1 -0002 -05 Title Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP
sensor (S104) or the rear estrangement motor (M104) (Document Insertion Unit)
are disconnected. Description During initialization or lowering of the inserter paper feed
2. The wiring of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor/ of detection tray, the tray lower limit sensor (S5) has not turned ON
the rear estrangement motor are faulty. within the specified pulses.
3. The rear estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty. Measures 1. The connector of the tray lift motor (M2) is
4. The rear estrangement motor is faulty. disconnected.
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. 2. The tray lift motor is faulty.
E5BA -8012 -05 Title Error in the rear estrangement motor (Finisher-K1) 3. The connector of the tray lower limit sensor (S5) is
Description The rear estrangement motor HP sensor does not turn disconnected.
of detection OFF when the rear estrangement motor has been driven 4. The tray lower limit sensor is faulty.
for 0.537 second. E5E1 -8001 -05 Title Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to go through
Measures 1. The connector of the rear estrangement motor HP HP (Document Insertion Folding Unit)
sensor (S104) or the rear estrangement motor (M104) Description The paper feed sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the
are disconnected. of detection inserter paper feed tray moved up.
2. The wiring of the rear estrangement motor HP sensor/ Measures 1. The connector of the tray lift motor (M2) is
the rear estrangement motor are faulty. disconnected.
3. The rear estrangement motor HP sensor is faulty. 2. The tray lift motor is faulty.
4. The rear estrangement motor is faulty. 3. The connector of the paper feed sensor (S3) is
5. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty. disconnected.
E5BB -8001 -05 Title Error in the waste paper full sensor (Finisher-K1) 4. The Paper feed sensor is faulty.
Description The A/D input value does not enter into the D/A output
of detection upper limit of the waste paper full sensor.
Measures 1. The connector of the waste paper full sensor (emitting/
receiving) (S011) is disconnected.
2. The wire of the waste paper full sensor is faulty.
3. The waste paper full sensor is faulty.
4. The trimmer controller PCB (PCB1) is faulty.

7-93
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-94
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5E1 -8002 -05 Title Tray lift motor of paper folding unit failed to return to HP E5F0 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle lead edge stopper motor
(Document Insertion Folding Unit) (Finisher-K1)
Description During initialization or lowering of the inserter paper feed B. Paper positioning plate home position error
of detection tray, the tray lower limit sensor (S5) has not turned ON (Finisher-L1)
within the specified pulses. Description A. The saddle lead edge stopper does not come off the
Measures 1. The connector of the tray lift motor (M2) is of detection saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor when the saddle
disconnected. lead edge stopper motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
2. The tray lift motor is faulty. B. The paper positioning plate home position sensor does
3. The connector of the tray lower limit sensor (S5) is not turn OFF when the paper positioning plate motor
disconnected. has been driven for 300 pulses.
4. The tray lower limit sensor is faulty. Measures A:
E5F0 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle lead edge stopper motor A-1. The connector of the saddle lead edge stopper HP
(Finisher-K1) sensor (S205) or the saddle lead edge stopper
B. Paper positioning plate home position error motor (M203) are disconnected.
(Finisher-L1) A-2. The wiring of the saddle lead edge stopper HP
Description A: The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor does not sensor/the saddle lead edge stopper motor are
of detection detect the saddle lead edge stopper when the saddle faulty.
lead edge stopper has been moved for 182 mm by A-3. The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor is faulty.
saddle lead edge stopper motor. A-4. The saddle lead edge stopper motor is faulty.
B: The paper positioning plate home position sensor does A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
not turn ON when the paper positioning plate motor A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
has been driven for 1500 pulses. B:
Measures A: B-1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor
A-1. The connector of the saddle lead edge stopper HP (PI7) is faulty.
sensor (S205) or the saddle lead edge stopper B-2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
motor (M203) are disconnected. B-3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle lead edge stopper HP B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
sensor/the saddle lead edge stopper motor are
faulty.
A-3. The saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle lead edge stopper motor is faulty.
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor
(PI7) is faulty.
B-2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-94
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-95
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5F1 -8001 -05 Title A. Saddle folder/feeder motor clock error (Finisher-K1) E5F1 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle folder/feeder motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Paper folding motor clock error (Finisher-L1) B. Paper fold home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The drive speed of the saddle folder/feeder motor is Description A. The saddle folder HP sensor does not detect the home
of detection less than 5 mm/sec. of detection position of the paper fold roller during initialization.
B. The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/ B. The status of the paper fold home position sensor does
sec or less. not change when the paper fold motor has been driven
Measures A: for 3 seconds.
A-1. The connector of the saddle folder/feeder motor Measures A:
sensor (S214) or the saddle folder/feeder motor A-1. The connector of the saddle folder HP sensor
(M206) are disconnected. (S229) or the saddle folder/feeder motor (M206)
A-2. The wiring of the saddle folder/feeder motor are disconnected.
sensor or the saddle folder/feeder motor are A-2. The wiring of the saddle folder HP sensor/the
faulty. saddle folder/feeder motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle folder/feeder motor sensor is faulty. A-3. The saddle folder HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle folder/feeder motor is faulty. A-4. The saddle folder/feeder motor is faulty.
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B: B:
B-1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and B-1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and
paper folding home position sensor (PI21) is paper folding home position sensor (PI21) is
faulty. faulty.
B-2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty. B-2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty. B-3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty.
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
E5F2 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle roller guide motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Guide home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle roller guide HP sensor does not detect the
of detection saddle roller guide when the saddle roller guide has
been moved for 20 mm by saddle roller guide motor.
B. The guide home position sensor does not turn ON
when the guide motor has been driven for 700 pulses.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle roller guide HP
sensor (S207) or the saddle roller guide motor
(M204) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle roller guide HP sensor/
the saddle roller guide motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle roller guide HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle roller guide motor is faulty.
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty.
B-2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-95
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-96
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5F2 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle roller guide motor (Finisher-K1) E5F3 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle alignment guide motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Guide home position error (Finisher-L1) B. Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle roller guide does not come off the saddle Description A. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor does not detect
of detection roller guide HP sensor when the saddle roller guide of detection the saddle alignment guide when the saddle alignment
motor has been driven for 50 pulses. guide has been moved for 177 mm by saddle
B. The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF alignment guide motor.
when the guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses. B. The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn
Measures A: ON when the aligning plate motor has been driven for
A-1. The connector of the saddle roller guide HP 500 pulses.
sensor (S207) or the saddle roller guide motor Measures A:
(M204) are disconnected. A-1. The connector of the saddle alignment plate HP
A-2. The wiring of the saddle roller guide HP sensor/ sensor (S206) or the saddle alignment guide
the saddle roller guide motor are faulty. motor (M202) are disconnected.
A-3. The saddle roller guide HP sensor is faulty. A-2. The wiring of the saddle alignment plate HP
A-4. The saddle roller guide motor is faulty. sensor/the saddle alignment guide motor are
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-3. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor is faulty.
B: A-4. The saddle alignment guide motor is faulty.
B-1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B-3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty. B:
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B-1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is
faulty.
B-2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
B-3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty.
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-96
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-97
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5F3 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle alignment guide motor (Finisher-K1) E5F4 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle stitcher motor (Finisher-K1)
B. Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-L1) B. Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle alignment guide does not come off the Description A. The saddle stitcher HP sensor does not detect the
of detection saddle alignment plate HP sensor when the saddle of detection saddle stitcher unit when the saddle stitcher motor has
alignment guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses. been driven for 0.48 second.
B. The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON
OFF when the aligning plate motor has been driven for when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven backward
50 pulses. for 0.5 second.
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle alignment plate HP A-1. The connector of the saddle stitcher HP sensor
sensor (S206) or the saddle alignment guide (S223) or the saddle stitcher motor (M209) are
motor (M202) are disconnected. disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle alignment plate HP A-2. The wiring of the saddle stitcher HP sensor/the
sensor/the saddle alignment guide motor are saddle stitcher motor are faulty.
faulty. A-3. The saddle stitcher HP sensor is faulty.
A-3. The saddle alignment plate HP sensor is faulty. A-4. The saddle stitcher motor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle alignment guide motor is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. B:
B: B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is
B-1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty.
faulty. B-2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
B-2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty. B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
B-3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty. E5F4 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle stitcher motor (Finisher-K1)
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B. Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle stitcher unit does not come off the saddle
of detection stitcher HP sensor when the saddle stitcher motor has
been driven for 0.48 second.
B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven forward
for 0.5 second.
Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle stitcher HP sensor
(S223) or the saddle stitcher motor (M209) are
disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle stitcher HP sensor/the
saddle stitcher motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle stitcher HP sensor is faulty.
A-4. The saddle stitcher motor is faulty.
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B:
B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is
faulty.
B-2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-97
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-98
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5F5 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor E5F5 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor
(Finisher-K1) (Finisher-K1)
B. Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-L1) B. Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor does Description A. The saddle trailing edge retainer does not come off the
of detection not detect the saddle trailing edge retainer when the of detection saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor when the
saddle trailing edge retainer has been moved for 96 saddle trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for
mm by saddle trailing edge retainer motor. 50 pulses.
B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON B. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the stitch motor (front) has been driven forward when the stitch motor (front) has been driven backward
for 0.5 second. for 0.5 second.
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer A-1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer
move HP sensor (S219) or the saddle trailing move HP sensor (S219) or the saddle trailing
edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected. edge retainer motor (M210) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer A-2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer
move HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer
motor are faulty. motor are faulty.
A-3. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor A-3. The saddle trailing edge retainer move HP sensor
is faulty. is faulty.
A-4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty. A-4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty.
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B: B:
B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is B-1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is
faulty. faulty.
B-2. The stitcher (front) is faulty. B-2. The stitcher (front) is faulty.
B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B-3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-98
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-99
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5F6 -8001 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle paper push-on plate motor E5F6 -8002 -05 Title A. Error in the saddle paper push-on plate motor
(Finisher-K1) (Finisher-K1)
B. Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-L1) B. Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-L1)
Description A. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor does not Description A. The saddle paper push-on plate does not come off
of detection detect the saddle paper push-on plate when the saddle of detection the saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor when the
paper push-on plate motor has been driven for 0.5 saddle paper push-on plate motor has been driven for
second. 0.15 second.
B. The paper pushing plate home position sensor does B. The paper pushing plate home position sensor does
not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has
been driven for 0.5 second. been driven for 150 msecond.
Measures A: Measures A:
A-1. The connector of the saddle paper push-on plate A-1. The connector of the saddle paper push-on plate
HP sensor (S218) or the saddle paper push-on HP sensor (S218) or the saddle paper push-on
plate motor (M205) are disconnected. plate motor (M205) are disconnected.
A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate HP A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate HP
sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate motor are sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate motor are
faulty. faulty.
A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor is A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate HP sensor is
faulty. faulty.
A-4. The saddle paper push-on plate motor is faulty. A-4. The saddle paper push-on plate motor is faulty.
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
B: B:
B-1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor B-1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor
(PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor
(PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock
sensor (PI1) is faulty. sensor (PI1) is faulty.
B-2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is B-2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is
faulty. faulty.
B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8)
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-99
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-100
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5F6 -8003 -05 Title A. Saddle paper push-on plate motor clock error E5F6 -8005 -05 Title Pushing position error (Finisher-L1)
(Finisher-K1) Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor
B. Paper pushing plate motor clock error (Finisher-L1) of detection does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor
Description A. The drive speed of the saddle paper push-on plate has been driven for 0.5 second.
of detection motor is less than 6 clocks. Measures 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)/
B. The number of pulses detected by the paper pushing paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15)/paper
plate motor clock sensor is 6 pulses or less. pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) are faulty.
Measures A: 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
A-1. The connector of the saddle paper push-on plate 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
motor sensor (S213) or the saddle paper push-on 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
plate motor (M205) are disconnected. E5F7 -8001 -05 Title Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor
A-2. The wiring of the saddle paper push-on plate (Finisher-K1)
motor sensor/the saddle paper push-on plate Description The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor does not
motor are faulty. of detection detect the saddle trailing edge retainer when the saddle
A-3. The saddle paper push-on plate motor sensor is trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for 80 pulses.
faulty. Measures 1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer
A-4. The saddle paper push-on plate motor is faulty. HP sensor (S221) or the saddle trailing edge retainer
A-5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. motor (M210) are disconnected.
A-6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP
B: sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are
B-1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor faulty.
(PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor 3. The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor is faulty.
(PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock 4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty.
sensor (PI1) is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
faulty. E5F7 -8002 -05 Title Error in the saddle trailing edge retainer motor
B-3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. (Finisher-K1)
B-4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Description The saddle trailing edge retainer does not come off the
E5F6 -8004 -05 Title Pushing position error (Finisher-L1) of detection saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor when the saddle
Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor trailing edge retainer motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
of detection does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor Measures 1. The connector of the saddle trailing edge retainer
has been driven for 0.1 second. HP sensor (S221) or the saddle trailing edge retainer
Measures 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)/ motor (M210) are disconnected.
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15)/paper 2. The wiring of the saddle trailing edge retainer HP
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) are faulty. sensor/the saddle trailing edge retainer motor are
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. 3. The saddle trailing edge retainer HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The saddle trailing edge retainer motor is faulty.
5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-100
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
7-101
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E5F8 -8001 -05 Title Error in the saddle tapping motor (Finisher-K1) E5F9 -8002 -05 Title Error in the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
Description The saddle paper tapping HP sensor does not detect the (Finisher-K1)
of detection saddle tapping plate when the saddle tapping motor has Description The saddle lead-in roller does not come off the saddle
been driven for 50 pulses. of detection lead-in roller HP sensor when the saddle lead-in roller
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor disengage motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
(S215) or the saddle tapping motor (M213) are Measures 1. The connector of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor
disconnected. (S222) or the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
2. The wiring of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor/the (M214) are disconnected.
saddle tapping motor are faulty. 2. The wiring of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor/the
3. The saddle paper tapping HP sensor is faulty. saddle lead-in roller disengage motor are faulty.
4. The saddle tapping motor is faulty. 3. The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor is faulty.
5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The saddle lead-in roller disengage motor is faulty.
6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
E5F8 -8002 -05 Title Error in the saddle tapping motor (Finisher-K1) 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Description The saddle tapping plate does not come off the saddle T-7-12
of detection paper tapping HP sensor when the saddle tapping motor
has been driven for 50 pulses.
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor
(S215) or the saddle tapping motor (M213) are
disconnected.
2. The wiring of the saddle paper tapping HP sensor/the
saddle tapping motor are faulty.
3. The saddle paper tapping HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle tapping motor is faulty.
5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
E5F9 -8001 -05 Title Error in the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
(Finisher-K1)
Description The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor does not detect
of detection the saddle lead-in roller when the saddle lead-in roller
disengage motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Measures 1. The connector of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor
(S222) or the saddle lead-in roller disengage motor
(M214) are disconnected.
2. The wiring of the saddle lead-in roller HP sensor/the
saddle lead-in roller disengage motor are faulty.
3. The saddle lead-in roller HP sensor is faulty.
4. The saddle lead-in roller disengage motor is faulty.
5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-101
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E562 to E5F9
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-102
■■E602 E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E602 -0003 -00 Title Error in HDD
code code area Description WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice
E602 -0001 -00 Title Error in HDD Remedy 1. Execute detection and recovery of WriteAbortSector
Description HDD failed to be recognized. Startup partition <In the case of display of B/W E-code>
(BOOTDEV) failed to be found at startup. 1-1. Perform the following steps because Service
Remedy 1. Turn OFF the main switch and check connection of Mode is not available.
HDD cable, and then turn ON the main switch. 1-2. Turn OFF the power. Then, while pressing 1+9
2. If the Encryption Board has been installed, there may keys, turn ON the power. WriteAbortSector
be an Encryption Board failure. In this case, disconnect recovery routine is automatically started which
the signal cable connecting to the Encryption makes the screen black.
Board and directly connect to the HDD. (It cannot 1-3. After a while, progress is displayed because the
be connected from the back side. Open the Main process takes time (40 to 50 min.). The process is
Controller Cover, and connect by going over the Main complete when the screen turns white.
Controller PCB 1.) After connecting, power on by the <In the case of official display of wrench-mark>
safe mode. If the machine starts normally, replace the 1-1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=0; and execute
Encryption Board as the Encryption Board had failed. HD-CHECK (40 to 50 min.), and then turn OFF
3. Be sure that HDD spins stably (no problem in drive and then ON the main switch.
sound) and 5V/12V power is supplied when the main 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
power is turned ON. (If the drive sound is abnormal, up in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST
replace the HDD.) or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn
4. Replace the HDD and reinstall the system. (In the case OFF and then ON the main switch.
of using a USB memory device, insert a USB memory 3. If no improvement is found despite the above
device where the system software has been registered measures, it can be caused by failure with HDD;
to the slot of the host machine, and then execute main therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.
menu [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all).)
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
E602 -0002 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the main CPU
Remedy 1. Start in Safe Mode, then perform overall format
using SST or USB memory and reinstall the system,
and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Switch.
(Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main
menu.)
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the
HDD and reinstall the system.

7-102
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-103
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0006 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0010 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the sub CPU Description There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
Remedy Reinstall the system software. For details, see “Chapter 6: Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using
Upgrading”. SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power
For your reference, the method using USB memory is switch.
described below. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace
registered. the HDD and reinstall the system.
2. Execute the following service mode: E602 -0011 -00 Title Error in HDD
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter Description There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
the download mode. (When it is not operated normally, Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using
start the safe mode.) SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment. switch.
4. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main menu. 2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
(Be sure to download SYSTEM, LANGUAGE and be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace
RUI.) the HDD and reinstall the system.
5. System software is downloaded and the machine E602 -0012 -00 Title Error in HDD
restarts automatically. At this time, if the machine
Description There is no file in which the Web browser refers to
restarts with the safe mode, E753 might occurs.
Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the Web browser
Check the log. In case of the system software of the
using SST, and then turn OFF and then ON the main
options which are not connected, turn OFF and then
power switch.
ON the power supply to restore. (For details, see the
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
description for E753.)
be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace
the HDD and reinstall the system.
If the measures above do not solve the problem, replace
the HDD and download the system software with the
foregoing method.
E602 -0007 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description There is no ICCProfile
Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using
SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power
switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace
the HDD and reinstall the system.
E602 -0009 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description There is no Font file in /BOOTDEV/BOOT
Remedy 1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using
SST; and then turn OFF and then ON the main power
switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can
be caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace
the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-103
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-104
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0101 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0111 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (at Description Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (after
startup) startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CHECK, and then → Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power.(Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-104
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-105
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0201 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0211 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in management data area of image (at startup) Description Error in management data area of image (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CHECK, and then → Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=2, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-105
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-106
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0301 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0311 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (at startup) Description Storage area of image data (temporary data) (after
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then startup)
ON the power, ask the followings to user. Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although ON the power, ask the followings to user.
data is deleted A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility data is deleted
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.)
Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then Case A
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
corresponding partition) turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- corresponding partition)
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
4. Replace the HDD. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. Case B
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CHECK, and then 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
turn OFF and then ON the power. → Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CHECK, and then
2. Back up necessary data. turn OFF and then ON the power.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 2. Back up necessary data.
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=3, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
data. corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- data.
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
6. Replace the HDD. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Note:
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-106
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-107
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0401 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0411 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in thumbnail area (at startup) Description Error in thumbnail area (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CHECK, and then → Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=4, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-107
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-108
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0501 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0511 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (at startup) Description Error in storage area of universal data (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CHECK, and then → Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=5, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-108
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-109
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0601 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0611 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (at Description Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data)
startup) (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CHECK, and then → Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=6, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-109
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-110
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0701 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0711 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (at startup) Description Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (after
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then startup)
ON the power, ask the followings to user. Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although ON the power, ask the followings to user.
data is deleted A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility data is deleted
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.)
Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then Case A
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
corresponding partition) turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- corresponding partition)
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
4. Replace the HDD. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. Case B
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CHECK, and then 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
turn OFF and then ON the power. → Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CHECK, and then
2. Back up necessary data. turn OFF and then ON the power.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 2. Back up necessary data.
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=7, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
data. corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- data.
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
6. Replace the HDD. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Note:
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-110
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-111
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0801 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0811 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (at startup) Description Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (after
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then startup)
ON the power, ask the followings to user. Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although ON the power, ask the followings to user.
data is deleted A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility data is deleted
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.)
Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then Case A
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
corresponding partition) turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- corresponding partition)
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
4. Replace the HDD. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. Case B
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CHECK, and then 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
turn OFF and then ON the power. → Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CHECK, and then
2. Back up necessary data. turn OFF and then ON the power.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 2. Back up necessary data.
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=8, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
data. corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- data.
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
6. Replace the HDD. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Note:
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-111
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-112
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -0901 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -0911 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (at startup) Description Error in storage area of PDL-related file (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CHECK, and then → Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CHECK, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=9, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-112
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-113
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -1001 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -1101 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (at startup) Description Error in MEAP area (at startup)
Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
the power, ON the power, ask the followings to user.
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
download the firmware. data is deleted
2. Replace the HDD. B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
E602 -1011 -00 Title Error in HDD that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
Description Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (after not be able to be protected in the worst case.)
startup)
Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON Case A
the power, 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
download the firmware. corresponding partition)
2. Replace the HDD. 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.

Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CHECK, and
then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD.

Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-113
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-114
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -1111 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -1201 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in MEAP area (after startup) Description Error in Send area (at startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON
ON the power, ask the followings to user. the power,
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
data is deleted → Enter CHK-TYPE=12, execute HD-CHECK, and
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility then turn OFF and then ON the power.
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may 2. Back up necessary data.
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) 3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
Case A 4. Replace the HDD.
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then E602 -1211 -00 Title Error in HDD
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the Description Error in Send area (after startup)
corresponding partition) Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- the power,
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) → Enter CHK-TYPE=12, execute HD-CHECK, and
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the then turn OFF and then ON the power.
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. 2. Back up necessary data.
4. Replace the HDD. 3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
Case B 4. Replace the HDD.
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. E602 -1301 -00 Title Error in HDD
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CHECK, and
Description Error in MEAP area (at startup)
then turn OFF and then ON the power.
Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON
2. Back up necessary data.
the power,
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=11, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=13, execute HD-CHECK, and
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
then turn OFF and then ON the power.
data.
2. Back up necessary data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
firmware.
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
4. Replace the HDD.
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
E602 -1311 -00 Title Error in HDD
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. Description Error in MEAP area (after startup)
Remedy If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON
Note: the power,
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur → Enter CHK-TYPE=13, execute HD-CHECK, and
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data.
3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.

7-114
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-115
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -1401 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -1411 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in storage area of system log (at startup) Description Error in storage area of system log (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CHECK, and → Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CHECK, and
then turn OFF and then ON the power. then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=14, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-115
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-116
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -1501 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -1511 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in Advanced Box area (at startup) Description Error in Advanced Box area (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CHECK, and → Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CHECK, and
then turn OFF and then ON the power. then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=15, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-116
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-117
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -1601 -00 Title Error in HDD E602 -1611 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Error in CDS area (at startup) Description Error in CDS area (after startup)
Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then Remedy When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then
ON the power, ask the followings to user. ON the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although
data is deleted data is deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility
that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may that data can be protected (Tell the user that data may
not be able to be protected in the worst case.) not be able to be protected in the worst case.)

Case A Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 1. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) corresponding partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK- 2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the 3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the HDD.

Case B Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition. 1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
→ Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CHECK, and → Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CHECK, and
then turn OFF and then ON the power. then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data. 2. Back up necessary data.
3. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then 3. Enter CHK-TYPE=16, execute HD-CLEAR, and then
turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the turn OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the
corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup corresponding partition) After that, restore the backup
data. data.
4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK- 4. If the problem is not solved with step 3, enter CHK-
TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and TYPE=0, execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and
then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL) then ON the power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the 5. If the problem is not solved with step 4, format the
HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware. HDD using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
6. Replace the HDD. 6. Replace the HDD.

Note: Note:
Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur
again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3. again; therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.

7-117
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
7-118
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E602 -2000 -00 Title Error in HDD Encryption Board E602 -FF11 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Authentication error between the host machine and the Description HDD error (unidentified) (after startup)
Encryption Board. Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Remedy 1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board, 2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
disconnect and connect the connector and, turn OFF 3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
and then ON the power. firmware.
2. Execute the key clear procedure. 4. Replace the HDD.
T-7-13
* Key clear: system recovery procedure
1. Execute the key clear procedure with SST.
→ As a result, the disk becomes unformatted disk.
Thus, it is necessary to execute step 2.
→ E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the
machine with the unformatted disk.
2. Execute HDD format and system reinstallation with
SST.
E602 -4000 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description Unable to mount the Linux system.
Remedy 1. Check the cable and the power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or
USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn
OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
E602 -4001 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description No Linux system start script.
Remedy 1. Check the cable and the power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or
USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn
OFF and then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
E602 -FF01 -00 Title Error in HDD
Description HDD error (unidentified) (at startup)
Remedy 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.

7-118
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
7-119
■■E604 to E753 E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E674 -0004 -00 Title FAX is abnormal
code code area Description Modem IC access is abnormal
E604 -0512 -00 Title Memory error of detection
Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty Measures 1. Cable connection check
of detection 2. FAX board replacement
Measures Replace Main Controller PCB 1 3. Main controller board replacement
E604 -1024 -00 Title Memory error E674 -0008 -00 Title FAX is abnormal
Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty Description Port IC access is abnormal
of detection of detection
Measures Replace Main Controller PCB 1 Measures 1. Cable connection check
E604 -1536 -00 Title Memory error 2. FAX board replacement
Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty 3. Main controller board replacement
of detection E674 -000C -00 Title FAX is abnormal
Measures Replace Main Controller PCB 1 Description Modem IC/ port IC access is abnormal
E611 -0000 -00 Title Re-reboot due to failures such as SRAM damage when of detection
executing the power shutdown safeguard transmission Measures 1. Cable connection check
job 2. FAX board replacement
Description SRAM data is damaged and stored job data cannot be 3. Main controller board replacement
of detection read. If this causes the repeated reboot execution after E674 -0010 -00 Title FAX is abnormal
recovery from power shutdown, a transmission is also Description FAX is abnormal
repeated. Therefore “E code” is displayed. of detection
Measures Execute SRAM clear and delete power shutdown Measures Main controller board replacement
safeguard job E674 -0011 -00 Title FAX is abnormal
E613 -0512 -00 Title Memory error Description FAX is abnormal
Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 2 is faulty of detection
of detection Measures Main controller board replacement
Measures Replace Main Controller PCB 2 E674 -0030 -00 Title FAX is abnormal
E613 -1024 -00 Title Memory error Description Check sum error
Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 2 is faulty of detection
of detection Measures System software download for 2 line FAX
Measures Replace Main Controller PCB 2 E677 -0001 -00 Title Print server failure
E613 -1536 -00 Title Memory error Description Abnormality detected on the exhaust fan operation of
Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 2 is faulty of detection printer server
of detection Measures 1. Check supplying power to the exhaust fan
Measures Replace Main Controller PCB 2 2. Exhaust fan replacement
E615 -0001 -00 Title Self test error of encryption module E677 -0003 -00 Title Print server failure
Description A self test of the Ipsec Board was conducted, and an Description Abnormality is detected during configuration check in
of detection error was detected. of detection start up
Measures 1. Upgrade the system after HDD format. Measures 1. Cable connection check
2. Replace the HDD. 2. Reinstallation system
E674 -0001 -00 Title FAX is abnormal E677 -0004 -00 Title Print server failure
Description Communication error with the FAX board Description Abnormality detected on the CPU fan operation of printer
of detection of detection server
Measures 1. Cable connection check Measures 1. Check supplying power to the CPU fan
2. FAX board replacement 2. CPU fan replacement
3. Main controller board replacement

7-119
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
7-120
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E677 -0010 -00 Title Print server failure E719 -0001 -00 Title Coin vendor failure
Description Unsupported print server is connected Description Error in the Coin vendor start
of detection of detection When the Coin vendor which should have been
Measures Change for regular print server connected is not connected before the power off at power
E677 -0080 -00 Title Print server failure supply time to turn on
Description Communication error in start-up Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
of detection CLEAR> ERR after cable check
Measures 1. Cable connection check E719 -0002 -00 Title Coin vendor failure
2. Reinstallation system Description IPC error in the Coin vendor operation
E710 -0001 -00 Title Printer IPC error of detection In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC
Description In case that IPC communication IC in the printer engine communication is unrecoverable.
of detection detected a failure when turning power ON In the case of connection failure detection for a signal of
Measures Check the cable. paper pickup/delivery
In the case of the detection of improper connection
E711 -0001 -00 Title IPC communication is abnormal
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
Description When 4 or more error occurrence is set to the error
CLEAR> ERR after cable check
of detection register in IPC chip within 1.5 seconds.
E719 -0003 -00 Title Coin vendor failure
Measures Check the cable.
Description In the case of communication error with the Coin vendor
E711 -0001 -05 Title IPC communication failure
of detection during the unit price acquisition in startup
Description Occurrence of an error was set in the error resistor of the
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
of detection IPC chip more than four times in 1.5 seconds.
CLEAR> ERR after cable check
Measures Check the cable.
E719 -0011 -00 Title Error in the card reader startup
E713 -0001 -05 Title Finisher communication error
Description When the card reader, which should have been
Description Communication failed between the finisher and the host
of detection connected before the power off, is not connected at
of detection machine.
power ON.
Measures 1. Check the cable connection.
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
2. Replace the finisher controller circuit PCB.
CLEAR> ERR after cable check
3. Replace the DC controller circuit PCB.
E719 -0012 -00 Title IPC error in the card reader operation
E717 -0001 -00 Title Communication with the NE controller is abnormal
Description In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC
Description Error in the NE controller start
of detection communication is unrecoverable.
of detection When the NE controller which should have been
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
connected is not connected before the power off at power
CLEAR> ERR after cable check
supply time to turn on
E719 -0031 -00 Title Communication error in the card reader (a serial number)
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
startup
CLEAR> ERR after cable check
Description In case a communication with card reader cannot start in
E717 -0002 -00 Title Communication with the NE controller is abnormal
of detection startup
Description IPC error in the NE controller operation
Measures 1. Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
of detection In the case of the errors that disconnection of IPC, or IPC
CLEAR> ERR after cable connection check for card
communication is unrecoverable.
reader (Connector connection, pinching wire)
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION>
2. Execute the following service mode after card reader
CLEAR> ERR after cable check
removal, and re-install card reader.
• COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD
• COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR

7-120
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
7-121
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E719 -0032 -00 Title Communication error after the card reader (a serial E720 -0101 -05 Title Different model error
number) startup Description A wrong accessory is connected.
Description Communicate with card reader is succeeded in the of detection
of detection startup, but it became impossible. Remedy Check the configuration of accessories.
Measures Recover with service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> A wrong Paper Deck is connected.
CLEAR> ERR after cable connection check for card E730 -1001 -00 Title PDL software failure
reader (Connector connection, pinching wire) Description Initialization error
E720 -0001 -05 Title Model mismatch error of detection
Description An accessory that is not supported is connected. Measures 1. PDL reset processing
of detection 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
Measures Check the configuration of accessories. E730 -100A -00 Title PDL software failure
Staple Finisher-K1 is connected with iR ADV C9280. Description In case system fatal error such as initialization failure
E720 -0002 -05 Title Model mismatch error of detection occurs
Description An accessory that is not supported is connected. Measures 1. PDL reset processing
of detection 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
Measures Check the configuration of accessories. E730 -A006 -00 Title PDL software failure
Staple Finisher-K1 is connected with iR ADV C9270. Description No response from PDL. In the case of no response from
E720 -0003 -05 Title Model mismatch error of detection PDL due to Subbootable failure or no existence.
Description An accessory that is not supported is connected. Measures 1. PDL reset processing
of detection 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
Measures Check the configuration of accessories. 3. Main controller board connection check
A wrong Finisher is connected. 4. Re-installation of firmware
E720 -0004 -05 Title Model mismatch error 5. Main controller board replacement
Description A Finisher that is not supported is connected. E730 -A007 -00 Title PDL software failure
of detection Description In case of discrepancy of the version between the control
Measures Check the configuration of accessories. of detection software in main unit and PDL control software.
A Finisher that is not supported is connected to the host Measures 1. PDL reset processing
machine. 2. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
E720 -0005 -05 Title Different model error 3. System full-format and installation
Description A wrong accessory is connected. E730 -B013 -00 Title PDL software failure
of detection Description Font data is damaged
Remedy Check the configuration of accessories. of detection
A wrong Finisher is connected. Measures 1. Power cycle (Power OFF/ON)
E720 -0006 -05 Title Different model error 2. System re-installation
Description A wrong accessory is connected. 3. System full-format and installation
of detection E730 -C000 -00 Title PDL software failure
Remedy Check the configuration of accessories. Description Memory acquisition error in the initialization
A wrong Finisher is connected. of detection
E720 -0007 -05 Title Different model error Measures 1. System full-format and installation
Description A wrong accessory is connected. 2. Main controller board 1 replacement
of detection E730 -C001 -00 Title PDL software failure
Remedy Check the configuration of accessories. Description HDD access error
A wrong Finisher is connected. of detection
Measures 1. System full-format and installation
2. HDD replacement
3. Main controller board 1 replacement

7-121
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
7-122
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E731 -3000 -00 Title Image processing module failure E733 -0000 -00 Title Printer communication is abnormal
Description Image processing module failure Description Cannot communicate with a printer in startup
of detection of detection
Measures Main controller board 2 replacement Measures ---
E731 -3001 -00 Title Image processing module failure E733 -0001 -00 Title Printer communication is abnormal
Description Image processing module failure Description Failure of communication between the controller and DC
of detection of detection controller
Measures Main controller board 2 replacement Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer
E731 -3002 -00 Title Image processing module failure 2. The power supply check (check if initialization is
Description Image processing module failure executed in startup) of the printer
of detection 3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board
Measures Main controller board 2 replacement E733 -0002 -00 Title Printer communication error
E731 -3015 -00 Title Image processing module failure Description An error occurred to detect printer vertical synchronous
Description Image processing module failure of detection signal.
of detection Measures 1. Check the connection to the printer. → Connect the
Measures Main controller board 2 replacement connector/replace the harness.
E732 -0000 -00 Title Reader communication is abnormal 2. Check the power of the printer (check if the initialization
operation is executed at startup).
Description Negotiation failure
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB/Main Controller PCB.
of detection
E733 -0010 -00 Title Printer communication is abnormal
Measures 1. Connected connector check with the reader
2. Power supply check for the reader (check if Description Printer vertical synchronizing signal detection failure
initialization is executed in startup) of detection
3. Replacement of the reader controller board and main Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer
controller board 2. The power supply check (check if initialization is
E732 -0001 -00 Title Reader communication is abnormal executed in startup) of the printer
3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board
Description Communication error
of detection E733 -0020 -00 Title Printer communication is abnormal
Measures 1. Connected connector check with the reader Description Communication error
2. Power supply check for the reader (check if of detection
initialization is executed in startup) Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer
3. Replacement of the reader controller board and main 2. The power supply check (check if initialization is
controller board executed in startup) of the printer
E732 -8888 -00 Title Error in the reader type 3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board
Description When a scanner for the different model is detected during E733 -0021 -00 Title Printer communication is abnormal
of detection the communication with the reader. Description Communication error
Measures Replace to the proper reader. of detection
E732 -9999 -00 Title The Reader detection Measures 1. Connected connector check with the printer
2. The power supply check (check if initialization is
Description In case of first detection of the reader on printer model
executed in startup) of the printer
of detection (‘Please power cycle’ message is only displayed on the
3. Replacement of DC controller or main controller board
user screen instead of an error code. Service mode>
DISPLAY> ERR is recorded in error log.)
Measures ---

7-122
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
7-123
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E743 -0000 -04 Title DDI communication error E744 -2000 -00 Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal
Description The reader controller PCB detected a failure in Description When engine ID in Soft ID is invalid
of detection communication between the main controller PCB and the of detection
reader controller PCB. Measures Replace with the Soft ID for correct model
Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the main controller E746 -0021 -00 Title Image analysis board self-check failure detection
PCB and the reader controller PCB Description Image analysis board self-check failure detection
2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) of detection
3. Failure of the main controller PCB Measures 1. Connection check of the image analysis board
E743 -0003 -04 Title DDI communication error 2. Image analysis board replacement
Description The reader controller PCB detected a failure in E746 -0022 -00 Title Image analysis board version is invalid
of detection communication between the main controller PCB and the Description Image analysis board version is invalid
reader controller PCB. of detection
Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the main controller Measures 1. Upgrading of the image analysis board software
PCB and the reader controller PCB 2. Image analysis board replacement
2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1) E746 -0023 -00 Title No response from image analysis board
3. Failure of the main controller PCB
Description No response from image analysis board
E743 -0004 -04 Title DDI communication error of detection
Description The reader controller PCB detected a failure in Measures 1. Connection check of the image analysis board
of detection communication between the main controller PCB and the 2. Image analysis board replacement
reader controller PCB.
E746 -0024 -00 Title Image analysis board operation abnormality
Measures 1. Failure of the connection between the main controller
Description Image analysis board operation abnormality
PCB and the reader controller PCB
of detection
2. Failure of the reader controller PCB (PCB1)
Measures 1. Connection check of the image analysis board
3. Failure of the main controller PCB
2. Image analysis board replacement
E744 -0001 -00 Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal
E746 -0031 -00 Title Hardware error (TPM)
Description In case of discrepancy in the version between Bootable
Description Hardware error (TPM)
of detection and the language in the HDD
of detection
Measures Download the language file of correct version
Measures 1. TPM board non-installation
E744 -0002 -00 Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal
2. Installation of TPM board from other units
Description When Size of the language in the HDD is too big 3. TPM chip broken
of detection
E746 -0032 -00 Title The error that system restoration is impossible occurred
Measures Download the language file of correct version (TPM)
E744 -0003 -00 Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Description The error that system restoration is impossible occurred
Description When a language to switch, which stated in Config.txt, is of detection (TPM)
of detection not found in the HDD. Measures The location of the security information in HDD/SRAM is
Measures Download the language file of correct version unidentified
E744 -0004 -00 Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Execute “Initialization of all data / setting”
Description When cannot switch to the language in the HDD E746 -0033 -00 Title Error occurred; but possible for system restoration (TPM)
of detection Description Error occurred; but possible for system restoration (TPM)
Measures Download the language file of correct version of detection
E744 -1000 -00 Title Language file /BootROM is abnormal Measures Discrepancy of the key
Description In case wrong Boot ROM (for different model) is installed Execute the re-store of the TPM key
of detection
Measures Replace with the Boot ROM for correct model

7-123
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
7-124
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E746 -0034 -00 Title Error occurred; but possible for automatic system E748 -2023 -00 Title Main controller board 2 access errors
restoration (TPM) Description Main controller board 2 access errors
Description Error occurred; but possible for automatic system of detection
of detection restoration (TPM) Measures DDR2-SDRAM (M0/M1/P) removing and inserting,
Measures Discrepancy of the key occurred. But restoration is replacement
possible when reboot. E748 -2024 -00 Title Main controller board 2 access errors
Power cycle (Power OFF/ON) Description Main controller board 2 access errors
E746 -0035 -00 Title TPM version error of detection
Description TPM which cannot be used in this machine was installed. Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting,
of detection replacement
Measures Install the supported TPM. E748 -2025 -00 Title Main Controller PCB 2 access error
E747 -7f00 -00 Title Bypass board is not connected Description Disconnection of the Bypass PCB was detected.
Description Bypass board is not connected of detection
of detection Measures Remove and then install the Bypass PCB.
Measures Bypass board is not connected E748 -2026 -00 Title Main Controller PCB 2 access error
E747 -ff01 -00 Title DDR - SDRAM (P) is not connected Description Disconnection of the Image Processing Sub PCB was
Description DDR - SDRAM (P) is not connected of detection detected.
of detection Measures Remove and then install the Image Processing Sub PCB.
Measures DDR - SDRAM (P) is not connected E748 -4xxx -00 Title Main controller board 2 errors
E747 -xxxx -00 Title Image processing IC failure Description Main controller board 2 errors
Description Image processing IC failure of detection
of detection Measures Main controller board replacement
Measures Main controller board 2 replacement E748 -9000 -00 Title System error
E748 -2010 -00 Title Flash board error Description ---
Description --- of detection
of detection Measures Contact each sale company bases
Measures Contact each sale company bases
E748 -2011 -00 Title Flash board error
Description ---
of detection
Measures Contact each sale company bases
E748 -2012 -00 Title Flash board error
Description ---
of detection
Measures Contact each sale company bases
E748 -2021 -00 Title Main controller board 2 access errors
Description Main controller board 2 access errors
of detection
Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting,
replacement
E748 -2022 -00 Title Main controller board 2 access errors
Description Main controller board 2 access errors
of detection
Measures Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting,
replacement

7-124
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
7-125
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E749 -0006 -06 Title Restart direction due to configuration change.
Description The option such as the Finisher and Paper Deck was
of detection installed or removed when all of following conditions were
met and the machine configuration is changed when the
main power switch is turned ON.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy
Settings > Quick Startup at Power-on > ON
• The Main Power Switch is turned OFF
• The power plug of the machine is connected to the
output.
• The breaker is ON
Measures It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the main
power.

CAUTION
This machine provides power to some PCBs even when
in the main power OFF status.
The power supply is not completely OFF by just turning
OFF the main power switch and therefore, the machine
is unable to detect a configuration change.
When disconnecting and then connecting a connector,
always disconnect the power plug or turn the breaker
OFF.
Refer to the Service Manual > Chapter 2 > External and
Controls > Quick Startup for details.
E753 -0001 -00 Title Error in Finisher Boot software
Description The Boot software has not been written in ROM of the
of detection finisher controller.
Measures 1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. The host machine controller PCB is faulty.
T-7-14

7-125
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E604 to E753
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
7-126
■■E804 to E991 E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area
E Detailed Occurance Items Description
E804 -0010 -05 Title Fan error
code code area Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 1 (FM10).
E804 -0000 -00 Title Fan error of detection
Description When detect a failure of the Power Supply Fan 1 (FM8) Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
of detection or Power Supply Fan 1 (FM9) 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 1 (FM10).
Measures 1. Connector disconnection E804 -0011 -05 Title Fan error
2. Primary charging suction fan failure Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 2 (FM11).
E804 -0001 -05 Title Fan error of detection
Description A failure was detected at the pre-fixing feed suction fan Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
of detection (FM1). 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 2 (FM11).
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. E804 -0012 -05 Title Fan error
2. Replace the pre-fixing feed suction fan (FM1). Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 3 (FM12).
E804 -0002 -05 Title Fan error of detection
Description A failure was detected at the primary charging suction fan Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
of detection (FM2). 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 3 (FM12).
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. E804 -0013 -05 Title Fan error
2. Replace the primary charging suction fan (FM2). Description A failure was detected at the delivery heat fan 4 (FM13).
E804 -0003 -05 Title Fan error of detection
Description A failure was detected at the primary charging suction fan Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
of detection (FM3). 2. Replace the delivery heat fan 4 (FM13).
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. E804 -0015 -05 Title Fan error
2. Replace the primary charging suction fan (FM3). Description Error in Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front) (FM15)
E804 -0004 -05 Title Fan error of detection
Description A failure was detected at the developing/pre-transfer Measures 1. Check connection of the connector.
of detection charging fan (FM4). 2. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Front)
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. (FM15).
2. Replace the developing/pre-transfer charging fan E804 -0016 -05 Title Fan error
(FM4). Description Error in Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM16)
E804 -0005 -05 Title Fan error of detection
Description A failure was detected at the color cleaning fan (FM5). Measures 1. Check connection of the connector.
of detection 2. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller Cooling Fan (Rear)
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. (FM16).
2. Replace the color cleaning fan (FM5). E804 -0017 -05 Title Fan error
E804 -0006 -05 Title Fan error Description Error in Fixing Feed Cooling Fan (Front) (FM27)
Description A failure was detected at the fixing heat fan (FM6). of detection
of detection Measures 1. Check connection of the connector.
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the Fixing Feed Cooling Fan (Front) (FM27).
2. Replace the fixing heat fan (FM6). E804 -0018 -05 Title Fan error
E804 -0007 -05 Title Fan error Description A failure was detected at the hopper cooling fan (FM18).
Description A failure was detected at the IH power supply fan (FM7). of detection
of detection Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. 2. Replace the hopper cooling fan (FM18).
2. Replace the IH power supply fan (FM7).

7-126
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
7-127
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E804 -0022 -05 Title Fan error E840 -0002 -05 Title Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error
Description A failure was detected at the hopper cooling suction fan Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate home position detection
of detection (FM22). of detection operation, move from outside the home position range
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. to inside the range is not completed after the specified
2. Replace the hopper cooling suction fan (FM22). period of time has passed.
E804 -0023 -05 Title Fan error Remedy 1. Check the connection of connectors of the Core
Description A failure was detected at the anti-adhesion fan 1 (FM23). Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP Sensor (PS98).
of detection 2. Check the harness of the target parts. -> Replace the
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. harness if it is disconnected.
2. Replace the anti-adhesion fan 1 (FM23). 3. Replace the Core Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP
E804 -0024 -05 Title Fan error Sensor (PS98).
4. Check the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace the unit if it is
Description A failure was detected at the anti-adhesion fan 2 (FM24).
damaged.
of detection
5. Clean the IH Unit. (Refer to the Service Manual.)
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
6. Replace the IH Unit.
2. Replace the anti-adhesion fan 2 (FM24).
7. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
E804 -0030 -05 Title Fan error
E840 -0011 -05 Title Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error
Description A failure was detected at the decurler suction fan (FM30).
Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate move operation during a
of detection
of detection job, move from inside the home position range to outside
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector.
the range is not completed after the specified period of
2. Replace the decurler suction fan (FM30).
time has passed.
E804 -0031 -05 Title Fan error
Remedy 1. Check the harness of the target parts. -> Replace the
Description A failure was detected at the decurler side exhaust fan harness if it is 1disconnected.
of detection (FM31). 2. Replace the Core Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. Sensor (PS98).
2. Replace the decurler side exhaust fan (FM31). 3. Clean the IH Unit. (Refer to the Service Manual.)
E804 -0032 -05 Title Fan error 4. Replace the IH Unit.
Description A failure was detected at the decurler lower side exhaust 5. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
of detection fan (FM32). E840 -0012 -05 Title Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error
Measures 1. Check the connection of the connector. Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate move operation during a
2. Replace the decurler lower side exhaust fan (FM32). of detection job, move from outside the home position range to inside
E840 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error the range is not completed after the specified period of
Description At the Fixing Core/Shield Plate home position detection time has passed.
of detection operation, move from inside the home position range to Remedy 1. Check the harness of the target parts. -> Replace the
outside the range is not completed after the specified harness if it is 1disconnected.
period of time has passed. 2. Replace the Core Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP
Remedy 1. Check the connection of connectors of the Core Sensor (PS98).
Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP Sensor (PS98). 3. Check the Fixing Film Unit. -> Replace the unit if it is
2. Check the harness of the target parts. -> Replace the damaged.
harness if it is disconnected. 4. Replace the IH Unit.
3. Replace the Core Shutter Motor (M56) and Core HP 5. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).
Sensor (PS98).
4. Clean the IH Unit. (Refer to the Service Manual.)
5. Replace the IH Unit.
6. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN5).

7-127
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
7-128
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E840 -0215 -05 Title Fixing Core/Shield Plate HP error due to displacement of E842 -0001 -05 Title Heat Soaking Roller HP error
the Fixing Film Description Home position could not be detected although 10
Description Home position of the Fixing Core/Shield Plate could not of detection seconds have passed since engagement/disengagement
of detection be detected due to displacement of the Fixing Film. of the Heat Soaking Roller started.
Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors of Core Shutter Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors of the Heat
Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP Sensor (PS98). Soaking Roller disengagement or engagement Motor
2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. → Replace (M55) and the Heat Soaking Roller HP Sensor (PS99).
the harness when it is disconnected. 2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. => Replace
3. Check the Fixing Film Unit. → Replace the Fixing Film the harness when it is disconnected.
Unit when it is damaged. 3. Replace the Heat Soaking Roller disengagement or
4. Replace the Core Shift Motor (M56) and Core Shift HP engagemen Motor (M55) and the Heat Soaking Roller
Sensor (PS98). HP Sensor (PS99).
5. Replace the IH Unit. 4. Check the Fixing Drive Gear.=>Replace the gear when
6. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB. it is damaged.
NOTE: 5. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.
After performing the remedy work above, go through 6. Replace the Fixing Unit. (Contact the sales company)
the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> E843 -0001 -05 Title Disconnection of the power supply plug for fixing
CLEAR> ERR. Description The product has two plugs, and the plug used to supply
E841 -0001 -05 Title Fixing Assembly reciprocation operation error of detection power to the fixing assembly was disconnected. When
Description Home position could not be detected although 5 seconds this error occurs, a message indicating that the plug is
of detection have passed since the reciprocation operation of the disconnected is displayed.
Fixing Assembly started. Measures Check the power supply plug for fixing.
Remedy 1. Check connection of the connectors of the E880 -0001 -00 Title Controller fan1 (FM19) Error
Reciprocation Motor (M57) and the Fixing Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan
Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100). of detection
2. Check harness of the corresponding parts. => Replace Measures 1. Connector disconnection
the harness when it is disconnected. 2. Controller fan 1 (FM19) failure
3. Replace the Reciprocation Motor (M57) and the Fixing E880 -0004 -00 Title Controller fan2 (FM20) error
Reciprocation HP Sensor (PS100).
Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan
4. Check the Fixing Drive Gear.=>Replace the gear when
of detection
it is damaged.
Measures 1. Connector disconnection
5. Replace the Fixing Feed Driver PCB.
2. Controller fan 2 (FM20) failure
6. Replace the Fixing Unit. (Contact the sales company)
E880 -0005 -00 Title HDD cooling fan (FM21) error
Description When detect a failure of the power supply cooling fan
of detection
Measures 1. Connector disconnection
2. HDD cooling fan (FM21) failure

7-128
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
 7 Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
7-129
E Detailed Occurance Items Description E Detailed Occurance Items Description
code code area code code area
E881 -0001 -00 Title CPU abnormal temperature rising error E906 -0001 -05 Title POD deck light air heater high temperature error
Description It was detected that CPU was 100 deg C or more. Description A temperature over 120 degreeC was detected for 1
of detection of detection second consecutively.
Remedy When it is detected that the temperature of the CPU is Measures 1. Failure of the environment sensor (SR1)
100 deg C or more, forcible shutdown is executed. After 2. Failure of the warm air fan (FAN1)
that, the error is recorded in the error log. 3. Failure of the cool air fan (FAN2)
4. Failure of the additional fan (FAN3)
• If the error occurred during a service visit and then 5. Failure of the air heater (H1)
occurred again: 6. Failure of the deck controller PCB (UN1)
Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. E906 -0002 -05 Title POD deck light air heater low temperature error
Description The heater is not placed in the Ready status even when
• If the error does not occur during a service visit but is of detection a specified period of time has elapsed.
found in the log: Measures 1. Failure of the environment sensor (SR1)
1. Check the space behind the host machine. 2. Failure of the warm air fan (FAN1)
If the space behind the host machine is less than 10 3. Failure of the cool air fan (FAN2)
cm, ask the user to secure enough space. 4. Failure of the additional fan (FAN3)
2. Clean the inlet on the rear of the host machine. 5. Failure of the air heater (H1)
Remove dust. 6. Failure of the deck controller PCB (UN1)
E905 -0001 -05 Title POD deck light air assist fan error E991 -0000 -05 Title Backup RAM error
Description Even when the maximum LOW interval was passed, Description SRAM in the DCON detected data error.
of detection there was no change in the signal. of detection
Measures 1. Failure of the shutter Measures Replace the DCON PCB
2. Failure of the swing sensor (PS11) E996 -0071 -05 Title Error avoidance jam (DADF)
3. Failure of the swing motor (M3)
Description Error avoidance jam occurred.(DADF)
4. Failure of the deck controller PCB (UN1)
of detection
E905 -0002 -05 Title POD deck pickup motor cooling fan error
Remedy Depending on the setting of JM-ERR-R in service mode,
Description The pickup motor cooling fan is not placed at LOCK ON “010071” jam is displayed as an error.
of detection status. Collect log and contact to the sales companies.
Measures 1. Check the connector of the pickup motor cooling fan To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-
(FM4). SW> J M-ERR-R, and set JM-ERR-R to 0.
2. Replace the pickup motor cooling fan. T-7-15
3. Replace the deck controller PCB.
E905 -0003 -05 Title POD deck pickup motor cooling fan error
Description The pickup motor cooling fan is not placed at LOCK OFF
of detection status.
Measures 1. Check the connector of the pickup motor cooling fan
(FM4).
2. Replace the pickup motor cooling fan.
3. Replace the deck controller PCB.

7-129
7
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E804 to E991
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Jam screen display specification
7-130

Jam Code Jam screen display specification

Due to one jam code being used for multiple options, the illustration for the different option
Jam Type may be displayed on the jam screen.
In this case, "1/2" or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this
Jam types are shown below.
area can be pushed. This operation can be used to switch information on the screen.
Type Meaning
DELAY Delay jam
STNRY Stationary jam
OVERLAP Double feed detection
TIMING NG Timing error
OHP NG Incorrect paper
ADF OP ADF open
COVER OP Cover open
RESIDUAL Residual jam
PICKUP NG Pickup error
POWER ON Power ON
DOOR OP Door open
SEQ NG Sequence jam F-7-1
DELAY ESC Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
OTH JAM Other jams
STNRY ESC Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
STP Staple
SDL STP Saddle stitch staple
INIT ROT Residual (at initial rotation)
UP DEVICE Upper stream device jam
OTHER Others
ERROR Error
RETRY ERR Retry error
STOP Press Stop key
ROT Keeps rotating
PROGRAM Program
TIME OUT Time-out
PUNCH Punch
MEDIA NG Misprint
T-7-16

7-130
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Jam screen display specification
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
7-131
Main Unit ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
00 0101 DELAY Right Deck Pickup Sensor PS49
00 0102 DELAY Left Deck Pickup Sensor PS54
PS75 PS70 PS23
00 0103 DELAY Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor PS59
PS111 00 0104 DELAY Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor PS64
00 0105 DELAY Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS53
PS29
00 0106 DELAY Left Deck Pullout Sensor PS58
PS31 00 0107 DELAY Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS40
PS28
00 0108 DELAY Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS63
00 0109 DELAY Vertical Path Sensor 4 PS68
00 010A DELAY Vertical Path Merging Sensor PS30
PS30 00 010B DELAY Transparency Sensor PS29
00 010C DELAY Registration Sensor PS28
PS32 PS27 00 010D DELAY Post-secondary Transfer Sensor PS23
PS33 00 010E DELAY Fixing Inlet Sensor PS70
PS53 00 0110 DELAY Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor PS75
PS24 00 0111 DELAY Outer Delivery Sensor PS31
PS49 00 0112 DELAY Reverse Sensor PS32
PS34 00 0113 DELAY Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS33
PS40
PS25 PS54 PS58 PS26 00 0114 DELAY Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS34
00 0115 DELAY Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS35
PS63
00 0116 DELAY Duplex Sensor 1 PS24
PS59 00 0117 DELAY Duplex Sensor 2 PS25
00 0118 DELAY Duplex Sensor 3 PS26
PS68 00 0119 DELAY Duplex Sensor 4 PS27
PS64 00 0130 DELAY Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor PS111
00 0191 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER
and image formation timing at Right Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Right
Deck Pickup Assembly to the Registration
PS35 Assembly.)
F-7-2 00 0192 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER
and image formation timing at Left Deck
pickup (Check the feed path from the Left
Deck Pickup Assembly to the Registration
Assembly.)
00 0193 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER
and image formation timing at Cassette
3 pickup (Check the feed path from
the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly to the
Registration Assembly.)
00 0194 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER
and image formation timing at Cassette
4 pickup (Check the feed path from
the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly to the
Registration Assembly.)

7-131
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
7-132
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
00 0195 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER 00 020E STNRY Fixing Inlet Sensor PS70
and image formation timing at Option 00 0210 STNRY Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor PS75
Deck pickup (Check the feed path from 00 0211 STNRY Outer Delivery Sensor PS31
the Option Deck Pickup Assembly to 00 0212 STNRY Reverse Sensor PS32
the Registration Assembly of the host 00 0213 STNRY Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS33
machine.)
00 0214 STNRY Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS34
00 0196 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER
00 0215 STNRY Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS35
and image formation timing at Multi-
00 0216 STNRY Duplex Sensor 1 PS24
purpose Tray pickup (Check the feed
00 0217 STNRY Duplex Sensor 2 PS25
path from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Assembly to the Registration Assembly.) 00 0218 STNRY Duplex Sensor 3 PS26
00 0197 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER 00 0219 STNRY Duplex Sensor 4 PS27
and image formation timing at Multi Deck 00 0230 STNRY Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor PS111
Upper Deck pickup (Check the feed path 00 0A01 POWER ON Right Deck Pickup Sensor PS49
from the Upper Deck Pickup Assembly of 00 0A02 POWER ON Left Deck Pickup Sensor PS54
the Multi Deck to the Registration Assembly 00 0A03 POWER ON Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor PS59
of the host machine.) 00 0A04 POWER ON Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor PS64
00 0198 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER 00 0A05 POWER ON Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS53
and image formation timing at Multi Deck 00 0A06 POWER ON Left Deck Pullout Sensor PS58
Middle Deck pickup (Check the feed path 00 0A07 POWER ON Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS40
from the Middle Deck Pickup Assembly of 00 0A08 POWER ON Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS63
the Multi Deck to the Registration Assembly
00 0A09 POWER ON Vertical Path Sensor 4 PS68
of the host machine.)
00 0A0A POWER ON Vertical Path Merging Sensor PS30
00 0199 OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER
00 0A0B POWER ON Transparency Sensor PS29
and image formation timing at Multi Deck
00 0A0C POWER ON Registration Sensor PS28
Lower Deck pickup (Check the feed path
from the Lower Deck Pickup Assembly of 00 0A0D POWER ON Post-secondary Transfer Sensor PS23
the Multi Deck to the Registration Assembly 00 0A0E POWER ON Fixing Inlet Sensor PS70
of the host machine.) 00 0A10 POWER ON Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor PS75
00 019A OTHER Jam due to mismatch of paper feed timing OTHER 00 0A11 POWER ON Outer Delivery Sensor PS31
and image formation timing at 2-sided 00 0A12 POWER ON Reverse Sensor PS32
printing (Check the feed path around 00 0A13 POWER ON Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS33
the Registration Assembly of the host 00 0A14 POWER ON Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS34
machine.) 00 0A15 POWER ON Reverse Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS35
00 0201 STNRY Right Deck Pickup Sensor PS49 00 0A16 POWER ON Duplex Sensor 1 PS24
00 0202 STNRY Left Deck Pickup Sensor PS54 00 0A17 POWER ON Duplex Sensor 2 PS25
00 0203 STNRY Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor PS59 00 0A18 POWER ON Duplex Sensor 3 PS26
00 0204 STNRY Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor PS64 00 0A19 POWER ON Duplex Sensor 4 PS27
00 0205 STNRY Vertical Path Sensor 1 PS53 00 0A30 POWER ON Outer Delivery Transparency Sensor PS111
00 0206 STNRY Left Deck Pullout Sensor PS58 00 0B00 OTHER Waste Toner Container Sensor (Check that PS112
00 0207 STNRY Vertical Path Sensor 2 PS40 the Waste Toner Container is installed.)
00 0208 STNRY Vertical Path Sensor 3 PS63 00 0B01 COVER OP Front Cover Sensor PS80
00 0209 STNRY Vertical Path Sensor 4 PS68 00 0B02 COVER OP Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor PS79
00 020A STNRY Vertical Path Merging Sensor PS30 00 0B03 COVER OP Lower Right Cover Sensor PS39
00 020B STNRY Transparency Sensor PS29 00 0B04 COVER OP Lower Left Cover Sensor PS36
00 020C STNRY Registration Sensor PS28 00 0B05 COVER OP Buffer Front Cover Sensor PS87
00 020D STNRY Post-secondary Transfer Sensor PS23 00 0B06 COVER OP Deck Left Front Cover Sensor S006

7-132
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
7-133
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
00 0C00 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA0 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA2 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA3 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA4 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA5 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA6 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA7 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA8 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CA9 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0CAF OTHER Finisher sequence error jam ----
00 0CF1 ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the ----
Door
00 0D91 MEDIA NG Misprint (paper length is short) LENGTH NG
00 0D92 MEDIA NG Misprint (Although transparency setting is OHP NG
set, paper other than transparency is fed)
00 0D93 MEDIA NG Misprint (Although transparency setting is MEDIA NG
not set, transparency is fed)
00 1E00 OTHER Finisher sequence error jam OTHER
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
T-7-17

power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
The error that a machine detected is either following items.
E012, E021, E074, E100, E197, E733, E808

7-133
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-F1
7-134
Duplex Color Image Reader-F1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
01 0049 DELAY Lead sensor 2 *4 SR5
01 0050 STNRY Lead sensor 2 *4 SR5
PCB3 SR22 SR4 PCB2 SR12 SR10 01 0051 DELAY Delivery sensor *4 PCB5
01 0052 STNRY Delivery sensor *4 PCB5
01 0071 SEQ NG*2 - -
01 0073 ERROR*1 Disengaging HP sensor 1 SR15
01 0074 ERROR*1 Disengaging HP sensor 2 SR16
01 0075 ERROR*1 Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor SR12
01 0090 ADF OP DADF open/closed sensor 1/2 SR1, SR3
01 0091 ADF OP DADF open/closed sensor 1/2 SR1, SR3
01 0092 COVER OP Cover open/closed sensor SR10
01 0093 COVER OP Cover open/closed sensor SR10
01 0094 RESIDUAL All feed type sensor -
01 0095 PICKUP NG Post-separation sensor 1/2/3 SR2, SR3,
PCB2
01 0096 LIMITED -
FUNCTION
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
T-7-18

power supply.
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
be notified.
*2 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
PCB4 SR15 SR5 SR16 PCB5 SR3 SR2 power supply.
F-7-3 If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor.
ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is
01 0001 DELAY Post-separation sensor 3 *3 PCB2 open circuit, and replace the sensor.
01 0002 STNRY Post-separation sensor 3 *3 PCB2
*3 In the case of occurrence on the first sheet of the original (Jam Code 000X, 001X)
01 0003 DELAY Delay detection sensor *3 SR4
01 0004 STNRY Delay detection sensor *3 SR4 *4In the case of occurrence on the second sheet or later of the original (Jam Code 004X,
01 0005 DELAY Registration sensor *3 PCB3 005X)
01 0006 STNRY Registration sensor *3 PCB3
01 0007 DELAY Lead sensor 1 *3 PCB4
01 0008 STNRY Lead sensor 1 *3 PCB4
01 0009 DELAY Lead sensor 2 *3 SR5
01 0010 STNRY Lead sensor 2 *3 SR5
01 0011 DELAY Delivery sensor *3 PCB5
01 0012 STNRY Delivery sensor *3 PCB5
01 0042 STNRY Post-separation sensor 3 *4 PCB2
01 0043 DELAY Delay detection sensor *4 SR4
01 0044 STNRY Delay detection sensor *4 SR4
01 0045 DELAY Registration sensor *4 PCB3
01 0046 STNRY Registration sensor *4 PCB3
01 0047 DELAY Lead sensor 1 *4 PCB4
01 0048 STNRY Lead sensor 1 *4 PCB4

7-134
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-F1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > POD Deck Light – A1
7-135
Paper Deck Unit – C1 POD Deck Light – A1
PS1 PS6 PS6 PS1

F-7-4 F-7-5

ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
00 011A DELAY deck pickup sensor PS6 00 011A DELAY Deck pickup sensor PS1
00 011B DELAY deck feed sensor PS1 00 011B DELAY Deck pull-out sensor PS6
00 021A STNRY deck pickup feed sensor PS6 00 021A STNRY Deck pickup sensor PS1
00 021B STNRY deck feed sensor PS1 00 021B STNRY Deck pull-out sensor PS6
00 0A1A POWER ON deck pickup feed sensor PS6 00 0A1A POWER ON Deck pickup sensor PS1
00 0A1B POWER ON deck feed sensor PS1 00 0A1B POWER ON Deck pull-out sensor PS6
T-7-19 T-7-20

7-135
7
Error Code > Jam Code > POD Deck Light – A1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Multi-drawer Paper Deck – A1
7-136
Multi-drawer Paper Deck – A1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
00 011E DELAY Upper deck pickup sensor S101
S001 S102 S101 S202 S201 00 011F DELAY Upper deck pull-out sensor S102
00 0120 DELAY Middle deck pickup sensor S201
S002 00 0121 DELAY Middle deck pull-out sensor S202
00 0122 DELAY Lower deck pickup sensor S301
00 0123 DELAY Lower deck pull-out sensor S302
00 0124 DELAY Lower deck feed sensor S004
00 0125 DELAY Vertical path upper sensor S001
S003 00 0126 DELAY Vertical path middle sensor S002
00 0127 DELAY Vertical path lower sensor S003
00 0129 DELAY Delivery sensor S005
S009 00 021E STNRY Upper deck pickup sensor S101
00 021F STNRY Upper deck pull-out sensor S102
00 0220 STNRY Middle deck pickup sensor S201
S005 00 0221 STNRY Middle deck pull-out sensor S202
00 0222 STNRY Lower deck pickup sensor S301
00 0223 STNRY Lower deck pull-out sensor S302
00 0224 STNRY Lower deck feed sensor S004
S010 00 0225 STNRY Vertical path upper sensor S001
00 0226 STNRY Vertical path middle sensor S002
00 0227 STNRY Vertical path lower sensor S003
00 0229 STNRY Delivery sensor S005
00 0A1E POWER ON Upper deck pickup sensor S101
S004 00 0A1F POWER ON Upper deck pull-out sensor S102
00 0A20 POWER ON Middle deck pickup sensor S201
00 0A21 POWER ON Middle deck pull-out sensor S202
00 0A22 POWER ON Lower deck pickup sensor S301
00 0A23 POWER ON Lower deck pull-out sensor S302
00 0A24 POWER ON Lower deck feed sensor S004
S302 S301 00 0A25 POWER ON Vertical path upper sensor S001
F-7-6 00 0A26 POWER ON Vertical path middle sensor S002
00 0A27 POWER ON Vertical path lower sensor S003
00 0A29 POWER ON Delivery sensor S005
00 2828 OVERLAP Double feeding sensor S009, S010
T-7-21

7-136
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Multi-drawer Paper Deck – A1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Buffer Path Unit - J1
7-137
Buffer Path Unit - J1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
00 011C DELAY Buffer Sensor 1 PS85
00 011D DELAY Buffer Sensor 2 PS86
00 021C STNRY Buffer Sensor 1 PS85
00 021D STNRY Buffer Sensor 2 PS86
00 0A1C RESIDUAL Buffer Sensor 1 PS85
00 0A1D RESIDUAL Buffer Sensor 2 PS86
T-7-22

PS86

PS85

F-7-7

7-137
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Buffer Path Unit - J1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -H1
7-138
Insertion Unit -H1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
02 10E0 DELAY Entrance sensor S20
02 10E2 DELAY Entrance sensor, Delivery sensor 2 S20, S21
S3 02 10E4 DELAY Upper tray registration sensor, Lower tray S3, S7
registration sensor
S7 02 10E5 DELAY Middle feed sensor S8
02 10E6 DELAY Middle feed sensor, Reverse entrance S8, S18
S8 sensor
02 10E7 DELAY Reverse sensor, Reverse entrance sensor S17, S18
SW2
S9 02 10E8 DELAY Reverse timing sensor, Reverse entrance S16, S18
S19 sensor
S12 02 11F0 STNRY Entrance sensor S20
S18
02 11F2 STNRY Delivery sensor 2 S21
02 11F4 STNRY Upper tray registration sensor, Lower tray S3, S7
S17 registration sensor
02 11F5 STNRY Middle feed sensor S8
SW1
02 11F6 STNRY Middle feed sensor, Reverse entrance S8, S18
sensor
02 11F7 STNRY Reverse sensor S17
S16
02 11F8 STNRY Reverse timing sensor S16
02 13CD POWER ON Power ON jam -
02 14CC COVER OP Front upper cover open/close switch, SW1, SW2,
Upper cover open/close switch, Inserter S19
open/close sensor
02 1FC0 TIME OUT Failed to detect OFF of EntryStart although -
S20 a specified period of time has passed after
S21 replying ON of EntryStartAck
02 1FC1 TIME OUT • Failed to detect ON of EjectStartAck -
although a specified period of time has
passed after notifying ON of EjectStart
F-7-8
• Failed to detect OFF of EjectStartAck
although a specified period of time has
passed after notifying OFF of EjectStart
02 1FC2 OTHER Upper tray empty sensor S9
02 1FC3 OTHER Lower tray empty sensor S12
02 1FCE ERROR*1 Recovered by opening and closing the -
Door
02 1FCF STOP Press Stop key -
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
T-7-23

power supply.
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
be notified.

7-138
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -H1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1
7-139
Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher ACC Jam
Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
ID Code
Integration Unit - B1 02 1051 DELAY bypass 1 sensor RS1
02 1052 DELAY reverse path 1 sensor RS2
S2 S8 S1 RS5 02 1055 DELAY reverse path 2 sensor RS3
02 1057 DELAY reverse path 3 sensor RS4
S7
RS1 02 1059 DELAY bypass 2 sensor RS5
02 1152 STNRY bypass 1 sensor RS1
02 1154 STNRY reverse path 1 sensor RS2
02 1156 STNRY reverse path 2 sensor RS3
S6 02 1158 STNRY reverse path 3 sensor RS4
RS2
02 115A STNRY bypass 2 sensor RS5
02 1161 STNRY Bypass 1 Sensor S1
02 1162 STNRY Bypass 2 Sensor S8
02 1163 STNRY Bypass 3 Sensor S7
RS4 02 1164 STNRY Punch Path 1 Sensor S2
02 1165 STNRY Punch Path 2 Sensor S3
S3 02 1166 STNRY Punch Path 3 Sensor S4
02 1167 STNRY Punch Path 4 Sensor, Punch Path 5 Sensor S5, S6
02 1370 POWER ON Power ON jam -
PS7 02 1472 DOOR OP front cover sensor PS6
02 1F5E TIMING NG reverse path 2 sensor RS3
S5 02 1F5F OTHER reverse flapper HP sensor PS7
02 1F71 RESIDUAL Idle rotation jam -
02 1F73 TIMING NG Jam during receipt from upstream installation -
02 1F74 ERROR Failure of a receiving/sending signal from the -
upstream unit (only when connected to the
S4
finisher)
RS3
02 1F75 ERROR Failure of a receiving/sending signal from the -
F-7-9 downstream unit (only when connected to the
finisher)
02 1F76 OTHER Punch Die comes off -
02 1F77 TIMING NG The paper doesn’t come from puncher after the -
specified time
02 1F78 TIME OUT Time out jam -
02 1F79 SEQ NG Abnormality during receipt from upstream -
installation
02 1F7A TIMING NG Early arrival jam -
02 1F7B UP DEVICE Jam caused by other installation -
02 1F7F STOP Press Stop key (only if the finisher is -
connected)
T-7-24

7-139
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Professional Puncher - C1/Professional Puncher Integration Unit - B1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -J1
7-140
Insertion Unit -J1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
02 10B1 DELAY Paper registration sensor S4
02 10B2 DELAY Reverse entrance sensor S12
S2 S4
02 10B3 DELAY Reverse sensor S10
02 10B4 DELAY Reverse timing sensor S11
02 11C1 STNRY Paper registration sensor S4
02 11C2 STNRY Reverse entrance sensor S12
S1 02 11C3 STNRY Reverse sensor S10
02 11C4 STNRY Reverse timing sensor S11
02 1FD1 OTHER No papers at the time of Inserter Tray S7,S8
pickup. Tray paper sensor 1, Tray paper
S12 sensor 2
02 1FD7 POWER ON Paper registration sensor, Reverse sensor, S4,S10,S11,
SW1 Reverse timing sensor, Reverse entrance S12
sensor
02 1FD8 DOOR OP Front upper cover open/close sensor, SW1,S1,S2
Inserter open/close sensor, Top cover
open/close sensor
S10 S11 T-7-25

F-7-10

7-140
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Insertion Unit -J1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit - G1
7-141
Paper Folding Unit - G1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
02 10E1 DELAY Entrance sensor S20
02 10E3 DELAY Entrance sensor, Delivery sensor 2 S20, S21
02 10E9 DELAY Entrance sensor, Slowdown timing sensor S20, S30
02 10EA DELAY Release timing sensor S31
SW1 02 10EB DELAY Fold position sensor S32
02 10EC DELAY Upper stopper paper sensor S33
02 10ED DELAY Delivery sensor 1, Upper stopper paper S22, S33
sensor
02 10EE DELAY Fold tray paper sensor S27
S21 S20
02 1FDF STOP Press Stop key -
02 11F1 STNRY Entrance sensor S20
02 11F3 STNRY Delivery sensor 2 S21
S30
02 11F9 STNRY Slowdown timing sensor S30
02 11FA STNRY Release timing sensor S31
02 11FB STNRY Fold position sensor S32
02 11FC STNRY Upper stopper paper sensor S33
S31
02 11FD STNRY Delivery sensor 1 S22
02 11FE STNRY Fold tray paper sensor S27
S33
02 1FD0 TIME OUT Failed to detect OFF of EntryStart although -
a specified period of time has passed after
S32 replying ON of EntryStartAck
02 13DD POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on/ -
at initialization/at warm-up rotation by any
S22 sensors on the feed path
S27 02 14DC COVER OP Front upper cover switch SW1
02 1FDE ERROR*1 Detected error (E569/E56A/E56B/E56E) -
02 1FD1 TIME OUT • Failed to detect ON of EjectStartAck -
F-7-11 although a specified period of time has
passed after notifying ON of EjectStart
• Failed to detect OFF of EjectStartAck
although a specified period of time has
passed after notifying OFF of EjectStart
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
T-7-26

power supply.
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
be notified.

7-141
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Unit - G1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1
7-142
Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
02 10B1 DELAY Paper registration sensor S4
S4 02 10B2 DELAY Reverse entrance sensor S12
02 10B3 DELAY Reverse sensor S10
S1 02 10B4 DELAY Reverse timing sensor S11
02 10B5 DELAY Slowdown timing sensor S24
S12 02 10B6 DELAY Release timing sensor S21
S2 02 10B7 DELAY Fold position sensor S23
SW1 02 10B8 DELAY Upper stopper sensor S22
02 10B9 STNRY Delivery sensor S25
S10
02 10BA STNRY C fold delivery sensor S15
S25 S11 02 10BB DELAY C fold tray empty sensor S18
02 11C1 STNRY Paper registration sensor S4
02 11C2 STNRY Reverse entrance sensor S12
02 11C3 STNRY Reverse sensor S10
02 11C4 STNRY Reverse timing sensor S11
S24 02 11C5 STNRY Slowdown timing sensor S24
02 11C6 STNRY Release timing sensor S21
S22 02 11C7 STNRY Fold position sensor S23
02 11C8 STNRY Upper stopper sensor S22
02 11C9 STNRY Delivery sensor S25
S23
S21 02 11CA STNRY C fold delivery sensor S15
02 11CB STNRY C fold tray empty sensor S18
02 1FD1 OTHER No papers at the time of Inserter Tray -
S15 pickup
02 13D7 POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on -
by any sensors on the feed path
S18
02 14D8 COVER OP Front upper cover open/close sensor, SW1, S1, S2
Inserter open/close sensor, Top cover
F-7-12 open/close sensor
T-7-27

7-142
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Insertion Unit - G1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > External Hole Puncher - A1
7-143
External Hole Puncher - A1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
02 1012 DELAY Trailing edge sensor LED5, PTR5
02 1122 STNRY Trailing edge sensor LED5, PTR5
PI63
02 1F44 PUNCH Punch home position sensor PI63
02 1F45 POWER ON Trailing edge sensor LED5, PTR5
T-7-28

LED5,PTR5

F-7-13

7-143
7
Error Code > Jam Code > External Hole Puncher - A1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1
7-144
Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
02 0CAF OTHER Finisher sequence error jam -
02 1011 DELAY Inlet sensor S101
S104 02 1012 DELAY Feed path senor S102
02 1091 DELAY Saddle delivery sensor 1 S226
S102 02 1092 DELAY Saddle delivery sensor 2 S227
02 1093 DELAY Saddle inlet sensor S201
S101
02 1094 DELAY Trimmer inlet sensor S101
02 1096 DELAY Saddle vertical path sensor S203
02 1121 STNRY Inlet sensor S101
S129
02 1122 STNRY Feed path senor S102
02 112E OTH JAM Finisher Sequence Error janm -
02 112F ERROR*1 Detected error(E514/E530/E532/E535/ -
S201 E537
/E540/E542/E568/E56D/E578/E57B/E57C
/E583/E584) during paper feed
S131 02 11A1 STNRY Saddle delivery sensor 1 S226
S223 02 11A2 STNRY Saddle delivery sensor 2 S227
02 11A3 STNRY Saddle inlet sensor S201
02 11A4 STNRY Trimmer inlet sensor S101
02 11AF ERROR*1 Detected error (E5A3/E5A4/E5AA/E5BA/ -
E5BA) during paper feed
02 1205 TIMING Inlet sensor S101
S203 02 1307 POWER ON Inlet sensor, Feed path senor S101, S102
02 1387 POWER ON Saddle inlet sensor, Saddle vertical path S201, S203,
sensor, Saddle delivery sensor 1, Saddle S226, S227
delivery sensor 2
02 138A POWER ON Detected presence of paper at power-on -
S226
/after opening and then closing the door by
any sensors on the feed path
02 1408 DOOR OP Front door sensor S129
S227
02 1488 DOOR OP Front door sensor S129
F-7-14 02 148B DOOR OP Front door sensor S129
02 1506 STP Staple hp sensor S131
02 1586 SDL STP Saddle stitcher hp senso S223
02 1F45 PUNCH Punch hp sensor S104
02 1F4F ERROR*1 Detected Punch Motor error/Punch Slide -
Motor error during paper feed
02 1F8F ERROR*1 Detected error (E5F0/E5F1/E5F2/E5F3/ -
E5F4
/E5F5/E5F6/E5F7/E5F8/E5F9) during
paper feed
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
T-7-29

power supply.
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
be notified.

7-144
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-K1/Booklet Finisher-K1
 7 Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1
7-145
Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name / Description Sensor ID
02 0CAF OTHER Finisher sequence error jam ----
02 1011 DELAY Inlet sensor PI103
PI118
02 1013 DELAY Escape tray path sensor PI118
02 1014 DELAY Delivery sensor PI104
PI102 02 1091 DELAY No.1 paper sensor PI18
02 1092 DELAY Delivery sensor PI11
PI104 02 1093 DELAY Saddle inlet sensor PI22
MSW101 02 109F OTHER Saddle time out -
02 1121 STNRY Inlet sensor PI103
02 1123 STNRY Escape tray path sensor PI118
PI103
PI50 02 1124 STNRY Delivery sensor PI104
02 112E OTH JAM Finisher Sequence Error janm -
PI22 02 112F ERROR*1 Detected error (E540/E514/E519/E530 -
/E532/E535/E537/E540/E542/E584)
02 11A1 STNRY No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, PI18, PI19,
PI18
No.3 paper sensor PI20
PI9
02 11A2 STNRY Delivery sensor,Vertical path paper sensor PI11, PI17
PI19 02 11A3 STNRY Saddle inlet sensor PI22
02 1307 POWER ON Inlet sensor, Delivery sensor, Escape tray PI103, PI104,
path sensor PI118
PI20
02 1387 POWER ON Delivery sensor,Vertical path paper sensor, PI11, PI17,
No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, PI18, PI19,
SW5 No.3 paper sensor, Saddle inlet sensor PI20, PI22
PI11 02 1408 COVER OP Front cover sensor, Front cover switch PI102,
MSW101
SW7 02 1488 COVER OP Inlet cover sensor, Front cover sensor PI9, PI102
02 1506 STP Staple home position sensor PI50
02 1586 SDL STP Stitcher HP sensor (front), Stitcher HP SW5, SW7
sensor (rear)
PI17 02 1F8F ERROR*1 Detected error (E5F0/E5F1/E5F2/E5F3/ -
E5F6)
F-7-15
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
T-7-30

power supply.
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
be notified.

7-145
7
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-L1/Booklet Finisher-L1
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-146

Alarm Code Alarm

Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code
04-0331 3 Cassette 4 lifter error Movement: The cassette 4 pickup motor (M45) stops. The
Alarm Code Details cassette 4 is not used.
Cause: The cassette 4 lifter does not move up. A failure
occurred in the cassette 4 paper surface sensor (PS67).
Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
Code 04-0431 3 Option deck lifter Movement: The option deck lifter motor stops. Option deck is
00-0246 1 Error code display Soft counter PCB cannot write normally error not used.
(4-digit) Cause: The option deck lifter does not move up. A failure
00-0247 1 Error code display Soft counter PCB cannot restore data occurred in the Option deck paper surface sensor.
(4-digit) Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
01-0001 3 Disabled to obtain Counter information is not set to UGW 04-3039 3 Upper multi-cassette Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The
counter values for a * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm deck lifter error upper deck is not used.
certain period of time being generated by UGW Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
01-0004 3 Notification of IP IP address has been changed 04-3040 3 Upper multi-cassette Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The
address change * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm deck lifter lower limit upper deck is not used.
being generated by UGW sensor error Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
01-0005 3 Machine is in The machine has entered limited function mode due to some 04-3041 3 Upper multi-cassette Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The
restricted operation reasons deck paper surface upper deck is not used.
mode * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm sensor error Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire
being generated by UGW 04-3042 3 The upper limit of the Movement: The lifter moves down to the lower limit position.
02-0025 3 Insufficient LED The light intensity is insufficient at LED light-on. upper multi-cassette The upper deck is not used.
light intensity error deck lifter upper limit Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire
in Scanner Unit for sensor has been
reading the front side exceeded.
(DADF) 04-3043 3 The lower limit of the Movement: The lifter moves up to the lower limit position.
04-0010 3 Jam left untouched Jam is left untouched upper multi-cassette The upper deck is not used.
* Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm deck lifter lower limit Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
being generated by UGW sensor has been
04-0031 3 Right deck lifter error Movement: The right deck pickup motor (M43) stops. The exceeded.
right deck is not used. 04-3044 3 The upper limit of Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The
Cause: The right deck lifter does not move up. A failure the value of counting upper deck is not used.
occurred in the right deck paper surface sensor (PS52). the paper remaining Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. on the upper multi-
04-0131 3 Left deck lifter error Movement: The left deck pickup motor (M42) stops. The left cassette deck has
deck is not used. been exceeded.
Cause: The left deck lifter does not move up. A failure 04-3045 3 The lower limit of the Movement: The upper deck lifter motor (M101) stops. The
occurred in the left deck paper surface sensor (PS57). value of counting upper deck is not used.
Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. the paper remaining Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
04-0231 3 Cassette 3 lifter error Movement: The cassette 3 pickup motor (M44) stops. The on the upper multi-
cassette 3 is not used. cassette deck has
Cause: The cassette 3 lifter does not move up. A failure been exceeded.
occurred in the cassette 3 paper surface sensor (PS62). 04-3053 3 Reaching the life Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not
Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. of the upper multi- use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no
cassette deck left paper)
separation fan / Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
Failure of the fan

7-146
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-147
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
04-3055 3 Reaching the life Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not 04-3145 3 The lower limit of the Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The
of the upper multi- use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no value of counting upper deck is not used.
cassette deck right paper) the paper remaining Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
separation fan / Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. on the middle multi-
Failure of the fan cassette deck has
04-3060 3 Error in home position An error in the Swing Motor was detected. been exceeded.
detection with Multi 04-3153 3 Reaching the life Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not
Deck Upper Deck of the middle multi- use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no
Swing Motor cassette deck left paper)
04-3061 3 Error in Multi Deck Multi Deck Fan failed to rotate. separation fan / Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
Upper Deck Power Failure of the fan
Supply Fan 04-3155 3 Reaching the life Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not
04-3062 3 Multi Deck Upper Air Heater detected abnormal high temperature. of the middle multi- use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no
Deck Air Heater high cassette deck right paper)
temperature error separation fan / Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
04-3063 3 Multi Deck Upper Air Heater detected abnormal low temperature. Failure of the fan
Deck Air Heater low 04-3160 3 Error in home position An error in the Swing Motor was detected.
temperature error detection with Multi
04-3064 3 Multi Deck Upper Deck Pickup Motor failed to rotate. Deck Middle Deck
Deck Pickup Motor Swing Motor
error 04-3161 3 Error in Multi Deck Multi Deck Fan failed to rotate.
04-3139 3 Middle multi-cassette Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The Middle Deck Power
deck lifter error middle deck is not used. Supply Fan
Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. 04-3162 3 Multi Deck Middle Air Heater detected abnormal high temperature.
04-3140 3 Middle multi-cassette Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The Deck Air Heater high
deck lifter lower limit middle deck is not used. temperature error
sensor error Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. 04-3163 3 Multi Deck Middle Air Heater detected abnormal low temperature.
04-3141 3 Middle multi-cassette Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The Deck Air Heater low
deck paper surface middle deck is not used. temperature error
sensor error Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire 04-3164 3 Multi Deck Middle Deck Pickup Motor failed to rotate.
04-3142 3 The upper limit of the Movement: The lifter moves down to the lower limit position. Deck Pickup Motor
middle multi-cassette The middle deck is not used. error
deck lifter upper limit Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire 04-3239 3 Lower multi-cassette Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The
sensor has been deck lifter error lower deck is not used.
exceeded. Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
04-3143 3 The lower limit of the Movement: The lifter moves up to the lower limit position. 04-3240 3 Lower multi-cassette Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The
middle multi-cassette The middle deck is not used. deck lifter lower limit lower deck is not used.
deck lifter lower limit Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. sensor error Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
sensor has been 04-3241 3 Lower multi-cassette Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The
exceeded. deck paper surface lower deck is not used.
04-3144 3 The upper limit of Movement: The middle deck lifter motor (M201) stops. The sensor error Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire
the value of counting upper deck is not used. 04-3242 3 The upper limit of the Movement: The lifter moves down to the lower limit position.
the paper remaining Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. lower multi-cassette The middle deck is not used.
on the middle multi- deck lifter upper limit Measures: Check the motor ,sensor and wire
cassette deck has sensor has been
been exceeded. exceeded.

7-147
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-148
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
04-3243 3 The lower limit of the Movement: The lifter moves up to the lower limit position. 06-0002 3 Fixing Film life alarmTotal number of sheets fed through the Fixing Film Unit
lower multi-cassette The lower deck is not used. 1 exceeded the specified number.
deck lifter lower limit Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. 06-0003 3 Fixing Web absence Fixing Web level is low. (Fixing Web Sensor detected low
sensor has been notice alarm web level.)
exceeded. 06-0010 3 Fixing reciprocation Home position could not be detected despite a reciprocation
04-3244 3 The upper limit of Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The drive alarm drive operation of Fixing Assembly.
the value of counting upper deck is not used. 06-0011 3 Fixing Film life alarmRotation time of the Fixing Film Unit exceeded the specified
the paper remaining Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. 2 time.
on the lower multi- 10-0001 3 Toner low (Black) Toner (Bk) level warning display
cassette deck has * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm
been exceeded. being generated by UGW
04-3245 3 The lower limit of the Movement: The lower deck lifter motor (M301) stops. The 10-0002 3 Toner low (Cyan) Toner (C) level warning display
value of counting upper deck is not used. * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm
the paper remaining Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem. being generated by UGW
on the lower multi- 10-0003 3 Toner low (Magenta) Toner (M) level warning display
cassette deck has * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm
been exceeded. being generated by UGW
04-3253 3 Reaching the life Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not 10-0004 3 Toner low (Yellow) Toner (Y) level warning display
of the lower multi- use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm
cassette deck left paper) being generated by UGW
separation fan / Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
10-0017 3 Toner (Y) prior
Failure of the fan
delivery alarm
04-3255 3 Reaching the life Movement: The fan stops.The air floatation fan stops.Not
10-0018 3 Toner (M) prior
of the lower multi- use the corresponding receptacle (handle as there is no
delivery alarm
cassette deck right paper)
10-0019 3 Toner (C) prior
separation fan / Measures: Turn OFF/ON the power to eliminate the problem.
delivery alarm
Failure of the fan
10-0020 3 Toner (BK) prior
04-3260 3 Error in home position An error in the Swing Motor was detected.
delivery alarm
detection with Multi
10-0022 3 Patch detection light
Deck Lower Deck
intensity abnormal
Swing Motor
change alarm
04-3261 3 Error in Multi Deck Multi Deck Fan failed to rotate.
10-0100 3 Toner bottle change
Lower Deck Power
notification alarm
Supply Fan
11-0001 3 Waste Toner Full level of the Waste Toner Container was detected.
04-3262 3 Multi Deck Lower Air Heater detected abnormal high temperature.
Container full level
Deck Air Heater high
alarm (waste toner
temperature error
full)
04-3263 3 Multi Deck Lower Air Heater detected abnormal low temperature.
11-0010 3 Waste Toner Near full level alert of the Waste Toner Container was
Deck Air Heater low
Container near full detected.
temperature error
level alarm (waste
04-3264 3 Multi Deck Lower Deck Pickup Motor failed to rotate.
toner near full)
Deck Pickup Motor
error
04-9090 3 OHT sensor (PS29) Movement: OHT detection cannot be performed.
adjustment failure Cause: An adjustment of the OHT sensor (PS29) failed at
initial rotation.
Measures: Re-adjust during pre-rotation.

7-148
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-149
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
31-0006 3 HDD failure when the Movement: HDD failure when the mirroring function is 34-0001 3 Image position Movement: None
mirroring function is installed correction patch Cause: The detection data of the average value of the image
installed Cause: The HDD has a failure when the mirroring function is detection alarm 1 position correction patch pattern has exceeded the permitted
installed range.
Measures: Check the connection among the following: the • Scraches on the ITB
HDD that corresponds to the red LED on the LED PCB of • Failure of the photosensitive drum
the Mirroring Kit, the Mirroring Board and the Main Controller • Noise due to contact failure of the ITB guide (The ITB unit
PCB 2. is not installed correctly.)
Replace the HDD if it cannot be recovered. Measures:
31-0008 3 HDD failure Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time 1. Check whether the color image is formed correctly for 4
prediction alarm due to occurrence of physical error in HDD. It does not occur colors.
in the HDD of mirroring configuration. a. Perform test print in the following condition.
Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 5
Measures: Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3
1. Back up the data stored in HDD. size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction).
2. Replace the HDD. b. Check the following points.
3. Restore the data. • Check whether the image is formed in the printing field
S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting except a margin. Check whether the image density is not
Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in the HDD. The low.
occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing speed, • Check whether an unexpected image is not formed.
the total number of Motor start-up and stop times, the total If a correct image is not formed, check the following
length of power-on time, etc. are monitored. points.
33-0010 3 Stream reading fan A failure occurred in the fan at the time of job completion. • Developing assembly: Check whether dirt is not applied to
alarm the developing.
33-0011 3 Alarm for delivery fan • Drum: Check whether dirt is not applied to the drum.
heat dischare failure Check whether there are no scratches on the drum.
33-0023 3 Optical unit (DADF) A failure occurred in the fan during job operation. • ITB cleaning unit: Check whether an ITB cleaning failure
cooling fan alarm has not occurred. (Check whether the previous image
does not remain.)
33-0025 3 Optical unit (reader) A failure occurred in the fan during job operation.
• Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the
cooling fan alarm
ITB or not.
Based on the checking results and frequency of
occurrence of the alarm, make a judgment of whether or
not to replace the corresponding parts.

7-149
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-150
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
34-0002 3 Image position Movement: None 34-0003 3 An attempt to read The registration sensor is faulty, the registration sensor
correction patch Cause: The image position correction patch pattern cannot 10 sets of auto cleaning member is blocking the registration sensor, or no
detection alarm 2 be detected at all. registration patterns image has been drawn on the belt.
• Failure of the patch sensor has failed, ending in
• Failure of the shutter a time-out condition.
• Image failure 34-0004 3 Image position Movement: None
1. Check whether the color image is formed correctly for 4 correction patch Cause: The correction amount of the skew correction motor
colors. correction alarm 1 has exceeded the limit.
a. Perform test print in the following condition. • Failure of the laser scanner unit
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 5 • Failure of installation of the laser scanner unit
Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3 • Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches
size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction). on the belt)
b. Check the following points. Measures:
• Check whether the image is formed in the printing field 1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4
except a margin. Check whether the image density is not colors.
low. a. Perform test print in the following condition.
• Check whether an unexpected image is not formed. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6
If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be taken Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3
for prevention of an image failure. (Check the developing size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction).
assembly and drum unit.) b. Check the following points.
• Developing assembly: Check whether dirt is not applied to • Check whether there is color displacement in a horizontal
the developing. scanning direction based on the Bk standard, and check
• Drum: Check whether dirt is not applied to the drum. whether there is a color which is extremely displaced.
Check whether there are no scratches on the drum. Replace the laser scanner unit for the color in which
• ITB cleaning unit: Check whether an ITB cleaning failure significant color displacement occurred.
has not occurred. (Check whether the previous image 2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the
does not remain.) ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs
• Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the frequently, replace the ITB.
ITB or not.
• Based on the checking results and frequency of
occurrence of the alarm, make a judgment of whether or
not to replace the corresponding parts.
2. Damage or dirt of/on the patch sensor
a. Check whether the shutter of the patch sensor operates
correctly.
b. Check whether dirt is not applied to the patch sensor.
If dirt is applied, clean the sensor surface with alcohol. After
cleaning, execute patch light intensity correction and base
correction (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>PT-LPADJ).
c. If the problem is not eliminated even after cleaning,
replace the registration patch sensor unit.
d. Check whether shorting has occurred to the patch sensor
harness.
If it occurred, replace both of the harness and the DC
controller interface PCB. (It is necessary to replace the
PCB because the DC controller interface PCB burns when
shorting occurs.)

7-150
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-151
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
34-0005 3 Image position Movement: None 34-0006 3 Image position Movement: None
correction patch Cause: The vertical scanning direction writing correction correction patch Cause:
correction alarm 2 limiter has been exceeded. correction alarm 3 The horizontal scanning direction magnification correction
• Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches limiter has been exceeded.
on the belt) • Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches
• Patch image failure on the belt)
Measures: • Failure of the laser scanner unit
1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4 • Failure of installation of the laser scanner unit
colors. • Patch image failure
a. Perform test print in the following condition. Measures:
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6 1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4
Output more than 2 sheets of A3-size paper consecutively. colors.
Or, output 4 sheets of A4-size paper consecutively. a. Perform test print in the following condition.
b. Check the following points. COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6
• Check whether an unexpected image is not formed. (Color Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3
displacement in a vertical scanning direction) size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction).
If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be b. Check the following points.
taken for prevention of an image failure. (Check the • Check whether there is color displacement in a horizontal
developing assembly and drum unit.) scanning direction based on the Bk standard, and check
2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the whether there is a color which is extremely displaced.
ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs Reinstall the laser scanner unit where significant color
frequently, replace the ITB. displacement occurred. If the problem cannot be still
eliminated, replace the unit.
If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be
taken for prevention of an image failure. (Replace the
drum unit, etc.)
2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the
ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs
frequently, replace the ITB.

7-151
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-152
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
34-0007 3 Image position Movement: None 50-0007 3 Lack of light intensity A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the
correction patch Cause: in the post-separation output of the post-separation sensor 3.
correction alarm 4 The horizontal scanning direction writing correction limiter sensor 3
has been exceeded. 50-0008 3 Lack of light intensity A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the
• Incorrect detection by the registration sensor (Scratches in the read sensor 1 output of the read sensor 1.
on the belt) 50-0009 3 Lack of light intensity A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the
• Failure of the laser scanner unit in the delivery sensor output of the delivery sensor.
• Failure of installation of the laser scanner unit 50-0010 3 A separation A failure occurred.
• Patch image failure alarm occurred
Measures: consecutively.
1. Check whether a color image is formed correctly for 4 50-0013 3 Lack of light intensity A failure of lack of light intensity occurred when adjusting the
colors. in the registration output of the registration sensor.
a. Perform test print in the following condition. sensor
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE: 6
50-0014 3 Insufficient LED Light intensity was insufficient at LED lighting.
Output one sheet for each color in the paper of LTR/A4/A3
light intensity error
size (more than 290mm in a horizontal scanning direction).
in Scanner Unit for
b. Check the following points.
reading the back side
• Check whether there is color displacement in a horizontal
(DADF)
scanning direction based on the Bk standard, and check
70-1 3 Memory overflow -
whether there is a color which is extremely displaced.
70-2 3 Font memory -
Reinstall the laser scanner unit where significant color
overflow
displacement occurred. If the problem cannot be still
eliminated, replace the unit. 70-3 3 Micromemory -
If a correct image is not formed, take measures to be overflow
taken for prevention of an image failure. (Replace the 70-4 3 Image memory -
drum unit, etc.) overflow
2. Check whether there are a lot of scratches or dents on the 70-5 3 Pattern memory -
ITB or not. If there are a lot of them and this alarm occurs overflow
frequently, replace the ITB. 70-6 3 Hard disk error -
34-0010 3 ITB home position An error was detected at ITB home position. 70-7 2 Detect operation
error abnormality for the
34-1001 3 ITB Steering Motor Retry occurred when detecting home position of the ITB HDD access request
retry error Steering Motor. 73-0004 3 LIPS Overflow of work memory for translator
37-0001 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0006 3 LIPS Error in configuration acquisition/management
37-0002 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0007 3 LIPS Memory management error in LIPS
37-0003 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0008 3 LIPS File management error in LIPS
37-0004 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0009 3 LIPS Reception data management error
37-0005 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0010 3 LIPS Page control error
37-0006 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0011 3 LIPS Macro management error
37-0007 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0012 3 LIPS Color management error
37-1000 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0013 3 LIPS Layout control error
37-2000 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0014 3 LIPS Font management error
38-0001 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0015 3 LIPS Letter drawing error
38-0002 3 For R&D For R&D 73-0016 3 LIPS Graphic drawing error
73-0017 3 LIPS Image drawing error
73-0018 3 LIPS Display error to LCD

7-152
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-153
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
73-0019 3 LIPS Text mode command error layer error 75-9107 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
73-0020 3 LIPS Vector mode command error layer error video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
73-0021 3 LIPS Utility execution control error external controller to be taken.
73-0022 3 LIPS Database management error in LIPS However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
73-0023 3 LIPS Menu control error in LIPS number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
73-0024 3 LIPS Boot error in LIPS 75-9108 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
73-0025 3 LIPS When the graphic library is in use for image processing, if
external controller to be taken.
the memory allocation is failed.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
73-0026 3 LIPS Data format error of image mode
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-0001 3 Error occurred in -
75-9109 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
external controller
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
75-0002 3 Error occurred due to -
external controller to be taken.
invalid SVG analysis
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
from external
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
controller
75-9110 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
75-9101 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken.
external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9111 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
75-9102 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken.
external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9112 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
75-9103 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken.
external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9113 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
75-9104 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken.
external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9114 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
75-9105 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken.
external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9115 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
75-9106 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken.
external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7-153
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-154
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
75-9116 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-910E 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9117 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-910F 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9118 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-911A 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9119 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-911B 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-9120 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-911C 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-910A 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-911D 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-910B 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-911E 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-910C 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-911F 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-910D 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B101 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7-154
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-155
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
75-B102 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B10B 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B103 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75- 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need B10C video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B104 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75- 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need B10D video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B105 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B10E 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B106 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B10F 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B107 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B110 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B108 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B111 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B109 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B112 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B10A 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B113 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.

7-155
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-156
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
75-B114 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B11D 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B115 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B11E 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B116 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B11F 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B117 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 75-B120 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
external controller to be taken. external controller to be taken.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
75-B118 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 76-0001 3 Font No memory for internal font
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need 76-0002 3 Font Fails to assure the work area to analyze the font that is
external controller to be taken. downloaded at “Resource Download”.
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified 76-0003 2 Font Fails to access the file that stores the font.
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. 76-0004 2 Font Fails to allocate the FM work memory.
75-B119 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 76-0005 2 Font Fails to analyze the internal font.
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need 76-0006 2 Font Alignment of font data is wrong.
external controller to be taken.
76-0007 2 Font Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
types depending on where to occur
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled.
76-0008 2 Font Failed to allocate work memory with scaler. There are 3
75-B11A 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of
types depending on where to occur
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need
77-0001 2 PDL Fails to allocate the memory
external controller to be taken.
77-0002 2 PDL Failure of rendering
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. 77-0003 2 PDL DGL entry invalid
75-B11B 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of 77-0005 2 PDL Other errors
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need 77-0006 1 PDL DLG memory insufficient
external controller to be taken. 78-0003 3 GL GL entry invalid
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified 78-0005 1 GL System memory full
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. 79-0001 3 In-house developed A PCL initialization error
75-B11C 3 Failure in transfer of When a video data transfer error occurred, retransmission of PCL
video data from an the video data is internally performed, so no measures need 79-0002 3 In-house developed A PCL processing error
external controller to be taken. PCL
However, when retransmission is performed over a specified 79-0003 1 In-house developed Overflow of work memory for translator
number of times, the corresponding job is cancelled. PCL
79-0004 1 In-house developed Download overflow
PCL

7-156
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-157
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
80-0001 3 BDL Admin error 84-0009 3 XPS rendering error -
80-0003 3 BDL DataArea error 85-0001 1 For R&D -
80-0010 3 BDL Graphics error 85-0002 1 For R&D -
80-0011 3 BDL Char error 85-0003 1 For R&D -
80-0015 1 BDL Print data cannot process this version. 85-0004 1 For R&D -
80-0016 1 BDL Overflow of work memory for translator 85-0005 1 For R&D -
80-0018 1 BDL Syntax error 85-0006 1 For R&D -
80-0019 1 BDL In case of invalid data format in BDL custom mode. 85-0007 1 For R&D -
81-0001 1 Imaging Fails to allocate the memory 85-0008 1 For R&D -
81-0002 1 Imaging Failure of rendering 85-0009 1 For R&D -
81-0003 3 Imaging Overflow of work memory for translator 85-000A 1 For R&D -
81-0004 3 Imaging Imaging initialization error 85-0011 1 For R&D -
81-0005 1 Imaging Imaging processing error 85-0012 1 For R&D -
82-0001 3 RIP H/W Dart hangup by the DisplayList injustice 85-0013 1 For R&D -
83-0001 3 CanonPDF PDF data error 85-0014 1 For R&D -
83-0002 1 CanonPDF PDF compression analysis error 85-0015 1 For R&D -
83-0003 1 CanonPDF PDF page compression error 85-001A 1 For R&D -
83-0004 1 CanonPDF PDF data processing error 85-002A 1 For R&D -
83-0005 3 CanonPDF PDF memory full 85-0101 1 For R&D -
83-0006 3 CanonPDF PDF temporary file error 85-0102 1 For R&D -
83-0007 3 CanonPDF PDF color analysis error 85-0103 1 For R&D -
83-0008 3 CanonPDF PDF data reading error 85-0104 1 For R&D -
83-0009 3 CanonPDF PDF output selection error 85-0105 1 For R&D -
83-0010 3 CanonPDF PDF process file error 85-0111 1 For R&D -
83-0011 3 CanonPDF PDF access error 85-0112 1 For R&D -
83-0012 3 CanonPDF PDF analysis access error 85-0113 1 For R&D -
83-0013 3 CanonPDF PDF font error 85-0114 1 For R&D -
83-0014 3 CanonPDF PDF rendering error 85-0115 1 For R&D -
83-0015 1 CanonPDF PDF data decode error 85-0201 1 For R&D -
83-0016 1 CanonPDF PDF print range error 85-0202 1 For R&D -
83-0017 3 CanonPDF PDF error 85-0203 1 For R&D -
83-0018 1 CanonPDF PDF analysis error 85-0204 1 For R&D -
There is un-supported transparent object 85-0205 1 For R&D -
84-0001 3 XPS memory full - 85-0211 1 For R&D -
error 85-0212 1 For R&D -
84-0002 3 XPS spool full error - 85-0213 1 For R&D -
84-0003 3 XPS print range error - 85-0214 1 For R&D -
84-0004 3 XPS document data - 85-0215 1 For R&D -
error 85-0301 1 For R&D -
84-0005 3 XPS page data error - 85-0302 1 For R&D -
84-0006 3 XPS image data error - 85-0303 1 For R&D -
84-0007 3 XPS font data error - 85-0304 1 For R&D -
84-0008 3 XPS non-support - 85-0305 1 For R&D -
image error 85-0311 1 For R&D -

7-157
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-158
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-0312 1 For R&D - 85-0801 1 For R&D -
85-0313 1 For R&D - 85-0802 1 For R&D -
85-0314 1 For R&D - 85-0803 1 For R&D -
85-0315 1 For R&D - 85-0804 1 For R&D -
85-0401 1 For R&D - 85-0805 1 For R&D -
85-0402 1 For R&D - 85-0811 1 For R&D -
85-0403 1 For R&D - 85-0812 1 For R&D -
85-0404 1 For R&D - 85-0813 1 For R&D -
85-0405 1 For R&D - 85-0814 1 For R&D -
85-0411 1 For R&D - 85-0815 1 For R&D -
85-0412 1 For R&D - 85-0901 1 For R&D -
85-0413 1 For R&D - 85-0902 1 For R&D -
85-0414 1 For R&D - 85-0903 1 For R&D -
85-0415 1 For R&D - 85-0904 1 For R&D -
85-0501 1 For R&D - 85-0905 1 For R&D -
85-0502 1 For R&D - 85-0911 1 For R&D -
85-0503 1 For R&D - 85-0912 1 For R&D -
85-0504 1 For R&D - 85-0913 1 For R&D -
85-0505 1 For R&D - 85-0914 1 For R&D -
85-0511 1 For R&D - 85-0915 1 For R&D -
85-0512 1 For R&D - 85-0A01 1 For R&D -
85-0513 1 For R&D - 85-0A02 1 For R&D -
85-0514 1 For R&D - 85-0A03 1 For R&D -
85-0515 1 For R&D - 85-0A04 1 For R&D -
85-0601 1 For R&D - 85-0A05 1 For R&D -
85-0602 1 For R&D - 85-0A11 1 For R&D -
85-0603 1 For R&D - 85-0A12 1 For R&D -
85-0604 1 For R&D - 85-0A13 1 For R&D -
85-0605 1 For R&D - 85-0A14 1 For R&D -
85-0611 1 For R&D - 85-0A15 1 For R&D -
85-0612 1 For R&D - 85-0B01 1 For R&D -
85-0613 1 For R&D - 85-0B02 1 For R&D -
85-0614 1 For R&D - 85-0B03 1 For R&D -
85-0615 1 For R&D - 85-0B04 1 For R&D -
85-0701 1 For R&D - 85-0B05 1 For R&D -
85-0702 1 For R&D - 85-0B11 1 For R&D -
85-0703 1 For R&D - 85-0B12 1 For R&D -
85-0704 1 For R&D - 85-0B13 1 For R&D -
85-0705 1 For R&D - 85-0B14 1 For R&D -
85-0711 1 For R&D - 85-0B15 1 For R&D -
85-0712 1 For R&D - 85-0C01 1 For R&D -
85-0713 1 For R&D - 85-0C02 1 For R&D -
85-0714 1 For R&D - 85-0C03 1 For R&D -
85-0715 1 For R&D - 85-0C04 1 For R&D -

7-158
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-159
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-0C05 1 For R&D - 85-1014 1 For R&D -
85-0C11 1 For R&D - 85-1015 1 For R&D -
85-0C12 1 For R&D - 85-1101 1 For R&D -
85-0C13 1 For R&D - 85-1102 1 For R&D -
85-0C14 1 For R&D - 85-1103 1 For R&D -
85-0C15 1 For R&D - 85-1104 1 For R&D -
85-0D01 1 For R&D - 85-1105 1 For R&D -
85-0D02 1 For R&D - 85-1111 1 For R&D -
85-0D03 1 For R&D - 85-1112 1 For R&D -
85-0D04 1 For R&D - 85-1113 1 For R&D -
85-0D05 1 For R&D - 85-1114 1 For R&D -
85-0D11 1 For R&D - 85-1115 1 For R&D -
85-0D12 1 For R&D - 85-1201 1 For R&D -
85-0D13 1 For R&D - 85-1202 1 For R&D -
85-0D14 1 For R&D - 85-1203 1 For R&D -
85-0D15 1 For R&D - 85-1204 1 For R&D -
85-0E01 1 For R&D - 85-1205 1 For R&D -
85-0E02 1 For R&D - 85-1211 1 For R&D -
85-0E03 1 For R&D - 85-1212 1 For R&D -
85-0E04 1 For R&D - 85-1213 1 For R&D -
85-0E05 1 For R&D - 85-1214 1 For R&D -
85-0E11 1 For R&D - 85-1215 1 For R&D -
85-0E12 1 For R&D - 85-1301 1 For R&D -
85-0E13 1 For R&D - 85-1302 1 For R&D -
85-0E14 1 For R&D - 85-1303 1 For R&D -
85-0E15 1 For R&D - 85-1304 1 For R&D -
85-0F01 1 For R&D - 85-1305 1 For R&D -
85-0F02 1 For R&D - 85-1311 1 For R&D -
85-0F03 1 For R&D - 85-1312 1 For R&D -
85-0F04 1 For R&D - 85-1313 1 For R&D -
85-0F05 1 For R&D - 85-1314 1 For R&D -
85-0F11 1 For R&D - 85-1315 1 For R&D -
85-0F12 1 For R&D - 85-1401 1 For R&D -
85-0F13 1 For R&D - 85-1402 1 For R&D -
85-0F14 1 For R&D - 85-1403 1 For R&D -
85-0F15 1 For R&D - 85-1404 1 For R&D -
85-1001 1 For R&D - 85-1405 1 For R&D -
85-1002 1 For R&D - 85-1411 1 For R&D -
85-1003 1 For R&D - 85-1412 1 For R&D -
85-1004 1 For R&D - 85-1413 1 For R&D -
85-1005 1 For R&D - 85-1414 1 For R&D -
85-1011 1 For R&D - 85-1415 1 For R&D -
85-1012 1 For R&D - 85-1501 1 For R&D -
85-1013 1 For R&D - 85-1502 1 For R&D -

7-159
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-160
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-1503 1 For R&D - 85-1912 1 For R&D -
85-1504 1 For R&D - 85-1913 1 For R&D -
85-1505 1 For R&D - 85-1914 1 For R&D -
85-1511 1 For R&D - 85-1915 1 For R&D -
85-1512 1 For R&D - 85-1A01 1 For R&D -
85-1513 1 For R&D - 85-1A02 1 For R&D -
85-1514 1 For R&D - 85-1A03 1 For R&D -
85-1515 1 For R&D - 85-1A04 1 For R&D -
85-1601 1 For R&D - 85-1A05 1 For R&D -
85-1602 1 For R&D - 85-1A11 1 For R&D -
85-1603 1 For R&D - 85-1A12 1 For R&D -
85-1604 1 For R&D - 85-1A13 1 For R&D -
85-1605 1 For R&D - 85-1A14 1 For R&D -
85-1611 1 For R&D - 85-1A15 1 For R&D -
85-1612 1 For R&D - 85-1B01 1 For R&D -
85-1613 1 For R&D - 85-1B02 1 For R&D -
85-1614 1 For R&D - 85-1B03 1 For R&D -
85-1615 1 For R&D - 85-1B04 1 For R&D -
85-1701 1 For R&D - 85-1B05 1 For R&D -
85-1702 1 For R&D - 85-1B11 1 For R&D -
85-1703 1 For R&D - 85-1B12 1 For R&D -
85-1704 1 For R&D - 85-1B13 1 For R&D -
85-1705 1 For R&D - 85-1B14 1 For R&D -
85-1711 1 For R&D - 85-1B15 1 For R&D -
85-1712 1 For R&D - 85-1C01 1 For R&D -
85-1713 1 For R&D - 85-1C02 1 For R&D -
85-1714 1 For R&D - 85-1C03 1 For R&D -
85-1715 1 For R&D - 85-1C04 1 For R&D -
85-1801 1 For R&D - 85-1C05 1 For R&D -
85-1802 1 For R&D - 85-1C11 1 For R&D -
85-1803 1 For R&D - 85-1C12 1 For R&D -
85-1804 1 For R&D - 85-1C13 1 For R&D -
85-1805 1 For R&D - 85-1C14 1 For R&D -
85-1811 1 For R&D - 85-1C15 1 For R&D -
85-1812 1 For R&D - 85-1D01 1 For R&D -
85-1813 1 For R&D - 85-1D02 1 For R&D -
85-1814 1 For R&D - 85-1D03 1 For R&D -
85-1815 1 For R&D - 85-1D04 1 For R&D -
85-1901 1 For R&D - 85-1D05 1 For R&D -
85-1902 1 For R&D - 85-1D11 1 For R&D -
85-1903 1 For R&D - 85-1D12 1 For R&D -
85-1904 1 For R&D - 85-1D13 1 For R&D -
85-1905 1 For R&D - 85-1D14 1 For R&D -
85-1911 1 For R&D - 85-1D15 1 For R&D -

7-160
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-161
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-1E01 1 For R&D - 85-2205 1 For R&D -
85-1E02 1 For R&D - 85-2211 1 For R&D -
85-1E03 1 For R&D - 85-2212 1 For R&D -
85-1E04 1 For R&D - 85-2213 1 For R&D -
85-1E05 1 For R&D - 85-2214 1 For R&D -
85-1E11 1 For R&D - 85-2215 1 For R&D -
85-1E12 1 For R&D - 85-2301 1 For R&D -
85-1E13 1 For R&D - 85-2302 1 For R&D -
85-1E14 1 For R&D - 85-2303 1 For R&D -
85-1E15 1 For R&D - 85-2304 1 For R&D -
85-1F01 1 For R&D - 85-2305 1 For R&D -
85-1F02 1 For R&D - 85-2311 1 For R&D -
85-1F03 1 For R&D - 85-2312 1 For R&D -
85-1F04 1 For R&D - 85-2313 1 For R&D -
85-1F05 1 For R&D - 85-2314 1 For R&D -
85-1F11 1 For R&D - 85-2315 1 For R&D -
85-1F12 1 For R&D - 85-2401 1 For R&D -
85-1F13 1 For R&D - 85-2402 1 For R&D -
85-1F14 1 For R&D - 85-2403 1 For R&D -
85-1F15 1 For R&D - 85-2404 1 For R&D -
85-2001 1 For R&D - 85-2405 1 For R&D -
85-2002 1 For R&D - 85-2411 1 For R&D -
85-2003 1 For R&D - 85-2412 1 For R&D -
85-2004 1 For R&D - 85-2413 1 For R&D -
85-2005 1 For R&D - 85-2414 1 For R&D -
85-2011 1 For R&D - 85-2415 1 For R&D -
85-2012 1 For R&D - 85-2501 1 For R&D -
85-2013 1 For R&D - 85-2502 1 For R&D -
85-2014 1 For R&D - 85-2503 1 For R&D -
85-2015 1 For R&D - 85-2504 1 For R&D -
85-2101 1 For R&D - 85-2505 1 For R&D -
85-2102 1 For R&D - 85-2511 1 For R&D -
85-2103 1 For R&D - 85-2512 1 For R&D -
85-2104 1 For R&D - 85-2513 1 For R&D -
85-2105 1 For R&D - 85-2514 1 For R&D -
85-2111 1 For R&D - 85-2515 1 For R&D -
85-2112 1 For R&D - 85-2601 1 For R&D -
85-2113 1 For R&D - 85-2602 1 For R&D -
85-2114 1 For R&D - 85-2603 1 For R&D -
85-2115 1 For R&D - 85-2604 1 For R&D -
85-2201 1 For R&D - 85-2605 1 For R&D -
85-2202 1 For R&D - 85-2611 1 For R&D -
85-2203 1 For R&D - 85-2612 1 For R&D -
85-2204 1 For R&D - 85-2613 1 For R&D -

7-161
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-162
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-2614 1 For R&D - 85-2B03 1 For R&D -
85-2615 1 For R&D - 85-2B04 1 For R&D -
85-2701 1 For R&D - 85-2B05 1 For R&D -
85-2702 1 For R&D - 85-2B11 1 For R&D -
85-2703 1 For R&D - 85-2B12 1 For R&D -
85-2704 1 For R&D - 85-2B13 1 For R&D -
85-2705 1 For R&D - 85-2B14 1 For R&D -
85-2711 1 For R&D - 85-2B15 1 For R&D -
85-2712 1 For R&D - 85-2C01 1 For R&D -
85-2713 1 For R&D - 85-2C02 1 For R&D -
85-2714 1 For R&D - 85-2C03 1 For R&D -
85-2715 1 For R&D - 85-2C04 1 For R&D -
85-2801 1 For R&D - 85-2C05 1 For R&D -
85-2802 1 For R&D - 85-2C11 1 For R&D -
85-2803 1 For R&D - 85-2C12 1 For R&D -
85-2804 1 For R&D - 85-2C13 1 For R&D -
85-2805 1 For R&D - 85-2C14 1 For R&D -
85-2811 1 For R&D - 85-2C15 1 For R&D -
85-2812 1 For R&D - 85-2D01 1 For R&D -
85-2813 1 For R&D - 85-2D02 1 For R&D -
85-2814 1 For R&D - 85-2D03 1 For R&D -
85-2815 1 For R&D - 85-2D04 1 For R&D -
85-2901 1 For R&D - 85-2D05 1 For R&D -
85-2902 1 For R&D - 85-2D11 1 For R&D -
85-2903 1 For R&D - 85-2D12 1 For R&D -
85-2904 1 For R&D - 85-2D13 1 For R&D -
85-2905 1 For R&D - 85-2D14 1 For R&D -
85-2911 1 For R&D - 85-2D15 1 For R&D -
85-2912 1 For R&D - 85-2E01 1 For R&D -
85-2913 1 For R&D - 85-2E02 1 For R&D -
85-2914 1 For R&D - 85-2E03 1 For R&D -
85-2915 1 For R&D - 85-2E04 1 For R&D -
85-2A01 1 For R&D - 85-2E05 1 For R&D -
85-2A02 1 For R&D - 85-2E11 1 For R&D -
85-2A03 1 For R&D - 85-2E12 1 For R&D -
85-2A04 1 For R&D - 85-2E13 1 For R&D -
85-2A05 1 For R&D - 85-2E14 1 For R&D -
85-2A11 1 For R&D - 85-2E15 1 For R&D -
85-2A12 1 For R&D - 85-2F01 1 For R&D -
85-2A13 1 For R&D - 85-2F02 1 For R&D -
85-2A14 1 For R&D - 85-2F03 1 For R&D -
85-2A15 1 For R&D - 85-2F04 1 For R&D -
85-2B01 1 For R&D - 85-2F05 1 For R&D -
85-2B02 1 For R&D - 85-2F11 1 For R&D -

7-162
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-163
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-2F12 1 For R&D - 85-3401 1 For R&D -
85-2F13 1 For R&D - 85-3402 1 For R&D -
85-2F14 1 For R&D - 85-3403 1 For R&D -
85-2F15 1 For R&D - 85-3404 1 For R&D -
85-3001 1 For R&D - 85-3405 1 For R&D -
85-3002 1 For R&D - 85-3411 1 For R&D -
85-3003 1 For R&D - 85-3412 1 For R&D -
85-3004 1 For R&D - 85-3413 1 For R&D -
85-3005 1 For R&D - 85-3414 1 For R&D -
85-3011 1 For R&D - 85-3415 1 For R&D -
85-3012 1 For R&D - 85-3501 1 For R&D -
85-3013 1 For R&D - 85-3502 1 For R&D -
85-3014 1 For R&D - 85-3503 1 For R&D -
85-3015 1 For R&D - 85-3504 1 For R&D -
85-3101 1 For R&D - 85-3505 1 For R&D -
85-3102 1 For R&D - 85-3511 1 For R&D -
85-3103 1 For R&D - 85-3512 1 For R&D -
85-3104 1 For R&D - 85-3513 1 For R&D -
85-3105 1 For R&D - 85-3514 1 For R&D -
85-3111 1 For R&D - 85-3515 1 For R&D -
85-3112 1 For R&D - 85-3601 1 For R&D -
85-3113 1 For R&D - 85-3602 1 For R&D -
85-3114 1 For R&D - 85-3603 1 For R&D -
85-3115 1 For R&D - 85-3604 1 For R&D -
85-3201 1 For R&D - 85-3605 1 For R&D -
85-3202 1 For R&D - 85-3611 1 For R&D -
85-3203 1 For R&D - 85-3612 1 For R&D -
85-3204 1 For R&D - 85-3613 1 For R&D -
85-3205 1 For R&D - 85-3614 1 For R&D -
85-3211 1 For R&D - 85-3615 1 For R&D -
85-3212 1 For R&D - 85-3701 1 For R&D -
85-3213 1 For R&D - 85-3702 1 For R&D -
85-3214 1 For R&D - 85-3703 1 For R&D -
85-3215 1 For R&D - 85-3704 1 For R&D -
85-3301 1 For R&D - 85-3705 1 For R&D -
85-3302 1 For R&D - 85-3711 1 For R&D -
85-3303 1 For R&D - 85-3712 1 For R&D -
85-3304 1 For R&D - 85-3713 1 For R&D -
85-3305 1 For R&D - 85-3714 1 For R&D -
85-3311 1 For R&D - 85-3715 1 For R&D -
85-3312 1 For R&D - 85-3801 1 For R&D -
85-3313 1 For R&D - 85-3802 1 For R&D -
85-3314 1 For R&D - 85-3803 1 For R&D -
85-3315 1 For R&D - 85-3804 1 For R&D -

7-163
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-164
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-3805 1 For R&D - 85-3C14 1 For R&D -
85-3811 1 For R&D - 85-3C15 1 For R&D -
85-3812 1 For R&D - 85-3D01 1 For R&D -
85-3813 1 For R&D - 85-3D02 1 For R&D -
85-3814 1 For R&D - 85-3D03 1 For R&D -
85-3815 1 For R&D - 85-3D04 1 For R&D -
85-3901 1 For R&D - 85-3D05 1 For R&D -
85-3902 1 For R&D - 85-3D11 1 For R&D -
85-3903 1 For R&D - 85-3D12 1 For R&D -
85-3904 1 For R&D - 85-3D13 1 For R&D -
85-3905 1 For R&D - 85-3D14 1 For R&D -
85-3911 1 For R&D - 85-3D15 1 For R&D -
85-3912 1 For R&D - 85-3E01 1 For R&D -
85-3913 1 For R&D - 85-3E02 1 For R&D -
85-3914 1 For R&D - 85-3E03 1 For R&D -
85-3915 1 For R&D - 85-3E04 1 For R&D -
85-3A01 1 For R&D - 85-3E05 1 For R&D -
85-3A02 1 For R&D - 85-3E11 1 For R&D -
85-3A03 1 For R&D - 85-3E12 1 For R&D -
85-3A04 1 For R&D - 85-3E13 1 For R&D -
85-3A05 1 For R&D - 85-3E14 1 For R&D -
85-3A11 1 For R&D - 85-3E15 1 For R&D -
85-3A12 1 For R&D - 85-3F01 1 For R&D -
85-3A13 1 For R&D - 85-3F02 1 For R&D -
85-3A14 1 For R&D - 85-3F03 1 For R&D -
85-3A15 1 For R&D - 85-3F04 1 For R&D -
85-3B01 1 For R&D - 85-3F05 1 For R&D -
85-3B02 1 For R&D - 85-3F11 1 For R&D -
85-3B03 1 For R&D - 85-3F12 1 For R&D -
85-3B04 1 For R&D - 85-3F13 1 For R&D -
85-3B05 1 For R&D - 85-3F14 1 For R&D -
85-3B11 1 For R&D - 85-3F15 1 For R&D -
85-3B12 1 For R&D - 85-4001 1 For R&D -
85-3B13 1 For R&D - 85-4002 1 For R&D -
85-3B14 1 For R&D - 85-4003 1 For R&D -
85-3B15 1 For R&D - 85-4004 1 For R&D -
85-3C01 1 For R&D - 85-4005 1 For R&D -
85-3C02 1 For R&D - 85-4011 1 For R&D -
85-3C03 1 For R&D - 85-4012 1 For R&D -
85-3C04 1 For R&D - 85-4013 1 For R&D -
85-3C05 1 For R&D - 85-4014 1 For R&D -
85-3C11 1 For R&D - 85-4015 1 For R&D -
85-3C12 1 For R&D - 85-4101 1 For R&D -
85-3C13 1 For R&D - 85-4102 1 For R&D -

7-164
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-165
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-4103 1 For R&D - 85-4512 1 For R&D -
85-4104 1 For R&D - 85-4513 1 For R&D -
85-4105 1 For R&D - 85-4514 1 For R&D -
85-4111 1 For R&D - 85-4515 1 For R&D -
85-4112 1 For R&D - 85-4601 1 For R&D -
85-4113 1 For R&D - 85-4602 1 For R&D -
85-4114 1 For R&D - 85-4603 1 For R&D -
85-4115 1 For R&D - 85-4604 1 For R&D -
85-4201 1 For R&D - 85-4605 1 For R&D -
85-4202 1 For R&D - 85-4611 1 For R&D -
85-4203 1 For R&D - 85-4612 1 For R&D -
85-4204 1 For R&D - 85-4613 1 For R&D -
85-4205 1 For R&D - 85-4614 1 For R&D -
85-4211 1 For R&D - 85-4615 1 For R&D -
85-4212 1 For R&D - 85-4701 1 For R&D -
85-4213 1 For R&D - 85-4702 1 For R&D -
85-4214 1 For R&D - 85-4703 1 For R&D -
85-4215 1 For R&D - 85-4704 1 For R&D -
85-4301 1 For R&D - 85-4705 1 For R&D -
85-4302 1 For R&D - 85-4711 1 For R&D -
85-4303 1 For R&D - 85-4712 1 For R&D -
85-4304 1 For R&D - 85-4713 1 For R&D -
85-4305 1 For R&D - 85-4714 1 For R&D -
85-4311 1 For R&D - 85-4715 1 For R&D -
85-4312 1 For R&D - 85-4801 1 For R&D -
85-4313 1 For R&D - 85-4802 1 For R&D -
85-4314 1 For R&D - 85-4803 1 For R&D -
85-4315 1 For R&D - 85-4804 1 For R&D -
85-4401 1 For R&D - 85-4805 1 For R&D -
85-4402 1 For R&D - 85-4811 1 For R&D -
85-4403 1 For R&D - 85-4812 1 For R&D -
85-4404 1 For R&D - 85-4813 1 For R&D -
85-4405 1 For R&D - 85-4814 1 For R&D -
85-4411 1 For R&D - 85-4815 1 For R&D -
85-4412 1 For R&D - 85-4901 1 For R&D -
85-4413 1 For R&D - 85-4902 1 For R&D -
85-4414 1 For R&D - 85-4903 1 For R&D -
85-4415 1 For R&D - 85-4904 1 For R&D -
85-4501 1 For R&D - 85-4905 1 For R&D -
85-4502 1 For R&D - 85-4911 1 For R&D -
85-4503 1 For R&D - 85-4912 1 For R&D -
85-4504 1 For R&D - 85-4913 1 For R&D -
85-4505 1 For R&D - 85-4914 1 For R&D -
85-4511 1 For R&D - 85-4915 1 For R&D -

7-165
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-166
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-4A01 1 For R&D - 85-4E05 1 For R&D -
85-4A02 1 For R&D - 85-4E11 1 For R&D -
85-4A03 1 For R&D - 85-4E12 1 For R&D -
85-4A04 1 For R&D - 85-4E13 1 For R&D -
85-4A05 1 For R&D - 85-4E14 1 For R&D -
85-4A11 1 For R&D - 85-4E15 1 For R&D -
85-4A12 1 For R&D - 85-4F01 1 For R&D -
85-4A13 1 For R&D - 85-4F02 1 For R&D -
85-4A14 1 For R&D - 85-4F03 1 For R&D -
85-4A15 1 For R&D - 85-4F04 1 For R&D -
85-4B01 1 For R&D - 85-4F05 1 For R&D -
85-4B02 1 For R&D - 85-4F11 1 For R&D -
85-4B03 1 For R&D - 85-4F12 1 For R&D -
85-4B04 1 For R&D - 85-4F13 1 For R&D -
85-4B05 1 For R&D - 85-4F14 1 For R&D -
85-4B11 1 For R&D - 85-4F15 1 For R&D -
85-4B12 1 For R&D - 85-5001 1 For R&D -
85-4B13 1 For R&D - 85-5002 1 For R&D -
85-4B14 1 For R&D - 85-5003 1 For R&D -
85-4B15 1 For R&D - 85-5004 1 For R&D -
85-4C01 1 For R&D - 85-5005 1 For R&D -
85-4C02 1 For R&D - 85-5011 1 For R&D -
85-4C03 1 For R&D - 85-5012 1 For R&D -
85-4C04 1 For R&D - 85-5013 1 For R&D -
85-4C05 1 For R&D - 85-5014 1 For R&D -
85-4C11 1 For R&D - 85-5015 1 For R&D -
85-4C12 1 For R&D - 85-5101 1 For R&D -
85-4C13 1 For R&D - 85-5102 1 For R&D -
85-4C14 1 For R&D - 85-5103 1 For R&D -
85-4C15 1 For R&D - 85-5104 1 For R&D -
85-4D01 1 For R&D - 85-5105 1 For R&D -
85-4D02 1 For R&D - 85-5111 1 For R&D -
85-4D03 1 For R&D - 85-5112 1 For R&D -
85-4D04 1 For R&D - 85-5113 1 For R&D -
85-4D05 1 For R&D - 85-5114 1 For R&D -
85-4D11 1 For R&D - 85-5115 1 For R&D -
85-4D12 1 For R&D - 85-5201 1 For R&D -
85-4D13 1 For R&D - 85-5202 1 For R&D -
85-4D14 1 For R&D - 85-5203 1 For R&D -
85-4D15 1 For R&D - 85-5204 1 For R&D -
85-4E01 1 For R&D - 85-5205 1 For R&D -
85-4E02 1 For R&D - 85-5211 1 For R&D -
85-4E03 1 For R&D - 85-5212 1 For R&D -
85-4E04 1 For R&D - 85-5213 1 For R&D -

7-166
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-167
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-5214 1 For R&D - 85-5703 1 For R&D -
85-5215 1 For R&D - 85-5704 1 For R&D -
85-5301 1 For R&D - 85-5705 1 For R&D -
85-5302 1 For R&D - 85-5711 1 For R&D -
85-5303 1 For R&D - 85-5712 1 For R&D -
85-5304 1 For R&D - 85-5713 1 For R&D -
85-5305 1 For R&D - 85-5714 1 For R&D -
85-5311 1 For R&D - 85-5715 1 For R&D -
85-5312 1 For R&D - 85-5801 1 For R&D -
85-5313 1 For R&D - 85-5802 1 For R&D -
85-5314 1 For R&D - 85-5803 1 For R&D -
85-5315 1 For R&D - 85-5804 1 For R&D -
85-5401 1 For R&D - 85-5805 1 For R&D -
85-5402 1 For R&D - 85-5811 1 For R&D -
85-5403 1 For R&D - 85-5812 1 For R&D -
85-5404 1 For R&D - 85-5813 1 For R&D -
85-5405 1 For R&D - 85-5814 1 For R&D -
85-5411 1 For R&D - 85-5815 1 For R&D -
85-5412 1 For R&D - 85-5901 1 For R&D -
85-5413 1 For R&D - 85-5902 1 For R&D -
85-5414 1 For R&D - 85-5903 1 For R&D -
85-5415 1 For R&D - 85-5904 1 For R&D -
85-5501 1 For R&D - 85-5905 1 For R&D -
85-5502 1 For R&D - 85-5911 1 For R&D -
85-5503 1 For R&D - 85-5912 1 For R&D -
85-5504 1 For R&D - 85-5913 1 For R&D -
85-5505 1 For R&D - 85-5914 1 For R&D -
85-5511 1 For R&D - 85-5915 1 For R&D -
85-5512 1 For R&D - 85-5A01 1 For R&D -
85-5513 1 For R&D - 85-5A02 1 For R&D -
85-5514 1 For R&D - 85-5A03 1 For R&D -
85-5515 1 For R&D - 85-5A04 1 For R&D -
85-5601 1 For R&D - 85-5A05 1 For R&D -
85-5602 1 For R&D - 85-5A11 1 For R&D -
85-5603 1 For R&D - 85-5A12 1 For R&D -
85-5604 1 For R&D - 85-5A13 1 For R&D -
85-5605 1 For R&D - 85-5A14 1 For R&D -
85-5611 1 For R&D - 85-5A15 1 For R&D -
85-5612 1 For R&D - 85-5B01 1 For R&D -
85-5613 1 For R&D - 85-5B02 1 For R&D -
85-5614 1 For R&D - 85-5B03 1 For R&D -
85-5615 1 For R&D - 85-5B04 1 For R&D -
85-5701 1 For R&D - 85-5B05 1 For R&D -
85-5702 1 For R&D - 85-5B11 1 For R&D -

7-167
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-168
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-5B12 1 For R&D - 85-6001 1 For R&D -
85-5B13 1 For R&D - 85-6002 1 For R&D -
85-5B14 1 For R&D - 85-6003 1 For R&D -
85-5B15 1 For R&D - 85-6004 1 For R&D -
85-5C01 1 For R&D - 85-6005 1 For R&D -
85-5C02 1 For R&D - 85-6011 1 For R&D -
85-5C03 1 For R&D - 85-6012 1 For R&D -
85-5C04 1 For R&D - 85-6013 1 For R&D -
85-5C05 1 For R&D - 85-6014 1 For R&D -
85-5C11 1 For R&D - 85-6015 1 For R&D -
85-5C12 1 For R&D - 85-6101 1 For R&D -
85-5C13 1 For R&D - 85-6102 1 For R&D -
85-5C14 1 For R&D - 85-6103 1 For R&D -
85-5C15 1 For R&D - 85-6104 1 For R&D -
85-5D01 1 For R&D - 85-6105 1 For R&D -
85-5D02 1 For R&D - 85-6111 1 For R&D -
85-5D03 1 For R&D - 85-6112 1 For R&D -
85-5D04 1 For R&D - 85-6113 1 For R&D -
85-5D05 1 For R&D - 85-6114 1 For R&D -
85-5D11 1 For R&D - 85-6115 1 For R&D -
85-5D12 1 For R&D - 85-6201 1 For R&D -
85-5D13 1 For R&D - 85-6202 1 For R&D -
85-5D14 1 For R&D - 85-6203 1 For R&D -
85-5D15 1 For R&D - 85-6204 1 For R&D -
85-5E01 1 For R&D - 85-6205 1 For R&D -
85-5E02 1 For R&D - 85-6211 1 For R&D -
85-5E03 1 For R&D - 85-6212 1 For R&D -
85-5E04 1 For R&D - 85-6213 1 For R&D -
85-5E05 1 For R&D - 85-6214 1 For R&D -
85-5E11 1 For R&D - 85-6215 1 For R&D -
85-5E12 1 For R&D - 85-6301 1 For R&D -
85-5E13 1 For R&D - 85-6302 1 For R&D -
85-5E14 1 For R&D - 85-6303 1 For R&D -
85-5E15 1 For R&D - 85-6304 1 For R&D -
85-5F01 1 For R&D - 85-6305 1 For R&D -
85-5F02 1 For R&D - 85-6311 1 For R&D -
85-5F03 1 For R&D - 85-6312 1 For R&D -
85-5F04 1 For R&D - 85-6313 1 For R&D -
85-5F05 1 For R&D - 85-6314 1 For R&D -
85-5F11 1 For R&D - 85-6315 1 For R&D -
85-5F12 1 For R&D - 85-6401 1 For R&D -
85-5F13 1 For R&D - 85-6402 1 For R&D -
85-5F14 1 For R&D - 85-6403 1 For R&D -
85-5F15 1 For R&D - 85-6404 1 For R&D -

7-168
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-169
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-6405 1 For R&D - 85-6814 1 For R&D -
85-6411 1 For R&D - 85-6815 1 For R&D -
85-6412 1 For R&D - 85-6901 1 For R&D -
85-6413 1 For R&D - 85-6902 1 For R&D -
85-6414 1 For R&D - 85-6903 1 For R&D -
85-6415 1 For R&D - 85-6904 1 For R&D -
85-6501 1 For R&D - 85-6905 1 For R&D -
85-6502 1 For R&D - 85-6911 1 For R&D -
85-6503 1 For R&D - 85-6912 1 For R&D -
85-6504 1 For R&D - 85-6913 1 For R&D -
85-6505 1 For R&D - 85-6914 1 For R&D -
85-6511 1 For R&D - 85-6915 1 For R&D -
85-6512 1 For R&D - 85-6A01 1 For R&D -
85-6513 1 For R&D - 85-6A02 1 For R&D -
85-6514 1 For R&D - 85-6A03 1 For R&D -
85-6515 1 For R&D - 85-6A04 1 For R&D -
85-6601 1 For R&D - 85-6A05 1 For R&D -
85-6602 1 For R&D - 85-6A11 1 For R&D -
85-6603 1 For R&D - 85-6A12 1 For R&D -
85-6604 1 For R&D - 85-6A13 1 For R&D -
85-6605 1 For R&D - 85-6A14 1 For R&D -
85-6611 1 For R&D - 85-6A15 1 For R&D -
85-6612 1 For R&D - 85-6B01 1 For R&D -
85-6613 1 For R&D - 85-6B02 1 For R&D -
85-6614 1 For R&D - 85-6B03 1 For R&D -
85-6615 1 For R&D - 85-6B04 1 For R&D -
85-6701 1 For R&D - 85-6B05 1 For R&D -
85-6702 1 For R&D - 85-6B11 1 For R&D -
85-6703 1 For R&D - 85-6B12 1 For R&D -
85-6704 1 For R&D - 85-6B13 1 For R&D -
85-6705 1 For R&D - 85-6B14 1 For R&D -
85-6711 1 For R&D - 85-6B15 1 For R&D -
85-6712 1 For R&D - 85-6C01 1 For R&D -
85-6713 1 For R&D - 85-6C02 1 For R&D -
85-6714 1 For R&D - 85-6C03 1 For R&D -
85-6715 1 For R&D - 85-6C04 1 For R&D -
85-6801 1 For R&D - 85-6C05 1 For R&D -
85-6802 1 For R&D - 85-6C11 1 For R&D -
85-6803 1 For R&D - 85-6C12 1 For R&D -
85-6804 1 For R&D - 85-6C13 1 For R&D -
85-6805 1 For R&D - 85-6C14 1 For R&D -
85-6811 1 For R&D - 85-6C15 1 For R&D -
85-6812 1 For R&D - 85-6D01 1 For R&D -
85-6813 1 For R&D - 85-6D02 1 For R&D -

7-169
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-170
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-6D03 1 For R&D - 85-7112 1 For R&D -
85-6D04 1 For R&D - 85-7113 1 For R&D -
85-6D05 1 For R&D - 85-7114 1 For R&D -
85-6D11 1 For R&D - 85-7115 1 For R&D -
85-6D12 1 For R&D - 85-7201 1 For R&D -
85-6D13 1 For R&D - 85-7202 1 For R&D -
85-6D14 1 For R&D - 85-7203 1 For R&D -
85-6D15 1 For R&D - 85-7204 1 For R&D -
85-6E01 1 For R&D - 85-7205 1 For R&D -
85-6E02 1 For R&D - 85-7211 1 For R&D -
85-6E03 1 For R&D - 85-7212 1 For R&D -
85-6E04 1 For R&D - 85-7213 1 For R&D -
85-6E05 1 For R&D - 85-7214 1 For R&D -
85-6E11 1 For R&D - 85-7215 1 For R&D -
85-6E12 1 For R&D - 85-7301 1 For R&D -
85-6E13 1 For R&D - 85-7302 1 For R&D -
85-6E14 1 For R&D - 85-7303 1 For R&D -
85-6E15 1 For R&D - 85-7304 1 For R&D -
85-6F01 1 For R&D - 85-7305 1 For R&D -
85-6F02 1 For R&D - 85-7311 1 For R&D -
85-6F03 1 For R&D - 85-7312 1 For R&D -
85-6F04 1 For R&D - 85-7313 1 For R&D -
85-6F05 1 For R&D - 85-7314 1 For R&D -
85-6F11 1 For R&D - 85-7315 1 For R&D -
85-6F12 1 For R&D - 85-7401 1 For R&D -
85-6F13 1 For R&D - 85-7402 1 For R&D -
85-6F14 1 For R&D - 85-7403 1 For R&D -
85-6F15 1 For R&D - 85-7404 1 For R&D -
85-7001 1 For R&D - 85-7405 1 For R&D -
85-7002 1 For R&D - 85-7411 1 For R&D -
85-7003 1 For R&D - 85-7412 1 For R&D -
85-7004 1 For R&D - 85-7413 1 For R&D -
85-7005 1 For R&D - 85-7414 1 For R&D -
85-7011 1 For R&D - 85-7415 1 For R&D -
85-7012 1 For R&D - 85-7501 1 For R&D -
85-7013 1 For R&D - 85-7502 1 For R&D -
85-7014 1 For R&D - 85-7503 1 For R&D -
85-7015 1 For R&D - 85-7504 1 For R&D -
85-7101 1 For R&D - 85-7505 1 For R&D -
85-7102 1 For R&D - 85-7511 1 For R&D -
85-7103 1 For R&D - 85-7512 1 For R&D -
85-7104 1 For R&D - 85-7513 1 For R&D -
85-7105 1 For R&D - 85-7514 1 For R&D -
85-7111 1 For R&D - 85-7515 1 For R&D -

7-170
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-171
Alarm Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code Code
85-7601 1 For R&D - 85-7A05 1 For R&D -
85-7602 1 For R&D - 85-7A11 1 For R&D -
85-7603 1 For R&D - 85-7A12 1 For R&D -
85-7604 1 For R&D - 85-7A13 1 For R&D -
85-7605 1 For R&D - 85-7A14 1 For R&D -
85-7611 1 For R&D - 85-7A15 1 For R&D -
85-7612 1 For R&D - 85-7B01 1 For R&D -
85-7613 1 For R&D - 85-7B02 1 For R&D -
85-7614 1 For R&D - 85-7B03 1 For R&D -
85-7615 1 For R&D - 85-7B04 1 For R&D -
85-7701 1 For R&D - 85-7B05 1 For R&D -
85-7702 1 For R&D - 85-7B11 1 For R&D -
85-7703 1 For R&D - 85-7B12 1 For R&D -
85-7704 1 For R&D - 85-7B13 1 For R&D -
85-7705 1 For R&D - 85-7B14 1 For R&D -
85-7711 1 For R&D - 85-7B15 1 For R&D -
85-7712 1 For R&D - 85-7C01 1 For R&D -
85-7713 1 For R&D - 85-7C02 1 For R&D -
85-7714 1 For R&D - 85-7C03 1 For R&D -
85-7715 1 For R&D - 85-7C04 1 For R&D -
85-7801 1 For R&D - 85-7C05 1 For R&D -
85-7802 1 For R&D - 85-7C11 1 For R&D -
85-7803 1 For R&D - 85-7C12 1 For R&D -
85-7804 1 For R&D - 85-7C13 1 For R&D -
85-7805 1 For R&D - 85-7C14 1 For R&D -
85-7811 1 For R&D - 85-7C15 1 For R&D -
85-7812 1 For R&D - 85-7D01 1 For R&D -
85-7813 1 For R&D - 85-7D02 1 For R&D -
85-7814 1 For R&D - 85-7D03 1 For R&D -
85-7815 1 For R&D - 85-7D04 1 For R&D -
85-7901 1 For R&D - 85-7D05 1 For R&D -
85-7902 1 For R&D - 85-7D11 1 For R&D -
85-7903 1 For R&D - 85-7D12 1 For R&D -
85-7904 1 For R&D - 85-7D13 1 For R&D -
85-7905 1 For R&D - 85-7D14 1 For R&D -
85-7911 1 For R&D - 85-7D15 1 For R&D -
85-7912 1 For R&D - 85-7E01 1 For R&D -
85-7913 1 For R&D - 85-7E02 1 For R&D -
85-7914 1 For R&D - 85-7E03 1 For R&D -
85-7915 1 For R&D - 85-7E04 1 For R&D -
85-7A01 1 For R&D - 85-7E05 1 For R&D -
85-7A02 1 For R&D - 85-7E11 1 For R&D -
85-7A03 1 For R&D - 85-7E12 1 For R&D -
85-7A04 1 For R&D - 85-7E13 1 For R&D -

7-171
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
 7 Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
7-172
Alarm
Level Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
Code
85-7E14 1 For R&D -
85-7E15 1 For R&D -
85-7F01 1 For R&D -
85-7F02 1 For R&D -
85-7F03 1 For R&D -
85-7F04 1 For R&D -
85-7F05 1 For R&D -
85-7F11 1 For R&D -
85-7F12 1 For R&D -
85-7F13 1 For R&D -
85-7F14 1 For R&D -
85-7F15 1 For R&D -
T-7-31

7-172
7
Error Code > Alarm Code > Alarm Code Details
8 Service Mode
■
■Overview
■
■COPIER
■
■FEEDER
■
■SORTER
■
■BOARD

8
Service Mode
 8 Service Mode > Overview > Service Mode Menu
8-2

Overview Service Mode Menu

Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself. TOP Screen
The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.

Entering Service Mode

Contact the sales company for the method to enter service mode.

Points to note when using Service Mode

• When setting or executing in Service Mode, do not open or close the cover and turn off the F-8-1
power while "active" is displayed. This may cause Service Mode to set incorrectly or fail to "MODELIST" A brand new additional mode in the host machine.
execute. A function that can be used as a reference on
how to use each item in Service Mode is installed.
• In service mode, it may list "Do not use this at the normal service." in "Points to Note when
The new function, which will be described later, is
Using". The followings indicate when this item should be used. available in MODELIST Mode.
• The case when a setting value needs to be input on clearing RAM when replacing the "MODELIST CLASSIC" This mode is same as the old machine. The new
PCB (Clearly indicated in the use case) function, which will be described later, is not
available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode.
• The case when instructed by the service office (due to reasons as having the large
negative effects, difficult settings, etc.) If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " is pressed, the screen will switch to initial screen for
each mode.
• The case of performing the individual measure (due to the tender business, etc.)

Do not use in cases that are not mentioned above.

8-2
8
Service Mode > Overview > Service Mode Menu
 8 Service Mode > Overview > I/O information enhancement
8-3
Service mode item explanations I/O information enhancement
Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor,
displayed. motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.
Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information And the screen will also display the input output signal.
button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item. Device classification

E.g., COPIER > DISPLAY > Version window

1) Press the button.

Electrical parts
classification Which button to press, will depend on which
electrical parts intended and its device
classification. For instance, if the host
machine uses paper pass detection sensor,
1) Press [i] then press the button on the "COPIER" and
"P-Sensor" position.

4) A detailed explanation on the

item will be displayed (usage
scenarios, instructions,
settings range, etc.).
2) Minor item titles
2) Then the selected electrical
are displayed.
parts classification's mark,
name, port number and 0/1
content will appear.

3) If the "i" button is pressed,

the screen displaying the
electrical parts array will appear.

3) Select the desired

minor item and
press [i]
F-8-2
• The service mode contents can be displayed in J/E/F/I/G/S languages.
• Service mode contents, like system software, can be upgraded by SST.

F-8-3

8-3
8
Service Mode > Overview > I/O information enhancement
 8 Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in
occurrence record screen. related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.
In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to
ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR 15 categories.

Classification Name Description

Function switching FNC-SW Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/
DA connection, count-up spec., document size
detection, dirt detection level
Display switching/ display timing DSPLY-SW UI (User Interface) display related
Image related (fixing) IMG-FIX Fixing related
Image related (transfer) IMG-TR Primary transfer, secondary transfer, ITB
Image related (developing) IMG-DEV Developer related
Image related (laser/ latent image) IMG-LSR Laser, latent image related
Image related (reader/ ADF) IMG-RDR Reader, ADF image related
Image related (controller, other IMG-MCON MN-CON image related, and image related items
general items) other than those referred to above.
Image quality/ copy speed IMG-SPD Power down sequence
Cleaning CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit, drum, transfer roller,
F-8-4
ITB, etc.
ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR Environment settings ENV-SET Temperature, humidity, environmental heater,
condensation, log acquisition
Paper feed (pickup, delivery) FEED-SW Stack performance, motor speed adjustment,
delivery functions, etc.
Noise reduction SOUND Noise related
Network NETWORK Network settings, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS, etc.
Customization CUSTOM Customization
T-8-1

F-8-5

8-4
8
Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
 8 Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
8-5
Security features 1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System
Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button.
To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled.

■■Related service modes

• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level1)
Set password type for transition to service mode. System
Manager
<Setting range> ID
0: No password (default) System
Password
1: Service engineer
2: System administrator and Service engineer.

• COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD (Level2)

Password for service engineer for transition to service mode.
F-8-6
<Setting range>
2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option >
To reinforce the security, change the password from a default. FNC-SW > SM-PSWD), press OK button.

******** (eight digit numeral) [default: 11111111]

After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.

SM-PSWD

F-8-7

NOTE :
If Service Engineer’s password is forgotten, password function is cancelable by using
Service Support Tool (SST).

8-5
8
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
 8 Service Mode > Overview > Language switch
8-6
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2) Language switch
Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by
When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1> in the right upper side of the screen, and performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode
it will switch to level 2. The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in
HDD.
Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST.
Additional Functions > Common Settings > Language Switch

Settings/Registration
<Language/Keybord Switch>

Language
English
Japanese
French 1/1
German
Italian
Dutch
Keyboard Layout
English(USA)Layout Set

Cancel OK

F-8-9

NOTE :
If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed,
English explanatory text will be displayed.
If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory
text can't be displayed.

F-8-8

8-6
8
Service Mode > Overview > Language switch
 8 Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
8-7
Back-up of service mode
In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written
in the service label.
When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment
values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments and
changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed values in
the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in
a blank field.

Service Label

F-8-10

8-7
8
Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
 8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
8-8

COPIER OP-CON
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
Display of Option Controller PCB ROM ver
Lv.1 Details To display the ROM ver of Option Controller PCB.
DISPLAY Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
■■VERSION MN-CONT Display of MNCON firmware version
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Use case When upgrading the firmware
DC-CON Display of DCON firmware version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB. RUI Display of remote UI version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of remote UI.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
R-CON Display of RCON firmware version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB. PUNCH Display of Puncher Unit version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of Puncher Unit.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
PANEL Dspl Control Panel CPU PCB ROM version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB. LANG-EN Display of English language file version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of English language file.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
ECO Display of ECO-ID PCB ROM version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB. LANG-FR Display of French language file version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of French language file.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
FEEDER Display of DADF Driver PCB ROM version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of DADF Driver PCB. LANG-DE Display of German language file version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of German language file.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
SORTER Display of FIN-CONT firmware version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB. LANG-IT Display of Italian language file version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of Italian language file.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
NIB Display of network software version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the version of the network software. LANG-JP Display of Japanese language file ver
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.1 Details To display the version of Japanese language file.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
PS/PCL Display of PS/PCL function version Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details Display of PS/PCL function version LANG-CS Display of Czech language file version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.2 Details To display the version of Czech language file.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
SDL-STCH Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
Lv.1 Details To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB. LANG-DA Display of Danish language file version
Use case When upgrading the firmware Lv.2 Details To display the version of Danish language file.
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99

8-8
8
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
 8 Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
8-9
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
LANG-EL Display of Greek language file version LANG-SL Display of Slovenian language file ver
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Greek language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovenian language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-ES Display of Spanish language file version LANG-SV Display of Swedish language file version
Lv.1 Details To display the version of Spanish language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Swedish language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-ET Display of Estonian language file ver LANG-TW Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-FI Display of Finnish language file version LANG-ZH Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-HU Display of Hungarian language file ver ECO-ID Display of ECO-ID code
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Hungarian language file. Lv.2 Details To display the ECO-ID code.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range ASCII character string (12 digits)
LANG-KO Display of Korean language file version GDI-UFR Display of UFR function version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Korean language file. Lv.1 Details To display the version of UFR function.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-NL Display of Dutch language file version LANG-BU Display of Bulgarian language file ver
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-NO Display of Norwegian language file ver LANG-CR Display of Croatian language file ver
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Norwegian language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-PL Display of Polish language file version LANG-RM Display of Romanian language file ver
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Polish language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Romanian language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-PT Display of Portuguese language file ver LANG-SK Display of Slovak language file version
Lv.2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file. Lv.2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file.
Use case When upgrading the firmware Use case When upgrading the firmware
Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range 00.01 to 99.99
LANG-RU Display of Russian language file version